Professional Documents
Culture Documents
13A - Corporate Reporting Workbook 2021 ICAEW Advance Level
13A - Corporate Reporting Workbook 2021 ICAEW Advance Level
Corporate Reporting
Workbook
For exams in 2021
icaew.com
Corporate Reporting
The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales
ISBN: 978-1-5097-3460-3
eISBN: 978-1-5097-3470-2
Previous ISBN: 978-1-5097-8187-4
First edition 2014
Eighth edition 2020
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, graphic, electronic or
mechanical including photocopying, recording, scanning or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher.
The content of this publication is intended to prepare students for the ICAEW
examinations, and should not be used as professional advice.
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence
v3.0
Originally printed in the United Kingdom on paper obtained from traceable,
sustainable sources.
The publishers are grateful to the IASB for permission to reproduce extracts from
the International Financial Reporting Standards including all International
Accounting Standards, SIC and IFRIC Interpretations (the Standards). The
Standards together with their accompanying documents are issued by:
The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)
30 Cannon Street, London, EC4M 6XH, United Kingdom.
Email: info@ifrs.org Web: www.ifrs.org
Disclaimer: The IASB, the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Foundation, the authors and the publishers do not accept responsibility for any
loss caused by acting or refraining from acting in reliance on the material in this
publication, whether such loss is caused by negligence or otherwise to the
maximum extent permitted by law.
Copyright © IFRS Foundation
All rights reserved. Reproduction and use rights are strictly limited. No part of this
publication may be translated, reprinted or reproduced or utilised in any form
either in whole or in part or by any electronic, mechanical or other means, now
known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and recording, or in any
information storage and retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from
the IFRS Foundation. Contact the IFRS Foundation for further details.
The IFRS Foundation logo, the IASB logo, the IFRS for SMEs logo, the ‘Hexagon
Device’, ‘IFRS Foundation’, ‘eIFRS’, ‘IAS’, ‘IASB’, ‘IFRS for SMEs’, ‘IASs’, ‘IFRS’, ‘IFRSs’,
‘International Accounting Standards’ and ‘International Financial Reporting
Standards’, ‘IFRIC’, ‘SIC’ and ‘IFRS Taxonomy’ are Trade Marks of the IFRS
Foundation.
Further details of the Trade Marks including details of countries where the Trade
Marks are registered or applied for are available from the Licensor on request.
© ICAEW 2020
Contents
Welcome to ICAEW iv
Corporate Reporting v
Permitted texts vi
Key resources vii
Skills within the ACA ix
1 Introduction 1
2 Principles of corporate reporting 45
3 Ethics 101
4 Corporate governance 151
5 The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 199
6 The statutory audit: audit evidence 269
7 The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 353
8 The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 391
9 Reporting financial performance 455
10 Reporting revenue 519
11 Earnings per share 567
12 Reporting of assets 611
13 Reporting of non-financial liabilities 671
14 Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 697
15 Financial instruments: presentation and disclosure 757
16 Financial instruments: recognition and measurement 785
17 Financial instruments: hedge accounting 855
18 Employee benefits 925
19 Share-based payment 979
20 Groups: types of investment and business combination 1045
21 Foreign currency translation and hyperinflation 1173
22 Income taxes 1243
23 Financial statement analysis 1 1313
24 Financial statement analysis 2 1383
25 Assurance and related services 1457
26 Environmental and social considerations 1511
27 Internal auditing 1549
Questions within the Workbook should be treated as preparation questions, providing you with a
firm foundation before you attempt the exam-standard questions. The exam-standard questions are
found in the Question Bank. This is not applicable to the Advanced Level Supplements and Case
Study. Case Study learning materials contain case studies from previous examinations.
Module aim
To enable students to apply technical knowledge, analytical techniques and professional skills to
resolve compliance and business issues that arise in the context of the preparation and evaluation of
corporate reports and from providing audit services.
Students will be required to use technical knowledge and professional judgement to identify, explain
and evaluate alternatives and to determine the appropriate solutions to compliance issues, giving
due consideration to the needs of clients and other stakeholders. The commercial context and
impact of recommendations and ethical issues will also need to be considered in making such
judgements.
On completion of this module, students will be able to:
• formulate, implement and evaluate corporate reporting policies for single entities and groups of
varying sizes and in a variety of industries. They will be able to discern and formulate the
appropriate financial reporting treatment for complex transactions and complex scenarios.
Students will be able to evaluate and apply technical knowledge from individual accounting
standards and apply professional skills to integrate knowledge where several accounting
standards are simultaneously applicable and interact.
• analyse, interpret, evaluate and compare financial statements of entities both over time and
across a range of industries.
• explain the processes involved in planning an audit, evaluate internal controls, appraise risk
including analysing quantitative and qualitative data, gather evidence including using data
analytics to draw conclusions in accordance with the terms of the engagement. In addition, they
will be able to perform a range of assurance engagements and related tasks.
• evaluate corporate reporting policies, estimates and disclosures in a scenario in order to be able
to assess whether they are in compliance with accounting standards and are appropriate in the
context of audit objectives.
• identify and explain ethical issues. Where ethical dilemmas arise, students will be able to
recommend and justify and determine appropriate actions and ethical safeguards to mitigate
threats.
Method of assessment
The Corporate Reporting module exam is 3.5 hours long. Each exam will contain questions requiring
integration of knowledge and skills, including ethics. The exam will consist of three questions. Ethical
issues and problems could appear in any of the three questions.
Specification grid
This grid shows the relative weightings of subjects within this module and should guide the relative
study time spent on each. Over time the marks available in the assessment will equate to the
weightings below, while slight variations may occur in individual assessments to enable suitably
rigorous questions to be set.
Weighting (%)
Ethics 5 - 10
Tax Compliance
Financial Management x
Exam support
A variety of exam resources and support have been developed on each exam to help you on your
journey to exam success. This includes exam guidance, sample exams, hints and tips from examiners
and tutors, on-demand webinars and articles.
Errata sheets
These documents will correct any omissions within the learning materials once they have been
published. You should refer to them when studying.
Exam software
It is vital that you are familiar with the exam software before you take your exam. Access a variety of
resources, including the practice software and sample exams at icaew.com/studentresources.
Tuition
The ICAEW Partner in Learning scheme recognises tuition providers who comply with our core
principles of quality course delivery. If you are not receiving structured tuition and are interested in
doing so, take a look at ICAEW recognised Partner in Learning tuition providers in your area at
icaew.com/dashboard.
Structuring problems and Structure information from various sources into suitable formats for
solutions analysis and provide creative and pragmatic solutions in a business
environment.
Applying judgement Apply professional scepticism and critical thinking to identify faults,
gaps, inconsistencies and interactions from a range of relevant
information sources and relate issues to a business environment.
The level of skill required to pass each exam increases as ACA trainees progress upwards through
each Level of the ACA qualification. The skills progression embedded throughout the ACA
qualification ensures ACA trainees develop the knowledge and skills can successfully operate in the
modern workplace and which are expected by today’s forward-thinking employers.
The following provides further detail on the professional skills that you will develop in this particular
module. To see the full skills development grids, please go to icaew.com/examresources.
Assimilating and using information
Understand the situation and the requirements
• Demonstrate understanding of the business context
• Identify and understand the requirements
• Recognise new and complex ideas within a scenario
• Identify the needs of customers and clients
• Explain different stakeholder perspectives and interests
• Identify risks within a scenario
• Identify elements of uncertainty within a scenario
• Identify ethical issues including public interest and sustainability issues within a scenario
Identify and use relevant information
• Interpret information provided in various formats
• Evaluate the relevance of information provided
• Use multiple information sources
• Filter information provided to identify critical facts
Identify and prioritise key issues and stay on task
• Identify business and financial issues from a scenario
• Prioritise key issues
• Work effectively within time constraints
• Operate to a brief in a given scenario
Introduction
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Using this Workbook
2 The importance of corporate reporting
3 The role and context of modern auditing
4 Legal responsibilities of directors and auditors
5 International standards on auditing
6 Audit quality control
7 Laws and regulations
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Comment on and critically appraise the nature and validity of financial and non-financial
information included in published financial statements including how these correlate with an
understanding of the entity
• Appraise and explain the role and context of auditing
• Prepare appropriate audit documentation
• Explain the nature and purpose of quality assurance (both at the level of the firm and the
individual audit) and assess how it can contribute to risk management
1
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• This section gives a brief outline of how this Workbook is structured and why.
• The key point is that the Corporate Reporting exam is integrated, so financial reporting and
auditing must be studied together.
Although there will be a reasonably consistent structure to your exam, it is still important that you can
identify the parts that relate to auditing and those that relate to corporate reporting. Start
considering how you will address these two disciplines in the same question.
• Corporate reporting embraces financial reporting, and both are different from management
accounting.
• Financial statements are used to make economic decisions by a wide range of users.
• All users require information regarding:
– financial position
– financial performance
– changes in financial position
2.2 Entity
Most accounting requirements are written with a view to use by any type of accounting entity,
including companies and other forms of organisation, such as a partnership. In this Workbook, the
term ‘company’ is often used, because the main focus of the syllabus is on the accounts of
companies and groups of companies, but IFRS generally refer to entities.
Tutorial note
These learning materials assume the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS.
If you studied under UK GAAP for the Financial Accounting and Reporting exam, you should first
study the ICAEW Corporate Reporting: IFRS Supplement, which supports the transition from UK
GAAP to IFRS.
Unincorporated entities are exempt from the above requirements but may need to follow other
regulation eg, charities must comply with the Charities Act. Incorporated charities must prepare their
financial statements in accordance with the CA 2006 (ie, the IFRS option is not open to them).
In the exam, as in real life, you will come across a situation where the directors have applied their
own judgement about a financial reporting treatment in a way that may be influenced by self-interest,
for example showing a higher profit in order to receive a higher bonus. You will need to challenge
this judgement by applying your own judgement and knowledge. Questions may not always have
one definitive answer. Make sure you are able to consider the best outcome for the situation as it is
presented.
Definition
True: The information in the financial statements is not false and conforms to reality.
In practical terms this means that the information is presented in accordance with accounting
standards and law. The financial statements have been correctly extracted from the underlying
records and those records reflect the actual transactions which took place.
Definition
Fair: The financial statements reflect the commercial substance of the company’s underlying
transactions and the information is free from bias.
You will have come across examples of the application of substance over form in your financial
reporting studies.
The problem with making judgements such as these is that they can be called into question,
particularly where others have the benefit of hindsight. The major defence that the auditor has in this
situation is to show that the work was performed with due skill and care and that the judgements
made about truth and fairness were reasonable based on the evidence available at the time. We will
look at quality control in section 6 of this chapter.
Note: ISA (UK) 200 requires that the audit should be planned and performed with an attitude of
professional scepticism. Professional scepticism is covered in detail in Chapter 5.
What stage are you at within the audit process? Remember what you have been told in the scenario
(and therefore, by definition, what you still do not know).
• The Companies Act 2006 contains many responsibilities for both directors and auditors.
• Directors must consider their role carefully, being mindful of the impact that their actions could
have on many other stakeholders.
• As well as the financial statements and trading issues, there are also strict rules governing the way
that directors interact financially with the company.
• Auditors need to form an independent opinion on the truth and fairness of the financial
statements, as well as consider their preparation including any other information that the
Companies Act requires.
4.3.2 Definitions
The following definitions are relevant to your understanding of this issue.
Definitions
Persons connected with a director: These include:
• directors’ spouses, minor (including step) children
• a company with which a director is associated (ie, controls > 20% voting power)
• trustee of a trust whose beneficiaries include the director or connected person
• partner of the director or connected person
Loan: A sum of money lent for a time to be returned in money or money’s worth.
4.3.4 Disclosure
For all loans etc, to directors, disclose:
• its amount
• an indication of the interest rate
• principal terms
• any amounts repaid
• The FRC is responsible for UK auditing standards, known as ISA (UK). It is expected to be replaced
by a new regulator known as the ARGA.
• The International Auditing and Assurance Standards Board (IAASB) issues ISAs.
• The FRC regularly revises ethical guidance and auditing standards in response to current
developments (such as the implementation of the EU Audit Regulation and Directive plus
associated changes to IAASB standards in 2016 and the IESBA Code of Ethics in 2018).
Audit
There should be a new definition of the purpose of an audit: to provide confidence in a company,
its officers and its financial statements
Audit should be a separate profession, not seen as part of the accounting profession
The term ‘true and fair’ should no longer be used as it ignores the reliance on estimates and the
use of materiality: the term ‘present fairly in all material respects’ should now only be used
There should be greater continuity between successive reports and greater emphasis given to
estimates, other information and any external negative signals
Directors
A Public Interest Statement should report how companies serve the public interest
Stakeholders
Anti-fraud measures
A directors’ statement on the work they have done to prevent and detect fraud
Assurance on this statement by the auditors, including a review of relevant internal controls
Auditor Fraud Panel to consider whether enough has been done to combat fraud
Other steps
Attestation by CEO and CFO on internal controls for financial reporting (similar to the US SOX
legislation)
Greater transparency by auditors on fees, profitability of engagements, time spent and the
circumstances leading to no longer being employed as auditor
More responsible use of liability limitation agreements (LLAs) when considering auditor liability
and directors’ responsibilities
Reinforcement of the Kingman recommendations on ARGA (such as defining ‘high quality audit’, a
‘Plain English’ guide to auditing available online, publicising good audits as well as criticism of bad
ones and more formal mechanisms for shareholders and stakeholders to raise concerns.
(Source: Brydon, D. (2019) Assess, assure and inform: Improving audit quality and effectiveness.
[Online] Available at:
https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/
852960/brydon-review-final-report.pdf [Accessed 6 July 2020])
At the time of writing, the UK Government is still considering how best to respond to the findings of
the CMA, Kingman and Brydon reviews: given the impact of both Brexit and the COVID-19 pandemic
on the UK and beyond, this remains an area of uncertainty for both preparers and users of financial
statements although it seems certain that the FRC and any successor will face radical change.
Definition
Public interest entity:
• An issuer whose transferable securities are admitted to trading on a regulated market (ie, all UK-
listed companies except those on the AIM and ISDX growth markets)
• A credit institution (in the UK, a bank or building society)
• An insurance undertaking
Following recent developments in ethical standards (see Chapter 3) the term other entity of public
interest (OEPI) has emerged. While still subject to interpretation, the term essentially refers to entities
which do not meet the definition of a public interest entity but which are still considered to have
public interest aspects (such as a pension fund).
Political Economic
• The rise of populist, nationalist politics and a • A global realignment following the financial
push against the status quo (eg, the Trump crash of 2008, which has stifled growth,
administration in the US) eroded confidence and encouraged trade
• Greater calls for independence and self- wars
determination (eg, Brexit in the UK) • Stagnation on global efforts to close the gap
between rich and poor leading to social
unrest
Social Technological
• The increasing impact of climate change and • A shift towards a more digital age, with the
the need to respond effectively regardless of associated disruption to traditional
the costs industries (including accountancy)
• Shifting demographics (eg, the rise of the • The adoption of new technologies (eg, big
#MeToo movement) highlighting the data, blockchain and artificial intelligence)
importance of diversity and the opportunities they create
You may be asked to discuss the ongoing developments in both corporate reporting and auditing.
You should ensure you have not only studied these developments but that you can also
communicate your thoughts in an effective and efficient manner.
The auditor is responsible for obtaining sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance
with laws and regulations that have a direct effect on the financial statements
7.1 Revision
The responsibilities of the auditor for laws and regulations are covered in ISA (UK) 250A (Revised
November 2019), Consideration of Laws and Regulations in an Audit of Financial Statements. You
have covered the principles contained in this standard in your earlier studies. A summary of the key
points is included below.
The objectives of the auditor are:
(a) To obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with the provisions of
those laws and regulations generally recognised to have a direct effect on the determination of
material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements;
(b) To perform specified audit procedures to help identify instances of non-compliance with other
laws and regulations that may have a material effect on the financial statements; and
(c) To respond appropriately to non-compliance or suspected non-compliance with laws and
regulations identified during the audit.
(ISA (UK) 250A.11)
An audit cannot detect non-compliance with all laws and regulations.
2. Can you remember the various phases of an audit and explain what each one is for?
4. Can you discuss current issues that affect both corporate reporting and auditing right
now?
5. Can you describe and explain the various quality control mechanisms that should be
present in an audit firm?
6. Do you know how to report various instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations
and to whom this reporting should be directed?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
LaFa plc This is useful practice for you in two ways: firstly, it is testing your
knowledge of the subject matter on quality control which you need to
understand, and secondly, it is presented in the form of a scenario which
you will need to apply your knowledge to. Don’t forget the auditing
standards open book.
Bee5 You can test your understanding of the audit approach by applying what
you have learned to this short scenario. What changes might cause you
concern?
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Vacance plc Sometimes the question contains so much information it is difficult to know
where to start. Use this question to practise interrogating the exhibits for
matters that relate to the audit quality on show.
Newpenny Exhibit 1 asks for a change to the audit approach. Do you think this is a
good idea?
Jupiter Consider the issue of non-compliance with laws and regulations from
Exhibit 3 – what are the potential implications of this for the audit?
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
Doherty, R. (10 April 2019) Brydon lays out scope of audit review. Economia. [Online]. Available from:
https://economia.icaew.com/news/april-2019/brydon-lays-out-scope-of-audit-review [Accessed 11
July 2019].
FRC (2018) Audit culture thematic review: Firms’ activities to establish, promote and embed a culture
that is committed to delivering consistently high quality audits. [Online]. Available from:
www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/2f8d6070-e41b-4576-9905-4aeb7df8dd7e/Audit-Culture-Thematic-
Review.pdf [Accessed 4 July 2019].
IAASB (2019) The IAASB’s Exposure Drafts for Quality Management at the Firm and Engagement
Level, Including Engagement Quality Reviews. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/IAASB-Covering-Explanatory-Memorandum.pdf
[Accessed 6 July 2020]
Kingman, J. (2018) Independent Review of the Financial Reporting Council. London, The Stationery
Office.
3 ISA 200
• Purpose of an audit – ISA 200.3
• General principles of an audit – ISA 200.14–.24
4 ISQC 1
• Objective – ISQC 1.11
• Elements of a system of quality control – ISQC 1.16–.16-2
• Importance of documenting procedures – ISQC 1.17
• Leadership – ISQC 1.18–.19
5 ISA 230
• Purposes of audit documentation. – ISA 230.2–.3
• Should enable an experienced auditor to understand the procedures performed, the results and
evidence obtained and significant matters identified. – ISA 230.8–.8-1
• Auditors must document discussions of significant matters with management. – ISA 230.10
• Inconsistencies regarding significant matters must be documented. – ISA 230.11
• Departures from relevant requirements in ISAs must be documented. – ISA 230.12
• The identity of the preparer and reviewer must be documented. – ISA 230.9
6 ISA 250
• Categories of laws and regulations – ISA 250A.6
• Objectives – ISA 250A.11 & ISA 250B.8
• Auditor’s responsibilities – ISA 250A.13–.14
• Reporting – ISA 250A.23
2 LaFa plc
The WTR audit firm has 15 partners and 61 audit staff. The firm has offices in three cities in one
country and provides a range of audit, assurance, tax and advisory services. Clients range from sole
traders requiring assistance with financial statement production to a number of small plcs – although
none is a quoted company.
LaFa plc is one of WTR’s largest clients. Due to the retirement of the engagement partner from ill
health last year, LaFa has been appointed a new engagement partner. WTR provides audit services
as well as preparation of taxation computations and some advisory work on the maintenance of
complicated costing and inventory management systems. The audit and other services engagement
this year was agreed on the same fee as the previous year, although additional work is required on
the audit of some development expenditure which had not been included in LaFa’s financial
statements before. Information on the development expenditure will be made available a few days
before audit completion ‘due to difficulties with cost identification’ as stated by the Finance Director
of LaFa. LaFa’s management were insistent that WTR could continue to provide a similar level of
service for the same fee.
Part way through the audit of WTR, Mr W, WTR’s quality control partner, resigned to take up a
position as Finance Director in SoTee plc, LaFa’s parent company. SoTee is audited by a different firm
of auditors. Mr W has not yet been replaced, as the managing board of WTR has yet to identify a
suitable candidate. Part of the outstanding work left by Mr W was the implementation of a system of
ethical compliance for all assurance staff whereby they would confirm in writing adherence to the
ICAEW Code of Ethics and confirm lack of any ethical conflict arising from the code.
Requirement
Identify and explain the risks which will affect the quality control of the audit of LaFa. Suggest how
the risks identified can be reduced.
3 Bee5
You are the audit manager in charge of the audit of Bee5, a construction company. The client is
considered to be low risk; control systems are generally good and your assurance firm, Sheridan &
Co, has normally assisted in the production of the financial statements providing some additional
assurance of the accuracy and completeness of the statements.
During the initial planning meeting with the client you learn that a new Finance Director has been
appointed and that Bee5 will produce the financial statements this year; the services of your firm’s
accounts department will therefore not be required. However, Bee5 has requested significant
assurance work relating to a revision of its internal control systems. The current accounting software
has become less reliable (increased processing time per transaction and some minor data loss due
to inadequate field sizes). The client will replace this software with the new Leve system in the next
financial year but requires advice on amending its control systems ready for this upgrade.
Requirement
Discuss the impact on the audit approach for Bee5 from the above information. Make specific
reference to any quality control issues that will affect the audit.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Information Reasons
(1) Administration
Title
(2) Planning
Summary of different models of TVs and Blu- Enables auditor to familiarise himself with
ray players held and the approximate value different types of inventory lines
of each
Time and place of count Audit team will not miss the count
Copy of client’s inventory count instructions Enables an initial assessment of the likely
and an assessment of them reliability of Viewco’s count
Assists in determining the amount of
procedures audit team need to do
Enables compliance work to be carried out;
that is, checking Viewco staff follow the
instructions
Details of any known old or slow moving Special attention can be given to these at
lines count; for example, include in test counts
Scope of test counts to be performed that is, Ensures appropriate amount of procedures
number/value of items to be counted and performed based on initial assessment
method of selection. For Viewco probably Clear plan for audit team
more counting of higher value finished
goods
(4) Details of procedures performed Provides evidence for future reference and
documents adherence to auditing standards
(a) Details of controls testing procedures Enables reporting partner to review the
performed – observing Viewco’s counters adequacy of the procedures and establish
and ensuring they are following the whether it meets the stated objective
instructions and conducting the count
effectively, for example:
• Note of whether the area was
systematically tidied
• Note of whether or how counted
goods are marked
Note whether counters are in teams of two Evidence of independent checks may
and whether any check counts are enhance reliability
performed
From physical inventory to client’s count Evidence to support the accuracy and
sheet completeness of Viewco’s count sheets
Details of review for any old/obsolete Details can be followed up at final audit and
inventory, for example dusty/damaged the net realisable value investigated
boxes. Note code, description, number of
units and problem
Copies of client’s inventory count sheets Enables follow up at final audit to ensure that
(where number makes this practical) Viewco’s final sheets are intact and no
alterations have occurred
2 LaFa plc
Culture of WTR
The quality control auditing standard, ISQC (UK) 1, requires that the firm implements policies such
that the internal culture of the firm is one where quality is considered essential. Such a culture must
be inspired by the leaders of the firm, who must sell this culture in their actions and messages. In
other words, the entire business strategy of the audit firm should be driven by the need for quality in
its operations.
In the WTR audit firm, there appears to be a lack of leadership on quality control. Two issues give rise
for concern:
(1) First, the partner in quality control resigned during the audit of LaFa plc and has not been
replaced. This means that there is no one person in charge of maintaining quality control
standards in the audit firm. There is the risk that deficiencies of quality control will go
undetected.
(2) Second, WTR is under fee pressure from LaFa plc to complete the audit and provide other
services for the same fee as last year, even though the scope of the audit has increased. There is
the risk that audit procedures will not be fully carried out to ensure that the tight budget is met.
Lack of a comprehensive quality control review (the quality control partner resigning as noted
above) increases the risk of poor quality work.
The quality control partner should be replaced as soon as possible, while the fee situation with LaFa
should be monitored – any potential cost overrun must be discussed with the client and where
necessary additional fees agreed.
Ethical requirements
Policies and procedures should be designed to provide the firm with reasonable assurance that the
firm and its personnel comply with relevant ethical requirements.
3 Bee5
Client acceptance
In previous years Bee5 has required a standard audit from your assurance firm. However, this year
there is a request for additional assurance regarding the internal control systems. This work will not
only raise the amount of income generated from the client but will also require the use of specialist
staff to perform the work.
Before accepting the engagement for this year Sheridan & Co must ensure the following:
(1) That income from Bee5 is not approaching 15% of the firm’s total income. If income is
approaching this level then additional independence checks may be required, such as an
independent internal quality control review.
Principles of corporate
reporting
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 The regulatory framework
2 The IASB Conceptual Framework
3 Other reporting frameworks
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement
5 IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and
Errors
6 Current issues in corporate reporting
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Explain the impact of accounting principles and bases of measurement in corporate reporting, for
example fair value measurement
• Appraise corporate reporting regulations, and related legal requirements, with respect to
presentation, disclosure, recognition and measurement
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to the impact of changes in accounting
policies and estimates
• Explain and evaluate the impact of underlying assumptions on financial statements
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Formulate and evaluate accounting and reporting policies for single entities and groups of
varying sizes and in a variety of industries
• Explain how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities can affect
reported financial position and explain the role of data analytics in financial asset and liability
valuation
• Identify and explain corporate reporting and assurance issues in respect of social responsibility,
sustainability and environmental matters for a range of stakeholders
• Critically evaluate accounting policies choices and estimates, identifying issues of earnings
manipulation and creative accounting
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(a)–(e), 2(c), 3(a), 18(a) and (b)
2
• Financial reporting is the provision of financial information to those outside the entity.
• The organisation responsible for setting IFRS comprises the International Financial Reporting
Standards Foundation (IFRS Foundation), the Monitoring Board, the International Accounting
Standards Board (IASB), the IFRS Advisory Council (Advisory Council) and the IFRS Interpretations
Committee (Interpretations Committee).
• The process of setting IFRS is an open dialogue involving co-operation between national and
international standard setters.
1.2 Membership
Membership of the IFRS Foundation has been designed so that it represents an international group
of preparers and users, who become IFRS Foundation trustees. The selection process of the 22
trustees takes into account geographical factors and professional background. IFRS Foundation
trustees appoint the IASB members.
The Monitoring Board ensures that the trustees carry out their duties in accordance with the IFRS
Foundation Constitution.
When considering the appropriate financial reporting treatment, it is important to consider all the
information in order to determine which IFRS to apply. In the absence of an applicable IFRS, the
Conceptual Framework will assist.
Definition
Accrual accounting: The effects of transactions and other events and circumstances on a reporting
entity’s economic resources and claims are recognised in the periods in which they occur, even if the
resulting cash receipts and payments occur in a different period. (Conceptual Framework: para 1.17)
Financial statements prepared using accrual accounting (the accruals basis) show users’ past
transactions
Information about a reporting entity’s cash flows during a period also helps users assess the entity’s
ability to generate future net cash inflows and gives users a better understanding of its operations.
The Conceptual Framework also mentions several other, secondary, users that are interested in the
financial information (Conceptual Framework, Chapter 1: para. 1.9, 1.10).
This includes:
• Management
• Regulators
• Members of the public
While users may gain most of their information from the financial statements, it is important that they
obtain relevant information from other sources too.
Definition
Materiality: Information is material if omitting it, or misstating or obscuring it could influence
decisions that users make on the basis of financial information about a specific reporting entity. (IAS
1, para 7)
Definition
Going concern: Financial statements are normally prepared on the assumption that the reporting
entity is a going concern, and will continue in operation for the foreseeable future. Hence, it is
assumed that the entity has neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation not the need to
cease trading.
(Conceptual Framework: para. 3.9)
It is assumed that the entity has no intention to liquidate or curtail major operations. If it did, then the
financial statements would be prepared on a different (disclosed) basis for example, the ‘break up’
basis.
Definition
Reporting entity: An entity that is required, or chooses, to prepare financial statements. A reporting
entity can be a single entity or a portion of an entity or can comprise more than one entity. A
reporting entity is not necessarily a legal entity (para. 3.10).
Contributions from equity participants and distributions to them are shown in the statement of
changes in equity.
Asset A present economic resource controlled by Technically, the asset is the potential
the entity as a result of past events. An to produce economic benefits (eg,
economic resource is a right that has the cash generation), not the underlying
potential to produce economic benefits. item of property itself (eg, a machine).
Equity The residual amount found by deducting all Equity = ownership interest = net
the entity’s liabilities from all the entity’s assets. For a company, this usually
assets. comprises shareholders’ funds (ie,
capital and reserves).
Income Increases in assets, or decreases in liabilities, Income comprises revenue and gains,
that result in increases in equity, other than including all recognised gains on
those relating to contributions from equity non-revenue items (eg, revaluations
participants. of non-current assets).
Expenses Decreases in assets, or increases in liabilities, Expenses include losses, including all
that result in decreases in equity, other than recognised losses on non-revenue
those relating to distributions to equity items (such as write downs of non-
participants. current assets).
Note the way that the changes in economic benefits resulting from asset and liability increases and
decreases are used to define:
• Income
• Expenses
2.6.3 Assets
We can look in more detail at the components of the definitions given above.
Assets must give rise to future economic benefits, either alone or in conjunction with other items.
Definition
Potential to produce economic benefit: An economic resource is a right that has the potential to
produce economic benefits. (Conceptual Framework, para.4.14)
2.6.4 Liabilities
Again we look more closely at some aspects of the definition.
For a liability to exist, three criteria must all be satisfied (para. 4.27):
• The entity has an obligation
• The obligation is to transfer an economic resource
• The obligation is a present obligation that exists as a result of past events
Definition
Obligation: A duty or responsibility that the entity has no practical ability to avoid (para.4.29)
A present obligation exists as a result of past events if the entity has already obtained economic
benefits or taken an action, and as a consequence, the entity will or may have to transfer an
economic resource that it would not otherwise have had to transfer (para.4.43)
Question Answer
2.6.5 Equity
Equity is the residual of assets less liabilities, so the amount at which it is shown is dependent on the
measurement of assets and liabilities. It has nothing to do with the market value of the entity’s shares.
Equity may be sub-classified in the statement of financial position providing information which is
relevant to the decision-making needs of the users. This will indicate legal or other restrictions on the
ability of the entity to distribute or otherwise apply its equity.
In practical terms, the important distinction between liabilities and equity is that creditors have the
right to insist that the transfer of economic resources is made to them regardless of the entity’s
financial position, but owners do not. All decisions about payments to owners (such as dividends or
share capital buyback) are at the discretion of management.
2.6.6 Performance
Profit is used as a measure of performance, or as a basis for other measures (eg, earnings per share
(EPS)). It depends directly on the measurement of income and expenses, which in turn depend (in
part) on the concepts of capital and capital maintenance adopted.
Income and expenses can be presented in different ways in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income, to provide information relevant for economic decision-making. For example,
a statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income could distinguish between income
and expenses which relate to continuing operations and those which do not.
Items of income and expense can be distinguished from each other or combined with each other.
Definition
Gains: Increases in economic benefits. As such, they are no different in nature from revenue.
Gains include those arising on the disposal of non-current assets. The definition of income also
includes unrealised gains eg, on revaluation of non-current assets.
A revaluation gives rise to an increase or decrease in equity.
These increases and decreases appear in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income.
(Gains on revaluation, which are recognised in a revaluation surplus, are covered in Chapter 12.)
Expenses
As with income, the definition of expenses includes losses as well as those expenses that arise in the
course of ordinary activities of an entity.
Definition
Losses: Decreases in economic benefits. As such, they are no different in nature from other expenses.
Losses will include those arising on the disposal of non-current assets. The definition of expenses will
also include unrealised losses.
Definition
Recognition: The process of capturing for inclusion in the statement of financial position or
statement(s) of profit or loss and other comprehensive income an item that meets the definition of
one of the elements of financial statements – an asset, a liability, equity, income or expenses.
(Conceptual Framework: para. 5.1)
An asset or liability should be recognised if it will be both:
• Relevant; and
• Provide users of the financial statements with a faithful representation of the transactions of that
entity
The Conceptual Framework takes, therefore, these fundamental qualitative characteristics along with
the definitions of the elements of the financial statements as the key components of recognition.
Previously, recognition of elements would have been affected by the probability of whether the event
was going to happen and the reliability of the measurement. The IASB has revised this as they
believed this set too rigid a criterion as entities may not disclose relevant information which would
be necessary for the user of the financial statements because of the difficulty of estimating both the
likelihood and the amount of the element.
2.7.2 Derecognition
Definition
Derecognition: The removal of all or part of a recognised asset or liability from an entity’s statement
of financial position. Derecognition normally occurs when that item no longer meets the definition of
an asset or liability. (Conceptual Framework: para. 5.26)
The Conceptual Framework considers derecognition to be a factor when the following occurs:
(a) Loss of control of or all or part of the recognised asset; or
(b) The entity no longer has an obligation for a liability
This is covered in more detail in the following chapters covering the specific elements, such as
recognition and derecognition of financial instruments (Chapter 16 of this Workbook) and non-
current tangible assets (Chapter 12). The IASB has brought these concepts of recognition and
derecognition into the Conceptual Framework so that they can be revisited when issuing new
standards or revising existing ones.
Definition
Measurement: Elements recognised in the financial statements are quantified in monetary terms.
This requires the selection of a measurement basis. (Conceptual Framework: para. 6.1)
This involves the selection of a particular basis of measurement. A number of these are used to
different degrees and in varying combinations in financial statements. They include the following.
Definitions
Historical cost: The price paid for an asset or for the event which gave rise to the liability. The price
will not change.
Current value: The price paid for an asset or the liability value will be updated to reflect any changes
since it was acquired or incurred. There are three main bases recognised by the Conceptual
Framework that make up current value:
Fair value: Price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (IFRS 13, Appendix A)
Value in use: The present value of the cash flows, or other economic benefits, that an entity expects
to derive from the use of an asset and its ultimate disposal (Conceptual Framework, para.6.17).
Current cost: Current cost, like historical cost, is an entry value: it reflects prices in the market in
which the entity would acquire assets or incur the liability.
Judgement is particularly important in the context of disclosure. A balance has to be struck between
providing the necessary information for a full understanding and ‘information overload’, where the
important information gets buried.
Definition
Financial capital maintenance: Under a financial concept of capital maintenance, such as invested
money and invested purchasing power, capital is synonymous with the net assets or equity of the
entity.
Definition
Physical capital maintenance: Under a physical concept of capital, such as operating capability,
capital is regarded as the productive capacity of the entity based on, for example, units of output per
day.
This concept looks behind monetary values, to the underlying physical productive capacity of the
entity. It is based on the approach that an entity is nothing other than a means of producing saleable
outputs, so a profit is earned only after that productive capacity has been maintained by a ‘capital
maintenance’ adjustment. (Again, the capital maintenance adjustment is taken to equity and is
treated as an additional expense in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.)
Comparisons over 20 years should be more valid than under a monetary approach to capital
maintenance.
The difficulties in this approach lie in making the capital maintenance adjustment. It is basically a
current cost approach, normal practice being to use industry-specific indices of movements in non-
current assets, rather than to go to the expense of annual revaluations by professional valuers. The
difficulties lie in finding indices appropriate to the productive capacity of a particular entity.
• This Workbook (and your exam) focuses on IFRS, but there are other reporting frameworks you
need to know about, particularly those that relate to smaller entities.
• The IASB’s IFRS for small and medium-sized entities (SMEs) is designed to facilitate financial
reporting by small and medium-sized entities in a number of ways.
• FRS 102 is derived from the IFRS for Small and Medium-sized Entities. It is one of the recent
financial reporting standards replacing old UK GAAP. It can be used by UK unlisted groups and by
listed and unlisted individual entities.
3.1.3 International Financial Reporting Standard for Small and Medium-sized Entities
The IFRS for Small and Medium-Sized Entities (IFRS for SMEs) was published in 2009 and revised in
2015 and 2018. It is relatively short, and has simplifications that reflect the needs of users of SMEs’
financial statements and cost-benefit considerations.
It is designed to facilitate financial reporting by SMEs in a number of ways.
• It provides significantly less guidance than full IFRS.
• Many of the principles for recognising and measuring assets, liabilities, income and expenses in
full IFRS are simplified.
3.1.4 Scope
The IFRS is suitable for all entities except those whose securities are publicly traded and financial
institutions such as banks and insurance companies. It is the first set of international accounting
requirements developed specifically for SMEs. Although it has been prepared on a similar basis to
full IFRS, it is a standalone product and will be updated on its own timescale.
There are no quantitative thresholds for qualification as an SME; instead, the scope of the IFRS is
determined by a test of public accountability. As with full IFRS, it is up to legislative and regulatory
authorities and standard setters in individual jurisdictions to decide who is permitted or required to
use the IFRS for SMEs.
3.1.9 Examples of options in full IFRS not included in the IFRS for SMEs
• Revaluation model for intangible assets and property, plant and equipment
• Financial instrument options, including available-for-sale, held-to-maturity and fair value options
• Choice between cost and fair value models for investment property (measurement depends on
the circumstances)
• Options for government grants
3.2.2 UK GAAP
The current financial reporting framework came into effect in 2015 in the UK and Ireland. The UK’s
Financial Reporting Council (FRC) has published six standards.
• FRS 100, Application of Financial Reporting Requirements which sets out the overall reporting
framework. It does not contain accounting requirements in itself but rather provides direction as
to the relevant standard(s) for an entity (whether EU-adopted IFRSs, FRS 101, FRS 102 or FRS 105).
• FRS 101, Reduced Disclosure Framework which permits disclosure exemptions from the
requirements of EU-adopted IFRSs for certain qualifying entities.
• FRS 102, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland which
replaced all previous FRSs, SSAPs and UITF Abstracts. The FRS was revised in 2015 and 2018.
• FRS 103, Insurance Contracts which consolidates existing financial reporting requirements for
insurance contracts.
• FRS 104, Interim Financial Reporting which specifies the requirements (adapted from IAS 34) for
interim financial reports.
• FRS 105, The Financial Reporting Standard applicable to the Micro-entities Regime which
concerns the smallest entities.
The options available for preparing financial statements are summarised below, with a tick indicating
that that type of entity is permitted to follow the stated framework.
Type FRS 105 FRS 102 FRS 102 FRS 101 EU-
Section 1A (and FRS adopted
103) IFRS
The most important UK standard is FRS 102, which introduces a single standard framework on the
IFRS for SMEs (see above).
3.2.3 FRSSE
The Financial Reporting Standard for Smaller Entities (FRSSE) was withdrawn in 2016. Entities formerly
or currently applying the FRSSE will need to apply one of the regimes set out above.
3.2.6 FRS 102, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable in the UK and Republic of Ireland
FRS 102 introduces a single standard based on the IFRS for SMEs, replacing almost all extant FRSs,
SSAPs and UITF abstracts. Where an entity applies FRS 102 and also has insurance contracts, FRS 103
is also applicable.
FRS 102 was amended in 2015. The main changes are:
(a) A new Section 1ASmall Entities is included. This sets out the presentation and disclosure
requirements for a small entity that chooses to apply the small entities regime. However, these
entities must still apply the recognition and measurement requirements set out in the existing
sections of FRS 102.
(b) Qualifying entities may take advantage of certain disclosure exemptions from the standard.
(c) Where (rarely) an estimate of the useful economic life of goodwill and intangible assets cannot
be made, the maximum useful life allowed is increased from 5 to 10 years.
(d) Minimum requirements are set out for entities wishing to take advantage of the flexibility to
adapt statutory balance sheet and profit and loss formats set out in the new Accounting
Regulations.
(e) Where the entity has the choice of settling share-based payments in cash or shares, the default
accounting treatment has been reversed. Previously they were treated by default as cash-settled,
whereas now they will normally be accounted for as equity-settled.
(f) Reversal of any impairment of goodwill is now prohibited.
FRS 102 was revised again in March 2018. The changes related to:
• Basic financial instruments and hedging
• Pension obligations
• Small entities
• Fair value hierarchy disclosures
• Notification of shareholders
• Directors’ loans – optional interim relief for small entities
• Matters arising from the 2017 triennial review
While the changes have not yet taken effect and are not examinable, it is important to be aware that
regular revision to FRS 102 is to be expected, as IFRS changes, with consequent effects on the IFRS
for SMEs, and then FRS 102, which is based on the latter.
3.2.12 FRS 105, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable to the Micro-entities Regime
FRS 105, The Financial Reporting Standard Applicable to the Micro-entities Regime is a new
accounting standard applicable to the smallest entities. It was published in July 2015 and is effective
for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2016.
Key features of the standard are as follows:
• A single accounting standard for use by companies qualifying as micro-entities and choosing to
apply the micro-entities regime.
• Based on FRS 102 with significant simplifications to reflect the nature and size of micro-entities.
• Comprises 28 sections, each dealing with a specific area of accounting.
• Micro-entities must prepare a balance sheet and profit and loss account.
• Other primary statements are not required.
• Only limited disclosures needed.
• Accounts prepared in accordance with the regulations are presumed by law to give a true and fair
view.
• No deferred tax or equity-settled share-based payment amounts are recognised.
• Accounting choices set out in FRS 102 are removed. No capitalisation of borrowing costs or
development costs.
• All assets are measured based on historical cost, with no fair value measurement normally
allowed.
3.3.4 ISA (UK) 210 (Revised June 2016), Agreeing the Terms of Audit Engagements
The owner of a small company may not be aware of directors’ and auditors’ responsibilities,
particularly if the accounts preparation is outsourced. A primary purpose of the engagement letter is
to clarify these responsibilities. ISA 210.A21 states that it may be useful in this situation to remind
management that the preparation of the financial statements remains their responsibility.
3.3.5 ISA (UK) 220 (Revised June 2016), Quality Control for an Audit of Financial Statements
The audit of a smaller entity must still be compliant with ISAs. Most of these audits are conducted
using one audit partner, one manager and one audit senior so, although assignment and delegation
are taking place, it may be difficult to form an objective view on the judgements made in the audit.
The standard (ISA 220.A30) points out that firms must set their own criteria to identify which audits
require a quality review (in addition to audits of listed entities, where such reviews are mandatory). In
some cases, none of the firm’s audit engagements may meet the criteria that would subject them to
such a review.
3.3.8 ISA (UK) 300 (Revised June 2016), Planning an Audit of Financial Statements
Due to the lack of complexity, audit planning documentation may be scaled back for a small entity.
With a smaller team, co-ordination and communication are easier. A planning meeting or general
conversation may be sufficient, and notes made about future issues during last year’s audit will be
particularly useful.
Standard audit programmes or checklists may be used, provided that they are tailored to the
circumstances of the engagement, including the auditor’s risk assessments.
In the smallest audits, carried out entirely by the audit partner, questions of direction, supervision and
review do not arise. Forming an objective view on the appropriateness of judgements made in the
course of the audit can present problems in this case and, if particularly complex or unusual issues
are involved, it may be desirable to consult with other suitably experienced auditors or the auditor’s
professional body.(ISA300.A11, .A17 & .A21)
3.3.9 ISA (UK) 320 (Revised June 2016), Materiality in Planning and Performing an Audit
The standard highlights that in an owner-managed business the profit before tax for the year may be
consistently nominal, as the owner may take most of the profits as remuneration, so it may be more
appropriate to use profit before remuneration as the basis for estimating materiality. (ISA 320.A9)
Another practical issue is that at the planning stage it is often difficult to calculate materiality as a
percentage of key figures eg, of assets, revenue or profit, as the draft accounts may be unavailable
for a small business. Trial balance figures may have to be used instead.
The auditor will need to use judgement in applying materiality when evaluating results.
• IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement gives extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and
liabilities should be established.
• IFRS 13 aims to:
– define fair value
– set out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value
– require disclosures about fair value measurements
• IFRS 13 defines fair value as “the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer
a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date“.
• Fair value is a market-based measurement, not an entity-specific measurement. It focuses on
assets and liabilities and on exit (selling) prices. It also takes into account market conditions at the
measurement date.
• IFRS 13 states that valuation techniques must be those which are appropriate and for which
sufficient data are available. Entities should maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and
minimise the use of unobservable inputs.
4.1 Background
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement was published in 2011.The project arose as a result of the
Memorandum of Understanding between the IASB and FASB (2006) reaffirming their commitment to
the convergence of IFRS and US GAAP. With the publication of IFRS 13, IFRS and US GAAP now have
the same definition of fair value and the measurement and disclosure requirements are now aligned.
A standard on fair value measurement is particularly important in the context of a worldwide move
towards IFRS.
4.2 Objective
IFRS 13 aims to:
• define fair value
• set out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value
• require disclosures about fair value measurements
The previous definition used in IFRS was “the amount for which an asset could be exchanged, or a
liability settled, between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s length transaction”.
4.3 Scope
IFRS 13 applies when another IFRS requires or permits fair value measurements or disclosures. The
measurement and disclosure requirements do not apply in the case of:
(a) share-based payment transactions within the scope of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment;
(b) leasing transactions within the scope of IFRS 16, Leases; and
(c) net realisable value as in IAS 2, Inventories or value in use as in IAS 36, Impairment of Assets.
Disclosures are not required for:
(a) plan assets measured at fair value in accordance with IAS 19, Employee Benefits;
(b) plan investments measured at fair value in accordance with IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by
Retirement Benefit Plans; and
(c) assets for which the recoverable amount is fair value less disposal costs under IAS 36,
Impairment of Assets.
4.4 Measurement
Fair value is a market-based measurement, not an entity-specific measurement. It focuses on assets
and liabilities and on exit (selling) prices. It also takes into account market conditions at the
measurement date. In other words, it looks at the amount for which the holder of an asset could sell it
and the amount which the holder of a liability would have to pay to transfer it. It can also be used to
value an entity’s own equity instruments.
Because it is a market-based measurement, fair value is measured using the assumptions that market
participants would use when pricing the asset, taking into account any relevant characteristics of the
asset.
It is assumed that the transaction to sell the asset or transfer the liability takes place either:
(a) in the principal market for the asset or liability; or
(b) in the absence of a principal market, in the most advantageous market for the asset or liability.
The principal market is the market which is the most liquid (has the greatest volume and level of
activity) for that asset or liability. In most cases the principal market and the most advantageous
market will be the same.
IFRS 13 acknowledges that when market activity declines, an entity must use a valuation technique to
measure fair value. In this case the emphasis must be on whether a transaction price is based on an
orderly transaction, rather than a forced sale.
Fair value is not adjusted for transaction costs. Under IFRS 13, these are not a feature of the asset or
liability, but may be taken into account when determining the most advantageous market.
Fair value measurements are based on an asset or a liability’s unit of account, which is specified by
each IFRS where a fair value measurement is required. For most assets and liabilities, the unit of
account is the individual asset or liability, but in some instances may be a group of assets or
liabilities.
Market X Market Y
£ £
Price 58 57
Transaction costs (4) (3)
Transport costs (to transport the asset to that market) (4) (2)
50 52
Remember that fair value is not adjusted for transaction costs. Under IFRS 13, these are not a feature
of the asset or liability, but may be taken into account when determining the most advantageous
market.
If Market X is the principal market for the asset (ie, the market with the greatest volume and level of
activity for the asset), the fair value of the asset would be £54, measured as the price that would be
received in that market (£58) less transport costs (£4) and ignoring transaction costs.
If neither Market X nor Market Y is the principal market for the asset, Valor must measure the fair
value of the asset using the price in the most advantageous market. The most advantageous market
is the market that maximises the amount that would be received to sell the asset, after taking into
account both transaction costs and transport costs (ie, the net amount that would be received in the
respective markets).
The maximum net amount (after deducting both transaction and transport costs) is obtainable in
Market Y (£52, as opposed to £50). But this is not the fair value of the asset. The fair value of the asset
is obtained by deducting transport costs but not transaction costs from the price received for the
asset in Market Y: £57 less £2 = £55.
This hierarchy is a starting place for structuring the problem of fair value. If the input is level 1, there
should not be much of a problem.
Level 2 Licensing arrangement arising Royalty rate in the contract with the unrelated party
from a business combination at inception of the arrangement
Building held and used Price per square metre derived from observable
market data eg, prices in observed transactions
involving comparable buildings in similar locations
Level 3 Cash generating unit Financial forecast (eg, of cash flows or profit or loss)
developed using the entity’s own data
Three-year option on exchange- Historical volatility ie, the volatility for the shares
traded shares derived from the shares’ historical prices
4.8 Disclosure
An entity must disclose information that helps users of its financial statements assess both of the
following:
(a) For assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value on a recurring or non-recurring basis, the
valuation techniques and inputs used to develop those measurements
(b) For recurring fair value measurements using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3), the effect
of the measurements on profit or loss or other comprehensive income for the period. Disclosure
requirements will include:
– reconciliation from opening to closing balances
– quantitative information regarding the inputs used
– valuation processes used by the entity
– sensitivity to changes in inputs
Particularly with Level 3 inputs, it is important to explain why you came to the conclusion that you did.
The disclosures above help to do this.
5.4 Errors
(a) Prior period errors: correct retrospectively where material.
(b) This involves:
(1) either restating the comparative amounts for the prior period(s) in which the error occurred;
or
(2) when the error occurred before the earliest prior period presented, restating the opening
balances of assets, liabilities and equity for that period so that the financial statements are
presented as if the error had never occurred.
(c) Only where it is impracticable to determine the cumulative effect of an error on prior periods
can an entity correct an error prospectively.
Retained earnings at 1 January 20X6 were £13 million. The cost of goods sold for 20X7 includes the
£4.2 million error in opening inventory. The income tax rate was 30% for 20X6 and 20X7.
Requirement
Show the profit or loss section of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for
20X7, with the 20X6 comparative, and retained earnings.
Definition
Material: Information is material if omitting, misstating or obscuring it could reasonably be expected
to influence decisions that the primary users of general purpose financial statements make on the
basis of those financial statements, which provide financial information about a specific reporting
entity. In other words, materiality is an entity-specific aspect of relevance based on the nature or
magnitude, or both, of the items to which the information relates in the context of an individual
entity’s financial report.’ (IAS 1: para. 7)
This section covers several areas in which the IASB is developing new accounting standards. Recent
changes are ripe for examination if they are the subject of a full IFRS. While proposed changes (EDs,
Discussion Papers) will not be examined in detail, it is important to show an awareness of them.
Tutorial note
Current issues are covered in this Workbook within the chapters in which the topic appears, so
that the changes/proposed changes appear in context.
6.1 Leasing
The IASB issued IFRS 16, Leases in 2016. The standard replaced IAS 17 with effect from 1 January
2019. It adopted a single accounting model applicable to all leases by lessees, thereby, for lessees,
abolishing the distinction between operating and finance leases and bringing all leases into the
statement of financial position. The standard is examinable and is covered in Chapter 14.
Deferred Tax related to Assets and Decide project direction October 2020
Liabilities arising from a Single
Transaction (Amendments to IAS 12)
(Source: www.ifrs.org/projects/work-plan/)
1. Can you list the two fundamental and four enhancing qualitative characteristics of financial
information? (Topic 1)
3. How should goodwill be accounted for under the IFRS for SMEs? (Topic 3)
4. Have you understood what IFRS 13 means by the principal market? (Topic 4)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
IASB Conceptual Framework This short, straightforward question is included because this is the
first time the revised Conceptual Framework has been tested.
IFRS 13, Fair Value Fair value comes up so often in Corporate Reporting questions that
Measurement it is important to do this comprehensive question to get a firm
grasp of it at this early stage.
Polson This is a full question covering most aspects of IAS 8 that you are
likely to encounter.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter. In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to
attempt.
The whole of the Conceptual Framework and Preface to International Financial Reporting Standards is
examinable. The paragraphs listed below are the key references you should be familiar with.
5 Reporting entity
• Underlying assumption: going concern – Concept Frame (3.9)
• Reporting period – Concept Frame (3.4 - 3.7)
• Perspective: entity as a whole, not a group of users – Concept Frame (3.4 - 3.7)
• Consolidated versus unconsolidated – Concept Frame (3.15 - 3.17)
7 Recognition
• An asset or liability should be recognised if it will be both relevant and provide users of the
financial statements with a faithful representation of the transactions of that entity : – Concept
Frame (4.38)
8 Derecognition
Derecognition occurs (Concept Frame (4.38)) when:
• The entity loses control of all or part of the recognised asset; or
• The entity no longer has an obligation for a liability
9 Measurement
• Historical cost – Concept Frame (6.17)
• Current value
– Fair value
– Value in use
– Current cost
11 Capital maintenance
• Financial capital: – Concept Frame (4.57)
– Monetary
– Constant purchasing power
• Physical capital
12 IASB
• Objectives of IASB – Preface (6)
• Scope and authority of IFRS– Preface (7–16)
• Due process re IFRS development – Preface (17)
13 Future of UK GAAP
FRS 102 is derived from the IFRS for SMEs. It is one of the new financial reporting standards replacing
old UK GAAP. It can be used by UK unlisted groups and by listed and unlisted individual entities
20 Prior period errors IAS 8.5, IAS 8.42 and IAS 8.49
North American
Year to 30 November 20X2 market European market African market
Volume of market – units 4m 2m 1m
Price £19 £16 £22
Costs of entering the market £2 £2 £3
Transaction costs £1 £2 £2
Input Amount
Labour and material cost £2m
Overhead 30% of labour and material cost
Third-party mark-up – industry average 20%
Annual inflation rate 5%
Risk adjustment – uncertainty relating to cash flows 6%
Risk-free rate of government bonds 4%
Entity’s non-performance risk 2%
The capitalised development costs related to a single project that commenced in 20X4. It has now
been discovered that one of the criteria for capitalisation has never been met.
Requirement
According to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, by what
amount should retained earnings be adjusted to restate them as at 31 December 20X6?
5 Hookbill
The Hookbill Company was updating its inventory control system during 20X7 when it discovered
that it had, in error, included £50,000 in inventories in its statement of financial position as at year to
31 December 20X6 relating to items that had already been sold at that date. The 20X6 profit after tax
shown in Hookbill’s financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X6 was £400,000.
In the draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7, before any adjustment for the
above error, the profit after tax was £500,000.
Hookbill pays tax on profits at 25%.
Requirement
According to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, what figures
should be disclosed for profit after tax in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income of Hookbill for the year ended 31 December 20X7, for both 20X7 and the comparative year
20X6?
7 Aspen
The Aspen Company was drawing up its draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7
and was reviewing its cut-off procedures. It discovered that it had, in error, at the previous year end,
omitted from inventories in its statement of financial position a purchase of inventories amounting to
£100,000 made on the afternoon of 31 December 20X6. The related purchase transaction and the
trade payable had been correctly recorded.
The retained earnings of Aspen at 31 December 20X6 as shown in its 20X6 financial statements were
£4,000,000. In the draft financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7, before any
adjustment of the above error, the profit after tax was £800,000. Aspen pays tax on profits at 30%.
Requirement
According to IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, what figures
should be disclosed in the financial statements of Aspen for the year ended 31 December 20X7 for
profit after tax for the year and for retained earnings at 1 January 20X7?
8 Polson
The Polson Company appointed Rayner as finance director late in 20X7. One of Rayner’s initial tasks
was to ensure that a thorough review was carried out of Polson’s accounting policies and their
application in the preparation of Polson’s consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X6. This review identified the following issues in relation to the 20X6 consolidated
financial statements which were approved for publication early in 20X7.
(1) The £840,000 year-end carrying amount of a major item of plant in a wholly-owned subsidiary
comprised costs incurred up to 31 December 20X6. Depreciation was charged from 1 January
20X7 when the item was for the first time working at normal capacity. The depreciation charge
takes account of residual value of £50,000 on 30 September 20Y4, the end of the item’s useful
life. The overall construction and installation of the item was completed on 30 September 20X6,
when the item was first in full working order. Between 1 October and 31 December 20X6 the
item was running below normal capacity as employees learnt how to operate it. The year-end
carrying amount comprises: costs incurred to 30 September 20X6 of £800,000 plus costs
incurred in October to December 20X6 of £50,000 less £10,000 sales proceeds of the output
sold in October to December.
(2) On 1 January 20X6 Polson acquired a 30% interest in The Niflumic Company for £240,000, which
it classified in its consolidated financial statements as an investment in equity instruments under
IFRS 9, Financial Instruments. Polson has representation on Niflumic’s board of directors.
Niflumic’s shares are dealt in on a public market and the year-end carrying amount of £360,000
was derived using the market price quoted on that date. The fair value increase of £90,000
(£360,000 – £240,000 less 25% deferred tax) was recognised in an available-for-sale reserve in
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Question Answer
Oak plc has purchased a patent for £40,000. This is an asset, albeit an intangible one. There
The patent gives the company sole use of a is a past event, control and future economic
particular manufacturing process which will benefit (through cost saving).
save £6,000 a year for the next five years.
Elm plc paid John Brown £20,000 to set up a This cannot be classed as an asset. Elm plc has
car repair shop, on condition that priority no control over the car repair shop and it is
treatment is given to cars from the company’s difficult to argue that there are future economic
fleet. benefits.
Sycamore plc provides a warranty with every This is a liability. The business has an obligation
washing machine sold. to fulfil the terms of the warranty. The liability
would be recognised when the warranty is
issued rather than when a claim is made.
20X6 20X7
£’000 £’000
Sales 47,400 67,200
Cost of goods sold (W1) (38,770) (51,600)
Profit before tax 8,630 15,600
Income tax (W2) (2,620) (4,660)
Profit for the year 6,010 10,940
Retained earnings
Opening retained earnings
As previously reported 13,000 21,950
Correction of prior period error (4,200 – 1,260) – (2,940)
As restated 13,000 19,010
Profit for the year 6,010 10,940
Closing retained earnings 19,010 29,950
WORKINGS
(1) Cost of goods sold
20X6 20X7
£’000 £’000
As stated in question 34,570 55,800
Inventory adjustment 4,200 (4,200)
20X6 20X7
£’000 £’000
As stated in question 3,880 3,400
Inventory adjustment (4,200 × 30%) (1,260) 1,260
2,620 4,660
£m
Consideration transferred 7.7
Non-controlling interests (at % FVNA: 9.5 × 40%) 3.8
North American
Year to 30 November 20X2 market European market African market
Volume of market – units 4m 2m 1m
£ £ £
Price 19 16 22
Costs of entering the market (2) (2) n/a
Potential fair value 17 14 22
Transaction costs (1) (2) (2)
Net profit 16 12 20
Additional information
• Because Vitaleque currently buys and sells the asset in the African market, the costs of entering
that market are not incurred and therefore not relevant.
• Fair value is not adjusted for transaction costs. Under IFRS 13, these are not a feature of the asset
or liability, but may be taken into account when determining the most advantageous market.
• The North American market is the principal market for the asset because it is the market with the
greatest volume and level of activity for the asset. If information about the North American market
is available and Vitaleque can access the market, then Vitaleque should base its fair value on this
market. Based on the North American market, the fair value of the asset would be £17, measured
as the price that would be received in that market (£19) less costs of entering the market (£2) and
ignoring transaction costs.
• If information about the North American market is not available, or if Vitaleque cannot access the
market, Vitaleque must measure the fair value of the asset using the price in the most
advantageous market. The most advantageous market is the market that maximises the amount
that would be received to sell the asset, after taking into account both transaction costs and
usually also costs of entry; that is, the net amount that would be received in the respective
markets. The most advantageous market here is therefore the African market. As explained above,
costs of entry are not relevant here, and so, based on this market, the fair value would be £22.
• It is assumed that market participants are independent of each other, knowledgeable, and able
and willing to enter into transactions.
(2) Fair value of decommissioning liability
Because this is a business combination, Vitaleque must measure the liability at fair value in
accordance with IFRS 13, rather than using the best estimate measurement required by IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets. In most cases there will be no observable
market to provide pricing information. If this is the case here, Vitaleque will use the expected present
value technique to measure the fair value of the decommissioning liability. If Vitaleque were
contractually committed to transfer its decommissioning liability to a market participant, it would
conclude that a market participant would use the inputs as follows, arriving at a fair value of
£3,215,000.
Inflation adjusted total (5% compounded over three years): 3,120 × 1.053 3,612
Risk adjustment – uncertainty relating to cash flows: 3,612 × 6% 217
3,829
Discount at risk-free rate plus entity’s non-performance risk:
(4% + 2% = 6%): 3,829 ÷ 1.06 3,215
5 Hookbill
20X7: £537,500
20X6: £362,500
20X7 20X6
£ £
Draft profit after tax 500,000 400,000
Inventory adjustment 50,000 (50,000)
Tax thereon at 25% (12,500) 12,500
Revised profit after tax 537,500 362,500
The comparative amounts for the prior period should be restated, per IAS 8.42.
Correction of opening inventory will increase profit for the current period, by the amount of the after-
tax adjustment. Conversely, the closing inventory for the previous period is reduced, thereby
reducing profit by the after-tax effect of the adjustment.
6 Carduus
Retained earnings: £400m
Profit before tax: £58.0m
The change in useful life is a change in an accounting estimate which is accounted for prospectively
(IAS 8.36). So retained earnings brought forward remain unchanged, at £400 million.
The carrying amount of development costs at 1 January 20X7 (halfway through their previously
estimated useful life) is (£72m × 5/10) £36 million. Writing this off over three years gives a charge of
£12 million per annum. So the profit before tax is £70m – £12m = £58m.
7 Aspen
Profit after tax: £730,000
8 Polson
Figures as follows:
(1) £776,562
(2) (£66,000)
(3) £318,562
All these matters give rise to prior period errors which require retrospective restatement of financial
statements as if the prior period error had never occurred (IAS 8.5).
(1) Recognition of cost in the carrying amount of PPE should cease when it is in the condition
capable of being operated in the manner intended, so on 30 September 20X6, and depreciation
should begin on the same date (IAS 16.20 and 55). So gross cost should be adjusted to
£800,000 (£840,000 – £50,000 + £10,000) and depreciation, taking into account overall useful
life and residual value, charged for 3 months, so £23,438 ((£800,000 – £50,000) × 1/8 × 25%).
The restated carrying amount is £776,562 (£800,000 – £23,438).
(2) The investment in The Niflumic Company is an associate and should be accounted for according
to IAS 28, not IFRS 9.
The value of the investment will therefore increase by 30% of Niflumic’s post-tax profit rather
than according to fair values.
£
Amount recognised in other components of equity 90,000
30% × Niflumic’s profit after tax (retained earnings) 24,000
Adjustment to equity (66,000)
(3)
£
Draft retained earnings 400,000
Reduction in carrying value of plant (£840,000 – £776,562) (63,438)
Niflumic’s earnings (£80,000 × 30%) 24,000
Error in trade receivables (£70,000 × 60%) (42,000)
318,562
Trade receivables, revenue and therefore profit were overstated by £70,000 in respect of the trade
receivables. Polson’s share is 60%, so end-20X6 retained earnings must be reduced by £42,000.
The share of Niflumic’s profits is recognised in retained earnings, not in a separate reserve, giving rise
to an increase of £24,000.
Ethics
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 The importance of ethics
2 Ethical codes and standards
3 Ethics: financial reporting focus
4 Ethics: audit and assurance focus
5 Making ethical judgements
6 Money laundering regulations
7 Ethical guidance in more detail
8 Further ethical guidance
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain ethical issues in reporting, assurance and business scenarios
• Explain the relevance, importance and consequences of ethical issues
• Evaluate the impact of ethics on a reporting entity, relating to the actions of stakeholders
• Recommend and justify appropriate actions where ethical and professional conduct issues arise in
a given scenario
• Design and evaluate appropriate safeguards to mitigate threats and provide resolutions to ethical
problems
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 19(a)–(e)
3
1 The importance of Approach Every question you IQ1: Ethics and the
ethics This should remind attempt will need to individual
This first section you of why you consider the public Use this as an
reminds you of how continue to study interest so always opportunity to
important it is to do ethics – use it to consider how remind yourself of
the right thing in the maintain your focus. actions look through how a professional
workplace and the lens of various accountant should
Stop and think ethical codes.
beyond. behave in the face
WorldCom occurred of such adversity.
at the very start of
the 20th Century –
do you think there is
still a risk of good
companies doing
bad things?
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
1.1 Introduction
In general terms, ethics is a set of moral principles and standards of correct behaviour. Far from
being noble ideals which have little impact on real life, they are essential for any society to operate
and function effectively. Put simply, they help to differentiate between right and wrong, although
their application often involves complex issues, judgement and decisions. While ethical principles
can be incorporated into law, in many cases their application has to depend on the self-discipline of
the individual. This principle can be seen to apply to society as a whole, the business community and
the accounting profession.
Sometimes doing the right thing is not straightforward and you should be prepared to consider
things in a personal capacity.
One of the other courses of action that Betty Vinson could have taken would have been to blow the
whistle – expose the fraud she was asked to participate in either within or outside the organisation.
Admittedly, as the highest levels of management were involved in the WorldCom case, making an
internal disclosure would have fallen on deaf ears at best, or at worst caused Betty Vinson to lose her
job. However, Betty Vinson could have considered making an external disclosure: to the professional
regulatory body of which she was a member, to public regulators, or, perhaps as a last resort, to the
media. A timely disclosure could have brought the fraudulent activities to an end, mitigating their
disastrous consequences.
In the UK, the Public Interest Disclosure Act 1998 (PIDA 1998) aims to protect whistleblowers who
raise genuine concerns about malpractice in organisations, including the following:
• Crimes
• Civil offences (including negligence, breach of contract and breach of administrative law)
• The accounting profession has developed principles-based codes, including the IESBA Code and
the ICAEW Code of Ethics.
• The ICAEW Code centres around five fundamental principles and a professional accountant is
responsible for recognising and assessing potential threats to these fundamental principles.
• Where threats are identified, a professional accountant must then implement safeguards to
eliminate these threats or reduce them to an acceptable level.
• This section provides a summary of some key points covered in the ethics learning material in the
Financial Accounting and Reporting paper at Professional Level.
• Here we primarily consider the application of the ICAEW Code to the accountant in business
involved in a financial reporting environment (we look at the accountant in practice in section 4).
3.2 Threats
Compliance with these fundamental principles may potentially be threatened by a broad range of
circumstances. Many of these threats can be categorised as follows:
(a) Self-interest threat
The threat that a financial or other interest of a professional accountant or of an immediate or close
family member will inappropriately influence the professional accountant’s judgement or behaviour.
Examples of circumstances that may create such threats include the following:
• Financial interests, loans or guarantees
• Incentive compensation arrangements
• Inappropriate personal use of corporate assets
• Concern over employment security
• Commercial pressure from outside the employing organisation
(b) Self-review threat
The threat that a professional accountant will not appropriately evaluate the results of a previous
judgement made by the professional accountant.
(c) Advocacy threat
The threat that a professional accountant will promote a client’s or employer’s position to the point
that the professional accountant’s objectivity is compromised.
(d) Familiarity threat
The threat that due to a long or close relationship with a client or employer, a professional
accountant will be too sympathetic to their interests or too accepting of their work.
3.3 Safeguards
There are two broad categories of safeguards which may eliminate or reduce such threats to an
acceptable level:
Safeguards created by the profession, legislation or regulation
Examples are:
• Educational, training and experience requirements for entry into the profession
• CPD requirements
• Corporate governance regulations
• Professional standards
• Professional or regulatory monitoring and disciplinary procedures
• External review by a legally empowered third party of reports, returns, communication or
information produced by a professional accountant
• Effective, well-publicised complaints systems operated by the employing organisation, the
profession or a regulator, which enable colleagues, employers and members of the public to
draw attention to unprofessional or unethical behaviour
• An explicitly stated duty to report breaches of ethical requirements
Safeguards in the work environment
Examples are:
• The employing organisation’s systems of corporate oversight or other oversight structures
• The employing organisation’s ethics and conduct programmes
• Recruitment procedures in the employing organisation emphasising the importance of employing
high calibre, competent staff
• Strong internal controls
• Appropriate disciplinary processes
• Leadership that stresses the importance of ethical behaviour and the expectation that employees
will act in an ethical manner
• Policies and procedures to implement and monitor the quality of employee performance
• Timely communication to all employees of the employing organisation’s policies and procedures,
including any changes made to them, and appropriate training and education given on such
policies and procedures
• Policies and procedures to empower and encourage employees to communicate to senior levels
within the employing organisation any ethical issues that concern them without fear of retribution
• Consultation with another appropriate professional accountant
3.8 Inducements
An accountant, or their immediate or close family, may be offered an inducement such as:
• gifts;
• hospitality;
• preferential treatment; or
• inappropriate appeals to friendship or loyalty.
An accountant should assess the risk associated with all such offers and consider whether the
following actions should be taken:
• Immediately inform higher levels of management or those charged with governance of the
employing organisation.
• Inform third parties of the offer, for example a professional body or the employer of the individual
who made the offer, or seek legal advice.
• Advise immediate or close family members of relevant threats and safeguards where they are
potentially in positions that might result in offers of inducements (for example as a result of their
employment situation).
• Inform higher levels of management or those charged with governance of the employing
organisation where immediate or close family members are employed by competitors or
potential suppliers of that organisation.
In addition to the ICAEW Code, accountants operating in businesses linked to the UK should be
aware of the Bribery Act 2010. Under the Bribery Act, there are four categories of criminal bribery
offences:
(a) Offering, promising or giving a bribe to another person
(b) Requesting, agreeing to receive or accepting a bribe to another person
(c) Bribing a foreign official
• This section focuses on ethical guidance most relevant to accountants in practice providing
assurance services and builds on the material covered in the Assurance paper at Certificate Level
and the Audit and Assurance paper at Professional Level.
• It also provides detail of recent changes to the relevant ethical codes and standards:
– IESBA Code
– ICAEW Code
– Revised Ethical Standard
Threat Example
Self-review threat Reporting on the operation of financial systems after being involved in
their design or implementation
Management threat Where the audit firm has been involved in the design, selection and
implementation of financial information technology systems
(This threat is included in the FRC Ethical Standard only)
Familiarity or trust threat A member of the engagement team having a close or immediate
family relationship with a director of the client
(a) The ICAEW Code defines a safeguard to be ‘…actions, individually or in combination, that the
professional accountant takes that effectively reduce threats to compliance with the fundamental
principles to an acceptable level.’ (ICAEW Code, para 120.10 A2)
(b) Safeguards in the work environment may differ according to whether a professional accountant
works in public practice, in business or in insolvency.
(c) When evaluating safeguards, the auditor should consider what a reasonable and informed third
party, having knowledge of all relevant information, including the significance of the threat and
the safeguards applied, would conclude to be unacceptable.
Although there is a lot of content in each of the FRC Ethical Standard and the ICAEW and IESBA
Codes, you can use something as mundane as the contents pages of each document to help you
find the right path through any ethics problem.
• The application of ethical guidance requires skill and judgement and relies on the integrity of the
individual.
• The ICAEW provides a framework for the resolution of ethical conflicts.
• In the exam, you will be expected to identify ethical issues and evaluate alternative courses of
action.
Fundamental principles affected and any This will involve reference to the relevant ethical
associated ethical threats guidance from the ICAEW Code:
Which fundamental principles are affected? • Section 110 for the fundamental principles
Which threats to compliance exist? • Section 120.6 A3 for threats to these
Are there safeguards in place which can fundamental principles
reduce or eliminate the threats? Are any of these threats clearly insignificant?
Where the conflict is significant and cannot be resolved, the accountant would need to seek legal
advice. After exhausting all other possibilities and depending on the nature of the conflict, the
individual may conclude that withdrawal from the engagement team or resignation from the
firm/employing organisation is appropriate.
Note: Withdrawal/resignation would be seen very much as a last resort.
Scenarios in the exam may be discrete and straightforward, but what if they are not? Use this
systematic resolution process to help you work the problem logically.
• This section provides a summary of some key points covered in the Audit and Assurance paper at
Professional Level.
• Changes to money-laundering regulations were made on 26 June 2017 and the Money
Laundering, Terrorist Financing and Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer) Regulations 2017
are now in force. These changes were made in order to improve the 2007 regulations.
• Here, we consider an overview of the money laundering regulations in the UK, and how they
affect the work of accountants in practice.
Definitions
Integrity: Being trustworthy, straightforward, honest, fair and candid; complying with the spirit as well
as the letter of the applicable ethical principles, laws and regulations; behaving so as to maintain the
public’s trust in the auditing profession; and respecting confidentiality except where disclosure is in
the public interest or is required to adhere to legal and professional responsibilities.
Objectivity: Acting and making decisions and judgments impartially, fairly and on merit (having
regard to all considerations relevant to the task in hand but no other), without discrimination, bias, or
compromise because of commercial or personal self-interest, conflicts of interest or the undue
influence of others, and having given due consideration to the best available evidence.
Financial interests The parties listed below are not allowed to own a direct financial interest
or an indirect material financial interest in an audited entity:
• The audit firm
• Any partner in the audit firm
• Any person in a position to influence the conduct and outcome of the
engagement ie, a covered person (eg, a member of the engagement
team)
Business Firms, covered persons and persons closely associated with them must not
relationships (eg, enter into business relationships with any entity relevant to the
operating a joint engagement, or its management or its affiliates except where those
venture between the relationships involve the purchase of goods on normal commercial terms
firm and the client) and which are not material to either party or would be inconsequential in
the view of an objective, reasonable and informed third party. (Ethical
Standard s.2.26)
Where a business relationship exists that is not permitted and has been
entered into by the following parties:
(a) The firm: either the relationship is terminated or the firm does not
accept/withdraws from the engagement
(b) A covered person: either the relationship is terminated or that person
is excluded from any role in which they would be a covered person
(c) A person closely associated with a covered person: either the
relationship is terminated or the covered person is excluded from any
role in which they would be a covered person. (Ethical Standard
s.2.28)
Employment with When a partner leaves the firm they may not be appointed as a director or
assurance client to a key management position/ member of the audit committee with an
audited entity, having acted as statutory auditor or key audit partner in
relation to that audit before the end of:
(a) in the case of a public interest entity, two years; and
(b) in any other case, one year. (Ethical Standard s.2.43)
Where a partner approved as statutory auditor is appointed as a director, a
member of the audit committee or to a key management position having
previously been a covered person:
(a) in the case of a partner, at any time during the two years before the
appointment; or
(b) in the case of another person, at any time during the year before the
appointment
the firm must resign from the engagement where possible under
applicable law or regulation. (Ethical Standard s.2.45)
The firm cannot accept another engagement for the entity until:
(a) in the case of a partner, a two-year period; or
(b) in the case of another person, a one year period.
Governance role The audit firm, a partner or employee of an audit firm shall not perform a
role as an officer or member of the board of an entity relevant to the
engagement. (Ethical Standard s.2.53)
Family and personal Where a covered person or any partner in the firm becomes aware that a
relationships person closely associated with them is employed by an entity and that
person is in a position to exercise influence on the accounting records and
financial statements relevant to the engagement they should be excluded
from any role in which they would be a covered person eg, they should be
removed from the audit team.
Gifts and hospitality Gifts, favours or hospitality should not be accepted unless an objective,
reasonable and informed third party would consider the value to be trivial
and inconsequential. (Ethical Standard s.4.40)
Loans and Firms, covered persons and persons closely associated with them must not
guarantees enter into any loan or guarantee arrangement with an audited entity that
is not a bank or similar institution, and the transaction is made in the
ordinary course of business on normal business terms and is not material
to the entity. (Ethical Standard s.2.21 – 2.22)
Overdue fees Firms should guard against fees building up, as the audit firm runs the risk
of effectively making a loan. Where the amount cannot be regarded as
trivial the engagement partner and ethics partner must consider whether it
is necessary to resign. (Ethical Standard s.4.11) The ICAEW Code (s.410.7
A1) states that, generally, the payment of overdue fees should be required
before the assurance report for the following year can be issued.
High percentage of The Ethical Standard includes a 70% cap in respect of non-audit services
fees provided to an audit client as follows:
(a) Total fees for non-audit services provided to a public interest entity
audit client must be limited to no more than 70% of the average fees
paid in the last three consecutive financial years for the audit.
(b) Total fees for such services provided by the audit firm must be limited
to no more than 70% of the average of the fees paid to the audit firm
in the last three consecutive financial years for the audits of the entity.
(Ethical Standard s4.15)
Where total fees (audit and non-audit services) from an audited entity are
expected to regularly exceed 15% of the annual fee income of the audit
firm (10% in the case of a public interest entity or other listed entity), the
firm should resign or not stand for reappointment. Where total fees from
an audited entity are expected to regularly exceed 10% of the annual fee
income, but will not regularly exceed 15% (5% and 10% in the case of a
public interest entity or other listed entity) the audit engagement partner
should disclose that fact to the ethics partner and those charged with
governance of the audited entity and consider whether appropriate
safeguards should be applied to reduce the threat to independence. Non-
public-interest entities will also require an external independent quality
control review to be undertaken if the 10-15% category applies. (Ethical
Standard s4.23, 4.24, 4.27 and 4.31)
Lowballing Where the fee quoted is significantly lower than would have been charged
by the predecessor firm, the engagement partner must be satisfied that:
Service with an Individuals who have been a director or officer of the client, or an
assurance client employee in a position to exert direct and significant influence over the
financial statements on which the firm will express an opinion should not
be assigned to the audit team. (ICAEW Code s.R522.3)
The Ethical Standard states that in this situation the individual should be
excluded from any role in which they would be a covered person for a
period of two years following the date of leaving the entity. (Ethical
Standard s2.57)
Provision of other The FRC has effectively prohibited the provision of non-audit services to
services audit clients who are public interest entities unless the services fall into
certain categories (usually these are services required by law or regulation)
and these are not subject to the 70% cap mentioned earlier. (Ethical
Standard s5.40)
For other entities, while in principle the provision of other services is
allowed, the threat of self-review must be considered particularly where
the matter in question will be material to the financial statements.
Safeguards may mitigate the threats in some circumstances although the
Ethical Standard does include a number of instances where the provision
of the service would be inappropriate irrespective of any safeguards. In
particular, the service should not be provided where the audit firm would
undertake part of the role of management.
Arises where the The Ethical Standard prohibits the provision of legal services for public
assurance firm is in a interest entities with respect to:
position of taking the • the provision of legal counsel;
client’s part in a
dispute or somehow • negotiating on behalf of the audit client; and
acting as their • acting in an advocacy role in the resolution of litigation.
advocate.
For other entities legal services should not be provided where it would
Examples: involve acting as the solicitor formally nominated to represent the client in
• If the firm carried resolution of a dispute or litigation which is material to the financial
out corporate statements. (Ethical Standard s.5.83)
finance work for
the client; eg, if
the audit firm
were involved in
advice on debt
restructuring and
negotiated with
the bank on the
client’s behalf.
• If the firm offered
legal services to a
client and, say,
defended them in
a legal case.
Long association The Ethical Standard requires compliance with Article 17 of the EU Audit
Regulation on audit firm rotation. As previously referred to, there is a
requirement that for public interest entities an audit tender must be
carried out at least every 10 years, with mandatory rotation of an audit firm
at least every 20 years.
The Ethical Standard also requires all firms to monitor the relationship
between staff and established clients.
The general provision in the Ethical Standard is that when engagement
partners, key partners involved in the audit and partners and staff in senior
positions have a long association with the audit, the firm must assess the
threats to integrity, objectivity and independence and apply safeguards to
reduce the threats to an acceptable level. Once an audit engagement
partner has held this role for a continuous period of 10 years, careful
consideration must be given (using the ‘third party test’) as to whether the
audit firm’s integrity, objectivity and independence is impaired (Ethical
Standard s.3.6).
The standard states the following for listed companies:
• No one should act as audit engagement partner for a continuous
period longer than five years and should not subsequently participate
in the audit until a further period of five years has elapsed. (Ethical
Standard s.3.10)
• The engagement partner may continue in this position for an additional
two years where the audit committee decide that this is necessary to
safeguard the quality of the audit. Safeguards must be applied and
disclosure made to the shareholders. (Ethical Standard s.3.15 and 3.16)
• No one should act as engagement quality reviewer or key partner
involved in the audit for a continuous period of more than seven years
(and when an engagement quality control reviewer or a key partner
Recruitment and The firm shall not provide recruitment services to an entity relevant to an
remuneration engagement, that would involve the firm taking responsibility for, or
services advising on the appointment of any director or employee of the entity, or a
significant affiliate of such an entity, where the firm is undertaking an
engagement. (Ethical Standard s.5.85)
The firm shall not provide advice on the remuneration package or the
measurement criteria on which the remuneration is calculated, for any
director or employee of the entity, or a significant affiliate of an entity
relevant to an engagement. (Ethical Standard s.5.86)
Arises when the firm • If there is informed management (ie, management capable of making
undertakes non-audit independent judgements and decisions on the basis of the information
services for audit provided) safeguards may be able to mitigate the threat
clients which • If there is no informed management, it is unlikely that the threat can be
involves making avoided if the work is undertaken.
judgements and
taking decisions that
are the responsibility
of management (and
due to the alignment
of such
responsibilities could
diminish the firm’s
professional
scepticism)
Note: A given situation may give rise to more than one threat.
Questions are unlikely to simply ask you what the problem is - they will also expect some form of
recommended action for the firm or accountant to take. Each part of the various Codes and
Standards are designed to suggest responses but it is up to you to explain what you believe to be
the right one and why.
Economic Where total fees for audit and non-audit services from a non-listed
dependence audited entity will regularly exceed 10% of the annual fee income of the
firm but will not regularly exceed 15%, no external independent quality
control review is required. Instead this must be disclosed to the ethics
partner and those charged with governance. (Ethical Standard s.6.5)
Non-audit services The restrictions on the provision of non-audit services related to self-
review threats can be waived, but:
• there needs to be ‘informed management‘; and
• the audit firm needs to extend its cycle of cold reviews
In addition, the firm is exempt from taking the specified actions in
response to management and some advocacy threats associated with
non-audit services for small entities provided there is adequate disclosure
that the firm has applied the FRC Ethical Standard’s Provisions Available
for Audits of Small Entities. (Ethical Standard s.6.11 and 6.12)
Partners joining audit The provisions concerning partners joining audit clients are waived
clients provided there is no threat to the audit team’s integrity, objectivity and
independence. (Ethical Standard s.6.13 and 6.14)
1. Can you identify behaviour in a given scenario that may be considered unethical?
2. Do you know the various ethical codes and standards that you are expected to use and
can you find them in your open book permitted text?
3. Can you differentiate between the ethical issues faced by accountants in business and by
auditors working in practice?
4. Can you identify the various threats raised by certain situations and explain the most
suitable response?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Easter Use this as good practice of how to interrogate the open book permitted
text for responses to a series of discrete ethical scenarios.
Marden plc Having looked at some individual issues, now attempt something more
exam-standard where you have to unpick the ethical issues from a larger
and more complex scenario.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Poe, Whitman and Here, you have been asked about practical and ethical issues related to your
Co late appointment as group auditor. This requires a more methodical
approach to consider the issues when reading the whole scenario.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
1 Easter
You are a partner in a firm of chartered accountants. The following issues have emerged in relation to
three of your clients:
(1) Easter is a major client. It is listed on a major exchange. The audit team consists of eight
members, of whom Paul is the most junior. Paul has just invested in a personal pension plan that
invests in all the listed companies on the exchange.
(2) While listed, Easter has subsidiaries in five different European countries. Tax regimes in those
countries vary on the absolute rate of tax charged as well as expenses allowable against taxable
income. The Finance Director of Easter has indicated that the Easter group will be applying
management charges between different subsidiaries to take advantage of favourable tax
regimes with the five countries. The FD reminds you that another firm offering assurances
services, Bunny & Co, has already approved the management charges as part of a special review
carried out on the group and the FD therefore considers the charges to be legal and
appropriate to Easter.
(3) You are at the head of a team carrying out due diligence work at Electra, a limited company
which your client, Powerful, is considering taking over. Your second in command on the team,
Peter, who is a manager, has confided in you that in the course of his work he has met the
daughter of the Managing Director of Electra, and he is keen to invite her on a date.
(4) Your longest standing audit client is Teddies, which you have been involved in for 10 years, with
four years as engagement partner. You recently went on an extended cruise with the Managing
Director on his yacht. The company is not a public interest entity or listed entity.
(5) You are also aware that the executive directors of Teddies were recently voted a significant
increase in bonus by their audit committee. The financial statements of Teddies do show a small
improvement in net profit, but this does not appear to justify the extent of bonus paid. You are
also aware that the Finance Director of Teddies is a non-executive director of Grisly, while the
Senior Independent Director of Teddies is the Finance Director of Grisly.
Requirement
Comment on the ethical and other professional issues raised by the above matters.
Note: Your answer should outline the threat arising, the significance of the threat, any factors you
have taken into account and, if relevant, any safeguards you could apply to eliminate or mitigate
against the threat.
2 Saunders plc
Bourne & Berkeley is an assurance firm with a diverse range of audit clients. One client, Saunders plc,
is listed on the stock exchange. You are the engagement partner on the audit; you have been
engagement partner for four years and have an experienced team of eight staff to carry out the
audit. The audit is made slightly more complicated because Bourne & Berkeley rent office space from
Saunders plc. The total rental cost of that space is about 10% of the total income from Saunders plc.
Office space is made available to other companies, including Walker Ltd, another of your audit
clients. You are aware from the audit of Walker Ltd that the company is close to receivership and that
the rent arrears is unlikely to be paid by Walker to Saunders.
In an interesting development at the client, the Finance Director resigned just before the audit
commencing and the board asked Bourne & Berkeley for assistance in preparing the financial
statements. Draft accounts were available, although the final statutory accounts had not been
produced.
As part of your review of the draft accounts you notice that the revenue recognition policy includes
an estimate of future revenues from the sale of deferred assets. One of the activities of Saunders plc
is the purchase of oil on the futures market for delivery and resale between 6 and 12 months into the
3 Marden plc
At 6pm on Sunday evening a text message arrives for you from your audit manager, John Hanks,
stating:
“Please check your email urgently”
On checking your email, you find the following message.
“I hope you had a good weekend. Instead of coming into the office tomorrow morning I would like
you to go to a client called Marden plc. I know you have not worked on this client before so I am
emailing you some background information (Exhibit 1). One of our audit juniors, Henry Ying, was at
Marden’s head office last week working on the interim audit and he has come up with a schedule of
issues that are worrying me (Exhibit 2). Henry does not have the experience to deal with these, so I
would like you, as a senior, to go out there and prepare a memorandum for me which sets out the
financial reporting implications of each of these issues. I would also like you to explain in the
memorandum the ethical issues that arise from these issues and the audit procedures required for
each of the matters on Henry’s schedule. I will visit Marden on Tuesday to speak to the directors.
John”
Requirement
Prepare the memorandum requested by your audit manager.
Directors 25%
Financial institutions 66%
Jack Airlines plc 9%
The company uses an interest rate of 10% to discount the cash flows of all projects.
The accounting year end is 31 December.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Undue dependence Auditor prepares the Actual litigation with a Any threat of litigation
on an audit client due accounts client by the client
to fee levels
An actual loan being Provision of any other Client refuses to pay Threat of any services
made to a client services to the client fees and they become being put out to
long overdue tender
Contingency fees
being offered
Accepting
commissions from
clients
Provision of lucrative
other services to
clients
Relationships with
persons in associated
practices
Beneficial interest in
shares or other
investments
Hospitality
1 Easter
Issues
(1) In relation to Easter, there is a threat of self-interest arising, as a member of the audit team has
an indirect financial interest in the client.
The relevant factors are as follows:
• The interest is unlikely to be material to the client or Paul, as the investment is recent and Paul’s
interest is in a pool of general investments made in the exchange on his behalf.
• Paul is the audit junior and does not have a significant role on the audit in terms of drawing audit
conclusions or audit risk areas.
The risk that arises to the independence of the audit here is therefore not significant. It would be
inappropriate to require Paul to divest his interest in the audit client. If I wanted to eliminate all
elements of risk in this situation, I could simply change the junior assigned to my team, but such a
step is not vital in this situation.
(2) Regarding the management charges, there is a threat that the management charges are
accepted as correct, simply because another assurance firm has recommended those charges to
Easter.
To query the charges could imply a lack of trust in Bunny, with the possible effect of bringing the
profession into disrepute. There is a risk that you as the assurance professional may not have the
necessary knowledge to determine whether or not Easter has been acting correctly. There is also an
intimidation threat in that the client is implying the charges are valid as another assurance firm has
recommended the changes.
The relevant factors to take into account include the following:
• The legality or otherwise of the transactions. Information concerning the management charges
must be obtained and compared to the law, not only of the individual countries but also of the EU
as a whole. It remains a possibility that Easter has acted in accordance with laws of individual
jurisdictions, but not the EU overall.
• Your level of knowledge. Where necessary, specialist advice must be obtained from the taxation
department to determine the legality or otherwise of the transactions.
• The materiality of the management charges involved and the reduction in the taxation expense.
Given that Easter is attempting to minimise its taxation charge, then the amounts are likely to be
material and therefore as the audit firm, the transactions will have to be audited.
• Your knowledge of Bunny & Co. The assurance firm may well be skilled in advising on this type of
issue, in which case there is likely to be less of an issue with the legality of the charges. However, if
the reputation of Bunny is suspect, then additional work on the management charges may be
required.
The intimidation threat is significant; it is unlikely that Easter would expect your firm to query the
charges as another professional firm has confirmed them. A discussion with the FD may be required
to confirm the purposes of the audit and the extent of evidence required to reach an audit opinion.
Material transactions affecting the financial statements and taxation charges must be subject to
standard audit procedures.
Your potential lack of knowledge is relatively easy to overcome. Specialist advice can be obtained
from the taxation department, with a tax manager/partner being present in any discussion with the
client to determine legality of the management charges.
(3) In relation to Powerful, two issues arise.
The first is that the firm appears to be providing multiple services for Powerful, which could raise a
self-interest threat. The second is that the manager assigned to the due diligence assignment wants
to engage in a personal relationship with a person connected to the subject of the assignment, which
could create a familiarity or intimidation threat.
2 Saunders plc
Issues
(1) The rental of the premises from an audit client represents a business relationship which poses a
potential threat to objectivity.
• Bourne & Berkeley would be able to continue to act if the arrangement is:
– in the ordinary course of business;
– on an arm’s length basis; and
– not material to either party.
• In this case the rental income is likely to be material to the audit client, as it represents 10% of
total income.
• The audit firm would need to take immediate steps to terminate either the client or the business
relationship.
(2) The FRC Revised Ethical Standard prohibits accounts preparation work for listed company audit
clients.
• In this case it is likely that the preparation of the financial information will involve the auditor in
making subjective judgements, as the internal reporting format will need to be converted into the
statutory format. Decisions will need to be made about, for example, the level and nature of
disclosures. This would constitute an accountancy service and would not be allowed.
(3) There is a conflict of interest here.
While it may be in the interest of Saunders plc for the auditor to disclose the information regarding
the recoverability of the debt, this information is confidential, as it was obtained in the course of audit
work performed for Walker Ltd. Disclosure of this information to Saunders plc would breach the duty
of confidentiality.
• Section 310 of the ICAEW Code requires that the auditor should disclose a conflict of interest to
the parties involved. In this case, however, the situation is complicated by the fact that the conflict
of interest has had a practical consequence rather than simply being a potential problem. In
addition, it may be difficult to make the communication without revealing confidential
information.
• The firm should consider whether there were sufficient procedures in place to prevent the conflict
of interest occurring in the first place.
• The ICAEW Code states that the auditor should take steps to identify circumstances that could
pose a conflict of interest and to put in place any necessary safeguards eg, use of separate audit
teams.
• If procedures were inadequate this may have implications for other clients.
• If the balance is not material further action is unlikely to be necessary. If the balance is material the
situation will need to be addressed.
• Saunders plc may be aware of the potential irrecoverability of the debt and an allowance for an
irrecoverable receivable may have been made in the financial statements.
• If an adjustment has been made and the auditor is in agreement with it no further action would be
required.
• Independent evidence may be available which would indicate that the debt was irrecoverable.
For example, there may have been correspondence between Saunders plc and Walker Ltd
concerning the payment of the balance. There may also be evidence in the public domain, for
example newspaper reports and the results of credit checks. However, the auditor would need to
3 Marden plc
MEMO
To Audit manager
From Audit senior
Date XX-XX-XX
Re Accounting issues of Marden plc
(1) Understatement of tax liability
Audit and ethics
The understatement of the tax liability is an illegal act by the client. Tuesday’s meeting offers the
opportunity to attempt to persuade the client even at this late stage.
Consider whether a partner needs to be at the meeting given the ethical importance of the issue.
The key issue is the conflict between our duty to report and our duty of confidentiality.
According to ICAEW ethical requirements in terms of reporting, this may be:
• where there is a duty to disclose
• where there is a right to disclose
Corporate governance
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Relevance of corporate governance
2 Corporate governance concepts
3 The UK Corporate Governance Code
4 Role of the board
5 Associated guidance
6 Corporate governance: international impact
7 Corporate governance and internal control
8 Evaluation of corporate governance mechanisms
9 Communication between auditors and those charged with
governance
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Describe and explain the nature and consequences of corporate governance and accountability
mechanisms in controlling the operating and financial activities of entities of differing sizes,
structures and industries
• Explain the rights and responsibilities of the board, board committees (eg, audit and risk
committees), those charged with governance and individual executive and non-executive
directors, with respect to the preparation and audit of financial statements
• Describe and explain the rights and responsibilities of stakeholder groups (eg, executive
management, bondholders, government, securities exchanges, employees, public interest
groups, financial and other regulators, institutional and individual shareholders) with respect to
the preparation and audit of financial statements
• Evaluate and appraise appropriate corporate governance mechanisms
• Explain and evaluate the nature and consequence of relevant corporate governance codes and
set out the required compliance disclosures
• Explain the principles, practices and disclosures of corporate governance
• Explain the respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and auditors for
corporate risk management and risk reporting
• Explain the respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and auditors in respect
of internal control systems
• Explain and evaluate the role and requirement for effective two-way communication between
those charged with governance and auditors
• Describe and explain the roles and purposes of meetings of boards and of shareholders
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 13(a)–(j)
4
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• Concerns about the adequacy of financial reporting, a number of high profile corporate scandals
in the 1990s and concerns about excessive directors’ remuneration highlighted the need for
effective corporate governance.
• Corporate governance can be defined as the system by which organisations are directed and
controlled.
• The UK Corporate Governance Code was revised in July 2018.
1.1 Introduction
Corporate governance potentially covers a wide range of issues and disciplines from company
secretarial and legal through business strategy, executive and non-executive management and
investor relations to accounting and information systems.
Corporate governance issues came to prominence in the UK in the late 1980s. The main drivers
associated with the increasing demand for developments in this area included the following:
(a) Financial reporting
Issues concerning financial reporting were raised by many investors and were the focus of much
debate and litigation. Shareholder confidence in what was being reported in many instances was
eroded. While corporate governance development is not just about better financial reporting
requirements, the regulation of creative accounting practices, such as off balance sheet
financing, has led to greater transparency and a reduction in risks faced by investors.
(b) Corporate scandals
The early 1990s saw an increasing number of high profile corporate scandals and collapses,
including Polly Peck International, BCCI and Maxwell Communications Corporation. This
prompted the development of governance codes in the early 1990s. However, the scandals
since then outside the UK, including Enron, have raised questions about further measures that
may be necessary and the financial crisis in 2008–2009 triggered widespread reappraisal of
governance systems. More recently, investigations into BHS and Sports Direct have resulted in
further review of corporate governance arrangements in the UK which ultimately led to the most
recent update of the UK Corporate Governance Code in July 2018.
(c) Excessive directors‘ remuneration
Directors being paid excessive salaries and bonuses has been seen as one of the major
corporate issues for a number of years. While CEOs have argued that their packages reflect the
global market, shareholders and employees are concerned that these are often out of step with
the remuneration of other employees and do not reflect the performance of the company.
For example in 2015, the shareholders of retailer Sports Direct raised objections about the
company’s executive remuneration scheme lowering the threshold at which performance-related
bonuses would be payable while still pursuing working practices that treated workers poorly.
In the UK s.439A of CA2006 requires a quoted company’s director’s remuneration policy to be
approved by a binding shareholders’ vote at least every three years. The actual amounts of
remuneration are subject to an annual advisory vote on the remuneration report.
Definition
Corporate governance: Corporate governance involves a set of relationships between a company’s
management, its board, its shareholders and other stakeholders. Corporate governance also
provides the structure through which the objectives of the company are set, and the means of
attaining those objectives and monitoring performance are determined... providing shareholders,
board members and executives as well as financial intermediaries and service providers with the
right incentives to perform their roles within a framework of checks and balances (OECD, 2015).
An alternative definition is: The set of processes, customs, policies, laws and institutions affecting the
way in which an entity is directed, administered or controlled. Corporate governance serves the
needs of shareholders, and other stakeholders, by directing and controlling management activities
towards good business practices, objectivity and integrity in order to satisfy the objectives of the
entity.
Context example: VW
During 2015, it became apparent that car manufacturer Volkswagen (VW) had created software in its
vehicles that was deliberately intended to allow its diesel vehicles to incorrectly pass engine emission
tests which are used throughout the motor industry. Many observers have pointed out that such a
practice could not have occurred without senior management approval: if this was the case, it
suggests serious ethical flaws in the company’s governance; if not, it still points to a company that is
not in control of its staff.
Often you will know that there is a problem but you may not be able to explain exactly what the
problem is. Keep in mind the basic idea that there is something not right and then use it as a way of
combing all the relevant facts until you can explain what the problem really is.
One view of governance is that it is based on a series of underlying concepts. These are important,
as good corporate governance depends on a willingness to apply the spirit of the guidance as well
as the letter of the law.
2.1 Fairness
The directors’ deliberations and also the systems and values that underlie the company must be
balanced by taking into account everyone who has a legitimate interest in the company, and
respecting their rights and views. In many jurisdictions, corporate governance guidelines reinforce
legal protection for certain groups, for example minority shareholders.
2.2 Openness/transparency
In the context of corporate governance, transparency means corporate disclosure to stakeholders.
Disclosure in this context obviously includes information in the financial statements, not just the
numbers and notes to the accounts but also narrative statements such as the directors’ report and
the operating and financial review. It also includes all voluntary disclosure; that is, disclosure above
the minimum required by law or regulation. Voluntary corporate communications include the
following:
• Management forecasts
• Analysts’ presentations
• Press releases
• Information placed on websites
• Other reports such as standalone environmental or social reports
The main reason why transparency is so important relates to the agency problem; that is, the
potential conflict between owners and managers. Without effective disclosure the position could be
unfairly weighted towards managers, since they normally have far more knowledge of the company’s
activities and financial situation than owners/investors. Reducing this information asymmetry
requires not only effective disclosure rules but also strong internal controls that ensure that the
information disclosed is reliable.
2.3 Independence
Independence is an important concept in relation to directors (as well as auditors). Corporate
governance reports have increasingly stressed the importance of independent non-executive
directors; directors who are not primarily employed by the company and who have very strictly
controlled other links with it. They should be free from conflicts of interest and in a better position to
promote the interests of shareholders and other stakeholders. Freed from pressures that could
2.4 Probity/honesty
Hopefully this should be the most self-evident of the principles, relating not only to telling the truth
but also to not misleading shareholders and other stakeholders by presenting information in a
biased way.
2.5 Responsibility
For management to be held properly responsible, there must be a system in place that allows for
corrective action and penalising mismanagement. Responsible management should do, when
necessary, whatever it takes to set the company on the right path.
The board of directors must act responsively to, and with responsibility towards, all stakeholders of
the company. However, the responsibility of directors to other stakeholders, both in terms of to
whom they are responsible and the extent of their responsibility, remains a key point of contention in
corporate governance debates.
2.6 Accountability
Corporate accountability refers to whether an organisation (and its directors) are answerable in some
way for the consequences of their actions.
The board of directors is accountable to shareholders (see section 3). However, making the
accountability work is the responsibility of both parties. Directors, as we have seen, do so through
the quality of information that they provide, whereas shareholders do so through their willingness to
exercise their responsibility as owners, which means using the available mechanisms to query and
assess the actions of the board.
As with responsibility, one of the biggest debates in corporate governance is the extent of
management’s accountability towards other stakeholders, such as the community within which the
organisation operates.
2.7 Reputation
In the same way, directors’ concern for an organisation’s reputation will be demonstrated by the
extent to which they fulfil the other principles of corporate governance. There are purely commercial
reasons for promoting the organisation’s reputation, namely that the price of publicly traded shares
is often dependent on reputation and hence reputation can be a very valuable asset of the
organisation.
2.8 Judgement
Judgement means the board making decisions that enhance the prosperity of the organisation. This
means that board members must acquire a broad enough knowledge of the business and its
environment to be able to provide meaningful direction to it. This has implications not only for the
attention directors have to give to the organisation’s affairs but also for the way the directors are
recruited and trained.
The complexities of senior management mean that the directors have to bring multiple conceptual
skills to management that aim to maximise long-term returns. This means that corporate governance
can involve balancing many competing people and resource claims against each other.
2.9 Integrity
Integrity is straightforward dealing and completeness. What is required of financial reporting is that it
should be honest and that it should present a balanced picture of the state of the company’s affairs.
The integrity of reports depends on the integrity of those who prepare and present them. It can be
taken as meaning someone of high moral character, who sticks to principles no matter the pressure
to do otherwise. In working life, this means adhering to principles of professionalism and probity.
Straightforward dealing in relationships with the different people and constituencies whom you
meet is particularly important; trust is vital in relationships and belief in the integrity of those with
whom you are dealing underpins this.
2.10 Scepticism
You should be familiar with the concept of ‘professional scepticism‘ from your earlier auditing
studies: sound governance practices should also consider the importance of being sceptical about
all parts of the business, regardless of whether they have displayed any evidence of dysfunctional
behaviour. For example, if performance continues to exceed industry averages, even in periods of
economic downturn, it could be symptomatic of fraudulent financial reporting.
2.11 Innovation
Change happens; factors such as technological advances, social behaviour, market expectations and
even freak weather conditions can all have significant impacts on organisations and their
stakeholders, which means that governance structures need to be agile and responsive in order to
stay relevant.
• The FRC has issued the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code).
• The Code applies to all companies with a premium listing of equity shares on the London Stock
Exchange, regardless of whether they are incorporated in the UK or elsewhere.
• The 2018 Code is split into five broad categories and contains 18 principles supported by 41
more detailed provisions.
• The Code includes a number of disclosure requirements.
3.1 Overview
The application of the principles described above can be seen in corporate governance codes of
best practice. The UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code), first issued by the Financial Reporting
Council (FRC) in June 2010, replaced the Combined Code on Corporate Governance. Corporate
governance guidance in the UK has been continually reviewed since it was first issued in 1992. The
2010 Code resulted from the financial crisis in 2008–9 which triggered widespread reappraisal,
locally and internationally, of the governance systems which might have contributed to it. The Code
was further revised in September 2012 as part of the FRC’s ongoing response to the global recession
and financial crisis at the time, which emphasised the importance of increased transparency in the
way directors report on their activities, including their management of risk.
Following a consultation in late 2013, the FRC published a revised Code in September 2014, this
time targeting going concern, executive remuneration and risk management. The changes, made in
response to the Sharman Inquiry in 2012, were controversial with companies and investors: the
assessment of going concern by companies, in particular, was criticised for failing to address the
investors’ concerns, and placing a heavy risk management and reporting burden on boards.
The Code was revised again in April 2016 to reflect the implementation of the EU Audit Regulation
and Directive, focusing on the competence of audit committees, the requirement for mandatory
3.1.1 Compliance
The Code applies to all companies with a Premium Listing although any company can adopt it on a
voluntary basis as a benchmark of best practice.
All companies incorporated in the UK or elsewhere and listed on the Main Market of the London
Stock Exchange must disclose in their annual reports how they have applied the principles of the
Code. The Listing Rules require listed companies to make a disclosure statement in two parts:
(a) The company has to report on how it applies the principles in the Code. The form and content
of this part of the statement are not prescribed, the intention being that companies should have
a free hand to explain their governance policies in the light of the principles, including any
special circumstances applying to them which have led to a particular approach.
(b) The company has either to confirm that it complies with the Code’s provisions or to provide an
explanation where it does not.
Note: This ‘comply or explain’ approach has been widely welcomed by both company boards and
investors for the flexibility it offers
The introduction to the Code makes the following points:
• Reporting should be meaningful when explaining how the Code has been applied, avoiding what
is sometimes referred to as ‘boilerplate’ reporting.
• Non-compliance may be justified if factors such as the size, complexity, history or ownership
structure of a company demand that an alternative approach is reported.
• Temporary departures from any of the Code’s provisions should indicate a timescale for
conformance.
The role of the board Every company should be headed by an effective and entrepreneurial
board which is collectively responsible for the long-term sustainable
success of the company and to add value to shareholders and society in
general.
Culture The board should promote a culture that is aligned to the company’s
overall purpose, values and strategy by ensuring directors act with
integrity.
Engagement Boards should engage fully with both shareholders and stakeholders to
allow suitable participation by all parties in the management of the
company.
Workforce The way the company manages the workforce must be in line with the
company’s overall culture and must allow their views to be heard.
Division of
responsibilities
Chair The chair should lead the board and ensure it is effective in directing the
company by demonstrating sound judgement and promoting inclusive
and informed debate.
Balance The board should consist of an appropriate mix of executives and non-
executives, stressing the role that independence can play in reducing
unwelcome dominance.
Non-executives Non-executive directors (NEDs) should have sufficient time and resource
to allow them to challenge and support management in an appropriate
way.
Support Boards need suitable levels of information, time and other resources,
including the company secretary, to function in an efficient and effective
manner.
Composition,
succession and
evaluation
Qualities The board should always possess appropriate levels of skill, experience
and knowledge which should be achieved by regularly refreshing the
board’s membership.
Assessment Both individual board members and the board as a whole should be
appraised on a regular basis to ensure they continue to achieve the
company’s objectives.
Audit and reporting Directors should ensure both internal and external audit are effective
and independent and that the company’s reports display suitable levels
of integrity.
Viability The board should ensure a realistic and clear picture of the company’s
current and future prospects is presented to all stakeholders.
Risk and control The board should understand the risks that the company faces and
ensure they help achieve the company’s objectives, supported by
suitable internal controls.
Remuneration
• Length of service limits of no more than nine years for the chair and any non-executive directors
(Provisions 10 and 19)
• Non-executive directors (preferably independent, excluding the chair) to make up the majority of
the board (Provision 11)
• The crucial roles that both the senior independent director and non-executive directors can play
in supporting the board and shareholders (Provisions 12 and 13)
• Nominations committees consisting of a majority of non-executive directors (Provision 17)
• All directors (including non-executives) to be subject to annual re-election (Provision 18)
• Audit committees should consist entirely of at least three independent non-executive directors
with at least one member possessing suitable financial experience (Provision 24)
• Audit committees should review the financial statements, internal control and risk management
systems, as well as the effectiveness of internal audit and all matters related to the external
auditor’s appointment, terms of reference, independence, effectiveness and any non-audit work
carried out (Provision 25)
• Remuneration committees should consist entirely of at least three independent non-executive
directors (Provision 32)
• Non-executive directors’ fees should either be set by the board or set out in the company’s
articles of association, with no share options or performance-related elements allowed (Provision
34)
• Executive remuneration schemes where share options are used should use a vesting period of at
least five years (Provision 36)
• Executive remuneration schemes should allow for awards to be reclaimed from directors for a
specified reason (Provision 37)
There were some areas of the 2016 Code that were not carried forward to the current version:
• The need to arrange insurance cover in respect of legal action against directors
• Boards should be of sufficient size to accommodate business needs
• Non-executives should be appointed for a fixed period, ideally not exceeding six years (now
superseded by Provision 18)
• Benchmarking remuneration against other companies, leading to policies that risk the upward
ratchet of remuneration levels with no corresponding improvement in performance
• Remuneration disclosures for executives who leave the company to take up a non-executive
position at another company
Use the various principles and provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code to help you
structure an answer when presented with a series of governance issues.
• The board of directors should be responsible for taking major policy and strategic decisions and
use the best information available to it.
• Directors should have a mix of skills and their performance should be assessed regularly.
• Independent non-executive directors have a key role in governance. Their number and status
should mean that their views carry significant weight.
5 Associated guidance
Section overview
• The UK Stewardship Code aims to enhance the relationship between companies and institutional
investors.
• The FRC provides guidance on risk management and internal control.
• The FRC has issued specific guidance on audit committees.
Principles for asset owners and asset managers Principles for service providers
Investment approach
Engagement
9. Engagement
10. Collaboration
11. Escalation
You should note the enhanced importance of environmental issues within the 2020 Code, which
reflects the significance of such matters throughout 21st Century corporate reporting.
(Source: FRC (2020) The UK Stewardship Code 2020. [Online] Available at:
https://www.frc.org.uk/getattachment/5aae591d-d9d3-4cf4-814a-d14e156a1d87/Stewardship-
Code_Dec-19-Final-Corrected.pdf [Accessed 6 July 2020])
5.2 The FRC’s Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial
and Business Reporting
In 2014, the FRC issued its Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and
Business Reporting, replacing and combining its earlier guidance on Internal Control: Revised
Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code and Going Concern and Liquidity Risk: Guidance for
Directors of UK Companies.
• Corporate governance models differ around the world, but the following principles and
legislation are widely recognised:
– The G20/OECD Principles of Corporate Governance (G20/OECD Principles)
– The Sarbanes–Oxley Act in the US (SOX)
– The UK Corporate Governance Code (covered in earlier sections)
• The G20/OECD Principles resulted from market pressure for standardisation of governance
guidelines.
• The G20/OECD Principles are non-binding but are intended to assist governments, stock
exchanges, investors and companies. They cover the following six areas:
– Ensuring the basis for an effective corporate governance framework
– The rights of shareholders
– The equitable treatment of shareholders
– The role of stakeholders
– Disclosure and transparency
– The responsibilities of the board
• The introduction of SOX in the US resulted from the Enron scandal.
• SOX is a ‘rules-based’ rather than ‘principles-based’ approach to improving corporate
governance.
• The Act applies to all companies that are required to file accounts with the Securities and
Exchange Commission. This includes non-US companies who list their shares in the US and
therefore affects companies worldwide.
• The FRC publication Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Business and Financial
Reporting (based on the Turnbull Report) sets out best practice on internal control for UK-listed
companies.
• Turnbull emphasises that a risk-based approach to establishing a system of internal control should
be adopted.
• Directors should have a defined process for the review of effectiveness of control.
• International companies listed in the US must comply with Sarbanes–Oxley.
• The auditor is required to review the statement of compliance with the UK Corporate Governance
Code made by directors.
• This review includes the statement on control effectiveness.
• The auditor will need to perform procedures to obtain appropriate evidence to support the
compliance statement made by the company.
LR 9.8.6 R(3) The longer term viability of the entity, including its going concern status
and any material uncertainty (provisions 30 and 31)
The auditor’s report should then include details of any non-compliance with these requirements.
ISA (UK) 720 (Revised November 2019) , The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information
treats the corporate governance statement as statutory other information ie, “those documents or
reports that are required to be prepared and issued by the entity … in relation to which the auditor is
required to report publicly in accordance with law or regulation” (ISA (UK) 720: para 12d). In the UK,
this statutory other information includes the directors’ report, strategic report and the separate
corporate governance statement. This ISA requires that the auditor’s report always includes a
separate section headed ‘Other Information’ and this is covered in more detail in Chapter 8.
Notes
1 Bulletin 2006/5 predates the introduction of the UK Corporate Governance Code and therefore
still refers to the Combined Code, its predecessor.
2 The guidance in Bulletin 2006/5 on directors’ statements on going concern has been replaced by
guidance in Bulletin 2009/4 Developments in Corporate Governance Affecting the
Responsibilities of Auditors of UK Companies (see below).
3 These Bulletins have not been updated to reflect the changes made to the ISAs (UK) revised in
June 2016 and beyond.
The process of reviewing the disclosures made (or even the absence of such disclosures) requires
good judgement to make sure the spirit of the UK Code is being adhered to. Do you think such
disclosures are the most effective way of informing the users of the financial statements?
• Auditors have to communicate various audit-related matters to those charged with governance.
• This section summarises and builds on the important points covered by the Audit and Assurance
paper at Professional Level.
• In particular there have been some recent revisions to ISA 260 relating to the audit of entities
reporting on how they have applied the UK Corporate Governance Code.
Definition
Governance: The term used to describe the role of persons with responsibility for overseeing the
strategic direction of the entity and obligations related to the accountability of the entity. This
includes overseeing the financial reporting process. Those charged with governance may include
management only when it performs such functions. (In the UK, those charged with governance
include the directors (executive and non-executive) and members of the audit committee. In the UK,
management will not normally include non-executive directors.)
9.1.1 Objectives
ISA (UK) 260 states that the objectives of the auditor are to (ISA (UK) 260.9):
(a) communicate clearly with those charged with governance the responsibilities of the auditor in
relation to the financial statement audit and an overview of the planned scope and timing of the
audit;
(b) obtain from those charged with governance information relevant to the audit;
(c) provide those charged with governance with timely observations arising from the audit that are
significant and relevant to their responsibility to oversee the financial reporting process; and
(d) promote effective two-way communication between the auditor and those charged with
governance.
The auditor must communicate audit matters of governance interest arising from the audit of
financial statements with those charged with governance of an entity. The scope of the ISA (UK) is
limited to matters that come to the auditor’s attention as a result of the audit; the auditors are not
required to perform procedures to identify matters of governance interest.
The auditor must determine the relevant persons who are charged with governance and with whom
audit matters of governance interest are communicated.
The auditors may communicate with the whole board, the supervisory board or the audit committee
depending on the governance structure of the organisation. To avoid misunderstandings, the
engagement letter should explain that auditors will only communicate matters that come to their
attention as a result of the performance of the audit. It should state that the auditors are not required
to design procedures for the purpose of identifying matters of governance interest.
The auditor is required to communicate their findings from the course of the audit – it is imperative
that the requirements of the standards are followed or the firm could face significant problems.
1. Can you explain what good and bad systems of corporate governance look like?
2. Can you explain the concepts that underpin sound corporate governance?
3. Do you understand what the UK Corporate Governance Code includes and how it expects
UK companies to apply it? Can you explain how this works in other countries?
4. Do you understand the various roles played by board members including non-executive
directors?
5. Are you aware of current developments in governance, such as the Stewardship Code, the
guidance on risk management and internal control and the various forms of
communication required to satisfy best practice?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
SPV You may be required to assess the governance practices in place across an
organisation, so this question should help you learn how this can be
achieved.
Hammond Brothers Further scenario practice, this time focusing on remuneration issues and
matters of a control nature.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Couvert requirement Good practice of how governance could be tested in the exam.
(2)
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
2 Division of responsibilities
• The chair – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle F
• Balance within the board – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle G
• Non-executives – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle H
• Support – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle I
5 Remuneration
• Alignment with long term strategy – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle P
• Formal and transparent policies – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle Q
• Judgement and discretion – UK Corporate Governance Code Principle R
1 SPV
SPV is listed on the stock exchange of a central European country. The company manufactures a wide
range of pharmaceutical products, including modern drugs used in preventing and treating
diseases. SPV has three factories where drugs are produced and one research and development
facility.
The board of directors comprises the chair/CEO, three executive and two non-executive directors
(NEDs). Separate audit and remuneration committees are maintained, although the chair has a seat
on both those committees. The NEDs are appointed for two and usually three consecutive four-year
terms of office before being required to resign. The internal auditor currently reports to the board
(rather than the financial accountant) on a monthly basis, with internal audit reports normally being
actioned by the board.
There have recently been problems with the development of a new research and development
facility. On a number of occasions the project has fallen behind schedule and the costs have been
much greater than expected. Because of developments that have taken place elsewhere in the
pharmaceuticals industry while the project was being completed, concern has been expressed that
the facility cannot now represent value for money. A couple of large institutional investors have
raised concerns about this, and have indicated their intention to raise the issue at the annual AGM
and possibly vote against the accounts.
Throughout the project one of the non-executive directors criticised the way the project had been
approved and monitored. She claimed that the board had been led by the senior managers in the
research and development department and had acted as no more than a rubber stamp for what they
wanted to do. She is threatening to resign at the AGM on the grounds that the board is failing to
function effectively and she does not wish to be held responsible for decisions on which she has had
no effective input. As a result, the other non-executive director has also raised questions about the
way the board is functioning.
Requirements
1.1 Explain the purpose and role of the remuneration committee
1.2 Evaluate the structures for corporate governance within SPV, recommending any amendments
you consider necessary to those structures
2 Hammond Brothers
Hammond Brothers, a road haulage company, is likely to be seeking a stock exchange listing in a few
years’ time. In preparation for this, the directors are seeking to understand certain key
recommendations of the major international corporate governance codes, since they realise that
they will have to strengthen their corporate governance arrangements. In particular the directors
require information about what the governance reports have achieved in:
• defining the role of non-executive directors;
• improving disclosure in financial accounts;
• strengthening the role of the auditor; and
• protecting shareholder interests.
Previously the directors have received the majority of their income from the company in the form of
salary and have decided salary levels among themselves. They realise that they will have to establish
a remuneration committee but are unsure of its role and what it will need to function effectively. The
directors have worked together well, if informally; there is a lack of formal reporting and control
systems both at the board and lower levels of management. There is also currently no internal audit
department.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
1 SPV
1.1 Role of board
Each individual board of directors will take on particular tasks peculiar to their own company
and these will be different from company to company. However, there are three key tasks that
will be addressed by all boards of directors to one degree or another.
Strategic management
The development of the strategy of the company will almost certainly be led by the board of
directors. At the very least they will be responsible for setting the context for the development
of strategy, defining the nature and focus of the operations of the business and determining
the mission statement and values of the business.
Strategic development will also consist of assessing the opportunities and threats facing the
business, considering, developing and screening the strategic proposals and selecting and
implementing appropriate strategies. Some or all of this more detailed strategic development
may be carried out by the board, but also may be delegated to senior management with
board supervision.
In the case of SPV, the board appears to have had inadequate involvement in the development
of strategy. While the board may use advice from expert managers, the board should also have
challenged what they provided and carried out its own analysis; possible threats from rivals
appear to have been inadequately considered.
Control
The board of directors is ultimately responsible for the monitoring and control of the activities
of the company. They are responsible for the financial records of the company and that the
financial statements are drawn up using appropriate accounting policies and show a true and
fair view. They are also responsible for the internal controls within the business that ensure the
financial information is accurate and the assets are safeguarded.
The board will also be responsible for the direction of the company and ensuring that the
managers and employees work towards the strategic objectives that have been set. This can
be done by the use of plans, budgets, quality and performance indicators and benchmarking.
Again what has happened with the projects appears to indicate board failings. It seems that
the board failed to spot inadequacies in the accounting information that managers were
receiving about the new project, and did not ensure that action was taken by managers to
control the overruns in time and the excessive costs that the accounting information may have
identified. The board also seems to have failed to identify inadequacies in the information that
it was receiving itself.
Shareholder and market relations
The board of directors has an important role externally to the company. The board is
responsible for raising the profile of the company and promoting the company’s interests in
its own and possibly other marketplaces.
The board has an important role in managing its relationships with its shareholders. The board
is responsible for maintaining relationships and dialogue with all shareholders, plus
stakeholders as well. As well as the formal dialogue at the AGM many boards of directors have
a variety of informal methods of keeping shareholders informed of developments and
proposals for the company. Methods include informal meetings, company websites, social
reports and environmental reports.
The institutional shareholders’ intention to vote against the accounts is normally seen as a last
resort measure, if other methods of exercising their influence and communicating their
concerns have failed. This indicates that the board has failed to communicate effectively with
the institutional shareholders.
2 Hammond Brothers
2.1 Purpose and role of remuneration committee
The purpose of the remuneration committee is to provide a mechanism for determining the
remuneration packages of executive directors. The scope of the review should include not
only salaries and bonuses, but also share options, pension rights and compensation for loss of
office.
The committee’s remit may also include issues such as director appointments and succession
planning, as these are connected with remuneration levels.
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Overview of the audit process
2 Audit planning
3 Professional scepticism
4 Understanding the entity
5 Business risk model
6 Audit risk model
7 Creative accounting
8 Materiality
9 Responding to assessed risks
10 Other audit methodologies
11 Information technology and risk assessment
12 Big data
13 Data analytics, robotic process automation (RPA) and artificial
intelligence (AI)
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Evaluate and explain current and emerging issues in auditing including developments in the use
of technology (eg, impact of Task Force on Climate-related Financial disclosures, big data, data
analytics and artificial intelligence)
• Identify the components of risk and how these components may interrelate
• Appraise the entity and the, potentially complex, economic environment within which it operates
as a means of identifying and evaluating the risk of material misstatement
• Identify the risks, including analysing quantitative and qualitative data, arising from, or affecting, a
potentially complex set of business processes and circumstances and assess their implications for
the engagement
• Identify significant business risks (including those arising from cyber security and technological
advances including cloud computing, cryptocurrencies and robotic process automation) and
assess their potential impact upon the financial statements and the audit engagement
• Evaluate the impact of risk and materiality in preparing the audit plan, for example the nature,
timing and extent of audit procedures
• Evaluate the components of audit risk for a specified scenario using data analytics software when
appropriate, including the interactions of inherent risk, control risk and detection risk, considering
their complementary and compensatory nature
• Interrogate an organisation’s accounting records using data analytics software to identify audit
risks
• Show professional scepticism in assessing the risk of material misstatement, having regard to the
reliability of management
• Prepare, based upon planning procedures, an appropriate audit strategy and detailed audit plan
or extracts
• Analyse and evaluate the control environment for an entity based on an understanding of the
entity, its operations and its processes
• Evaluate an entity’s processes for identifying, assessing and responding to business and
operating risks as they impact on the financial statements
• Explain and evaluate the relationship between audit risk and audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 10(c), 11(a)–(e), 11(g), 11(h), 11(j), 11(k), 12(a), 12(b),
14(a)
5
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 201
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance questions
5 Business risk model Approach You will need to be IQ1: Financial risk
As well as being part Consider business on the lookout for A short illustration of
of sound risks and how they various situations the connection
governance, could impact on the that could create between these two
business risks can financial statements. misstatement of types of risk.
be used to some kind.
Stop and think IQ2: Audit
understand the procedures
areas of the financial Can you explain why
statements at this is not the same Great practice for
greatest risk of as audit risk but can interrogating a
being misstated. still be helpful when scenario and
identifying areas of considering the
audit risk? implications of your
findings.
IQ3: Identifying
business risk
Further practice of
how the business
risk approach is
used to consider the
impact of certain
business issues on
the audit.
6 Audit risk model Approach You may find it IQ4: Inherent risks
A comprehensive Review this content helpful to consider from financial
background of the with your previous the separate reporting policies
elements that go studies in mind and components of audit A useful starting
into the assessment focus on how you risk (inherent, point in explaining
of audit risk. would apply this control and inherent risk.
knowledge in a detection) in
structuring your IQ5: Audit risk
more complex
scenario. answer. A more detailed
scenario which will
Stop and think help you understand
Note how practical how to identify and
the approaches in explain audit risks in
this section are. an exam situation.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 203
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance questions
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
The audit is designed to enable the auditor to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence.
1.1 Overview
While there may be variations between specific procedures adopted by individual firms, the audit
process as set out in auditing standards is a well-defined methodology designed to enable the
auditor to obtain sufficient, appropriate evidence.
This process can be summarised in a number of key stages:
Figure 5.1: Summary of audit process
In this chapter we will consider stages 1 to 4. In Chapter 6 we will consider stage 5, and in Chapter 8,
stages 6 and 7. However, it is important not to view the audit as a series of discrete stages and
individual audit procedures. For example, it can be argued that all audit procedures which provide
evidence are risk assessment procedures whether they are conducted during planning, control
evaluation, substantive testing or completion. The audit process will adopt a strategy where
complementary evidence is acquired and evaluated from a range of sources. The process is repeated
until the auditor has obtained sufficient, appropriate audit evidence which is adequate to form an
opinion.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 205
2 Audit planning
Section overview
2.1 Introduction
Auditors are required to plan their work to ensure that attention is paid to the correct areas of the
audit, and the work is carried out in an effective manner.
In order to produce this plan the auditor must do the following:
• Understand the business, its control environment, its control procedures and its accounting
system
• Assess the risk of material misstatement
• Determine materiality
• Develop an audit strategy setting out in general terms how the audit is to be carried out and the
type of approach to be adopted
• Produce an audit plan which details specific procedures to be carried out to implement the
strategy taking into account all the evidence and information collected to date
You have already covered planning and risk assessment issues in your earlier studies. The relevant
ISAs are:
• ISA (UK) 210 (Revised June 2016), Agreeing the Terms of Audit Engagements
• ISA (UK) 300 (Revised June 2016), Planning an Audit of Financial Statements
• ISA (UK) 315 (Revised June 2016), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement
Through Understanding of the Entity and Its Environment
• ISA (UK) 320 (Revised June 2016), Materiality in Planning and Performing an Audit
• ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017), The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks
A number of issues are developed in the remainder of this chapter; however, it is assumed that you
are already familiar with the basic principles of planning and risk assessment. A summary of these
and other related ISAs can be found in the technical reference section at the end of the chapter.
3 Professional scepticism
Section overview
The auditor must maintain an attitude of professional scepticism throughout the audit.
3.1 Requirement
Definition
Professional scepticism: An attitude that includes a questioning mind, being alert to conditions
which may indicate possible misstatement due to error or fraud, and a critical assessment of audit
evidence.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 207
4 Understanding the entity
Section overview
• The auditor obtains an understanding of the entity in order to assess the risks of material
misstatement.
• Information will be sought regarding the industry in which the business operates and the different
business processes within the entity itself.
4.1 Procedures
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised June 2016), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement
Through Understanding of the Entity and Its Environment paragraph 3 states that: “the objective of
the auditor is to identify and assess the risks of material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error,
at the financial statement and assertion levels, through understanding the entity and its environment,
including the entity’s internal control, thereby providing a basis for designing and implementing
responses to the assessed risks of material misstatement”.
Figure 5.2: Audit risk assessment
(Source: ICAEW Audit and Assurance Faculty (2004) Auditing Standards – All Change: A Short Guide
to Selected International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland))
You will have studied the financial statement assertions in your earlier studies and you will find a
more detailed recap including changes resulting from the June 2016 revised standards in Chapter 6
(such as the inclusion of presentation and disclosure assertions within transactions and balances).
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised June 2016) sets out various methods by which the auditors may obtain this
understanding:
• Enquiries of management and others within the entity
Inventory
If certain items of the inventory are obsolescent due to the fact that it has been produced in excess of
the customer’s requirement and there is no other available market for the inventory, then there is a
risk that inventory as a whole in the financial statements will not be carried at the appropriate value.
Given that inventory is likely to be a material balance in the statement of financial position of a
manufacturing company, and the value could be up to 10% of the total value, this has the capacity to
be a material misstatement.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 209
The factors that will contribute to the likelihood of these risks causing a misstatement are matters
such as:
• whether management regularly review inventory levels and scrap items that are obsolescent;
• whether such items are identified and scrapped at the inventory count; or
• whether such items can be put back into production and changed so that they are saleable.
Losing custom
The long-term risk of losing custom is that in the future the company will not be able to operate (a
going concern risk). It could have an impact on the financial statements, if sales were disputed,
revenue and receivables could be overstated; that is, not carried at the correct value. However, it
appears less likely that this would be a material problem in either area, as the problem is likely to be
restricted to a few customers, and only a few sales to those customers.
Again, review of the company’s controls over the recording of sales and the debt collection
procedures of the company would indicate how likely these risks to the financial statements are to
materialise.
Some risks identified may be significant risks (indicated by the following factors), in which case they
present special audit considerations for the auditors:
• Risk of fraud
• Its relationship with recent developments
• The degree of subjectivity in the financial information
• The fact that it is an unusual transaction
• It is a significant transaction with a related party
• The complexity of the transaction
Routine, non-complex transactions are less likely to give rise to significant risk than unusual
transactions or matters of director judgement because the latter are likely to have more management
intervention, complex accounting principles or calculations, greater manual intervention or lower
opportunity for control procedures to be followed.
When auditors identify a significant risk, if they have not done so already, they should evaluate the
design and implementation of the entity’s controls in that area.
4.2.1 Industry
The type of entity being audited will have a significant impact on the audit plan. For example:
Relatively little investment in plant and Large investment in plant and equipment; office
equipment; office space main building cost space relatively small in comparison to
production facilities
An understanding and appreciation of these differences will assist the auditor in identifying risk areas
and in developing an appropriate audit approach.
An understanding of each process focuses the auditor’s attention on specific parts of the business.
Financing Verification of new share issues / confirming current account and loan
balances and where necessary bank support for the business.
Human resources Audit of wages and salaries, including bonuses linked to production and
commission on sales.
The actual audit approach will depend partly on the audit methodology used.
Scenarios are usually long and complex but will usually contain all the information you require to
evaluate audit risk. Understanding the entity is therefore a process that takes time to master, but
eventually helps you build up a better overall view of an organisation.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 211
5 Business risk model
Section overview
• Business risk is the risk arising to the business that it will not achieve its objectives.
• Corporate governance guidelines emphasise the importance of risk management processes
within a business.
• The business risk model of auditing requires the auditor to consider the entity’s process of
assessing business risk and the impact this might have in terms of material misstatement.
Definitions
Financial risks: Risks arising from the company’s financial activities (eg, investment risks) or the
financial consequences of operations (eg, receivables risks).
Examples: going concern, market risk, overtrading, credit risk, interest rate risk, currency risk, cost of
capital, treasury risks.
Operating risks: Risks arising from the operations of the business.
Examples: loss of orders; loss of key personnel; physical damage to assets; poor brand
management; technological change; stock-outs; business processes unaligned to objectives.
Compliance risks: Risks arising from non-compliance with laws, regulations, policies, procedures and
contracts.
Examples: breach of company law, non-compliance with accounting standards; listing rules; taxation;
health and safety; environmental regulations; litigation risk against client.
The UK’s adoption of the General Data Protection Regulation as part of EU law could also be
included here, although compliance is just as important for auditors as it is for their clients.
Business risk may be caused by many factors, or a combination of factors, including the following:
• Complex environment
• Dynamic environment
• Competitors’ actions
• Inappropriate strategic decision-making
• Operating gearing
• Financial gearing
• Lack of diversification
• Susceptibility to currency fluctuations
• Inadequate actual or contingent financial resources
• Dependence on one or few customers
• Regulatory change or violation
• Adequacy and reliability of suppliers
• Overtrading
Product quality issues related to inadequate Inventory values – net realisable value and
control over supply chain and transportation inventory returns
damage
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 213
Principal risk Immediate Financial Statement implications
Tests of controls As the auditor pays greater attention to the high level controls used by
directors to manage business risks, controls testing will be focused on
items such as the control environment and corporate governance rather
than the detailed procedural controls tested under traditional
approaches.
Analytical procedures Analytical procedures are used more heavily in a business risk approach,
as they are consistent with the auditor’s desire to understand the entity’s
business rather than to prove the figures in the financial statements.
Detailed testing The combination of the above two factors, particularly the higher use of
analytical procedures, will result in a lower requirement for detailed
testing, although substantive testing will not be eliminated completely.
Requirement
Respond to the engagement partner’s email.
• Audit risk is the risk that the auditors may give an inappropriate opinion when the financial
statements are materially misstated.
• The risk of material misstatement is made up of inherent risk and control risk.
• The audit risk model expresses the relationship between the different components of risk as
follows: Audit risk = Inherent risk × Control risk × Detection risk
• Business risk forms part of the inherent risk associated with the financial statements.
• Information gained in obtaining an understanding of the business is used to assess inherent risk.
• Assessment of control risk involves assessing the control environment and control activities.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 215
6.1 Audit risk
Definitions
Audit risk: The risk that auditors may give an inappropriate audit opinion when the financial
statements are materially misstated. Audit risk has two key components risk of material misstatement
in financial statements (financial statement risk) and the risk of the auditor not detecting the material
misstatements in financial statements (detection risk). The risk of material misstatement breaks down
into inherent risk and control risk.
Inherent risk: The susceptibility of an assertion about a class of transaction, account balance or
disclosure to a misstatement that could be material, either individually or when aggregated with
other misstatements, before consideration of any related controls.
Control risk: The risk that a misstatement could occur in an assertion about a class of transaction,
account balance or disclosure and that could be material, either individually or when aggregated
with other misstatements, will not be prevented, or detected and corrected, on a timely basis by the
entity’s internal control.
Detection risk: The risk that the procedures performed by the auditor to reduce audit risk to an
acceptably low level will not detect a misstatement that exists and that could be material, either
individually or when aggregated with other misstatements.
Note: The ISAs (UK) do not ordinarily refer to inherent risk and control risk separately but rather to
the combined ‘risks of material misstatement’. Firms may assess them together or separately
depending on their preferred methodology and audit techniques.
This model will then assist in the determination of the extent and type of procedures to be
performed. For example, the higher the assessment of inherent and control risk, the lower the
assessment of detection risk resulting in more evidence being obtained from the performance of
substantive procedures.
Notes
1 One of the criticisms of the ARM is the ‘compensatory’ approach it takes. In the table above, high
inherent and control risk is compensated for by low detection risk. Arguments have been put
forward that evidence should be complementary rather than compensatory.
2 Inherent risk and control risk are either ‘high’ or ‘low’ in the above table. This ‘all or nothing’
approach is adopted by some audit firms. Thus, for instance, where there is a significant risk
event with respect to an audit area, then the inherent risk would always be deemed to be high.
Other audit firms may see risk as a spectrum with, for instance, an intermediate rating of
(Source: Eilifsen, A., William, M. Jr, Glover, S. Prawitt, D.F. (2005) Auditing and Assurance Services
International Edition. Maidenhead: McGraw-Hill Education.)
Note: Notice the relationship between business risk (which we looked at in detail above) and audit
risk. Business risk includes all risks facing the business. In other words, inherent audit risk may
include business risks.
In response to business risk, the directors institute a system of controls. These will include controls to
mitigate against the financial aspect of the business risk. These are the controls that audit control risk
incorporates.
Therefore, although audit risk is very financial statements focused, business risk does form part of the
inherent risk associated with the financial statements (ie, is part of financial statement risk) not least
because, if the risks materialise, the going concern basis of the financial statements could be
affected.
The following illustrates the link between business risk and financial statement risk:
Computer viruses could lead to significant loss Uncertainties over going concern may not be
of sales fully disclosed
The business may suffer losses from credit card Losses arising from frauds may not be
fraud recognised in the financial statements
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 217
6.2.2 Inherent risk
As we saw earlier, the risk of material misstatement is made up of:
• inherent risk
• control risk
Inherent risk is the risk that items will be misstated due to characteristics of those items, such as the
fact they are estimates and that they are important items in the accounts. The auditors must use their
professional judgement and the understanding of the entity they have gained to assess inherent risk.
If no such information or knowledge is available then the inherent risk is high.
Integrity and attitude to risk of directors and Domination by a single individual can cause
management problems
Assets at risk of being lost or stolen Cash, inventory, portable non-current assets
(computers)
Notes
1 There will not be one strategy for the entire audit. Each business process or specific audit
assertion will be allocated its own strategy. Similarly, each audit assertion may be allocated a
different ‘mix’ of reliance and substantive strategy.
2 Auditing standards do require some substantive testing for each material class of transactions,
account balances and disclosure, so the audit strategy for any one assertion will never be
completely a reliance strategy.
3 However, it is possible (but unusual) that substantive testing may comprise entirely of analytical
procedures, without any tests of details being carried out.
An auditor is more likely to follow a reliance strategy where:
• an entity uses electronic data interchange to initiate orders; there will be no paper
documentation to verify;
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 219
• an entity provides electronic services to its customers eg, an internet service provider or
telephone company. No physical goods are produced, with all information being collected and
billing carried out electronically; and
• the test is for understatement.
An auditor is more likely to follow a substantive strategy where:
• there are no controls available for a specific audit assertion;
• the controls are assessed as ineffective;
• it is inefficient to test the effectiveness of the controls; and
• the test is for overstatement.
Whichever strategy is chosen, the auditor will document the reasons for choosing that strategy and
then perform detailed auditing procedures in accordance with that strategy.
Control environment
Within an entity, the control system works within the control environment. A poor control
environment implies that the control system itself will also be poor, because the entity does not place
sufficient emphasis on having a good control environment.
So, the control environment sets the philosophy of an entity effectively influencing the ‘control
consciousness’ of directors and employees. The importance of the enforcement of integrity and
ethical values was illustrated in July 2011, with the closure of the News of the World newspaper
resulting from phone hacking allegations.
Factors affecting the control environment include:
Factor Explanation
Communication and An organisation should try to maintain the integrity and ethical
enforcement of integrity standing of the employees. Membership of a professional body helps
and ethical values enforce ethical standards for professional staff. Ethics in other areas
are maintained by ensuring rules do not encourage unethical conduct
(eg, unrealistically high sales targets to earn commissions).
Commitment to Each job should have a job description showing the standards
competence expected in that job. Employees should then be hired with the
competences to carry out the job without compromising on the
quality of work produced.
Participation by those Those charged with governance should take an active role in ensuring
charged with governance ethical standards are maintained. For example, the audit committee
should ensure that directors carry out their duties correctly in the
context of the audit. Similarly, those charged with governance must
ensure appropriate independence from the company they are
governing.
Management philosophy Management should set the example of following ethical and quality
standards. Where management establish a risk management system
and regularly discuss the effect of risks on an organisation then the
auditor will gain confidence that the overall control environment is
effective.
Structure of the The structure of the organisation should ensure that authority is
organisation delegated appropriately so that lower management levels can
implement appropriate risk management procedures. However,
responsibility for risk management overall is maintained by the board.
Reporting hierarchy Within the organisation’s hierarchy, each level of management has
responsibilities for risk included in their job description. There should
also be a clear reporting system so that objectives for risk
management are communicated down the hierarchy, while identified
risks are communicated back up the hierarchy for action.
HR policies and HR policies should have appropriate policies for ensuring the integrity
procedures of staff, both for new employees and for continued training and
development.
From a review of these factors, the auditor will form an opinion on the effectiveness of the control
environment. The auditor will also consider the means by which the entity monitors controls eg, by
the internal audit department. This in turn affects the opinion on how well the internal control
systems will be implemented and operated.
Control risk will also increase where specific events occur within an organisation. Events that tend to
increase control risk include the following:
• Use of new technology
• New or substantially amended information systems
• Hiring of new personnel, especially into key management roles
• Changes to the regulatory or operating environment
• Significant growth in the organisation
• Restructuring of the company or group
• Expansion of overseas operations
Control activities
Having assessed the control environment, the auditor will then identify and assess the control
activities carried out by management. Control activities in this context are the policies and
procedures that help ensure management’s directives are carried out.
Control activities that the auditor will investigate include:
Physical controls Controls to ensure the security of assets including data files and computer
programs (eg, not simply tangible assets such as company motor vehicles).
Performance Reviews to check the performance of individuals are carried out on a regular
reviews basis. The review includes comparing actual performance against agreed
standards and budgets and accounting/obtaining reasons for any variances.
Information These are controls to check the completeness, accuracy and authorisation of
processing the processing of transactions. Two types of controls are generally recognised:
controls • General controls – over the information processing environment as a whole,
for example to ensure the security of data processing operations and
maintenance of adequate backup facilities.
• Application controls – over the processing of individual transactions, again
ensuring the completeness and accuracy of recording.
Where the auditor is satisfied regarding the ability of the control environment to process transactions
correctly and control activities to identify deficiencies in that processing, then control risk can be set
to a low figure. Obviously, where the control environment is weak, and control activities are missing,
then control risk will be set to a higher level.
Control activities for transaction assertions
Within each class of transactions, the auditor will ensure that specific audit assertions have been
achieved. Remember that for each assertion, a different ‘mix’ of control and substantive procedures
may be used.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 221
For each of the audit assertions relevant to transaction testing, specific control activities are normally
available.
The assertions and control activities are summarised below.
Cut-off Transactions and events have been • Procedures for the prompt
recorded in the correct accounting recording of transactions
period • Internal verification of cut-off at
year end
Monitoring controls
The auditor should also assess the means by which management monitors internal control over
financial reporting. In many entities internal auditors fulfil this function. The impact on the audit of the
existence of an internal audit function is dealt with in ISA (UK) 610 (Revised 2016), Using the Work of
Internal Auditors.
Although you are unlikely to explicitly use the headings of inherent, control and detection risk when
determining audit risk, breaking it down into constituent parts can help you to assess risk more
effectively.
7 Creative accounting
Section overview
• There is a spectrum of activity with respect to accounting policy choice. Creative accounting
attempts to change users’ perceptions of the performance and position of a business.
• The occurrence of creative accounting depends on both incentives and opportunity.
• The consequences of creative accounting depend upon a range of factors that change over time
but are specific to individual companies.
• Creative accounting can be overt (disclosed) or covert (not disclosed).
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 223
• Red flags exist which may indicate that creative accounting practices have taken place.
• Empirical evidence supports the notion that creative accounting occurs on a widespread basis.
7.1 Introduction
One of the factors affecting the overall level of financial statement risk is the potential for creative
accounting.
Directors have choices and they may exercise those choices to recognise values that do not reflect
economic reality. A prime example is the choice of the cost model when an asset’s fair value is
significantly higher than cost. (Note: If an asset’s fair value and value in use were lower than cost,
then an impairment would be required under IAS 36 and directors would not have the discretion to
disclose at cost.) Directors are more likely to make use of their discretion to mislead financial
statement users if they have the opportunity (eg, imprecise accounting regulations, weak auditors)
and incentives (eg, approaching the breach of a debt covenant, an impending takeover, profit-based
bonus) to do so.
Creative accounting is covered from a financial reporting perspective in Chapter 24.
Definition
Creative accounting: The active manipulation of accounting results for the purpose of creating an
altered impression of the underlying financial position or performance of an enterprise by using
accounting rules and guidance in a spirit other than that which was intended when the rules were
written.
This well-documented practice is a potential problem for auditors in assessing the underlying
performance and position of a company and recent evidence suggests that it is one of the major
issues facing financial reporting.
Accounting measures involve a degree of subjectivity, choice and judgement and it would be wrong
to describe all such activity as creative accounting. Moreover, creative accounting normally falls
within permitted regulation and is not therefore illegal. It is therefore often a question of fine
judgement as to when creative accounting is of such an extent that it becomes misleading.
The spectrum of creative accounting practices may include the following (commencing with the most
legitimate):
• Exercise of normal accounting policy choice within the rules permitted by regulation (eg, first in,
first out and average cost for inventory valuation)
• Exercise of a degree of estimation, judgement or prediction by a company within reasonable
bounds (eg, non-current asset lives)
• Judgement concerning the nature or classification of a cost (eg, expensing and capitalising costs)
• Systematic selection of legitimate policy choices and estimations to alter the perception of the
position or performance of the business in a uniform direction
• Systematic selection of policy choice and estimations that fall on the margin of permitted
regulation (or are not subject to regulation) in order to alter materially the perception of the
performance or position of the business
• Setting up of artificial transactions to create circumstances where material accounting
misrepresentation can take place
• Fraudulent activities
It can thus be a matter of fine judgement for an auditor as to where within this spectrum creative
accounting becomes unacceptable.
Companies may also seek to manipulate the perception of their performance and position by
altering underlying transactions, rather than just the way they are recorded. Accounting regulation
seeks to limit the effects of this behaviour in a number of ways as previously discussed. Nevertheless,
while it may seek to report faithfully transactions that actually take place, it cannot regulate for
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 225
7.4 Causes of creative accounting – incentives
The following have been put forward as incentives for companies/managers engaging in creative
accounting:
• Income smoothing – Companies normally prefer to show a steady trend of growth in profits,
rather than volatility with significant rises and falls. Income smoothing techniques (eg, declaring
higher provisions and deferring income recognition in good years) contribute to reducing
volatility in reported earnings.
• Achieving forecasts – Where forecasts of future profits have been made, reported earnings may
be manipulated to tie in with these forecasts.
• Profit enhancement – This is where current year earnings are boosted to enhance the short-term
perception of performance.
• Maintain or boost share price – Where markets can be made to believe that increased earnings
represent improved underlying commercial performance, then share price may rise, or at least be
higher than it would be in the absence of creative accounting.
• Accounting-based contracts – Where accounting-based contracts exist (eg, loan covenants, profit-
related pay) then any accounting policy that falls within the terms of the contract may significantly
impact on the consequences of that contract. For example, the breach of a gearing-based debt
covenant may be avoided by the use of off balance sheet financing.
• Incentives for directors – There may be personal incentives for directors to enhance profit in order
to enhance their remuneration. Examples might include: bonuses based on earnings per share
(EPS), or share incentive schemes and share option schemes that require a given EPS before they
become operative. Directors may also benefit more indirectly from creative accounting by
increasing the security of their position.
• Taxation – Where accounting practices coincide with taxation regulations there may be an
incentive to reduce profit in order to reduce taxation. In these circumstances, however, it may be
necessary to convince not only the auditor but also HMRC.
• Regulated industries – Where an industry is currently, or potentially, regulated then there may be
an incentive to engage in creative accounting to reduce profit in order to influence the decisions
of the regulator. This may include utilities where regulators may curtail prices if it is perceived that
excessive profits are being earned. It may also be relevant to avoid a reference to the Competition
Commission.
• Internal accounting – A company as a whole may have reason to move profits from division to
division (or subsidiary to subsidiary) in order to affect tax calculations or justify the
closure/expansion of a particular department.
• Losses – Companies making losses may be under greater pressure to enhance reported
performance.
• Commercial pressures – Where companies have particular commercial pressures to enhance the
perception of the company there is increased risk of creative accounting; for example, a takeover
bid, or the raising of new finance.
Thus, a range of stakeholders may have incentives to engage in creative accounting. In particular,
however, an appropriate degree of professional scepticism should be applied where benefits arise
for directors, as they are also the group responsible for implementing creative accounting practices.
7.6 Sustainability
Some creative accounting practices are sustainable in the long term while others may only serve to
enhance the current year’s profit, but only with the effect that future profits are correspondingly
reduced.
Sustainable practices may include the following:
• Income smoothing – assuming it is smoothed at a normal level of profitability, it may be sustained
indefinitely
• Off balance sheet financing
Unsustainable practices include the following:
• Capitalisation of expenses – if, for instance, annual development costs are inappropriately
capitalised and amortised over 10 years then, after that period, assuming constant expenditure,
the profit will be equivalent for either write-off or amortisation policies (though not the statement
of financial position) as there will be 10 amounts of 10% amortisation recognised in profit or loss
• Revenue recognition – bringing forward the recognition of revenues may initially enhance profit,
but at the cost of reducing future profits
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 227
Accounting-based contracts
Whether creative accounting is covert or overt, it can affect the application of accounting-based
contracts, so long as the selected accounting treatment falls within the terms of that contract.
Typically, a restrictive covenant on gearing, or interest cover, may be avoided by enhancing equity or
earnings. This may benefit one stakeholder (eg, shareholders) but disadvantage another (eg,
debtholders).
8 Materiality
Section overview
Nature Given the definition of materiality that an item would affect the readers of the financial
statements, some items might by their nature affect readers. Examples include
transactions related to directors, such as remuneration and contracts with the company.
Value Some items will be significant in the financial statements by virtue of their size; for
example, if the company had bought a piece of land with a value which comprised
three-quarters of the asset value of the company, that would be material. That is why
materiality is often expressed in terms of percentages (of assets, of profits).
Impact Some items may by chance have a significant impact on financial statements; eg, a
proposed journal which is not material in size could convert a profit into a loss. The
difference between a small profit and a small loss could be material to some readers.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 229
Although there are general guidelines on how materiality might be calculated in practice, the
calculation involves the application of judgement. It should be reassessed throughout the course of
the audit as more information becomes available. Note that as materiality has both quantitative and
qualitative aspects risk assessment must include the analysis of both quantitative and qualitative
data.
Users’ needs
The auditor must consider the needs of the users of the financial statements when setting materiality.
The ISA indicates that it is reasonable for the auditor to assume that users:
• Have a reasonable knowledge of the business and economic activities and accounting and a
willingness to study the information in the financial statements with reasonable diligence
• Understand that financial statements are prepared and audited to levels of materiality
• Recognise the uncertainties inherent in the measurement of amounts based on the use of
estimates, judgement and the consideration of future events
• Make reasonable economic decisions on the basis of the information in the financial statements
Steps 1 and 2 would normally be performed as part of the planning process. Step 3 is normally
performed as part of the review stage of the audit when the auditor evaluates the audit evidence.
Auditors of companies applying the UK Corporate Governance Code are required to make
significant disclosures in the auditor’s report about how they have applied materiality in their audit.
Benchmark Threshold
(The benchmarks suggested above are based on information from the FRC publication Extended
Auditor‘s Reports: A review of Experience in the First Year, 2015.)
The following points should be noted:
• There is some variation used in the methods to determine materiality within and between audit
firms.
• Multiple measures are sometimes used to determine materiality.
• Adjusted profit before tax and profit before tax are the most commonly used measures.
Determining the level of materiality is a matter of professional judgement, rather than applying
benchmarks mechanically. In applying such judgements, the auditor should consider any relevant
qualitative factors, including:
• whether it is a first-year engagement;
• deficiencies in controls;
• material misstatements in prior years;
• risk of fraud;
• significant management turnover;
• unusually high market pressures;
• sensitivity of covenants in loan agreements to changes in the financial statements; and
• effect of changes in results on earnings trends.
The auditor’s assessment of materiality is then communicated in the auditor’s report (ISA700.38(c)).
By far the most common level of materiality for listed company auditors is 5% of adjusted profit
before tax. It is also necessary to determine a materiality threshold for reporting any unadjusted
differences to the audit committee. This will be much lower than overall materiality, and may be
communicated in the auditor’s report.
In the case of a group audit, the group auditor will also set materiality for the group as a whole, as
well as component materiality for any component auditors. Component materiality is always less than
group materiality.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 231
‘working level of materiality’, performance materiality is a concept that most experienced auditors
would have applied throughout their careers.
The auditor must set an amount or amounts at less than the materiality for the financial statements as
a whole and this is known as performance materiality. This could be set in two ways:
(a) as a judgemental estimate to reduce the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and
undetected misstatements exceeds the materiality for the financial statement as a whole; or
(b) specific materiality levels may be set for particular classes of transactions, account balances or
disclosures that could have a particular influence on users’ decisions in the particular
circumstances of the entity.
Different levels of materiality may therefore be used in the various audit procedures carried out.
The following example illustrates, in a simplistic way, the role of performance materiality in an audit.
Performance materiality should be used in both the planning and fieldwork stages of the audit. In the
November 2011 issue of the ICAEW Audit & Assurance Faculty newsletter, the article ‘Living in a
material world’ by David Gallagher usefully sets out four circumstances in which performance
materiality can be applied:
At the planning stage:
(1) to determine when no work is necessary, and where evidence is required, the extent of that
evidence; and
(2) to help identify which items to test (for example, if a substantive test of detail approach is
adopted, the auditor may consider selecting all items above performance materiality first, and then
consider whether any, and if so how many, further items should be sampled).
At the fieldwork stage:
(3) to help evaluate the results of sample tests (for example, if on a particular test the extrapolated
difference of potential misstatements is less than materiality, the auditor may conclude that sufficient
audit evidence had been obtained in this area); and
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 233
Ernst and Young’s auditor’s report for J Sainsbury plc (in relation to the 2016 Annual Report) provides
information about both overall materiality and performance materiality as follows:
“We determined materiality for the Group to be £31.9 million, which is 5% of profit before tax
excluding one-off items of £90 million as described in note 3. We believe that this materiality basis
provides us with the best assessment of the requirements of the users of the financial statements.
This is consistent with the approach taken by auditors in the prior period.
On the basis of our risk assessments, together with our assessment of the Group’s overall control
environment and this being our first period of engagement, our judgement was that performance
materiality was approximately 50% of our planning materiality, namely £16 million.”
(Source: J Sainsbury plc (2016) Annual Report and Financial Statements. [Online]. Available from:
www.about.sainsburys.co.uk/~/media/Files/S/Sainsburys/documents/reports-and-
presentations/annual-reports/annual-report-2016.pdf [Accessed 1 October 2019])
The evaluation of materiality often starts with a calculation but encourages auditors to consider other
factors as well when determining what should really be the focus in the audit. This approach of
combining both quantitative and qualitative factors is therefore a good way of demonstrating
judgement.
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Total assets 1,800 1,750
Total revenue 2,010 1,900
Profit before tax 10 300
As a result of the auditor’s risk assessment and assessment of materiality an audit strategy will be
developed in response. ISA (UK) 330 (Revised July 2017), The Auditor’s Responses to Assessed Risks
makes the following points in this context which you should be familiar with.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 235
The auditor may also make general changes to the nature, timing or extent of audit procedures, for
example by performing substantive procedures at the period end instead of at an interim date.
These decisions will take into account the auditor’s assessment and understanding of the control
environment.
9.2 Audit procedures responsive to risks of material misstatement at the assertion level
The auditor is required to design and perform procedures which will address the risks identified. The
ISA (UK) emphasises the link between further audit procedures and the risk assessment process.
Factors which the auditor will consider include the following:
• The reasons for the risk assessment at the assertion level for each class of transaction, account
balance or disclosure
• The likelihood of material misstatement due to the particular characteristics of the class of
transaction, account balance or disclosure involved
• Whether the risk assessment takes account of relevant controls and so requires the auditor to
obtain evidence to determine whether the controls are operating effectively
The auditor shall obtain more persuasive audit evidence the higher the assessment of risk.
The auditor will then determine the nature, timing and extent of further audit procedures. We will
look at this aspect of the audit in detail in Chapter 6.
9.4 Documentation
The ISA emphasises the need to document the link between the audit procedures and the assessed
risks. These matters should be recorded in accordance with ISA (UK) 230 (Revised June 2016), Audit
Documentation. You should be familiar with the principles of this ISA from your earlier studies.
Whatever the auditor’s response to the risk assessment carried out, it must follow on logically from
the evidence collected at the planning stage or the audit may not address the correct audit risks.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 237
Figure 5.6: Sales cycle
The auditor should be able to find an audit trail for each transaction, for example in the purchases
cycle:
• Requisition
• Invoice
• Order
• Ledger and daybook entries
• GRN
• Payment in cashbook/cheque stub
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 239
In some cases, particularly small companies, the business risks may be strongly connected to the fact
that management is concentrated in one person. Another feature of small companies may be that
their statement of financial position is uncomplicated and contains one or two material items, for
example receivables or inventory.
When this is the case, it is often more cost effective to undertake a highly substantive balance sheet
audit than to undertake a business risk assessment, as it is relatively simple to obtain the assurance
required about the financial statements from taking that approach.
• A huge number of organisations now use computer systems to run their businesses and to
process financial information.
• The main risks associated with using computerised systems include infection by viruses and
access by unauthorised users. Both these risks could potentially have a very damaging effect on
the business.
• This means that a number of the controls which the directors are required to put into place to
safeguard the assets of the shareholders must be incorporated into the computer systems.
• Auditors have to assess the effectiveness of the controls in place within computer systems and
can do this by performing a systems audit as part of their initial assessment of risk during the
planning stage of the audit.
Risks and relevant controls related to cyber-security are dealt with in more detail in Chapter 7.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 241
Security
• Is there a security policy in place?:
– Physical security (locked doors/windows)
– Access security (passwords)
– Data security (virus shields)
• Is it adhered to?
• Is it sufficient and effective?
12 Big data
Section overview
Big data is a broad term for data sets which are large or complex
Definition
Big data: A term that describes those “datasets whose size is beyond the ability of typical database
software to capture, store, manage and analyse.”(McKinsey Global Institute, Big data: The next
frontier for innovation, competition and productivity, 2011).
Today, organisations have access to greater quantities of data than in the past, with vast amounts of
transactional data available from a number of internal and external sources, such as suppliers and
customers.
The growth in the amount of data now available has been largely fuelled by increasing internet
usage and by developments in communication methods such as wireless networks, social media
sites and smartphones. An increasing number of organisations have embraced the so-called ‘internet
of things’ by embedding sensor technologies, such as RFID tags (Radio Frequency Identification) and
tracking devices, into their operations to gather data from a diverse range of activities. Companies
including British Gas, an energy supplier in the UK, have introduced so-called smart meters as a way
of measuring the amount of electricity consumers are using on a daily basis. Such meters also allow
home owners to better manage their household energy costs as the meter records and wirelessly
transmits the level of energy consumption back to the energy provider.
Leading data analytics software firm, SAS, offers the following explanation of big data.
“Big data is a term that describes the large volume of data – both structured and unstructured – that
inundates a business on a day-to-day basis. But it’s not the amount of data that’s important. It’s what
organisations do with the data that matters. Big data can be analysed for insights that lead to better
decisions and strategic business moves.”
(Source: SAS (n.d.) Big data – What it is and why it matters. [Online] Available at:
www.sas.com/en_us/insights/analytics/big-data-analytics.html [Accessed 02 October2019])
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 243
clicks while still visiting the website has enabled online retailers to recommend relevant additional
items for purchase based on those items already viewed. Online websites including Amazon and
eBay use this tactic to encourage customers to make extra purchases
Variety
Variety is concerned with the diverse range of forms that big data can take. An increasing amount of
data generated comes in an unstructured form, ie, data which is not easy to hold in a database.
Unstructured data may take the form of words used by people on social media sites such as
Facebook and Twitter, along with shared content such as photographs or video recordings.
Capturing, processing and storing unstructured data presents further challenges to organisations
which may need to develop their existing IT/IS capabilities to be able to firstly store such data and
secondly extract meaning from the data they hold. Data which is too large, moves too fast or fails to
fit neatly with existing IT infrastructures reduces the value which can be derived from it.
The three Vs of big data can also be extended to include an additional characteristic: veracity
Veracity
Veracity (value) is concerned with the truthfulness of the data collected. For data to have any value
when being used for decision-making in an organisation, it needs to be truthful, ie, it must not
present a bias or contain inconsistencies. The use of poor quality data may have expensive and far
reaching consequences for those organisations which rely on it for making strategically important
decisions. For example, an organisation may decide to introduce a type of product in the belief that
there is sufficient customer demand for it when in reality this may not be the case.
The trend in big data is being propelled by three factors: a growth in computer power, new sources
of data and infrastructure for knowledge creation. The combination of these three factors is enabling
businesses to use data in ways which were not previously possible or viable. In particular they are
using big data to:
• gain insights eg, using more granular data about customers;
• predict the future eg, customer service functions personalise services based on predictions about
individual customers; and
• automate non-routine decisions and tasks eg, using machine learning techniques to automate a
medical diagnosis.
Like business, auditors have had to respond to the changing environment brought about by big data.
Historically auditors have reviewed structured data (eg, transactions recorded in the general ledger)
however the analysis of unstructured data can provide new insights (eg, data extracted from emails,
texts and social media). Audit firms have invested heavily in recent years in data analytics tools which
will enable them to use this data to better understand their clients, identify risks and add value.
Some firms are currently investing in data analytics to provide a better quality audit and to reduce
risk and liability for the auditor. Recent developments in robotic process automation (RPA) and
artificial intelligence (AI) have made this kind of technology more sophisticated thus increasing its
potential.
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty document Data analytics for external auditors describes data
analytics as follows:
“Data analytics involves the extraction of data using fields within the basic data structure, rather than
the format of records. A simple example is Power view, an Excel tool which can filter, sort, slice and
highlight data in a spreadsheet and then present it visually in variety of bubble, bar and pie charts.”
In simpler terms data analytics is about examining raw data with the purpose of drawing conclusions
about it. The Audit and Assurance faculty document identifies the following as commonly performed
data analytics routines:
• Comparing the last time an item was bought with the last time it was sold, for cost/NRV purposes
• Inventory ageing and how many days inventory is in stock by item
• Receivables and payables ageing and the reduction in overdue debt over time by customer
• Analysis or revenue trends split by product or region
• Analyses of gross margins and sales, highlighting items with negative margins
• Matches of orders to cash and purchases to payments
• ‘Can do did do testing’ of user codes to test whether segregation of duties is appropriate, and
whether any inappropriate combinations of users have been involved in processing transactions
• Detailed recalculations of depreciation of fixed assets by item, either using approximations (such
as assuming sales and purchases are mid-month) or using the entire data set and exact dates
• Analyses of capital expenditure v repairs and maintenance
• Three-way matches between purchases/sales orders, goods received/despatched documentation
and invoices
Data analytics can also draw on external market data as well as internal data, for example third-party
pricing sources and foreign exchange rates can be accessed to recalculate the valuation of
investments. (‘Coming your way’ by Katherine Bagshaw and Phedra Diomidous, Audit and Beyond,
2016).
Data analytics can analyse unstructured data as well as structured data. For example an analysis of
emails could be a more effective means of identifying fraud than an analysis of journals. Data
analytics tools allow the auditor to analyse this type of information in a level of detail which would not
be possible manually.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 245
they are now at a more granular level. The quality of the analyses is enhanced and therefore the
judgments made on the basis of this information are enhanced too.
Data analytics can be used to ‘drill down’ into the data, for example, in order to identify which
journals need to be tested. In this way substantive procedures are better directed. For example:
• Extract and examine all credit journal entries to the Revenue Account where the corresponding
debit is not either receivables or cash (which would be the normal expected entries). These
extracted exceptions can then be investigated.
• Extract and examine all journal entries which are: Dr PPE account; Cr an expense account. This
would be an unusual entry in the normal course of business and there is a risk of creative
accounting by capitalising expenditure that should be expensed. These can be investigated
including requiring management explanations.
The Audit and Beyond article also highlights the role of data analytics in supporting the application
and demonstration of professional scepticism. For example, predictive data analytics tools might be
used to help assess the reasonableness of management representations.
A recent article by KPMG ‘Data, Analytics and Your Audit’ discusses the impact of big data and how it
affects auditors. The article emphasises that the use of data by auditors is not a new thing by any
means since auditors have always had to analyse data. Data analytics allows auditors to analyse data
at much greater speeds than before. For example, data analytics will allow auditors to sample much
higher volumes of transactions up to 100% in some cases, which will allow auditors to identify high
risk transactions over a vast array of data and in minutes rather than over weeks. The article cites the
example of a clothing retailer and shows how data analytics can allow auditors to evaluate the three-
way match between purchase orders, delivery confirmations and invoice documentation in a
graphical way that can show account relationships and transaction flows and control issues over
segregation of duties. Data analytics can also be used to examine supplier relationships (supplier
contracts, payment terms, controls over procurement processes etc).
The article includes a very useful table on the use of data analytics which is shown below.
Revenue and accounts Identify discrepancies in price and quantity between invoices, sales
receivable orders and shipping documentation
Identifies stockouts and customer orders coming in faster than
shipped products
Purchases and accounts Identifies significant or unusual items such as invoice price
payable discrepancies against original purchased products
Shows purchase trends and activities with suppliers that are
unauthorised or where there are concentrations of spending
activities
13.3.3 Quality
Data analytics tools must be developed to the highest quality assurance standards. As the Audit and
Assurance Faculty document indicates procedures should include pilot and parallel running with the
‘normal’ audit process together with contingency plans should the software crash. There also need to
be proper controls to ensure that individuals using the tools are using them properly.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 247
analytics. This aimed to inform stakeholders of the ongoing work by the IAASB in this area, but also
to obtain stakeholder input, particularly with respect to whether all of the relevant considerations
have been identified.
It makes the following points.
Data analytics and the financial statement audit – benefits
• The quality of the financial statement audit can be enhanced by the use of data analytics.
• The use of data analytics enables the auditor to obtain a more effective and robust understanding
of the entity (in an increasingly complex and high volume data environment), improving the
application of professional scepticism and professional judgement.
• The auditor is able to obtain audit evidence from the analysis of larger populations.
• The auditor obtains a better insight into the entity and its environment which in turn provides the
entity with additional information to inform its own risk assessment and business operations.
Data analytics and the financial statement audit – limitations
• Auditors need to have a clear understanding of the data they are analysing and in particular the
relevance to the audit.
• Being able to test 100% of a population does not change the fact that reasonable assurance is
provided.
• The use of data analytics does not replace the need for professional judgement and professional
scepticism, particularly in relation to accounting estimates and qualitative information.
• Care must be taken not to have ‘overconfidence’ in technology ie, adopting the attitude that if a
computer software program produced it, it must be right.
Technology and the ISAs
• The ISAs do not prohibit, nor stimulate, the use of data analytics.
• ISAs need to be robust and relevant, however they must be based on principles which drive
appropriate auditor performance rather than being tied to current practice or trends.
• Technology solutions can increase the amount of time which auditors can spend on judgemental
aspects of analysis as the amount of time spent on manual analysis is reduced.
• There is a current challenge to fit audit evidence derived from data analytics into the current audit
evidence model set out in the ISAs.
• A lack of reference to data analytics in ISAs (with the exception of CAATs) may act as a barrier to
their adoption more widely.
• The lack of reference in ISAs to data analytics could also suggest that their use does not reduce
the procedures required by ISAs, even where these may appear to have been made redundant as
a result of the information gained from the use of data analytics.
• Risks arise where new techniques are used for which there is no strong framework within the
standards.
Unanswered questions
The IAASB document identifies a number of unanswered questions and challenges.
Data acquisition
Entity data being transferred to the auditor raises security and privacy issues together with storage
problems for large volumes of data.
Conceptual changes
The approach, information required and questions asked of the client may be quite different to the
traditional approach which may be challenging for the client.
Legal and regulatory challenges
These may relate to data security and potential restrictions on data being transferred from one
jurisdiction to another.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 249
• Recalculation of fund management fees based on value of assets under management
Data capture for use in audit data analytics
The review notes that ‘effective and efficient data capture is the key to the successful use of audit
data analytics’. At an early stage the audit team needs to ascertain whether the quality of the data that
can be provided by the entity’s management is sufficient to support the analytic which is to be used.
In many instances specialist staff may be used to perform data capture and this may mean that the
audit team, the data analytics specialists and the data may be in different geographical locations. This
may create issues in relation to data governance, security and privacy.
Appropriate use of audit analytics tools
The Review document states that ‘Audit teams need to have a clear understanding of the purpose of
the audit data analytics technique to ensure that they obtain sufficient and appropriate audit
evidence’. This is of particular relevance at the planning stage of the audit. The Review indicates that
the following areas need to be considered when deciding whether to use an audit data analytics
tool:
• Whether the tool is a ‘good match’ for the client’s specific environment
• The need to ensure that all relevant assertions are still covered for the balance being tested
• Whether testing in other areas needs to be flexed to provide the necessary supporting evidence
for the use of audit data analytics
Evidencing of audit data analytics
The Review emphasises the point that audit documentation should enable an experienced auditor to
understand the nature, timing and extent of the audit procedures performed, including where data
analytics have been used. In particular it notes that the data analytics specialists must be considered
as part of the audit team. Auditing standards in relation to evidence and documentation therefore
cover the data analytics specialists’ work as they do any other audit work.
Definition
Artificial intelligence (AI): Technology to help improve decisions made by machines, based on
machine learning, in an attempt to make better decisions than humans can. AI requires pattern
recognition and learning, rather than relying on a series of complex rules, so is not the same as
expert systems, which failed to grasp the complexities of the real world and were unable to adapt to
dynamic situations. AI systems use complex programming to know how to behave in certain
situations, while machine learning promotes automatic learning without being prompted.
Current examples of AI include Amazon’s Alexa and Apple’s Siri where small digital devices are able
to respond to voice commands when completing requests such as online searches and connection
to other smart devices (such as those that might control lighting and heating in a house). AI and
machine learning are also used in various manufacturing processes where precision is essential for
creating and maintaining competitive advantage.
AI is starting to have more widespread use in driver-less cars and forecasting algorithms for
companies. AI needs to consider both forms of decision-making: intuitive (based on instincts) and
reasoned (based on logic). There are similarities to the ‘dot com’ boom at the start of the 21st century
because no-one is really sure how far the possibilities afforded by AI could go.
According to the government’s Green Finance Strategy, 785 organisations now support the TCFD
including investors who are responsible for managing assets valued at over £1 trillion.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 251
This comes amid a wider call for greater corporate transparency over the sustainability implications
of strategies pursued by companies (and indeed countries) as ecological issues continue to
dominate public debate. Investors in particular have welcomed this transparency as it will allow an
informed decision on the steps companies are taking to address the possibility that climate-related
issues may affect their return (for example, the risks of flooding affecting crop yields for a food
manufacturer).
Clearly, there are challenges in how corporate reporting mechanisms can address these
requirements, not only for organisations in collecting and managing the data required to support
these disclosures but also for assurance providers who may be asked to assess the validity of such
disclosures (whether as part of the audit or otherwise).
(Sources: UK Government (2019) Green Finance Strategy: Transforming Finance for a Greener Future.
[Online] Available at:
https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/
820284/190716_BEIS_Green_Finance_Strategy_Accessible_Final.pdf [Accessed 6 July 2020]
Vincent, M. (2020) UK-listed companies face compulsory climate disclosures. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ft.com/content/de915fb4-5f9e-11ea-b0ab-339c2307bcd4 [Accessed 6 July 2020])
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 253
Further question practice
1 Knowledge diagnostic
Before you move on to question practice, complete the following knowledge diagnostic and check
you are able to confirm you possess the following essential learning from this chapter. If not, you are
advised to revisit the relevant learning from the topic indicated.
2. Do you remember the auditing standards (ISAs (UK)) relevant to planning and risk
assessment?
3. Can you define professional scepticism and do you know why it matters to auditors?
4. Do you know which techniques are recommended for an effective understanding of the
entity?
5. Can you explain how business risk is used to help identify areas of misstatement in a set of
financial statements?
7. Can you explain the term ‘creative accounting’ and suggest some examples of how it may
be present in an audited entity?
8. Can you define materiality and explain how it should be calculated for a given set of
circumstances?
9. Do you know how the auditor should respond to the assessed level of risk and can you
suggest alternative methodologies for the auditor to use?
10. Are you aware of the following current developments in auditing: information technology;
cryptocurrencies and blockchain; big data; data analytics; robotic process automation;
and artificial intelligence? Can you explain how each of these developments could impact
on the work of the auditor, including the level of audit quality?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Gates Ltd An opportunity to see how data analytics could be used in an auditing
context.
Suttoner plc Using a larger scenario, this question asks you to apply the business risk
methodology before considering the FRC guidance on internal controls.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Hillhire Key audit risks and the associated financial statement treatment from a
series of issues in a detailed scenario.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 255
Technical reference
1 ISA (UK) 210
• Agreement of terms of audit engagements – ISA (UK) 210.9-12
– Principal contents of the engagement letter – ISA (UK) 210.10, A23–.27 & Appendix 1
3 ISA 315
• Risk assessment procedures – ISA (UK) 315.5–.10
• Understanding the entity and its environment – ISA (UK) 315.11–.24
• Assessing the risks of material misstatement – ISA (UK) 315.25–.29
• Financial statement assertions – ISA (UK) 315.A129
• Documentation – ISA (UK) 315.32
4 ISA 320
• Definition of materiality – ISA (UK) 320.2
• Relationship between materiality and planning – ISA (UK) 320.10–.11
• Documentation – ISA (UK) 320.14
1 Gates Ltd
You are an audit senior at Bob & Co and have received the following email.
Requirement
Respond to the partner’s email.
2 Suttoner plc
Suttoner plc (Suttoner) operates in the food processing sector and is listed on the London Stock
Exchange. You are a member of its internal audit department. The company purchases a range of
food products and processes them into frozen or chilled meals, which it sells to major supermarkets
in Europe and North America.
The company structure
The company sells food through five subsidiaries, each of which is under the control of its own
managing director who reports directly to the main board. Each subsidiary has responsibility for, and
is located in, its own sales region. The regions are the UK, the rest of Western Europe, Eastern
Europe, the US and Canada. Food is produced in only two subsidiaries, the UK and the US. Head
office operates central functions, including the legal, finance and treasury departments.
The board has asked the managing directors of each subsidiary to undertake a risk assessment
exercise, including a review of the subsidiary’s procedures and internal controls. This is partly due to
a review of the company’s compliance with the provisions of FRC’s Guidance on Risk Management,
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 257
Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting and also because Suttoner has been
severely affected by two recent events and now wishes to manage its future risk exposure.
Recent events
(1) In renegotiating a major contract with a supermarket Suttoner refused to cut its price as
demanded. As a result a major customer was lost.
(2) Later in the year the company had been cutting costs by sourcing food products from lower-cost
suppliers. In so doing it acquired contaminated pork which made several consumers ill. A major
health and safety inspection led to the destruction of all Suttoner’s pork inventories throughout
Europe, due to an inability to trace individual inventories to source suppliers. More significantly,
many supermarkets refused to purchase goods from Suttoner for several months thereafter.
As a result of these events the company’s cash flow was severely disrupted, and significant additional
borrowing was needed.
The board’s view
In guiding the risk assessment exercise, the board has set clear objectives for subsidiaries to achieve:
sales growth, profit growth and effective risk management. Additionally, the board wishes to foster
integrity and competence supported by enhancing human resource development.
The board requires managing directors of each subsidiary to report to them annually on these
objectives and on internal controls. Otherwise, they have considerable autonomy on pricing, capital
expenditure, marketing and human resource management. The UK and US subsidiaries, which
process raw foodstuffs, are free to choose their suppliers. The other three subsidiaries may purchase
only from the UK or US subsidiaries.
Over a number of years each subsidiary has been managed according to the nature and experience
of its managing director, and this has resulted in different styles and levels of control being
established locally.
Email from the head of internal audit
Requirement
Respond to the email from Ben Jones.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 259
Key risk Controls to mitigate Audit procedures
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 261
• Each component of the package may be valued incorrectly
The package is effectively a bundle of goods and services with a fair value of £500 sold at a
discount of £140 (£500 – £360). If there is a specific discount policy this should be applied to the
individual components. For example, the whole of the discount could relate to the handset, in
which case the whole of the discount would be deducted from the fair value of the phone. If there
is no specific policy an alternative allocation method would be required eg, on a pro rata basis.
The auditor would need to ensure that the basis used is reasonable.
WORKING
Materiality calculations
As follows:
(1) (0.6 million ÷ 42.2 million) × 100 = 1.4%
(2) (0.2 million ÷ 30.7 million) × 100 = 0.65%
(3) (0.2 million ÷ 1.8 million) × 100 = 11%
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 263
• This is due to the fact that the profit figure of the business is volatile (£300,000 in the previous
year) and does not seem to be representative of the size of the business in terms of its assets or
revenue.
• In instances like this where the company is close to breaking even, total assets or revenue may be
a more suitable basis. Alternatively, if profits are to be used, an average figure over a number of
years would give rise to a more appropriate materiality balance.
• Materiality as it is currently set is extremely low. The consequence of this is that it would result in
substantially increased audit procedures which would be inefficient.
1 Gates Ltd
Accounting issues
(1) Military contracts
Long-term contract accounting
The software development should be accounted for under IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with
Customers. Specifically, it is a fixed price contract, ie, where the revenue arising is fixed at the outset
of the contract. Under such contracts there is an element of certainty about the revenue accruing, but
not about the costs which will arise. For a fixed price contract the contractor should be able to
measure reliably the total contract revenues and be able to identify and measure reliably both the
costs that have been incurred and those that will be incurred to complete the project. The contractor
should also assess whether it is probable that payment will be received under the contract.
As the contracts are fixed price there is an increased risk of the contracts being loss-making, and
such losses must be provided for in full.
Computer support
As the amount billed relates directly to the hours spent on site, it would be appropriate to recognise
this as revenue when charged.
(2) ‘Off the shelf’ packages
Licence and maintenance costs
An argument could be proposed to recognise this revenue on receipt, given that it is non-
refundable, and paid after the development work has been completed and the costs incurred.
However, under IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers it is generally not appropriate to
recognise revenue based on payments received under the contract, as stage payments set out under
the terms of the contract often bear little resemblance to the actual services performed. This is a
contract in which a performance obligation (the provision of services) is satisfied over time. Revenue
relating to the licence should therefore be recognised as the services are provided, ie, as the
performance obligation is satisfied.
The maintenance costs should be recognised on a basis that reflects the costs incurred which might
be based on the frequency of maintenance calls, probably related to the previous history of
maintenance calls.
Audit issues
Inherent risks
• Given the nature of the business and the military contracts, physical and electronic security and
controls are a major issue.
• Long-term contract accounting involves significant judgements with respect to future contract
costs. Judgement increases the likelihood of errors or deliberate manipulation. This area is
particularly difficult to audit given the specialised nature of the business, and we will need to
ensure that we have personnel with the right experience assigned to the audit.
• There is a risk with long-term contract accounting of misallocation of contract costs – particularly
away from loss-making contracts.
• The maintenance provision is an estimate and, again, susceptible to error.
Detection risks
The nature of the military contracts may mean that we are unable to review all the information
because of the Official Secrets Act. This could generate a limitation on scope.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 265
Notes re data analytics
Benefits
• Enhanced audit quality
• Increased sophistication and breadth of interrogation options
• Enables us to obtain audit evidence from larger populations efficiently
• Analysis at a more granular level enhancing the basis on which judgements are made
• Results in a more effective and robust understanding of the entity improving the application of
professional scepticism and professional judgement
• Ability to graphically visualise results increasing ease of use and interpretation
• Provides the entity with additional information to better inform its own risk assessment and
business operations
Challenges
• We need to ensure that the development of the software is properly managed so that a high
quality audit tool is developed.
• There may be issues with data capture, extraction, validation and transformation.
• Need to consider security and privacy issues together with storage problems for the large
volumes of data.
• There may be restrictions on data being transferred from one jurisdiction to another.
• We may have insufficient in-house resources with relevant IT expertise to use the data analytics
software and/or to provide central support.
• Need to consider how we use data analytics whilst still complying with the requirements of ISAs
(which do not yet address the changes in approach brought about by the use of data analytics).
• The use of data analytics changes the nature of the information required and questions asked of
the client. The client may find this challenging.
• We need to ensure that professional scepticism and judgement continue to be applied and that
we do not have ‘overconfidence’ in the technology.
2 Suttoner plc
Identification and classification of risks
Compliance risks
Health and safety regulations – Risk of closure of plant and/or destruction of food if contamination
arises from purchasing, processing, storing or distribution activities.
Accounting regulations – Need to comply with regulations in several different countries. May need to
restate for group accounting purposes to comply with IFRSs if those countries have domestic GAAP
that differs from IFRSs.
Taxation – Need to comply with tax regulations, particularly in respect of transfer pricing between
divisions in different countries.
Litigation risk – Arising from the possibility of food poisoning. Risks include litigation against the
company by those individuals affected and for loss of reputation by supermarkets.
Operating risks
Loss of major customers – Supermarkets may regularly renegotiate contracts and, in so doing, find
alternative suppliers. The loss of one such customer this year may be part of a trend.
Power of customers to reduce price – Even where contracts with supermarkets are retained, the
renegotiation may be on less favourable terms, resulting in a loss of profits.
Lack of goal congruence by divisional MDs – Significant autonomy at divisional level may mean
reduced co-ordination and the pursuit of conflicting goals.
Geographically dispersed supply chain – Given that processing is concentrated in only two centres,
there are significant distances involved in the supply chain. This may lead to risks of failure to supply
on time and significant low temperature transport and storage costs.
ICAEW 2021 5: The statutory audit: planning and risk assessment 267
Proposed course of action – maintain customer relationships, compete on price and non-price
issues, develop a wider customer base.
Foreign exchange
High probability – some (and possibly significant) foreign currency movements over time are very
likely.
High impact – potentially, the effects of a major currency movement may be significant, although
this would depend on the actions taken to moderate such effects. There may also be a favourable
currency impact arising from East European currencies becoming more readily acceptable in
trading.
Proposed course of action – hedge in the short term (where appropriate and where the cost of
doing so is not significant), back to back financing (eg, borrow in US dollars to finance US
operations), consider acceptability of East European currencies before significant development in
these countries.
Notes to the financial statements
Control environment and control activities
The company is committed to ensuring that a proper control environment is maintained. There is a
commitment to competence and integrity, together with the communication of clear objectives to
all divisions. These are underpinned by a human resources policy that develops quality with
integrity.
The organisational structure has been developed to delegate authority with accountability to
ensure that control and consistency are maintained, having regard to an acceptable level of risk.
Managing directors report on the control environment on a regular basis to the board. Moreover,
the performance of each division is reported and reviewed regularly.
This year the board has undertaken a specific review to assess key risks and to ensure that
appropriate information and monitoring is being received.
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Revision of assertions
2 Sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
3 Sources of audit evidence
4 Selection of audit procedures
5 Analytical procedures
6 Audit of accounting estimates
7 Initial audit engagements – opening balances
8 Using the work of others
9 Working in an audit team
10 Auditing in an IT environment
11 Professional scepticism in the audit fieldwork stage
12 Further guidance
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Determine analytical procedures, where appropriate, at the planning stage using technical
knowledge of corporate reporting, data analytics and skills of financial statement analysis
• Evaluate, where appropriate, the need for, and extent of reliance to be placed on expertise from
other parties to support audit processes including when to challenge the extent and working
practices of other parties
• Determine audit objectives for each financial statement assertion
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate how professional scepticism should be applied to the process of gathering audit
evidence and evaluating its reliability including the use of client-generated information and
external market information in data analytics
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
• Evaluate, applying professional judgement, whether the quantity and quality of evidence
gathered from various audit procedures, including analytical procedures and data analytics, is
sufficient to draw reasonable conclusions
• Recognise issues arising whilst gathering assurance evidence that should be referred to a senior
colleague
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 11(f), 11(i), 14(b)–(g), 14(i)
6
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
1.1 Introduction
As we have seen, audit work is about reducing risk – the risk that the financial statements include
material misstatements. At the most basic level, the financial statements simply consist of the
following information about the entity:
• Revenues
• Costs
• Assets
• Liabilities
• Capital
These items will have certain attributes if they are included correctly in the financial statements.
These attributes are referred to as financial statement assertions.
Definition
Assertions: The representations by management, explicit or otherwise, that are embodied in the
financial statements, as used by the auditor to consider the different types of potential misstatement
that may occur.
By approving the financial statements, the directors are making representations about the
information therein. These representations or assertions may be described in general terms in a
number of ways.
For example, if the statement of financial position includes a figure for freehold land and buildings,
the directors are asserting that:
• the property concerned exists;
• it is either owned by the company outright or else the company has suitable rights over it;
• its value is correctly calculated; and
• there are no other items of a similar nature which ought to be included but which have been
omitted.
• it is disclosed in the financial statements in a way which is not misleading and is in accordance
with the relevant ‘reporting framework’ eg, international accounting standards.
ISA (UK) 315 (Revised June 2016), Identifying and Assessing the Risks of Material Misstatement
Through Understanding of the Entity and its Environment states that “the auditor shall identify and
assess the risks of material misstatement at the financial statement level and the assertion level for
classes of transactions, account balances and disclosures to provide a basis for designing and
performing further audit procedures” (ISA (UK) 315.25). It gives examples of assertions in these areas.
Depending on the nature of the balance, certain assertions will be more relevant than others.
Note: The assertions have been revised to reflect changes made to the IAASB ISA. The main change
is that there is no longer a separate group of assertions about presentation and disclosure.
Assertions about classes of Occurrence: Transactions and events that have been
transactions, events, and related recorded or disclosed have occurred and pertain to the
disclosures, for the period under entity.
audit (ISA (UK) 315.A124(a)) Completeness: All transactions and events that should have
been recorded have been recorded, and all related
disclosures that should have been included have been
included.
Accuracy: Amounts and other data relating to recorded
transactions and events have been recorded appropriately
and related disclosures have been appropriately measured
and described.
Cut-off: Transactions and events have been recorded in the
correct accounting period.
Classification: Transactions and events have been recorded
in the proper accounts.
Presentation: transactions and events are appropriately
aggregated or disaggregated and clearly described, and
related disclosures are relevant and understandable in the
context of the requirements of the applicable financial
reporting framework.
Assertions about account Existence: Assets, liabilities and equity interests exist.
balances, and related disclosures, Rights and obligations: The entity holds or controls the
at the period end (ISA (UK) rights to assets, and liabilities are the obligations of the
315.A124(b)) entity.
Completeness: All assets, liabilities and equity interests that
should have been recorded have been recorded, and all
related disclosures that should have been included in the
financial statements have been included.
Accuracy, valuation and allocation: Assets, liabilities and
equity interests have been included in the financial
statements at appropriate amounts and any resulting
valuation or allocation adjustments have been appropriately
recorded and related.
Classification: Assets, liabilities and equity interests have
been recorded in the proper accounts.
Presentation: Assets, liabilities and equity interests are
appropriately aggregated or disaggregated and clearly
described, and related disclosures are relevant and
understandable in the context of the requirements of the
applicable financial reporting framework.
1.2.1 Summary
We have seen that there are 12 assertions applying in different ways to different items in the financial
statements.
You can summarise them in the following four questions:
(a) Should it be in the financial statements at all?
(b) Is it included at the right amount?
(c) Are there any more?
(d) Has it been properly disclosed and presented?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
Is it included at
the right amount?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
Payables Is it included at
the right amount?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
Is it included at
the right amount?
Is it properly
disclosed and
presented?
2.2 Wiggam plc has purchased goods worth £750,000 from Tepid Ltd on an arm’s length basis.
Wiggam owns 40% of the ordinary share capital in Tepid.
2.1 Importance
ISA (UK) 500, Audit Evidence states that the objective of the auditor is to obtain sufficient,
appropriate audit evidence to be able to draw reasonable conclusions on which to base the auditor’s
opinion.
The importance of obtaining sufficient, appropriate audit evidence can be demonstrated in the
Arthur Andersen audit of Mattel Inc.
Definition
Management’s expert: An individual or organisation possessing expertise in a field other than
accounting or auditing whose work in that field is used by the entity to assist the entity in preparing
financial statements.
Certain aspects of the preparation of financial statements may require expertise such as actuarial
calculations (relevant to accounting for pensions) or valuations (where the fair value alternative is
used for non-current assets). The entity may employ such experts or may engage the services of
external experts. ISA (UK) 500 includes guidance on the considerations that arise for the external
auditor in using this information as audit evidence.
If this work is significant to the audit the external auditor shall:
• evaluate the competence, capabilities and objectivity of the expert;
• obtain an understanding of the work of the expert; and
• evaluate the appropriateness of the expert’s work as audit evidence for the relevant assertion.
Note: Situations where the external auditor requires the assistance of an expert in obtaining audit
evidence are covered by ISA (UK) 620 (Revised November 2019), Using the Work of an Auditor’s
Expert (see later in this chapter).
2.4 Triangulation
Forming an audit opinion is a question of using professional judgement at all times and judgements
have to be made about the nature, the quality and the mix of evidence gathered. It is also essential
that individual items of evidence are not simply viewed in isolation but instead support other
evidence and are supported by other evidence. This approach views evidence from different sources
as predominantly complementary, rather than compensatory. This strategy of acquiring and
evaluating complementary evidence from a range of sources is referred to as triangulation. This
approach is an application of the general principle that evidence obtained from different sources,
that presents a consistent picture, is mutually strengthening and gives greater reliance than merely
increasing the amount of evidence from a single source. The consequence of overreliance on one
specific type and source of evidence can be seen in the case of the collapse of Parmalat.
Scenarios are always presented in such a way as to require analysis of all the available information,
which is only possible once you have reviewed everything in the question. Mastering this process of
triangulation is a key part of being able to make the best use of the information at your disposal.
The procedures used are selected according to the nature of the balance being audited and the
assertion being considered. Audit procedures may be carried out using data analytics tools as
discussed in Chapter 5.
4.1.1 Inquiry
Definition
Inquiry: Consists of seeking information of knowledgeable persons both financial and non-financial
within the entity or outside the entity.
Examples
Inquiry includes obtaining responses to formal written questions and asking informal questions in
relation to specific audit assertions. The response to inquiries provides the auditor with information
that was not previously possessed or may corroborate information obtained from other sources. The
strength of the evidence depends on the knowledge and integrity of the source. Where the result of
inquiry is different from other evidence obtained, then reasons for that difference must be sought
and the information reconciled.
Business focus
Common uses of inquiry are as follows:
• Written representations – where management have information not available from any other
source
• Asking employees about the internal control systems and effectiveness of the controls they are
operating
Remember it is not normally sufficient to accept inquiry evidence by itself – some corroboration will
be sought. The US court case of Escott et al. v Bar Chris Corporation1968 ruled that the auditor was
negligent in not following up answers to management inquiries. The judge indicated that the auditor
was too easily satisfied with glib answers and that these should have been checked with additional
investigation.
4.1.2 Observation
Definition
Observation: Consists of looking at a procedure or process being performed by others.
Examples
Observation is not normally a procedure to be relied on by itself. For example, the auditor may
observe a non-current asset, such as a motor vehicle. However, this will only prove the vehicle exists;
other assertions such as rights and obligations will rely on other evidence such as invoices and
valuation possibly on the use of specialist valuers or documentation.
Business focus
Observation is commonly used in the business processes of inventory management. After inventory
has been purchased, an organisation holds raw materials, work in progress and finished goods in its
warehouses and factories. Observation is used to determine that the inventory exists, it is valued
correctly (looking for old and slow-moving inventory) and that inventory is complete in the
organisation’s books. Note the link to audit assertions here.
Additionally, the auditor will be observing the internal control systems over inventory, particularly in
respect to perpetual inventory checking and any specific procedures for year-end inventory
counting. You should be familiar with the audit procedures in respect of attendance at an inventory
count from your Assurance studies.
Observation may also be used in the human resource business process. The auditor will observe
employees operating specific controls within the internal control system to determine the
effectiveness of application of those controls, as well as the ability of the employee to operate the
control. However, the act of observing the employee limits the value of the evidence obtained; many
employees will amend their work practices when they identify the auditor observing them.
Definition
Inspection: Means the examination of records, documents or tangible assets.
Examples
By carrying out inspection procedures, the auditor is substantiating information that is, or should be,
in the financial statements. For example, inspection of a bank statement confirms the bank balance
for the bank reconciliation which in turn confirms the cash book figure for the financial statements.
Business focus
Inspection assists with the audit of most business processes. For example:
• Financing: inspection of loan agreements to confirm the term and repayment details (part of the
completeness of disclosure in the financial statements)
• Purchasing: inspection of purchase orders to ensure that the order is valid and belongs to the
company (occurrence assertion among others)
• Human resources: inspection of pay and overtime schedules as part of wages audit
• Inventory management: inspection of the work in progress ledger confirming cost allocation to
specific items of work in progress (valuation assertion)
• Revenue: inspection of sales invoices to ensure that the correct customer has been invoiced with
the correct amount of sales (completeness and accuracy assertions)
Inspection of assets that are recorded in the accounting records confirms existence, gives evidence
of valuation, but does not confirm rights and obligations.
Confirmation that assets seen are recorded in accounting records gives evidence of completeness.
Confirmation to documentation of items recorded in accounting records confirms that an asset exists
or a transaction occurred. Confirmation that items recorded in supporting documentation are
recorded in accounting records tests completeness.
Cut-off can be verified by inspecting the reverse population; that is, checking transactions recorded
after the end of the reporting period to supporting documentation to confirm that they occurred
after the end of the reporting period.
Inspection also provides evidence of valuation/accuracy, rights and obligations and the nature of
items (presentation and classification). It can also be used to compare documents (and hence test
consistency of audit evidence) and confirm authorisation.
4.1.4 Recalculation
Definition
Recalculation: Consists of checking the arithmetical accuracy of source documents and accounting
records.
Examples
Recalculation obviously relates to financial information. It is deemed to be a reliable source of audit
evidence because it is carried out by the auditor.
Business focus
Recalculation relates to most business processes. For example:
• Financing: calculation of interest payments
• Purchasing: accuracy of purchase orders and invoices
• Inventory management: valuation of work in progress
• Revenue: recalculation of sales invoices
4.1.5 Reperformance
Definition
Reperformance: Means the auditor’s independent execution of procedures or controls that were
originally performed as part of the entity’s internal control.
Examples
Auditors will often reperform some of the main accounting reconciliations, such as the bank
reconciliation or reconciliations of individual supplier balances to supplier statements. It is also
deemed to be a reliable source of audit evidence because it is carried out by the auditor.
Business focus
Reconciliations are a key control over many transaction cycles in the business, and if performed
properly are an effective means of identifying accounting errors or omissions. If they are performed
by an individual who is not involved in the day to day accounting for the underlying transactions they
can be a deterrent against fraudulent accounting.
Definition
External confirmation: Audit evidence obtained as a direct written response to the auditor from a
third party.
Examples
A typical example of confirmation evidence is obtaining a response from a debtors’ circularisation
(see Appendix for revision on this area). The evidence obtained is highly persuasive, as it comes from
an independent external source.
Key characteristics of any confirmation are as follows:
• Information is requested by the auditor.
• The request and response are in writing and the response is sent direct to the auditor.
• The response is from an independent third party.
• The confirmation is usually required to be positive (a response is expected) rather than negative (a
non-reply is assumed to confirm information provided to the third party).
Business focus
Confirmations are normally used in the following business processes:
• Financing: agreement of bank balances, loan amounts outstanding etc, (see Appendix)
• Inventory: confirmation of inventory held at third parties
• Revenue: confirmation of amounts due from debtors and payable to creditors (see Appendix)
At 31
At 1 January December
20X6 Additions Disposals 20X6
£ £ £ £
Cost
Freehold property 80,000 – – 80,000
Plant and machinery 438,000 62,000 (10,000) 490,000
Motor vehicles 40,500 13,000 – 53,500
558,500 75,000 (10,000) 623,500
At 31
At 1 January December
20X6 Charge for year Disposals 20X6
£ £ £ £
Depreciation
Freehold property 8,000 1,600 – 9,600
Plant and machinery 139,500 47,000 (3,000) 183,500
Motor vehicles 20,000 10,200 – 30,200
167,500 58,800 (3,000) 223,300
Requirements
4.1 Explain the factors that should be considered in determining an approach to the audit of
property, plant and equipment of Xantippe Ltd.
4.2 State the procedures you would perform in order to reach a conclusion on property, plant and
equipment in the financial statements of Xantippe Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X6.
The requirements of a question will often need some further work to fully understand what the
examining team is looking for, especially when requesting audit procedures in relation to a stated
exhibit. Good awareness of the various types of procedure and when they should be used will help
you make sense of what you have been asked to do.
• Analytical procedures are used as part of risk assessment and are required to be used as part of
the final review process.
• Analytical procedures may be used as substantive procedures.
Important Gross profit margins, in total and by product, area and months/quarter (if
accounting possible)
ratios Receivables ratio (average collection period)
Inventory turnover ratio (inventory divided into cost of sales)
Current ratio (current assets to current liabilities)
Quick or acid test ratio (liquid assets to current liabilities)
Gearing ratio (debt capital to equity capital)
Return on capital employed (profit before interest and tax to total assets less
current liabilities)
Ratios mean very little when used in isolation. They should be calculated for previous periods and for
comparable companies. The permanent file should contain a section with summarised accounts and
the chosen ratios for prior years.
In addition to looking at the more usual ratios the auditors should consider examining other ratios
that may be relevant to the particular client’s business, such as revenue per passenger mile for an
airline operator client, and fees per partner for a professional office.
Line (1) in the diagram shows the actual sales made by a business. There is a clear seasonal
fluctuation before Christmas. Line (2) shows a level of sales with ‘expected seasonal fluctuations’
having been stripped out.
In this analysis the seasonal fluctuations have been estimated. This analysis is useful, however,
because the estimate is likely to be based on past performance, so the conclusion from this is that
there might be a problem:
• Sales are below the levels of previous years.
• Sales are below expectation.
5.3.1 Technique
Although ISA (UK) 520 deals with analytical procedures in the context of substantive procedures the
same basic techniques would be applied when using analytical procedures as risk assessment
procedures. The key stages in the process are as follows:
• Interpretation
• Investigation
• Corroboration
When potential problem areas have been identified, one of the key questions to ask is ‘why?’.
The statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
To apply this in more detail think about the client’s statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income.
The key question must be:
Why did the client make more (or less) money this year?
Requirement
Based on the operating information identify and explain the potential audit risks.
As at 31 March
Statement of financial position Draft 20X7 Actual 20X6
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets 2,799 2,616
Current assets 1,746 1,127
Trade payables 991 718
Other payables 514 460
The suitability of particular Substantive analytical procedures are generally more applicable to
analytical procedures for large volumes of transactions that tend to be predictable over time,
given assertions such as analysis involving revenue and gross profit margins.
The reliability of the data This will depend on factors such as:
from which the auditors’ • the source of the information; and
expectations are developed
• the comparability of the data; industry comparison may be less
meaningful if the entity sells specialised products.
The detail to which Analytical procedures may be more effective when applied to
information can be analysed financial information or individual sections of an operation such as
individual factories and shops.
The relevance of the Whether the budgets are established as results to be expected
information available rather than as tough targets (which may well not be achieved).
The knowledge gained The effectiveness of the accounting and internal controls.
during previous audits The types of problems giving rise to accounting adjustments in
prior periods.
Factors which should also be considered when determining the reliance that the auditors should
place on the results of substantive analytical procedures are:
Other audit procedures Other procedures auditors undertake in reviewing the collectability
directed towards the same of receivables, such as the review of subsequent cash receipts, may
financial statements confirm or dispel questions arising from the application of
assertions analytical procedures to a schedule of customers’ accounts which
lists for how long monies have been owed.
The accuracy with which the Auditors normally expect greater consistency in comparing the
expected results of relationship of gross profit to sales from one period to another than
analytical procedures can in comparing expenditure which may or may not be made within a
be predicted period, such as research and advertising.
Judgement is always necessary when analytical procedures are used as part of your answer - what is
the message behind the numbers and is any other information (either quantitative or qualitative)
required?
£m
Revenue 2.0
Purchases 1.2
Cost of sales 1.5
£
Non-current assets 550,000
Inventory 300,000
Receivables 150,000
Cash 100,000
Payables (100,000)
1,000,000
The ordinary shares are currently quoted at 125p each, the loan stock is trading at £85 per £100
nominal, and the preference shares at 65p each.
• Accounting estimates and their disclosure require judgement and therefore lead to increased
audit risk.
ISA (UK) 540 (Revised December 2018), Auditing Accounting Estimates and Related Disclosures
provides guidance on the audit of accounting estimates contained in financial statements and
requires auditors to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence regarding accounting estimates
and how they are disclosed.
Definitions
Accounting estimate: A monetary amount for which the measurement, in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework, is subject to estimation uncertainty.
Estimation uncertainty: Susceptibility to an inherent lack of precision in measurement.
The ISA gives the following examples of accounting estimates (ISA (UK) 540.A1):
• Allowance to reduce inventory due to obsolescence
• Depreciation methods
• Valuation or impairment of assets or financial instruments
• Provision for a loss from a lawsuit
• Revenue recognised for long term contracts
• Determination of fair value in a goodwill calculation
Directors and management are responsible for disclosing accounting estimates within the financial
statements when something cannot be directly observed. The amount disclosed is usually referred to
as management’s point estimate.
Under ISA (UK) 540 (Revised December 2018) Auditing Accounting Estimates and Related
Disclosures auditors are most concerned about estimation uncertainty, because the inherent
limitations in any knowledge or data used to create accounting estimates inevitably lead to increased
risk of material misstatement from either deliberate or accidental management bias in the financial
statements. Auditors therefore need to consider inherent risks when assessing the estimation
uncertainty attached to an accounting estimate. Other factors that the auditor should consider are
the complexity and subjectivity involved in the creation of management’s point estimate (ISA (UK)
540.2–3).
• Opening balances are those account balances which exist at the beginning of an accounting
period.
• The auditor will perform audit procedures to ensure that those balances are accurately stated.
• Specific procedures may be required where the opening balances were not audited by the
current audit firm.
7.2 Requirements
The auditor shall obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence about whether the opening balances
contain misstatements that materially affect the current period’s financial statements by:
• determining whether the prior period’s closing balances have been correctly brought forward to
the current period or, when appropriate, have been restated;
• determining whether the opening balances reflect the application of appropriate accounting
policies; and
• performing one or more of the following:
– Where the prior year financial statements were audited, reviewing the predecessor auditor’s
working papers to obtain evidence regarding the opening balances
– Evaluating whether audit procedures performed in the current period provide evidence
relevant to the opening balances
– Performing specific audit procedures to obtain evidence regarding the opening balances.
When the prior period’s financial statements were audited by another auditor, the current auditor
may be able to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence regarding opening balances by
reviewing the predecessor auditor’s working papers. (As noted in Chapter 3, in audits carried out
under the UK Companies Act 2006, when the predecessor auditor ceases to hold office, if requested
by the successor auditor, the predecessor auditor must allow the successor access to all relevant
information in respect of its audit work. This includes access to relevant working papers. Access to
this information is also required by ISQC (UK) 1).
The nature and extent of audit procedures necessary to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
on opening balances depends on matters such as the following.
• The accounting policies followed by the entity
• The nature of the account balances, classes of transactions and disclosures and the risks of
material misstatement in the current period’s financial statements
• The significance of the opening balances relative to the current period’s financial statements
• Whether the prior period’s financial statements were audited and, if so, whether the predecessor
auditors’ opinion was modified
In the UK, for audits of public interest entities, the auditor must obtain an understanding of the
predecessor auditor’s methodology in order to obtain details required for the report to the audit
committee as required by ISA (UK) 260.16R2.
If the auditor obtains audit evidence that the opening balances contain misstatements, that could
materially affect the current period’s financial statements, the auditor shall perform such additional
audit procedures as are appropriate in the circumstances to determine the effect on the current
period’s financial statements.
• In certain situations the auditor will consider it necessary to employ someone else with different
expert knowledge to gain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence.
• If the auditor’s client has an internal audit department, the auditor may seek to rely on its work.
Definition
Auditor’s expert: An individual or organisation possessing expertise in a field other than accounting
and auditing, whose work in that field is used by the auditor in obtaining sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence. An auditor’s expert may be either an auditor’s internal expert (a partner or staff of the
auditor’s firm, or a network firm) or an auditor’s external expert.
Note: The use of data analytics has increased the need for the use of IT experts in the audit team.
The ISA makes a distinction between this situation and the situation outlined in ISA (UK) 500, Audit
Evidence (see earlier in this chapter) where management use an expert to assist in preparing
financial statements.
When using the work performed by an auditor’s expert, auditors should obtain sufficient, appropriate
audit evidence that such work is adequate for the purposes of an audit.
The following list of examples is given by the ISA (UK) of areas where it may be necessary to use the
work of an auditor’s expert:
• The valuation of complex financial instruments, land and buildings, plant and machinery,
jewellery, works of art, antiques, intangible assets, assets acquired and liabilities assumed in
business combinations and assets that may have been impaired
• The actuarial calculation of liabilities associated with insurance contracts or employee benefit
plans
• The estimation of oil and gas reserves
• The valuation of environmental liabilities, and site clean-up costs
• The interpretation of contracts, laws and regulations
• The analysis of complex or unusual tax compliance issues
When considering whether to use the work of an expert, the auditors should review the following:
• Whether management has used a management‘s expert in preparing the financial statements
• The nature and significance of the matter, including its complexity
• The risks of material misstatement
• The auditor’s knowledge of and experience with the work of experts in relation to such matters
and the availability of alternative sources of audit evidence
8.1.6 Documentation
In the UK, the auditor must document any request for advice from an auditor’s expert and the advice
received.
Evaluation of internal
audit
Objectivity Consider the status of the function within the entity, who they report to,
whether they have any conflicting responsibilities or restrictions placed on
their function. Consider also to what extent management acts on internal
audit recommendations.
Evaluation
Training and Have the internal auditors had sufficient and adequate technical training
proficiency to carry out the work?
Are the internal auditors proficient?
Evidence Has adequate audit evidence been obtained to afford a reasonable basis
for the conclusions reached?
Reports Are any reports produced by internal audit consistent with the result of
the work performed?
Unusual matters Have any unusual matters or exceptions arising and disclosed by internal
audit been resolved properly?
Plan Are any amendments to the external audit plan required as a result of the
matters identified by internal audit?
The nature and extent of the testing of the specific work of internal auditing will depend on the
amount of judgment involved.
The external auditor’s procedures must include reperformance of some of the work of the internal
audit function. If the external auditors decide that the internal audit work is not adequate, they
should extend their own procedures in order to obtain appropriate evidence.
The audit engagement partner (sometimes called the reporting partner) must take responsibility for
the quality of the audit carried out. They should assign staff with necessary competences to the audit
team.
Some audits are wholly carried out by a sole practitioner (an accountant who practises on their own)
or a partner. More commonly, the engagement partner will delegate aspects of the audit work such
as the detailed testing to the staff of the firm. The usual hierarchy of staff on an audit engagement is:
Figure 6.3: Audit staff hierarchy
9.1 Direction
The partner directs the audit. They are required by other auditing standards to hold a meeting with
the audit team to discuss the audit, in particular the risks associated with the audit. ISA (UK) 220 para.
A13 provides examples of direction techniques that the partner might use.
9.2 Supervision
The audit is supervised overall by the engagement partner, but more practical supervision is given
within the audit team by senior staff to more junior staff (covered more fully by ISA (UK) 220 in para.
A15).
9.3 Review
Before the auditor’s report is issued, the engagement partner must be sure that sufficient and
appropriate audit evidence has been obtained to support the audit opinion. The audit engagement
partner need not review all audit documentation, but may do so. They must review critical areas of
judgement, significant risks and other important matters (ISA (UK) 220.A16-19).
9.4 Consultation
Consultation is usually required to ensure difficult or contentious matters have been dealt with
properly and that such matters and conclusions are properly recorded.
As well as working together in a team where everyone understands their role and how they fit
together, good audit quality can only be demonstrated by the way that the team formulates and
communicates its findings.
10 Auditing in an IT environment
Section overview
• The more an organisation uses e-commerce, the greater the risk associated with it. As a
consequence, there are special considerations for auditors performing the audit of companies
who use e-commerce.
10.1 Introduction
We looked at IT-specific risks in the context of carrying out an audit risk assessment and the role of
data analytics tools in this aspect of the audit in Chapter 5. Most companies now have a presence on
the worldwide web: there are few companies who do not engage in some form of e-commerce
nowadays.
E-commerce introduces specific risks. In this section, we will look at what this means for the auditor.
Definitions
Electronic data interchange (EDI): A form of computer to computer data transfer. Information can be
transferred in electronic form, avoiding the need for the information to be re-inputted somewhere
else.
Electronic mail (email): A system of communicating with other connected computers or via the
internet in written form.
Electronic commerce (e-commerce): Involves individuals and companies carrying out business
transactions without paper documents, using computer and telecommunications links.
Transactions with existing customers. Existing customers can be given the opportunity
to track current contracts or initiate others over the website.
Access to new customers. A website can be used as a place where new customers may
initiate transactions with the company.
New business model. A website can be used to diversify into specific web-based HIGH
products, for example, data for download.
There are a variety of business risks specific to a company involved in e-commerce, which will exist to
a greater or lesser degree depending on the extent of involvement.
• Risk of non-compliance with taxation, legal and other regulatory issues
• Contractual issues arising: are legally binding agreements formed over the internet?
• Risk of technological failure (crashes) resulting in business interruption
• Impact of technology on going concern assumption, extent of risk of business failure
• Loss of transaction integrity, which may be compounded by the lack of sufficient audit trail
• Security risks, such as virus attacks and the risk of frauds by customers and employees
• Improper accounting policies in respect of capitalisation of costs such as website development
costs, misunderstanding of complex contractual arrangements, title transfer risks, translation of
foreign currency, allowances for warranties and returns, and revenue recognition issues
• Overreliance on e-commerce when placing significant business systems on the internet
Many of these issues have implications for the statutory audit and these are discussed in detail in the
next section.
An entity that uses e-commerce must address the business risks arising as a result by implementing
appropriate security infrastructure and related controls to ensure that the identity of customers and
suppliers can be verified, the integrity of transactions can be ensured, agreement on terms of trade
can be obtained, and payment from customers is obtained and privacy and information protection
protocols are established.
In its paper Across Jurisdictions in E-commerce, the ICAEW IT Faculty states that an e-trader must
ensure that it:
• displays and uses accurate information electronically;
• complies with relevant regulations and laws;
• intentionally trades only with specific geographical markets and customers;
• has contracts to facilitate effective transactions;
• monitors its contract process;
• keeps audit trails;
• creates and maintains appropriate levels of security; and
• takes appropriate insurance cover.
Requirement
Discuss the following with your peers:
(1) In what ways does this approach help to ensure professional scepticism is exercised in all audits?
(2) In what ways might the impact of this approach be limited?
(3) What other more effective methods can you think of to ensure that audit team members exercise
professional scepticism when performing audit procedures?
12 Further guidance
Section overview
This section covers a number of topics which have been dealt with in detail in your earlier studies. A
brief reminder of the key points is provided below.
Procedures
The auditor maintains control over the confirmation requests, including:
• determining the information to be requested;
• selecting the confirming party;
• designing the confirmation requests, including ensuring that they are correctly addressed and
contain return information for replies to be sent directly to the auditor; and
• sending the requests (and second requests, if needed).
Management refusal
If management refuses to allow a confirmation request to be sent, the auditor shall do the following:
• Enquire as to the reason, and seek evidence as to their validity. (The risk here is that management
may claim that the confirmation may cause problems in the context of disputes or litigation, but
the auditor must remain sceptical and consider the possibility that this may be an attempt to deny
access to evidence that might indicate the existence of fraud.)
• Evaluate the implications of refusal on the risk assessment.
• Perform alternative procedures.
Results
There is always a risk that responses may be intercepted, altered or be in some other way fraudulent.
The auditor must be alert to any factors that suggest there is any doubt about the reliability of the
responses, such as:
• it was received by the auditor indirectly (for example, was received by the client entity and passed
on to the auditor); or
• it appeared not to come from the originally intended confirming party.
In the case of non-responses, the auditor must obtain alternative evidence, the form and nature of
which will be affected by the account and the assertion in question.
Objectives of confirmation
ISA (UK) 505 is relevant to confirmation of accounts receivable. This section recaps the practical
application of the standard. The verification of trade accounts receivable by direct communication is
a normal means of providing audit evidence to satisfy the objective of checking whether customers
exist and owe bona fide amounts to the company (existence and rights and obligations).
Confirmation will produce a written statement from each respondent that the amount owed at the
date of the confirmation is correct. This is, prima facie, reliable audit evidence, being from an
independent source and in ‘documentary’ form. The confirmation of accounts receivable on a test
basis should not be regarded as replacing other normal audit checks, such as the in-depth testing of
sales transactions, but the results may influence the scope of such tests.
Timing
Ideally the confirmation should take place immediately after the year end and hence cover the year
end balances to be included in the statement of financial position. However, time constraints may
make it impossible to achieve this ideal.
Client’s mandate
Confirmation is essentially an act of the client, who alone can authorise third parties to divulge
information to the auditors.
The ISA outlines what the auditors’ response should be when management refuse permission for the
auditors to contact third parties for evidence.
The auditor must:
• enquire as to management’s reasons and seek supporting evidence;
• evaluate the implications on the auditor’s assessment of the risks of material misstatement,
including fraud;
• perform alternative audit procedures; and
• consider the implications for the audit opinion.
Sample selection
Auditors will normally only contact a sample of receivables balances. If this sample is to yield a
meaningful result it must be based on a complete list of all debtors. In addition, when constructing
the sample, the following classes of account should receive special attention:
• Old unpaid accounts
• Accounts written off during the period under review
• Accounts with credit balances
• Accounts settled by round sum payments
Similarly, the following should not be overlooked.
• Accounts with nil balances
• Accounts which have been paid by the date of the examination:
Follow up procedures
Auditors must follow up customer disagreements and failure by customers to respond.
Auditors will have to carry out further work in relation to those debtors who:
• disagree with the balance stated (positive and negative confirmation); or
• do not respond (positive confirmation only).
In the case of disagreements, the customer response should have identified specific amounts which
are disputed.
There is a dispute between the client and the customer. The reasons for the dispute would have to
be identified, and provision made if appropriate against the debt.
Cut-off problems exist, because the client records the following year’s sales in the current year or
because goods returned by the customer in the current year are not recorded in the current year.
Cut-off testing may have to be extended.
The customer may have sent the monies before the yearend, but the monies were not recorded by
the client as receipts until after the yearend. Detailed cut-off work may be required on receipts.
Monies received may have been posted to the wrong account or a cash in transit account.
Auditors should check if there is evidence of other mis-posting. If the monies have been posted to
a cash in transit account, auditors should ensure this account has been cleared promptly.
Customers who are also suppliers may net off balances owed and owing. Auditors should check
that this is allowed.
Teeming and lading, stealing monies and incorrectly posting other receipts so that no particular
customer is seriously in debt is a fraud that can arise in this area. If auditors suspect teeming and
lading has occurred, detailed testing will be required on cash receipts, particularly on prompt
posting of cash receipts.
When the positive request method is used the auditors must follow up by all practicable means
those debtors who fail to respond. Second requests should be sent out in the event of no reply
being received within two or three weeks and if necessary this may be followed by telephoning the
customer, with the client’s permission.
After two, or even three, attempts to obtain confirmation, a list of the outstanding items will normally
be passed to a responsible company official, preferably independent of the sales accounting
department, who will arrange for them to be investigated.
Planning
The auditors should decide from which bank or banks to request confirmation, having regard to the
risks in relation to relevant financial statement assertions including bank-related information to be
disclosed in notes.
Definition
Audit sampling: Defined by ISA (UK) 530 Audit Sampling as:
“The application of audit procedures to less than 100% of items within a population of audit
relevance such that all sampling units have a chance of selection in order to provide the auditor with
a reasonable basis on which to draw conclusions about the entire population.”
Test debit items (expenditure or If a non-current asset entry in the nominal ledger of £1,000
assets) for overstatement by is selected, it would be overstated if it should have been
selecting debit entries recorded in recorded at anything less than £1,000 or if the company did
the nominal ledger and checking not own it, or indeed if it did not exist (eg, it had been sold
value, existence and ownership or the amount of £1,000 in fact represented a revenue
expense).
Test credit items (income or Select a goods despatched note and check that the
liabilities) for understatement by resultant sale has been recorded in the nominal ledger
selecting items from appropriate sales account. Sales would be understated if the nominal
sources independent of the ledger did not reflect the transaction at all (completeness)
nominal ledger and ensuring that or reflected it at less than full value (say if goods valued at
they result in the correct nominal £1,000 were recorded in the sales account at £900, there
ledger entry would be an understatement of £100).
In a ledger account for (say) an asset, the balance would be a debit, but there may be both debit and
credit entries in the account. In using directional testing on this asset account balance, the debit
entries would be tested for overstatement and the credit entries for understatement. The reason is
that the understatement of a credit entry would lead to the overstatement of the asset’s debit
balance on the account, the verification of which is the primary purpose of the test.
The matrix set out below demonstrates how directional testing is applied to give assurance on all
account areas in the financial statements.
A test for the overstatement of an asset simultaneously gives comfort on understatement of other
assets, overstatement of liabilities, overstatement of income and understatement of expenses.
1. Can you remember the assertions and how they help you to generate audit evidence?
2. Are you able to explain what sufficient, appropriate audit evidence means and what you
may need to do to make sure that you have it?
3. Can you distinguish between tests of control, substantive analytical procedures and tests
of detail?
4. Do you know how to use the following audit procedures correctly: inquiry; observation;
inspection; recalculation; reperformance; and external confirmation?
5. Can you explain the various uses of analytical procedures throughout the audit and do you
understand how different techniques can be used to generate audit evidence?
6. Do you know what the terms ‘estimation uncertainty’ and ‘management bias’ mean in the
context of the audit of accounting estimates?
7. Can you explain how an initial audit engagement creates additional problems for auditors
and describe the procedures that the auditor would use to address these problems?
8. What are the problems of working both in a team and with others when conducting an
audit? In the case of the latter, how will you evaluate the competence, capability and
objectivity of others?
9. Can you explain why the introduction of information technology adds extra risk to the
audit and how auditors address these risks?
10. Can you suggest areas of the audit where increased levels of professional scepticism may
be particularly important?
11. Can you explain how the auditor makes use of external confirmations, sampling
techniques and directional testing during the audit?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Strombolix plc The scenario includes some fairly challenging situations that will require a
combination of approaches to generate the necessary audit evidence. This
will definitely help you to consider the evidence required in a given set of
circumstances.
TrueBlue Ltd Although this is quite a short scenario, there is still plenty of opportunity to
deploy your analytical procedures and professional scepticism skills.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Tydaway An opportunity to practise writing suitable audit procedures for the audit
of a specific part of the financial statements, in this case, inventory.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
2 ISA 402
• Definition – ISA 402.8
• Understanding the entity – ISA 402.9–.14
• Audit procedures for obtaining audit evidence – ISA 402.15–.16
• Reference in audit reports – ISA 402.20–.22
3 ISA 315
• List of audit assertions – ISA 315.A129
4 ISA 500
• Sufficient and appropriate audit evidence – ISA 500.A1–.A6
• Audit procedures for obtaining audit evidence – ISA 500.A10–.A25
• Evidence from information produced by a management’s expert – ISA 500.A34–.A48
5 ISA 501
• Procedures regarding litigation and claims – ISA 501.9–.12, .A17–.A25
6 ISA 505
• Considerations in obtaining external confirmation evidence – ISA 505.2–.3
• External confirmation procedures – ISA 505.7–.16
7 ISA 510
• Need to obtain audit evidence – ISA 510.3
• Audit procedures – ISA 510.5–.9
• Audit conclusions and reporting –ISA 510.10–.13
8 ISA 520
• Definition – ISA 520.4
• Use of analytical procedures as substantive procedures – ISA 520.5, A4–.A16
• Analytical procedures when forming an overall conclusion – ISA520.6, A17–A19
9 ISA 530
• Definitions – ISA 530.5
• Design of the sample – ISA 530.A4–.A9
• Sample size – ISA 530.A10–.A13, Appendix 2
• Evaluation of sample results – ISA 530.A21–.A23
10 ISA 540
• Examples of accounting estimates – ISA 540.A1
• Risk assessment procedures – ISA 540.13–15
• Responses to assessed risks of material misstatement – ISA 540.18–30
• Evaluation of results of audit procedures – ISA 540.33–36
11 ISA 550
• Definitions – ISA 550.10
• Risk assessment procedures – ISA 550.11–17
12 ISA 610
• Evaluating the internal audit function – ISA 610.15–.16
• Using the work of internal audit – ISA 610.21–.25
13 ISA 620
• Definition – ISA 620.6
• Determining the need to use the work of an auditor’s expert – ISA 620.7
• Competence, capabilities and objectivity of the auditor’s expert – ISA 620.9, A14–A20
• Agreeing the scope of the auditor’s expert’s work – ISA 620.11
• Evaluating the work of the auditor’s expert – ISA 620.12–.13
• Reference in audit report – ISA 620.14–.15
• Documentation – ISA 620.15–1
1 Strombolix plc
Strombolix plc (Strombolix) is a listed company which manufactures and retails paints and other
decorating products. You are the senior in charge of the audit of Strombolix for the year ending 30
June 20X2, which is currently in progress.
Background information provided
The company owns a large factory manufacturing paints. These paints are sold retail through
Strombolix’s six superstores and they are also sold wholesale to other DIY retailers. In addition, the
six superstores sell a range of other products from different suppliers. The superstores are each
separate divisions, but there are no subsidiaries.
On 23 July 20X2 a bid was announced by Simban plc (Simban) to acquire the entire ordinary share
capital of Strombolix. The directors of Strombolix are contesting the bid and are anxious to publish
the financial statements to indicate that the company is more profitable than indicated by the Simban
offer.
As a result of the bid your audit partner has sent you the following memorandum.
To: A Senior
From: Charles Church (partner)
Date: 24 July 20X2
Subject: Strombolix audit
As you will be aware, Simban made a bid for Strombolix yesterday and this increases the
significance of the financial statements that we are currently auditing.
I am having a preliminary meeting with the finance director on 1 August to discuss the conduct of
the audit. I would like you to prepare notes for me of any audit and financial reporting issues that
have arisen in your work to date that may indicate potential problems. Also include any general
audit concerns you may have arising from the takeover bid.
Let me know what you intend to do about these matters and specify any questions that you would
like me to raise with the finance director.
Further information
The following issues have been reported to you from junior audit staff during the audit to date.
AUDIT ISSUES
(1) There appears to be a significant increase in trade receivables, due to the fact that many
wholesale customers are refusing to pay a total of £50,000 for recent deliveries of a new paint
that appears to decay after only a few months of use. Some of the wholesale customers are
being sued by their own customers for both the cost of the paint and the related labour costs.
No recognition of these events has been made in the draft financial statements.
(2) A special retail offer of ‘3 for 2’ on wallpaper purchased from an outside supplier during the
year has been incorrectly recorded, as the offer was not programmed into the company’s IT
system. The sales assistants were therefore instructed by store managers to read the bar
codes of only two of the three items, and ignore the third ‘free’ item. The wallpaper sells for
£6 per roll and cost £5 per roll from the supplier. A total of 20,000 of these rolls were
processed through the IT system by sales assistants during the year.
The reason for the special offer was that a bonus payment of £90,000 will be due to
Strombolix from the supplier if 40,000 of these rolls of wallpaper are sold by 31 December
20X2. Strombolix has taken 50% of this amount (ie, £45,000) into its draft statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income as revenue for the year to 30 June 20X2.
Requirement
Draft the notes required by Charles Church’s memorandum.
2 AB Milton Ltd
You are the senior in charge of the audit of AB Milton Ltd for the year ended 31 May 20X1. Details of
AB Milton Ltd and certain other companies are given below.
AB Milton Ltd
A building company formed by Alexander Milton and his brother, Brian.
AB Milton Ltd has issued share capital of 500 ordinary £1 shares, owned as shown below.
Diane Hardy 20 4%
Edward Murray is a local businessman and a close friend of both Alexander and Brian Milton. He
gave the brothers advice when they set up the company and remains involved through his position
on the board of directors. His own company, Murray Design Ltd, supplies AB Milton Ltd with
stationery and publicity materials.
Diane Hardy is Alexander Milton’s ex-wife. She was given her shares as part of the divorce settlement
and has no active involvement in the management of the company. Alexander’s girlfriend, Fiona
Dyson, is the company’s solicitor. She is responsible for drawing up and reviewing all key building
and other contracts, and frequently attends board meetings so that she can explain the terms of a
particular contract to the directors. Her personal involvement with Alexander started in May 20X1
and, since that time, she has spent increasing amounts of time at the company’s premises.
Cuts and Curls Ltd
A poodle parlour, of which 50% of the issued shares are owned by Diane Hardy and 50% by Gillian
Milton, who is Alexander and Diane’s daughter.
Cuts and Curls operates from premises owned by AB Milton Ltd for which it pays rent at the normal
market rate.
Campbell Milton Roofing Ltd
A roofing company owned 60% by AB Milton Ltd and 40% by Ian Campbell, the managing director.
Campbell Milton Roofing Ltd carries out regular work for AB Milton Ltd and also does roofing work
for local customers. Alexander Milton is a director of Campbell Milton Roofing Ltd and Catherine
Milton is the company secretary. All legal work is performed by Fiona Dyson.
Requirements
2.1 Based on the information given above, identify the potential related party transactions you
expect to encounter during the audit of AB Milton Ltd and summarise, giving your reasons,
what disclosure, if any, will be required in the full statutory accounts.
3 TrueBlue Ltd
You are planning the audit of TrueBlue Ltd, a company that has experienced a downturn in trading
over recent years. The finance director has provided you with the following information for you to
review before a planning meeting with him.
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income extracts
Requirements
3.1 Outline the areas of the financial statements you would discuss with the finance director at
your planning meeting as a result of the analytical procedures that you perform on these
figures, giving your reasons and also set out any further information you would request.
3.2 Explain whether your approach would be different if you had received a tip off that the finance
director has been carrying out a fraud on receipts from receivables and, if it would be different,
outline how it would be different.
3.3 Describe how you approach the audit of receivables as a result of the tip off about the finance
director.
£m
Sales value of contract 8,500
Costs incurred to date 400
Estimated future costs 7,000
Sales value of work completed to date 560
The directors do not yet believe that the project is sufficiently far advanced for the outcome to be
assessed with any degree of certainty. The company’s accounting policy is to take attributable
profit on the basis of the sales value of the work completed.
Environmental and other provisions
Tofalco plc has a number of long-term obligations arising from the local laws on the environment.
Tofalco is obligated to dispose of its scrap machinery in a particular way which minimises the
damaging effect on the environment.
The machinery held by Tofalco at the year end has a total carrying amount of £25 million and it is
estimated that the present value of the cost to dispose of these machines will be some £2.5
million.
£
Present value of principal 15,902,000
Present value of interest 960,000
16,862,000
Related parties
Tofalco plc purchases significant quantities of raw materials from Sandstone Ltd, a company
whose Finance Director is also a shareholder in Tofalco plc. During the year ended 30 September
20X0 alone, Tofalco plc purchased £230 million worth of raw material from Sandstone Ltd with a
credit payment period of three months. The normal credit period provided within the industry is
two months.
Requirement
Respond to Paul Sykes’s request.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Gross profit margin has fallen from 24% Business strategy and performance must be
last year to 21% this year. discussed with the directors.
The lower margin could arise from genuine
business factors including some relating to
payables such as:
• new suppliers charging higher prices;
and
• increases in the cost of raw materials
used by suppliers.
These factors would have to be confirmed
during the audit of payables.
Cost of sales has increased by 50% while Where the decline in margin cannot be
revenue has increased by 45%. adequately explained by business factors,
accounting errors must be considered. These
could include:
• an inaccurate cut-off on goods
received which misstates purchases
and trade payables; and
• misclassification between purchases
and other expenses.
Potential errors would increase the level of
work required on payables.
Trade payables have increased by 38%, The scope of circularisation and/or supplier
which is less than the increase in cost of statement reconciliation work may have to be
sales. extended if there is an increased number of
suppliers, and these have not been recorded.
The trade payables payment period has Information on payment terms with new
been reduced slightly from 61 days last suppliers (eg, for footwear) must be obtained
year to 56 days this year. to establish expectations.
There is a risk of unrecorded liabilities (eg, due
to omission of goods received not invoiced or
inaccurate cut-off in the purchase ledger).
Review of subsequent cash payments to
payables should cover the two months after the
year end.
Other payables have risen by 12% – this Payables for purchases may be misclassified as
does not seem consistent with a reduction other payables.
in the number of shops.
£
Equity (Ve ) 1,000,000 × 125p 1,250,000
Preference (Vp ) 250,000 × 65p 162,500
1 Strombolix plc
BRIEFING NOTE
To Charles Church (partner)
From A Senior
Date 25 July 20X2
Subject Strombolix audit
Issues on the audit to date
(1) Trade receivables
Issues arising
One type of paint has suffered problems of decay after only a short period of use, and customers are
refusing to pay for recent deliveries. If these claims are valid (as would be indicated by the fact that
the complaints are coming from several different independent sources) this creates a number of
issues.
• The most obvious issue is assessing the need to make provision against, or write off, the £50,000
of receivables relating to the claim. If the claim is valid the receivables should be written off
immediately.
• Given that the decay only occurs after a few months, at least some of the paint is likely to have
been paid for already: thus repayment in respect of these sales is due. Under IAS 37, Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets an obligating event has occurred (the sale of faulty
paint) and there is a probable transfer of economic benefits which can be reasonably estimated.
• Provision will also need to be made against any inventories that may be held of this type of paint,
as they cannot be sold if faulty. This should include any disposal costs.
• If wholesale customers of Strombolix are being sued by their own customers, it is very probable
that they will in turn consider litigation against Strombolix. Part of any claim will be for the paint
itself for which provision is to be made as suggested above. Additionally, however, there is likely
to be a claim for the labour cost involved for the removal of the old paint, in applying new paint
and for disruption. Consideration should be given to making provision for these amounts, but
they are more uncertain in their nature, not least because there does not currently appear to be
any such legal claim against Strombolix. The situation will need to be monitored up to the time of
audit clearance to reassess the situation at that date.
• If wholesale customers of Strombolix are being sued for the faulty paint, consideration should
also be given to making similar provisions in respect of the sales by Strombolix of the paint to its
own retail customers.
• The necessary provisions are specific provisions and would be allowable for taxation. The tax
charge for the year would therefore need to be adjusted to the extent of any provisions made.
The deferred tax charge would need to be adjusted accordingly.
Audit procedures
The key audit issue is to establish whether there is a technical fault in the paint. If there is, as seems
likely, then it will be necessary to establish the extent of the problem by ascertaining the following in
respect of this particular paint.
• The amount of receivables outstanding
• Total sales to date to wholesale and retail customers
• Amount of the paint in inventories
• Review any correspondence on the issue
• Review correspondence with the company’s solicitors
• Establish whether Strombolix made the paint itself or whether it was purchased from a supplier, in
which case there may be a corresponding claim by Strombolix
The difference of £18,667 (£82,667 – £64,000) should be treated as a cost for the year in the
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income under ‘finance costs’. There should also
be a corresponding deduction from the cost of the asset in the draft financial statements.
The amount of borrowing costs that must be capitalised is limited by the requirement that the total
value of the asset (including borrowing costs) should not exceed the asset’s recoverable amount.
The following disclosure should be made where interest is capitalised within non-current assets.
• Aggregate finance costs included in non-current assets
• Finance costs capitalised in the year (including £64,000 in respect of this transaction)
• Finance costs recognised in profit or loss (including £18,667 in respect of this transaction)
• Capitalisation rate used (8%)
Audit procedures
• Loan agreement to be inspected for interest rate and other terms
• Contract for building the superstore and associated documentation to be inspected – particularly
for amounts and dates in this context
• Evidence of the date on which activity commenced to ‘get the asset ready for use’ to be inspected
eg, preparation for planning permission
• Evidence of the date on which the asset was ready for use to be gathered (eg, builder’s reports
and other correspondence)
• Confirm that the policy on interest capitalisation is consistent with that previously adopted when
building other stores
Questions for finance director
• Why was there a delay between the purchase of land and the commencement of preparation for
planning permission?
• Does he accept that the revised calculation (above) is consistent with IAS 23?
General concerns arising from the takeover bid
The takeover bid is an inherent risk in the context of this audit, particularly as the directors are
attempting to defend the bid. In this case they will be attempting to show the company in the best
possible light. This may involve disclosing the highest possible profit in the financial statements.
This policy would be consistent with the audit issues discovered, in that there does not appear to be
any provision in respect of receivables or inventory in audit issues (1) and (2). Similarly, the amount of
interest capitalised in (3) appears to present an overoptimistic figure for profit.
Consideration will thus need to be given to the extent of reliance that can be placed on management
assurances and managerial control in this audit, even if they have proved reliable in the past.
Moreover, if the financial statements are misstated there is a possibility of litigation against our firm
for third-party negligence if Simban suffers a loss or if it relies on the financial statements – and we
know it is relying on the financial statements for the purpose of the takeover. To some extent a report
of due diligence before takeover may mitigate some of this risk, but this cannot be relied on entirely.
Consider the impact of time pressure being placed on the audit.
Reconsider materiality levels and the risk assessment in the audit plan in the light of the takeover bid.
Cuts and Curls is not clear cut. For it to be a related party Gillian Milton would need to be in a
position to control Cuts and Curls and then due to her relationship with Alexander Milton her
company would come under the related party umbrella. Gillian only holds 50% and therefore
holds joint control with her mother.
Disclosure
The related party relationship between AB Milton and Campbell Milton Roofing must be
disclosed, as it is a relationship between a parent and a subsidiary. This disclosure must be
provided irrespective of whether a transaction takes place.
For other related party relationships disclosure is only required where a transaction has taken
place. In this case that would apply to the transactions with Edward Murray, Fiona Dyson and
potentially Cuts and Curls. Disclosure is required of the nature of the related party relationship
as well as information about the transaction and any outstanding balances necessary for users
to understand the potential effect of the relationship. Disclosure should include the following
as a minimum:
• A description of the relationship
• A description of the transaction and the amounts included
• The amounts due to or from the related party at the end of the year
• Any other element of the transaction necessary for an understanding of the financial
statements
2.2 Notes for staff training sessions:
(a) We are required to assess the risk of undisclosed related party transactions and to design
our audit procedures in response to that risk. A logical place to start the audit of related
party transactions would be to identify all possible related parties. This would always
include the following:
• Directors and shadow directors
3 TrueBlue Ltd
3.1 Discussion with the finance director
Revenue and marketing expense
The trend of falling revenue has continued in 20X7 from previous years. The problem seems
worse in view of the fact that 20X7 saw a substantial increase in advertising and marketing
expenditure, without which the fall would presumably have been greater. It is important to
investigate this situation and the action taken in relation to it, because the company could be
facing significant going concern problems if its products are no longer required by the market.
However, the revenue fall in 20X7 from 20X6 is not as significant as from 20X5, and it is
possible that the sales trend in 20X6 and the beginning of 20X7 has been reversed and the
company might be beginning to perform well again.
WORKINGS
(1) Gross profit margin
20X7
4,357,233 ÷ 18,944,487 = 23%
20X6
6,174,827 ÷ 20,588,370 = 30%
20X5
7,359,648 ÷ 24,536,570 = 30%
(2) Receivables days
20X7
(3,477,481 ÷ 18,944,487) × 365 = 67
20X6
(3,553,609 ÷ 20,588,370) × 365 = 63
20X5
(4,089,783 ÷ 24,536,570) × 365 = 61
(3) Payables days
20X7
(1,056,090 ÷ 9,183,388) × 365 = 42
20X6
(1,027,380 ÷ 9,246,420) × 365 = 41
20X5
(1,164,843 ÷ 10,483,588) × 365 = 41
3.2 If fraud is suspected
The auditor is required to approach their task with an attitude of professional scepticism.
Therefore, in theory, the auditor should not approach the task differently if fraud has been
suggested than they would have before. The questions arising from the analytical procedures
would be the same, and the auditor would still seek to corroborate the answers and then
assess whether they are satisfied with the corroborated answers. Given that the auditor is
required to be aware that fraud is a possibility whether they have been tipped off or not, the
corroboration of the finance director’s answers should have been thorough and based on
sources other than the finance director (such as third-party invoices and the
opinions/experience of other sources in the company) anyway.
If the auditor has been given a tip off that fraud exists, he should pass on that information to
the appropriate level of management. In this case, this would be the audit committee, as the
tip off concerns the finance director.
4 Tofalco plc
Memorandum
To Paul Sykes
From Jeremy Wiquad
Date 6 November 20X0
Re Tofalco plc
The memo below covers the financial reporting and auditing issues raised per your request.
Financial reporting treatment and audit procedures required
• Construction contracts
– Given that the outcome cannot be foreseen reliably, no profit should be recognised in the
current year. Instead, £400 million should be recognised within cost of sales and, assuming that
these costs are recoverable, the same amount within revenues (therefore showing no profit and
no loss). The value of the work done in the statement of financial position will therefore be £400
million.
Audit procedures to gain assurance include:
– reviewing the contract to confirm the duration and sales value of the contract;
– reviewing the surveyor’s report to confirm the value of the work performed to date;
– examining internal cost reports and confirming items on a sample basis to invoices; and
– obtaining a written representation from management with regards to the outcome of the
contract.
• Provisions – An environmental provision for the £2.5 million present value of the cost of disposing
of the machines is required per IAS 37 and should be presented within non-current liabilities. This
cost should also be included as part of the cost of the asset. In subsequent years the liability will
increase due to the unwinding of the discount and a corresponding finance expense will be
shown within profit or loss.
Audit procedures to gain assurance include:
– reviewing the law with regards to the environmental provision and the underlying
documentation relating to the £2.5 million estimate provided;
– assessing whether the discount rate used to calculate the present value of the disposal costs is
appropriate; and
£
Face value of convertible bonds 18,000,000
PVs of future cash flows of equivalent bonds with no conversion option 16,862,000 Liability
Equity (warrants) (difference between the above) 1,138,000 Equity
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Introduction
2 Respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and
auditors
3 Evaluating and testing internal controls
4 Service organisations
5 Internal controls in an IT environment
6 Cyber security and corporate data security
7 Communicating and reporting on internal control
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Analyse and evaluate the control environment for an entity based on an understanding of the
entity, its operations and its processes
• Evaluate an entity’s processes for identifying, assessing and responding to business and
operating risks as they impact on the financial statements
• Appraise an entity’s accounting information systems and related business processes relevant to
corporate reporting and communication including virtual arrangements and cloud computing
• Analyse and evaluate strengths and weaknesses of preventive and detective control mechanisms
and processes, highlighting control weaknesses; including weaknesses related to cyber security
and corporate data controls
• Evaluate controls relating to information technology and e-commerce; including controls
associated with cyber security and corporate data security
• Explain and appraise the entity’s system for monitoring and modifying internal control systems
• Devise, explain and evaluate tests of controls
• Explain the respective responsibilities of those charged with governance and auditors in respect
of internal control systems
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 12(a)–(g), 13(h)
7
the financial
statements.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 355
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance questions
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• An entity’s system of internal controls informs the auditor’s assessment of audit risk and the nature
of the audit procedures that would be undertaken during the audit fieldwork stage.
• In addition to the auditing standards, corporate governance codes (such as the UK Corporate
Governance Code and the Sarbanes–Oxley Act) also prescribe the respective responsibilities of
the auditor and those charged with governance with regards to internal controls.
Internal control is an essential aspect of the entity about which the auditor must gain an
understanding at the start of the audit. The effectiveness of the system of internal controls informs
the auditor’s risk assessment and, consequently, the audit procedures to be carried out at the audit
fieldwork stage. Therefore, internal control will have to be considered throughout the audit life cycle
– from planning to finalisation and reporting.
In this chapter, we will revise the auditor’s responsibilities with regards to the system of internal
control and the consideration of internal controls at different stages of the audit. We will then have a
closer look at the implications of service organisations, and the risks and benefits of internal controls
in an IT environment.
As you will have seen already, internal control is central to corporate governance. Therefore, we will
regularly refer back to our discussions on corporate governance in Chapter 4.
• Auditors are responsible for obtaining audit evidence that provides reasonable assurance that the
financial statements are free of material misstatements, some of which may be caused by error.
• Management are responsible for designing and implementing a system of internal control which
is capable of preventing, or detecting and correcting, errors in the financial records.
• Auditors are required to assess the system of internal control as part of their audit in order to
determine whether to rely on the system of controls or carry out extended tests of details.
Definitions
Those charged with governance: The person(s) or organisation(s) (for example, a corporate trustee)
with responsibility for overseeing the strategic direction of the entity and obligations related to the
accountability of the entity. This includes overseeing the financial reporting process. For some
entities in some jurisdictions, those charged with governance may include management personnel,
for example, executive members of a governance board of a private or public sector entity, or an
owner-manager.
In the UK, those charged with governance include executive and non-executive directors and the
members of the audit committee.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 357
Error: An unintentional misstatement in financial statements, including the omission of an amount or
a disclosure.
Internal control: A process designed, implemented and maintained by those charged with
governance, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance about the
achievement of the entity’s objectives with regard to reliability of financial reporting, effectiveness
and efficiency of operations and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. It follows that
internal control is designed and implemented to address identified business risks that threaten the
achievement of any of these objectives.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 359
eg, computers tend to make fewer mistakes than humans after a given procedure has been correctly
programmed.
The use of computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) is referred to below.
Please also refer back to Chapter 4 for the auditor’s responsibilities for the evaluation of internal
controls from a corporate governance perspective.
Evaluating the outcome of tests of control will require an understanding of the implications for the
audit overall. This in turn will require sound skills of judgement.
4 Service organisations
Section overview
Where the auditor’s client uses a service organisation, the auditor may need to obtain evidence of
the accuracy of processing systems within a service organisation.
Definition
Service organisation: A third-party organisation that provides services to user entities that are part of
those entities’ information systems relevant to financial reporting.
ISA (UK) 402, Audit Considerations Relating to an Entity Using a Service Organisation provides
guidance on how auditors carry out their responsibility to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence when the audit client (called the ‘user entity’ in the standard) uses such an organisation.
The ISA (UK) mentions the following service organisation services that may be relevant to the audit
(this is not an exhaustive list):
• Maintenance of accounting records
• Other finance functions, such as the tax compliance function
• Management of assets
• Undertaking or making arrangements for transactions as agents of the user entity
Definition
User auditor: An auditor who audits and reports on the financial statements of a user entity.
The ISA (UK) states that the objective of the auditor is ‘to obtain an understanding of the nature and
significance of the services provided by the service organisation and their effect on the user entity’s
internal control relevant to the audit, sufficient to identify and assess the risks of material
misstatement’ (ISA (UK) 402.7).
The ISA requires the auditor to understand how the user entity uses the services of the service
organisation. In obtaining an understanding of the entity, the auditor shall consider the following:
(a) The nature of the services provided by the service organisation
(b) The nature and materiality of the transactions processed or accounts or financial accounting
processes affected by the service organisation
(c) The degree of interaction between the activities of the service organisation and those of the
user entity
(d) The nature of the relationship between the user entity and the service organisation, including
the contractual terms
(e) In the UK, if the service organisation maintains all or part of a user entity’s accounting records,
whether those arrangements impact the work the auditor performs to fulfil reporting
responsibilities in relation to accounting records (The wording of UK company law raises a
particular issue, as the wording appears to be prescriptive, requiring the company itself to keep
accounting records. Whether a company ‘keeps’ records will depend on the particular terms of
the outsourcing arrangement.)
When obtaining an understanding of internal control the auditor shall:
(a) evaluate the design and implementation of controls at the user entity that relate to the services
provided by the service organisation; and
(b) determine whether this gives sufficient understanding of the effect of the service organisation on
the user entity’s internal control to provide a basis for the identification and assessment of risks
of material misstatement.
If not then the auditor shall do one or more of the following:
(a) Obtain a report from the service organisation’s auditors (there are two different types of report,
see below)
(b) Contact the service organisation, through the user entity
(c) Visit the service organisation and perform procedures that will provide information about the
relevant controls
(d) Use another auditor to perform procedures that will provide information about the relevant
controls
Definitions
Type 1 report: A report that comprises both of the following:
• A description, prepared by management of the service organisation, of the service organisation’s
system, control objectives and related controls that have been designed and implemented as at a
specified date
• A report by the service auditor with the objective of conveying reasonable assurance that includes
the service auditor’s opinion on the description of the service organisation’s system, control
objectives and related controls and the suitability of the design of the controls to achieve the
specified control objectives
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 361
Type 2 report: A report that comprises both of the following:
• A description, as in a Type 1 report of the system and controls, of their design and
implementation as at a specified date or throughout a specified period and, in some cases, their
operating effectiveness throughout a specified period
• A report by the service auditor with the objective of conveying reasonable assurance that
includes:
– the service auditor’s opinion on the description of the service organisation’s system, control
objectives and related controls, the suitability of the design of the controls to achieve the
specified control objectives, and the operating effectiveness of the controls; and
– a description of the service auditor’s tests of the controls and the results thereof.
The availability of a report on internal controls generally depends on whether the provision of such a
report is part of the contractual terms between the user entity and the service organisation.
Before placing reliance on the report, the user auditor shall do the following:
• Consider the service auditor’s professional competence and independence from the service
organisation
• Consider the adequacy of the standards under which the report was issued
• Evaluate whether the period covered is appropriate for the auditor’s purposes
• Evaluate the sufficiency and appropriateness of the report for the understanding of the internal
controls relevant to the audit
• Determine whether the user entity has implemented any complementary controls that the service
organisation, in the design of its service, has assumed will be implemented
While a Type 1 report may be useful to a user auditor in gaining the required understanding of the
accounting and internal control systems, an auditor would not use such reports as a basis for
reducing the assessment of control risk.
But a Type 2 report may provide such a basis since tests of control have been performed. If this type
of report may be used as evidence to support a lower control risk assessment, a user auditor would
have to consider whether the controls tested by the service organisation auditor are relevant to the
user’s transactions (significant assertions in the client’s financial statements) and whether the service
organisation auditor’s tests of controls and the results are adequate.
• IT controls comprise general and application controls. General controls establish a framework of
overall control over the system’s activities whereas application controls are specific controls over
the applications maintained by the system.
• Computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) can be used by the auditor to test application
controls within the client’s computer systems.
• Specific considerations will apply where virtual arrangements including cloud computing are
used.
5.1 Introduction
We looked at IT-specific risks in the context of carrying out an audit risk assessment in Chapter 5, and
introduced the use of CAATs in Chapter 6. Here, we will consider IT controls in more detail, along
with how to audit them.
As you should know by now, the internal control activities in a computerised environment fall within
two categories: general controls and application controls.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 363
development and maintenance. They are sometimes referred to as supervisory, management or
information technology controls. General controls are considered in detail below.
General controls
Controls to ensure Storing extra copies of programs and data files offsite
continuity of operation Protection of equipment against fire and other hazards
Back-up power sources
Emergency procedures
Disaster recovery procedures eg, availability of back-up computer
facilities
Maintenance agreements and insurance
The auditors will wish to test some or all of the above general controls, having considered how they
affect the computer applications significant to the audit.
Application controls
Controls over input: Programs to check data fields (for example value, reference number,
accuracy date) on input transactions for plausibility
Digit verification (eg, reference numbers are as expected)
• Reasonableness test (eg, sales tax to total value)
• Existence checks (eg, customer name)
• Character checks (no unexpected characters used in reference)
• Necessary information (no transaction passed with gaps)
• Permitted range (no transaction processed over a certain value)
Manual scrutiny of output and reconciliation to source
Agreement of control totals (manual/programmed)
Controls over processing Similar controls to input must be in place when input is completed, for
example, batch reconciliations
Screen warnings can prevent people logging out before processing is
complete
Control over input, processing, data files and output may be carried out by IT personnel, users of the
system, a separate control group and may be programmed into application software.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 365
5.4 The use of CAATs
Computer-assisted audit techniques (CAATs) can assist the auditor in testing application controls. As
you will know from your earlier audit studies, there are generally two types of CAATs: audit software
and test data.
Audit software includes generalised audit software and custom audit software. Generalised audit
software includes programs that allow the auditor to carry out tests on computer files and databases.
An example of a generalised audit software program is ACL.
Generalised audit software allows auditors to perform a number of functions, such as database
access, sample selection, arithmetic functions, statistical analyses and report generation.
The advantages of generalised audit software include the fact that it is easy to use, limited IT
programming skills are needed, the time required to develop the application is relatively short, and
entire populations can be examined, thus negating the need for sampling. However, the drawbacks
of using this type of CAAT are that it involves auditing after the client has processed the data rather
than while the data is being processed, and it is limited to procedures that can be performed on data
that is available electronically.
Custom audit software is normally written by auditors for specific audit tasks. It is normally used in
situations where the client’s computer system is not compatible with the auditor’s generalised audit
software or where the auditor wants to do some testing that might not be possible with the
generalised audit software. However, this type of CAAT can be expensive and time consuming to
develop and may require a lot of modification if the client changes its accounting application
programs.
Test data is used to test the application controls in the client‘s computer programs. Test data is first
created for processing and it includes both valid and invalid data which is processed on the client’s
computer and application programs. The invalid data should therefore be highlighted as errors. Test
data allows the auditor to check data validation controls and error detection routines, processing
logic controls, arithmetic calculations and the inclusion of transactions in records and files.
The main benefit of test data is that it provides direct evidence on the effectiveness of controls in the
client’s application programs. However, its drawbacks include the fact that it is very time consuming
to create the test data, the auditor cannot be certain that all relevant controls are tested and the
auditor must make sure that all valid test data is removed from the client’s systems.
In the table below, we briefly examine ways of testing application controls, including the use of
CAATs to do so.
Testing of application
controls
Manual controls If manual controls exercised by the user of the application system are
exercised by the user capable of providing reasonable assurance that the system’s output is
complete, accurate and authorised, the auditors may decide to limit
tests of control to these manual controls.
Controls over system If, in addition to manual controls exercised by the user, the controls to
output be tested use information produced by the computer or are contained
within computer programs, such controls may be tested by examining
the system’s output using either manual procedures or CAATs. Such
output may be in the form of magnetic media, microfilm or printouts.
Alternatively, the auditor may test the control by performing it with the
use of CAATs.
Programmed control In the case of certain computer systems, the auditor may find that it is
procedures not possible or, in some cases, not practical to test controls by
examining only user controls or the system’s output. The auditor may
consider performing tests of control by using CAATs, such as test data,
reprocessing transaction data and, in unusual situations, examining the
coding of the application program.
Being able to differentiate between general and application controls will allow the auditor to assess a
system and how robust it is. This demonstrates the ability to assimilate information about the system
for the purpose of evaluating the system.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 367
6 Cyber security and corporate data security
Section overview
Businesses need to keep their data secure whether it is in hard copy or electronic format. As business
operations increasingly use digital technology the issue of cyber security is an essential
consideration as part of the audit.
6.1 Introduction
There has always been a need for companies to keep information, or data, safe. This might be to
ensure confidentiality of customer details, to protect company ‘secrets’ or to ensure the integrity of
data. Where records and data are held in a hard copy format, as would have been the case in the
past, data security centres around physical security. This might simply involve a lock on a filing
cabinet. Increasingly, however, data is stored electronically. As a result, if a business is to keep its data
secure it must address the issue of cyber security. Addressing cyber security threats will be a key part
of its corporate data security strategy.
6.2.1 GDPR
The following table summarises the key points that are relevant to all accountants in this area.
Organisations must only collect personal data Data can only be obtained for a legitimate
(including sensitive personal data, such as business need and cannot be collected in case
biometric data used to identify an individual) it might be useful at some stage in the future.
when it can demonstrate that it has a valid This means that accountants need to consider
business need for that data. carefully what data they really need and be able
The GDPR distinguishes between data to justify it:
controllers who specify how and why data is • This includes data on employees, customers
processed and data processors who act on the and suppliers for all accountants and firms
controller’s behalf and deal directly with data • For firms, this also includes the details of any
itself. Both are liable under the GDPR. testing completed (eg, payroll and supplier
statements)
Personal data must be stored securely. It must This can include both physical storage of data
then be deleted when it is no longer required. (eg, in filing cabinets) and electronic storage –
given the vast amounts of data generated in the
21st Century due to advances in technology
such as big data and audit data analytics, this
creates a significant risk for all accountants,
especially as many organisations now use
‘cloud-based’ data storage.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 369
GDPR components Implications in practice for accountants
when using new technology or when before any personal data is collected.
processing might lead to a high risk to
individuals).
Breaches in the GDPR also need to be
disclosed – fines for non-compliance can reach
either €20 million or 4% of an organisation’s
global turnover.
The GDPR confers a series of rights on anyone whose personal data may be collected by an
organisation:
• The right to be informed (usually via some form of privacy notice)
• The right of access to your personal data and confirmation that it is being used
• The right of rectification if errors exist
• The right of erasure (sometimes referred to as ‘the right to be forgotten’)
• The right to restrict processing should you not wish your data to be used
• The right to data portability across different services should you wish
• The right to object (for example if you object to your data being used for marketing purposes)
• Rights in relation to automated decision-making and profiling (essentially, to ensure that all
decisions about your data are made using human not machine judgement)
Any non-compliance in relation to any of these rights may lead to fines and penalties, so they
should form part of any DPIA carried out.
(Source: The Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) (2017) Overview of the General Data
Protection Regulation (GDPR))
The five functions (governance and leadership, organisational enablers, capabilities, cyber lifecycle
and solution lifecycle) provide a ‘strategic view of an organisation’s management of cyber security
risks’.
The ICAEW IT Faculty document, Audit insights: Cyber Security – Taking Control of the Agenda refers
to the ‘three lines of defence’ model. This applies controls, assurance and oversight at three different
levels in the organisation as follows:
• The first line is at an operational level, with controls built into processes and local management
responsible for their operation in practice ie, identifying and managing risks on a day-to-day
basis.
• The second line is at functional specialism level, for example the role of cyber-security specialists
and a chief information officer ie, providing oversight and expertise.
• The third line is at the level of internal audit functions or independent assurance providers ie,
providing assurance and challenge concerning the overall management of the risks.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 371
6.5 Risks external to the entity
As identified in the ICAEW IT Faculty document: Audit insights: Cyber Security – Closing the Cyber
Gap the issue is becoming an increasingly relevant aspect of supply chain risk management as many
high profile security breaches have come as a result of issues at suppliers, including IT service
providers, suppliers of non-IT goods and services and contractors. Obtaining assurance in this
respect is not an easy process meaning that companies are having to identify where the biggest risk
lies rather than simply focusing on the highest value suppliers. In addition, companies have had to
consider widening the scope of assurance processes so that they apply to all stages of the
transaction, rather than just at the procurement stage as has historically been the case. The most
common method used, particularly by large companies, is questionnaires which are sent to suppliers
to enable their processes to be evaluated and risks identified.
Be ready to respond Consider the most serious possible breach and ask whether the
organisation, and board, are ready to cope. What would they do if
competitors accessed their IP? How does the business reassure
customers if their data is stolen?
Build intelligence What does the business know about specific threats, the actors
and their possible methods? How have other major breaches
happened, and how do the defences put in place by the business
compare? What are their peers doing to manage their risk? How
can they get ahead of the regulators?
Be specific and real How can critical data actually be accessed and by whom? What
controls are in place, and how does the business know whether
they are working? How are any breaches detected?
Link to strategic change How are major strategic initiatives changing the risks? What is the
impact of any M&A activity? What are the risks attached to new
products or market expansion?
Attach consequences What behaviour is unacceptable because of cyber risks? How does
the business know if non-compliance is occurring? What happens
to employees who do not follow the rules?
Tailor activities How relevant is cyber security training to specific roles and
responsibilities? Do higher-risk jobs have higher levels of training
and awareness-raising activities? Are staff clear about the purpose
of good cyber behaviour?
Hold boards to the same Are boards expected to follow the same rules as staff? Is the board
level of accountability clear as to the purpose and consequences of non-compliance?
Does the board see itself as a role model for good cyber
behaviour? Do members of the board act as role models?
Remember insider risk What is in place to detect suspicious behaviour or patterns? How
are disgruntled or disaffected staff identified? Does the business
know how much system access potentially disaffected staff have?
Implement cyber-by-design Are new products and services designed with cyber risks in mind?
Do business change projects consider cyber risk early on? What
are the risks of poor design?
Continually review and re- Are designs building in flexibility and resilience to cope with
evaluate changing cyber risks? How often are cyber risks reviewed? How
are changing risks incorporated into existing processes?
Take difficult decisions Is the business prepared to delay major change or strategic
projects if the security is not good enough? Is the business using a
‘sticking plaster’ approach to an old infrastructure?
Embed cyber into start-ups If investing in new businesses, are cyber risks considered?
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 373
Specific procedures to address these issues could include the following:
• Perimeter defences
• Vulnerability management
• Asset management
• Identity management
• Data protection procedures
• Threat intelligence eg, sharing intelligence with others within the same industry
• Security monitoring
• Behavioural analysis
• Risk analytics
• Incident response procedures
• Forensics
• Business continuity/disaster recovery procedures
• Crisis management
An awareness of both the control environment and control procedures should help an auditor assess
the impact of any cyber threats. This is an example of structuring a problem to achieve an effective
solution.
Auditors are required to report to those charged with governance on material deficiencies in controls
which could adversely affect the entity’s ability to record, process, summarise and report financial
data potentially causing material misstatements in the financial statements.
Definitions
Deficiency: A deficiency in internal control exists when:
• a control is designed, implemented or operated in such a way that it is unable to prevent, or
detect and correct, misstatements in the financial statements on a timely basis; or
• a control necessary to prevent, or detect and correct, misstatements in the financial statements on
a timely basis is missing.
Significant deficiency in internal control: Those which in the auditor’s professional judgement are of
sufficient importance to merit the attention of those charged with governance.
The process of reporting to those charged with governance on material deficiencies in internal
control requires strong communication skills as well as the ability to conclude that the deficiency
might be significant.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 375
Summary
1. Can you explain the importance of internal controls as part of the auditor’s role?
2. Can you distinguish between the relative responsibilities of those charged with
governance and the auditor?
3. Can you explain how the auditor evaluates internal controls and recommend suitable tests
of control to support the audit opinion?
4. Can you explain the impact on the audit of an entity choosing to outsource some of its
core functions? What factors will this impact be dependent on?
5. Do you know the difference between general and application controls in an IT context?
Are you aware of the impact that new technology such as cloud computing can have on
the audit?
6. Can you explain the various cyber threats that an organisation is at risk from and how such
cyber threats are mitigated?
7. How should the auditor communicate deficiencies in internal control and what makes such
a deficiency significant?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Dodgy Burgers plc Being able to consider suitable audit procedures for testing relevant
internal controls.
Happy Flights plc This question tests how well you can discuss cyber security issues in the
context of a broader audit engagement.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
UHN requirement (4) You need to be able to explain the board’s responsibilities and
accountability for cyber security.
Newpenny You should be able to evaluate Rosa’s suggestion of placing more reliance
requirement (2) on operating effectiveness of controls.
Johnson Telecom As part of the key risks from derivatives trading, you need to consider the
requirement (3) necessary general and application IT controls that would be required.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 377
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 379
Self-test questions
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 381
As a consequence, there have been continuing cash flow problems which have been partially
alleviated by special measures adopted this year, including:
• significant discounts for bookings made, and paid for in full, at least six months before travel;
• extension of short-term leases on existing aircraft, rather than leasing new aircraft (all planes are
leased); and
• significant new fixed-term borrowings.
Database system
A new database system for bookings was introduced in January 20X4 by IT consultants. The purpose
of the new system was to allow data on HF’s flight availability to be accessed by travel agents and
other flight booking agencies around the world. Agencies can all make bookings on the same
system.
The database system is used not just for bookings but also as part of the receivables accounting
system for agents to collect money from customers and pay to HF after deducting their commission.
The data collected then feeds into the financial statements.
Unfortunately, since installation, the following problems have been discovered, either in the database
system, or relating to operatives using the system:
• It is HF’s policy to overbook its flights by 5% of seat capacity. However, there have been a number
of instances where overbookings have far exceeded 5% due to processing delays.
• The system has crashed on a number of occasions causing delays in processing and loss of data.
• A computer virus penetrated the system, although it did not cause any damage and was quickly
removed.
• Cash received in advance has been recorded as revenue at the date of receipt by HF.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 383
Answers to Self-test questions
• Partially cooked burgers have • Management has • Obtain a copy of the Health and
been sold. set up a Health Safety policy and review to
• This constitutes an operational and Safety ensure that the policies are
risk (failure to comply will result training adequate. File on the permanent
in the company being shut down) programme. audit file for future reference.
and compliance risk (breach of • Hold discussions with the branch
Health and Safety regulations). managers on a sample basis to
ensure that the policy has been
implemented if staff do not reach
the required standard.
• Review the training course to
establish what procedures are
being taught to the staff, and
what follow up has been
implemented if staff do not reach
the required standard.
New competitor
Cash controls
• Risk of theft of cash takings • New controls • Review returns from branches to
(financial risk). implemented to head office on a sample basis.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 385
(1) Business risk and category Management (2) Audit procedures to be
strategy to combat completed in order to place
risk reliance on the controls in place
Limited seating
Recycled products
• A lack of confidence from the • The use of • Review the contracts with the
public in Dodgy Burgers plc’s recycled suppliers to ensure that recycled
environmental policies packaging. packages are clearly specified
(operational and compliance • Waste and the price is comparable to
risk). separations and the original prices of non-
collections. recycled products.
• Review the branch returns to
ensure that delivery notes have
been signed for the waste
collection and the receipts match
the tonnage collected. Ensure
that these are in line with
expectations from the
preliminary analytical procedures
on the accounts.
• Review the new packaging for
evidence that the recycled
symbols have been correctly
displayed.
• Discuss with the branch
managers if any further costs
have been incurred from having
to separate the waste for
collection, or whether
separate bins have been
provided in the branches for
the public to use.
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 387
These include:
• reduction in passenger numbers, as the reputation for safety may have diminished;
• grounding of aircraft by health and safety regulators perhaps resulting in loss of revenues,
cancellations and delays; and
• reconsideration of leasing older planes resulting in additional costs.
Audit procedures
• Review claims against HF received by audit completion.
• Review correspondence with HF’s legal advisers and consider taking independent legal advice
regarding the amount and probability of any claim against HF.
• Review any announcements by investigation teams and any correspondence with HF regarding
causes of the crash and the extent HF was to blame up to the date of audit completion (eg, ‘black
box’ flight recorder evidence).
• Consider the possibility of counter claims by HF against others responsible for the crash by
considering legal advice.
• Review any correspondence with Health and Safety Executive regarding grounding of planes or
possible causes of the crash.
• Review flight bookings since crash for evidence of a decline in reputation and fall in future sales.
• Assess impact on budgeted cash flows to consider impact on going concern.
(2) Operating issues
Financial reporting issues
• The decline in operating profits is further evidence of going concern problems.
• If the short-term leases have been extended then they will need to be recognised as right-of-use
assets in the statement of financial position.
Audit risks
The key audit risk is going concern. If there is adequate disclosure in the financial statements by the
directors regarding the uncertainties about going concern then an unmodified audit opinion will be
issued but the audit report will include a separate section headed ‘Material Uncertainty Related to
Going Concern’. However, if the directors do not disclose going concern uncertainties appropriately,
it may be necessary to modify the audit opinion.
The receipt of cash from customers in advance is likely to cause concern if the company does have
going concern issues, as this may amount to fraudulent trading if the customers, as unsecured
creditors, are unable to recover their payment.
The additional borrowing also increases financial risk and makes profit more sensitive to changes in
the level of operating activity.
Audit procedures
As already noted, cash flow forecasts will need to be reviewed up to the date of audit completion to
assess the future viability of the company. This should include the following:
• Examining overdraft and other lending facilities (eg, for ‘headroom’ against existing liabilities, for
interest rates and for capital repayment dates). Build a picture of future financial commitments.
• Identifying the level of advanced payments and discuss with the directors the issue of continuing
the policy of advanced payments and the implications for fraudulent trading.
• Examining budgets and cash flow projections as part of going concern. Review to assess future
expected changes in liquidity.
• Examining lease contracts to assess the lease renewals position in order to ascertain future levels
of commitment.
(3) Database system
Audit risks
General systems issues
The nature of the fault needs to be identified ie, there may be issues with the work and or
hardware/software supplied by the consultants. Some of the problems appear to be with the people
ICAEW 2021 7: The statutory audit: evaluating and testing internal controls 389
• Review data independence procedures (the data should be independent of the application such
that the structure of the data can be changed independently of the application).
• Consider the wider database control environment. This includes the general controls and who has
access to change particular aspects of the database.
• General controls might include: a standard approach for development and maintenance of
application programs; access rights; data resource management; data security, cyber-security and
data recovery.
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Review and audit completion
2 Subsequent events
3 Going concern
4 Comparatives
5 Written representations
6 The auditor’s report
7 Other reporting responsibilities
8 Appendix (Illustrations)
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Review the appropriateness of the going concern basis of accounting and describe relevant
going concern disclosures
• Review events after the reporting period
• Review and evaluate, quantitatively and qualitatively, for example using analytical procedures and
data analytics and artificial intelligence, the results and conclusions obtained from audit
procedures
• Draw conclusions on the nature of the report on an audit engagement, and formulate an opinion
for a statutory audit, which are consistent with the results of the audit evidence gathered
• Draft suitable extracts for reports (for example any report to the management or those charged
with governance issued as part of the engagement)
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 15(a)–(e)
8
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 393
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance questions
during the course of matters, any content may also be unless you can
the engagement necessary added to another explain that there is
and requires great modifications and requirement where a problem with the
skill and judgement the auditor’s you need to accounting
to prepare. responsibilities for consider the impact treatment here,
other information. of your findings on there is a risk that
None of this is new the auditor’s report you will issue an
material but you still and/or the opinion. unmodified opinion
need to be prepared Be prepared! despite the possible
in case it is presence of
examined. accounting
Stop and think irregularities.
Reporting therefore
Can you differentiate requires strong
between situations corporate reporting
where you might knowledge in
only need to modify conjunction with
the auditor’s report your audit reporting
and those where the knowledge. Don’t
audit opinion forget about
requires modifying? materiality!
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• Towards the end of an audit, a series of reviews and evaluations are carried out.
• This is an important aspect of quality control.
1.1 Introduction
Auditing initially may be carried out on components, with opinions being formed on elements of the
financial statements in isolation. However, it is essential that auditors step back from the detail and
assess the financial statements as a whole, based on knowledge accumulated during the audit
process. In particular, the following procedures will need to be performed at the review and
completion stage of the audit:
• Consider governance issues
• Review the financial statements
• Perform completion procedures
• Report to the board
• Prepare the auditor’s report
Review and reporting issues have been covered in the Audit and Assurance Workbook at the
Professional Level, however, there have been some substantial changes over recent years in this area
affecting the auditor’s responsibilities relating to ‘other information’ and auditor’s reports in
particular. The following ISAs (UK) are relevant to this stage of the audit:
• ISA (UK) 260 (Revised November 2019), Communication With Those Charged With Governance
• ISA (UK) 520, Analytical Procedures
• ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events
• ISA (UK) 570 (Revised September 2019), Going Concern
• ISA (UK) 700 (Revised January 2020), Forming an Opinion and Reporting on Financial Statements
• ISA (UK) 701 (Revised January 2020), Communicating Key Audit Matters in the Independent
Auditor’s Report
• ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s
Report
• ISA (UK) 706 (Revised June 2016), Emphasis of Matter Paragraphs and Other Matter Paragraphs in
the Independent Auditor’s Report
• ISA (UK) 710, Comparative Information – Corresponding Figures and Comparative Financial
Statements
• ISA (UK) 720 (Revised November 2019), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other
Information
In the remainder of this chapter we will look at a number of key aspects of these ISAs (UK) in more
detail. A summary is also provided in the technical reference at the end of the chapter.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 395
This includes ensuring that:
• the work has been carried out in accordance with professional and regulatory requirements;
• a proper evaluation of the firm’s independence was carried out;
• significant matters are given further consideration;
• appropriate consultations have taken place and been documented;
• where appropriate the planned work is revised;
• the work performed supports the conclusions;
• the evidence obtained supports the audit opinion;
• the objectives of the audit have been achieved; and
• the auditor’s report is appropriate in the circumstances.
In addition, under Sarbanes–Oxley, a concurring or second partner review should be performed by
another partner not associated with the audit or by an independent reviewer (see Chapter 4 for more
details of the Sarbanes–Oxley Act 2002 or SOX).
In its ‘Strategy 2018/21: Budget and Levies 2018/19 (March 2018)’ the FRC reiterated that
“promoting high audit quality and assurance” was one of its strategic priorities – this is underpinned
by its ongoing system of monitoring the quality of firms and their work, including periodic audit
quality thematic reviews on issues such as materiality (see Chapter 5).
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 397
SoPL SoFP SoPL SoFP
(Current period) (Current period) (Prior period) (Prior period)
Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr Dr Cr
£ £ £ £ £ £ £ £
Closing
inventory
(c) underval’d 34,105 34,105
(d) Opening unaccrued expenses
Telephone* 453 453 453 453
Electricity* 905 905 905 905
(e) Closing unaccrued expenses
Telephone 427 427
Electricity 1,128 1,128
Obsolete
inventory
(f) write‑off 2,528 – – 2,528 3,211 – – 3,211
The summary of misstatements will list misstatements not only from the current year (adjustments (c)
and (e)) but also those in the previous year(s). This will allow misstatements to be highlighted which
are reversals of misstatements in the previous year. For example, in this instance last year’s closing
inventory was undervalued by £21,540 (adjustment (b)). Inventory in the prior year statement of
financial position should be increased (Dr) and profits increased (Cr). At the start of the current
accounting period the closing inventory adjustment is reversed out so that the net effect on the
cumulative position is zero. This also applies to the adjustment to last year’s accrued expenses
(adjustment (d)). Cumulative misstatements may also be shown, which have increased from year to
year, for example adjustments (a) and (f). It is normal to show both the statement of financial position
and the effect on profit or loss, as in the example given here. This may also be extended to the entire
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Audits are generally very procedural and as such can be quite complex when trying to complete all
the stages in order to form an audit opinion and report it accordingly. Knowledge of the various
auditing standards here will provide a sound structure for ensuring that all the necessary elements of
the engagement have been completed.
2 Subsequent events
Section overview
Auditors must review events after the reporting period and determine whether those events impact
on the year-end financial statements.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 399
2.1 Events after the reporting period
In accordance with ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events, subsequent events include:
• events occurring between the period end and the date of the auditor’s report; and
• facts discovered after the date of the auditor’s report.
IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period deals with the treatment in financial statement of events,
favourable and unfavourable, occurring after the period end. It identifies two types of event:
(a) Those that provide further evidence of conditions that existed at the period end
(b) Those that are indicative of conditions that arose subsequent to the period end
The extent of the auditor’s responsibility for subsequent events depends on when the event is
identified.
Note: While ISA (UK) 560 does not deal with matters relating to the auditor’s responsibilities for other
information obtained after the date of the auditor’s report which are addressed in ISA (UK) 720
(Revised June 2016), The Auditor’s Responsibilities Relating to Other Information, this type of other
information may bring to light a subsequent event relevant to the application of ISA (UK) 560.
2.3 Facts discovered after the date of the auditor’s report but before the financial
statements are issued
The financial statements are the management’s responsibility. They should therefore inform the
auditors of any material subsequent events between the date of the auditor’s report and the date
the financial statements are issued. The auditors do not have any obligation to perform procedures,
or make inquiries regarding the financial statements after the date of their report.
If, after the date of the auditor’s report but before the financial statements are issued, the auditor
becomes aware of a fact that, had it been known to the auditor at the date of the auditor’s report,
may have caused the auditor to amend the auditor’s report, the auditor shall:
• Discuss the matter with the management;
• Consider whether the financial statements need amendment; and if so
• Inquire how management intends to address the matter in the financial statements.
When the financial statements are amended, the auditors shall do the following:
• Extend the procedures discussed above to the date of their new report
• Carry out any other appropriate procedures
• Issue a new auditor’s report dated no earlier than the date of approval of the amended financial
statements
2.4 Facts discovered after the financial statements have been issued
Auditors have no obligations to perform procedures or make inquiries regarding the financial
statements after they have been issued. In the UK, this includes the period up until the financial
statements are laid before members at the annual general meeting (AGM).
When, after the financial statements have been issued, the auditor becomes aware of a fact which
existed at the date of the auditor’s report and which, if known at that date, may have caused the
auditor to modify the auditor’s report, the auditor should consider whether the financial statements
need revision, discuss the matter with management, and take action as appropriate in the
circumstances.
The ISA (UK) gives the appropriate procedures which the auditors should undertake when
management revises the financial statements.
• Carry out the audit procedures necessary in the circumstances.
• Review the steps taken by management to ensure that anyone in receipt of the previously issued
financial statements together with the auditor’s report thereon is informed of the situation.
• Issue a new report on the revised financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 560.15)
The new auditor’s report should include an emphasis of matter paragraph or other matter
paragraph referring to a note to the financial statements that more extensively discusses the reason
for the revision of the previously issued financial statements and to the earlier report issued by the
auditor.
(ISA (UK) 560.16)
Where local regulations allow the auditor to restrict the audit procedures on the financial statements
to the effects of the subsequent event which caused the revision, the new auditor’s report should
contain a statement to that effect.
Where management does not revise the financial statements but the auditors feel they should be
revised, or if management does not intend to take steps to ensure anyone in receipt of the previously
issued financial statements is informed of the situation, the auditors should consider taking steps to
prevent reliance on their report. The actions taken will depend on the auditor’s legal rights and
obligations and legal advice received. In the UK, the auditor has a legal right to make statements at
the AGM.
In the UK, where the auditor becomes aware of a fact relevant to the audited financial statements
which did not exist at the date of the auditor’s report, there are no statutory provisions for revising
the financial statements. In this situation, the auditor discusses with those charged with governance
whether they should withdraw the financial statements. Where those charged with governance
decide not to do so, the auditor may wish to take advice on whether it might be possible to withdraw
their report. In either case, other possible courses of action include those charged with governance
or the auditors making a statement at the AGM.
(ISA (UK) 560.A18-1-3)
Gaining full visibility of the timescales involved in a scenario is essential for the satisfactory resolution
of a requirement. This will therefore help you fully visualise the problem so it can be resolved.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 401
Interactive question 1: Subsequent events
You are the auditor of Extraction, an oil company. You have recently concluded the audit for the year
ended 31 December 20X7 and the auditor’s report was signed on 28 March 20X8. The financial
statements were also authorised for issue on this date. On 1 April, you are informed that the
company has identified a major oil leak which has caused significant environmental damage.
Requirement
Identify and explain the implications of the information regarding the oil spill.
3 Going concern
Section overview
• The auditor will test whether the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate to ensure it
applies to the audit client.
• Financial risk is indicated by the following circumstances:
– Financial indications
– Operating indications
– Other indications
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 403
(f) If management’s assessment covers a period of less than 12 months from the end of the
reporting period, the auditor shall ask management to extend its assessment period to
12months from the end of the reporting period. In the UK, if the directors have not considered a
year from the date of approval of the financial statements and not disclosed that fact, the auditor
shall disclose it in the auditor’s report.
(ISA (UK) 570.14-1)
(g) Management shall not need to make a detailed assessment if the entity has a history of
profitable operations and ready access to financial resources. In this case, the auditor’s
evaluation of the assessment may be made without performing detailed procedures if sufficient
evidence is available from other audit procedures. In the UK, the extent of the auditor’s
procedures is influenced primarily by the excess of the financial resources available to the entity
over the financial resources that it requires.
(ISA (UK) 570.A8-1)
(h) The auditor shall inquire of management as to its knowledge of events or conditions beyond the
period of assessment used by management that may cast significant doubt on the entity’s ability
to continue as a going concern.
(ISA (UK) 570.A6-1)
As the degree of uncertainty increases as an event or condition gets further into the future, the
indications of going concern issues would need to be significant before the auditor would consider it
necessary to take any further action based on this information. The auditor’s responsibility to carry
out procedures to identify issues beyond the period of assessment would normally be limited to
inquiries of management.
(ISA (UK) 570.A6-2)
Additional audit procedures
(a) When events or conditions have been identified which may cast significant doubt on the entity’s
ability to continue as a going concern, the auditor shall do the following:
(1) Evaluate management’s plans for future actions based on its going concern assessment
(2) Where the entity has prepared a cash flow forecast and analysis of this is significant in the
evaluation of management’s plans for future action:
• Evaluate the reliability of the underlying data
• Determine whether there is adequate support for the assumptions underlying the
forecast
(3) Consider whether any additional facts or information have become available since the date
of management’s assessment
(4) Seek written representations from management regarding its plans for future action and the
feasibility of these plans
(b) When questions arise on the appropriateness of the going concern assumption, some of the
normal audit procedures carried out by the auditors may take on an additional significance.
Auditors may also have to carry out additional procedures or update information obtained
earlier. The ISA (UK) lists various procedures which the auditors shall carryout in this context.
(1) Analyse and discuss cash flow, profit and other relevant forecasts with management.
(2) Analyse and discuss the entity’s latest available interim financial statements.
(3) Read the terms of debentures and loan agreements and determine whether they have
been breached.
(4) Read minutes of the meetings of shareholders, the board of directors and important
committees for reference to financing difficulties.
(5) Inquire of the entity’s lawyer regarding litigation and claims.
(6) Confirm the existence, legality and enforceability of arrangements to provide or maintain
financial support with related and third parties.
(7) Assess the financial ability of such parties to provide additional funds.
(8) Evaluate the entity’s plans to deal with unfulfilled customer orders.
(9) Perform audit procedures regarding subsequent events to identify those that either mitigate
or otherwise affect the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 405
Management unwilling to make or extend its assessment
• If management is unwilling to make or extend its assessment when requested to do so by the
auditor, the auditor shall consider the need to modify the auditor’s report as a result of the
inability to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence.
Use of going concern assumption is inappropriate
• If the going concern basis has been used but in the auditor’s judgement this is not appropriate,
the auditor shall express an adverse opinion.
Communication with those charged with governance
Unless all those charged with governance are involved with managing the entity the auditor must
communicate with those charged with governance events or conditions that cast significant doubt on
the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, including the following details:
• Whether the events or conditions constitute a material uncertainty
• Whether management’s use of the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate
• The adequacy of related disclosure
• Where applicable the implications for the auditor’s report
(ISA (UK) 570.25)
Significant delay
If there is a significant delay in the approval of the financial statements the auditor must enquire as to
the reasons for this. Where it is believed that the delay could be related to going concern issues the
auditor must perform additional audit procedures and consider the effect on the auditor’s conclusion
regarding the existence of a material uncertainty.
When evaluating a company’s going concern status, it is rarely a case of ‘yes’ or ‘no’ but instead is
more likely to be ‘maybe’ and ‘it depends’. You will need to identify those factors from the scenario
that point you in the right direction and reach an overall conclusion about this using your
professional judgement.
Financial statements
Strategic report
Note: In June 2012, the Sharman Inquiry issued its Final Report and Recommendations. This includes
recommendations regarding going concern assessment and disclosure (see Chapter 4).
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 407
Draft 20X5 Actual 20X4
£’000 £’000
Non-current liabilities
Bank loan 750 1,000
Lease obligations 473 –
1,223 1,000
Net assets 3,607 3,793
You have been informed by the managing director that the fall in revenue is due to the following
factors:
• The loss, in July, of a longstanding customer to a competitor
• A decline in trade in the repair of commercial vehicles
Due to the reduction in the repairs business, the company has decided to close the workshop and
sell the equipment and spares inventory. No entries resulting from this decision are reflected in the
draft accounts.
During the year, the company replaced a number of vehicles, funding them by a combination of
leasing and an increased overdraft facility. The facility is to be reviewed in January 20X6 after the
audited accounts are available.
The draft accounts show a loss for 20X5 but the forecasts indicate a return to profitability in 20X6, as
the managing director is optimistic about generating additional revenue from new contracts.
Requirements
2.1 State the circumstances particular to Truckers Ltd which may indicate that the company is not a
going concern. Explain why these circumstances give cause for concern.
2.2 Describe the audit procedures to be performed in respect of going concern at Truckers Ltd.
4 Comparatives
Section overview
• ISA (UK) 710 provides guidance on corresponding figures and comparative financial statements.
• The auditor should obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence that the corresponding figures
meet the requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework.
4.3 Reporting
When the comparatives are presented as corresponding figures, the auditor should issue an
auditor’s report in which the comparatives are not specifically identified because the auditor’s
opinion is on the current period financial statements as a whole, including the corresponding figures.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 409
The auditor’s report will only make any specific reference to corresponding figures in the
circumstances described below.
(a) When the auditor’s report on the prior period, as previously issued, included a qualified opinion,
disclaimer of opinion, or adverse opinion and the matter which gave rise to the modification is
unresolved:
(1) if the effects or possible effects of the matter on the current period’s figures are material, the
auditor’s opinion on the current period’s financial statements should be modified and the
basis for modification paragraph of the report should refer to both periods in the
description of the matter; or
(2) in other cases the opinion on the current period’s figures should be modified and the basis
for modification paragraph should explain that the modification is due to the effects or
possible effects of the unresolved matter on the comparability of the current period’s figures
and the corresponding figures.
(b) In performing the audit of the current period financial statements, the auditors, in certain unusual
circumstances, may become aware of a material misstatement that affects the prior period
financial statements on which an unmodified report has been previously issued. If the prior
period financial statements have not been revised and reissued, and the corresponding figures
have not been properly restated and/or appropriate disclosures have not been made, the
auditor shall express a qualified opinion or an adverse opinion in the report on the current
period financial statements, modified with respect to the corresponding figures included
therein.
• Written representations are normally obtained towards the end of the audit as a letter written by
management and addressed to the auditor.
• Where there is doubt as to the reliability of written representations or if management refuse to
provide representations, the auditor will need to reassess the level of assurance obtained from
this source of evidence.
5.1 Representations
ISA (UK) 580 (Updated January 2020), Written Representations covers this area and states that the
objectives of the auditor are as follows:
• To obtain written representations from management and, where appropriate, those charged with
governance that they believe that they have fulfilled their responsibility for the preparation of the
financial statements and for the completeness of the information provided to the auditor.
• To support other audit evidence relevant to the financial statements or specific assertions in the
financial statements.
• To respond appropriately to the representations or if representations are not provided.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 411
Notes
1 In the UK management may include qualifying language to the effect that the representations are
made to the best of their knowledge and belief.
2 In the UK the representation that all transactions have been recorded and reflected in the
financial statements may be modified, for example to state that all transactions that may have a
material effect on the financial statements have been recorded.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 413
6 The auditor’s report
Section overview
• Auditors must provide clear and understandable auditor’s reports on the financial statements
audited.
• As well as the standard auditor’s report, the wording of the report may be changed to express a
modified opinion, or an emphasis of matter or other matter paragraph may be added to the
report.
• Listed company auditor’s reports include a description of key audit matters.
• Modifications result either from material misstatements (disagreements) in the financial
statements or from an inability to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence (limitation on
scope).
• The auditor’s report must include a separate section with a heading ‘Other Information’.
• Auditors must form, and then critically appraise, their audit opinion on the financial statements.
• Auditor’s reports can be made available electronically; in this situation the auditor must ensure
that their report is not misrepresented.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 415
– Confirmation that the auditor has provided those charged with governance with a statement
that the auditor has complied with relevant ethical requirements regarding independence
– Where key audit matters are communicated a statement that the auditor determines these
matters to be of the most significance in the audit. This applies to all entities for which key audit
matters are communicated (not just listed companies).
(ISA (UK) 700.40b&c)
In the UK the description of the auditor’s responsibilities may be given in the body of the
auditor’s report, within an appendix to the auditor’s report or by cross reference to the
description maintained on a website by an appropriate authority eg, FRC.
(ISA (UK) 700.41)
(k) Other reporting responsibilities
If the auditor addresses other reporting responsibilities in addition to those under ISAs (UK),
these must be addressed in a separate section of the auditor’s report.
If the auditor is required to report on certain matters by exception this section of the auditor’s
report must describe the auditor’s responsibilities and incorporate a suitable conclusion. For
example in the UK the Companies Act 2006 requires the auditor to report when a company has
not maintained adequate books and records.
(ISA (UK) 700.43)
Additional requirements apply for audits of public interest entities. In this instance the auditor
must:
– state by whom the auditor was appointed;
– indicate the date of the appointment and the period of total uninterrupted engagement;
– explain the extent to which the audit was capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
(‘Staff Guidance Note 02/2017’ issued by the FRC provided further guidance on the
information that the auditor should include in the auditor’s report, ensuring that so-called ‘
boiler-plate‘ text is avoided in order to make such disclosure meaningful);
– confirm that the audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee;
– declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standards were not provided;
and
– indicate any services in addition to the audit which were provided by the firm and which have
not been disclosed in the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 700.45-1)
(l) Name of the engagement partner
The name of the engagement partner shall be included in the auditor’s report on financial
statements of listed entities unless such disclosures would lead to a personal security threat.
(m) Auditor’s signature
Where the auditor of a UK company is a firm, the report is signed by the senior statutory auditor.
(n) Auditor’s address
The report must name the location where the auditor is based.
(o) Date of the report
The date of the report is the date on which the auditor signs the report expressing an opinion on
the financial statements. It must be no earlier than the date on which the auditor has obtained
sufficient appropriate audit evidence.
Under Companies Act 2006, publicly traded companies are required to include a corporate
governance statement in their annual report. If this is not included the auditor must report by
exception.
Appendix 6 – Publicly traded premium listed company preparing group and parent company
financial statements under IFRSs
• Company is a premium listed company, a quoted company and a public interest entity.
• Financial statements are prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU and are also
prepared in accordance with IFRSs as issued by the IAASB.
• Company prepares group financial statements.
• Section 408 exemption not taken in respect of parent company’s own profit and loss account.
• Corporate governance statement not incorporated into the strategic report or the directors’
report, either directly or by incorporation by cross-reference.
• Description of the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is included
within an appendix to the auditor’s report.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 417
• The directors’ statement [set out on page …] in the financial statements about whether the
directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing
the financial statements and the directors’ identification of any material uncertainties to the group
and the parent company’s ability to continue to do so over a period of at least 12 months from the
date of approval of the financial statements;
• Whether the directors’ statement relating to going concern required under the Listing Rules in
accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is materially inconsistent with our knowledge obtained in
the audit; or
• The directors’ explanation [set out on page …] in the annual report as to how they have assessed
the prospects of the group, over what period they have done so and why they consider that
period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation
that the group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the
period of their assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention to any necessary
qualifications or assumptions.
Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in
our audit of the financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed
risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters
included those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources
in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team. These matters were addressed in the
context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and
we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
[Description of each key audit matter in accordance with ISA (UK) 701]
Our application of materiality
[Explanation of how the auditor applied the concept of materiality in planning and performing the
group and parent company audit. This is required to include the threshold used by the auditor as
being materiality for the group and parent company financial statements as a whole but may include
other relevant disclosures.]
An overview of the scope of our audit
[Overview of the scope of the group and parent company audit, including an explanation of how the
scope addressed each key audit matter and was influenced by the auditor’s application of
materiality.]
[Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including
fraud.]
Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report [set out on pages …]
[…including [specify the titles of the other information][set out on pages …]], other than the financial
statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information.
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the
extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion
thereon. In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the
other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be
materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements,
we are required to determine whether there is a material misstatement in the financial statements or
a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we
conclude that there is a material misstatement of the other information, we are required to report that
fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
In this context, we also have nothing to report in regard to our responsibility to specifically address
the following items in the other information and to report as uncorrected material misstatements of
the other information where we conclude that those items meet the following conditions:
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 419
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the
parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to
going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to
liquidate the group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but
to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole
are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report
that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee
that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement
when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually
or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users
taken on the basis of these financial statements.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is included in
appendix [X] of this auditor’s report. This description, which is located at [indicate page number of
other specific reference to the location of the description], forms part of our auditor’s report.
Other matters which we are required to address
Following the recommendation of the audit committee, we were appointed by [state by whom or
which body the auditor was appointed] on [date] to audit the financial statements for the year ending
[date] and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is [X] years,
covering the years ending [date] to [date].
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the group or
the parent company and we remain independent of the group and the parent company in
conducting our audit.
[Indicate any services, in addition to the audit, which were provided by the firm to the group that
have not been disclosed in the financial statements or elsewhere in the annual report.]
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee.
[Signature]
John Smith (Senior Statutory Auditor)
For and on behalf of ABC LLP, Statutory Auditor
[Address]
[Date]
Appendix: Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
As part of an audit in accordance with ISAs (UK), we exercise professional judgment and maintain
professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also:
• Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to
fraud or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit
evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not
detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from error,
as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override
of internal control.
• Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit
procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an
opinion on the effectiveness of the group’s internal control.
• Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting
estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.
• Conclude on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting
and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events
or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the group’s or the parent company’s ability to
continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to
draw attention in our auditor’s report to the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if
such disclosures are inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit
evidence obtained up to the date of our auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions
may cause the group or the parent company to cease to continue as a going concern.
Definition
Key audit matters (KAMs): Those matters, that in the auditor’s professional judgment, were of most
significance in the audit of the financial statements of the current period. KAMs are selected from
matters communicated with those charged with governance. In the UK, these include the most
significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the
auditor, including those that had the greatest effect on:
• the overall audit strategy;
• the allocation of resources in the audit; and
• directing the efforts of the engagement team.
(ISA (UK) 701.8 & .A8-1)
ISA (UK) 701 identifies the purpose of including this information as being to:
• enhance the communicative value of the auditor’s report;
• provide additional information to intended users; and
• assist users in understanding significant audit matters and the judgments involved.
(ISA (UK) 701.2)
Note: The inclusion of a KAM section does not constitute a modification of the auditor’s report and
cannot be used as a substitute for a modified opinion. In addition, the KAM section cannot be used
as a substitute for disclosures that should have been made.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 421
ISA (UK) 701 suggests a three-step ‘filtering’ approach to determining what constitutes a KAM:
Step 1 The auditor starts by considering all the matters communicated with those charged with
governance
Step 2 From these the auditor will assess which of these matters required significant audit
attention. This process will involve taking into account areas of higher/significant risk,
significant auditor/management judgment and the effect of significant events or
transactions that occurred in the period
Step 3 The auditor will then select from those matters identified in Step 2 the matters which were of
most significance in the audit
Step 3 is clearly the most important step of the process in which the auditor is required to apply
judgment in evaluating the relative significance of different issues.
In making this decision the auditor would consider the following:
• Matters which resulted in significant interaction with those charged with governance
• The importance of the matter to the intended users’ understanding of the financial statements as
a whole
• The nature/complexity/subjectivity of selection of accounting policies
• The nature and materiality of misstatements (corrected and uncorrected)
• The nature and extent of audit effort needed to address the matter
• Whether there were issues in applying audit procedures
• Extent of related control deficiencies
• Whether the matter affected more than one area of the financial statements
(ISA (UK) 701.A27 & .A29)
6.2.2 Disclosure
Where relevant the auditor’s report must include a separate section with the heading ‘Key Audit
Matters’. This includes an introduction followed by information about each individual KAM. The
introductory material states that:
• the matters described are the matters of ‘most significance’; and
• the auditor does not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
(ISA (UK) 701.11)
The description of an individual KAM would include the following:
• Why the matter was considered to be one of the most significant in the audit
• How the matter was addressed in the audit
Reference should also be made to any related disclosures in the financial statements.
In the UK the following information must also be provided:
• A description of the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement
• A summary of the auditor’s responses to those risks
• Key observations arising in respect to those risks
(ISA (UK) 701.13–.13-2)
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance Faculty published a report in 2017 titled ‘The start of a conversation
– The extended audit report‘ to support all parties involved in this form of communication. Clearly,
this process is still in its infancy, but presenting it in terms of a dialogue is intended to support the
perception that it is a two-way process. The report also suggests metrics that could be used to assess
the quality of this dialogue in respect of KAMs: (i) the average number of KAMs in a report; and (ii)
most common topics making up KAMs.
(Source: IAASB guidance publication, (2015) Auditor Reporting – Illustrative Key Audit Matters)
In very limited circumstances it may be the case that KAMs exist but cannot or should not be
disclosed. These might include circumstances where law or regulation does not allow disclosure or
where the adverse consequences of disclosure would outweigh the public interest benefit.
(ISA (UK) 701.14b)
It is also possible, although again very rare, that there may be no KAMs to disclose in the KAMs
section. Where this is the case a KAM section is still included in the auditor’s report but a statement is
made that there are no KAMs to communicate. ISA (UK) 701.A58 provides the following illustration of
the appropriate wording in this situation:
[Except for the matter described in the Basis for Qualified (Adverse) Opinion section or Material
Uncertainty Related to Going Concern section,] We have determined that there are no [other]
key audit matters to communicate in our report.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 423
6.2.3 Interaction between descriptions of key audit matters and other elements included in the auditor’s
report
Where a matter results in a modified audit opinion, the matter by definition would be a KAM.
However modified audit opinions must be reported in accordance with ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June
2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the Independent Auditor’s Report and as a result a description
of the matter will be included in the ‘Basis for modified opinion’ paragraph and not in the KAM
section. The KAM section must however include a reference to the basis for modified opinion
paragraph.
ISA 701 also makes particular reference to going concern issues. As we have seen in section 3 of this
chapter in accordance with ISA 570 if adequate disclosure is made in the financial statements of a
material uncertainty relating to going concern, the auditor expresses an unmodified opinion but
includes a separate section under the heading ‘Material Uncertainty Related to Going Concern’. The
matter is not also described as a KAM, although the KAM section should include a reference to the
‘Material Uncertainty Related to Going Concern’ section.
6.2.6 Documentation
Audit documentation must include the ‘significant audit matters’ from which the KAMs were then
selected and the rationale for determining whether each of these is a KAM or not. Where the auditor
has concluded that there are no KAMs, or that a KAM is not able to be disclosed the reasons for this
should be documented.
(ISA (UK) 701.18)
Definition
Pervasive effects: Pervasive effects on the financial statements are those that, in the auditor’s
judgement:
• are not confined to specific elements, accounts or items of the financial statements;
• if so confined, represent or could represent a substantial proportion of the financial statements; or
• in relation to disclosures, are fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 705.5)
The following table based on the table from ISA (UK) 705.A1 summarises the different types of
modified opinion, and we will look at the detail of each of these in turn:
The ISA (ISA (UK) 705.7–.9) describes these different modified opinions and the circumstances
leading to them as follows.
(a) A qualified opinion must be expressed when the auditor concludes that an unmodified opinion
cannot be expressed but that the effect of any misstatement, or the possible effect of
undetected misstatements, is material but not pervasive. A qualified opinion should be
expressed as being “except for the effects of the matter to which the qualification relates”.
(b) A disclaimer of opinion must be expressed when the auditor has not been able to obtain
sufficient appropriate audit evidence and accordingly is unable to express an opinion on the
financial statements. In rare circumstances involving multiple uncertainties the auditor may issue
a disclaimer even though sufficient appropriate evidence has been obtained regarding each of
the individual uncertainties, due to the potential interaction of these uncertainties and their
possible cumulative effect on the financial statements.
(c) An adverse opinion must be expressed when the auditor has obtained sufficient appropriate
audit evidence and concludes that misstatements, individually or in aggregate, are both material
and pervasive to the financial statements.
Basis for opinion paragraph
Where the auditor modifies the opinion on the financial statements, the title of the basis paragraph
should also be modified to read ‘Basis for Qualified Opinion’, ‘Basis for Adverse Opinion’ or ‘Basis for
Disclaimer of Opinion’ as appropriate.
Misstatement
The auditor may disagree with management about matters such as the acceptability of accounting
policies selected, the method of their application, or the adequacy of disclosures in the financial
statements. The ISA states that if such disagreements are material to the financial statements, the
auditor should express a qualified or an adverse opinion.
See Appendix Illustrations 1 and 2.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 425
Inability to obtain evidence
The standard identifies three circumstances where there might be an inability to obtain sufficient
evidence:
(a) Circumstances beyond the entity’s control (such as where the entity’s accounting records have
been destroyed).
(b) Circumstances relating to the nature or timing of the auditor’s work (for example, when the
timing of the auditor’s appointment is such that the auditor is unable to observe the counting of
physical inventory). It may also arise when, in the opinion of the auditor, the entity’s accounting
records are inadequate or when the auditor is unable to carry out an audit procedure believed
to be desirable. In these circumstances, the auditor would attempt to carry out reasonable
alternative procedures to obtain sufficient, appropriate audit evidence to support an unqualified
opinion.
(c) A limitation on the scope of the auditor’s work may sometimes be imposed by management (for
example, when management prevents the auditor from observing the counting of physical
inventory). This would constitute a limitation on scope if the auditor was unable to obtain
sufficient, appropriate evidence by performing alternative procedures.
If the auditor experiences a limitation on scope after they have accepted appointment which is both
material and pervasive they should consider withdrawal from the audit where it is practicable and
possible under applicable law or regulation. Where this is not the case the auditor must disclaim an
opinion on the financial statements.
When the limitation in the terms of a proposed engagement is such that the auditor believes the
need to express a disclaimer of opinion exists before the appointment has been accepted, the
auditor would usually not accept such a limited audit engagement, unless required by statute. Also, a
statutory auditor would not accept such an audit engagement when the limitation infringes on the
auditor’s statutory duties.
See Appendix Illustrations 3 and 4.
Definition
Emphasis of matter paragraph: A paragraph included in the auditor’s report that refers to a matter
appropriately presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgement, is
of such importance that it is fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 706.7a)
Examples
• An uncertainty relating to the future outcome of exceptional litigation or regulatory action
• Early application of a new accounting standard that has a pervasive effect on the financial
statement before its effective date
• A major catastrophe that has had, or continues to have, a significant effect on the entity’s financial
position
Other ISAs specify circumstances in which it may be necessary to include an emphasis of matter
paragraph for example ISA (UK) 560, Subsequent Events which was covered earlier in this chapter.
This paragraph must be included in a separate section of the auditor’s report with an appropriate
heading including the term ‘Emphasis of Matter’. This section must also state that the auditor’s report
is not modified in this respect.
(ISA (UK) 706.9)
Note: In some circumstances matters identified as KAMs may also be fundamental to users’
understanding of the financial statements. In this situation however, the matter is not disclosed in an
emphasis of matter paragraph as well as being disclosed as a KAM. Instead the auditor must
Definition
Other matter paragraph: A paragraph included in the auditor’s report that refers to a matter other
than those presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgement, is
relevant to users’ understanding of the audit, the auditor’s responsibilities or the auditor’s report.
(ISA (UK) 706.7b)
This paragraph must also be included as a separate section in the auditor’s report headed ‘Other
Matter’ or another appropriate heading.
Note: An ‘Other Matter’ paragraph would not be included where the matter has been determined to
be a KAM (ISA (UK) 706.10).
An example of an emphasis of matter paragraph is contained in the Appendix to this chapter. See
Illustration 5.
6.4.2 Understandability
Although the essence of the auditor’s role is simple, in practice it is surrounded by auditing
standards and guidance, as it is a technical art. It also involves relevant language, or ‘jargon’, that
non-auditors may not understand.
Communicating the audit opinion in a way that people can understand is a challenge. ISA (UK) 700
(Revised January 2020) together with ISA (UK) 701 go some way to addressing those challenges (see
earlier sections).
6.4.3 Responsibility
Connected with the problem of what the audit is and what the audit opinion means is the question of
what the auditors are responsible for. As far as the law is concerned, auditors have a restricted
number of duties. Professional standards and other bodies, such as the Financial Conduct Authority,
put other duties on auditors.
Users of financial statements, and the public, may not have a very clear perception of what the
auditors are responsible for and what the audit opinion relates to, or what context it is in.
The issue of auditor’s liability ties in here. Auditor’s reports are addressed to shareholders, to whom
auditors have their primary and legal responsibility. However, audited financial statements are used
by significantly more people than that. Should this fact be addressed in the auditor’s report?
6.4.4 Availability
The fact that a significant number of people use audited financial statements has just been
mentioned. Auditor’s reports are publicly available, as they are often held on public record. This fact
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 427
alone may add to any perception that exists that auditors address their report to more than just
shareholders.
The problem of availability is exacerbated by the fact that many companies publish their financial
statements on their website. This means that millions of people around the world have access to the
auditor’s report.
This issue may cause misunderstanding:
• Language barriers may cause additional understandability problems.
• It may not be clear which financial information an auditor’s report refers to.
• The auditor’s report may be subject to malicious tampering by hackers or personnel.
If an auditor’s report is published electronically, auditors lose control of the physical positioning of
the report; that is, what it is published with. This might significantly impact on understandability and
also perceived responsibility.
When financial information is available electronically, auditors must ensure that their report is not
misrepresented.
Definitions
Other information: Financial and non-financial information (other than financial statements and the
auditor’s report) included in an entity’s annual report (such as summaries of key financial results,
explanations of critical accounting estimates and financial measures or ratios).
Statutory other information: In the UK this includes the directors’ report, the strategic report and the
separate corporate governance statement, all of which is relevant here.
ISA (UK) 720.2 makes it clear that the auditor does not express an opinion on the other information.
(The exception to this principle in the UK relates to the auditor’s responsibilities relating to the
directors’ report, the strategic report and the corporate governance statement. We will look at this
issue separately in a later section)
The auditor is required, however, to read the other information and do the following:
(a) Consider whether there is a material inconsistency between the other information and the
financial statements
(b) Consider whether there is a material inconsistency between the other information and the
auditor’s knowledge obtained in the audit
(c) Respond appropriately when the auditor identifies that such a material inconsistency appears to
exist, or when the auditor otherwise becomes aware that other information appears to be
materially misstated
(d) Report in accordance with ISA (UK) 720
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 429
If the other information is not corrected the specific action taken would depend on the auditor’s legal
rights and obligations. As a result it is likely that the auditor will seek legal advice. In the UK, the
auditor may also consider using the right to be heard at the AGM.
6.5.4 Reporting
In the UK, all auditor’s reports must include an ‘Other Information‘ section. This must include the
following:
(a) A statement that management is responsible for other information
(b) Identification of other information obtained before the date of the auditor’s report (and, for the
audit of a listed entity, other information, if any expected to be obtained after the date of the
auditor’s report)
(c) A statement that the auditor’s opinion does not cover the other information and that the auditor
does not express an audit opinion or any form of assurance conclusion on this (however see
section6.5.5)
(d) A description of the auditor’s responsibilities relating to reading, considering and reporting on
other information
(e) When other information has been obtained before the date of the auditor’s report, either:
– a statement that the auditor has nothing to report; or
– where there is a material uncorrected misstatement a statement that describes this.
(ISA (UK) 720.22)
You have already seen from your studies that questions on the auditor’s report usually require some
form of conclusion to be drawn, so you must make sure you don’t sit on the fence and commit to a
specific course of action. This is central to the auditor’s primary role of communication.
• Auditors may have to report on entire special purpose financial statements or simply one element
of those financial statements.
• Auditors may have to report on summary financial statements.
• The Companies Act 2006 allows limited liability agreements to be negotiated with the audit client.
7.1.2 Overview
The ISA aims to address special considerations that are relevant to complete sets of financial
statements prepared in accordance with another comprehensive basis of accounting.
The aim of the ISA is simply to identify additional audit requirements relating to these areas. To be
clear, all other ISAs still apply to the audit engagement.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 431
7.1.5 Special Considerations – Audits of Single Financial Statements and Specific Elements, Accounts or
Items of a Financial Statement
ISA (UK) 805 (Revised), Special Considerations – Audits of Single Financial Statements and Specific
Elements, Accounts or Items of a Financial Statement relates to individual elements of financial
statements, such as the liability for accrued benefits of a pension plan and a schedule of employee
bonuses. This ISA was issued by the FRC in October 2016 and is effective for periods commencing
on or after 1 January 2017.
Many financial statement items are interrelated. Therefore, when reporting on a component the
auditor will not always be able to consider it in isolation and will need to examine other financial
information. This will need to be considered when assessing the scope of the engagement and
determining whether the audit of a single statement or single element is practicable.
The auditor’s report should indicate the applicable financial reporting framework adopted or the
basis of accounting used, and should state whether the component is prepared in accordance with
this.
Reporting considerations
Engagements that involve reporting • The auditor shall express a separate opinion for each.
on a single statement or specific • The auditor shall ensure that management presents the
element in conjunction with single financial statement or element in such a way that it
auditing the entity’s complete set is clearly differentiated from the complete set of financial
of financial statements statements.
The auditor’s opinion on the entity’s • The auditor must determine whether this will affect the
complete set of financial statements opinion on the single financial statement or element.
is modified or includes an
emphasis of matter or other matter
paragraph, a material uncertainty
related to going concern,
communication of key audit matters
or a statement describing an
uncorrected material misstatement
of other information
The auditor has expressed an • The auditor must not include an unmodified opinion on
adverse opinion or disclaimed an a single financial statement or element that forms part of
opinion on the entity’s complete set those financial statements in the same report (as this
of financial statements would contradict the adverse opinion or disclaimer on
the complete set of financial statements).
• The auditor must not express an unmodified opinion on
a single financial statement of a complete set of financial
statements even if the report on the single financial
statement is not published with the auditor’s report
containing the adverse opinion or disclaimer.
• The auditor may express an unmodified opinion on an
element of the financial statements if:
– not prohibited by law;
– the opinion is published separately; and
– the element does not form a major portion of the
entity’s complete set of financial statements.
Unmodified opinion on summary Unless law specifies otherwise, the wording should be:
financial statements • the accompanying summary financial statements are
consistent in all material respects with the audited
financial statements, in accordance with (the applied
criteria); or
• the accompanying summary financial statements are a
fair summary of the audited financial statements, in
accordance with (the applied criteria).
When the auditor’s report on the If the auditor is satisfied that an unmodified opinion, as
audited financial statements above, is appropriate for the summary financial statements,
includes a qualified opinion, an the report must:
emphasis of matter or an other • state that the auditor’s report on the audited financial
matter paragraph, a material statements includes a qualified opinion, an emphasis of
uncertainty related to going matter or an other matter paragraph, a material
concern, a KAM section or a uncertainty related to going concern, a KAM section or
statement describing an uncorrected a statement describing an uncorrected material
material misstatement of the other misstatement of the other information;
information
• explain the basis for the above; and
• state the effect on the summary financial statements if
any.
Modified opinion on the summary If the summary financial statements are not consistent in all
financial statements material respects with the audited financial statements (or
not a fair summary of the audited financial statements) and
management does not agree to make changes, the auditor
shall express an adverse opinion.
7.2.1 Audit
Guidance for auditors is contained in Bulletin 2010/1XBRL Tagging of Information in Audited
Financial Statements – Guidance for Auditors.
Although HMRC is requiring financial statements supporting a company’s tax return to be transmitted
using iXBRL, there is no requirement for an audit of data or of the XBRL tagging. The Bulletin states
that ISAs do not impose a general requirement on the auditor to check XBRL tagging of financial
statements as part of the audit. Furthermore, because the XBRL tagging is simply a machine-readable
rendering of the data within the financial statements, rather than a discrete document, it does not
constitute ‘other information’ either.
While the auditor does not provide assurance as to the accuracy of the tagging, audit clients may
request non-audit services, including the following:
• Performing the tagging exercise
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 433
• Undertaking an agreed-upon procedures engagement
• Providing advice on the selection of individual tags
• Supplying accounts preparation software that automates the tagging
• Training management in XBRL tagging
If this type of service is provided, ethical issues must be considered.
In December 2017, the FRC’s Financial Reporting Lab published Deep-dive: Digital future of
corporate reporting suggesting that more still needs to be done to unlock the potential of XBRL.
8 Appendix (Illustrations)
Note: As per ISA (UK) 705, illustrations 1–4 in this Appendix have not been tailored for the UK but
they illustrate the requirements of the ISAs (UK).
Illustration 1
Qualified opinion – Material misstatement of the financial statements
Qualified opinion
We have audited the financial statements of ABC Company (the Company), which comprise the
statement of financial position as at December 31, 20X1, and the statement of comprehensive
income, statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows for the year then ended, and
notes to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies. In our
opinion, except for the effects of the matter described in the Basis for Qualified Opinion section of
our report, the accompanying financial statements give a true and fair view of the financial position of
the Company as at December 31, 20X1, and of its financial performance and its cash flows for the
year then ended in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
Basis for qualified opinion
The company’s inventories are carried in the statement of financial position at xxx. Management has
not stated the inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value but has stated them solely at
cost, which constitutes a departure from IFRSs. The Company’s records indicate that, had
management stated the inventories at the lower of cost and net realisable value, an amount of xxx
would have been required to write the inventories down to their net realisable value. Accordingly
cost of sales would have increased by xxx, and income tax, net income and shareholders’ equity
would have been reduced by xxx, xxx and xxx, respectively.
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (ISAs). Our
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the
Audit of the Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the Company in
accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in
[jurisdiction], and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these
requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to
provide a basis for our qualified opinion.
(Source: Illustration 1 (extract) ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the
Independent Auditor’s Report)
Illustration 2
Adverse opinion. Material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements
Adverse opinion
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of ABC Company and its subsidiaries (the
Group), which comprise the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X1,
and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in
equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, and notes to the
consolidated financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies.
In our opinion, because of the significance of the matter discussed in the Basis for Adverse Opinion
section of our report, the accompanying consolidated financial statements do not give a true and
fair view of the consolidated financial position of the Group as at December 31, 20X1, and of its
consolidated financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended in
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 435
Basis for adverse opinion
As explained in Note X, the Group has not consolidated subsidiary XYZ Company that the Group
acquired during 20X1 because it has not yet been able to determine the fair values of certain of the
subsidiary’s material assets and liabilities at the acquisition date. This investment is therefore
accounted for on a cost basis. Under IFRSs, the Company should have consolidated this subsidiary
and accounted for the acquisition based on provisional amounts. Had XYZ Company been
consolidated, many elements in the accompanying consolidated financial statements would have
been materially affected. The effects on the consolidated financial statements of the failure to
consolidate have not been determined.
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (ISAs). Our
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the
Audit of the Consolidated Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the
Group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the consolidated
financial statements in [jurisdiction], and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in
accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our adverse opinion.
(Source: Illustration 2 (extract) ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the
Independent Auditor’s Report)
Illustration 3
Qualified opinion – Due to auditor’s inability to obtain sufficient audit evidence regarding a foreign
associate
Qualified opinion
We have audited the consolidated financial statements of ABC Company and its subsidiaries (the
Group), which comprise the consolidated statement of financial position as at December 31, 20X1,
and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in
equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the year then ended, and notes to the
consolidated financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting policies.
In our opinion, except for the possible effects of the matter described in the Basis for Qualified
Opinion section of our report, the accompanying consolidated financial statements give a true and
fair view of the financial position of the Group as at December 31, 20X1, and of its consolidated
financial performance and its consolidated cash flows for the year then ended in accordance with
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs).
Basis for qualified opinion
The Group’s investment in XYZ Company, a foreign associate acquired during the year and
accounted for by the equity method, is carried at xxx on the consolidated statement of financial
position at December 31, 20X1, and ABC’s share of XYZ’s net income of xxx is included in ABC’s
income for the year then ended. We were unable to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
about the carrying amount of ABC’s investment in XYZ as at December 31, 20X1, and ABC’s share of
XYZ’s net income as we were denied access to the financial information, management, and the
auditors of XYZ. Consequently, we were unable to determine whether any adjustments to these
amounts were necessary.
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (ISAs). Our
responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s Responsibilities for the
Audit of the Consolidated Financial Statements section of our report. We are independent of the
Group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the consolidated
financial statements in [jurisdiction], and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in
accordance with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is
sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our qualified opinion.
(Source: Illustration 3 (extract) ISA (UK) 705 (Revised June 2016), Modifications to the Opinion in the
Independent Auditor’s Report)
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 437
(Source: Appendix 4 (extract)FRC, Bulletin: Compendium of Illustrative Auditor’s Reports on United
Kingdom Private Sector Financial Statements for Periods commencing on or after 17 June 2016)
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 439
Further question practice
1 Knowledge diagnostic
Before you move on to question practice, complete the following knowledge diagnostic and check
you are able to confirm you possess the following essential learning from this chapter. If not, you are
advised to revisit the relevant learning from the topic indicated.
1. Do you know the various stages of the audit completion process and can you find the
necessary standards in your open book?
2. Can you distinguish between the various responsibilities that the auditor needs to fulfil at
different stages of the audit, including right up to the date of the AGM?
3. Do you know how to identify and communicate the most appropriate conclusion
regarding the audited entity’s going concern status?
4. Can you explain the auditor’s responsibilities for dealing with comparatives and written
representations?
5. Do you know how to structure the auditor’s report, whether it is modified or requires some
form of modification?
6. Can you explain when you would apply the various modifications to the audit opinion and
what form they would take?
7. Can you explain the auditor’s responsibilities regarding other engagements (for example,
summary financial statements)?
8. Can you find the various modifications to the auditor’s report in the auditing standards
open book?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Branch plc This will allow you to critically appraise extracts from a draft auditor’s
report in line with your knowledge of how it should look and the facts
presented in the scenario.
SafeAsHouses plc This question is a typical example of being ‘thrown in at the deep end’ on
a problematic engagement that is nearing its completion. How should you
respond?
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
UHN requirement (3) Although the question asks for key areas of audit risk, you will need to
consider the going concern status of UHN and the impact (if any) that this
could have on the auditor’s report and opinion.
Tawkcom The question asks for an overview of the auditor’s responsibilities under
ISA (UK) 701 on key audit matters – do you know what these are?
Biltmore requirement You need to be able to discuss impact on the auditor’s report if necessary
(3) changes are not made to the draft financial statements.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 441
Technical reference
1 ISA (UK) 260
• Auditor’s objectives – ISA 260.9
• Who auditor should communicate to – ISA (UK) 260.11–.13
• Matters to be communicated to those charged with governance – ISA (UK) 260.14-.16
• Timing of communications – ISA (UK) 260.21
• Form of communications – ISA (UK) 260.19–.20
2 ISA 265
• Identifying significant deficiencies – ISA (UK) 265.A5–.A7
• Written communication – ISA (UK) 265.11
9 ISA 701
• Determining key audit matters – ISA (UK) 701.9–10
14 ISA 800
• Reports on financial statements prepared in accordance with a special purpose framework – ISA
(UK) 800.11–.14 & Appendix
15 ISA 805
• Reports on a single financial statement or specific element of a financial statement – ISA (UK)
805.11–.17 & Appendix
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 443
Self-test questions
1 Branch plc
You are an audit partner. Your firm carries out the audit of Branch plc, a listed company. Because the
company is listed, you have been asked to perform a second partner review of the audit file for the
year ended 30 June 20X7 before the audit opinion is finalised. Reported profit before tax is £1.65
million and the statement of financial position total is £7.6 million.
You have read the following notes from the audit file:
“Earnings per share
The company has disclosed both basic and diluted earnings per share. The diluted earnings per
share has been incorrectly calculated because the share options held by a director were not included
in the calculations. Disclosed diluted earnings per share are 22.9p. Had the share options held by the
director been included, this figure would have been 22.4p. This difference is immaterial.
Financial performance statement
The directors have currently not amended certain financial performance ratios in this statement to
reflect the changes made to the financial statements as a result of the auditor’s work. The difference
between the reported ratios and the correct ratios is minimal.
Opinion
We recommend that an unmodified audit opinion be issued.”
You have noted that there is no evidence on the audit file that the corporate governance statement
to be issued as part of the annual report has been reviewed by the audit team. You are aware that the
company does not have an audit committee.
You are also aware that the director exercised his share options last week.
Requirement
Comment on the suitability of the proposed audit opinion and other matters arising in the light of
your review. Your comments should include an indication of what form the auditor’s report should
take.
2 SafeAsHouses plc
SafeAsHouses plc (SAH) was incorporated and commenced trading on 1 June 20X0 to retail small
household electronics products via free magazines inserted into newspapers. It has established a
presence in the market, but the early years of business have been a struggle with low profitability as
it has sought to create market share. On 1 June 20X2, it set up a 100% owned subsidiary, eSAH, with
a view to redirecting the business to internet-based sales in the hope of reducing printing and
physical distribution costs of its free magazine. SAH plans to obtain an AIM listing in the near future.
Your firm acts as auditors to both companies and you have recently been drafted into the audit
because the existing senior has been taken ill. Exhibit 1 comprises draft statements of financial
position and notes for both companies. Exhibit 2 comprises audit file notes prepared by the
previous audit senior.
The audit manager has asked you to take over the detailed audit work and to identify for her in a
briefing note those issues arising in the work to date that are likely to be problematic. Given the late
stage of the audit, and the consequent delays because of audit staff sickness, only the major issues
are to be highlighted in your briefing note to the manager. The audit manager is concerned that,
because the FD is new, the retention of the audit is potentially at risk and that there should be no
further delay in the audit. The FD is pressing for these matters to be finalised and the accounts to be
signed quickly.
SAH eSAH
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Non-current assets at cost 1,895 408
Less depreciation (400) (25)
1,495 383
Current assets
Inventories 422 –
Receivables 550 225
Bank – 5
972 230
Current liabilities (662) (313)
Net current assets/(liabilities) 310 (83)
1,805 300
Non-current liabilities
8% debentures (1,000) –
805 300
Financed by
Issued ordinary share capital 200 300
Share premium account 100 –
Retained earnings 505 –
805 300
Additional information
(1) Current liabilities
SAH eSAH
£’000 £’000
Bank overdraft 92 –
Trade payables 430 300
Other payables 40 –
Accruals 100 13
662 313
(2) Property in SAH had been revalued during the year. The revaluation amounted to £0.5 million.
(3) Debentures were issued at par on 1 June 20X0 and are due for redemption at par on 31
December 20X4.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 445
Exhibit 2: Audit file notes
(1) eSAH has received £120,000 as a payment on account from a customer on 27 May 20X3 for
delivery of goods to the customer by SAH in the following months. eSAH has a confirmed contract
for this and has recorded the amount in revenue for the year.
(2) eSAH has capitalised software development costs to the amount of £408,000 during the year.
There are no specific details as yet, but it appears to relate almost entirely to the development of new
e-based sales systems. £186,000 of the capitalised amount related to computers and consulting
support staff time bought and brought in specifically to help test the new system. eSAH is adopting
its standard five-year, straight-line depreciation policy with respect to the £408,000.
(3) I have gathered together some data relating to SAH before performing analytical procedures, but
have yet to get around to doing it. The relevant data is:
I understand eSAH’s provisional revenue to the year end 31 May 20X3 to be about £500,000, and
gross profitability was at 10%. Inventory has remained constant during the year ended 31 May 20X3
in SAH.
(4) SAH is planning to pay a dividend for the first time this year of about £50,000. This has yet to be
finalised and has not been provided for in the financial statements. The FD said he would get back to
me once the figure has been finalised.
(5) The FD has suggested that the format of the business of eSAH is completely different from that of
SAH and is insisting on not consolidating the results of eSAH on the grounds that it would undermine
a true and fair view of the financial statements.
There are some debt covenants relating to the debenture (in SAH) of which we should be aware. I
have not done any work on these, as yet.
• Net current assets are to remain positive.
• Overdraft balances are to be no more than £150,000 at all times.
• Receivables days and payable days are not to exceed 180 days each. Calculations to be based on
year-end figures.
• Bank consent is required for any significant changes in the structure of the business.
• I understand that a breach of any of these conditions converts the debenture into a loan
repayable on demand.
When eSAH was incorporated, bank consent was obtained in accordance with the covenants.
Consent was obtained on the basis that the covenants would now apply on a consolidated basis.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Fall in gross profit % achieved While the fall in absolute revenue has been explained the
fall in gross profit margin is more serious.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 447
Circumstances Why cause for concern?
Increased receivables balance Worsening debt collection is bad news when the
and increased ageing company is making losses and has a deteriorating
20X4 74.8 days liquidity position.
20X5 96.7 days The increase in average debt collection period may be
due to an irrecoverable receivable on the account of the
major customer lost in the year.
Worsening liquidity ratio This is a significant fall which will worsen further if an
20X4 1.03 allowance for irrecoverable receivables is required.
20X5 0.87 The company has loan and lease commitments which
possibly may not be met.
Summary – If the company is not a going concern the financial statements would be truer and
fairer if prepared on a break-up basis. Material adjustments may then be required to the
financial statements.
2.2 Audit procedures
• Analyse post-reporting date sale proceeds for non-current assets, inventory, cash received
from customers.
• Review the debt ageing and cash recovery lists. Ask directors if outstanding amounts from
lost customer are recoverable.
• Discuss the optimistic view of likely future contracts with the MD. Orders in the post-
reporting date period should be reviewed to see if they substantiate his opinion.
• Obtain his opinion about future contracts in a written representation letter.
• Review bank/loan records to assess the extent to which the company has met its loan and
lease commitments in the post-reporting date period.
• Review sales orders/sales ledger for evidence of additional lost custom in post-reporting
date period.
• Obtain cash flow and profit forecasts:
– Discuss assumptions with the directors
– Perform sensitivity analysis flexing the key assumptions ie, interest rates, date of payment
of payables and receipts from customers
• Check all commitments have been cleared in accordance with legal agreements:
– Agree budgets to any actual results achieved in the post-reporting date period
– Assess reasonableness of assumptions in the light of the success of the achievement of
the company’s budgets set for 20X5. Discuss with the directors any targets not achieved
– Reperform calculations
– Ensure future budgeted profits are expected to meet likely interest charges
• Review bank records to ensure that the company is operating within its overdraft facility in
the post-reporting date period. Review bank certificate for terms and conditions of the
facility. Review bank correspondence for any suggestion the bank is concerned about its
current position.
• Ask management whether the new vehicle fleet is attracting new contracts as anticipated.
Scrutinise any new contracts obtained and check improved gross profit margins will be
achieved.
• Obtain written representation as to the likelihood of the company operating for 12 months
from the date of approval of the financial statements.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 449
sold on the internet pass to Russell Ltd. This is evidenced by the fact that goods are sent directly to
the customer by Cairns plc and they are responsible for all after-sales issues. The revenue earned by
Russell Ltd is therefore the commission on sales generated rather than the sales price of the goods
sold. Equally there will be no recognition of cost of sales or inventory in respect of these items.
Therefore the current treatment in the financial statements is incorrect.
In accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers commission received by a party
acting as an agent should be recognised as earned. As Russell Ltd has no further obligations once
the initial transaction has been undertaken the commission should be recognised at this time.
Commission of approximately £900,000 should be recognised (£6,000,000 × 15%). An additional
adjustment may be required in respect of sales made not despatched. The £6,000,000 trading
revenue should be eliminated with any associated costs of sale and inventory. These amounts are
likely to be material to the financial statements.
Conclusion
The financial statements should be revised, as they do not comply with IFRS 15. If management
refuse to adjust the financial statements the auditor will need to qualify the audit opinion on the
grounds of a misstatement (disagreement) which is material but not pervasive.
1 Branch plc
Earnings per share
The problem in the EPS calculation relates to share options held by a director. As they are held by a
director, it is unlikely that they are immaterial, as matters relating to directors are generally
considered to be material by their nature. The fact that EPS is a key shareholder ratio which is
therefore likely to be material in nature to the shareholders should also be considered.
As the incorrect EPS calculation is therefore material to the financial statements, the audit opinion
should be modified in this respect, unless the directors agree to amend the EPS figure. This would be
a qualified opinion using the term except for’ on the grounds of material misstatement
(disagreement with the accounting treatment).
Share options
The share options have not been included in the EPS calculations. The auditors must ensure that the
share options have been correctly disclosed in information relating to the director in both the
financial statements and the other information, and that these disclosures are consistent with each
other. If proper disclosures have not been made, the auditor will have to modify the audit opinion
due to lack of disclosure in this area which also represents a material misstatement.
Exercise of share options
The fact that the director has exercised his share options after the year end does not require
disclosure in the financial statements. However, it is likely that he has exercised them as part of a new
share issue by the company and, if so, the share issue would be a non-adjusting event after the
reporting period that would require disclosure in the financial statements. We should check if this is
the case and, if so, whether it has been disclosed. Non-disclosure would be further grounds for
opinion modification as a material misstatement.
Financial performance statement
The financial performance statement forms part of the other information that the auditor is required
to review under ISA (UK) 720. The auditor’s report would include an ‘Other Information’ section in
accordance with this standard. The ISA states that the auditors should seek to rectify any apparent
misstatements in this information. The ratio figures are misstated, and the auditor should encourage
the directors to correct them, regardless of the negligible difference.
The ISA refers to material items. The ratios will be of interest to shareholders, being investor
information, and this fact may make them material by their nature. However, as the difference is
negligible in terms of value, on balance, the difference is probably not sufficiently material for the
auditors to make any specific reference to this in their auditor’s report.
Corporate governance statement
For the company to meet stock exchange requirements, the auditors must review the corporate
governance statement. For our own purposes, we should document that we have done so. As having
an audit committee is a requirement of the UK Corporate Governance Code and the company does
not have one, the corporate governance statement should explain why the company does not
comply with the Code in this respect.
We would not modify our audit opinion over the corporate governance statement, although we
would make reference to it in the ‘Other Information’ section, if we do not feel the disclosure is
sufficient in respect of the non-compliance with the requirement to have an audit committee.
The audit opinion would not be modified in this respect. We are also required to report by exception
if we have identified information that is:
• inconsistent with the information in the audited financial statements; or
• materially misstated based on the knowledge acquired by the auditor in the course of the audit.
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 451
Overall conclusion
None of the matters discussed above, either singly or seen together, are pervasive to the financial
statements. The auditor’s report should be modified on the material matter of the incorrect EPS
calculation and the inadequate disclosures on EPS (and possibly the undisclosed share issue as well)
by means of a qualified opinion and a basis section that explains this qualified opinion. We should
also review the corporate governance statement: if the statement does not adequately address the
issue of the company not having an audit committee, we will need to address this in the ‘Other
Information’ of our report. Our audit opinion will not be modified in this respect.
2 SafeAsHouses plc
BRIEFING NOTES TO MANAGER
To Audit Manager
From Audit Senior
Date July 20X3
Client SafeAsHouses (hereafter SAH) and eSAH
Subject Major issues arising in audit work performed to date
There are a host of issues that need to be addressed. Some are important, and these are those I have
highlighted for your attention.
While there may now be some urgency with respect to completing the audit it is not acceptable for
us to be rushed in forming our judgement. This creates a threat to our objectivity through possible
intimidation.
Incorrect financial statements
The financial statements are incorrectly stated for SAH. There is no revaluation reserve and it seems,
after looking at the retained earnings in the analytical procedures, that the revaluation has been
credited to profit or loss. Retained earnings should therefore be £5,000 and the revaluation reserve
balance should be £500,000. (The revaluation would also be recognised as other comprehensive
income in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.) The implication of this is
that the company has insufficient distributable reserves to pay the proposed dividend. There also
appears to be little cash to pay any dividend given the overdraft in SAH.
The intention not to consolidate the 100% subsidiary is unlikely to be allowed. IFRS 10, Consolidated
Financial Statements does not allow exclusion of a subsidiary from consolidation on the basis of
differing activities.
The company does not appear to have established a sinking fund for the redemption of the
debenture. There is not enough cash in the financial statements to approach the figure required and
the profitability of SAH is not sufficient to generate the amount required in the months remaining.
eSAH does not appear to be generating any cash at all. Nevertheless, the company appears to have
had or raised £300,000 to launch eSAH.
Moreover, in SAH, revenue and profit margins have been falling since 20X1. We will need to ascertain
why this has happened and consider any explanations received in conjunction with available forecast
figures.
I am seriously concerned at the levels of receivables and payables in both companies. Not enough
cash is coming into the businesses and not enough, it appears, is being used to pay the payables.
There is a solvency issue pending which may well be crystallised when one considers the debt
covenants.
Net current assets
These stand at £310,000 for SAH and are clearly positive, which satisfies the constraint in place from
the debt covenant. However, there are some issues in eSAH that indicate that its net current assets
figures (already negative) may have to be further adjusted downward.
(1) The treatment of the payment on account of £120,000 is incorrect and does not accord with
prudent revenue recognition rules. The payment should not have been taken to revenue, but
credited to an account in short-term payables. This adjustment will reduce net current assets to
(£203,000).
ICAEW 2021 8: The statutory audit: finalisation, review and reporting 453
• These projections will have implications for the plans for a listing in the near future which look too
ambitious as there is likely to be too much uncertainty for the business to be floated successfully.
• Assess if there are any refinancing arrangements in place or proposed that would underpin the
survival of the company.
• Look to correspondence with financiers to ascertain evidence of refinancing or a relaxation of the
covenants.
Reporting financial
performance
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements
2 IFRS 8, Operating Segments
3 IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued
Operations
4 IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures
5 IFRS 1, First-time Adoption of International Financial Reporting
Standards
6 IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting
7 IFRS 14, Regulatory Deferral Accounts
8 Audit focus – general issues with reporting performance
9 Audit focus – specific issues
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
Learning outcomes
• Explain how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities can affect
reported financial performance
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to reporting performance: in respect of
presentation of financial statements; revenue; operating segments; continuing and discontinued
operations; EPS; interim reporting
• Formulate and evaluate accounting and reporting policies for single entities and groups of
varying sizes and in a variety of industries
• Calculate and disclose, from financial and other qualitative data, the amounts to be included in an
entity’s financial statements according to legal requirements, applicable financial reporting
standards and accounting and reporting policies
• Appraise the significance of inconsistencies and omissions in reported information in evaluating
performance
• Compare the performance and position of different entities allowing for inconsistencies in the
recognition and measurement criteria in the financial statement information provided
• Make adjustments to reported earnings in order to determine underlying earnings and compare
the performance of an entity over time
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 2(a)–(d), 9(f)–(h), 14(f)
9
3 IFRS 5, Non-current Approach Both assets held for IQ2: Held for sale
Assets Held for Sale You have studied sale and This question asks
and Discontinued this topic at discontinued you to apply the
Operations Professional Level, operations are held-for-sale criteria.
External users of so work through regularly tested, Make sure you
financial statements quickly then do the both in the single come to a
rely on the limited interactive question. silo FR question and conclusion.
disaggregation the integrated
Stop and think question. Scenarios
provided as a result
of the requirements How do standards are often very
of accounting such as IFRS 5 and detailed and IFRS 5
standards such as IFRS 8 help provide will interact with
the disclosure of disaggregated other standards,
discontinued information to such as IAS 10.
operations. users?
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements sets down the format of financial statements,
containing requirements as to their presentation, structure and content.
IAS 1
This Practice Statement is an example of where two professional skills interact. In order to apply
judgement, you need to identify the relevant information, taking into account IFRS requirements and
users’ information needs.
Having assimilated and organised the information (steps 1 to 3 of the Practice Statement process),
you will be in a position to make judgements about whether it is material. Other information may be
needed to support the judgements.
20X7 20X6
$m $m
Revenue X X
Cost of sales (X) (X)
Gross profit X X
Other income X X
Distribution costs (X) (X)
Administrative expenses (X) (X)
Other expenses (X) (X)
Finance costs (X) (X)
Share of profit of associates X X
Profit before tax X X
Income tax expense (X) (X)
Profit for the year from continuing operations X X
Loss for the year from discontinued operations (X)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR X X
Other comprehensive income:
Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss:
Gains on property revaluation X X
Investment in equity instruments (X) X
Actuarial gains (losses) on defined benefit pension plans (X) X
Share of gain (loss) on property revaluation of associates X (X)
Income tax relating to items that will not be reclassified X (X)
(X) X
Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Exchange differences on translating foreign operations X X
Cash flow hedges (X) (X)
Income tax relating to items that may be reclassified (X) (X)
X X
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax (X) X
Alternatively, components of OCI could be presented in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income net of tax.
Retained
earnings
foreign ops
Inv. in equity
instrum’ts
Cash flow
hedges
Revaluat’n
surplus
Total
Non-controlling
interest
Total equity
Trans. of
Balance at £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
1 Jan 20X7 X X (X) X X – X X X
Changes in
accounting
policy – X – – – – X – X
Retained
earnings
foreign ops
Inv. in equity
instrum’ts
Cash flow
hedges
Revaluat’n
surplus
Total
Non-controlling
interest
Total equity
Trans. of
Balance at £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Restated
balance X X (X) X X – X X X
Changes in
equity
during
20X7
Issue of
share
capital X – – – – – X – X
Dividends – (X) – – – – (X) (X) (X)
Total
compre-
hensive
income for
the year – X X X X X X X X
Transfer to
retained
earnings – X – – – (X) – – –
Balance at
31 Dec
20X7 X X X X X X X X X
A comparative statement for the prior period is also required. Here is an example of a statement of
changes in equity with some real figures in, to give you a better idea of what it looks like:
Olive Group: statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 June 20X9
Inv. in Non-
Share Retained equity Revaluat’n controlling Total
capital earnings instrum’ts surplus Total interest equity
£m £m £m £m £m £m £m
Balance at
1 July 20X8 14,280 10,896 384 96 25,656 1,272 26,928
Share
capital
issued 1,320 1,320 1,320
Dividends (216) (216) (120) (336)
Total
compre-
hensive
income for
the year (1,296) 72 48 (1,176) 528 (648)
Balance at
30 June
20X9 15,600 9,384 456 144 25,584 1,680 27,264
An important aspect of reporting financial performance is segment reporting. This is covered by IFRS
8, Operating Segments.
IFRS 8 is a disclosure standard.
• Segment reporting is necessary for a better understanding and assessment of:
– past performance;
– risks and returns; and
– informed judgements.
• IFRS 8 adopts the managerial approach to identifying segments.
• The standard gives guidance on how segments should be identified and what information
should be disclosed for each.
It also sets out requirements for related disclosures about products and services, geographical areas
and major customers.
2.1 Introduction
Large entities produce a wide range of products and services, often in several different countries.
Further information on how the overall results of entities are made up from each of these product or
geographical areas will help the users of the financial statements. This is the reason for segment
reporting.
• The entity’s past performance will be better understood.
• The entity’s risks and returns may be better assessed.
• More informed judgements may be made about the entity as a whole.
Risks and returns of a diversified, multinational company can be better assessed by looking at the
individual risks and rewards attached to groups of products or services or in different geographical
areas. These are subject to differing rates of profitability, opportunities for growth, future prospects
and risks.
Definition
Operating segment: This is a component of an entity:
• that engages in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur expenses (including
revenues and expenses relating to transactions with other components of the same entity);
• whose operating results are regularly reviewed by the entity’s chief operating decision maker to
make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and assess its performance; and
• for which discrete financial information is available.
2.4 Aggregation
Two or more operating segments may be aggregated if the segments have similar economic
characteristics, and the segments are similar in all of the following respects:
• The nature of the products or services
• The nature of the production process
• The type or class of customer for their products or services
• The methods used to distribute their products or provide their services
• If applicable, the nature of the regulatory environment
IFRS 8 provides a framework for structuring the problem of comparing like with like and identifying
important areas of the business. First segments need to be identified – not always easy in real life or
in the exam. Then the relevant disclosures need to be made.
2.6 Disclosures
2.6.1 Segment disclosures
Disclosures required by the IFRS are extensive and best learned by looking at the example and pro
forma, which follow the list. Disclosure is required of:
• Factors used to identify the entity’s reportable segments
A reconciliation of each of the above material items to the entity’s reported figures is required.
Reporting of a measure of profit or loss by segment is compulsory. Other items are disclosed if
included in the figures reviewed by or regularly provided to the chief operating decision maker.
Notes
1 External revenue is allocated based on the customer’s location.
2 Non-current assets exclude financial instruments, deferred tax assets, post-employment benefit
assets, and rights under insurance contracts.
• Information about reliance on major customers (ie, those who represent more than 10% of
external revenue)
• ‘All other’ segment results are attributable to four operating segments of the company which do
not meet the quantitative thresholds. Those segments include a small property business, an
electronics equipment rental business, a software consulting practice and a warehouse leasing
operation. None of those segments has ever met any of the quantitative thresholds for
determining reportable segments.
• The finance segment derives a majority of its revenue from interest. Management primarily relies
on net interest revenue, not the gross revenue and expense amounts, in managing that segment.
Therefore, as permitted by IFRS 8, only the net amount is disclosed.
Country of Foreign
domicile countries Total
Revenue – external customers X X X
Non-current assets X X X
Segment
External Internal Total profit/ Segment Segment
revenue revenue revenue (loss) assets liabilities
£m £m £m £m £m £m
Chemicals:
Europe 14 7 21 1 31 14
Requirement
Which of the operating segments of Endeavour constitute a ‘reportable’ operating segment under
IFRS 8, Operating Segments for the year ending 31 December 20X5?
IFRS 5 requires assets and groups of assets that are ‘held for sale’ to be presented separately on the
face of the statement of financial position and the results of discontinued operations to be presented
separately in the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. This is required so that
users of financial statements will be better able to make projections about the financial position,
profits and cash flows of the entity based on continuing operations only.
Definition
Disposal group: A group of assets to be disposed of, by sale or otherwise, together as a group in a
single transaction, and liabilities directly associated with those assets that will be transferred in the
transaction. (In practice a disposal group could be a subsidiary, a cash-generating unit or a single
operation within an entity.)
(IFRS 5)
A disposal group could form a group of cash-generating units, a single cash-generating unit or be
part of a cash-generating unit.
The disposal group should include goodwill if it is a cash-generating unit (or group of cash-
generating units to which goodwill has been allocated under IAS 36). Only goodwill recognised in
the statement of financial position can be included in the disposal group. If a previous generally
accepted accounting practice (GAAP) allowed goodwill to be recorded directly in reserves, this
goodwill does not form part of a disposal group.
Definition
Discontinued operation: A component of an entity that has either been disposed of, or is classified
as held for sale, and:
• represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations;
• is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or
geographical area of operations; or
• is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale.
Operations and cash flows that can be clearly distinguished, operationally and for financial reporting
purposes, from the rest of the entity.
An entity should present and disclose information that enables users of the financial statements to
evaluate the financial effects of discontinued operations and disposals of non-current assets or
disposal groups.
An entity should disclose a single amount on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income (or statement of profit or loss where presented separately) comprising the
total of:
• the post-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations; and
• the post-tax gain or loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on the
disposal of the assets or disposal group(s) constituting the discontinued operation.
An entity should also disclose an analysis of the above single amount into:
• the revenue, expenses and pre-tax profit or loss of discontinued operations;
• the related income tax expense;
• the gain or loss recognised on the measurement to fair value less costs to sell or on the disposal
of the assets or the discontinued operation; and
• the related income tax expense.
This may be presented either on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income or in the notes. If it is presented on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income it should be presented in a section identified as relating to discontinued
operations, ie, separately from continuing operations. This analysis is not required where the
discontinued operation is a newly acquired subsidiary that has been classified as held for sale.
An entity should disclose the net cash flows attributable to the operating, investing and financing
activities of discontinued operations. These disclosures may be presented either on the face of the
statement of cash flows or in the notes.
3.4 Presentation of a non-current asset or disposal group classified as held for sale
Non-current assets and disposal groups classified as held for sale should be presented separately
from other assets in the statement of financial position. The liabilities of a disposal group should be
presented separately from other liabilities in the statement of financial position.
• Assets and liabilities held for sale should not be offset.
• The major classes of assets and liabilities held for sale should be separately disclosed either on
the face of the statement of financial position or in the notes.
The objective of IAS 24 is to ensure that an entity’s financial statements contain the disclosures
necessary to draw attention to the possibility that its financial position and/or profit or loss may have
been affected by the existence of related parties or by related party transactions.
Definition
Related party transaction: A transfer of resources, services or obligations between related parties,
regardless of whether a price is charged.
£
Salaries and related taxes payable by S to its KMP for services rendered to S 500,000
Salaries and related taxes payable by P to S’s KMP for services rendered to S 60,000
Salaries and related taxes payable by S to its KMP for services rendered to P 20,000
Pension benefits accruing within the group-wide pension scheme to S’s KMP for
services rendered to S 50,000
Share options granted under the group-wide share option scheme to S’s KMP for
services rendered to S 28,000
658,000
Requirement
What transactions should be disclosed as key management personnel compensation in the financial
statements of S?
IFRS 1 gives guidance to entities applying IFRSs for the first time.
The adoption of a new body of accounting standards will inevitably have a significant effect on the
accounting treatments used by an entity and on the related systems and procedures. In 2005 many
countries adopted IFRS for the first time and over the next few years other countries are likely to do
the same.
In addition, many Alternative Investment Market (AIM) companies and public sector companies
adopted IFRSs for the first time for accounting periods ending in 2009 and 2010. US companies are
likely to move increasingly to IFRS, although the US Securities and Exchange Commission did not
give any definite timeline for this in its 2012 work plan.
As discussed in Chapter 2 of this Manual, the regulatory shift away from UK GAAP means that all
entities except those small enough to qualify as micro-entities will be required to report in
accordance withFRS102, with an option to use IFRS.
Preparation of an opening IFRS statement of financial position typically involves adjusting the
amounts reported at the same date under previous GAAP.
All adjustments are recognised directly in retained earnings (or, if appropriate, another category of
equity) not in profit or loss.
5.3 Estimates
Estimates in the opening IFRS statement of financial position must be consistent with estimates made
at the same date under previous GAAP even if further information is now available (in order to
comply with IAS 10).
5.5 Main exemptions from applying IFRSs in the opening IFRS statement of financial
position
(a) Property, plant and equipment, investment properties and intangible assets
– Fair value/previous GAAP revaluation may be used as a substitute for cost at date of transition
to IFRSs.
(b) Business combinations
For business combinations before the date of transition to IFRSs:
– The same classification (acquisition or uniting of interests) is retained as under previous GAAP.
– For items requiring a cost measure for IFRSs, the carrying value at the date of the business
combination is treated as deemed cost and IFRS rules are applied from thereon.
– Items requiring a fair value measure for IFRSs are revalued at the date of transition to IFRSs.
– The carrying value of goodwill at the date of transition to IFRSs is the amount as reported under
previous GAAP.
(c) Employee benefits
– Unrecognised actuarial gains and losses can be deemed zero at the date of transition to IFRSs.
IAS 19 is applied from then on.
(d) Cumulative translation differences on foreign operations
– Translation differences (which must be disclosed in a separate translation reserve under IFRSs)
may be deemed zero at the date of transition to IFRSs. IAS 21 is applied from then on.
(e) Adoption of IFRSs by subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
If a subsidiary, associate or joint venture adopts IFRSs later than its parent, it measures its assets
and liabilities either:
– at the amount that would be included in the parent’s financial statements, based on the
parent’s date of transition; or
– at the amount based on the subsidiary (associate or joint venture)’s date of transition.
Disclosure
• A reconciliation of previous GAAP equity to IFRSs is required at the date of transition to IFRSs and
for the most recent financial statements presented under previous GAAP.
• A reconciliation of profit for the most recent financial statements presented under previous GAAP.
IAS 34 recommends that publicly traded entities should produce interim financial reports and, for
entities that do publish such reports, it lays down principles and guidelines for their production.
Definitions
Interim period: A financial reporting period shorter than a full financial year.
Interim financial report: A financial report containing either a complete set of financial statements (as
described in IAS 1) or a set of condensed financial statements (as described in this standard) for an
interim period.
Solution
The following are examples:
• Write down of inventories to net realisable value and the reversal of such a write down
• Recognition of a loss from the impairment of property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, or
other assets, and the reversal of such an impairment loss
• Reversal of any provisions for the costs of restructuring
• Acquisitions and disposals of items of property, plant and equipment
• Commitments for the purchase of property, plant and equipment
• Litigation settlements
• Corrections of fundamental errors in previously reported financial data
• Any debt default or any breach of a debt covenant that has not been corrected subsequently
• Related party transactions
IAS 34 is concerned with communication – publicly traded entities need more information to be
communicated than do private companies. While a private company would often produce
management accounts, these would be for internal purposes and not communicated to the public.
6.5 Materiality
Materiality should be assessed in relation to the interim period financial data. It should be recognised
that interim measurements rely to a greater extent on estimates than annual financial data.
6.6.9 Depreciation
Depreciation should only be charged in an interim statement on non-current assets that have been
acquired, not on non-current assets that will be acquired later in the financial year.
Solution
The taxation charge in the interim financial statements is based upon the weighted average rate for
the year. In this case the entity’s tax rate for the year is expected to be 30%. The taxation charge in the
interim financial statements will be £1.8 million.
Solution
The value of the inventories in the interim financial statements at 30 June 20X4 is the lower of cost
and NRV at 30 June 20X4. This is:
100,000 × £1.20 = £120,000
• IFRS 14, Regulatory Deferral Accounts permits entities adopting IFRS for the first time to continue
to account, with some limited changes, for ‘regulatory deferral account balances’ in accordance
with their previous GAAP, both on initial adoption of IFRS and in subsequent financial statements.
• Regulatory deferral account balances, and movements in them, are presented separately in the
statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income.
Specific disclosures are required.
IFRS 14, Regulatory Deferral Accounts was issued in January 2014 and is effective for an entity’s first
annual IFRS financial statements for a period beginning on or after 1 January 2016. IFRS 14 is an
interim standard, applicable to first-time adopters of IFRS that provide goods or services to
customers at a price or rate that is subject to rate regulation by the Government eg, the supply of gas
or electricity.
The following definitions are used in IFRS 14.
Definitions
Rate regulation: A framework for establishing the prices that can be charged to customers for goods
and services and that framework is subject to oversight and/or approval by a rate regulator.
Rate regulator: An authorised body that is empowered by statute or regulation to establish the rate
or range of rates that bind an entity.
Regulatory deferral account balance: The balance of any expense (or income) account that would
not be recognised as an asset or a liability in accordance with other Standards, but that qualifies for
deferral because it is included, or is expected to be included, by the rate regulator in establishing the
rate(s) that can be charged to customers.
7.1 Objective
The objective of IFRS 14 is to specify the financial reporting requirements for ‘regulatory deferral
account balances’ that arise when an entity provides goods or services to customers at a price or rate
that is subject to rate regulation.
7.4 Presentation
The amounts of regulatory deferral account balances are separately presented in an entity’s financial
statements.
7.5 Disclosures
Specific disclosures are required in order to enable users to assess:
• the nature of, and risks associated with, the rate regulation that establishes the price(s) the entity
can charge customers for the goods or services it provides; and
• the effects of rate regulation on the entity’s financial statements.
The auditor must consider the risk of fraud in general, and the risk of creative accounting in
particular, when auditing financial performance.
ISA (UK) 200 (Revised June 2016), Overall Objectives of the Independent Auditor and the Conduct of
an Audit in Accordance with the International Standards on Auditing (UK) states the auditor’s overall
objectives as follows:
• To obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from
material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, thereby enabling the auditor to express an
opinion on whether the financial statements are prepared, in all material respects, in accordance
with an applicable financial reporting framework
• To report on the financial statements, and communicate as required by the ISAs (UK), in
accordance with the auditor’s findings
(ISA 200.11)
Note that the auditor is concerned with material misstatements arising both as a result of error, and
as a result of fraud.
We looked at creative accounting, a form of fraudulent financial reporting, in Chapter 5. We will look
at the audit approach to fraud and creative accounting in more detail in Chapter 24.
Another point which is worth drawing out is the need for the auditor to report and communicate as
required by the ISAs. As ISA 200 makes clear, the auditor must fully understand and comply with all
the ISAs relevant to the audit.
This section looks at some of the audit issues related to certain financial reporting treatments
covered earlier in this chapter.
9.5.2 Responsibilities
Management is responsible for the identification of related parties and the disclosure of transactions
with such parties. Management should set up appropriate internal controls to ensure that related
parties are identified and disclosed along with any related party transactions.
It may not be self-evident to management whether a party is related. Furthermore, many accounting
systems are not designed to either distinguish or summarise related party transactions, so
management will have to carry out additional analysis of accounting information.
The auditor has a responsibility to perform audit procedures to identify, assess and respond to the
risks of material misstatement arising from the entity’s failure to appropriately account for or disclose
related party relationships, transactions or balances.
9.5.3 Risks
The following audit risks may arise from a failure to identify a related party.
• Failure of the financial statements to comply with IAS 24.
• There may be a misstatement in the financial statements – transactions may be on a non arm’s
length basis and thus may result in assets, liabilities, profit or loss being overstated or
understated. For example, special tax rates may apply to profits reported on sales to related
parties.
• The reliance on a source of audit evidence may be misjudged. An auditor may rely on what is
perceived to be third-party evidence when in fact it is from a related party. More generally,
reliance on management assurances may be affected if the auditor were made aware of non-
disclosure of a related party.
• The motivations of related parties may be outside normal business motivations and thus may be
misunderstood by the auditor if there is non-disclosure. In the extreme, this may amount to fraud.
The inherent risk linked to related party transactions (RPT) can be high, especially where
management is unaware of the existence of all the related party relationships or transactions, or
where there is an opportunity for collusion, concealment or manipulation by management. There is
an increased risk that the auditor may fail to detect a RPT, where:
• there has been no charge made for a RPT (ie, a zero cost transaction);
• disclosure would be sensitive for directors or have adverse consequences for the company;
• the company has no formal system for detecting RPTs;
• RPTs are with a party that the auditor could not reasonably expect to know is a related party;
• RPTs from an earlier period have remained as an unsettled balance;
9.5.8 Documentation
The auditor is required to include in the audit documentation the identity of related parties and the
nature of related party relationships.
Note: The law regarding transactions with directors was covered in Chapter 1 of this Workbook.
3. Can you measure assets held for sale as per IFRS 5? (Topic 4)
4. What are the minimum components of interim financial statements under IFRS 34? (Topic
7)
5. Do you understand the role of the auditor in relation to segment information? (Topic 10)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Ndombe This tests IFRS 5, specifically classifying and valuing non-current assets
held for sale. This should be assumed knowledge from earlier studies, but
if you struggle you may need to go back to your earlier study material.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter. In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to
attempt.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
12 ISA 501
• Audit of segment information – ISA 501.13
13 ISA 550
• Definition of related parties – ISA 550.10
• Auditor’s responsibilities in relation to related parties – ISA 550.3–7
• Audit procedures in respect of related parties – ISA 550.11–28
14 ISA 710
• Audit procedures in respect of comparative financial statements – ISA 710.7–9
• Audit reporting in respect of comparative financial statements – ISA 710.10–19
1 AZ
AZ is a quoted manufacturing company. Its finished products are stored in a nearby warehouse until
ordered by customers. AZ has performed very well in the past, but has been in financial difficulties in
recent months and has been reorganising the business to improve performance.
The trial balance for AZ at 31 March 20X3 was as follows:
$’000 $’000
Sales 124,900
Cost of goods manufactured in the year to 31 March 20X3
(excluding depreciation) 94,000
Distribution costs 9,060
Administrative expenses 16,020
Restructuring costs 121
Interest received 1,200
Loan note interest paid 639
Land and buildings (including land $20,000,000) 50,300
Plant and equipment 3,720
Accumulated depreciation at 31 March 20X2:
Buildings 6,060
Plant and equipment 1,670
Investment properties (at market value) 24,000
Inventories at 31 March 20X2 4,852
Trade receivables 9,330
Bank and cash 1,190
Ordinary shares of $1 each, fully paid 20,000
Share premium 430
Revaluation surplus 3,125
Retained earnings at 31 March 20X2 28,077
Ordinary dividends paid 1,000
7% loan notes 20X7 18,250
Trade payables 8,120
Proceeds of share issue – 2,400
214,232 214,232
(1) The property, plant and equipment are being depreciated as follows:
Buildings 5% per annum straight line.
2 Viscum
The Viscum Company accounts for non-current assets using the cost model.
On 25 April 20X6 Viscum classified a non-current asset as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5,
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. At that date the asset’s carrying
amount was £30,000, its fair value was estimated at £22,000 and the costs to sell at £3,000.
On 15 May 20X6 the asset was sold for net proceeds of £18,400.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 5, what amount should be included as an impairment loss in Viscum’s
financial statements for the year ended 30 June 20X6?
3 Reavley
The Reavley Company accounts for non-current assets using the cost model.
On 20 July 20X6 Reavley classified a non-current asset as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5,
Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. At that date the asset’s carrying
amount was £19,500, its fair value was estimated at £26,500 and the costs to sell at £1,950.
The asset was sold on 18 October 20X6 for £26,000.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 5, at what amount should the asset be stated in Reavley’s statement of
financial position at 30 September 20X6?
4 Smicek
The Smicek Company classified an asset as being held for sale on 31 December 20X6. The asset had
been purchased for a cost of £1.2 million on 1 January 20X4, and then had a 12-year useful life. On
31 December 20X6 its carrying amount was £900,000, its fair value was £860,000 and the expected
sale costs were £20,000.
On 31 December 20X7 the board of Smicek, having failed to sell the asset during 20X7, decided to
reverse their original decision and therefore use the asset in the business. At 31 December 20X7 the
5 Ndombe
The Ndombe Company classified a group of assets as held for sale on 31 December 20X6. Their fair
value less costs to sell was £1,180,000.
During 20X7 the company decided that one of the assets, a polishing machine, should no longer be
treated as an asset held for sale. The sale of the other assets was delayed due to events beyond the
control of Ndombe and the company remains committed to their sale, which is highly probable in
20X8.
Asset values and dates are as follows:
Requirement
Under IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations what are the amounts
that should be shown under assets on the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X6 and
31 December 20X7?
6 Sapajou
The Sapajou Company bought a property with a useful life of 10 years for £1,200,000 on 1 January
20X4.
On 1 July 20X6 the board of Sapajou made a decision to sell the property, and immediately vacated
it and advertised it for sale. At this date fair value less costs to sell was estimated at £880,000.
Negotiations with a buyer appeared successful, and a sale was provisionally agreed for 1 August
20X7 for £880,000. At the last minute the buyer withdrew and Sapajou had to re-advertise the
property.
A new buyer was found in November 20X7 and a new price was agreed at fair value less costs to sell
of £995,000. The sale is scheduled to take place in February 20X8.
Requirement
What are the amounts that should be included in profit or loss for the years ending 31 December
20X6 and 31 December 20X7?
7 Sulafat
The Sulafat Company has a 70% subsidiary Vurta and is a venturer in Piton, a joint venture company.
During the financial year to 31 December 20X6, Sulafat sold goods to both companies.
8 Phlegra
In the year ended 31 December 20X7, the Phlegra Company undertook transactions with the
following entities to the value stated.
(1) The Nereidum Company, one of whose non-executive directors is an executive director of
Phlegra: £300,000.
(2) The Chub Company, which sources 100% of its raw materials requirements from Phlegra:
£190,000.
Requirement
Under IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures, what is the total amount to be disclosed in respect of
transactions with related parties in Phlegra’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December
20X7?
9 Mareotis
The Mareotis Company is a partly owned subsidiary of the Bourne Company. In the year ended 31
December 20X7 Mareotis undertook transactions with the following entities to the value stated.
(1) The Hayles Company, in which the Wrasse Company holds 55% of the equity. Bourne holds 40%
of the equity of Wrasse and has the power to appoint 3 out of the 5 members of Wrasse’s board
of directors: £300,000.
(2) The Galaxius Company, which is controlled by Danielle (the aunt of Agnes, a member of
Mareotis’s board of directors): £500,000.
Requirement
Under IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures, what is the total amount of transactions with related parties
to be disclosed in Mareotis’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
10 Marmoset
The Marmoset Company offers the service of transport consultations. Its accounting year ends on 31
December each year and it is currently preparing half-yearly interim financial statements for the six
months to 30 June 20X7.
During 20X7 the directors drew up a plan to introduce a new bonus scheme for all junior consultants
in order to provide incentives and improve retention. The details of the scheme were announced to
employees the day before the interim financial statements were released on 15 August 20X7. Under
the planned scheme any bonus would be paid on 31 March 20X8.
The bonus will be equal to 1% of profit before tax (calculated before recognising the bonus) of the
year ended 31 December 20X7.
The business is seasonal such that 60% of the annual profit before tax is earned in the first six months
of the year. The profit before tax in the interim financial statements for the six months to 30 June
20X7 is £6 million.
Requirement
What amount should be recognised in profit or loss for Marmoset for the six months to 30 June 20X7
in respect of the bonus, according to IAS 34, Interim Financial Reporting?
11 Aconcagua
The Aconcagua Company sells fashion shoes, the price of which varies during the year. Its
accounting year ends on 31 December and it prepares half-yearly interim financial statements.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Profit or loss as % of
Revenue as % of total profit of all segments in Assets as % of total
revenue (£238m) profit (£29m) assets (£336m)
Chemicals * 33.6% 48.3% 32.4%
Pharmaceuticals
wholesale 28.2% 31.0% 31.0%
Pharmaceuticals retail 9.2% 6.9% 8.9%
Cosmetics 6.3% 6.9% 5.4%
Hair care 5.0% 13.8% 6.3%
Body care 17.6% 20.7% 16.1%
* The chemicals segments are aggregated due to their similar economic characteristics
At 31 December 20X5 four of the six operating segments are reportable operating segments:
Chemicals
All size criteria are met.
Pharmaceuticals wholesale
All size criteria are met.
Pharmaceuticals retail
The Pharmaceuticals retail segment is not separately reportable, as it does not meet the quantitative
thresholds. It can, however, still be reported as a separate operating segment if management
believes that information about the segment would be useful to users of the financial statements.
Alternatively, the group could consider amalgamating it with the Pharmaceuticals wholesale
segment, providing the two operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a
majority of the ‘aggregation’ criteria which, excluding the type of customer, may be the case.
Otherwise it would be disclosed in an ‘All other segments’ column.
Cosmetics
The Cosmetics segment does not meet the quantitative thresholds and therefore is not separately
reportable. It can also be reported separately if management believes the information would be
useful to users. Alternatively the group may be able to amalgamate it with the Body care segment,
providing the operating segments have similar economic characteristics and share a majority of the
‘aggregation’ criteria. Otherwise it would also be disclosed in an ‘All other segments’ column.
Hair care
The Hair care segment is separately reported due to its profitability being greater than 10% of total
segments in profit.
Body care
All size criteria are met.
1 AZ
AZ statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 20X3
$’000
Revenue 124,900
Cost of sales (W1) (94,200)
Gross profit 30,700
Distribution costs (W1) (9,060)
Administrative expenses (W1) (17,535)
Other expenses (W1) (121)
Finance income 1,200
Finance costs (18,250 × 7%) (1,278)
Profit before tax 3,906
Income tax expense (976)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 2,930
Other comprehensive income:
Gain on land revaluation 4,000
Total comprehensive income for the year 6,930
$’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W2) 48,262
Investment properties 24,000
72,262
Current assets
Inventories (5,180 – (W3) 15) 5,165
Trade receivables 9,330
Cash and cash equivalents 1,190
15,685
87,947
Equity
Share capital (20,000 + (W4) 2,000) 22,000
Share premium (430 + (W4) 400) 830
Retained earnings (28,077 – 1,000 + 2,930) 30,007
Revaluation surplus (3,125 + 4,000) 7,125
59,962
Current liabilities
Trade payables 8,120
Income tax payable 976
Interest payable (1,278 – 639) 639
9,735
87,947
WORKINGS
(1) Expenses
Cost of
sales Distribution Admin Other
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Per TB 94,000 9,060 16,020 121
Opening inventories 4,852
Depreciation on buildings (W2) 1,515
Depreciation on P&E (W2) 513
Closing inventories (5,180 – (W3) 15) (5,165) – –
94,200 9,060 17,535 121
(3) Inventories
$’000
Defective batch:
Selling price 55
Cost to complete: repackaging required (20)
NRV 35
Cost (50)
Write-off required (15)
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Proceeds of share issue 2,400
CREDIT Share capital (2,000 × $1) 2,000
CREDIT Share premium (2,000 × $0.20) 400
2 Viscum
£11,000
IFRS 5.15 requires assets classified as held for sale to be measured at the time of classification at the
lower of (1) the carrying value (£30,000) and (2) the fair value less costs to sell (£19,000).
IFRS 5.20 requires recognition of the resulting impairment loss (£30,000 – £19,000). The gain or loss
on disposal is treated separately per IFRS 5.24.
3 Reavley
£19,500
IFRS 5.15 requires that a non-current asset held for sale should be stated at the lower of (1) the
carrying amount (£19,500) and (2) the fair value less costs to sell (£24,550).
4 Smicek
£40,000
At the end of the current year, a non-current asset that has ceased to be classified as held for sale
should be valued at the lower of:
5 Ndombe
31 December 20X6: the assets should be shown in the statement of financial position at a value of
£1,140,000.
31 December 20X7: the assets should be shown in the statement of financial position at a value of
£1,040,000.
At the end of 20X6 the assets are classified as held for sale. The assets should be measured at the
lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell (IFRS 5.15). The carrying amount was
£1,140,000 and the fair value less costs to sell was £1,180,000 so they were measured at £1,140,000.
No depreciation is charged on these assets in 20X7 (IFRS 5.25).
At the end of 20X7, it is still possible to classify the ‘other’ assets as held for sale as the company is
still committed to the sale (IFRS 5.29). These assets would be measured at fair value less costs to sell
of £880,000, as this is lower than the carrying amount of £900,000.
However, the polishing machine should be valued at the lower of £160,000 carrying amount had
classification as held for sale not occurred (£400,000 × 2/5) and the higher of fair value less costs to
sell (£190,000) and value in use (£170,000) (IFRS 5.27). This gives a value of £160,000.
This gives a total value of £1,040,000 at 31 December 20X7.
6 Sapajou
An expense of £20,000 is shown in the profit or loss part of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X6.
Income of £20,000 is shown in the profit or loss part of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
Under IFRS 5.15 an asset classified as held for sale is measured at the lower of carrying amount
immediately before the reclassification of £900,000 (£1,200,000 – 2.5 × £120,000), and fair value less
costs to sell of £880,000. The £20,000 impairment loss is charged to profits (IFRS 5.20).
In the following year, the increase in fair value less costs to sell is £115,000, but only £20,000 of this
can be recognised in profit (IFRS 5.21) as this is the reversal of the previous impairment loss.
7 Sulafat
Disclosure is required of transactions with both Vurta and Piton. See IAS 24.3, which states that
entities under both direct and common control are related parties.
8 Phlegra
Nil under IAS 24.11 (a) two entities are not related parties simply because they have a director in
common, nor per IAS 24.11 (b) simply because the volume of transactions between them results in
economic dependence.
So neither Nereidum nor Chub is a related party of Phlegra.
10 Marmoset
Nil
Interim reports should apply the normal recognition and measurement criteria, using appropriate
estimates under IAS 34.41.
There is no legal or constructive obligation at the interim reporting date to pay the bonus, as no
announcement had been made at this date. Under IAS 34 App B B6 no expense is required.
11 Aconcagua
Inventory values change
Interim reports should apply the normal recognition and measurement criteria, using appropriate
estimates under IAS 34.41. IAS 34 App B B25–B26 links these general principles to inventories by
requiring them to be written down to net realisable value at the interim date; the write down is then
reversed at the year end, if appropriate.
So the profit decrease in the six months to 30 June 20X7 is 2,000 × (£30 – £20) = £20,000, while the
profit increase in the six months to 31 December 20X7 is 2,000 × (£28 – £20) = £16,000.
Reporting revenue
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Context
2 IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers
3 Applications of IFRS 15
4 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
10
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Explain how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities can affect
reported financial performance
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to reporting performance: in respect of
financial statements; revenue; operating segments; continuing and discontinued operations; EPS;
interim reporting
• Calculate and disclose, from financial and other qualitative data, the amounts to be included in an
entity’s financial statements according to legal requirements, applicable financial reporting
standards and accounting and reporting policies
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 2(a), 2(b), 2(d), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
10
incidental to the
contract – for
instance, to mobile
phones that are
provided free of
charge with airtime
contracts and to
some post-delivery
services, such as
maintenance and
installation.
3 Applications of IFRS Approach Any of these topics Work through all the
15 You will have dealt could come up in an examples and
Section 3 deals with with these topics at exam. Revenue is questions on
specific applications Professional Level, regularly examined applying this model,
of IFRS 15. The most so read through for and could take up especially:
important of these revision and focus most of the IQ6: Sale or return
are sale or return, on doing the question.
This is not as
sale and repurchase interactive straightforward as
and goods and questions. you might think.
services in the same Stop and think
contract.
In a principal/agent
relationship, what is
the agent’s
revenue?
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• Income, as defined by the IASB’s Conceptual Framework, includes both revenues and gains.
Revenue is income arising in the ordinary course of an entity’s activities and it may be called
different names, such as sales, fees, interest, dividends or royalties.
• IFRS 15, Revenuefrom Contracts with Customers establishes a single comprehensive framework
for accounting for the majority of contracts that result in revenue.
• Revenue recognition is straightforward in most business transactions, but can be complicated in
some situations.
It is by no means always easy in practice to assimilate information about revenue, as the points above
show. An exam question is likely to contain a detailed scenario with revenue apparently occurring at
different times.
2.2 Revenue
Income is defined in the IASB’s Conceptual Framework (para. 4.2) as “Increases in assets, or
decreases in liabilities, that result in increases in equity, other than those relating to contributions
from holders of equity claims .” Revenue is simply income arising in the course of an entity’s
ordinary activities (IFRS 15: Appendix A) and it may be called different names such as:
• Sales
• Turnover
• Interest
• Dividends
• Royalties
IFRS 15 is a good example of an IFRS structuring a problem. The five-stage process provides the
structure.
Solution
In the context of this contract, Colossal Construction is contracted to provide a significant service of
integrating the inputs in order to produce a single output; this being the warehouse. Therefore the
provision of each good or service is not separately identifiable.
The promises are not distinct and therefore there is only a single performance obligation, being the
development of the property.
Solution
Each good or service provided (the provision of the licence, the installation service and the technical
support) is capable of being distinct because a customer could gain benefit from each either on its
own or by obtaining the other goods/services from another supplier. The good or service could
therefore benefit the customer either on its own or together with other resources that are readily
available.
In the context of this contract, MetaConnect is not integrating the goods or services, none of the
goods or services modifies another and the goods/services are not highly interrelated. Therefore
each promise is separately identifiable. Therefore the promise to transfer the good or service to the
customer is separately identifiable from other promises in the contract
In conclusion, there are three distinct performance obligations in the contract, being:
(1) Installation of the software
(2) Provision of the licence
Solution
The consideration is variable due to the fact that Danmar will accept an amount that is less than the
price stated in the contract if the project overruns (the price concession).
Here the calculation of transaction price is based on expected values.
£
80% × £80,000,000 64,000,000
10% × £79,800,000 7,980,000
7% × £79,600,000 5,572,000
2.8 Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract
The transaction price is allocated to each performance obligation on the basis of the stand-alone
selling price of each distinct good or service in the contract. If the good or service does not have a
stand-alone selling price, it will need to be estimated (IFRS 15.IN7).
This applies particularly where a bundle of goods is sold which the entity also supplies unbundled.
An example of this is a mobile phone service contract which includes a free handset. In accordance
with IFRS 15, the entity will have to allocate some of the revenue to the handset, based on its stand-
alone selling price.
£
Provision of a licence 5,000
Installation service 1,500
Provision of technical support 3,000
9,500
Requirement
Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations in the contract.
Solution
Licence provision £5,000/£9,500 × £6,000 = £3,158
Installation service £1,500/£9,500 × £6,000 = £947
Technical support service £3,000/£9,500 × £6,000 = £1,895
£ %
Handset 52 10
Network services 480 90
Total value 532 100
As the transaction price is the total receipts of £480, this is the amount which must be allocated to
the separate performance obligations.
£
Year 1
Handset (480 × 10%) 48
Contract (480 – 48)/2 216
264
Year 2
Contract as above 216
Solution
This is a contract in which the performance obligation is satisfied over time. The entity is carrying out
the work for the benefit of the customer rather than creating an asset for its own use and in this case
it has an enforceable right to payment for work completed to date. We can see this from the fact that
certificates of work completed have been issued.
IFRS 15 states that the amount of payment that the entity is entitled to corresponds to the amount of
performance completed to date (ie, goods and/or services transferred).
In this case, the contract is certified as 50% complete, measuring progress under the output method.
At 31 December 20X7, the entity will recognise revenue of £1,000,000 and cost of sales of £800,000,
leaving profit of £200,000. The contract asset will be the costs to date plus the profit – that is
£1,000,000. We are not told that any of this amount has yet been invoiced, so none of this amount is
classified as receivables.
Solution
The transaction price is £70 million. £64 million is fixed consideration and £6 million is variable
consideration. The transaction price is £70 million as the project is currently expected to be
completed on time and therefore the single most likely outcome is the receipt of £70 million.
1 Output method
Using the output method the project is 35% complete:
Work certified ÷ Transaction price = 24,500 ÷ 70,000 = 35%
Therefore 35% × £70m = £24.5 million is recognised as revenue in the year.
2 Input method
Using the input method the project is 40% complete:
Costs incurred to date ÷ Total expected costs = (18,600 – 1,000) ÷ 44,000 = 40%
Therefore 40% × £70m = £28 million is recognised as revenue in the year.
Note that the £1 million wasted material is not relevant to the assessment of progress, however, it
must be recognised in profit or loss as a wastage expense.
Contract costs are considered in further detail in section 2.12.
Solution
Revenue to be recognised
£
Sale of goods (£4,000 + £13,223 (W)) 17,223
Financing income (£13,223 (W) × 10%) 1,322
WORKING
The deposit is £4,000 (£20,000 × 20%), so the amount receivable in two years is £16,000.
This is discounted at 10% for two years to £13,223 (£16,000 × 1/1.102).
Solution
The £35,000 is an incremental cost of obtaining a new contract, and Copyquick expects to recover
the cost by charging the customer for servicing and repairing their photocopiers.
Copyquick should capitalise the £35,000 and amortise it over a period to reflect the transfer of
services to the customer. Although the original contract is for five years, this is usually extended for a
further two years and so the amortisation period is seven years.
Therefore the annual amortisation charge is £5,000 (£35,000/7 years).
As we have seen, while IFRS 15 provides structure and guidance, it does not remove the need for
judgement. The area of costs is one where judgement must be applied. An example of this is the
question of whether to use an input method or an output method.
2.13.2 Disclosure
Disclosure of the following is required:
(a) Revenue from contracts with customers (separately from other sources of revenue) in categories
that depict how the nature, timing, amount and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows are
affected by economic factors (eg, by type of goods or geographical area). Sufficient information
should be disclosed to enable users to understand the relationship between the disclosure of
disaggregated revenue and revenue information that is disclosed for each reportable segment
(where IFRS 8 is applied).
(b) Impairment losses recognised on receivables, or contract assets arising from contracts with
customers (by category, as above).
(c) The opening and closing balances of receivables, contract assets and contract liabilities and
explanation of significant changes in contract assets and liabilities, including both qualitative and
quantitative information.
Solution
IFRS 15 requires application of its five-step process:
(1) Identify the contract with a customer. A contract can be written, oral or implied by customary
business practices.
(2) Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract. If a promised good or service is
not distinct, it can be combined with others.
(3) Determine the transaction price. This is the amount to which the entity expects to be ‘entitled’.
For variable consideration, the probability-weighted expected amount is used.
(4) Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations in the contract. For
multiple deliverables, the transaction price is allocated to each separate performance obligation
in proportion to the stand-alone selling price at contract inception of each performance
obligation.
(5) Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation. That is when the
entity transfers a promised good or service to a customer. The good or service is only
considered as transferred when the customer obtains control of it.
Application of the five-step process to Westerfield
(1) Identify the contract with a customer. This is clear. Westerfield has a 12-month contract with
Peterloo.
(5) Recognise revenue when (or as) the entity satisfies a performance obligation. That is when the
entity transfers a promised good or service to a customer. This applies to each of the performance
obligations:
• When Westerfield gives a handset to Peterloo, it needs to recognise the revenue of £460.80.
• When Westerfield provides network services to Peterloo, it needs to recognise the total revenue
of £1,939.20. It’s practical to do it once per month as the billing happens.
Journal entries
(1) On 1 January 20X4
The entries in the books of Westerfield will be:
Being recognition of revenue from monthly provision of network services and ‘repayment’ of
handset.
3 Applications of IFRS 15
Section overview
• IFRS 15 includes Application Guidance, which explains how the provisions of the standard should
be applied to a number of situations.
• These include:
– Sales with a right of return
– Extended warranties
– Transactions involving an agent
– Licensing
– Royalties
– Repurchase agreements
– Consignment arrangements
– Bill and hold arrangements
– Non-refundable upfront fees
3.2 Warranties
It is necessary to distinguish between warranties which give the customer assurance that the product
complies with agreed upon specifications, and warranties which provide the customer with a distinct
service (such as free repairs over a specified period).
A warranty which the customer purchases separately will always be a service warranty.
A service warranty is accounted for as a separate performance obligation and a portion of the
transaction price is allocated to it.
A warranty which does not promise a service is simply accounted for in accordance with IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets (IFRS 15.B28–30).
When considering whether a warranty is standard or extended, IFRS 15 requires that the following
factors are considered:
(a) Whether the provision of the warranty is a legal requirement; this would indicate that it is a
standard warranty
(b) The length of the warranty period – the longer the period, the more likely it is to be an additional
or extended warranty
(c) The nature of the tasks promised within the warranty and whether they relate to providing
assurance that a product will function as intended
Solution
The entity is acting as an agent based on the following points:
• Goods travel directly from the supplier to the customer, so the entity never has physical custody
of them and does not bear the associated risk.
• The supplier, not the entity, has the obligation to the customer.
• The entity does not set prices or bear credit risk.
• The payment received by the entity is in the form of commission.
So the entity should only recognise the commission received from suppliers as revenue.
Solution
The total fair value of the package is £30,000 (28,000 + 1,200 + 800) but is being sold for £27,000, a
discount of £3,000 or 10%.
The discounted fair value of the car should be recognised as revenue upon delivery:
£28,000 × 90% = £25,200
The discounted fair value of the fuel should be recognised as revenue on a straight line basis over
the next 12 months:
£1,200 × 90% = £1,080
The discounted fair value of the servicing should be recognised as revenue at the earlier of when the
servicing is provided and the end of the year:
£
Revenue:
After-sales support
Remainder
3.5 Licences
A licence allows a customer to access intellectual property such as software, patents, trademarks,
franchises, copyrights and media (eg, films).
The grant of a licence may be accompanied by the promise to transfer other goods or services in the
following circumstances:
(a) Where the promise to grant a licence is distinct, it forms a separate performance obligation from
that for goods and services.
(b) Where the promise to grant a licence is a separate performance obligation, revenue is either
recognised at a point in time or over time depending on the nature of the contract.
Solution
PizzaTheAction is providing access to its intellectual property as it exists throughout the licence
period (ie, the customer will benefit from continuous improvements and marketing etc). Therefore
the performance obligation is satisfied over time and PizzaTheAction recognises revenue over the
licence period.
3.6 Royalties
A contract to license intellectual property may require as consideration a royalty that is measured by
reference to sales or usage. In such cases, the seller recognises revenue when the later of the
following events occurs:
• The subsequent sale or usage arises.
• The performance obligation to which some or all of the sales- or usage-based royalty has been
allocated is satisfied (or partially satisfied).
Solution
The entity has a right to repurchase the property – a call option. The repurchase price is above the
original selling price, so this is, in effect, a financing arrangement.
The sale of the property at 20% below fair value is sufficient to cast doubt on whether a real sale has
been made. Also, the repurchase price is below fair value at the date of sale and represents a return
to the financial institution of 8% ((£4.32m – £4m) as a percentage of £4 million) on the amount paid
out.
The substance of the arrangement appears to be that the financial institution has granted the entity a
one-year loan secured on the property, charging interest at 8%.
The transaction should be accounted for by:
• continuing to recognise the property as an asset;
• crediting the £4 million received to a liability account;
• recognising £0.32 million as a finance cost in profit or loss and crediting it to the liability account;
and
• derecognising the liability when the £4.32 million cash is paid out.
Solution
The promise to provide a free tenth visit is a performance obligation, and total revenue of £949,950
(94,995 × £10) is allocated between visits to the gym by customers and the loyalty scheme.
Revenue is allocated to the provision of ‘stamps’ based on the expected take up rate and the stand-
alone selling price basis ie, based on a total stand-alone selling price of £74,000 (7,400 × £10):
£
Gym visits £949,950 × (949,950/(949,950 + 74,000)) 881,298
Loyalty stamps £949,950 × (74,000/(949,950 + 74,000)) 68,652
949,950
At 31 December 20X7, 4,350 of the expected 7,400 free visits have been claimed, therefore of the
£68,652 transaction price allocated to loyalty stamps:
• £40,356 (4,350/7,400 × £68,652) is recognised as revenue; and
• £28,296 is recognised as a contract liability for the unredeemed loyalty stamps.
Therefore total revenue recognised in 20X7 is £921,654 (881,298 + 40,356).
4 Audit focus
Section overview
This section looks at audit procedures relevant when considering the appropriateness of the
accounting treatment adopted for construction contracts.
Other tests • For deferred consideration, confirm the proportion split between the
value of the goods on the date of sale and the financing income by
reference to the contract and testing the reasonableness of the entity’s
calculations for recognising revenue (such as interest rates for estimating
fair value)
Revenue collected • Establish existence of any third parties for whom revenue would be
on behalf of third collected (ideally during the process of understanding the entity at the
parties planning stage)
• For a sample of revenue items, confirm the revenue is not due to be
passed on to any third parties identified
Bundled services, • Clearly complex, these will require a review of contracts/terms of sale to
licences, royalties establish their likelihood and conditions and the audit team briefed to
and repurchase include these in audit tests as appropriate
agreements
Bill and hold • Consider the existence of such arrangements and if present, review the
arrangements conditions required by IFRS 15 have been met:
– Confirm that the customer owns the products stored by the seller by
reference to the contract terms, and obtain confirmation from the
customer that they are happy for the seller to hold them
– Inspect the agreement between the seller and customer to confirm
the products can be accessed at any time and not transferred to
another customer
4.2 Audit procedures for contracts in which performance obligations are satisfied over
time (‘construction contracts’)
Remember, under IFRS 15, the entity recognises revenue in such cases by measuring progress
towards complete satisfaction of the performance obligation. Progress can be measured using
output methods (measuring the value to the customer of goods or services transferred to date) or
input methods (measuring the cost to the entity of goods or services transferred to date).
(IFRS 15.B14)
The following audit procedures will be relevant:
• Confirm contract price to contract agreed between client and customer
• Determine any amounts of conditional revenue/costs including the associated conditions
• Confirm the progress to date of the work completed, including any potential delays or problems
• Confirm costs incurred to date (inputs) by reference to management accounts, invoices, budgets
and other relevant documentation
• Identify any expenditure not supporting fulfilment of the contract by inspecting board minutes,
management accounts or other documentation (such as legal correspondence)
• Confirm total costs estimated for contract to ensure no planned overspends have been identified
(again, budgets, board minutes or management accounts can be inspected)
• Confirm the amounts of contract work certified as complete (outputs) at the year end by
reference to relevant documentation (such as surveyors’ reports or client estimates)
£’000
Contract price 600
Incentive payment if completed on time 40
640
Total contract costs were originally estimated to be £470,000. At the end of 20X6 this estimate has
increased to £570,000 due to extra costs incurred to rectify a number of construction faults.
The worked example above (Carillion) illustrates a situation where the professional skills of
concluding, recommending and communicating were not applied. Red flags over revenue were
identified, but the wrong conclusion drawn.
1. Can you list and apply the IFRS 15 five-step model for recognising revenue? (Topic 2)
3. Can you deal with performance obligations satisfied over time? (Topic 2)
4. What is the IFRS 15 treatment for sales with a right of return? (Topic 2)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Southwell A sale and repurchase question with a financing element, this is a short
question to get you started.
Clavering Part (a) deals with the issue of whether control has transferred, which it
must in order to satisfy a performance obligation. There is scope for
different interpretations. Part (b) deals with identifying performance
obligations and allocating the transaction price.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Solvit This tests the five-step process in detail and also the audit aspects.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
1 Webber
Webber sells two types of product, the Sleigh and the Sled. Webber sells the sleigh as an agent of
Caplin receiving commission of 15% on selling price. Webber sells the sled as principal at a gross
margin of 30%.
The following information relates to the year ended 30 September 20X8.
Sleighs Sleds
£ £
Total sales 200,000 75,000
Gross profit 60,000 22,500
Requirement
According to IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers what revenue should Webber
recognise in total for Sleighs and Sleds for the year ended 30 September 20X8?
2 Alexander
On 1 January 20X0, Alexander Ltd supplied goods to David Ltd for an agreed sum of £600,000. This
amount becomes payable on 31 December 20X2. David Ltd could have bought the goods for cash
of £450,000 on 1 January 20X0. The imputed rate of interest to discount the receivable to the cash
sales price is 10%.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers what amounts for revenue and
interest income should Alexander Ltd record in profit or loss relating to this transaction for the year
ended 31 December 20X0?
3 Southwell
Southwell Ltd, a manufacturing company, sold a property with a carrying amount of £4.5 million for
£5 million to Financier Ltd on 1 January 20X4. Southwell Ltd retains the right to occupy the property
and has an option to repurchase the property after two years for £6 million. Property prices are
expected to rise and the current market value is £8 million. The annual rate for 20% over two years is
9.5%.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS, 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers what should be recognised in
the financial statements relating to this transaction for the year ended 31 December 20X4?
4 White Goods
White Goods Ltd sells an electrical appliance for £2,400 on 1 October 20X7 making a mark up on
cost of 20%. The customer is given a one-year interest-free credit period. White Goods Ltd has a cost
of capital of 9%.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, what amount should the
company recognise as revenue from the sale of the appliance in profit or loss for the year ended 31
December 20X7?
6 Taplop
Taplop supplies laptop computers to large businesses. On 1 July 20X5, Taplop entered into a
contract with TrillCo, under which TrillCo was to purchase laptops at £500 per unit. The contract
states that if TrillCo purchases more than 500 laptops in a year, the price per unit is reduced
retrospectively to £450 per unit. Taplop’s year end is 30 June.
• As at 30 September 20X5, TrillCo had bought 70 laptops from Taplop. Taplop therefore estimated
that TrillCo’s purchases would not exceed 500 in the year to 30 June 20X6, and would therefore
not be entitled to the volume discount.
• During the quarter ended 31 December 20X5, TrillCo expanded rapidly as a result of a substantial
acquisition, and purchased an additional 250 laptops from Taplop. Taplop then estimated that
TrillCo’s purchases would exceed the threshold for the volume discount in the year to 30 June
20X6.
7 Clavering
Clavering Leisure Co owns and operates a number of hotels. The company is preparing its financial
statements for the year ended 31 May 20X3, and has come across the following issues.
(1) One of the hotels owned by Clavering Leisure is a complex which includes a theme park and a
casino as well as a hotel. The theme park, casino and hotel were sold in the year ended 31 May
20X3 to Manningtree Co, a public limited company, for £200 million but the sale agreement
stated that Clavering Leisure would continue to operate and manage the three businesses for
their remaining useful life of 15 years. The residual interest in the business reverts back to
Clavering Leisure after the 15-year period. Clavering Leisure would receive 75% of the net profit
of the businesses as operator fees, and Manningtree would receive the remaining 25%.
Clavering Leisure has guaranteed to Manningtree that the net minimum profit paid to
Manningtree would not be less than £15 million per year.
(2) Clavering Leisure has recently started issuing vouchers to customers when they stay in its hotels.
The vouchers entitle the customers to a £30 discount on a subsequent room booking within
three months of their stay. Historical experience has shown that only one in five vouchers are
redeemed by the customer. At the company’s year end of 31 May 20X3, it is estimated that there
are vouchers worth £20 million which are eligible for discount. The income from room sales for
the year is £300 million and Clavering Leisure is unsure how to report the income from room
sales in the financial statements.
Requirement
Advise Clavering Leisure on how the above accounting issues should be dealt with in its financial
statements in accordance with IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
8 Rockwye
Rockwye is a manufacturer of luxury watches which it sells to customers via a number of independent
retailers. Rockwye recognises revenue and derecognises inventory when it supplies each retailer with
deliveries of watches for display. Watches are then displayed by retailers at a price set by the
manufacturer – once a watch is sold to a customer, the retailer passes the revenue back to Rockwye.
Any unsold watches are returned to Rockwye after a period of 11 months.
Requirement
Comment on the accounting treatment in operation at Rockwye and recommend suitable audit
procedures that you should undertake.
9 Eco-Ergonom
Eco-Ergonom plc is an AIM quoted company which manufactures ergonomic equipment and
furniture, and environmentally friendly household products. You are the Financial Controller, and the
accounting year end is 31 December 20X7.
It is now 15 March 20X8, and the company’s auditors are currently engaged in their work. Deborah
Carroll, the Finance Director, is shortly to go into a meeting with the Audit Engagement Partner, Brian
Nicholls, to discuss some unresolved issues relating to company assets. To save her time, she wants
you to prepare a memorandum detailing the correct accounting treatment.
£’000
Vehicles (lorries) 240
Intangible assets (licences) 60
Trade receivables 20
Cash 100
Trade payables (40)
380
Unfortunately, three of the lorries were stolen on 1 February 20X7. The lorries were not insured,
because the road haulage company manager had failed to complete the paperwork in time. The
lorries had a net book value of £60,000, and we estimate that £60,000 was also their fair value less
costs to sell.
I believe that, as a result of the theft of the uninsured lorries, the value in use of the cash-
generating unit has fallen. We should recognise an impairment loss of £90,000, inclusive of the
loss of the stolen lorries.
We have another problem with this business. A competitor has come into operation, covering
similar routes and customers. Our revenue will be reduced by one-quarter, which will in turn
reduce the fair value less costs to sell and the value in use of our haulage business to £310,000
and £300,000 respectively. Part of this decline is attributable to the competitor’s actions causing
the net selling value of the licences to fall to £50,000. There has been no change in the fair value
less costs to sell of the other assets, which is the same as on the date of acquisition.
The company will continue to rent out the lorries for the foreseeable future.
How should we show this impairment in the financial statements?
Fall in value of machines
The goods produced by some of our machines have been sold below their cost. This has affected
the value of the machines in question, which has suffered an impairment. The carrying amount of
the machines at depreciated historical cost is £580,000 and their fair value less costs to sell is
estimated to be £240,000. We anticipate that cash inflows from the machines will be £200,000 per
annum for the next three years. The annual market discount rate, as you know, is 10%.
How should we determine the impairment in value of the machines in the financial statements and
how should this be recognised?
Own brand
This year, Eco-Ergonom has been developing a new product, Envirotop. Envirotop is a new range
of environmentally friendly kitchen products and an ergonomic kitchen design service.
40
Currently an intangible asset of £40 million is shown in the financial statements for the year ended
31 December 20X7.
Included in the costs of the production and launch of the products are the cost of upgrading the
existing machinery (£6 million), market research costs (£4 million) and staff training costs (£2
million).
Please explain the correct treatment of all these costs.
Purchase of Homecare
You will also know that, on 1 January 20X7, Eco-Ergonom acquired 100% of Homecare, a private
limited company manufacturing household products. Eco-Ergonom intends to develop its own
brand of environmentally friendly cleaning products. The shareholders of Homecare valued the
company at £25 million based upon profit forecasts which assumed significant growth in the
demand for the ‘Homecare’ brand name. We took a more conservative view of the value of the
company and estimated the fair value to be in the region of £21 million to £23 million, of which £4
million relates to the brand name ‘Homecare’. Eco-Ergonom is only prepared to pay the full
purchase price if profits from the sale of ‘Homecare’ goods reach the forecast levels. The agreed
purchase price was £20 million plus a further payment of £5 million in two years on 31 December
20X8. This further payment will comprise a guaranteed payment of £2 million with no
performance conditions and a further payment of £3 million if the actual profits during this two-
year period from the sale of Homecare goods exceed the forecast profit. The forecast profit on
Homecare goods over the two-year period is £3 million and the actual profits in the year to 31
December 20X7 were £0.8 million. Eco-Ergonom did not feel at any time since acquisition that the
actual profits would meet the forecast profit levels. Assume an annual discount rate of 5.5%.
Requirement
Prepare the memorandum asked for by the Finance Director.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
£
Deposit 3,000
Payment on 1.8.X7 (the delivery date) 15,000
Payment on 1.8.X9 (£12,000/1.12) 9,917
27,917
Recognition of revenue
The two performance obligations are satisfied simultaneously on 1 August 20X7, and therefore all
revenue is recognised on this date.
Journal entries are as follows:
1 May 20X7
The receipt of cash in the form of the £3,000 deposit is recognised on receipt as a contract liability
(deferred income) in the statement of financial position by:
1 August 20X7
Revenue is recognised together with payment of the first £15,000. The contract liability is transferred
to be revenue:
Note: This question is rather fiddly, so do not worry too much if you didn’t get all of it right. Read
through our solution carefully, going back to first principles where required.
To recognise the transfer of items of inventory that are not expected to be returned to become
cost of sales and that are expected to be returned to become assets (the right to recover the 3
bags).
6.2 If the selling price of the bags were reduced to £340 (40% × £850):
• The revenue and refund liability would be recorded as before.
• The retained asset would be measured at £1,020 (3 × £340), so resulting in a write down of
the carrying amount of inventory in profit or loss.
£
Revenue:
Sale of goods (W) 1,350,000
Sale of services (W) 25,000
1,375,000
WORKING
£
After-sale support (120,000/ (100% – 20%)) 150,000
Remainder = sale of goods (bal fig) 1,350,000
Total revenue 1,500,000
Revenue for sale of services recognised in the four months to 30 April 20X7 should be £150,000/2
years × 4/12 = £25,000
£
After-sales support (2 × (35,000/82.5%)) 84,848
Remainder 715,152
Total selling price 800,000
So the revenue from the sale in the current year is: 715,152
1 Webber
Revenue
£
Revenue recognised as agent (£200,000 × 15%) 30,000
Revenue recognised as principal 75,000
Total revenue 105,000
2 Alexander
At the time of supply, revenue is recognised for the cash sale price of £450,000. Interest will then be
accrued until payment is made. For the year ended 31 December 20X0 the interest charge is
£450,000 × 10% = £45,000.
3 Southwell
As there is an option to repurchase, this is a call option with a repurchase price above the original
selling price, so it is treated as a financing arrangement.
4 White Goods
The amount receivable discounted to present value = £2,400 × 1/1.09 = £2,202
This is recognised as income on 1 October 20X7. The difference between this and the sale proceeds
(2,400 – 2,202 = 198) is treated as interest and will be recognised over the 12‑month interest-free
credit period.
5 Tree
5.1 IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers states the following (IFRS 15.35):
Revenue is recognised when (or as) a performance obligation is satisfied. The entity satisfies a
performance obligation by transferring control of a promised good or service to the customer.
A performance obligation can be satisfied at a point in time, such as when goods are
delivered to the customer, or over time. An obligation satisfied over time will meet one of the
following criteria:
• The customer simultaneously receives and consumes the benefits as the performance takes
place.
• The entity’s performance creates or enhances an asset that the customer controls as the
asset is created or enhanced.
• The entity’s performance does not create an asset with an alternative use to the entity and
the entity has an enforceable right to payment for performance completed to date.
6 Taplop
(a) Applying the requirements of IFRS 15 to TrillCo’s purchasing pattern at 30 September 20X5,
Taplop should conclude that it was highly probable that a significant reversal in the cumulative
amount of revenue recognised (£500 per laptop) would not occur when the uncertainty was
resolved, that is when the total amount of purchases was known. Consequently, Taplop should
recognise revenue of 70 × £500 = £35,000 for the first quarter ended 30 September 20X5.
(b) In the quarter ended 31 December 20X5, TrillCo’s purchasing pattern changed such that it
would be legitimate for Taplop to conclude that TrillCo’s purchases would exceed the threshold
for the volume discount in the year to 30 June 20X6, and therefore that it was appropriate to
reduce the price to £450 per laptop. Taplop should therefore recognise revenue of £109,000 for
the quarter ended 31 December 20X5. The amount is calculated as from £112,500 (250 laptops
× £450) less the change in transaction price of £3,500 (70 laptops × £50 price reduction) for the
reduction of the price of the laptops sold in the quarter ended 30 September 20X5.
8 Rockwye
Matters to consider
The accounting treatment adopted by Rockwye does not appear to comply with IFRS 15 as it
appears to be a consignment arrangement in place with retailers. This means that Rockwye cannot
recognise any revenue or derecognise inventory when the watches are delivered to retailers because
9 Eco-Ergonom
Memorandum
To Deborah Carroll, Finance Director
From Financial Controller
Date 15 March 20X8
Subject Accounting treatment of non-current assets
As requested, this memorandum sets out the appropriate accounting treatment for the non-current
assets detailed in today’s email.
The three lorries that were stolen should be written off at their NBV first and then the impairment test
should be performed.
£80,000 is set against goodwill and the remaining £10,000 is split pro rata between the other two
relevant assets: £2,500 against intangibles (£10,000 × 60,000/(60,000 + 180,000)) and £7,500
against vehicles (£10,000 × 180,000/(60,000 + 180,000)). There is no need here to restrict the
impairment of the intangibles.
Note: The calculation of the impairment loss is based on the carrying amount of the business
including the trade payables. Recoverable amount is the fair value less costs to sell of the business as
a whole, with any buyer assuming the liabilities. Otherwise, the impairment test would be based on
the carrying amount of the gross assets (IAS 36.76).
Fall in value of machines
An impairment review will be carried out because of the losses and the haulage business problems.
For the productive machinery
£
Carrying amount 580,000
Fair value less costs to sell 240,000
Value in use (200,000 × 3, discounted at 10%) 497,200
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 EPS: overview of material covered in earlier studies
2 Basic EPS: weighted average number of shares
3 Basic EPS: profits attributable to ordinary equity holders
4 Diluted earnings per share
5 Diluted earnings per share: convertible instruments
6 Diluted EPS and options
7 Diluted EPS: contingently issuable shares
8 Retrospective adjustments, presentation and disclosure
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
11
Learning outcomes
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to reporting performance: in respect of
presentation of financial statements; revenue; operating segments continuing and discontinued
operations; EPS; interim reporting
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 2(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
11
on EPS?
3 Basic EPS: profits Approach This area has not yet IQ2: Redeemable
attributable to Focus on the been examined preference shares
ordinary equity redeemable versus under the current This a short,
holders irredeemable syllabus. straightforward
This section focuses distinction and question to
on the adjustments examples rather reinforce the main
to earnings arising than the increasing point in this section.
as a result of rate preference
preference shares. shares, which is less
likely to come up.
Stop and think
Why does it matter
whether the
preference shares
are redeemable or
not?
This section reviews the material on basic and diluted earnings per share covered at Professional
Level.
1.1 Scope
IAS 33, Earnings per Share applies to entities whose ordinary shares are publicly traded or are in the
process of being issued in public markets.
Redeemable No adjustment is required as these shares are classified as liabilities and the
preference shares finance charge relating to them will already have been charged to profit or
loss as part of finance charges.
Irredeemable These shares are classified as equity and the dividend relating to them is
preference shares disclosed in the statement of changes in equity. This dividend must be
deducted from profit for the year to arrive at profit attributable to the
ordinary shareholders.
• The weighted average number of shares should be adjusted for changes in the number of shares
without a corresponding change in resources, for example a bonus issue, by assuming that the
new number of shares had always been in issue.
Shares should generally be included in the weighted average number of shares from the date the
consideration for their issue is receivable.
• An entity is required to calculate and present a basic EPS amount based on the profit or loss for
the period attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the parent entity. If results from
‘continuing operations’ and ‘discontinued operations’ are reported separately, EPS on these
results should also be separately reported.
1.4 Presentation
• Basic and diluted EPS figures (and from continuing operations if reported separately) should be
presented on the face of the statement of comprehensive income with equal prominence.
• Where changes in ordinary shares occur during the accounting period, an amendment is
necessary to the number of shares used in the EPS calculations. In some situations, the EPS in
prior periods will also have to be adjusted.
This section deals with certain adjustments to the number of shares used for the calculation of basic
earnings per share.
IAS 33 requires that a time-weighted average number of shares should be used in the denominator
of the earnings per share calculation. The basic idea of how to calculate such a weighted average has
been covered at Professional Level. In this section we deal with issues relating to the treatment of
share repurchases, partly paid shares, bonus and rights issues and the impact of consolidation.
Requirement
Calculate the weighted average number of shares in issue during the year.
Solution
The calculation can be performed on a cumulative basis:
Weighted average
1 Jan X1 – 30 May X1 1,700 × 5/12 708
Share issue 800
31 May X1 – 30 Nov X1 2,500 × 6/12 1,250
Share purchase (250)
1 Dec X1 – 31 Dec X1 2,250 × 1/12 188
2,146
Weighted average
1 Jan X1 – 31 Dec X1 1,700 12/12 1,700
31 May X1 – 31 Dec X1 800 7/12 467
1 Dec X1 – 31 Dec X1 (250) 1/12 (21)
2,146
Solution
The new shares issued should be included in the calculation of the weighted average number of
shares in proportion to the percentage of the issue price received from the shareholding during the
period.
Weighted
Shares Fraction of average
issued period shares
1 January 20X5 – 31 August 20X5 900 8/12 600
Issue of new shares for cash, part paid (2/4 × 600) 300
1 September 20X5 – 31 December 20X5 1,200 4/12 400
Weighted average number of shares 1,000
2.4 The impact of bonus issues and share consolidations on the number of shares
The weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the period must be adjusted
for events that have changed the number of ordinary shares outstanding without a corresponding
change in resources. These include the following:
• Bonus issues (capitalisation issues)
• Share consolidation
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for y/e 30 September 20X6 £300
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders for y/e 30 September 20X7 £900
Ordinary shares outstanding until 30 September 20X7 200
Bonus issue 1 October 20X7 – two ordinary shares for each ordinary share
outstanding at 30 September 20X7
Requirement
Calculate the basic earnings per share for 20X6 and 20X7.
Solution
The bonus issue arose in the period after the reporting date. It should be treated as if the bonus issue
arose during 20X7, and EPS calculated accordingly:
Additional shares issued 200 × 2 = 400
Basic EPS 20X7
£900 ÷ (200 + 400) = £1.50
Basic EPS 20X6
£300 ÷ (200 + 400) = £0.50
Solution
The three million new shares issued at the time of the acquisition should be weighted from the date
of issue, but the consolidation should be related back to the start of the financial year (and to the
start of any previous years presented as comparative figures).
The calculation of the weighted number of shares in issue is as follows:
Solution
Basic EPS
(1) Share repurchase at fair value
20X7 20X6
£ £
Profit for the year 4,000 4,000
Loss of interest as cash
paid out £4,000 × 0.05 × 0.80* (160) –
Earnings 3,840 4,000
Number of shares outstanding 18,000 20,000
Earnings per share 21.33p 20.00p
20X7 20X6
£ £
Profit for the year 4,000 4,000
Loss of interest on cash paid out as dividend
£4,000 × 0.05 × 0.80* (160) –
Earnings 3,840 4,000
20X7 20X6
Number of shares 18,000 20,000
Earnings per share 21.33p 20.00p
Alternatively the restated EPS may be calculated by applying the reciprocal of the adjustment factor
to the basic EPS as originally reported:
20X5
Weighted average number of shares:
Basic EPS including effects of rights issue: £1,500 ÷ 592 shares = £2.53
20X6
Basic EPS: £1,800 ÷ 600 shares = £3.00
20X5 EPS:
£17m/18,794,453 shares = £0.90
20X4 restatement – original EPS: £14m ÷ 14m shares = £1.00
£1.00 × 19.29/20.00 = £0.96
In this section we discuss the adjustments that are required to earnings as a result of preference
shares, in order to calculate profits attributable to ordinary shareholders (equity holders).
As we have seen in earlier studies, for the purpose of calculating basic earnings per share, we must
calculate the amounts attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent entity in respect of profit
or loss.
£
Profit before tax 500,000
Tax 150,000
Profit after tax 350,000
The company paid an ordinary dividend of £20,000 and a dividend on its redeemable preference
shares of £70,000.
The company had £100,000 of £0.50 ordinary shares in issue throughout the year and authorised
share capital of 1,000,000 ordinary shares.
Requirement
What is the basic earnings per share figure for the year according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
Solution
Because the shares are classified as equity, the original issue discount is amortised to retained
earnings using the effective interest method and treated as a preference dividend for earnings per
share purposes. To calculate basic earnings per share, the following imputed dividend per class A
preference share is deducted to determine the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of
the parent entity.
Solution
The excess of the fair value of additional ordinary shares issued on conversion of the convertible
preference shares over fair values of the ordinary shares to which they would have been entitled
under the original conversion terms is deducted from profit as it is an additional return to the
convertible preference shareholders.
£
Profits attributable to the ordinary equity holders 150,000
Fair value of additional ordinary shares
issued on conversion of convertible preference shares (300)
149,700
There is no adjustment in respect of the preference shares as no dividend accrual was made in
respect of the year. The payment of the previous year’s cumulative dividend is ignored for EPS
purposes as it will have been adjusted for in the prior year.
£
Profit for the year attributed to ordinary equity holders 150,000
Plus discount on repurchasing of preference shares 1,000
151,000
The discount on repurchase of the preference shares has been credited to equity and it must
therefore be adjusted against profit.
Had there been a premium payable on repurchase, the loss on repurchase would have been
subtracted from profit.
No accrual for the dividend on the 8% preference shares is required as these are non-cumulative.
Had a dividend been paid for the year it would have been deducted from profit for the purpose of
calculating basic EPS as the shares are treated as equity and the dividend would have been charged
to equity in the financial statements.
After ordinary shares have been paid at a dividend of £2.10 per share, the preference shares
participate in any additional dividends on a 20:80 ratio with ordinary shares.
Dividends on preference shares paid – £33,000 (£5.50 per share × 6,000 shares)
Solution
Basic earnings per share is calculated as follows
£ £
Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent entity 100,000
Less dividends paid:
Preference 33,000
Ordinary 21,000
(54,000)
Undistributed earnings 46,000
As we have seen, although the basic EPS calculation is straightforward, a great deal of information
needs to be assimilated and understood, both regarding earnings (adjustments for preference
shares) and weighted average number of shares (changes in share capital). The two interact.
This section deals with the adjustments required to earnings in order to take into account the dilutive
impact of potential ordinary shares.
The objective of diluted earnings per share is consistent with that of basic earnings per share; that is,
to provide a measure of the interest of each ordinary share in the performance of an entity taking
into account dilutive potential ordinary shares outstanding during the period.
Definition
Antidilution: An increase in earnings per share or a reduction in loss per share resulting from the
assumption that convertible instruments are converted, that options or warrants are exercised, or that
ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
In computing diluted EPS only potential ordinary shares that are dilutive are considered in the
calculations. The calculation ignores the effects of potential ordinary shares that would have an
antidilutive effect on earnings per share.
Determining whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or antidilutive
In determining whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or antidilutive, each issue or series of
potential ordinary shares is considered separately rather than in aggregate.
• Dilutive potential ordinary shares shall be deemed to have been converted into ordinary shares at
the beginning of the period or, if later, the date of the issue of the potential ordinary shares (ie,
where the convertible instruments or options are issued during the current period).
• Potential ordinary shares are weighted for the period they are outstanding.
• Potential ordinary shares that are cancelled or allowed to lapse during the period are included in
the calculation of diluted earnings per share only for the portion of the period during which they
are outstanding.
• Potential ordinary shares that are converted into ordinary shares during the period are included in
the calculation of diluted earnings per share from the beginning of the period to the date of
conversion. From the date of conversion, the resulting ordinary shares are included in both basic
and diluted earnings per share.
• The number of ordinary shares that would be issued on conversion of dilutive potential ordinary
shares is determined from the terms of the potential ordinary shares. When more than one basis
of conversion exists, the calculation assumes the most advantageous conversion rate or exercise
price from the standpoint of the holder of the potential ordinary shares.
This section deals with the impact of convertible instruments on the diluted earnings per share.
Solution
Basic EPS
£15m/24m shares = £0.63
Diluted EPS
To calculate the diluted earnings per share we need to consider the impact on both earnings and
number of shares.
The approach to calculating diluted EPS requires skills at structuring the problem. First basic EPS
needs to be calculated. Then the profit or loss attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent
entity needs to be adjusted for dividends, interest or relating to the dilutive potential of any other
changes in income or expense that would result from the conversion of the dilutive potential
ordinary shares. Then the basic EPS denominator needs to be adjusted for the weighted average
number of ordinary shares that would be issued on the conversion of all the dilutive potential
ordinary shares into ordinary shares.
Solution
The incremental earnings per share for each type of potential ordinary shares is shown below.
The earnings per share can be calculated adjusting both the earnings and the number of shares for
each type of potential shares, and the results are shown below. Each issue of potential ordinary
shares is added to the calculation at a time, taking the most dilutive factor first.
The diluted earnings per share will be £0.185. The 9% convertible loan stock is antidilutive since it
increases earnings per share, and it will not be taken into account in calculating diluted earnings per
share.
This section deals with the impact of options on diluted earnings per share.
Definition
Options and warrants: Financial instruments that give the holder the right to purchase ordinary
shares.
Solution
The amount to be received on exercise is £21 × 5m = £105m
The number of shares issued at average market price is: £105m / £30 = 3.5m
The number of ‘free’ shares is: 5 million issued – 3.5 million issued at average market price = 1.5
million
Diluted earnings per share:
£30m/(60m + 1.5m) = £0.49
Where shares are unvested, the amount still to be recognised in profit or loss before the vesting date
must be taken into account when calculating the number of ‘free’ shares.
Solution
The amount to be recognised in profit or loss is reduced to a per share amount: £15m/5m = £3
This is added to the exercise price: £21 + £3 = £24
The amount to be received on exercise: £24 × 5m = £120m
The number of shares issued at average market price: £120m/£30 = 4m
The number of ‘free’ shares: 5m – 4m = 1m
Diluted earnings per share: £30m/(60m + 1m) = £0.49
This section deals with the impact of contingently issuable shares on the number of ordinary shares
used in the calculation of diluted earnings per share.
Solution
As the two million additional shares do not result in additional resources for the entity, they are
brought into the diluted earnings per share calculation from the start of the 20X5 reporting period.
The diluted earnings per share is therefore:
Diluted earnings per share = £20m/(16m + 2m) = £1.11
Requirement
What are basic and diluted EPS in each of the years 20X7–20X9?
Solution
The cumulative target of 3 years × 100,000 units is not met in 20X7 and 20X8, therefore no dilution is
accounted for.
In 20X9, the cumulative target is met as is the average target, therefore a diluted EPS is disclosed:
Solution
Basic earnings per share
The 24 million additional shares are weighted by the period they have been in issue:
This section deals with retrospective adjustments to EPS and the provisions of IAS 33 concerning
presentation and disclosure.
8.2 Presentation
• Please note the following key points regarding presentation.
• Basic and diluted EPS for the year (and from continuing operations if reported separately) must
be presented on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income with
equal prominence for all periods presented.
• Where a separate statement of profit or loss is presented, basic and diluted EPS should be
presented on the face of this statement.
• Earnings per share is presented for every period for which a statement of comprehensive income
is presented.
• If diluted earnings per share is reported for at least one period, it shall be reported for all periods
presented, even if it equals basic earnings per share.
• If basic and diluted earnings per share are equal, dual presentation can be accomplished in one
line on the statement of comprehensive income.
• An entity that reports a discontinued operation shall disclose the basic and diluted amounts per
share for the discontinued operation either on the face of the statement of comprehensive
income or in the notes.
• An entity shall present basic and diluted earnings per share, even if the amounts are negative (ie,
a loss per share).
Judgement is needed as to whether the additional EPS potentially undermines the EPS as calculated
in accordance with IAS 33. Although it is required by the standard to have equal prominence, the
preparer of the financial statements needs to weigh up whether it is really necessary.
Although not required under IFRS, adjusted earnings per share is presented to help understand the
underlying performance of the Group. The adjustments in 2006 and 2005 are items that
management believe do not reflect the underlying business performance. The adjustment in respect
of profit on sale of property relates only to the profit on sale of properties that are subject to sale and
leaseback arrangements (Note 12). The adjustments listed above are shown net of taxation.
While earnings per share is a useful tool, users should be wary of relying solely on this figure. In
particular, the context of the size of the entity, and the nature of its businesses should be taken into
account.
1. Can you calculate the weighted average number of shares for basic and diluted EPS?
(Topic 2)
4. Can you calculate EPS in the context of convertible shares and options? (Topic 7)
5. Can you calculate EPS in the context of contingently issuable shares? (Topic 7)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Puffbird A straightforward EPS question with a bonus issue and adjustment of the
prior year figure, this is a good one to start on.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter.
In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to attempt. Earnings
per share calculations often come at the end of scenario questions requiring adjustments to financial
statements for financial reporting issues covered in later chapters.
2 Shares
• For the calculation of basic EPS the number of ordinary shares should be the weighted average
number of shares outstanding during the period adjusted where appropriate for events, other
than the conversion of shares, that have changed the number of ordinary shares outstanding
without a corresponding change in resources. – IAS 33.26
8 Retrospective adjustments
• Basic and diluted EPS should be adjusted retrospectively for all capitalisations, bonus issues or
share splits or reverse share splits that affect the number of shares in issue without affecting
resources. – IAS 33.64
1 Puffbird
Puffbird is a company listed on a recognised stock exchange. Its financial statements for the year
ended 31 December 20X6 showed earnings per share of £0.95.
On 1 July 20X7 Puffbird made a 3 for 1 bonus issue.
Requirement
According to IAS 33, Earnings per Share, what figure for the 20X6 earnings per share will be shown
as comparative information in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
2 Urtica
The Urtica Company is listed on a recognised stock exchange.
During the year ended 31 December 20X6, the company had 5 million ordinary shares of £1 and
500,000 6% irredeemable preference shares of £1 in issue.
Profit before tax for the year was £300,000 and the tax charge was £75,000
Requirement
According to IAS 33, Earnings per Share, what is Urtica’s basic earnings per share for the year?
3 Issky
The following extracts relate to the Issky Company for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
£’000
Statement of comprehensive income
Profit after tax 5,400
In addition, the company had in issue throughout the year 1,800,000 share options granted to
directors at an exercise price of £15. These were fully vested (ie, conditions required before these
could be exercised were fulfilled and the options were exercisable) but had not yet been exercised.
The market price for Issky’s shares was £24 at 1 January 20X7, £30 at 31 December 20X7, and the
average for 20X7 was £27.
Requirement
What is the diluted earnings per share for 20X7 according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
4 Whiting
The Whiting Company has the following financial statement extracts in the year ended 31 December
20X7.
£
Profit after tax
Continuing operations 1,600,000
Discontinued operations (400,000)
Total attributable to ordinary equity holders 1,200,000
£
Equity component 100,000
Liability component 1,100,000
1,200,000
The effective interest rate on the liability component is 10%. The bonds are convertible on specified
dates in the future at the rate of one ordinary share for every £2 bond.
The tax regime under which Whiting operates gives relief for the whole of the charge based on the
effective interest rate and applies a tax rate of 20%.
Requirement
Based upon the profit from continuing operations attributable to ordinary equity holders, what
amount, if any, for diluted earnings per share should be presented by Whiting in its financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
5 Garfish
The Garfish Company had profits after tax of £3.0 million in the year ended 31 December 20X7.
On 1 January 20X7, Garfish had 2.4 million ordinary shares in issue. On 1 April 20X7 Garfish made a
1 for 2 rights issue at a price of £1.40 when the market price of Garfish’s shares was £2.00.
Requirement
What is Garfish’s basic earnings per share figure for the year ended 31 December 20X7, according to
IAS 33, Earnings per Share?
6 Sakho
The Sakho Company has 850,000 ordinary shares in issue on 1 January 20X7 and had the following
share transactions in the year ended 31 December 20X7.
(1) A 1 for 5 bonus issue on 1 May 20X7
(2) A 2 for 5 rights issue on 1 September 20X7 at £0.45 when the market price was £1.50
Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false according to IAS 33, Earnings per Share.
(1) The basic earnings per share for the year ended 31 December 20X6 has to be adjusted by a
fraction of 5/6.
(2) For the calculation of 20X7 basic earnings per share, the number of shares in issue before the
rights issue has to be adjusted by a rights fraction of 1.50/1.20.
8 Citric
The following information relates to The Citric Company for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
Statement of comprehensive income
Profit after tax – £100,000
Statement of financial position
Ordinary shares of £1 – 1,000,000
There are warrants outstanding in respect of 1.7 million new shares in Citric at a subscription price of
£18.00. Citric’s share price was £22.00 on 1 January 20X7, £24.00 on 30 June 20X7, £30.00 on 31
December 20X7 and averaged £25.00 over the year.
On 1 January 20X7 Citric issued £2 million of 6% redeemable convertible bonds, interest being
payable annually in arrears on 31 December. The split accounting required of compound financial
instruments resulted in a liability component of £1.75 million and effective interest rate of 7%. The
bonds are convertible on specified dates many years into the future at the rate of two ordinary shares
for every £5 bonds.
The tax regime under which Citric operates gives relief for the whole of the effective interest rate
charge on the bonds and applies a tax rate of 25%.
Requirement
Determine the following amounts in respect of Citric’s diluted earnings per share for the year ending
31 December 20X7 according to IAS 33, Earnings Per Share:
(1) The number of shares to be treated as issued for no consideration (ie, ‘free’ shares) on the
subscription of the warrants
(2) The earnings per incremental share on conversion of the bonds, expressed in pence (to one
decimal place)
(3) The diluted earnings per share, expressed in pence (to one decimal place)
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
20X6
£
Trading results
Profit before interest and tax 1,050,000
Interest on 7% convertible loan stock (105,000)
Profit before tax 945,000
Taxation (283,500)
Profit after tax 661,500
Number of shares outstanding 2,000,000
Basic EPS (£661,500/2,000,000 shares) £0.33
20X7
£
Trading results
Profit after tax 900,000.00
Number of shares outstanding 3,000,000.00
Basic EPS 0.30
Number of shares under option
Issued at full market price (600,000 × 50p)/£1.50 200,000.00
1 Puffbird
23.75 pence
Last year’s EPS figure is adjusted by the reciprocal of the bonus fraction:
Bonus fraction = Number of shares post issue ÷ Number of shares pre issue = 4 ÷ 1
Therefore revised EPS = 95p × ¼ = 23.75p
2 Urtica
3.9 pence
IAS 33 12–13 define earnings for basic EPS as after tax and after dividends on irredeemable
preference shares.
£
Profit before tax 300,000
Tax (75,000)
Profit after tax 225,000
Preference dividend (£500,000 × 6%) (30,000)
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders 195,000
3 Issky
58.7 pence
According to IAS 33.46, the proceeds of the options should be calculated using the average market
price during the year. The difference between the number of ordinary shares issued and the number
that would have been issued at the average market price are the ‘free’ shares that create the dilutive
effect.
4 Whiting
12.6 pence
The shares issuable on conversion of the bonds are potentially dilutive, but IAS 33.41 only requires
them to be taken into account if they dilute the basic EPS figure based on continuing operations.
5 Garfish
89.1 pence
Weighted average number of shares:
Basic EPS:
£3,000,000 ÷ 3,366,667 shares = 89.1p
6 Sakho
Statements
(1) False
(2) True
Bonus fraction = Number of shares post issue ÷ Number of shares pre issue = 6 ÷ 5
Rights adjustment factor = MV of share ÷ TERP = 1.50 ÷ 1.20
The basic EPS for the prior year is multiplied by the inverse of the rights factor and the bonus factor,
so 1.20/1.50 × 5/6 = 2/3.
7 Sardine
35.9 pence
Issue price of preference shares = £300,000/1.082 = £257,202
Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders = £200,000 – (8% × £257,202) = £179,424
8 Citric
Diluted EPS
(1) 476,000
(2) 11.5 pence
(3) 6.78 pence
Explanation
(1) Shares issued at average market price (1,700,000 × £18)/£25 – 1,224,000
Shares issued at nil consideration (1,700,000 – 1,224,000) – 476,000
(2) Incremental profits (£1,750,000 × 7% × (1 – 25%)) – £91,875
Increase in number of shares (£2,000,000/£5 × 2) – 800,000
Therefore incremental EPS (£91,875/800,000 shares) – 11.5p
(3)
The warrants (treated as issued for nil consideration) are more dilutive than the bonds, so are dealt
with first under IAS 33.44. As the 11.5 pence earnings per incremental share on conversion of the
bonds is antidilutive, under IAS 33.36 the conversion is left out of the calculation of diluted EPS.
Reporting of assets
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Review of material from earlier studies
2 IAS 40, Investment Property
3 IAS 41, Agriculture
4 IFRS 6, Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources
5 IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts
6 Audit focus points
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
12
Learning outcomes
• Explain how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities can affect
reported financial position and explain the role of data analytics in financial asset and liability
valuation
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to assets and non-financial liabilities for
example: property, plant and equipment; intangible assets, held-for-sale assets; inventories;
investment properties; provisions and contingencies
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 3(a), 3(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
12
capitalised or not,
the value attributed
to it and how it is
depreciated or not
has a significant
impact on the
financial statements.
3 IAS 41, Agriculture Approach This topic has yet to IQ13: Costs to sell
Working in the This standard is set be examined. This is a quick, test-
context of the at level A, so this your-knowledge
agricultural sector section should be question.
or of extractive studied carefully,
industries you will even though the
need to make topic has not yet
judgements on the been examined. Do
valuation of both interactive
biological questions.
assets/the
appropriate Stop and think
capitalisation of What are bearer
expenditure. biological assets?
Since the use of a
historic cost model
was not seen as
wholly appropriate
for accounting for
agricultural activity
IAS 41, Agriculture
is based on a fair
value model.
6 Audit focus points Approach You are very likely to IQ14: Investment
This section focuses Read and learn the get investment property and fair
on the audit of table in Section 6.2, property as part of value
investment which gives an an integrated A typical scenario as
properties, as the approach to financial reporting part of Question 3,
other key topics auditing and auditing covering both audit
were covered at classification, question. issues and audit
Professional Level. valuation and procedures in
disclosure. relation to IAS 40
Stop and think and IFRS 13.
Why might
investment property
be more risky than
owner-occupied
property?
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
You should already be familiar with the standards relating to current and non-current assets from
earlier studies. If not, go back to your earlier study material.
• IAS 2, Inventories
• IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment
• IAS 38, Intangible Assets
• IAS 36, Impairment of Assets
Read the summary of knowledge brought forward and try the relevant questions. If you have any
difficulty, go back to your earlier study material and revise it.
Assets have been defined in many different ways and for many purposes. The definition of an asset is
important because it directly affects the treatment of such items. A good definition will prevent
abuse or error in the accounting treatment: otherwise some assets might be treated as expenses,
and some expenses might be treated as assets.
In the current accounting climate, where complex transactions are carried out daily a definition that
covers ownership and value is not sufficient, leaving key questions unanswered.
• What determines ownership?
• What determines value?
The definition of an asset in the IASB’s Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting from earlier
studies is given below.
Definition
Asset: A present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events. An economic
resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits. (Conceptual Framework, para.
4.2)
This definition ties in closely with the definitions produced by other standard-setters, particularly the
FASB (USA) and the ASB (UK).
A general consensus seems to exist in the standard setting bodies as to the definition of an asset
which encompasses three important characteristics.
• Future economic benefit
• Control
• The transaction to acquire control has already taken place
The above flowchart is an example of how to structure a problem, in this case PPE revaluations. It
should form part of your revision.
Recoverable An asset’s recoverable amount is the higher of value in use (net cash flows)
amount and fair value less costs of disposal.
Impairment losses occur where the carrying amount of an asset is above its
recoverable amount.
Cash-generating Where cash flows cannot be measured separately, the recoverable amount
units is calculated by reference to the CGU.
Recognition of Impairment losses are charged first to other comprehensive income (re any
impairment losses revaluation surplus relating to the asset) and then to profit or loss.
In the case of a CGU, the credit is allocated first against any goodwill and
then pro-rata over the other assets of the CGU.
After the After the impairment review, depreciation/amortisation is allocated over the
impairment review asset’s revised remaining useful life.
Year 1 2 3 4 5
If the plant was sold now it would realise £550,000, net of selling costs.
The entity estimates the pre-tax discount rate specific to the plant to be 15%, after taking into
account the effects of general price inflation.
Requirement
Calculate the recoverable amount of the plant and any impairment loss.
Note: PV factors at 15% are as follows.
Judgement must be applied in considering whether an item is a cash-generating unit. Both in the
exam, and in real life, it may not be obvious.
Purchase consideration X
Non-controlling interest X
X
Total fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill X
• An investment property is land or buildings or both that is held by an entity to earn rentals and/or
for its capital appreciation potential.
• Following initial measurement, investment property may be measured using the cost model or the
fair value model.
One of the distinguishing characteristics of investment property is that it generates cash flows largely
independent of the other assets held by an entity.
Owner-occupied property is not investment property and is accounted for under IAS 16, Property,
Plant and Equipment.
2.1 Recognition
Investment property should be recognised as an asset when two conditions are met.
• It is probable that the future economic benefits that are associated with the investment property
will flow to the entity.
• The cost of the investment property can be measured reliably.
Entity occupies part of If the two portions can be sold separately or leased separately,
property and leases out each is accounted for as appropriate. If not, entire property is an
balance investment property only if insignificant portion is owner
occupied.
Entity supplies services to the An investment property only if the services are insignificant to
lessee of the property the arrangement as a whole.
Property leased to and An investment property in entity’s own accounts but owner
occupied by parent, subsidiary occupied from group perspective.
or other group company
(1) An entity has a factory that has been shut down due to chemical contamination, worker unrest
and strike. The entity plans to sell this factory.
(2) An entity has purchased a building that it intends to lease out under an operating lease.
(3) An entity has acquired a large-scale office building, with the intention of enjoying its capital
appreciation. Rather than holding it empty, the entity has decided to try to recover its running
costs by renting the space out for periods which run from one week to one year. To make the
building attractive to potential customers, the entity has fitted the space out as small office units,
complete with full-scale telecommunications facilities, and offers reception, cleaning, a loud
speaker system and secretarial services. The expenditure incurred in fitting out the offices has
been a substantial proportion of the value of the building.
(4) An entity acquired a site on 30 April 20X4 with the intention of building office blocks to let. After
receiving planning permission, construction started on 1 September 20X4 and was completed at
a cost of £10 million on 30 March 20X5 at which point the building was ready for occupation.
The building remained vacant for several months and the entity incurred significant operating losses
during this period.
The first leases were signed in July 20X5 and the building was not fully let until 1 September 20X6.
Requirement
Do the buildings referred to in (1)–(4) above meet the definition of investment property?
2.4 Derecognition
When an investment property is derecognised, a gain or loss on disposal should be recognised in
profit or loss. The gain or loss should normally be determined as the difference between the net
disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset.
End of owner occupation with • Transfer to investment properties under IAS 40.
view to let to third parties • If fair value model to be used, revalue at date of change and
recognise difference as revaluation under IAS 16.
Property held as inventory now • Transfer to investment properties under IAS 40.
let to a third party • If fair value model to be used, revalue at date of change and
recognise difference in profit or loss.
When considering a change of use, it is important to understand all the required evidence about its
current use and its future use, including the model that is to be used. The current use affects the
future accounting treatment.
IAS 41 sets out the accounting treatment, including presentation and disclosure requirements, for
agricultural activity.
3.1 Definitions
Definitions
Agricultural activity: Defined as the management of the biological transformation of biological
assets for sale, into agricultural produce, or into additional biological assets.
Agricultural activities include, for example, raising livestock, forestry and cultivating orchards and
plantations.
In its simplest form a biological transformation is the process of growing something such as a crop,
although it also incorporates the production of agricultural produce such as wool and milk.
Biological transformation: Comprises the processes of growth, degeneration, production and
procreation that cause qualitative or quantitative changes in a biological asset.
Biological asset: A living plant or animal.
Agricultural produce: The harvested produce of an entity’s biological assets.
IAS 41 considers the classification of biological assets and how their characteristics, and hence value,
change over time. The standard applies to agricultural produce up to the point of harvest, after which
IAS 2, Inventories is applicable. A distinction is made between the two because IAS 41 applies to
biological assets throughout their lives but to agricultural produce only at the point of harvest.
IAS 41 includes a table of examples which clearly sets out three distinct stages involved in the
production of biological assets. For example, we can identify dairy cattle as the biological asset, milk
as the agricultural produce and cheese as the product that is processed after the point of harvest.
Calves and cows are biological assets as they are living animals whereas beef and milk are
agricultural produce.
Agricultural activities may be quite diverse, but all such activities have similar characteristics as
described below.
Common characteristics of agricultural activities
• Capacity to change – living animals and plants are capable of changing. For example, a sapling
grows into a fruit tree which will bear fruit and a sheep can give birth to a lamb;
• Management of change – the biological transformation relies on some form of management
input, ensuring, for example, the right nutrient levels for plants, providing the right amount of
light or assisting fertilisation; and
• Measurement of change – the changes as a result of the biological transformation are measured
and monitored. Measurement is in relation to both quality and quantity.
Solution
The fair value less costs to sell is calculated as:
£
Market value 60.00
Transport to market costs (1.00)
Requirement
Show the reconciliation of the changes in fair value.
Solution
The movement in the fair value less estimated costs to sell of the herd can be reconciled as follows.
£
At 1 January 20X3 (5 × £200) 1,000
Purchased 212
Change in fair value (the balancing figure) 168
At 31 December 20X3 (6 × £230) 1,380
IFRS 6, Exploration for and Evaluation of Mineral Resources has been effective since 2006 and
essentially deals with two matters.
• Allows entities to use existing accounting policies for exploration and evaluation assets.
• Requires entities to assess exploration and evaluation assets for impairment. The recognition
criteria for impairment are different from IAS 36 but, once impairment is recognised, the
measurement criteria are the same as for IAS 36.
4.1 Scope
The standard deals with the accounting of expenditures on the exploration for and evaluation of
mineral resources (that is, minerals such as gold, copper, etc, oil, natural gas and similar resources),
except:
• expenditures incurred before the acquisition of legal rights to explore; and
• expenditures incurred following the assessment of technical and commercial feasibility.
IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors still applies to such industries
in helping them determine appropriate accounting policies. Thus, accounting policies must present
information that is relevant to the economic decision needs of users. Entities may change their
policies under IFRS 6 as long as the new information comes closer to meeting the IAS 8 criterion.
IFRS 4 represents interim guidance, as the first phase of a bigger project on insurance contracts. The
objective of IFRS 4 is to make limited improvements to accounting practices for insurance contracts
and to require an issuer of insurance contracts to disclose information that identifies and explains
amounts arising from such contracts.
5.1 Background
IFRS 4 specifies the financial reporting for insurance contracts by any entity that issues such contracts,
or holds reinsurance contracts. It does not apply to other assets and liabilities held by insurers.
In the past there was a wide range of accounting practices used for insurance contracts and the
practices adopted often differ from those used in other sectors. As a result the IASB embarked on a
substantial project to address the issues surrounding the accounting for insurance contracts. Rather
than issuing one standard that covered all areas, the IASB decided to tackle the project in two
phases.
Interim guidance has been issued in phase one of the project in the form of IFRS 4; it is a stepping
stone to the second phase of the project. IFRS 4 largely focuses on improving the disclosure
requirements in relation to insurance contracts; however, it also includes a number of limited
improvements to existing accounting requirements.
Although IFRS 4 sets out a number of accounting principles as essentially best practice, it does not
require an entity to use these if it currently adopts different accounting practices. An insurance entity
is however prohibited from changing its current accounting policies to a number of specifically
identified practices.
Definition
Insurance contract: A contract between two parties, where one party, the insurer, agrees to
compensate the other party, the policyholder, if it is adversely affected by an uncertain future event.
An uncertain future event exists where at least one of the following is uncertain at the inception of an
insurance contract:
• the occurrence of an insured event;
• the timing of the event; or
• the level of compensation that will be paid by the insurer if the event occurs (IFRS 4 Appendix B).
Some insurance contracts may offer payments-in-kind rather than compensation payable to the
policyholder directly. For example, an insurance repair contract may pay for a washing machine to be
repaired if it breaks down; the contract will not necessarily pay monetary compensation.
In identifying an insurance contract it is important to make the distinction between financial risk and
insurance risk. A contract that exposes the issuer to financial risk without significant insurance risk
does not meet the definition of an insurance contract.
Financial risk is where there is a possible change in a financial or non-financial variable, for example a
specified interest rate, commodity prices, an entity’s credit rating or foreign exchange rates.
Definition
Insurance risk: A risk that is not a financial risk. The risk in an insurance contract is whether an event
will occur (rather than arising from a change in something), for example a theft, damage against
property, or product or professional liability.
5.4 Disclosures
IFRS 4 sets out an overriding requirement that the information to be disclosed in the financial
statements of an insurer “helps users understand the amounts in the insurer’s financial statements
that arise from insurance contracts” (IFRS 4: para 4.36).
This information should include the accounting policies adopted and the identification of recognised
assets, liabilities, income and expense arising from insurance contracts.
More generally, the risk management objectives and policies of an entity should be disclosed, since
this will explain how an insurer deals with the uncertainty it is exposed to.
An entity is not generally required to comply with the disclosure requirements in IFRS 4 for
comparative information that relates to annual periods beginning before 1 January 2005. However,
comparative disclosure is required in relation to accounting policies adopted and the identification
of recognised assets, liabilities, income and expense arising from insurance contracts.
Tutorial note
IFRS 4 is still the examinable standard, so an overview of the main features of IFRS 17 is required,
bearing in mind that companies may early adopt.
IFRS 17 was published in 2017 and introduces a comprehensive financial reporting framework for
insurance contracts which aims to achieve greater comparability and consistency in financial
reporting by insurers.
5.5.2 Scope
The scope of IFRS 17 is similar to IFRS 4 and encompasses insurance contracts issued, reinsurance
contracts both issued and held and investment contracts with discretionary participation features if
issued by insurers.
Definition
Investment property: Property (land or a building – or part of a building – or both) held (by the owner
or by the entity as a right-of-use asset) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather than
for:
• use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
• sale in the ordinary course of business.
Issue Evidence
Classification as an Confirm that all investment properties are classified in accordance with
investment property the IAS 40 definition. This will include:
• a building owned by the entity and leased out under one or more
operating leases; and
Note: IAS 40 states that fair value should be measured in accordance with IFRS 13.
Property B This is held as a right-of-use asset and is currently rented out to a non-group
company under an operating lease.
Property C This was acquired in the year at a cost of £3 million including legal fees. It is
currently vacant but a tenant is being actively sought.
Property D This has been owned by Propertyco for a number of years and is currently rented
out to a non-group company.
Investment property can be risky and subject to judgement on the part of valuers. Effective
communication on the part of the auditors is therefore particularly important. The above case study
shows the auditors acting with professional scepticism while maintaining sufficient trust to elicit the
necessary information.
1. Can you list the key points in IAS 36, Impairment of Assets? (Topic 1)
2. How should change in use be dealt with under IAS 40? (Topic 2)
4. How should exploration and evaluation assets be measured under IFRS 5? (Topic 4)
5. What should be the auditor’s main focus when auditing investment properties? (Topic 6)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Reapehu You should have no trouble with this quick revision of inventory from your
earlier studies.
Oruatua This is on PPE, and is rather more complex than you will have met in your
earlier studies.
Acetone This tests impairment of goodwill, including ‘notional’ goodwill, which you
may have found tricky in your Professional Level studies.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter. In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to
attempt.
3 IAS 2, Inventories
• Measurement and disclosure but not recognition – IAS 2.1
• Measured at lower of cost and net realisable value – IAS 2.9
• Cost = expenditure incurred, in bringing the items to their present location and condition, so the
cost of purchase and the cost of conversion – IAS 2.10
– Fixed costs includes by reference to normal levels of activity – IAS 2.13
• Cost formula: FIFO or Weighted average – IAS 2.25
• NRV includes costs to complete and selling costs – IAS 2.6
• Disclosures include accounting policies, carrying amounts and amounts recognised as an
expense – IAS 2.36-38
2 Reapehu
The Reapehu Company manufactures a single type of concrete mixing machine, which it sells to
building companies. Reapehu is currently considering the value of its inventories at 31 December
20X7. The following data are relevant at this date:
3 Utah
The Utah Company manufactures motors for domestic refrigerators. A major customer is The
Bushbaby Company, which is a major international electrical company making refrigerators as one of
its products.
Utah is currently preparing its financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7 and it expects
to authorise them for issue on 3 March 20X8.
Utah holds significant inventories of motors (which are unique to the Bushbaby contract) as
Bushbaby requires them to be supplied on a just-in-time basis and has variable production
schedules.
On 3 January 20X8, Bushbaby announced that it was fundamentally changing the design of its
refrigerators and that, while this had been planned for some time, it had not been possible to warn
Utah for reasons of commercial confidentiality. As a consequence, it would cease to use Utah’s
motors from 30 April 20X8 and would reduce production before that date. Details for Utah are as
follows:
4 Niobium
The Niobium Company operates in the petrol refining industry. A fire at a competitor using similar
plant has revealed a safety problem and the Government has introduced new regulations requiring
the installation of new safety equipment in the industry. The refinery had a carrying amount of £30
million before the installation of the safety equipment. The new safety equipment cost £5 million and
was fully operational at 31 December 20X7, but it does not generate any future economic benefits.
The refinery would, however, be closed down without such equipment being installed.
At 31 December 20X7 the net selling price of the refinery was estimated at £33 million. In
determining its value in use, the directors have determined that the refinery would generate annual
cash flows of £3.2 million from next year in perpetuity, to be discounted at 10% per annum.
Requirement
According to IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, what is the carrying amount of the refinery in
Niobium’s statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7?
5 Oruatua
The Oruatua Company acquired a piece of machinery for £800,000 on 1 January 20X6. It identified
that the asset had three major components as follows:
Under the terms of the 15-year licence agreement for the use of the machinery, the engines (but not
the other components) were to be dismantled at the end of the licence period. The machinery
contained three engines, and dismantling costs for all three engines were initially estimated at a total
cost of £480,000 (ie, £160,000 per engine) payable in 15 years’ time. Oruatua’s discount rate
appropriate to the risk specific to this liability is 7% per annum.
One of the three engines developed a fault on 1 January 20X7 and had to be sold for scrap for
£40,000. A replacement engine was purchased at a cost of £168,000 on 1 January 20X7, for use until
the end of the licence period, when dismantling costs on this engine estimated at £150,000 would
be payable.
At a rate of 7% per annum the present value of £1 payable in 15 years’ time is 0.3624 and of £1
payable in 14 years’ time is 0.3878.
Requirements
Calculate the following figures for inclusion in Oruatua’s financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X7 according to IAS 16, Property, Plant and Equipment, and IAS 37, Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
(a) The carrying amount of the machinery at 31 December 20X6;
(b) The profit/loss on the disposal of the faulty engine;
(c) The carrying amount of the machinery at 31 December 20X7.
6 Antimony
The Antimony Company acquired its head office on 1 January 20W8 at a cost of £5.0 million
(excluding land). Antimony’s policy is to depreciate property on a straight-line basis over 50 years
with a zero residual value.
7 Sundew
The Sundew Company is a vertically integrated manufacturer of chainsaws. It has two divisions.
Division X manufactures engines, all of which are identical. Division Y assembles complete chainsaws
and sells them to third party dealers.
Division X, a cash-generating unit, sells to Division Y at cost price but sells to other chainsaw
manufacturers at cost plus 50%. Details of Division X’s budgeted revenues for the year ending 31
December 20X7 are as follows:
Requirement
What are the 20X7 cash inflows which should be used in determining the value in use of Division X
according to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets?
8 Cowbird
The Cowbird Company operates in the television industry. It acquired a licence to operate in a
particular region for 20 years at a cost of £10 million on 31 December 20X3. Cowbird’s policy was to
amortise the fee paid for the licence on a straight-line basis.
By 31 December 20X5 it had become apparent that Cowbird had overpaid for the licence and,
measuring recoverable amount by reference to value in use, it recognised an impairment charge of
£4.05 million, leaving a carrying amount of £4.95 million.
At 31 December 20X7 the market place had improved, such that the conditions giving rise to the
original impairment no longer existed. The recoverable amount of the licence by reference to value
in use was now £11 million.
Requirement
What should be the carrying amount of the licence in the statement of financial position of Cowbird
at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 36, Impairment of Assets?
9 Acetone
The Acetone Company is testing for impairment two subsidiaries which have been identified as
separate cash-generating units.
Some years ago, Acetone acquired 80% of The Dushanbe Company for £600,000 when the fair value
of Dushanbe’s identifiable assets was £400,000. As Dushanbe’s policy is to distribute all profits by
way of dividend, the fair value of its identifiable net assets remained at £400,000 on 31 December
20X7. The impairment review indicated Dushanbe’s recoverable amount at 31 December 20X7 to be
£520,000.
Some years ago Acetone acquired 85% of The Maclulich Company for £800,000 when the fair value
of Maclulich’s identifiable net assets was £700,000. Goodwill of £205,000 (£800,000 – (£700,000 ×
85%)) was recognised. As Maclulich’s policy is to distribute all profits by way of dividend, the fair
10 Titanium
On 1 January 20X7 The Titanium Company acquired the copyright to four similar magazines, each
with a remaining legal copyright period for 10 years. At the end of the legal copyright period, other
publishing companies will be allowed to tender for the copyright renewal rights.
At 31 December 20X7 the following information was available in respect of the assets:
Titanium uses the revaluation model as its accounting policy in relation to intangible assets.
Requirement
What is the total charge to profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X7 in respect of these
intangible assets per IAS 38, Intangible Assets?
11 Lewis
The following issues have arisen in relation to business combinations undertaken by the Lewis
Company.
(1) Lewis acquired the trademark of a type of wine when it acquired 80% of the ordinary share
capital of The Calcium Company on 1 April 20X7. This wine is produced from a vineyard that is
exclusively used by Calcium.
(2) When Lewis bought a football club on 1 May 20X7, it acquired the registrations of a group of
football players.
(3) Lewis acquired a 75% share in the Stilt Company during 20X7. At the acquisition date Stilt was
researching a new pharmaceutical product which is expected to produce future economic
benefits.
The cost of these assets can be measured reliably.
Requirement
Indicate which of the above items should or should not be recognised as assets separable from
goodwill in Lewis’s statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 38,
Intangible Assets.
13 Cadmium
The Cadmium Company produces a globally recognised dog food that is a market leader. The
trademark was established over 50 years ago and is renewable every eight years. The last renewal
was effective from 1 January 20X2 and cost £65,000. Cadmium intends to continue to renew the
trademark in future years.
Cadmium uses the revaluation model where allowed for measuring intangible assets, in accordance
with IAS 38, Intangible Assets. A valuation of £50 million was made by an independent valuation
expert on 31 December 20X7, who charged £650,000 for the valuation report.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the trademark in Cadmium’s statement of financial position at 31
December 20X7 per IAS 38, Intangible Assets?
14 Piperazine
The Piperazine Company’s financial reporting year ends on 31 December. It has adopted the
revaluation model for intangible assets and revalues them on a regular three-year cycle. For
intangibles with a finite life Piperazine transfers the relevant amount from revaluation reserve to
retained earnings each year.
During 20X4 Piperazine incurred £70,000 on the process of preparing an application for licences for
15 taxis to operate in a holiday resort where, in order to prevent excessive traffic pollution, the
licensing authority only allowed a small number of taxis to operate. The outcome of its application
was uncertain up to 30 November 20X4 when the local authority accepted its application. In
December 20X4 Piperazine incurred a total cost of £9,000 in registering its licences. The licences
were for a period of nine years from 1 January 20X5. The licences are freely transferable and an
active market in them exists. The fair value of the licences at 31 December 20X4 was £9,450 per taxi
and Piperazine carried them at fair value in its statement of financial position at 31 December 20X4.
At 31 December 20X7, Piperazine undertook its regular revaluation. On that date the licensing
authority announced that it would triple the number of licences offered to taxi operators and there
were transactions in the active market for licences with six years to run at £4,500.
Determine the following amounts in respect of the revaluation reserve in respect of these taxi
licences in Piperazine’s financial statements according to IAS 38, Intangible Assets.
Requirements
14.1 The balance at 31 December 20X4
14.2 The balance at 31 December 20X7 before the regular revaluation
14.3 The balance at 31 December 20X7 after the regular revaluation
16 Laburnum
The Laburnum Company is an investment property company. One of its properties is a warehouse
which has the specialist use of storing tropical plants at high temperatures. As a result, the central
heating system is an important and integral part of the warehouse building. Laburnum uses the fair
value model for investment properties.
The central heating system was purchased on 1 January 20X2 for £80,000. It is being depreciated at
10% per annum on cost and it has been agreed by the valuer that the carrying amount of the central
heating system is a reasonable value at which to include it in the fair value of the entire warehouse.
In December 20X7, the valuer initially determined the fair value of the warehouse, including the
central heating system, to be £1,250,000. Unfortunately, the central heating system completely failed
on 25 December 20X7 and was immediately scrapped and replaced with a new heating system
costing £140,000 on 31 December 20X7.
Requirement
According to IAS 40, Investment Property, at what value should the warehouse, including the heating
system, be recognised in the financial statements of Laburnum in the year ending 31 December
20X7?
17 Ramshead
On 1 January 20X6, The Ramshead Company acquired an investment property for which it paid £3.1
million and incurred £100,000 agency and legal costs. The property’s useful life was estimated at 20
years, with no residual value; its fair value at 31 December 20X6 was estimated at £3.45 million and
agency and legal costs to dispose of the property at that date were estimated at £167,500.
On 1 July 20X7, Ramshead decided to dispose of the property. The criteria for being classified as
held for sale were met on that date, when the property’s fair value was £3.5 million. Agency and legal
costs to dispose of the property were estimated at £160,000.
On 1 October 20X7, the property was sold for a gross price of £3.7 million, with agency and legal
costs of £165,000 being incurred.
Calculate the following amounts in respect of Ramshead’s financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X7 in accordance with IAS 40, Investment Property and IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held
for Sale and Discontinued Operations.
Requirements
17.1 The gain or loss arising in 20X6 from the change in carrying amount if the fair value model is
used to account for the property
17.2 The gain or loss on disposal arising in 20X7 if the cost model is used
17.3 The increase or decrease, compared with the cost model, in the gain or loss on disposal arising
in 20X7 if the fair value model is used
The animal fair values are based on transactions prices in the local markets. Auctioneers’ commission
is 1.5% of the transaction price and the government sales levy is 0.5% of that price.
The production cost, including overheads, of the milk was £0.08 per litre and the fair values were
£0.13 per litre throughout 20X7 and £0.14 per litre throughout 20X8. Costs to sell were estimated at
4%.
Requirement
What gain should be recognised in respect of the newborn sheep and the milk in Arapawanui’s
financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
19 Tepev
The Tepev Company bought a flock of 400 sheep on 1 December 20X7. The cost of each sheep was
£80, which represented fair value at that date. Auctioneers’ fees on sale are 5% of fair value, and the
cost of transporting each sheep to market is £4.00. An agricultural levy of £2.00 is payable on each
sheep sold.
At 31 December 20X7 all of the sheep are still held and fair value has increased to £90 per sheep. No
other costs have changed. Tepev has a contract to sell the sheep on 31 March 20X8 for £100 each.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the flock in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X7,
according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
20 Saving
The Saving Company bought a flock of 500 sheep on 1 December 20X7. The cost of each sheep was
£95, which represented fair value at that date. Auctioneers’ fees on sale are 5% of fair value, and the
cost of transporting each sheep to market is £3.00. An agricultural levy of £2.00 is payable on each
sheep sold.
At 31 December 20X7 all of the sheep are still held and fair value has increased to £107 per sheep.
No other costs have changed. Saving has a contract to sell the sheep on 31 March 20X8 for £119
each.
Requirement
What is the gain arising in relation to the flock between the date of initial recognition as an asset and
31 December 20X7, according to IAS 41, Agriculture?
21 Monkey
The Monkey Company has the following information in relation to a cattle herd in the year ended 31
December 20X7.
Requirement
What is the loss arising on initial recognition of the herd as biological assets and the gain arising on
its subsequent remeasurement under IAS 41, Agriculture, in the year ended 31 December 20X7?
22 Blackbuck
The Blackbuck Company has in issue unit-linked contracts which pay benefits measured by reference
to the fair value of the pool of investments supporting the contracts. The terms of the contracts
include the following.
(1) On surrender by the holder or on maturity, the benefits shall be the full fair value of the relevant
proportion of the investment.
(2) In the event of the holder’s death before surrender or maturity, the benefits shall be 120% of the
full value of the relevant proportion of the investments.
Blackbuck’s accounting policies do not otherwise require it to recognise all the obligations under any
deposit component within these contracts.
Blackbuck’s financial controller is unclear whether these contracts should be accounted for under
IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts, or under IFRS 9, Financial Instruments.
Requirement
Explain how these contracts should be accounted for.
23 Traore
The Traore Company is organised into a number of divisions operating in different sectors. The
accounting policies applied in two of its divisions before the introduction of IFRS 4, Insurance
Contracts are as follows.
Accounting policy (1) In its car breakdown division, Traore offers unlimited amounts of
roadside assistance in exchange for an annual subscription. Although it
has always accepted that this activity is in the nature of offering
insurance against breakdown, it accounts for these subscriptions by
using the stage of completion method under IAS 18, Revenue, and
making relevant provisions for fulfilment costs under IAS 37, Provisions,
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
Accounting policy (2) In its property structures insurance division, Traore makes a detailed
estimate for the cost of each outstanding claim but adopts the practice
of adding another 20% to the total on a ‘just in case’ basis.
Requirement
Which of these accounting policies is Traore permitted to continue to use under IFRS 4, Insurance
Contracts?
The case is similar for a decrease in value on revaluation. Any decrease should be recognised
as an expense, except where it offsets a previous increase taken as a revaluation surplus in other
comprehensive income. Any decrease greater than the previous upwards increase in value must
be recorded as an expense in profit or loss.
1.2 The double entry is:
The depreciation for the next three years will be £12,000 ÷ 3 = £4,000 compared to
depreciation on cost of £10,000 ÷ 5 = £2,000. Each year the extra £2,000 is treated as realised
and transferred to retained earnings:
To calculate the impairment loss, compare the carrying value of £749,000 with the higher of value in
use (£638,000) and fair value less costs to sell (£550,000). The impairment loss is therefore £749,000
– £638,000 = £111,000.
(a) (b)
£m £m
Recognised goodwill 90 90
Notional goodwill (£90m × 40/60) 60 60
Carrying amount of net assets 550 550
700 700
Recoverable amount 510 570
Impairment loss 190 130
£m £m
Recognised goodwill 90 90
Notional goodwill 60 40
Other assets pro rata 40 –
190 130
£m £m
Goodwill (90 – (150 × 60%))/(90 – (130 × 60%)) – 12
Other net assets (550 – 40) 510 550
510 562
1 Correct answer(s):
B A building owned by an entity and leased out under an operating lease
D Land held for long-term capital appreciation
IAS 40.8 and 9 give examples of types of investment property.
2 Reapehu
£20,175,000
IAS 2.31 requires that NRV should take into account the purpose for which inventory is held. The NRV
for the contract is therefore determined separately from the general sales, thus:
£
Contract: NRV is lower than cost thus use NRV, so (£225,000 × 15) = 3,375,000
General: Use cost as this is less than NRV, so (£240,000 × (85 – 15)) = 16,800,000
20,175,000
3 Utah
£64,000
IAS 2.30 requires the NRV of inventories to be calculated on the basis of all relevant information,
including events after the reporting period. This is supported by the example in IAS 10.9(b).
Thus:
£
£25 × 1,600 expected to be sold to Bushbaby: 40,000
£10 × 2,400 remainder 24,000
Total 64,000
4 Niobium
£33 million
IAS 16.11 requires the capitalisation of essential safety equipment even if there are no future
economic benefits flowing directly from its operation.
It does however subject the total value of all the related assets to an impairment test. In this case the
recoverable amount is £33 million, as the net selling price £33 million is greater than the value in use
£32 million (ie, £3.2m/0.1). As this is less than the total carrying amount of £35 million (£30m + 5m),
the assets are written down to £33 million.
5 Oruatua
(a) £850,355
The initial cost of the asset must include the dismantling cost at its present value, where the time
value of the money is material (IAS 16.16(c) and IAS 37.45). The present value of these costs at 1
January 20X6 is £173,952 (£480,000 × 0.3624), making the total cost of the engines £623,952.
Each part of the asset that has a cost which is significant in relation to the total asset cost should
be depreciated separately (IAS 16.43). Therefore, at the end of 20X6 the carrying amount of the
asset is £850,355 (£110,000 × 4/5) + (£240,000 × 3/4) + (£623,952 × 14/15).
(c) £756,521
The replacement engine is capitalised at cost of £226,170 (£168,000 + £150,000 × 0.3878), and
then depreciated over the remaining length of the licence of 14 years. The carrying amount of
the asset at 31 December 20X7 is therefore £756,521 (£110,000 × 3/5) + (£240,000 × 2/4) +
(£623,952 × 2/3 × 13/15) + (£226,170 × 13/14).
6 Antimony
£0.7 million
IAS 36.60 and 61 (also IAS 16.40) require that an impairment that reverses a previous revaluation
should be recognised through the revaluation reserve to the extent of that reserve. Any remaining
amount is recognised through profit or loss. Thus:
• The carrying amount at 31 December 20X2 is 45/50 × £5.0m = £4.5 million.
• The revaluation reserve created is £3.5 million (ie, £8.0m – £4.5m).
• The carrying amount at 31 December 20X7 is 40/45 × £8.0m = £7.1 million.
• The recoverable amount at 31 December 20X7 is £2.9 million.
• The total impairment charge is £4.2 million (ie, £7.1m – £2.9m).
• Of this, £3.5 million is a reversal of the revaluation reserve, so only £0.7 million is recognised
through profit or loss.
7 Sundew
£6,000,000
IAS 36.70 requires that in determining value in use where internal transfers are made, then a best
estimate should be made of prices that would be paid in an orderly transaction between market
participants at the measurement date.
Thus revenues are 4,000 × £1,500 = £6,000,000
8 Cowbird
£8.0 million
IAS 36.110 requires consideration of whether an impairment loss recognised in previous years has
reversed or decreased.
IAS 36.117 and 118 restrict the recognition of any such reversal to the value of the carrying amount
at the current reporting date had the original impairment not taken place. Thus:
Carrying amount under original conditions = £10m × 16/20 years = £8.0m.
9 Acetone
(a) £750,000
(b) £96,000
£
Carrying value of goodwill 280,000
Impairment (80% × 230,000) (184,000)
Revised carrying amount of goodwill 96,000
(c) £99,000
£
Carrying amount of Maclulich’s net assets 700,000
Recognised goodwill 205,000
Notional goodwill (15/85 × £205,000) 36,176
941,176
Recoverable amount (660,000)
Impairment loss 281,176
Allocated to:
Recognised and notional goodwill 241,176
Other net assets 40,000
10 Titanium
£672,500
IAS 38.94 deals with the identification of the useful life of an intangible asset arising from legal rights.
The Dominoes publication has a useful life of six years, and so should be amortised over this period.
At the year end the carrying amount of £750,000, (900,000 × 5/6), exceeds the active market value,
so an impairment of £50,000 is required. This gives a total charge of £200,000 (£150,000
amortisation plus £50,000 impairment charge)
The Billiards publication is initially amortised over the period of 10 years to the end of the copyright
arrangement, as there is no certainty that the company can publish the magazine after this date. This
gives a charge of £120,000.
The Skittles publication is amortised over the period it is expected to generate cash flows of eight
years, giving a charge of £212,500.
The Darts publication has an indefinite period over which it is expected to generate cash flows.
Under normal circumstances it would be automatically subject to an annual impairment review.
However, because the copyright arrangement does have a finite period, amortisation should take
place over 10 years, and so a charge of £140,000 is required.
The total charge is £672,500.
11 Lewis
For each statement:
(1) Recognised
(2) Recognised
(3) Recognised
12 Diversified group
For each item:
(1) Not an intangible
The training costs would not satisfy the definition of an intangible asset. This is because Thrasher
has insufficient control over the expected future benefits of the team of experts (IAS 38.15).
(2) An intangible
The database would be classified as an intangible asset because the willingness of another party
to buy the contents provides evidence of a potential exchange transaction for the relationship
with customers and that the asset is separable (IAS 38.16).
13 Cadmium
£16,250
The revaluation model cannot be used for this trademark, because for a unique item there cannot be
the active market required by IAS 38.75. (A professional valuation does not rank as a value by
reference to an active market.) IAS 38.81 requires the cost model to be applied to such an item, even
if it is in a class for which the revaluation model is used.
The cost of renewal should be treated as part of the cost of an intangible, under IAS 38.28(b), but the
valuation expenses should be charged directly to profit or loss, as administration overheads (IAS
38.29(c)).
The trademark is therefore carried at the cost of renewal, depreciated for six of the eight years’ life
since last renewal, so £65,000 × 2/8 = £16,250.
14 Piperazine
14.1 £132,750
Under IAS 38.21 the £70,000 spent in 20X4 in applying for the licences must be recognised in
profit or loss, because the generation of future economic benefits is not yet probable. The
£9,000 incurred in December 20X4 in registering the licences is treated as the cost of the
licences because the economic benefits are then probable. The carrying amount of the
licences under the revaluation model at 31 December 20X4 is £141,750 (£9,450 × 15), so the
balance on the revaluation reserve is the £132,750 uplift (IAS 38.75 & 85).
14.2 £88,500
After three years the accumulated amortisation based on the revalued amount is £47,250
(£141,750 × 3/9), whereas the accumulated amortisation based on the cost would have been
£3,000 (£9,000 × 3/9). So £44,250 will have been transferred from the revaluation reserve to
retained earnings (IAS 38.87). The remaining balance before the regular revaluation is £88,500
(£132,750 – £44,250).
14.3 £61,500
The carrying amount of the licences immediately before the revaluation is £94,500 (£141,750 –
£47,250). The revalued carrying amount is £67,500 (£4,500 × 15). The deficit of £27,000 is
recognised in the revaluation reserve, reducing the balance to £61,500 (IAS 38.86).
15 Boron
£50,000
16 Laburnum
£1,358,000
IAS 40.19 and 68 require derecognition of the carrying amount of the failed system & inclusion of the
replacement.
Thus £1,250,000 – (£80,000 × 4/10) + £140,000 = £1,358,000
17 Ramshead
17.1 £250,000 gain
Transaction costs should be included in the initial measurement of investment properties (IAS
40.20). Under the fair value model an investment property is subsequently carried at fair value
without any deduction for costs to sell (IAS 40.33 & 5). The gain recognised in profit or loss is
£250,000 (£3.45m – (£3.1m + £0.1m)).
17.2 £575,000 gain
Any asset classified as held for sale is measured in accordance with applicable IFRS
immediately before classification. So if the cost model is used, the carrying amount before
initial classification is cost less depreciation to the date of classification, so £2.96 million (£3.2m
less 18 months’ depreciation at 5% per annum). On initial classification, the property is
measured at the lower of this carrying amount and the £3.34 million (£3.5m – £160,000) fair
value less costs to sell (IFRS 5.15) so £2.96 million. There is no subsequent depreciation (IFRS
5.25), so the carrying amount will be the same at the date of disposal. The profit on disposal is
net disposal proceeds less the carrying amount (IAS 40.69), so net sales proceeds of £3.535
million (£3.7m – £165,000) less £2.960 million gives a profit on disposal of £575,000.
17.3 £540,000 decrease
If the fair value model is used, then the carrying amount immediately before initial
classification will be the £3.5 million fair value. The requirement to measure an asset ‘held for
sale’ at the lower of carrying amount at fair value less costs to sell does not apply to investment
properties measured at fair value (IFRS 5.5) and so the property continues to be measured at
fair value. IAS 40.37 states that costs to sell should not be deducted from fair value, so the
property continues to be measured at £3.5 million. Profit on disposal will be net sales proceeds
of £3.535m less £3.5m = £35,000. This is a reduction of £540,000 on the cost model gain. If
the fair value model is used, then the carrying amount immediately before initial classification
will be the £3.5 million fair value. The requirement to measure an asset ‘held for sale’ at the
lower of carrying amount at fair value less costs to sell does not apply to investment properties
measured at fair value (IFRS 5.5) and so the property continues to be measured at fair value.
IAS 40.37 states that costs to sell should not be deducted from fair value, so the property
continues to be measured at £3.5 million. Profit on disposal will be net sales proceeds of
£3.535m less £3.5m = £35,000. This is a reduction of £540,000 on the cost model gain.
18 Arapawanui
The newborn sheep are biological assets and should be measured at fair value less costs to sell, both
on initial recognition and at each reporting date (IAS 41.12). The gains on initial recognition and from
a change in this value should be recognised in profit or loss (IAS 41.26). As the animals are six
months old at the year end, the total gain in the year (being the initial gain based on a newborn fair
value of £22 plus the year-end change in value by £4 to £26) is £7,644 (300 × £26 × (100% – 1.5% –
0.5%)).
The milk is agricultural produce and should be recognised initially under IAS 41 at fair value less
costs to sell (IAS 41.13). (At this point it is taken into inventories and dealt with under IAS 2.) The gain
19 Tepev
£33,400
Biological assets should be measured at fair value less costs to sell (IAS 41.12). Costs to sell include
sales commission and regulatory levies but exclude transport to market (IAS 41.14). Transport costs
are in fact deducted from market value in order to reach fair value. In this question fair value of £90 is
provided; it is assumed that this is calculated as a market value of £94 less the quoted transport costs
of £4. Contracts to sell agricultural assets at a future date should be ignored (IAS 41.16).
The statement of financial position carrying amount per sheep is:
£
Fair value 90.00
Costs to sell (£90 × 5%) + £2.00 (6.50)
Value per sheep 83.50
20 Saving
£5,700
Biological assets should be measured at fair value less costs to sell, both on initial recognition and at
each reporting date (IAS 41.12). Costs to sell include sale commission and regulatory levies but
exclude transport to market (IAS 41.14). Transport costs are in fact deducted from market value in
order to reach fair value. Contracts to sell agricultural assets at a future date should be ignored (IAS
41.16).
£
FV at reporting date (£107 – commission (£107 × 5%) – levy £2.00) 99.65
Initial FV per sheep (£95 – commission (£95 × 5%) – levy £2.00) (88.25)
Gain per sheep 11.40
21 Monkey
£86,000 loss on initial recognition
£686,000 gain on subsequent measurement
£’000
Cost of herd 1,800
Recognised at FV – costs to sell (£1.8m – fees (£1.8m × 2%) – gvnmt fee £50,000) (1,714)
Initial loss on recognition 86
On acquisition of the herd, the cattle are initially recognised as biological assets at fair value less
costs to sell (IAS 41.27), which in this case is less than cost by the costs to sell which are immediately
deducted (IAS 41.27). Acceptable costs to sell include auctioneers’ fees and government transfer
fees (IAS 41.14) but exclude transport to market costs (IAS 41.14). The interest on the loan taken out
to finance the acquisition is not a cost to sell (IAS 41.22).
The value is then restated to fair value less costs to sell at each reporting date (IAS 41.12)
22 Blackbuck
The extra payable on death before surrender/maturity should be accounted for under IFRS 4 and the
remainder under IAS 39.
Given the entity’s accounting policies in relation to the recognition of obligations under the deposit
components, IFRS 4.10 requires the insurance component and the deposit component to be
unbundled; IFRS 4.12 requires the insurance component to be accounted for under IFRS 4 and the
deposit component under IAS 39.
23 Traore
The entity is permitted to continue with both policies.
IFRS 4.13 disapplies the provisions of IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates
and Errors, in relation to selection of accounting policies where there is no IFRS. Entities are therefore
only required to change existing policies in the circumstances listed in IFRS 4.14. Accounting policy
(1) is not caught by this paragraph, so its continued use is permitted.
The application of Accounting policy (2) involves the use of excessive prudence. The continued use
of excessive prudence is permitted by IFRS 4.26.
Reporting of non-financial
liabilities
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period
2 IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets
3 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
13
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Explain how different methods of recognising and measuring assets and liabilities can affect
reported financial position, and explain the role of data analytics in financial asset and liability
valuation
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to assets and non-financial liabilities for
example: property, plant and equipment; intangible assets, held-for-sale assets; inventories;
investment properties; provisions and contingencies
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 3(a), 3(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
13
depend on the
process of
authorisation and
the reporting
entity’s jurisdiction.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• Events after the reporting period are split into adjusting and non-adjusting events. Those events
that may affect the going concern assumption underlying the preparation of the financial
statements must be considered further.
• The following is a summary of the material covered in earlier studies.
Requirement
How will the dividends be dealt with in the entity’s financial statements?
While IAS 10 was covered at earlier levels, the focus at Advanced Level will be on more complex
scenarios, where conclusions will need to be drawn.
Definition
Provision: A liability where there is uncertainty over its timing or the amount at which it will be
settled.
2.1.6 Reimbursement
• An entity may be entitled to reimbursement from a third party for all or part of the expenditure
required to settle a provision. In these circumstances, an entity generally retains the contractual
obligation to settle the expenditure. A provision and reimbursement are therefore recognised
separately in the statement of financial position. A reimbursement should be recognised only
when it is virtually certain that an amount will be received.
As the above overview from earlier studies shows, deciding whether a provision should be made and
if so, how much, may require complex information to be assimilated. In particular, when considering
the discount rate, the risks specific to the liability must be taken into account.
The interactive question you have just done is an example of structuring problems, both on your part
and the part of the directors in the scenario. First, an investment appraisal is carried out by the
directors, then the provision is announced, then calculated by you.
Cr unwinding discount @
Cr balance b/f 1 Jan 10% 31 Dec CF balance c/f 31 Dec
£ £ £
20X1 136,603 13,660 150,263
20X2 150,263 15,026 165,289
20X3 165,289 16,529 181,818
20X4 181,818 18,182 200,000
Requirement
What are the accounting entries for the above for 20X1?
3 Audit focus
Section overview
Provisions are an area where judgement is required, for example in assessing the likelihood of
success of a legal claim. In an exam, you are generally told whether a claim is likely to be successful,
but in practice it could be difficult to determine.
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Saimaa This question revises knowledge of IAS 10, but requires application to an
outcome that is uncertain.
Quokka This question is good practice because it tests the interaction of two
standards: IAS 10 and IAS 2.
Wilcox In this question your brought forward knowledge of IAS 37, including
discounting, is tested.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Mervyn This tests both IAS 10 and IAS 37. A sale has been incorrectly classified
and you need to show the correct treatment. IAS 37 is tested with an
explanation and calculations.
Upstart Records This tests IAS 37 in the context of a restructuring plan in considerably
(Exhibit 3) more depth and complexity than at earlier levels.
Newpenny (Exhibit 1 You will need to determine whether a provision is required for additional
(1)) payment if a set volume of purchases is not met.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
3 ISA 501
• Audit procedures in respect of litigation and claims – ISA 501.9–12
1 ABC International
ABC International Inc is a company that deals extensively with overseas entities and its financial
statements include a substantial number of foreign currency transactions. The entity also holds a
portfolio of investment properties.
Requirements
Discuss the treatment of the following events after the reporting date.
(a) Between the reporting date of 31 December 20X6 and the authorisation date of 20 March 20X7,
there were significant fluctuations in foreign exchange rates that were outside those normally
expected.
(b) The entity obtained independent valuations of its investment properties at the reporting date
based on current prices for similar properties. On 15 March 20X7, market conditions which
included an unexpected rise in interest rates and the expectation of further rises resulted in a fall
in the market value of the investment properties.
(c) A competitor introduced an improved product on 1 February 20X7 that caused a significant
price reduction in the entity’s own products.
2 Saimaa
The Saimaa Company operates in the banking industry. It is attempting to sell one of its major
administrative office buildings and relocate its employees.
Saimaa has found a potential buyer, The Nipigon Company, which operates a chain of retail stores.
Nipigon would like to convert the building into a new retail store but would require planning
permission for this change of use. Nipigon may, however, still consider purchasing the building and
using it for its own administrative offices if planning permission is declined. It is estimated that there
is approximately a 50% probability of planning permission being granted.
A contract for sale of the building is to be drawn up in November 20X7 and two alternatives are
available:
Contract 1: This sale contract would be made conditional on planning permission being granted.
Thus the contract would be void if planning permission is not granted but it would otherwise be
binding.
Contract 2: This contract would be unconditional and binding, except that the price would vary
according to whether or not planning permission is granted.
The financial statements of Saimaa for the year to 31 December 20X7 are authorised for issue on 28
March 20X8. A decision on planning permission will be made in February 20X8.
Requirement
With respect to the financial statements of Saimaa for the year to 31 December 20X7, and according
to IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period, indicate whether the granting of planning permission on
each of the contracts is an adjusting event.
3 Quokka
The Quokka Company manufactures balers for agricultural use. The selling price per baler, net of
selling expenses, at 31 December 20X7 is £38,000. Due to increasing competition, however, Quokka
decides to reduce the selling price by £5,000 on 3 January 20X8.
On 4 January 20X8 a health and safety report was delivered to Quokka by the Government, showing
that some of its balers were toppling over on moderate gradients. £9,000 per baler would need to
be incurred by Quokka to correct the fault. No further sales could be made without the correction.
4 Labeatis
The financial statements of the Labeatis Company for the year to 31 December 20X7 were approved
and issued with the authority of the board of directors on 6 March 20X8. However, the financial
statements were not presented to the shareholders’ meeting until 27 March 20X8.
The following events took place:
Event 1: On 18 February 20X8 the Government announced a retrospective increase in the tax rate
applicable to Labeatis’s year ending 31 December 20X7.
Event 2: On 19 March 20X8 a fraud was discovered which had had a material effect on the financial
statements of Labeatis for the year ending 31 December 20X7.
Requirement
State which event (if any) is an adjusting event according to IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period.
5 Scioto
The Scioto Company’s financial statements for the year ended 30 April 20X7 were approved by its
finance director on 7 July 20X7 and a public announcement of its profits for the year was made on 10
July 20X7.
The board of directors authorised the financial statements for issue on 15 July 20X7 and they were
approved by the shareholders on 20 July 20X7.
Requirement
Under IAS 10, Events After the Reporting Period, after which date should consideration no longer be
given as to whether the financial statements to 30 April 20X7 need to reflect adjusting and non-
adjusting events?
6 Fushia
The Fushia Company sells electrical goods covered by a one-year warranty for any defects.
Of sales of £60 million for the year, the company estimates that 3% will have major defects, 6% will
have minor defects and 91% will have no defects.
The cost of repairs would be £5 million if all the products sold had major defects and £3 million if all
had minor defects.
Requirement
What amount should Fushia provide as a warranty provision?
7 Wilcox
The Wilcox Company has been lead mining in Valovia for many years. To clean the lead, Wilcox uses
toxic chemicals which are then deposited back into the mines. Historically there has not been any
legislation requiring environmental damage to be cleaned up. The company has a policy of only
observing its environmental responsibilities when legally obliged.
8 Noble
The Noble Company operates a fleet of commercial aircraft. On 1 April 20X7, a new law was
introduced requiring all operators to use aircraft fitted with fuel-efficient engines only.
At 31 December 20X7 Noble had not fitted any fuel-efficient engines and the total cost of fitting
them throughout the fleet was estimated at £4.2 million.
Under the terms of the legislation, the company is liable for a fine of £1 million for non-compliance
with legislation for any calendar year, or part of a year, in which the law has been broken. The
Government rigorously prosecutes all violations of the new law.
The effect of the time value of money is immaterial.
Requirement
State the provision required in Noble’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7
under IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
WORKING
£’000
Provision at 1 October 20X7 63,765
Expenditure on 30 September 20X8 (20,000)
Unwinding of discount (balancing figure) 5,095
Provision at 30 September 20X8 48,860
£m
Cost 450.0
Provision (£50m × 1/1.0830) 5.0
455.0
1 ABC International
(a) Details of the abnormal fluctuations in exchange rates should be disclosed as a non‑adjusting
event after the reporting period.
(b) The decline in the value of investment properties is a non-adjusting event, as it does not reflect
the state of the market at the reporting date. The valuation should reflect the state of the market
at the reporting date and should not be affected by hindsight or events at a later date.
(c) The improved product issued by the competitor is likely to have been developed over a period
of time. The value of inventories should be reviewed and adjusted to their net realisable value
where appropriate. Non-current assets may need to be reviewed for possible impairment. This is
an adjusting event, as it reflects increased competitive conditions which existed at the reporting
date even if the entity was not fully aware of them.
2 Saimaa
Contract 1 is a non-adjusting event. Contract 2 is an adjusting event.
Under IAS 10.3, events after the reporting period are those which occur after the reporting period
but before the financial statements are authorised for issue. The planning permission decision is such
an event, because it is to be made before the financial statements are to be authorised for issue on
28 March 20X8. Adjusting events are those providing evidence of conditions that existed at the
reporting date and non-adjusting events are those indicative of conditions that arose after that date.
Under Contract 1, the uncertainty surrounding the contract at the reporting date would be such that
no sale could be recognised as at that date. So there is no transaction for which the planning
permission decision could provide evidence and there would not be an adjusting event.
Under Contract 2, there would be an unconditional sale recognised at the reporting date, with only
the consideration needing to be confirmed after the reporting date. According to IAS 10.9(c) the
planning permission decision would provide additional evidence of the proceeds and would be an
adjusting event.
3 Quokka
£1,920,000
IAS 2.9 states that inventories should be stated at the lower of cost and NRV, and under IAS 10.9(b)(ii)
the sale of inventories after the reporting date may give evidence of NRV at the reporting date.
The 3 January price reduction is a response to competitive conditions which would have existed at
the reporting date. So even though it comes after the year end, it is an adjusting event. Similarly, the
safety report received after the year end relates to conditions at the year end (as the balers in
inventories were defective at this date) and is an adjusting event.
The carrying amount is 80 balers at the lower of cost (£36,000) and NRV £(38,000 – 5,000 – 9,000).
So 80 × £24,000 = £1,920,000
4 Labeatis
Event 1 is a non-adjusting event. Event 2 happened after the statements were authorised, so does
not constitute an event after the reporting period.
Applying IAS 10.3, events after the reporting period are those which occur after the 31 December
20X7 reporting date but before the financial statements are authorised for issue on 6 March 20X8.
Event 1 occurs before 6 March 20X8 but is a non-adjusting event, because in accordance with IAS
10.22(h) this change was not enacted before the reporting date. This is the case even though the
announcement has a retrospective effect on the financial statements still being prepared.
5 Scioto
15 July is the correct answer.
IAS 10.7 states that the authorisation date is the date on which the financial statements are
authorised for issue, even if this is after a public announcement of profit. IAS 10.5 confirms that it is
not the date on which the shareholders approve the financial statements.
6 Fushia
£330,000
Provision must be made for estimated future claims by customers for goods already sold.
The expected value (£5m × 3%) + (£3m × 6%) is the best estimate of this amount (IAS 37.39).
7 Wilcox
£20 million
At the year end a legal obligation exists – through the retrospective legislation – as a result of a past
event (the environmental damage caused in the past) (IAS 37.14). The company should therefore
create a provision for the damage that has already been caused.
It should not now set up a provision for the future damage, because that will be caused by a future
event (the company could close down the mines and therefore not cause further damage to the
environment).
Because the effect of discounting at 17% over two years is material, the cost should be discounted to
present value (IAS 37.45).
So, the provision is £27m/1.172 = £20 million (to the nearest £m)
8 Noble
No provision is required for the fitting of the engines. This is because the present obligation as a
result of the past event required by IAS 37.14 does not exist. The company can choose not to fit the
engines and then not to operate the aircraft.
However, a provision of £1.0 million is required in relation to the fines, because at the reporting date
there is a present obligation in respect of a past event (the non-compliance with legislation).
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Identifying a lease
2 Lessee accounting
3 Sale and leaseback transactions
4 Lessor accounting
5 IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of
Government Assistance
6 IAS 23, Borrowing Costs
7 Statements of cash flows
8 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical references
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
14
Learning outcomes
• Determine and calculate how different bases for recognising, measuring and classifying financial
assets and financial liabilities can impact upon reported performance and position
• Appraise and evaluate cash flow measures and disclosures in single entities and groups
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to an entity’s financing activities which
include: financial instruments; leasing; cash flows; borrowing costs; and government grants
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 4(a), 4(b), 4(d), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
14
3 Sale and leaseback Approach Sale and leaseback IQ6: Sale and
transactions Ensure you is a regular topic for leaseback where
Sale and leaseback understand the examination. IFRS the transfer is a sale
arrangements can different scenarios 16 interacts with This is a
provide entities relating to sale and IFRS 15 as the sale comprehensive
with capital funding leaseback. And the has to meet the question on this
by releasing capital formula to calculate IFRS 15 criteria for a topic and will
caught up in the the right-of-use sale in order to be prepare you for
business for asset and the gain treated as a most exam
investment in other on the sale. genuine sale and scenarios.
core opportunities. leaseback.
Stop and think
You will later Why is it important
encounter sale and to consider whether
leaseback an arrangement
transactions again constitutes a lease?
in practical real life
situations in
Chapters 23 and 24
on financial
analysis.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 699
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance Questions
5 IAS 20, Accounting Approach IAS 20 has not been IQ8: Government
for Government Revise IAS 20 tested under the grants
Grants and through interactive current syllabus This is a quick
Disclosure of questions and revision question
Government earlier material if asking for an
Assistance necessary. explanation of the
This is revision from Stop and think two methods of
your earlier studies. recognising
It is important to government grants.
distinguish grants
related to assets
from grants related
to income.
Borrowing costs
must be capitalised
as part of the cost
of the asset if they
are directly
attributable to
acquisition/
construction/
production. Other
borrowing costs
must be expensed.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 701
1 Identifying a lease
Section overview
Tutorial note
You have studied leasing in your Professional Studies. However, the new standard on leasing, IFRS
16, introduced major changes, so you are advised to treat this as a new topic, and effectively study
it from scratch
Definitions
Lease: A contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the underlying asset)
for a period of time, in exchange for consideration.
Underlying asset: An asset that is the subject of a lease, for which the right to use that asset has been
provided by a lessor to a lessee.
In a leasing transaction, there is a contract between the lessor and the lessee for the hire of an asset.
• The lessor is owner and supplier of the underlying asset.
• The lessee is the entity who has the right to use the underlying asset.
The lessor retains legal ownership but transfers to the lessee the right to use the asset for an agreed
period of time in return for specified payments.
Definition
Right-of-use asset: An asset that represents a lessee’s right to use an underlying asset for the lease
term.
The below guidance provides a structure for identifying whether an arrangement is a lease. You
should expect that at Advanced Level the issue may not be clear cut, so the guidance will provide a
useful tool in making the decision.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 703
Worked example: Is it a lease 1?
Big Farm Ltd has three Fassey Mergason tractors under contract from Agrirental Ltd. The tractors are
leased for five years, during which time Big Farm Ltd uses and keeps them on the farm, and they
cannot be retrieved by Agrirental Ltd (except in the case of default of payment). Agrirental Ltd will
supply a replacement tractor if any of the three requires servicing or repair. The tractors are returned
to Agrirental Ltd after five years.
Requirement
Is this a lease?
Solution
This is a lease. There are identifiable assets (the three tractors), and Big Farm Ltd has the right to
direct their use for the period of the contract in order to obtain substantially all economic benefits
from them. Agrirental Ltd cannot substitute or swap one of the tractors, unless it requires a repair or
servicing; this is not a substantive substitution right. Therefore, the contract is classified as a lease.
Solution
This is not a lease. There are no identifiable assets (the combine harvesters), and although Big Farm
Ltd has the right to use the machines for the period of the contract, Agrirental Ltd can decide upon
the actual combines (provided they have the VARIO cutters) provided to Big Farm Ltd.
Therefore the contract is not classified as a lease, and the rental payments should be expensed to
profit or loss.
In the above examples, the background is the same and some of the details are similar. Your task is to
take account of all the information and focus on the differences.
Solution
This is not a lease. There is no identifiable asset. Fastcoach can substitute one coach for another, and
would derive economic benefits from doing so in terms of convenience. Therefore Outandabout
should account for the rental payments as an expense in profit or loss.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 705
Solution
This is a lease. There is an identifiable asset, the 10 vehicles specified in the contract. The council has
a right to use the vehicles for the period of the contract. Carefleet Co does not have the right to
substitute any of the vehicles unless they are being serviced or repaired. Therefore Coketown
Council would need to recognise an asset and liability in its statement of financial position.
Solution
This is a lease. The contract contains a lease of dark fibres. Kabal has the right to use the three dark
fibres for 10 years.
There are three identified fibres. The fibres are explicitly specified in the contract and are physically
distinct from other fibres within the cable. Telenew cannot substitute the fibres other than for reasons
of repairs, maintenance or malfunction (IFRS 16: Para B18).
Kabal has the right to control the use of the fibres throughout the 10-year period of use because:
(1) Kabal has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the fibres over
the 10-year period of use and Kabal has exclusive use of the fibres throughout the period of use.
(2) Kabal has the right to direct the use of the fibres because IFRS 16: Para B24 applies:
(a) The customer has the right to direct how and for what purpose the asset is used during the
whole of its period of use, or
(b) The relevant decisions about use are pre-determined and the customer can operate the
asset without the supplier having the right to change those operating instructions.
Kabal makes the relevant decisions about how and for what purpose the fibres are used by deciding
(a) when and whether to light the fibres and (b) when and how much output the fibres will produce
(ie, what data, and how much data, those fibres will transport). Kabal has the right to change these
decisions during the 10-year period of use.
Although Telenew’s decisions about repairing and maintaining the fibres are essential to their
efficient use, those decisions do not give Telenew the right to direct how and for what purpose the
fibres are used. Consequently, Telenew does not control the use of the fibres during the period of
use.
The above example, taken from IFRS 16, analyses a complex situation and comes to a conclusion. In
an exam, if you missed one of the details and came to a different conclusion, you would still gain
credit for parts of your analysis that were correct.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 707
However, although each module within the servers, if considered individually, might be an asset of
low value, the leases of modules within the servers do not qualify as leases of low-value assets. This is
because each module is highly interrelated with other parts of the servers. The lessee would not
lease the modules without also leasing the servers. Accordingly, the company would apply the
recognition and measurement requirements of IFRS 16 to the servers.
• IFRS 16 recognises an asset and corresponding liability for all leases (unless the lease is for less
than 12 months term, or the underlying asset is of low value).
• A lease liability is initially recognised at the present value of future lease payments; interest
accrues subsequently.
• A right-of-use asset is initially recognised at the amount of the lease liability, subject to some
adjustments; it is subsequently depreciated.
• In the statement of financial position, a right-of-use asset and lease liability are recognised in
respect of leased assets.
• Lease payments reduce the lease liability and cover any accrued interest.
• Interest accrues on the outstanding liability in each period of the lease.
• The finance charge is recognised in profit or loss.
• Where a contract is a lease, a right-of-use asset and a lease liability are recognised at the
commencement date.
Solution
Right-of-use asset
£
PVFLP 12,500
Initial deposit 800
Direct costs 1,200
End of term costs to remove the plant 750
Less: lease incentives (250)
Right-of-use asset 15,000
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 709
Note: that the marketing costs for the new product to be made by the plant are not included as these
costs are not directly attributable to the lease. This is consistent with IAS 16 (s.19(b)), where
marketing costs cannot be capitalised as part of the non-current asset.
Solution
Right-of-use asset is initially measured at £15,000.
The depreciation period is the shorter of the useful life (six years) or the lease term (five years).
£15,000/5 years = £3,000 depreciation charge.
Carrying amount of the right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X8 is £12,000 (£15,000 – £3,000).
The asset should be depreciated over the shorter of the lease term or the asset’s useful life
Points to note
• Depreciation policies adopted should be consistent with other non-current assets of the same
class.
• If any impairment reviews are required, these must be conducted in accordance with IAS 36,
Impairment of Assets.
• If there is reasonable certainty that the lessee will eventually own the asset, then it should be
depreciated over its estimated useful life.
• The lease term comprises the period for which the lessee has contracted to lease the asset and
any further terms for which there is reasonable certainty at the inception of the lease that the
lessee will exercise the option.
Definition
Lease payments: Payments made by a lessee to a lessor in order to use an underlying asset during
the lease term, less any lease incentives.
IFRS 16 requires lease payments to also include the exercise price of a purchase option if the lessee
is reasonably certain to exercise that option, and any penalty payments for terminating the lease.
Year £
1. 10,000/1.1 9,091
2. 10,000/1.12 8,264
3. 10,000/1.13 7,513
4. 10,000/1.14 6,830
Present value of future lease payments 31,698
Year £
1.1.X8: Lease liability (PVFLP) 31,698
31.12.X8: Interest 10% 3,170
31.12.X8: Instalment in arrears (10,000)
Liability at 31.12.X8 24,868
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 711
2.6 Setting up accounts in the statement of financial position
IFRS 16 requires that, when an asset is leased, the accounting treatment should reflect the substance
of the transaction. In the lessee’s books therefore:
The initial deposit, if any, counts as one of the lease payments and hence is included in the cost of
the asset.
Points to note
• The entries are made at the commencement of the lease term, with the values determined at the
start of the lease (see section 2.1 and 2.4 above).
• The present value of the future lease payments is derived by discounting them at the interest rate
implicit in the lease. If it is not practicable to determine the interest rate implied in the lease, then
the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate can be used.
• Initial direct costs can be treated as part of the cost of the asset – provided they are directly
attributable to activities performed by the lessee to obtain the lease.
• Although interest is payable under the lease, this is accrued over time. The justification is that the
capital could, in theory, be paid off at any time, with cancellation charges. These charges could be
avoided, so they are not a ‘true’ long term liability. Interest is therefore recognised as it accrues.
Solution
The lease liability is measured at the present value of the three payments:
£
31 December 20X1 £10,000/1.10 9,090
31 December 20X2 £10,000/1.102 8,260
31 December 20X3 £10,000/1.103 7,510
Present value of future lease payments 24,860
£
20X1 balance b/f 24,860
Interest 10% 2,486
Payment 31/12/X1 (10,000)
20X2 balance b/d 17,346
Interest 10% 1,735
Payment 31/12/X2 (10,000)
20X3 balance b/d 9,081
Interest 10% 908
Payment 31/12/X3 (10,000)
-
Note: The balance doesn’t come down to exactly the outstanding amount due to rounding on the
discounting.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 713
Requirement
Calculate the initial lease liability and calculate the value of the right-of-use asset.
Solution
At the commencement date the lessee pays the initial £50,000, incurs the direct costs and receives
the lease incentives. The lease liability is measured at the present value of the remaining four
payments, ie, the future lease payments:
£
£50,000/1.05 47,619
£50,000/1.05 2
45,351
£50,000/1.053 43,192
£50,000/1.054 41,135
177,297
Debit Credit
£ £
Right-of-use asset:
Initial payment 50,000
Discounted liability 177,297
Initial direct costs 20,000
Incentives received (5,000)
242,297
Lease liability 177,297
Cash (50,000 + 20,000 – 5,000) – 65,000
242,297 242,297
£
20X1 balance b/f 24,860
Interest 10% 2,486
Payment 31/12/X1 (10,000)
20X1 balance c/d (current period) 17,346
20X2 balance b/d 17,346
Interest 10% 1,735
Payment 31/12/X2 (10,000)
20X2 balance c/d (future periods) 9,081
20X3 balance b/d 9,081
Interest 10% 908
Payment 31/12/X3 (10,000)
-
3.2 Prepare journals to show accounting entries in respect of the lease during 20X1
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 715
• Expenses relating to short-term and low-value leases
• Total cash outflow for leases
IFRS 16 has tightened the rules on leasing to the extent that there is limited scope for judgement.
The standard was brought in to remedy abuses and loopholes. However, there remains some scope,
for example in electing to show potentially exempt leases in the statement of financial position, or in
the estimation of the useful economic life of the underlying asset.
• A sale and leaseback transaction involves the sale of an asset and the subsequent leasing back of
the same asset.
• The treatment of a sale and leaseback transaction will depend on whether the transfer is a sale as
defined by IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
3.1 Introduction
Companies can raise finance in a number of different ways. These include short-term measures such
as a bank overdraft, medium-term measures such as loans or leases and longer-term measures
including secured loans.
Another option is a sale and leaseback transaction. This is a common feature of certain industries,
including retailing and hotels. It involves the original owner of the asset selling it, typically to a
finance house or bank, and immediately leasing it back, thereby raising cash and retaining the use of
the asset. Such arrangements provide entities with the opportunity to release capital caught up in the
business for investment in other opportunities or to return it to shareholders. In essence, an entity
acquires cash in exchange for a commitment to make regular lease payments without losing use of
the asset.
Under IFRS 16, the key initial assessment is whether or not the transfer of the asset constitutes a
genuine sale. For this to be the case, the requirements of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with
Customers for determining when a performance obligation is satisfied must be met.
£
Fair value X
Less: carrying amount (X)
Total gain/(loss) on the sale X/(X)
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 717
and the present value of future lease payments at the 6% interest rate implicit in the lease were
£2,752,800 at 1 July 20X5.
The machine was transferred to Dale plc’s premises, but Hill plc has the right to use it. Hill plc has no
option to repurchase the machine at the end of the lease period.
Requirement
How should the transaction be accounted for by Hill plc in the year ended 30 June 20X6?
Solution
The fact that the machine has been transferred to the new lessor’s premises, and the fact that Hill plc
has no right to repurchase the machine both indicate that control has transferred to Dale plc, and
that this qualifies as a sale under IFRS 15.
Part of the carrying amount of the asset is allocated to be a right-of-use asset retained. This is
calculated based on the right-of-use asset (lease liability) as a proportion of fair value:
Right of use asset = £5,040,000 × (2,752,800 ÷ 7,920,000) = £1,751782
The remaining carrying amount of £3,288,218 (5,040,000 – 1,751,782) represents the transferred
asset.
The overall gain on disposal is £2,880,000 (£7,920,000 – 5,040,000); only that part of the gain
relating to the transferred asset is recognised:
Gain relating to retained rights = £2,889,000 × (2,752,800 ÷ 7,920,000) = £1,001,018
Therefore the recognised gain relating to the transferred rights is £1,878,982 (2,880,000 –
1,001,018).
At 1 July 20X5, the following entries are required:
The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated over the lease term of 20 years; therefore in the
year ended 30 June 20X6:
£
1 July 20X5 2,752,800
Interest at 6% 165,168
Lease payment (240,000)
28 June 20X6 2,677,968
Amortisation for the year ended 30 June 20X6 is recognised by: £87,589
Seller/lessee Buyer/lessor
Solution
1 Green plc retains the machine at its premises and continues to use it. Green plc also insures the
machine, which means that the risks and rewards of ownership have not been transferred to the
customer. Both these matters indicate that the buyer has not obtained control of the machine and
therefore that the transfer is not a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Therefore on 1 January 20X3 the sale proceeds are recognised as a financial liability as follows:
At the date of sale/inception of the lease
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 719
The liability is accounted for in line with IFRS 9 at amortised cost (because it is not held for
trading):
Solution
Step 1
Calculate the value of the lease liability
The present value of future lease payments is £913,625 (W1)
Step 2
Calculate the right-of-use asset
Carrying amount × (PVFLP ÷ FV) (adjusted for excess consideration)
£900,000 × (£713,625 ÷ £1,000,000) = £642,262
Initial measurement of the right-of-use asset is £642,262
Depreciation will be charged over six years as this is the shorter of the useful life (20 years) and the
lease term (six years).
Therefore, charge for year ended 31 December 20X5 is £642,262/6 = £107,044
Step 3
Calculate the gain on sale and leaseback
The gain is calculated based on the fair value of the transferred asset rather than full proceeds.
Sydney plc can only recognise the amount of gain relating to the rights transferred.
• Stage 1 (calculate the gain): £1,000,000 – £900,000 = £100,000
• Stage 2 (gain relating to rights retained): £100,000 × £713,625/£1,000,000 = £71,363
• Stage 3 (gain on the rights transferred): £100,000 – £71,363 = £28,637
Journal entry
£ £
DEBIT Cash 1,200,000
DEBIT Depreciation expense 107,044
DEBIT Right-of-use asset 642,262
CREDIT Building (carrying amount) 900,000
CREDIT Accumulated depreciation 107,044
CREDIT Lease liability 913,625
CREDIT Gain on rights transferred – 28,637
1,949,306 1,949,306
WORKING
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 721
Interactive question 7: Sale and leaseback
On 1 April 20X2, Wigton Co bought an injection moulding machine for £600,000. The carrying
amount of the machine as at 31 March 20X3 was £500,000. On 1 April 20X3, Wigton Co sold it to
Whitehaven Co for £740,000, its fair value. Wigton Co immediately leased the machine back for five
years, the remainder of its useful life, at £160,000 per annum payable in arrears. The present value of
the annual lease payments is £700,000 and the transaction satisfies the IFRS 15 criteria to be
recognised as a sale.
Requirement
What gain or loss should Wigton Co recognise for the year ended 31 March 20X4 as a result of the
sale and leaseback?
4 Lessor accounting
Section overview
• For lessor accounting, IFRS 16 makes a distinction between finance leases and operating leases.
• Finance leases: record the amount due to the lessor in the statement of financial position at the
net investment in the lease, recognise finance income to give a constant periodic rate of return.
• Operating leases: record the asset as a non-current asset and depreciate over useful life, record
income on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
4.1 Introduction
Several definitions are relevant to lessor accounting in particular, all from IFRS 16 Appendix A.
Definitions
Finance lease: A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of
an underlying asset.
Operating lease: A lease that does not transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to
ownership of an underlying asset.
Unguaranteed residual value: That portion of the residual value of the underlying asset, the
realisation of which by the lessor is not assured or is guaranteed solely by a party related to the
lessor.
Gross investment in the lease: The sum of:
(a) The lease payments receivable by the lessor under a finance lease; and
(b) Any unguaranteed residual value accruing to the lessor.
Net investment in the lease: The gross investment in the lease discounted at the interest rate implicit
in the lease.
Unearned finance income: The difference between:
(a) The gross investment in the lease; and
(b) The net investment in the lease.
Solution
SupaTruck recognises a non-current asset at historical cost less depreciation at year-end. The
depreciation charge is £75,000/10 years = £7,500 and rental income of £10,000 is also recognised
with appropriate disclosures.
The required journal entries in the year ended 31 March 20X4 are (£):
£ £
DEBIT Depreciation expense 7,500
CREDIT PPE (accumulated depreciation) 7,500
and
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 723
(a) The lease payments receivable by the lessor; and
(b) Any unguaranteed residual amount accruing to the lessor.
An unguaranteed residual amount is that part of the residual value of a leased asset that is not
assured or is guaranteed only by a party related to the lessor.
Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating and arranging the lease are added to the receivable.
Upon receipt of cash payments from the lessee, the amount received is allocated between the
repayment of principal and finance income. The finance income should be recognised so as to
generate a constant periodic rate of return on the outstanding net investment.
Solution
The receivable is initially recognised at £14,875 + £125 = £15,000
Interest accrues to the receivable and payments reduce it as follows over the first two years of the
term:
Finance
y/e Balance b/f Repayment Balance c/f income Balance c/f
£ £ £ £ £
31.12.X4 15,000 (2,750) 12,250 1,568 13,818
31.12.X5 13,818 (2,750) 11,068 1,417 12,485
Therefore in the statement of financial position of Leighton Machinery, a current and non-current
asset are recognised.
Non-current asset: Net investment in finance lease: £11,068
Current asset: Net investment in finance lease: £2,750
Interest receivable of £1,568 is recognised in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income.
4.4.1 Summary
Lessor accounting is largely unchanged under IFRS 16. IFRS 16 retains the IAS 17 distinction
between finance leases and operating leases.
4.6 Summary
Lessor accounting is largely unchanged under IFRS 16. IFRS 16 retains the IAS 17 distinction
between finance leases and operating leases.
This section gives a very brief overview of the material covered in earlier studies.
Definitions
Government assistance: Action by government designed to provide an economic benefit specific to
an entity or range of entities qualifying under certain criteria.
Government grants: Assistance by government in the form of transfers of resources to an entity in
return for past or future compliance with certain conditions relating to the operating activities of the
entity. They exclude those forms of government assistance which cannot reasonably have a value
placed upon them and transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal
trading transactions of the entity.
Grants related to assets: Government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying for
them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions may
also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they are to
be acquired or held.
Grants related to income: Government grants other than those related to assets.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 725
Forgivable loans: Loans which the lender undertakes to waive repayment of under certain
prescribed conditions.
Accounting treatment
• Recognise government grants and forgivable loans once conditions complied with and
receipt/waiver is assured.
• Grants are recognised under the income approach: recognise grants as income to match them
with related costs that they have been received to compensate.
• Use a systematic basis of matching over the relevant periods.
• Grants for depreciable assets should be recognised as income on the same basis as the asset is
depreciated.
• Grants for non-depreciable assets should be recognised as income over the periods in which the
cost of meeting the obligation is incurred.
• A grant may be split into parts and allocated on different bases where there are a series of
conditions attached.
• Where related costs have already been incurred, the grant may be recognised as income in full
immediately.
• A grant in the form of a non-monetary asset may be valued at fair value or a nominal value.
• Grants related to assets may be presented in the statement of financial position either as
deferred incomeor deducted in arriving at the carrying value of the asset.
• Grants related to income may be presented in the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income (in profit or loss) either as a separate creditordeducted from the related
expense.
• Repayment of government grants should be accounted for as a revision of an accounting
estimate.
Disclosure
• Accounting policy note
• Nature and extent of government grants and other forms of assistance received
• Unfulfilled conditions and other contingencies attached to recognised government assistance
• This section gives a very brief overview of the material covered in earlier studies.
• IAS 23 deals with the treatment of borrowing costs, often associated with the construction of self-
constructed assets, but which can also be applied to an asset purchased that takes time to get
ready for use/sale.
6.2 Disclosure
• Amount of borrowing costs capitalised during the period
• Capitalisation rate used to determine borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation
Asset X Asset Y
£m £m
1 January 20X8 2.5 5.0
1 July 20X8 2.5 5.0
The loan rate was 10% and Rechno Co can invest surplus funds at 8%.
Requirement
Ignoring compound interest, calculate the borrowing costs which must be capitalised for each of the
assets and consequently the cost of each asset as at 31 December 20X8.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 727
1 January 20X8 31 December 20X8
£m £m
10.0% bank loan repayable 20Y3 120 120
9.5% bank loan repayable 20Y1 80 80
8.9% debenture repayable 20Y8 – 150
The 8.9% debenture was issued to fund the construction of a qualifying asset (a piece of mining
equipment), construction of which began on 1 July 20X8.
On 1 January 20X8, Zenzi Co began construction of a qualifying asset, a piece of machinery for a
hydroelectric plant, using existing borrowings. Expenditure drawn down for the construction was:
£30 million on 1 January 20X8, £20 million on 1 October 20X8.
Requirement
Calculate the borrowing costs to be capitalised for the hydroelectric plant machine.
This section briefly revises single company statements of cash flows, which was covered at
Professional Level. Try the interactive questions here to make sure you are comfortable with this topic
before revising consolidated statements of cash flows in Chapter 20.
£’000
Revenue 5,740
Cost of sales (4,840)
Gross profit 900
Income from and gains on investment property 60
Distribution costs (120)
Administrative expenses (Note (ii)) (350)
Finance costs (50)
Profit before tax 440
Income tax expense (160)
Profit for the year 280
Other comprehensive income
Gains on property revaluation 100
Total comprehensive income 380
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 729
31 March 20X8 31 March 20X7
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Non-current liabilities
6% loan notes (Note (2)) nil 400
Deferred tax 50 50 30 430
Current liabilities
Trade payables 1,410 1,050
Bank overdraft nil 120
Warranty provision (Note (4)) 200 100
Current tax payable 150 1,760 nil 1,270
Total equity and liabilities 5,000 3,660
8 Audit focus
Section overview
Matters that the auditor should consider when auditing leases for lessees include:
• correctly identifying whether a lease exists;
• confirming the amounts to be included in the financial statements; and
• whether the disclosure is in line with applicable accounting standards.
Auditing issues for lessors require the distinction between operating and finance leases.
Auditors should also be aware of the issues presented by the replacement of IAS 17 by IFRS 16 in
order to continue to understand and support their clients.
Issue Evidence
Identifying right-of-use As the key test here is correctly identifying an asset as a right-of-use
assets asset, the auditor should consider the following:
• Obtain contract for relevant assets and determine whether lessee
has control (via evidence of receiving economic benefits and the
ability to direct the use of the asset concerned)
• Review assets for any below the threshold (eg, $5,000 or 12 months
in duration) to determine any exemptions
• Review contracts for any separate components (such as maintenance
contracts) and confirm each component is separately identified and
the correct costs are used
Confirming the correct Obtain details of the costs of any leased right-of-use assets and confirm
accounting treatment they include attributable costs (such as incentives or advance
of right-of-use assets payments) by reference to terms of contract and any supporting
transactions
Confirm correct treatment of recognition throughout the asset’s life by
challenging management on the depreciation policy used (for example,
is the asset life appropriate?)
Sale and leaseback As these are likely to be complex, auditors should obtain an
arrangements understanding of the sale and leaseback arrangements via the contract
and the client to ensure they reflect the reality of the transaction (for
example, does it satisfy the IFRS 15 conditions required to be
recognised as a sale?)
Disclosure in the Review the IFRS 16 disclosures in the financial statements to determine
financial statements whether they are consistent and complete
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 731
• Sale and leaseback arrangements will now require an accounting treatment that supports IFRS 15
and auditors will need to ensure their clients have followed this treatment in such cases.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 733
734 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2021
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 735
Further question practice
1 Knowledge diagnostic
Before you move on to question practice, complete the following knowledge diagnostic and check
you are able to confirm you possess the following essential learning from this chapter. If not, you are
advised to revisit the relevant learning from the topic indicated.
3. How should the right-of-use asset be measured on initial recognition and subsequently?
(Topic 2)
4. How should the lease liability be measured on initial recognition and subsequently? (Topic
2)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Isaac This is a useful leasing question, because you are asked for the total
charge to profit or loss without being told how this is made up.
Snow Here you are tested on two aspects of leasing that regularly come up: the
carrying amount of the right-of-use asset and sale and leaseback.
Noname This recaps provisions and emphasises that the treatment of onerous
leases falls under IFRS 16, rather than IAS 37.
Tonto The single company statement of cash flows is revised from your earlier
studies, in preparation for consolidated statements of cash flows
introduced in a later chapter.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Telo (note 3 issue This deals with lessor accounting, which is less commonly tested than
only) lessee accounting.
Solvit (sale and You have answered other parts of this question in earlier chapters. The
leaseback only) issue of sale and leaseback gets tested regularly and the calculations will
get easy with practice.
UHN (issue 1 only) This tests a more complicated sale and leaseback. Note that you are later
required to show the impact of this and other adjustments on the gearing
and interest cover ratio, but you can’t do this just from one adjustment.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 737
Technical references
1 IFRS 16, Leases
(1) Identification of a lease
• An assessment of whether the contract contains a lease by considering the following elements: –
IFRS 16 (9)
– A right to control an asset – IFRS 16 (B24)
– Use of an identified asset – IFRS 16 (B13)
– Use for a period of time in exchange for consideration – IFRS 16 (10)
• At the commencement date, the lessee shall recognise a ‘right-of-use’ asset – IFRS 16 (23)
(2) Measurement
• Initial measurement of the right-of-use asset includes: – IFRS 16 (24), IAS 16 (18-19)
– Initial measurement of the lease liability
– Lease payments made before the commencement date
– Less any lease incentives received
– Any initial direct costs incurred by the lessee
– Estimate of costs required to dismantle and remove the asset at the end of the lease term to be
incurred by the lessee
• Depreciate asset over its useful life, or the lease term if shorter and no reasonable certainty that
lessee will obtain ownership at end of lease – IFRS 16 (30)
• Consider whether IAS 36 impairment procedures are needed – IFRS 16 (33)
• Disclosures:
– Disclose information about the leases either in a single note or in a separate section of the
financial statements – IFRS 16 (52)
– Disclosure is required of the following: – IFRS 16 (53)
◦ Depreciation charge for the right-of-use assets – IFRS 16 (53)(a)
◦ Interest expense on lease liabilities – IFRS 16 (53)(b)
◦ Additions to right-of-use assets – IFRS 16 (53)(h)
◦ Gains or losses arising from sale and leaseback transactions – IFRS 16 (53)(i)
◦ Carrying amount of right-of-use assets at the end of the reporting period by class of
underlying asset – IFRS 16 (53)(j)
◦ Details of low value and short term transactions – IFRS 16 (53)(c)(d)
(3) Sale and leaseback
• If the fair value of the consideration for the sale of an asset does not equal the fair value, below
market terms are accounted for as a prepayment of lease payments and any above market terms
are accounted for as additional financing provided by the buyer – IFRS 16 (101)
• Any potential adjustment is calculated on the difference between the fair value of the
consideration and the fair value of the asset – IFRS 16 (102)
(4) Lessor accounting
Finance lease:
• A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of an
underlying asset – IFRS 16 AppA
• Recognise a receivable measured at an amount equal to the net investment in the lease – IFRS
16.67
• Net investment in the lease is the present value of the payments receivable by the lessor plus the
value of any unguaranteed residual value accruing to the lessor – IFRS 16 AppA
• Include initial direct costs incurred – IFRS 16.69
• Recognition of finance income should be based on a pattern reflecting a constant periodic rate of
return on the lessor’s net investment – IFRS 16.75
2 IAS 20, Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance
(1) Treatment
• Should only be recognised if reasonable assurance that: – IAS 20.7
– Entity will comply with conditions
– Grant will be received
• Manner in which received does not affect accounting method adopted – IAS 20.9
• Should be recognised as income over periods necessary to match with related costs – IAS 20.12
• Income approach, where grant is taken to income over one or more periods should be adopted –
IAS 20.13
• Grants should not be accounted for on a cash basis – IAS 20.16
• Grants in recognition of specific expenses are recognised as income in same period as expense –
IAS 20.17
• Grants related to depreciable assets usually recognised in proportion to depreciation – IAS 20.17
• Grants related to non-depreciable assets requiring fulfilment of certain obligations should be
recognised as income over periods which bear the cost of meeting obligations – IAS 20.18
• Grant received as compensation for expenses already incurred recognised in period in which
receivable – IAS 20.20
• Non-monetary grants should be measured at fair value or a nominal amount – IAS 20.23
(2) Presentation of grants related to assets
• Can be presented in the statement of financial position by: – IAS 20.24
– Setting up the grant as deferred income or
– Netting it off against the carrying amount of the asset
(3) Presentation of grants related to income – IAS 20.29
• Either:
– Recognised in profit or loss as income separately or under a general heading or
– Deducted in arriving at the amount of the related expense recognised in profit or loss
(4) Repayment of government grants
• Accounted for as a revision to an accounting estimate – IAS 20.32
(5) Government assistance
• The following forms of government assistance are excluded from the definition of government
grants: – IAS 20.34–35
– Assistance which cannot reasonably have a value placed on it
– Transactions with government which cannot be distinguished from the normal trading
transactions of the entity
(6) Disclosures
• Required disclosures – IAS 20.39
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 739
3 IAS 23, Borrowing Costs
• Core principle – IAS 23.1 and 8
• Qualifying asset – IAS 23.5 and 7
• Directly attributable borrowing costs – IAS 23.10–11
• Eligible borrowing costs – IAS 23.12–15
• Excess of carrying amount over recoverable amount of asset – IAS 23.16
• Commencement of capitalisation – IAS 23.17–19
• Suspension of capitalisation – IAS 23.20–21
• Cessation of capitalisation – IAS 23.22–25
• Disclosure – IAS 23.26
1 Henry
Henry acquired an asset on a lease. The details were as follows.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 12% pa. The payments are made on the last day of each year.
There is no option to purchase the asset at the end of the lease.
Requirement
In accordance with IFRS 16, Leases what is the lease liability at 31 December 20X2?
Round your answer to the nearest pound.
2 Sam plc
Sam plc acquired a machine on a lease. The details were as follows.
The useful life of the machine is 8 years. There is no option to purchase the machine at the end of the
lease.
Requirement
What is the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset as at 30 June 20X7 in accordance with IFRS 16,
Leases?
3 Isaac Co
Isaac Co acquired an item of plant under a lease on 1 January 20X7. The present value of the future
lease payments at the commencement date was £7,731,000 and three lease payments of £3 million
p.a. are due to be paid in arrears on 31 December each year.
The useful life of the plant is deemed to be six years. There is no option to buy the asset at the end of
the lease term.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 8% p.a.
Requirement
What is the total charge to the statement of profit or loss in respect of this lease for the year ended
31 December 20X7?
4 Alpha plc
Alpha plc enters into a lease with Omega Ltd for a plastics moulding machine.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 741
The terms of the 10 year lease require Alpha plc to make 10 annual lease payments of £36,000 in
arrears. The discounted value of the lease payments at the implicit rate within the lease of 6% is
£264,960.
There is an option to buy the machine on the final date of the lease for £25,000 (discounted value of
£13,950), which Alpha plc is expected to exercise.
The useful life of the machine is 15 years.
Requirements
Calculate the following values:
(a) The initial measurement of the right-of-use asset at the commencement of the lease on 1
January 20X1.
(b) The carrying amount of the machine at 31 December 20X1.
(c) The lease liability brought forward at 1 January 20X2.
5 Snow plc
On 1 January 20X1 Snow plc entered into the following lease agreements.
(1) Snow machine
To lease a snow machine for five years from Slush plc. The snow machine is estimated to have a
useful life of eight years.
Snow plc has agreed to make five annual payments of £35,000, payable in arrears, commencing on
31 December 20X1. The present value of future discounted lease payments is £151,515. There is no
option to purchase the machine at the end of the lease. Lease incentives of £3,000 were received by
Snow plc in respect of this asset.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 5%.
(2) Head office and warehouse
Snow plc has agreed to sell its Head Office and warehouse to Slush plc on 1 January 20X1 for £6
million. Slush plc is to lease the building back to Snow plc over a period of 10 years.
The carrying amount of the building in Snow plc’s books on the date of the sale was £5.2 million, and
its fair value was £6 million.
The present value of the lease payments was calculated to be £4.2 million, with the remaining useful
life of the building being 15 years.
The transaction constitutes a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Requirements
5.1 Calculate the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X1 in respect of the
snow machine.
5.2 What is the initial measurement of the right-of-use asset in respect of the leased building?
5.3 What is the gain on the sale that should be recognised on 1 January 20X1 in the financial
statements of Snow plc?
6 Sidcup plc
On 1 January 20X6, Sidcup plc sold its head office building to Eltham Co for £3 million and
immediately leased it back on a 10-year lease. On that date, the carrying value of the building was
£2.6 million and its fair value was £3 million. The present value of the lease payments was calculated
as £2.1 million. The remaining useful life of the building at 1 January 20X6 was 15 years. The
transaction constituted a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Requirements
6.1 A right-of-use asset must be recognised in respect of the leased building. At what value should
this right-of-use asset be recognised on 1 January 20X6 in the financial statements of Sidcup
plc?
7 Noname
The Noname Company decided to carry out a fundamental restructuring of its papermaking division
which operates in Hyberia. The effect was that most activities carried out in this location would cease
with a number of employees being made redundant, whereas other activities and employees would
relocate to Sidonia where there was unused capacity. Negotiations with landlords and employee
representatives were concluded on 30 December 20X7 and a formal announcement was made to all
employees on 31 December 20X7.
The restructuring budget approved by the board of directors in November 20X7 included the
following amounts:
£
Payments to employees:
Termination payments to those taking voluntary redundancy 90,000
Termination payments to those being made compulsorily redundant 180,000
One-off payments to employees agreeing to move to Sidonia 37,000
Employment cost for closing down activities in Hyberia in preparation for
the move to Sidonia 50,000
Lease costs:
5 years remaining of a lease which can immediately be sublet for £70,000
per annum 45,000 per annum
7 years remaining of a lease which can immediately be sublet for £35,000
per annum 90,000 per annum
Cost of moving plant and equipment from Hyberia to Sidonia 26,000
Impairment losses on non-current assets under IAS 36, Impairment of
Assets 110,000
Trading transactions in Hyberia up to date of closure, other than those
itemised above:
Revenue 850,000
Expenses 1,150,000
None of these amounts has yet been recognised in Noname’s financial statements. The effect of the
time value of money is immaterial.
Requirement
Determine the amounts to be included in the financial statements for the Noname Company for the
year ending 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 37, Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and
Contingent Assets.
8 Tonto
The following information relates to the draft financial statements of Tonto.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 743
Summarised statements of financial position as at:
During the year Tonto sold its leasehold property for £8.5 million and entered into an arrangement to
rent it back from the purchaser. There were no additions to or disposals of owned plant during the
year. The depreciation charges (to cost of sales) for the year ended 31 March 20X1 were:
£’000
Leasehold property 200
Owned plant 1,700
Leased plant 1,800
3,700
(2) On 1 July 20X0 there was a bonus issue of shares from share premium of one new share for every
10 held. On 1 October 20X0 there was a fully subscribed cash issue of shares at par.
(3) The 10% loan note is due for repayment on 30 June 20X1. Tonto is in negotiations with the loan
provider to refinance the same amount for another five years.
(4) The finance costs are made up of:
Requirement
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Tonto for the year ended 31 March 20X1 in accordance with IAS
7, Statement of Cash Flows, using the indirect method.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 745
Answers to Interactive questions
A company leases a laptop computer for their This can be classified as a lease, or the
financial controller over a three year period. company may make an election for this lease
to be classified as a low value item, and
therefore exempt from the IFRS 16 standard
model.
A company leases a photocopier. The copier will Lease: The arrangement involves an identified
remain on the client site, and will only be asset which the customer has the right to
returned to the lessor in the event of a major control. Substitution rights are not substantive.
repair.
A company leases cars for their team of sales Not a lease: The lease is not for identified
representatives for a three-year period. The cars assets, as the lessor can change the exact
are required to be estate models, but from time model of car provided during the lease.
to time, the car may be changed by the lessor.
A company acquires three architect’s drawing These would qualify as a short-term lease,
desks which are paid for over 10 months. The however, IFRS 16 requires the election to be
company already has four of these desks, and no made for the whole class of assets, and this
elections have been made. has not been done, so the full standard should
be applied.
£ £
DEBIT Right-of-use asset 24,860
CREDIT Lease liability 24,860
Being recognition of right-of-use asset and lease
liability at commencement of lease.
DEBIT Finance charge (profit or loss) 2,486
CREDIT Lease liability 2,486
Being interest on lease
£
Opening balance 177,297
Interest 5% 8,865
186,162
£
PVFLP 11,164
Deposit 575
11,739
CR CR DR CR
Interest accrued at
Bal b/f 1 Jan 6% Payment 31 Dec Bal c/f 31 Dec
£ £ £ £
20X1 11,164 670 (2,000) 9,834
20X2 9,834 590 (2,000) 8,424
Note: You can do these calculations in vertical format (as in the chapter body) or horizontal,
whichever is easiest. The principles are the same.
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 747
Answer to Interactive question 6
Journal entries at date of disposal
£ £
DEBIT Cash 120,000
CREDIT Non-current asset (carrying amount) 70,000
CREDIT Gain on rights transferred (W2) 4,906
DEBIT Right-of-use asset (W1) 63,131
CREDIT Lease liability (PVFLP) 108,225
WORKINGS
(1) Calculate the right-of-use asset
Carrying amount × (PVFLP ÷ FV) = £70,000 × (£108,225 ÷ £120,000) = £63,131
(2) Calculate the gain on rights transferred
As follows:
(1) Calculate the gain on the sale:
Fair value – carrying amount = £120,000-£70,000 = £50,000
(2) Calculate the gain relating to the rights retained by the seller/lessee:
Gain × PVFLP/fair value = £50,000 × £108,225/£120,000 = £45,094
(3) Calculate the gain relating to the rights transferred:
Total gain (1) – Gain relating to the rights retained (2) = £50,000 – £45,094 = £4,906
(3) Lease liability and interest accrued
£
1.1.X1 Lease liability (PVFLP) 108,225
31.12.X1 Interest accrued 108,225 × 5% 5,411
31.12.X1 Instalment paid (25,000)
Lease liability carried down at 31.12.X1 88,636
31.12.X2 Interest accrued 88,636 × 5% 4,432
31.12.X2 Instalment paid (25,000)
Lease liability carried down at 31.12.X2 68,068
Therefore, current liabilities (<12 months) at 31.12.X1 would be £88,636 – £68,068 = £20,568, of
which £4,432 is the finance charge (interest payable).
Finance cost at
Balance 5% Lease payment Balance
£ £ £ £
20X1 108,225 5,411 (25,000) 88,636
20X2 88,636 4,432 (25,000) 68,068
£
Depreciation (63,131/4) (15,783)
Interest (108,225 × 5%) (W3) (5,411)
£
Non-current assets
Carrying amount at 1 January 20X1 (W1) 63,131
Depreciation (W3) (15,783)
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X1 47,348
Non-current liabilities
Obligations under leases (W3) 68,068
Current liabilities
Obligations under leases (88,636 – 68,068) 20,568
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 749
(3) Grants are an extension of fiscal policies and so, as income and other taxes are charged against
income, grants should be credited to income.
Asset X Asset Y
£’000 £’000
Borrowing costs
£5.0m/£10m × 10% 500 1,000
Less investment income
To 30 June 20X8: £2.5m/£5.0m × 8% × 6/12 (100) (200)
400 800
Cost of assets
Expenditure incurred 5,000 10,000
Borrowing costs 400 800
5,400 10,800
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax 440
Loss on sale of plant 90
Depreciation 280
Early redemption penalty 20
Finance costs 50
Investment income (60)
Increase in warranty provision (200 – 100) 100
920
Increase in inventory (1,210 – 810) (400)
Decrease in receivables (480 – 540) 60
Increase in trade payables (1,410 – 1,050) 360
Cash generated from operations 940
Interest paid (50)
WORKINGS
(1) Income tax payable
£’000 £’000
Bal b/d (current tax) 50 Bal b/d (deferred tax) 30
Bal c/d (current tax) 150 Profit or loss charge 160
Bal c/d (current tax) 50 Cash received (balancing figure) 60
250 250
£’000 £’000
Bal b/d 1,860 Disposal 240
Revaluation (150 – 50) 100 Depreciation 280
Additions (balancing figure) 1,440 Bal c/d 2,880
3,400 3,400
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 751
Answers to Self-test questions
1 Henry
Liability at 31.12.X2 is £4,804
2 Sam plc
The carrying amount of the machine is 32,300 – 6,460 = £25,840
£
Lease liability (PVFLP) 24,300
Deposit payments at the start of the lease (deposit) 8,000
Right-of-use asset 32,300
Depreciate the machine over the shorter of the lease term (5 years) and the useful life (8 years)
Depreciation charge for the year £32,300/5 = £6,460
3 Isaac Co
Total lease liability
£ Finance charge
Initial liability (PV of future lease payments) 7,731,000
Interest 8% (£7,731,000 × 8%) 618,480 618,480
Payment (3,000,000)
Total lease liability at 31.12.X8 5,349,480
Depreciation is charged based on the shorter of the lease term (three years) and the useful life (six
years) as there is no option to purchase the asset the end of the lease period.
Depreciation charge
Right-of-use asset 7,731,000
Depreciation charge 7,731,000/3 (2,577,000) 2,577,000
Carrying amount 5,154,000
£
Discounted future lease payments 264,960
Option to purchase (discounted) 13,950
Lease liability and right-of-use asset 278,910
£
Right-of-use asset 278,910
Less Depreciation (W1) (18,594)
Carrying amount 260,316
WORKING
278,910/15 years = £18,594
The asset is depreciated over 15 years as there is an option to purchase the asset which Alpha
plc is expected to exercise.
(c) Lease liability brought forward at 1 January 20X2
£
Lease liability 278,910
Interest at 6% 16,735
Less payment (36,000)
Liability 259,645
5 Snow plc
5.1 Right-of-use asset at 31 December 20X1
£
Right-of-use asset
Present value of future lease payments 151,515
Less lease incentive (3,000)
Right-of-use asset 148,515
Less depreciation 148,515/5 years (29,703)
Carrying amount 31 December 118,812
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 753
5.3 Stage 1: Gain on sale: £6m - £5.2m = £0.8m
Stage 2: Gain that relates to rights retained = £0.56
Stage 3: Gain relating to rights transferred = £0.8m - £0.56m = £0.24m
6 Sidcup plc
6.1 £1,820,000
IFRS 16 requires that, at the start of the lease, Sidcup should measure the right-of-use asset
arising from the leaseback of the building at the proportion of the previous carrying amount of
the building that relates to the right of use retained. This is calculated as carrying amount ×
discounted lease payments/fair value. The discounted lease payments were given in the
question as £2.1million.
The right-of-use asset is therefore: £2.6m × £2.1m/£3m = £1,820,000.
6.2 £120,000
Sidcup only recognises the amount of gain that relates to the rights transferred.
Stage 1: Gain is £3,000,000 – £2,600,000 = £400,000
Stage 2: Gain relating to rights retained £(400,000 × 2,100,000/3,000,000) = £280,000
Stage 3: Gain relating to rights transferred £(400,000 – 280,000) = £120,000
7 Noname
The total amount recognised in profit or loss under IAS 37 is the £270,000 restructuring provision +
the £110,000 impairment losses = £380,000.
The five-year lease is not onerous because the premises can be sublet at profit. The seven-year lease
is onerous and under IFRS 16 will lead to an impairment review of the right-of-use asset for the
premises; however following IFRS 16 there is no longer a provision to be recognised under IAS 37.
Under IAS 37.80 all the payments to employees should be included in the restructuring provision,
with the exception of the employment costs of £50,000 in preparation for the move to Sidonia and
£37,000 payable to those moving to Sidonia – this relates to the ongoing activities of the business, so
is disallowed by IAS 37.80(b). For the same reason the costs of moving plant and equipment is
disallowed. Impairment losses reduce the carrying amount of the relevant assets rather than
increasing the restructuring provision and revenue less expenses are trading losses which are
disallowed by IAS 37.63. So provision = £270,000.
8 Tonto
Tonto statement of cash flows for the year ended 31.3.20X1
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Loss before tax (1,800)
Depreciation (W1) 3,700
Interest expense 1,000
Loss on disposal of leasehold property (8,500 – (8,800 – 200)) 100
Increase in inventories (12,500 – 4,600) (7,900)
Increase in receivables (4,500 – 2,000) (2,500)
Increase in payables (4,700 – 4,200) 500
Cash used in operations (6,900)
Interest paid (1,000)
Tax paid (W2) (1,900)
WORKINGS
(1) PPE – CARRYING AMOUNT
£’000 £’000
B/d 25,500 Disposal (8,800 – 200) 8,600
Lease plant additions Depreciation (β) 3,700
(6,500 – 2,500 + 1,800) 5,800 C/d 19,000
31,300 31,300
£’000 £’000
Profit or loss 700 31.3.X0 – Current tax 2,500
31.3.X1 – Deferred tax 1,200 31.3.X0 – Deferred tax 800
Tax paid β 1,900 Refund due 500
3,800 3,800
£’000 £’000
Payments made β 2,100 Balance b/f (2,000 + 800) 2,800
Additions (W1) 5,800
Balance c/f (4,800 + 1,700) 6,500 –
8,600 8,600
ICAEW 2021 14: Leases, government grants and borrowing costs 755
756 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2021
Chapter 15
Financial instruments:
presentation and disclosure
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Overview of material from earlier studies
2 Objective and scope
3 Disclosures in financial statements
4 Other disclosures
5 Financial instruments risk disclosure
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
15
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Determine and calculate how different bases for recognising, measuring and classifying financial
assets and financial liabilities can impact upon reported performance and position
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to an entity’s financing activities which
include: financial instruments; leasing; cash flows; borrowing costs; and government grants
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 4(a), 4(d)
15
and Share-based
performance; payment.
and
• The nature and
extent of risks
arising from
financial
instruments
Stop and think
IFRS 7 applies to
recognised and
unrecognised
financial
instruments.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• IAS 32 applies to all entities and all types of financial instruments except where explicitly covered
by another standard, such as IFRS 10 for subsidiaries and IAS 28 for associates and joint ventures.
• A financial instrument should be classified as either equity, financial liability or financial asset. This
classification is made at the time the financial instrument is issued and not changed subsequently.
• Compound financial instruments, ie, instruments that contain both a liability and an equity
component, should be split into their component parts at the date they are issued.
• Interest, dividends, losses and gains arising from financial instruments classified as financial
liabilities are recognised in the profit or loss for the year. Dividends paid to holders of a financial
instrument classified as equity are charged directly against equity.
• Financial assets and financial liabilities are presented as separate items in the statement of
financial position with offset being allowed only in limited cases.
• Treasury shares are deducted from equity with the consideration paid or received recognised
directly in equity. Gains or losses on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of equity instruments
are not recognised in profit or loss.
Definition
Financial instrument: Any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial
liability or equity instrument of another entity.
Note that a financial instrument has two parties. It should be recognised as an asset by one party and
either a liability or equity by the other. The classification of a financial instrument as a financial
liability or equity is particularly important as it will have an effect on gearing.
Solution
1 IAS 32 requires a financial instrument to be classified as a liability if there is a contractual
obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity.
In the case of the preference shares, as they are non-redeemable, there is no obligation to repay
the principal.
In the case of the dividends, because of the condition that preference dividends will only be paid
if ordinary dividends are paid in relation to the same period, the preference shareholder has no
contractual right to a dividend. Instead, the distributions to holders of the preference shares are
at the discretion of the issuer as Acquittie can choose whether or not to pay an ordinary dividend
and therefore a preference dividend. Therefore, there is no contractual obligation in relation to
the dividend.
As there is no contractual obligation in relation to either the dividends or principal, the definition
of a financial liability has not been met and the preference shares should be treated as equity
and initially recorded at fair value ie, their par value of £40 million.
The treatment of dividends should be consistent with the classification of the shares and should
therefore be charged directly to retained earnings.
2 The price of the equipment is fixed at £5 million one year after delivery. In terms of recognition
and measurement of the equipment, the £5 million price would be discounted back one year to
its present value.
The company is paying for the equipment by issuing shares. However, this is outside the scope of
IFRS 2, Share-based Payment because the payment is not dependent on the value of the shares, it
is fixed at £5 million.
This is an example of a contract that “will or may be settled in an entity’s own equity instruments
and is a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to deliver a variable number of
the entity’s own equity instruments” (IAS 32.11) ie, a financial liability.
It is the number of shares rather than the amount paid that will vary, depending on share price.
Therefore it should be classed as a financial liability and initially measured at the present value of
the £5 million.
Subsequently, as it is not measured at fair value through profit or loss (as it is not held for short-
term profit-taking or a derivative), it should be measured at amortised cost.
As a result, interest will be applied to the discounted amount over the period until payment and
recognised in profit or loss with a corresponding increase in the financial liability.
3 Most ordinary shares are treated as equity as they do not contain a contractual obligation to
deliver cash.
However, in the case of the directors’ shares, a contractual obligation to deliver cash exists on a
specific date as the shares are redeemable at the end of the service contract.
The redemption is not discretionary, and Acquittie has no right to avoid it. The mandatory nature
of the repayment makes this capital a financial liability. The financial liability will initially be
recognised at its fair value ie, the present value of the payment at the end of the service contract.
The classification of a financial instrument as debt or equity is an area where judgement must be
applied. This area is still under consideration by the IASB in the form of a Discussion Paper.
The debt/equity distinction also exercises the student/practitioner’s ability to structure problems and
approach them logically. For example, just because it may result in the receipt or delivery of the
entity’s own equity instruments does not necessarily follow it is an equity instrument.
This section discusses the objectives and sets out the scope of IFRS 7, Financial Instruments:
Disclosures.
2.1 Objective
The principles of IFRS 7 complement the principles for recognising, measuring and presenting
financial assets and financial liabilities in IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation and IFRS 9,
Financial Instruments.
2.2 Scope
IFRS 7 applies to all entities and to all types of financial instruments, except instruments that are
specifically covered by other standards. Examples of financial instruments not covered by IFRS 7
include the following:
• Interests in subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures that are accounted for in accordance with
IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements or IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
• Employers’ rights and obligations arising from employee benefit plans, to which IAS 19, Employee
Benefits applies
• Insurance contracts as defined in IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts
• Financial instruments, contracts and obligations under share-based payment transactions to
which IFRS 2, Share-based Payment applies
IFRS 7 applies to recognised and unrecognised financial instruments. Recognised financial
instruments include financial assets and financial liabilities that are within the scope of IFRS 9.
Unrecognised financial instruments include some financial instruments that, although outside the
scope of IFRS 9, are within the scope of IFRS 7 (such as some loan commitments).
IFRS 7 also applies to contracts to buy or sell a non-financial item that are within the scope of IFRS 9
because they can be settled net and there is not the expectation of delivery, receipt or use in the
ordinary course of business.
This section discusses the basic disclosures required by IFRS 7 in the financial statements.
3.1.4 Reclassification
If an entity has reclassified a financial asset, previously measured at fair value as measured at cost or
amortised cost or vice versa, it should disclose the amount reclassified into and out of each category
and the reason for that reclassification.
3.1.5 Derecognition
An entity may have transferred financial assets in such a way that part or all of the financial assets do
not qualify for derecognition. In such a case, the entity should disclose the following for each class of
financial assets:
• The nature of the assets
• The nature of the risksand rewards of ownership to which the entity remains exposed
• When the entity continues to recognise all of the assets, the carrying amounts of the assets and of
the associated liabilities
• When the entity continues to recognise the assets to the extent of its continuing involvement, the
total carrying amount of the original assets, the amount of the assets that the entity continues to
recognise, and the carrying amount of the associated liabilities
3.1.6 Collateral
An entity should disclose the following:
• The carrying amount of financial assets it has pledged as collateral for liabilities or contingent
liabilities, including amounts that have been reclassified
• The terms and conditions relating to its pledge
When an entity holds collateral (of financial or non-financial assets) and is permitted to sell or re-
pledge the collateral in the absence of default by the owner of the collateral, it shall disclose the
following:
• The fair value of the collateral held
• The fair value of any such collateral sold or re-pledged, and whether the entity has an obligation
to return it
• The terms and conditions associated with its use of the collateral
4 Other disclosures
Section overview
This section discusses additional quantitative and qualitative disclosures in the financial statements.
An entity should disclose information that enables users of its financial statements to evaluate the
nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments to which the entity is exposed at the
reporting date. These risks include, but are not limited to, credit risk, liquidity risk and market risk.
Credit risk The risk that one party to a financial instrument will cause a financial loss for
the other party by failing to discharge an obligation.
Currency risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in foreign exchange rates.
Interest rate risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market interest rates.
Liquidity risk The risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations
associated with financial liabilities.
Loans payable Loans payable are financial liabilities, other than short-term trade payables on
normal credit terms.
Market risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices. Market risk comprises three
types of risk: currency risk, interest rate risk and other price risk.
Other price risk The risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices (other than those arising from
interest rate risk or currency risk), whether those changes are caused by
factors specific to the individual financial instrument or its issuer, or factors
affecting all similar financial instruments traded in the market.
Past due A financial asset is past due when a counterparty has failed to make a payment
when contractually due.
It can be seen that a great deal of information needs to be assimilated and applied in order to carry
out a sensitivity analysis.
Many financial instruments, particularly those held at fair value, are risky. Risk is not necessarily a
negative, provided it is communicated to users and disclosures are transparent.
2. IFRS 7 requires certain disclosures relating to risk. What are the three main types of risk
identified by the standard? (Topic 2)
3. What disclosures does IFRS 7 require in relation to loans and receivables at fair value
through profit or loss? (Topic 3)
4. What are IFRS 7’s minimum disclosure requirements in respect of the fair value of financial
instruments measured at fair value, on recognition and subsequently? (Topic 4)
5. In relation to risk, can you distinguish qualitative disclosures and quantitative disclosures?
(Topic 5)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Erubus This is a further exercise in separating the liability and equity components,
but slightly more complex.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter. In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to
attempt.
1 Disclosure
What is the main objective of the disclosure requirements of IFRS 7?
2 IFRS 7
How does IFRS 7 define the following?
Requirements
2.1 Liquidity risk
2.2 Market risk
3 Sensitivity analysis
Why does IFRS 7 require entities to disclose sensitivity analysis to market risk?
4 Warburton
The Warburton Company issued £10 million of convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7.
Interest is payable annually in arrears at a rate of 7%. The bonds are redeemable on 31 December
20X9. The bonds can be converted at any time up to maturity into 12.5 million ordinary shares.
At the time of issue, the market interest rate on debt with a similar credit status and the same cash
flows, but without conversion rights, was 10% per annum.
Requirement
What carrying amount should be recognised for the liability in the statement of financial position of
Warburton at 31 December 20X7 in respect of the convertible bond, in accordance with IAS 32,
Financial Instruments: Presentation?
5 Erubus
The Erubus Company issued £15 million of 6% convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7. The
bonds are redeemable at 31 December 20Y1. The bonds can be converted by their holders any time
up to maturity into ordinary shares of Erubus.
At 31 December 20X7 the present value of the future capital and interest payments discounted at
the prevailing market interest rate for similar bonds without the conversion rights is £13 million.
The transaction costs directly attributable to the issue of the convertible bonds were £400,000. These
costs are deductible against Erubus’s taxable profits. Erubus’s tax rate is 25%.
Requirement
What increase in equity should be recognised in the statement of financial position of Erubus at 31
December 20X7 as a result of the issue of the convertible bonds, in accordance with IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation?
Note: Some of the requirements of IAS 32 relate to derivatives and embedded derivatives. These will
be tested after you have covered those topics in Chapter 16
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
The equity component of the gross proceeds is therefore (£50,000 – £48,240) £1,760.
The issue costs of £1,000 are split in the ratio 48,240:1,760 ie, £965 is netted against the liability and
£35 is netted against the equity.
The entries are therefore:
£ £
DEBIT Cash 50,000
CREDIT Liability 48,240
CREDIT Equity 1,760
and
CREDIT Cash 1,000
DEBIT Liability 965
DEBIT Equity 35
1 Disclosure
The main objective of the disclosure requirements of IFRS 7 is to show the significance of financial
instruments for an entity’s financial position and financial performance and qualitative and
quantitative information about exposure to risks arising from financial instruments.
2 IFRS 7
2.1 Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that an entity will encounter difficulty in meeting the
obligations associated with its financial liabilities.
2.2 Market risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will
fluctuate because of changes in market prices.
3 Sensitivity analysis
Sensitivity analysis helps users of financial statements to evaluate the effect of possible changes in
the entity’s financial position and financial performance due to changes in market risk factors.
4 Warburton
£9,479,339
IAS 32.28 requires the separation of the compound instrument into its liability and equity elements.
IAS 32.31 and .32 explain how this separation should be made. IAS 32.AG30 – AG35 explain the
application of this principle.
Thus the liability is (£0.7m/1.10) + (£10.7m/1.102) = £9,479,339.
5 Erubus
£1,960,000
IAS 32.28 requires the separation of a compound instrument into liability and equity elements where
this is appropriate.
IAS 32.35 and 32.37 require that transaction costs of an equity transaction shall be deducted from
equity net of tax.
IAS 32.38 requires that transaction costs directly attributable to a compound financial instrument
should be allocated to the liability and equity components in proportion to the allocation of the
proceeds.
Liability component of gross proceeds: £13m
Equity component of gross proceeds: £2m
Issue costs are £400,000, allocated:
Liability component (13/15) £346,667
Equity component (2/15) £53,333
The initial liability recognised is therefore (£13m – £346,667) £12,653,333.
The equity component is (£2m – (£53,333 – 25% tax relief on £53,333) £1,960,000
Note that tax relief on the issue costs allocated to the liability component will be given, as they are
amortised against profit or loss. Initially they attract no relief and so there is no tax adjustment for
them in the original allocation of the issue costs.
Requires the separation of a compound instrument into liability and equity elements where this is
appropriate.
Financial instruments:
recognition and measurement
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Introduction and overview of earlier studies
2 Recognition, classification and derecognition
3 Measurement
4 Credit losses (impairment)
5 Application of IFRS 13 to financial instruments
6 Derivatives and embedded derivatives
7 Current developments
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
16
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Determine and calculate how different bases for recognising, measuring and classifying financial
assets and financial liabilities can impact upon reported performance and position
• Evaluate the impact of accounting policies and choice in respect of financing decisions for
example hedge accounting and fair values
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to an entity’s financing activities which
include: financial instruments; leasing; cash flows; borrowing costs; and government grants
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 4(a), 4(c), 4(d)
16
characteristics of
equity.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
This section gives a chapter overview and summarises the material covered at Professional Level in
order to consolidate student knowledge before more advanced issues are covered.
• IFRS 9, Financial Instruments
– Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified on initial recognition. This classification
drives subsequent measurement of the instruments.
– Financial assets are classified as either measured at amortised cost, fair value through other
comprehensive income or fair value through profit or loss.
– Reclassifications are permitted only if there is a change in the entity’s business model for
holding the financial asset.
– The financial statements should reflect the general pattern of deterioration or improvement in
the credit quality of financial instruments within the scope of IFRS 9. The impairment model in
IFRS 9 is based on the premise of providing for expected losses.
• IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement
– The IAS 39 rules on hedging may still be applied, and are therefore covered in Chapter 17.
1.1 Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to provide thorough coverage of the accounting treatment of financial
instruments. The main presentation and disclosure requirements as detailed in IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation and IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures together with certain aspects
of recognition and measurement were covered at Professional Level and revisited in Chapter 15. This
chapter extends the coverage of recognition and derecognition of financial assets and liabilities, and
their initial and subsequent measurement and impairment, and finally discusses particular issues
relating to the definition of derivatives and the accounting treatment of derivatives and embedded
derivatives.
(b) Held to collect contractual cash Fair value + transaction Fair value through other
flows and to sell; and cash flows costs comprehensive income
are solely principal and interest (with reclassification to
profit or loss (P/L) on
derecognition)
NB: interest revenue
calculated on amortised
cost basis recognised in
P/L
2 Investments in equity instruments Fair value + transaction Fair value through other
not ‘held for trading’ costs comprehensive income
(optional irrevocable election on (no reclassification to P/L
initial recognition) on derecognition)
NB: dividend income
recognised in P/L
3 All other financial assets (and any Fair value (transaction Fair value through profit or
financial asset if this would costs expensed in P/L) loss
eliminate or significantly reduce an
‘accounting mismatch‘)
Financial liabilities
1 Most financial liabilities (eg, trade Fair value less transaction Amortised cost
payables, loans, preference shares costs
classified as a liability)
2 Financial liabilities at fair value Fair value (transaction Fair value through profit or
through profit or loss costs expensed in P/L) loss
• ‘Held for trading’ (short-term
profit making)
• Derivatives that are liabilities
• Designated on initial
recognition at ‘fair value
through profit or loss’ to
eliminate/significantly reduce
an ‘accounting mismatch’
• A group of financial liabilities
(or financial assets and financial
liabilities) managed and
performance evaluated on a
fair value basis in accordance
with a documented risk
management or investment
strategy
In exam questions on financial instruments at Advanced Level, you will often be presented with a
great deal of seemingly complex information, which you must analyse. It helps to have the principles
in the above summary in mind or to hand in order to avoid getting lost or overwhelmed.
The above summary may also play a useful role in structuring problems. What is the nature and
purpose of the financial instrument? How is it valued?
Definition
Effective interest rate: The rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts
through the expected life of the instrument or, when appropriate, a shorter period to the net carrying
amount of the financial asset or financial liability.
If required, the effective interest rate will be given in the examination. You will not be expected to
calculate it.
Solution
On 1 January 20X6
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset (£18,900 plus £500 broker fees) 19,400
CREDIT Cash 19,400
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset (£19,400 × 6.49%) 1,259
CREDIT Interest income 1,259
On 31 December 20X7
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset ((£19,400 + £1,259) × 6.49%) 1,341
CREDIT Interest income 1,341
DEBIT Cash 22,000
CREDIT Financial asset 22,000
1.4.1 Loan
A financial asset classified as a loan should also be measured at amortised cost using the effective
interest method.
Amortisation should be recognised as income in profit or loss.
Most financial assets that meet this classification are simple receivables and loan transactions.
• This section deals with recognition, classification and derecognition of financial assets and
financial liabilities.
• IFRS 9 requires an entity to recognise financial assets and financial liabilities when it becomes a
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument rather than when the contract is settled.
• IFRS 9 requires that financial assets are classified as measured at either:
Subsequent measurement depends on the category into which financial assets and financial
liabilities are classified on origination.
– Amortised cost;
– Fair value through other comprehensive income; or
– Fair value through profit or loss.
2.1 Introduction
When an entity first recognises a financial asset or financial liability, it must classify it into an
appropriate category. This classification determines how the financial instrument will be
subsequently measured.
A financial asset or financial liability should be derecognised, that is removed, from an entity’s
statement of financial position, when the entity ceases to be a party to the financial instrument‘s
contractual provisions.
Definitions
Financial asset: Any asset that is:
• cash;
• an equity instrument of another entity;
• a contractual right:
– to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or
– to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another entity under conditions that are
potentially favourable to the entity; or
• a contract that will or may be settled in the entity’s own equity instruments and which is:
– a non-derivative for which the entity is or may be obliged to receive a variable number of the
entity’s own equity instruments; or
– a derivative that will or may be settled other than by exchange of a fixed amount of cash or
another financial asset for a fixed number of the entity’s own equity instruments. For this
purpose the entity’s own equity instruments do not include instruments that are themselves
contracts for the future receipt or delivery of the entity’s own equity instruments.
IFRS 9 is very specific about how instruments may be classified, which means there is limited scope
for judgement. However, entities have a choice about the irrevocable FVTOCI election for equity
instruments not held for trading.
2.4.6 Examples of instruments that do not pass the contractual cash flows test
The following instruments do not satisfy the IFRS 9 criteria:
• A bond that is convertible into equity instruments of the issuer
• A loan that pays an inverse floating interest rate (eg, 8% minus LIBOR)
2.4.7 Business model of both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets
The following examples, from the Application Guidance to IFRS 9 (IFRS 9: AG, B4.1.1 – B4.1.26), are
of situations where the objective of an entity’s business model is achieved by both collecting
contractual cash flows and selling financial assets.
Context example: Context example: Both collecting contractual cash flows and selling
financial assets 1
D Co expects to incur capital expenditure in a few years’ time. D Co invests its excess cash in short
and long-term financial assets so that it can fund the expenditure when the need arises. Many of the
financial assets have contractual lives that exceed D Co’s anticipated investment period.
D Co will hold financial assets to collect the contractual cash flows and, when an opportunity arises, it
will sell financial assets to re-invest the cash in financial assets with a higher return.
The remuneration of the managers responsible for the portfolio is based on the overall return
generated by the portfolio.
The objective of the business model is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and
selling financial assets. D Co decides on an ongoing basis whether collecting contractual cash flows
or selling financial assets will maximise the return on the portfolio until the need arises for the
invested cash.
Context example: Context example: Both collecting contractual cash flows and selling
financial assets 2
Logan plc holds financial assets to meet its everyday liquidity needs. The company actively manages
the return on the portfolio in order to minimise the costs of managing those liquidity needs. That
return consists of collecting contractual payments, as well as gains and losses from the sale of
financial assets.
To this end, Logan plc holds financial assets to collect contractual cash flows, and sells financial assets
to reinvest in higher yielding financial assets or to better match the duration of its liabilities. In the
past, this strategy has resulted in frequent sales activity and such sales have been significant in value.
This activity is expected to continue in the future.
The objective of the business model is to maximise the return on the portfolio to meet everyday
liquidity needs and Logan plc achieves that objective by both collecting contractual cash flows and
selling financial assets. In other words, both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial
assets are integral to achieving the business model’s objective.
Amortised cost Fair value through profit or loss • Fair value is measured at the date of
reclassification
• Difference between amortised cost
and fair value is recognised in profit
or loss
Amortised cost Fair value through other • Fair value is measured at the date of
comprehensive income reclassification
• Difference between amortised cost
and fair value is recognised in other
comprehensive income
Fair value through Fair value through profit or loss • Continue to measure at fair value
other • Cumulative gain or loss in other
comprehensive comprehensive income is
income reclassified to profit or loss at the
reclassification date
Fair value through Amortised cost • Fair value at the reclassification date
other is the new gross carrying amount
comprehensive • Cumulative gain or loss is removed
income from other comprehensive income
(removed from equity and adjusted
against fair value at the
reclassification date but is not a
reclassification adjustment hence
does not affect profit or loss)
Fair value through Fair value through other • Continue to measure at fair value
profit or loss comprehensive income • Subsequent gains and losses are
recognised in OCI
Fair value through Amortised cost • Fair value at the reclassification date
profit or loss is the new gross carrying amount
• Effective interest rate is determined
on the basis of the fair value at the
reclassification date
Reclassification is not permitted for derivatives, financial liabilities and equity investments that are
designated as at fair value through other comprehensive income on initial recognition.
When financial instruments are reclassified, disclosures are required under IFRS 7.
Solution
1 IFRS 9 includes examples with regard to these situations:
This is a sale and repurchase transaction where the repurchase price is a fixed price or at the sale
price plus a lender’s return. Green Co has not transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of
ownership and hence the bond is not derecognised. Green Co will recognise a loan liability of
£1,000 and interest expense of £25 to reflect the collateralised borrowing.
2 This is a sale of a financial asset together with commitment to repurchase the financial asset at its
fair value at the time of repurchase. Because any repurchase is at the then fair value, all risks and
rewards of ownership are with the buying party and hence Green Co will derecognise the bond.
£
Carrying amount (measured at the date of derecognition) allocated to the part
derecognised X
Less consideration received for the part derecognised (including any new asset
obtained less any new liability assumed) (X)
Where only part of a financial asset is derecognised, the carrying amount of the asset should be
allocated between the part retained and the part transferred based on their relative fair values on the
date of transfer. A gain or loss should be recognised based on the proceeds for the portion
transferred.
Solution
When a part of a financial asset is derecognised, the amount recognised in profit or loss should be
the difference between the carrying amount allocated to the part derecognised and the sum of:
(1) the consideration received for the part derecognised; and an
(2) any cumulative gain or loss allocated to it that had been recognised in other comprehensive
income.
The previous gains had been recognised in profit or loss and so are not included in the calculation.
£
Carrying amount of the assets sold/derecognised (25% of £106,250) 26,562.50
Proceeds from sale of 25% of bonds 37,500.00
Gain recognised in the period of sale 10,937.50
Solution
The present value of remaining cash flows is compared with the present value of cash flows under
the new terms.
The present value of the cash flows arising on the old terms is £10 million:
£
Interest 30.4.Y0 (£1m/1.1) 909,091
Interest 30.4.Y1 (£1m/1.1 )2
826,446
Interest 30.4.Y2 (£1m/1.13) 751,315
Interest 30.4.Y3 (£1m/1.14) 683,013
Interest and principal 30.4.Y4 (£11m/1.15) 6,830,135
10,000,000
The present value of cash flows arising after the modification is £11,055,662:
£
Principal (£17m//1.15) 10,555,662
Fees incurred 500,000
11,055,662
The increase in cash flows represents more than a 10% change from £10 million. Therefore the
original financial liability is derecognised and a new financial liability on the new terms is recognised.
The new financial liability is initially measured at fair value in accordance with IFRS 9 and any
difference between this amount and the derecognised financial liability is recognised in profit or loss.
Solution
Trade date accounting
• On 27 December 20X8, the bank should recognise the financial asset and the liability to the
counterparty at £2,500.
• At 31 December 20X8, the financial asset should be re-measured to £2,513 and a gain of £13
recognised in profit or loss.
• On 5 January 20X9, the liability to the counterparty of £2,500 will be paid in cash. The fair value of
the financial asset should be re-measured to £2,519 and a further gain of £6 recognised in profit
or loss.
Settlement date accounting
• No transaction should be recognised on 27 December 20X8.
• On 31 December 20X8, a receivable of £13 should be recognised (equal to the fair value
movement since the trade date) and the gain recognised in profit or loss.
• On 5 January 20X9, the financial asset should be recognised at its fair value of £2,519. The
receivable should be derecognised, the payment of cash to the counterparty recognised and the
further gain of £6 recognised in profit or loss.
Definitions
Amortised cost: The amount at which the financial asset or liability is measured at initial recognition
minus principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the effective interest
method of any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount and, for financial
assets, adjusted for any loss allowance.
Effective interest method: A method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial instrument and
of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period.
Solution
Beta plc will receive interest of £59 (1,250 × 4.72%) each year and £1,250 when the instrument
matures.
Beta must allocate the discount of £250 and the interest receivable over the five-year term at a
constant rate on the carrying amount of the debt. To do this, it must apply the effective interest rate
of 10%.
The following table shows the allocation over the years:
Each year the carrying amount of the financial asset is increased by the interest income for the year
and reduced by the interest actually received during the year.
Solution
Measurement
• The asset is initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration, being £850,000.
• At the period end it is re-measured to £900,000.
• This results in the recognition of £50,000 in other comprehensive income.
Expected credit Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss Profit or loss
losses (see
section 4)
Gain/loss on Profit or loss Profit or loss but OCI Profit or loss Profit or loss
derecognition is not reclassified* Amounts previously
recognised in OCI are
reclassified to profit
or loss
Worked example: Debt instrument at fair value through other comprehensive income
On 1 January 20X1 Gemma plc purchases a quoted debt instrument for its fair value of £1,000. The
debt instrument is due to mature on 31 December 20X5 and the entity has the intention to hold the
debt instrument until that date in order to collect contractual cash flows. The instrument has a
principal amount of £1,250 and carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. (The effective
interest rate is 10%.)
Gemma plc holds the debt instrument within a business model with the intention of collecting
contractual cash flows and selling assets. The fair value of the debt instrument is £1,210 at 31
December 20X1, £1,340 at 31 December 20X2, £1,400 at 31 December 20X3 and £1,445 at 31
December 20X4.
Requirements
1 How should Gemma plc account for the debt instrument over its five year term?
Solution
1 The financial asset is classified as measured at fair value through other comprehensive income
since it is held within a business model to collect contractual cash flows and sell assets. It gives
rise to contractual cash flows on specified dates that are solely payments of principal and interest
on the principal outstanding.
The following table shows the measurement over the term.
Note that interest income is calculated based on amortised cost and interest received is
calculated based on the principal amount.
The required journal entries in 20X1 are:
£
DEBIT Financial asset through other comprehensive income 1,000
CREDIT Cash/bank 1,000
£
DEBIT Financial asset through other comprehensive income 210
DEBIT Cash/bank 59
CREDIT Profit or loss (interest income) 100
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 169
To recognise interest income at the effective rate and the change in fair value.
2 On derecognition of a debt instrument measured at fair value through other comprehensive
income, any amounts previously recognised as other comprehensive income are reclassified to
profit or loss. Note that this is different from equity instruments held at FVTOCI, where gains and
losses previously recognised through OCI are not reclassified.
Therefore in the example above, a loss of £255 is recognised in profit or loss on derecognition:
Solution
The bond is a ‘deep discount’ bond and is a financial liability of Galaxy Co. It is measured at
amortised cost. Although there is no interest as such, the difference between the initial cost of the
bond and the price at which it will be redeemed is a finance cost. This must be allocated over the
term of the bond at a constant rate on the carrying amount.
The effective interest rate is 6%.
The charge to profit or loss for the year is £30,227 (503,778 × 6%).
The balance outstanding at 31 December 20X2 is £534,004 (503,778 + 30,226).
3.9.1 Exceptions
The exceptions to the above treatment of financial liabilities are as follows:
(a) It is part of a hedging arrangement (see Chapter 17).
(b) It is a financial liability designated as at fair value through profit or loss and the entity is required
to present the effects of changes in the liability’s credit risk in other comprehensive income (see
3.9.2 below).
£’000
Liabilities at fair value (except derivatives and liabilities held for trading)
Change in fair value 100
Profit (loss) for the year 100
Many users of financial statements found this result to be counter-intuitive and confusing.
Accordingly, IFRS 9 requires the gain or loss as a result of credit risk to be recognised in other
comprehensive income, unless it creates or enlarges an accounting mismatch (see 3.9.3), in which
case it is recognised in profit or loss. The other gain or loss (not the result of credit risk) is recognised
in profit or loss.
On derecognition any gains or losses recognised in other comprehensive income are not transferred
to profit or loss, although the cumulative gain or loss may be transferred within equity.
£’000
Liabilities at fair value (except derivatives and liabilities held for trading)
Change in fair value not attributable to credit risk 90
Profit (loss) for the year 90
£’000
Fair value loss on financial liability attributable to change in credit risk 10
Total comprehensive income 100
• This section covers the key points in the IFRS 9 expected credit loss impairment model.
• The previous standard, IAS 39, required an impairment loss to be recognised if and only if there
was objective evidence of impairment. This approach was criticised after the Global Financial
Crisis of 2007/08 as recognising impairments ‘too little, too late’. IFRS 9 therefore requires the
expected credit loss model to ensure timely recognition of credit losses.
• On initial recognition of the financial asset, an impairment allowance is recognised based on 12-
month expected credit losses.
• If there is a significant increase in credit risk after initial recognition, impairment allowances are
recognised based on lifetime expected credit losses (LEL).
• The general or three-stage approach requires the financial asset to be classified in Stage 1 on
initial recognition. If there is a significant increase in credit risk, the asset is moved to Stage 2. On
default the financial asset transfers to Stage 3. Interest revenue is calculated on the net carrying
amount of the asset (after the deduction of the impairment allowance) in Stage 3.
• Assessment of a significant increase in credit risk may be based on quantitative indicators,
qualitative indicators or a mixture of both. It requires the use of reasonable and supportable
information available without undue cost or effort, including use of forward looking macro-
economic data.
• If a financial asset is purchased or originated credit-impaired, expected credit losses shall be
discounted using the credit-adjusted effective interest rate determined at initial recognition.
• Simplified approaches and practical expedients may be used by non-financial entities for
operational simplification in applying the impairment model.
Definitions
Credit loss: The difference between all contractual cash flows that are due to an entity in accordance
with the contract and all the cash flows that the entity expects to receive discounted at the original
effective interest rate.
Expected credit losses (ECL): The weighted average of credit losses with the respective risks of the
default occurring as the weights.
Lifetime expected credit losses: Those that result from all possible default events over the expected
life of a financial instrument.
12-month expected credit losses: The portion of lifetime expected credit losses which represent the
expected credit losses that result from default events on a financial instrument that are possible
within the 12 months after the reporting date.
4.3.4 Interest
For Stage 1 and 2 instruments interest revenue will be calculated on their gross carrying amounts,
whereas interest revenue for Stage 3 financial instruments would be recognised on a net basis (ie,
after deducting expected credit losses from their carrying amount).
4.3.5 Summary
The following figure gives a useful summary of the process.
Figure 16.2: The three-stage approach
Solution
(a) Impairment loss recognised on origination and adjusted subsequently for changes in credit risk.
Initial recognition
£
DEBIT Loan receivable 500,000
CREDIT Cash 500,000
£
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) 1,250
CREDIT Loan asset/loss allowance 1,250
£
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) 625
CREDIT Loan asset/loss allowance 625
(Based on 12-month expected credit losses = 1.5% of £125,000 less £1,250 previously
recognised)
Loan remains in Stage 1 as there is no significant increase in credit risk
Interest amount = 4% of £500,000 = £20,000.
Year ended 31 December 20X3
£
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) 48,125
CREDIT Loan asset/loss allowance 48,125
(Based on lifetime expected credit losses = £50,000 less £1,875 previously recognised)
Loan is moved to Stage 2 as there is a significant increase in credit risk
Interest amount = 4% of £500,000 = £20,000.
Year ended 31 December 20X4
£
DEBIT Impairment loss (P/L) 75,000
CREDIT Loan asset/loss allowance 75,000
(Based on lifetime expected credit losses = £125,000 less £50,000 previously recognised)
Loan is moved to Stage 3 as it is credit-impaired
Interest amount = 4% of £500,000 = £20,000.
(b) Year ended 31 December 20X5
Interest amount in the year ended 31 December 20X5 = 4% of £375,000 = £15,000
The loan has moved to Stage 3 at the end the year ended 31 December 20X4. The interest in the
year ended 31 December 20X5 is calculated on the net carrying amount of the loan.
Nil 1%
1 to 30 5%
31 to 60 15%
61 to 90 20%
90 + 25%
Detco had not paid by 31 July 20X4, and so failed to comply with its credit term, and Kredco learned
that Detco was having serious cash flow difficulties due to a loss of a key customer. The finance
controller of Detco has informed Kredco that they will receive payment.
Ignore sales tax.
Requirement
Show the accounting entries on 1 June 20X4 and 31 July 20X4 to record the above, in accordance
with the expected credit loss model in IFRS 9.
Solution
On 1 June 20X4
The entries in the books of Kredco will be:
£
DEBIT Trade receivables 200,000
CREDIT Revenue 200,000
£
DEBIT Expected credit losses 2,000
CREDIT Allowance for receivables 2,000
£
DEBIT Expected credit losses 8,000
CREDIT Allowance for receivables 8,000
Solution
A loss allowance for the trade receivable should be recognised at an amount equal to 12-month
expected credit losses. Although IFRS 9 offers an option for the loss allowance for trade receivables
with a financing component to always be measured at the lifetime expected losses, Timpson has
chosen instead to follow the three-stage approach of IFRS 9.
The 12-month expected credit losses are calculated by multiplying the probability of default in the
next 12 months by the lifetime expected credit losses that would result from the default. Here this
amounts to £3.6 million (£14.4m × 25%).
Adjustment:
£m
DEBIT Expected credit loss 3.6
Allowance for receivables (this is offset against trade
CREDIT receivables) 3.6
Solution
An impairment test on financial assets is only required for investments in debt instruments measured
at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income. An impairment allowance is
recognised on initial recognition of the debt instrument based on 12-month expected credit losses
(ie, lifetime expected credit losses multiplied by the probability of a default arising in the next 12
months). Debt instruments at amortised cost hold an impairment allowance on the statement of
financial position (with movements taken to profit or loss). Debt instruments at fair value through
other comprehensive income recognise impairment allowances in other comprehensive income
(with the movement taken to profit or loss).
An impairment test is performed annually to assess any changes in credit risk. If there is no change in
credit risk, the 12-month expected credit losses are recalculated using latest estimates and the asset
remains in Stage 1. If there has been a significant increase in credit risk, the asset moves to Stage 2
and lifetime expected credit losses must be calculated and recognised. A significant increase in
credit risk is presumed for debts more than 30 days past due. If there is ‘objective evidence’ of
impairment (such as a default in interest or capital payments) the asset moves to Stage 3, lifetime
expected credit losses continue to be recognised and interest is calculated on the asset net of the
impairment allowance. Default is presumed for debts more than 90 days past due.
Solution
Credito Bank should segment the mortgage portfolio to identify borrowers who are employed by
clothing manufacturers and suppliers and service providers to the clothing manufacturers. This
segment of the portfolio may be regarded as being ‘in Stage 2’, that is having a significant increase in
credit risk. Lifetime credit losses must be recognised.
In estimating lifetime credit losses for the mortgage loans portfolio, Credito Bank will take into
account amounts that will be recovered from the sale of the property used as collateral. This may
mean that the lifetime credit losses on the mortgages are very small even though the loans are in
Stage 2.
Financial assets at fair value through Credit an ‘accumulated impairment amount’ in other
other comprehensive income comprehensive income.
The carrying amount remains at fair value in the statement
of financial position.
Loan commitments and financial Credit a provision account, which is presented as a separate
guarantee contracts liability.
Solution
The loan to Cosima Ltd should initially be in Stage 1 of the IFRS 9 three-stage general model, which
requires 12-month expected credit losses of £200,000 to be recognised.
When forbearance is offered to Cosima Ltd, Melrose Bank must assess whether there is a substantial
change in the terms of the loan.
The changes are from variable to fixed interest rate and to the term of the loan and there will be a
premium on redemption. If the changes to the terms are considered substantial, the loan should be
derecognised on 31 December 20X8 and a new loan recognised on which 12-month expected
credit losses are provided. The assessment of subsequent increases in credit risk is based on the
date the new loan is recognised. If the changes to the terms are not considered substantial, the
original loan continues to be recognised.
The use of fair value accounting is permitted, or required in some instances, by IFRS 9. Additional
guidance is provided in IFRS 13 on how the standard is applied to financial assets and liabilities, and
own equity instruments.
5.1 Introduction
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement gives extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and
liabilities should be established. It sets out to:
• define fair value
• set out in a single IFRS a framework for measuring fair value
• require disclosures about fair value measurements
IFRS 13 was covered in Chapter 2 and referred to in section 3 of this chapter. This section gives more
detail of its application to financial instruments. Below is a reminder of the definition of fair value and
the three-level valuation hierarchy.
IFRS 13 states that valuation techniques must be those which are appropriate and for which sufficient
data are available. Entities should maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and minimise the
use of unobservable inputs.
The standard establishes a three-level hierarchy for the inputs that valuation techniques use to
measure fair value:
Level 1: Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the
reporting entity can access at the measurement date.
Level 2: Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or
liability, either directly or indirectly eg, quoted prices for similar assets in active markets or for
identical or similar assets in non-active markets or use of quoted interest rates for valuation purposes.
Level 3: Unobservable inputs for the asset or liability ie, using the entity’s own assumptions about
market exit value.
Solution
As Miller Co has the same credit profile as Crossley Co, if it were to take out a bank loan, the bank
would lend only £800,000 (the market value of Crossley Co’s loan) in return for the same cash flows
• Derivatives are financial instruments whose value changes in response to a change in the value of
an underlying security, commodity, currency, index or other financial instrument(s). They normally
require a zero, or small, initial net investment and are settled at a future date.
• IFRS 9 requires derivatives to be recognised when the entity becomes a party to the contractual
provisions of the contract, rather than when the contract is settled.
Solution
The currency swap meets the definition of a derivative, as the exchange of the initial fair values
means there is zero initial investment, its value changes in response to a specified exchange rate and
it is settled at a future date.
Solution
The contract meets some of the criteria of a derivative; that is, there is no initial investment and it is to
be settled at a future date. However, because the underlying is a non-financial asset, classification as
a derivative will depend on whether the contract was entered into in order to benefit from short-term
price fluctuations by selling it. If SML intends to take delivery of the steel and use it as an input in its
production process, then the contract is not a derivative.
Debit Credit
£ £
31 December 20X0
Financial asset – put option 11,100
Cash 11,100
(To record the purchase of the put option)
30 June 20X1
Financial asset – put option (13,500 – 11,100) 2,400
Profit or loss – gain on put option 2,400
(To record the increase in the fair value of the put option)
31 December 20X1
Financial asset – put option (15,000 – 13,500) 1,500
Profit or loss – gain on put option 1,500
(To record the increase in the fair value of the put option)
Cash 15,000
Financial asset – put option 15,000
(To record the sale of the put option on 31.12.20X1)
Definition
Embedded derivative: A component of a hybrid (combined) instrument that also includes a non-
derivative host contract – with the effect that some of the cash flows of the combined instrument vary
in a way similar to a stand-alone derivative.
If the host contract is not a financial asset within the scope of IFRS 9, the embedded derivative should
be separated from its host contract and accounted for separately as a derivative. The purpose is to
ensure that the embedded derivative is measured at fair value and any changes in its fair value are
recognised in profit or loss. But this separation should only be made when the following conditions
are met:
(a) The economic characteristics and risks of the embedded derivative are not closely related to the
economic characteristics and risks of the host contract.
(b) A separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded derivative would meet the
definition of a derivative.
(c) The hybrid (combined) instrument is not measured at fair value with changes in fair value
recognised inprofit or loss (if changes in the fair value of the total hybrid instrument are
recognised in profit or loss, then the embedded derivative is already accounted for on this basis,
so there is no benefit in separating it out).
The meanings of ‘closely related‘ and ‘not closely related‘ are dealt with in more detail below.
Note that an entity may, subject to conditions, designate a hybrid contract as at fair value through
profit or loss, thereby avoiding the need to measure the fair value of the embedded derivative
separately from that of the host contract.
This complex area involving management judgement requires considerable communication skills.
Professional scepticism is important, and if the auditors disagree with management’s assessment,
they will need to support their reasons for doing so.
7 Current developments
Section overview
This section deals with a new discussion paper on financial instruments with the characteristics of
equity.
1. Can you distinguish between debt instruments at amortised cost and debt instruments at
FVTOCI? (Topic 1)
4. Can you apply IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement to a financial instrument? (Topic 4)
5. Can you apply the correct financial reporting treatment for embedded derivatives? (Topic
6)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Longridge One of the trickier areas of IFRS 9 is impairment and the expected credit
loss model. This question should be a good stepping stone to this topic
should it come up in the exam.
Gaia This provides further practice at expected credit losses with the emphasis
on explaining rather than calculating.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Robicorp This question tests derecognition, fair value of an equity instrument and
fair value of an interest-free loan to employees.
Expando You are required to show the correct treatment – the company has treated
it incorrectly – and to consider auditing issues.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
1 Stripe Co
On 6 November 20X3 Stripe Co acquires an equity investment with the intention of holding it in the
long term. The investment cost £500,000. At Stripe Co’s year end of 31 December 20X3, the market
price of the investment is £520,000.
Stripe Co has elected to present the equity investment at FVTOCI.
Requirement
How is the asset initially and subsequently measured?
2 Trowbridge Co
On 1 January 20X8, Trowbridge Co purchased 1,000 bonds issued by Spectra Tech Limited for
£97,327. The remaining period to maturity on these bonds is three years and the bonds will be held
until maturity when they will be redeemed at par. The par value of each bond is £100.
The annual coupon on these bonds, receivable in arrears, is 5% and the effective interest rate is 6%.
Requirement
Present journal entries to show how the bond asset and related income are recognised over the
three years ending 31 December 20X8, 20X9 and 20Y0 if the bonds are in the business model of
being held to collect contractual cash flows.
3 Purple Company
During 20X1, The Purple Company invested in 80,000 shares in a stock market quoted company. The
shares were purchased at £4.54 per share. The broker collected a commission of 1% on the
transaction.
Purple elected to measure these shares at fair value through other comprehensive income.
The quoted share price at 31 December 20X1 was £4.22–£4.26.
Purple decided to ‘bed and breakfast’ the shares to realise a tax loss, and therefore sold the shares at
market price on 31 December 20X1 and bought the same quantity back the following day. The
market price did not change on 1 January 20X2. The broker collected a 1% commission on both the
transactions.
Requirement
Explain the IFRS 9 accounting treatment of the above shares in the financial statements of Purple for
the year ended 31 December 20X1 including relevant calculations.
4 Marland
The Marland Co is preparing its financial statements for the year ended 30 April 20X5. Included in
Marland’s trade receivables is an amount due from its customer, Metcalfe, of £128.85 million. This
relates to a sale which took place on 1 May 20X4, payable in three annual instalments of £50 million
commencing 30 April 20X5 discounted at a market rate of interest adjusted to reflect the risks of
Metcalfe of 8%. Based on previous sales where consideration has been received in annual
instalments, the directors of Marland estimate a lifetime expected credit loss of £75.288 million in
relation to this receivable balance. The probability of default over the next 12 months is estimated at
25%. For trade receivables containing a significant financing component, Marland chooses to follow
the three-stage approach for impairments (rather than always measuring the loss allowance at an
amount equal to lifetime credit losses). No loss allowance has yet been recognised in relation to this
receivable.
5 Longridge Co
Longridge Co purchased a bond on 1 January 20X8 for its par value of £100,000 and measures it at
fair value through other comprehensive income. The instrument has a contractual term of five years
and an interest rate of 5%, payable annually in arrears on 31 December. The 12-month expected
credit losses on origination are £1,000.
On 31 December 20X8, the fair value of the debt instrument has decreased to £96,000 as a result of
changes in market interest rates. There has been no significant increase in credit risk since initial
recognition, and expected credit losses are measured at an amount equal to 12-month expected
credit losses, amounting to £1,500.
On 1 January 20X9, the company sells the bond for its fair value of £96,000.
Requirement
Explain the impact of the above transactions in 20X8 and 20X9 on profit or loss, other
comprehensive income and the statement of financial position under IFRS 9.
6 Gaia Bank
Gaia Bank holds a portfolio of credit card loans held at £460 million on its statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X8. Gaia Bank intends to collect contractual cash flows of interest and
principal repayments from its customers. The average balance on each credit card is approximately
£1,200. On average, the probability of default on initial recognition is 18% and the loss given default
is 90%. Impairment allowances are assessed collectively for unsecured lending on credit cards.
The probability of default remains the same over the product life. Gaia Bank does not classify credit
card loans and receivables as Stage 3 until required payments are outstanding for more than 120
days.
Requirement
Explain the correct financial reporting treatment of the credit card loans and advances under IFRS 9.
7 Pike
The Pike Company issued £18 million of convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7. Interest is
payable annually in arrears at a rate of 11%. The bondholders can convert into 8 million ordinary
shares after 31 December 20Y1.
The bond has no fixed maturity and contains a call option whereby Pike can redeem the bond at any
time at par value.
At 31 December 20X7, a bond with a similar credit status and the same cash flows as the one issued
by Pike, but without conversion rights or a call option, is valued in the market at £11 million.
Using an option pricing model, it is estimated that the value of the call option on a similar bond
without conversion rights would be £3 million.
Requirement
What carrying amount should be recognised for the liability in respect of the convertible bond in the
statement of financial position of Pike at 31 December 20X7, in accordance with IAS 32, Financial
Instruments: Presentation?
8 Mullet
The Mullet Company issued £55 million of convertible bonds at par on 31 December 20X7. Interest
is payable annually in arrears at a rate of 8%. The bondholders can convert into 20 million ordinary
shares after 31 December 20Y1.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
£ £
DEBIT Loan (£9,500 + £250 legal fees) 9,750
CREDIT Cash 9,750
31 December 20X2
£ £
DEBIT Cash 1,000
CREDIT Interest income (£9,750 × 9.48%) 924
CREDIT Loan (bal fig) 76
£ £
DEBIT Cash 1,000
CREDIT Interest income (£9,674 × 9.48%) 917
CREDIT Loan (bal fig) 83
£ £
DEBIT Cash (£9,500 + £1,000) 10,500
CREDIT Interest income (£9,591 × 9.48%) 909
CREDIT Loan (bal fig) 9,591
£m
Profit or loss for the year
Dividend income 2
Other comprehensive income
Gain on investment in equity instruments (65 – ( 50 + 3)) 12
Statement of financial position (extract)
Investments in equity instruments (10m × 6.5) 65
£m
Profit or loss for the year
Dividend income (5m × 20p) 1.0
Other comprehensive income
Gain on revaluation of investment prior to disposal (5m × 6) – (25 + 1.5) 3.5
Gain on remaining investment in equity instruments (5m × 6.5) – (25 + 1.5) 6.0
Statement of financial position (extract)
32.5
Investments in equity instruments (5m × 6.5)
1 Stripe Co
The asset is initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration, being £500,000.
At the period end it is remeasured to £520,000.
This results in the recognition of £20,000 in other comprehensive income.
2 Trowbridge Co
Trowbridge Co has purchased the bonds to hold until maturity. The interest payments are solely
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding and they are held within a
business model to collect contractual cash flows. The bonds are initially measured at fair value, the
purchase price of £97,327, and are subsequently measured at amortised cost.
The company has purchased bonds at discount of £(100,000 – 97,327) = £2,673. This discount is
amortised over the remaining expected life of the bond using the effective interest method.
The bond amortisation schedule is as follows:
Interest income at
Year Opening balance EIR = 6% Cash received Closing balance
£ £ £ £
20X8 97,327 5,840 (5,000) 98,167
20X9 98,167 5,890 (5,000) 99,057
20Y0 99,057 5,943 (105,000) –
The closing balance at the end of each year is the amortised cost of the bonds which is recognised in
the statement of financial position. This is the present value of the estimated future cash flows
discounted at the original effective interest rate.
Journal entries (amounts are rounded to nearest £):
1 January 20X8
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset 97,327
CREDIT Cash 97,327
(Purchase of bond asset at discount)
31 December 20X8
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset 840
DEBIT Cash 5,000
CREDIT Interest income (6% of £97,327) 5,840
(Recognise interest income and bond amortisation based on
EIR)
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset 890
DEBIT Cash 5,000
CREDIT Interest income (6% of £98,167) 5,890
(Recognise interest income and bond amortisation based on
EIR)
31 December 20Y0
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset 890
DEBIT Cash 5,000
CREDIT Interest income (6% of £98,167) 5,890
(Recognise interest income and bond amortisation based on
EIR)
DEBIT Cash 100,000
CREDIT Financial asset 100,000
3 Purple Company
The shares are initially measured at fair value (the purchase price here) plus transaction costs:
(80,000 × £4.54) = £363,200 + (£363,200 × 1%) = £366,832
The investment is derecognised on 31 December. The fact that the same quantity of shares are
repurchased the next day does not prevent derecognition as the company has no obligation to
repurchase them, therefore the risks and rewards of ownership are not retained.
Immediately before derecognition a loss is recognised in other comprehensive income as the
company elected to hold the investment at fair value through other comprehensive income and the
investment must be remeasured to fair value at the date of derecognition (IFRS 9.3.2.12a):
(80,000 × £4.22 bid price) = £337,600 – £366,832 = £29,232 loss
The transaction costs on sale of £3,376 (£337,600 × 1%) are recognised in profit or loss.
4 Marland
The trade receivable of £128.85 million should be recognised in the statement of financial position
as at 30 April 20X5 as a financial asset.
Interest on the trade receivable is £128.85m × 8% = £10.308 million. This should be recognised in
the statement of profit or loss as interest income.
A loss allowance for the trade receivable should be recognised at an amount equal to 12 months’
expected credit losses. Although IFRS 9, Financial Instruments offers an option for the loss allowance
for trade receivables with a financing component to always be measured at the lifetime expected
losses, Marland has chosen instead to follow the three-stage approach of IFRS 9.
The 12-month expected credit losses are calculated by multiplying the probability of default in the
next 12 months by the lifetime expected credit losses that would result from the default. Here this
amounts to £18.822 million (£75.288m × 25%). Because this allowance is recognised at 1 May 20X4,
the discount must be unwound by one year: £18.822m × 8% = £1.506m.
£m £m
DEBIT Finance costs (impairment of receivable) (18.822 + 1.506) 20.328
CREDIT Loss allowance 20.328
5 Longridge Co
Longridge Co classifies the bond at fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI). It
recognises a loss allowance equal to 12-month expected credit losses on origination. This is
recognised in profit or loss. Any subsequent increase in the loss allowance is also recognised in profit
or loss. The fair value movements on the bond are recognised in other comprehensive income until
sale when they are recycled to profit or loss.
1 January 20X8 £ £
DEBIT Debt instrument – FVOCI 100,000
CREDIT Cash 100,000
(Purchase of bond at FVOCI)
DEBIT Impairment allowance – profit or loss 1,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 1,000
(12-month expected credit losses on orig.)
Expected credit losses are not recognised in the statement of financial position for debt instruments
measured at FVOCI, as the carrying amount of this asset should be the fair value. The impairment
allowance is instead recognised in other comprehensive income as the accumulated impairment
amount.
31 December 20X8 £ £
DEBIT Cash 5,000
CREDIT Interest income 5,000
(Interest income at 5% of £100,000)
1 January 20X9 £ £
DEBIT Cash 96,000
CREDIT Debt instrument – FVOCI 96,000
DEBIT Loss on sale – profit or loss 2,500
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 2,500
(Proceeds from sale and recycling of fair value loss to profit or loss)
6 Gaia Bank
The credit card loans and advances are classified as amortised cost because the cash flows are solely
payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding, and the business model
within which the balances are held is to collect the contractual cash flows rather than to sell the
balances.
Under IFRS 9, the credit card loans are initially measured at fair value and are subsequently
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate over the life of the loan.
Impairment allowances must be recognised on initial recognition of the credit card loans when they
are classified in Stage 1. The impairment allowance is equal to the 12-month probability of default
multiplied by lifetime expected credit losses. Expected credit losses on credit cards will be relatively
high because the lending is unsecured and the loss given default is, on average, 90%.
Gaia Bank must assess at each reporting date whether the credit risk has significantly increased. It
may do this on a collective basis because there is a very large number of customers (approximately
400,000 customers) but the grouping for collective assessment must be based on shared credit risk
characteristics. Therefore, this could reflect the length of time a customer is past due, credit rating,
past behaviour in terms of repayment, forbearance offered etc.
If credit risk has significantly deteriorated, the loan is moved to Stage 2 and lifetime expected credit
losses must be recognised. The fact that the probability of default does not reduce on the credit
cards as time goes on, is potentially an indicator of increased credit risk. However, spending on
credit cards can vary, and the credit limit may be used to a greater or lesser extent over the product
life. Behaviour on credit cards can be difficult to model because of this. It is also unclear how long
customers intend to use the credit card and therefore what the expected product life is.
Gaia Bank does not appear to be defining Stage 3 accurately under IFRS 9. There is a rebuttable
presumption that a loan is in default and moves to Stage 3 if payments are more than 90 days past
due. The expected credit losses are still recognised on a lifetime basis, but interest is calculated
differently. The effective interest rate is applied to the net balance, after impairment allowances, for
loans in Stage 3. Therefore Gaia Bank could be overstating its interest income in the statement of
profit or loss.
7 Pike
£8 million
IAS 32.31 requires that any derivative features embedded within a compound financial instrument
(such as the call option) are ‘included’ in the liability component. The value of the option (£3 million),
which is an asset for the company as it enables it to buy back the bonds when it wants to, is deducted
from the liability element of the compound instrument (£11 million).
8 Mullet
£4 million
IAS 32.31 requires that any derivative features embedded within a compound financial instrument
(such as the call option) are included in the liability component. The value of the option (£1 million) is
deducted from the liability element of the compound instrument (£52 million) giving a final liability
element of £51 million.
The equity element is the fair value of the compound instrument (£55 million) less the liability
element after taking account of the derivative (£51 million), as IAS 32.31 requires that no gain or loss
should arise on initial recognition of the component elements. The equity element is therefore £4
million.
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Hedge accounting: the main points
2 Hedged items
3 Hedging instruments
4 Conditions for hedge accounting
5 Fair value hedge
6 Cash flow hedge
7 Hedge of a net investment
8 Disclosures
9 IAS 39 requirements on hedge accounting
10 Audit focus: fair value
11 Auditing financial instruments
12 Auditing derivatives
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
17
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain current and emerging issues in corporate reporting
• Determine and calculate how different bases for recognising, measuring and classifying financial
assets and financial liabilities can impact upon reported performance and position
• Evaluate the impact of accounting policies and choice in respect of financing decisions for
example hedge accounting and fair values
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to an entity’s financing activities which
include: financial instruments; leasing; cash flows; borrowing costs; and government grants
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(e), 4(a), 4(c), 4(d), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
17
5 Fair value hedge Approach Fair value hedge IQ4: Fair value
A fair value hedge is You have been accounting could hedge
an investment introduced to fair be examined This question
position taken by a value hedging in the together with cash involves a futures
company or an overview section. flow hedge contract and
investor aiming to This section focuses accounting in a requires accounting
protect the fair on application and scenario where you with and without
value of a specific examples. are advising a hedge accounting,
asset, liability or finance director to illustrating the
Stop and think choose between
unrecognised purpose of hedge
company What would be a alternatives. accounting clearly.
commitment from suitable hedging
risks that can affect instrument to hedge
their profit and loss changes in fair value
accounts. of a fixed rate
bond?
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
Pay particular attention to this first section, as it contains the main points you need to know.
1.1 Introduction
In earlier levels of your study for the ACA qualification, such as Financial Management, you have
covered the way hedging is an important means by which a business can manage the risks it is
exposed to.
As an example, a manufacturer of chocolate can fix now the price at which it buys a specific quantity
of cocoa beans at a predetermined future date by arranging a forward contract with the cocoa beans
producer.
The forward price specified in the forward contract may be higher or lower than the spot price at the
time the contract is agreed, depending on seasonal and other factors. But by agreeing the forward
contract both the manufacturer and the producer have removed the risk they otherwise would face
of unfavourable price movements (price increases being unfavourable to the chocolate manufacturer
and price decreases unfavourable to the cocoa beans producer) between now and the physical
delivery date. Equally, they have removed the possibility of favourable price movements (price
decreases being favourable to the chocolate manufacturer and price increases favourable to the
cocoa beans producer) over the period.
Another way of achieving the same effect would be for the chocolate manufacturer to purchase
cocoa bean futures on a recognised trading exchange. On the delivery date the manufacturer would
close out the futures in the futures market and then buy the required quantity in the spot market. The
profit/(loss) on the futures transaction should offset the increase/(decrease) in the spot price over the
period.
Hedge accounting is the accounting process which reflects in financial statements the commercial
substance of hedging activities. It results in the gains and losses on the linked items (eg, the
purchase of coffee beans and the futures market transactions) being recognised in the same
accounting period and in the same section of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income ie, both in profit or loss, or both in other comprehensive income.
Hedge accounting reduces or eliminates the volatility in profit or loss which would arise if the items
were not linked for accounting purposes.
Tutorial note
The forward contract is a derivative. Without hedge accounting, the profit/(loss) in the futures
market would be recognised as the contract is remeasured to fair value at each reporting date, but
the increased/(decreased) cost of the cocoa beans would be recognised at the later date when
the chocolate is sold. Both would be recognised in profit or loss, but possibly in different
accounting periods.
In the previous chapter the point was made that financial assets should be classified or designated at
the time of their initial recognition, not at any later date. This is to prevent businesses making
classifications or designations with the benefit of hindsight so as to present figures to their best
advantage. Similarly, hedge accounting is only permitted by IFRS 9, Financial Instruments if the
hedging relationship between the two items (the cocoa beans and the futures contract in the above
example) is designated at the inception of the hedge. Designation is insufficient by itself; there must
be formal documentation, both of the hedging relationship and of management’s objective in
undertaking the hedge.
1.1.2 IAS 39
The IASB currently allows an accounting policy choice to apply either the IFRS 9 hedging model or
the IAS 39 model, with an additional option to use IAS 39 for macro hedging (currently a separate
project) if using IFRS 9 for general hedge accounting (IFRS 9.7.2.21).
For this reason, the IAS 39 rules are covered in overview in section 9. However, IFRS 9 is the
examinable standard. For examination purposes you only need an awareness of the differences
between IAS 39 and IFRS 9 with regard to hedging.
1.2 Overview
In simple terms the main components of hedge accounting are as follows:
(a) The hedged item is an asset, a liability, a firm commitment (such as a contract to acquire a new
oil tanker in the future) or a forecast transaction (such as the issue in four months’ time of fixed
rate debt) which exposes the entity to risks of fair value/cash flow changes. The hedged item
generates the risk which is being hedged.
(b) The hedging instrument is a derivative or other financial instrument whose fair value/cash flow
changes are expected to offset those of the hedged item. The hedging instrument
reduces/eliminates the risk associated with the hedged item.
(c) There is a designated relationship between the item and the instrument which is documented.
(d) At inception the hedge must be expected to be highly effective and it must turn out to be highly
effective over the life of the relationship.
(e) To qualify for hedging, the changes in fair value/cash flows must have the potential to affect
profit or loss.
(f) There are two main types of hedge:
(1) The fair value hedge: the gain and loss on such a hedge are recognised in profit or loss.
(2) The cash flow hedge: the gain and loss on such a hedge are initially recognised in other
comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified to profit or loss.
Notes
1 The key reason for having the two types of hedge is that profits/losses are initially recognised in
different places.
2 In some circumstances the entity can choose whether to classify a hedge as a fair value or a cash
flow hedge.
3 There is a third type of hedge: the hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation, such as the
hedge of a loan in respect of a foreign currency subsidiary. This is accounted for similarly to cash
flow hedges.
Definitions
Forward contract: A commitment to undertake a future transaction at a set time and at a set price.
Future: This represents a commitment to an additional transaction in the future that limits the risk of
existing commitments.
Option: This represents a commitment by a seller to undertake a future transaction, where the buyer
has the option of not undertaking the transaction.
Solution
The transaction entered into by Red is a hedging transaction of a net investment in a foreign entity.
The loan is the hedging instrument and the investment in Blue is the hedged item.
As the loan has been designated as the hedging instrument at the outset, and the transaction meets
the hedging criteria of IFRS 9, the exchange movements in both items should be recognised in other
comprehensive income. Any ineffective portion of the hedge should be recognised in profit or loss
for the year.
Below are two simple illustrative examples of accounting for a fair value hedge and accounting for a
cash flow hedge. The definitions and rules for a fair value hedge and a cash flow hedge are covered
in greater detail in sections 5 and 6 of this chapter.
The customer account and the financial asset are then cleared by cash receipts. Note that revenue is
measured at the amount fixed as a result of the hedging transaction.
This section deals with detailed issues related to hedged items in a hedging relationship.
Definitions
Hedged item: An asset, liability, firm commitment, highly probable forecast transaction or net
investment in a foreign operation that:
• exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or future cash flows; and
• is designated as being hedged.
Firm commitment: A binding agreement for the exchange of a specified quantity of resources at a
specified price on a specified future date or dates.
Forecast transaction: An uncommitted but anticipated future transaction.
Note: Neither firm commitments nor forecast transactions are normally recognised in financial
statements. As is explained in more detail in a later part of this chapter, it is only when they are
designated as hedged items that they are recognised.
Solution
The portfolio cannot be designated as a hedged item. Similar financial instruments should be
aggregated and hedged as a group only if the change in fair value attributable to the hedged risk for
each individual item in the group is expected to be approximately proportional to the overall change
2.6 Components
IFRS 9 allows a component that is a proportion of an entire item or a layer component to be
designated as a hedged item in a hedging relationship. A layer component may be specified from a
defined, but open, population or a defined nominal amount. For example, an entity could designate
20% of a fixed rate bond as the hedged item, or the top layer of £20 principal from a total amount of
£100 (defined nominal amount) of fixed-rate bond. It is necessary to track the fair value movements
of the nominal amount from which the layer is defined.
Because forecast transactions can only be hedged under cash flow hedges, the ways to assess the
probability of a future transaction are covered below under cash flow hedges.
Solution
The hedge can qualify for hedge accounting. Since the Australian entity did not hedge the foreign
currency exchange risk associated with the forecast purchases in yen, the effects of exchange rate
changes between the Australian dollar and the yen will affect the Australian entity’s profit or loss and,
therefore, would also affect consolidated profit or loss. IFRS 9 does not require the operating unit
that is exposed to the risk being hedged to be a party to the hedging instrument.
3 Hedging instruments
Section overview
This section considers in detail the financial instruments that can be designated as hedging
instruments for hedge accounting purposes.
3.3 Options
Options provide a more flexible way of hedging risks compared to other derivative instruments such
as forwards, futures and swaps, because they give to the holder the choice as to whether or not to
exercise the option.
When an entity purchases a put option, it buys the right to sell the underlying at the strike price. If the
price of the underlying falls below the strike price, the entity exercises its option and receives the
strike price; it has protected the value of its position. Similarly, if an entity needs to buy an asset in the
future, it can purchase a call option on the asset that gives the entity the right to purchase the asset at
the strike price, protecting it from a rise in the price of the asset in the future.
The difference between the purchased option and a forward contract is that under a forward contract
the entity is obliged to buy or sell at the strike price, whereas under a purchased option it has the
right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell at the strike price.
Purchased options, whether call options or put options, have the potential to hedge price, currency
and interest rate risks and can always qualify as hedging instruments.
Examples of purchased options include options on equities, options on currencies and options on
interest rates. An interest rate floor is achieved through a put option on an interest rate, and an
interest rate cap is achieved through a call option on an interest rate.
In IFRS 9, an entity may designate only the change in intrinsic value of a purchased option as the
hedging instrument in a fair value or cash flow hedge. The change in fair value of the time value of
the option is recognised in other comprehensive income to the extent it relates to the hedged item.
This change in IFRS 9 makes options more attractive as hedging instruments.
The method used to reclassify the amounts from equity to profit or loss is determined by whether the
hedged item is transaction-related or time period-related.
The time value of a purchased option relates to a transaction-related hedged item if the nature of
the hedged item is a transaction for which the time value has the character of costs of the transaction.
For example, future purchase of a commodity or non-financial asset.
The change in fair value of the time value of an option (transaction-related hedged item) is
accumulated in other comprehensive income over the term of the hedge, to the extent it relates to
the hedged item. It is then treated as follows:
• If the hedged item results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or liability or firm
commitment for a non-financial asset or liability, the amount accumulated in equity is removed
and included in the initial cost or carrying amount of the asset or liability.
• For other hedging relationships, the amount accumulated in equity is reclassified to profit or loss
as a reclassification adjustment in the period(s) in which the hedged expected cash flows affect
profit or loss.
The time value of a purchased option relates to a time period-related hedged item if the following
apply:
(a) The nature of the hedged item is such that the time value has the character of the cost for
obtaining protection against a risk over a particular time period.
(b) The hedged item does not result in a transaction that involves the notion of a transaction cost.
The change in fair value of the time value of an option (time period-related hedged item) is
accumulated in other comprehensive income over the term of the hedge, to the extent it relates to
the hedged item. The time value of the option at the date of designation is amortised on a straight-
line or other systematic and rational basis, and the amortisation amount is reclassified to profit or loss
as a reclassification adjustment.
Hedge accounting is permitted in certain circumstances, provided the hedging relationship is clearly
defined, measurable and actually effective.
Definition
Hedge ratio: The relationship between the quantity of the hedging instrument and the quantity of
the hedged item in terms of their relative weighting.
IFRS 9 requires that the hedge ratio used for accounting purposes is the same as that used for risk
management purposes. This ensures that amounts are not manipulated in order to achieve a
particular accounting outcome.
The hedge effectiveness criteria are an example of an area where judgement must be applied.
Judgement is generally needed where risk management is concerned, but having arbitrary
percentage ranges, as IFRS 9’s predecessor did, does not make the criteria any more precise, and
could be misleading.
4.2 Rebalancing
Rebalancing refers to adjustments to the designated quantities of the hedged item, or the hedging
instrument of an already existing hedging relationship for the purpose of maintaining a hedge ratio
that complies with the hedge. This may be achieved by increasing or decreasing the volume of either
hedged item or hedging instrument.
The standard requires rebalancing to be undertaken if the risk management objective remains the
same, but the hedge effectiveness requirements are no longer met. Where the risk management
objective for a hedging relationship has changed, rebalancing does not apply and the hedging
relationship must be discontinued.
The application of fair value hedge accounting is discussed through a number of practical examples.
Equities Change in the value of the Market risk Purchase put option
investments due to (price risk)
changes in the price of
equity
Issued fixed rate bond Change in the value of the Market risk Interest rate swap
bond as interest rates (interest rate risk)
change
Solution
Yes. IFRS 9 does not require risk reduction on an entity-wide basis as a condition for hedge
accounting. Exposure is assessed on a transaction basis and, in this instance, the asset being hedged
has a fair value exposure* to interest rate increases that is offset by the interest rate swap.
* The fair value of a loan is the present value of the cash flows. A fixed rate loan has constant cash
flows so the fair value is directly affected by a change in the discount rate (ie, the market interest
rate).
To adjust the carrying amount of inventories by the loss in its fair value (because closing inventories
reduce cost of sale, a decrease in their carrying amount increases cost of sales and reduces profit).
The effect is as follows:
(a) The loss on the hedged item has been recognised in profit or loss.
(b) There is a nil net effect in profit or loss, because the hedge has been 100% effective.
(c) Inventories are carried at £380,000. This is neither cost (£400,000) nor fair value (£580,000).
(d) The entity has been protected against loss of profit. If it had sold the inventory on 1 November, it
would have made a profit of £200,000 (£600,000 – £400,000); if it sells the inventory on 1
January 20X6, it will make a profit of £200,000 (£580,000 – £380,000).
If only particular risks attributable to a hedged item are hedged, recognised changes in the hedged
item’s fair value unrelated to the hedged risk are recognised as normal. This means that changes in
fair value of a hedged financial asset or liability that is not part of the hedging relationship would be
accounted for as follows:
(a) For instruments measured at amortised cost, such changes would not be recognised.
(b) For instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss, such changes would be recognised
in profit or loss in any event.
(c) For equity instruments in respect of which another comprehensive income election has been
made, such changes would be recognised in other comprehensive income, as explained above.
However, exceptions to this would include foreign currency gains and losses on monetary items
and impairment losses, which would be recognised in profit or loss in any event.
If the fair value hedge is 100% effective (as in the above example), then the change in the fair value
of the hedged item will be wholly offset by the change in the fair value of the hedging instrument
and there will be no effect in profit or loss. Whenever the hedge is not perfect and the change in the
fair value of the hedged item is not fully cancelled by change in the fair value of the hedging
instrument, the resulting difference will be recognised in profit or loss. This difference is referred to
as hedge ineffectiveness.
Solution
Entries
Debit Credit
1 July 20X6 £ £
Inventory 2,000,000
Cash 2,000,000
(To record the initial purchase of material)
At 31 December 20X6 the increase in the fair value of the inventory was £200,000 (10,000 × (£220 –
£200)) and the increase in the forward contract liability was £170,000 (10,000 × (£227 – £210)).
Hedge effectiveness was 85% (170,000 as a % of 200,000). Hedge accounting is still permitted.
Debit Credit
31 December 20X6 £ £
Profit or loss 170,000
Financial liability 170,000
At 30 June 20X7 the increase in the fair value of the inventory was another £100,000 (10,000 × (£230
– £220)) and the increase in the forward contract liability was another £30,000 (10,000 × (£230 –
£227)).
Debit Credit
30 June 20X7 £ £
Profit or loss 30,000
Financial liability 30,000
(To record the loss on the forward contract)
Inventories 100,000
Profit or loss 100,000
(To record the increase in the fair value of the inventories)
Profit or loss 2,300,000
Inventories 2,300,000
(To record the inventories now sold)
Cash 2,300,000
Profit or loss – revenue 2,300,000
(To record the revenue from the sale of inventories)
Financial liability 200,000
Cash 200,000
(To record the settlement of the net balance due on closing the
financial liability)
Note that because the fair value of the material rose, the trader made a profit of only £100,000 on the
sale of inventories. Without the forward contract, the profit would have been £300,000 (£2,300,000 –
£2,000,000). In the light of the rising fair value, the trader might in practice have closed out the
futures position earlier, rather than waiting until the settlement date.
Solution
If interest rates increase, the fair value of the fixed rate financial asset will decrease. Zeta Bank
requires a futures position that will yield profits when interest rates increase to offset this loss. It
should therefore sell £(10,000,000/500,000) = 20 futures contracts. If the interest rate increases, the
gain on the futures position will offset the loss on the fixed rate financial asset.
Zeta Bank should designate the futures contract as the hedging instrument and the fixed rate
financial asset as the hedged item in a fair value hedge. If the IFRS 9 conditions for hedge accounting
are met, the fair value movements on the futures contract and the financial asset will be recognised
and offset in profit or loss.
The application of cash flow hedge accounting is discussed in this section through a series of
practical examples.
Solution
Bets is hedging the volatility of the future cash inflow from selling the gold jewellery. The futures
contracts can be accounted for as a cash flow hedge in respect of those inflows, providing the criteria
for hedge accounting are met.
The gain on the forward contract should be calculated as:
£
Forward value of contract at 31.10.X1 (24,000 × £388) 9,312,000
Forward value of contract at 30.9.X2 (24,000 × £352) 8,448,000
Gain on contract 864,000
The change in the fair value of the expected future cash flows on the hedged item (which is not
recognised in the financial statements) should be calculated as:
£
At 31.10.X1 9,938,000
At 30.9.X2 9,186,000
752,000
As this change in fair value is less than the gain on the forward contract, the hedge is not fully
effective and only £752,000 of the gain on the forward should be recognised in other
comprehensive income. The remainder should be recognised in profit or loss:
£ £
DEBIT Financial asset (Forward a/c) 864,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 752,000
CREDIT Profit or loss 112,000
A hedging relationship continues to qualify for hedge accounting if it is effective. In this case:
• an economic relationship continues to exist between the hedged item and hedging instrument
(since they are both gold); and
• the effect of credit risk does not dominate the value changes that result from the economic
relationship.
The third criterion for hedge effectiveness is that the hedge ratio of the hedging relationship is the
same as that resulting from the quantity of hedged item that the entity actually hedges and the
quantity of hedging instrument that the entity actually uses to hedge that quantity of hedged items.
Since this hedge relationship results in a gain on futures contract of £864,000 but a loss on hedged
item of only £752,000, it appears that the relationship should be rebalanced.
The current hedge ratio is 1:1 (with hedged item and hedging instrument both based on 24,000 troy
ounces of gold); to maintain 100% effectiveness this should be reset by reducing the quantity of
hedging instrument to 20,889 troy ounces (752/864 × 24,000) or increasing the quantity of hedged
item to 27,574 troy ounces (864/752 × 24,000).
The above question contains quite a lot of information, but you should quickly have spotted the fact
that RapidMart is expanding and moving into new areas of business. Cash flow is likely to be an issue,
as is volatility in prices.
This section discusses issues specific to the accounting treatment of hedge of net investments.
7.1 Definition
Hedges of a net investment arise in the consolidated accounts where a parent company takes a
foreign currency loan in order to buy shares in a foreign subsidiary. The loan and the investment
need not be denominated in the same currency, however, assuming that the currencies perform
similarly against the parent company’s own currency, it should be the case that fluctuations in the
exchange rate affect the asset (the net assets of the subsidiary) and the liability (the loan) in opposite
ways, hence gains and losses are hedged.
In this type of accounting hedge, the hedging instrument is the foreign currency loan rather than a
derivative.
€ £
At 30 June 20X6 20,000,000 13,157,895
At 30 June 20X7 20,000,000 13,513,514
Exchange gain 355,619
There is a corresponding loss on the foreign currency loan of £355,619. Because the hedge is
perfectly effective, both the gain and the entire loss will be recognised in other comprehensive
income. There is no ineffective portion of the loss on the hedging instrument to be recognised in
profit or loss.
Foreign currency Either fair value hedge or cash flow Cash flow hedge
hedge
It may not be immediately obvious what type of hedge is being used. The above tables sum up the
treatment and can be used as an overview in order to structure your thinking about the information
in the question.
8 Disclosures
Section overview
Under IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures an entity should disclose the following separately for
each type of hedge described in IFRS 9 (ie, fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges of net
investments in foreign operations):
• A description of each type of hedge
• A description of the financial instruments designated as hedging instruments and their fair values
at the reporting date
• The nature of the risks being hedged
For cash flow hedges, an entity should disclose the following:
• The periods when the cash flows are expected to occur and when they are expected to affect
profit or loss
• A description of any forecast transaction for which hedge accounting had previously been used,
but which is no longer expected to occur
• The amount that was recognised in other comprehensive income during the period
• The amount that was reclassified from equity to profit or loss for the year, showing the amount
included in each line item in the statement of comprehensive income
• The amount that was reclassified from equity during the period and included in the initial cost or
other carrying amount of a non-financial asset or non-financial liability whose acquisition or
incurrence was a hedged highly probable forecast transaction
An entity should disclose the following separately:
• In fair value hedges, gains or losses:
– on the hedging instrument; and
– on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk
• The ineffectiveness recognised in profit or loss that arises from cash flow hedges
• This section provides an overview of the hedging rules in IFRS 9’s predecessor, IAS 39, Financial
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement.
• Entities may apply the new IFRS 9 rules in their entirety, or entities may apply the hedge
accounting rules of IAS 39 to all of their hedging relationships while following the classification
and measurement rules of IFRS 9.
• Entities undertaking macro hedging activities may apply the new general hedge accounting
model in IFRS 9 while continuing to apply the specific macro hedging requirements of IAS 39.
• IFRS 9 is the default standard for your exam.
Note: For the purpose of the exam, the candidate would be expected to use IFRS 9, but must
understand the main differences in IAS 39, which can still be applied with regard to hedging.
IFRS 9 IAS 39
Therefore, under IAS 39 non-derivative items are less widely used as hedging instruments than
under IFRS 9.
Therefore fewer items can be designated as hedged items under IAS 39.
Qualifying criteria Hedge effectiveness criteria are A hedging relationship only qualifies for
for applying principles-based and aligned with hedge accounting if certain criteria are
hedge risk management activities. met, including a quantitative hedge
accounting effectiveness test under which hedge
effectiveness must fall in the range
80%125%.
Therefore genuine hedging relationships captured by IFRS 9 may be missed when applying IAS
39 rules.
Lack of guidance on rebalancing means that hedge accounting needs to be discontinued under
IAS 39, while it could continue under IFRS 9.
The absence of strict discontinuation rules means that IAS 39 was less precise than IFRS 9.
Accounting for The time value component of an The forward element of a forward
the time value option is a cost of hedging contract may also be presented in OCI.
component of presented in OCI. The part of an option that reflects time
options and value and the forward element of a
forward contracts forward contract are treated as
derivatives held for trading purposes.
IAS 39 therefore led to greater volatility in profit or loss than IFRS 9 does.
• Fair value measurements of assets, liabilities and components of equity may arise from both the
initial recording of transactions and later changes in value.
• Auditing fair value requires both the assessment of risk and evaluating the appropriateness of the
fair value and how it is disclosed.
• Fair value is a key issue to investment property, pension costs, share-based payments and many
other areas of financial accounting.
• Financial instruments include items such as cash, accounts receivable and payable, loans
receivable and payable, debt and equity investments, and derivatives.
• Financial instruments should be classified as either financial assets, financial liabilities or equity
instruments.
• The key audit issue with these instruments is risk and IAS 32; IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 deal with the
accounting/disclosure related to these instruments.
• Guidance for the auditor is provided by IAPN 1000.
As was mentioned in connection with derivatives in the previous chapter, the complexity of hedging
makes clear and transparent communication essential.
12 Auditing derivatives
Section overview
It is necessary for auditors to understand the process of derivative trading in order to audit
derivatives successfully.
Solution
Capture of information: The primary source document is the trader’s deal sheet. This document
should contain the date, time, oil index, quantity traded, position (long or short), nature of trade
(hedge or speculation) and rationale for the trade.
Processing of information: The back office report should contain the same information as in the deal
sheet.
Confirmation of information: There should be a statement from the clearing agents (since these are
futures) confirming the details. (Note: Swaps transactions would be confirmed differently, via
counterparty and broker confirmations and options are confirmed in the same way that futures are.)
Depositing of margin money: There should be evidence that margin money had been deposited
with the exchange as required (in case the mark to market crosses the exchange’s threshold limits).
Settlement: There will be clearing statements from clearing agents. These should be used in
collaboration with internally generated information to confirm that the appropriate settlement
amounts changed hands.
Accounting: The deals have been accounted for correctly.
In all these processes controls will have been implemented and the auditor should identify these and
assess their utility.
1. What are the three types of hedge dealt with in IFRS 9, Financial Instruments? (Topic 1)
4. Do you understand the conditions that must be met for hedge accounting to be applied?
(Topic 4)
6. What are the main issues for the auditor when auditing derivatives? (Topic 7)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
JayGee This question requires explanation rather than calculation, which could
happen in an exam, particularly in the context of decision making for the
future.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Kime (note 2 only) This part of the question deals with hedging a trade receivable from a
customer located abroad using a forward contract.
Johnson Telecom This is a must-do full question on financial instruments, integrating FR and
audit. Instruments covered are: investments in equity instruments,
derivatives (with hedging), debt investments and a loan note.
Tydaway (forward You are asked to consider four hedging scenarios relating to how the
contract with China forward contract should be treated.
only)
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
2 Hedge accounting
• Definition – IFRS 9 Appendix A
• Conditions – IFRS 9 6.4.1
3 Hedging instruments
• Qualifying instruments – IFRS 9 6.2.1
• Written and purchased options – IFRS 9 6.2.1
• Non-qualifying instruments – IFRS 9 6.4.1
• Designations of hedging instruments – IFRS 9 6.2.1
7 Hedge effectiveness
• Criteria – IFRS 9 6.4.1
• Timing of assessment and methods of assessing effectiveness – IFRS 9 6.4.1
1 Hedging
A company owns 100,000 barrels of crude oil which were purchased on 1 July 20X2 at a cost of
$26.00 per barrel.
In order to hedge the fluctuation in the market value of the oil, the company signs a futures contract
on the same date to deliver 100,000 barrels of oil on 31 March 20X3 at a futures price of $27.50 per
barrel. The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Due to unexpected increases in production, the market price of oil on 31 December 20X2 was
$22.50 per barrel and the futures price for delivery on 31 March 20X3 was $23.25 per barrel at that
date.
Requirement
Explain the impact of the transactions on the financial statements of the company for the year ended
31 December 20X2.
2 Columba
The Columba Company has hedged the cash flows relating to its interest rate risk by purchasing an
interest rate cap. The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Additional interest charges up to the end of the financial year amount to £17,000 while the fair value
of the interest rate cap increased by £20,000.
Requirement
What amount relating to the interest rate cap should be recorded in profit or loss?
3 Pula
The Pula Company manufactures heavy engineering equipment which it sells in many countries
throughout the world. The functional currency of Pula is the pound (£).
On 1 November 20X7 Pula entered into a contract with the Roadmans Company, whose functional
currency is the N$, to sell a bulldozer for delivery on 1 April 20X8. The contract price is fixed in N$.
Also on 1 November 20X7, Pula entered into a foreign currency forward contract to hedge its future
exposure to changes in the £:N$ exchange rate, arising from the contract with Roadmans.
The conditions for hedge accounting were met.
Requirement
What designations are available to Pula in respect of the hedging arrangement?
4 JayGee
On 1 August 20X1, JayGee entered into a non-cancellable purchase order to acquire equipment
from Zenda Corporation, a Ruritanian entity, at 300 million rurits (Ru). Payment is made upon delivery
of the equipment to the UK on 31 December 20X1. On 30 September 20X1, JayGee entered into a
forward contract to exchange Ru 300 million at a pre-determined exchange rate between the rurit
and pound sterling on 31 December 20X1. The functional currency of JayGee is the pound sterling
(£).
Requirement
Discuss the accounting implications for the purchase contract and forward contract if fair value
hedge accounting is adopted.
6 Anew plc
Anew plc (Anew), a client of your firm, has recently established a treasury and investment division
within its existing business. The division deals in derivatives, in addition to other treasury and
investment instruments, for both trading and hedging purposes. Most of the company’s derivative
trading activities relate to sales, positioning and arbitrage. Sales activities involve offering products to
customers and banks in order to enable them to transfer, modify or reduce current and future risks.
Positioning involves managing market risk positions with the expectation of profiting from favourable
movements in prices, rates or indices. Arbitrage involves profiting from price differentials between
markets or products.
The company has adopted a comprehensive system for the measurement and management of risk.
Part of the risk management process involves managing the company’s exposure to fluctuations in
foreign exchange and commission rates, to reduce exposure to currency and commission rate risks
to acceptable levels as determined by the board of directors within the guidelines issued by the
Central Bank. The company uses different types of derivatives, including swaps, forwards and futures,
forward rate agreements, options and swaptions.
£m
Share capital (£1 shares) 10.0
Retained earnings 9.6
Long-term debt (11% irredeemable bonds) 8.2
Corporation tax rate: 23%. The current share price of TP is £12.48 and the P/E ratio is 8 (before
interest charges). The company operates a policy that any additional debt financing must reduce the
company’s overall cost of capital.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
£m
Profit for the year 1.000
Other comprehensive income
Loss on forward contract (0.268)
Total comprehensive income 0.732
Being the initial recognition of investment in equity instruments at fair value, including
transaction costs (W1).
Measurement at 31 July 20X3
Being the gain on remeasurement of the investment in equity instruments (W2). (The gain will be
recognised in other components of equity.)
WORKINGS
(1) Fair value March 20X3
£
Fair value (40,000 shares @ £2.68) 107,200
Commission (5% × 107,200) 5,360
112,560
£
Fair value (40,000 shares @ £2.96) 118,400
Previous value (112,560)
5,840
£
Fair value at 31 December 20X3 (40,000 × £22.25) 890,000
Fair value at 1 December 20X3 = cost (800,000)
Gain 90,000
The gain should also be recognised in profit or loss and adjusted against the carrying amount of
the inventories:
The net effect on profit or loss is a gain of £10,000 compared with a loss of £80,000 without
hedging.
WORKING
£m
Market price of forward contract for delivery on 31 December (1m × £2.16) 2.16
RapidMart’s forward price (1m × £2.04) (2.04)
Cumulative gain 0.12
The gain is recognised in other comprehensive income as the cash flow has not yet occurred:
£’000
Receivable originally recorded (30,240/5.6) 5,400
Receivable at year end (30,240/5.4) 5,600
Exchange gain 200
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Trade receivables 200
CREDIT Profit or loss (other income) 200
Forward contract
As the change in cash flow affects profit or loss in the current period, a reclassification adjustment is
required (£’000):
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Profit or loss 200
CREDIT Other comprehensive income 200
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Other comprehensive income 120
CREDIT Financial liability 120
The tax treatment follows the IFRS treatment. However, the current tax credit has not yet been
recorded. This is credited to other comprehensive income rather than profit or loss, as the loss itself
on the contract is recognised in other comprehensive income (IAS 12.61A):
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Current tax liability (SOFP) (120 × 30%) 36
CREDIT Income tax credit (OCI) 36
$
[(–1mGBP/0.6440 + (1mGBP/0.6202)) × (1/1.003251/12)] 59,572
At 31 October 20X1 (zero at inception) (0)
Change in fair value of forward contract (gain) 59,572
The company has designated changes in the spot element of the forward contract as the hedge. The
change in the spot element is:
$
[(–1mGBP/0.6435 + (1mGBP/0.6195)) × (1/1.003251/12)] 60,187
At 31 October 20X1 (zero at inception) (0)
Change in fair value of spot element of forward contract (gain) 60,187
$ $
Forward contract 59,572
DEBIT Finance costs (P/L) (60,187 – 59,572) 615
CREDIT Profit or loss 60,187
Profit or loss: $
Loss on foreign currency receivable (60,203)
Gain on hedging instrument 60,187
Finance costs (615)
Current assets $
Trade receivables (1,614,205 – 60,203) 1,554,002
Forward contract hedging instrument 59,572
1 Hedging
The futures contract was entered into to protect the company from a fall in oil prices and hedge the
value of the inventories. It is therefore a fair value hedge.
The inventories should be recorded at their cost of $2,600,000 (100,000 barrels at $26) on 1 July
20X2.
The futures contract has a zero value at the date it is entered into, so no entry is made in the financial
statements.
Note: However, the existence of the contract and associated risk would be disclosed from that date
in accordance with IFRS 7.
At the year end the inventories should be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
Hence they should be measured at $2,250,000 (100,000 barrels at $22.50) and a loss of $350,000
recognised in profit or loss.
However, a gain has been made on the futures contract:
$
The company has a contract to sell 100,000 barrels on 31 March 20X3 at $27.50 2,750,000
A contract entered into at the year end would sell these barrels at $23.25 on 31
March 20X3 2,325,000
Gain (= the value the contract could be sold on for to a third party) 425,000
The gain on the futures contract should also be recognised in profit or loss:
The net effect on profit or loss is a gain of $75,000 ($425,000 less $350,000), whereas without the
hedging contract there would have been a loss of $350,000.
Note: If the fair value of the inventories had increased, the carrying amount of the inventories should
have been increased by the same amount and this gain also recognised in profit or loss (normally
gains on inventories are not recognised until the goods are sold). A loss would have occurred on the
futures contract, which should also have been recognised in profit or loss.
2 Columba
A gain of £3,000 should be recognised in profit or loss.
The ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument should be recognised in profit
or loss. In a cash flow hedge the amount to be recognised in other comprehensive income is the
lower of:
• the cumulative gain/loss on the hedging instrument ie, £20,000; and
• the cumulative change in fair value of the hedged item ie, £17,000.
So £17,000. This leaves £3,000 of the increase in the fair value of the cap to be recognised in profit
or loss.
3 Pula
The hedging relationship may be designated either a fair value hedge or a cash flow hedge.
The contract to sell the bulldozer represents a firm commitment with Roadmans, not merely a
proposed transaction, and it is expressed in a currency other than Pula’s functional currency. A hedge
4 JayGee
If JayGee designates the hedge as a fair value hedge, the non-cancellable purchase order in rurits is
considered as a firm commitment to be hedged (hedged item) in connection with the spot foreign
currency risk.
The rurit forward contract is considered to be the hedging instrument.
As a financial derivative, the rurit forward contract will have been reported at fair value on each
reporting date, with gains or losses reported in profit or loss.
Under a fair value hedge, the change in fair value of the firm commitment related to the hedged risk
will also be recognised in profit or loss and adjusts the carrying amount of the hedged item. This
applies if the hedged item is otherwise measured at cost. For JayGee’s hedged item, which is an
unrecognised firm commitment, its cumulative change in the fair value attributable to the hedged
risk is recognised as an asset or liability.
%
Interest on fixed loan currently paid 8.5
Received from LP under swap agreement (8.8)
Difference (0.3)
Payment by T&T to LP under swap agreement (LIBOR + 1) 6 + 1.0
Total variable payments by T&T 6.7
£ £
T&T currently pays – fixed (8.5% × £2.5m) 212,500
Will pay
Interest (6.7% × £2.5m) 167,500
Bank charge (0.04% × £2.5m) 1,000
(168,500)
Net annual saving 44,000
Year Bal b/d Finance cost (10%) Cash paid Closing balance
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
1 10,712 1,071 (490) 11,293
2 11,293 1,129 (490) 11,932
3 11,932 1,193 (1,510) 11,615
4 11,615 1,162 (1,510) 11,267
5 11,267 1,127 (1,510) 10,884
6 10,884 1,088 (1,510) 10,462
7 10,462 1,046 (1,510) 9,998
(Rounding error of
£2,000)
The effect given in the financial statements is that of smoothing the costs relating to the debt, with
costs greater than interest actually paid in early years and lower in later years.
The above calculations assume that there is no value attributable to equity conversion rights. The
split accounting treatment in IAS 32 should really use the interest rate on similar bonds without
conversion rights, rather than the 10% rate above, to determine the value of the liability. A constant
rate would apply to all seven years.
Investment criteria
Assuming that the debt is held to redemption, then the cost of debt (yield to redemption) after tax is
found by trial and error. As an initial guess, the cost of debt is likely to be between 15.1% and 4.9%,
and less than the 10% calculated above because of the tax relief on interest, say 8%.
By trial and error therefore:
10.712m = (1 – 0.23)(0.49m × AF2@kd) + (1 – 0.23)(1.51m × AF3–7@kd) + (10m/(1+kd)7)
Try 8%:
RHS = (0.77 × 0.49m × 1.783) + (0.77 × 1.51m × (3.993/1.082) ) + 5.835m
= 0.673m + 3.980m + 5.835m
= 10.488m
This is discounted too much, therefore decrease rate.
Try 7%:
RHS = (0.77 × 0.49m × 1.808) + (0.77 × 1.51m × (4.1/1.072) ) + 6.227m
= 0.682m + 4.164m + 6.227m
= 11.073m
The actual value of 10.712 million is approximately 40% between the two values and thus the after-
tax cost of debt is approximately 7.6%, ie, substituting kd = 7.6% confirms that this is the IRR or cost
of debt after tax.
The impact on WACC, the cost of capital for the company, can then be determined.
The current (growth-adjusted) cost of equity of the company can be found by inverting the P/E ratio.
Thus:
1/8 = 12.5%
Employee benefits
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Objectives and scope of IAS 19, Employee Benefits
2 Short-term employee benefits
3 Post-employment benefits overview
4 Defined contribution plans
5 Defined benefit plans – recognition and measurement
6 Defined benefit plans – other matters
7 Defined benefit plans – disclosure
8 Other long-term employee benefits
9 Termination benefits
10 IAS 26, Accounting and Reporting by Retirement Benefit Plans
11 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
18
Learning outcomes
• Explain how different methods of providing remuneration for employees may impact upon
reported performance and position
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to employee remuneration which include
different forms of short-term and long-term employee compensation; retirement benefits; and
share-based payment
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 5(a), 5(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
18
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
IAS 19, Employee Benefits should be applied by all entities in accounting for the provision of all
employee benefits, except those benefits which are equity based and to which IFRS 2, Share-based
Payment applies. The standard applies regardless of whether the benefits have been provided as
part of a formal contract or an informal arrangement.
Employee benefits are all forms of consideration, for example cash bonuses, retirement benefits and
private health care, given to an employee by an entity in exchange for the employee’s services.
A number of accounting issues arise due to:
• the valuation problems linked to some forms of employee benefits; and
• the timing of benefits, which may not always be provided in the same period as the one in which
the employee’s services are provided.
IAS 19 is structured by considering the following employee benefits:
• Short-term employee benefits; such as wages, salaries, bonuses and paid holidays
• Post-employment benefits; such as pensions and post-retirement health cover
• Other long-term employee benefits; such as sabbatical and long-service leave
• Termination benefits; such as redundancy and severance pay
Short-term employee benefits are those that fall due within 12 months from the end of the period in
which the employees provide their services. The required accounting treatment is to recognise the
benefits to be paid in exchange for the employee’s services in the period on an accruals basis.
Definition
Short-term employee benefits: Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that fall due
within 12 months from the end of the period in which the employees provide their services.
Definition
Short-term compensated absences: Compensated absences are periods of absence from work for
which the employee receives some form of payment and which are expected to occur within 12
months of the end of the period in which the employee renders the services.
Examples of short-term compensated absences are paid annual vacation and paid sick leave.
Short-term compensated absences fall into two categories:
• Accumulating absences. These are benefits, such as paid annual vacation, that accrue over an
employee’s period of service and can potentially be carried forward and used in future periods;
and
• Non-accumulating absences. These are benefits that an employee is entitled to, but are not
normally capable of being carried forward to the following period if they are unused during the
period, for example paid sick leave, maternity leave and compensated absences for jury service.
The cost of providing compensation for accumulating absences should be recognised as an expense
as the employee provides the services on which the entitlement to such benefits accrues. Where an
employee has an unused entitlement at the end of the reporting period and the entity expects to
provide the benefit, a liability should be created.
The cost of providing compensation for non-accumulating absences should be expensed as the
absences occur.
Solution
An expense should be recognised as part of staff costs for:
5 employees × 20 days × £50 = £5,000
Four of the employees use their complete entitlement for the year and the other, having used 16
days, is permitted to carry forward the remaining four days to the following period. A liability will be
recognised at the period end for:
1 employee × 4 days × £50 = £200
Requirement
How should the expense be recognised?
Solution
An expense should be recognised for the year in which the profits were made and therefore the
employees’ services were provided, for:
£120,000 × 4% = £4,800
Each of the four employees remaining with the entity at the year end is entitled to £1,200. A liability
of £4,800 should be recognised if the bonuses remain unpaid at the year end.
Conditions may be attached to such bonus payments; commonly, the employee must still be in the
entity’s employment when the bonus becomes payable. An estimate should be made based on the
expectation of the level of bonuses that will ultimately be paid. IAS 19 sets out that a reliable estimate
for bonus or profit-sharing arrangements can be made only when:
• there are formal terms setting out determination of the amount of the benefit;
• the amount payable is determined by the entity before the financial statements are authorised for
issue; or
• past practice provides clear evidence of the amount of a constructive obligation.
Solution
The bonus to be recognised as an expense in the year ended 30 June 20X5 is:
£4m × 4% × (100 – 8)% = £147,200
Post-employment benefits are employee benefits which are payable after the completion of
employment.
These can be in the form of either of the following:
• Defined contribution schemes where the future pension depends on the value of the fund.
• Defined benefit schemes where the future pension depends on the final salary and years worked.
Definition
Post-employment benefits: Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) which are payable
after the completion of employment. The benefit plans may have been set up under formal or
informal arrangements.
Definitions
Investment risk: This is the risk that, due to poor investment performance, there will be insufficient
funds in the plan to meet the expected benefits.
Actuarial risk: This is the risk that the actuarial assumptions such as those on employee turnover, life
expectancy or future salaries vary significantly from what actually happens.
In the case of pension plans, particularly defined benefit plans, accountants and auditors need to rely
on the judgement of actuaries, whose calculations may lie outside their field of expertise. In turn, the
actuaries themselves may rely on assumptions from external parties about the future direction of the
economy and other matters.
These are defined by IAS 19 as all plans other than defined contribution plans.
Characteristics of a defined benefit plan are as follows:
• The amount of pension paid to retirees is defined by reference to factors such as length of service
and salary levels (ie, it is guaranteed).
• Contributions into the plan are therefore variable depending on how the plan is performing in
relation to the expected future obligation (ie, if there is a shortfall, contributions will increase and
vice versa).
Contribution levels
The actuary advises the company on contributions necessary to produce the defined benefits (‘the
funding plan’). It cannot be certain in advance that contributions plus returns on investments will
equal benefits to be paid.
Formal actuarial valuations will be performed periodically (eg, every three years) to reveal any
surplus or deficit on the scheme at a given date. Contributions may be varied as a result; for
example, the actuary may recommend a contribution holiday (a period during which no
contributions are made) to eliminate a surplus.
Risk associated with defined benefit schemes
As the employer is obliged to make up any shortfall in the plan, it is effectively underwriting the
investment and actuarial risk associated with the plan. Thus in a defined benefit plan, the employer
carries both the investment and the actuarial risk.
Accounting for defined contribution plans is straightforward, as the obligation is determined by the
amount paid into the plan in each period.
Solution
Total expense
£
Salaries 10,500,000
Bonus 3,000,000
13,500,000 × 5% = £675,000
£ £
DEBIT Staff costs expenses 675,000
CREDIT cash 510,000
CREDIT accruals 165,000
The accounting treatment for defined benefit plans is more complex than that applied to defined
contribution plans:
• The value of the pension plan is recognised in the sponsoring employer’s statement of financial
position.
• Movements in the value of the pension plan are broken down into constituent parts and
accounted for separately.
£
Present value of the defined benefit obligation at the reporting date X
Fair value of plan assets at the reporting date (X)
Plan deficit/surplus X/(X)
Definition
Defined benefit obligation: The defined benefit obligation is the present value of all expected future
payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee service in the current and prior
periods.
Definition
Plan assets: Those assets held by a long-term benefit fund and those insurance policies which are
held by an entity, where the fund/entity is legally separate from the employer and assets/policies can
only be used to fund employee benefits.
Investments owned by the employer which have been earmarked for employee benefits but which
the employer could use for different purposes are not plan assets.
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (IFRS 13)
Guidance on fair value is given in IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (see Chapter 2, section 4). Under
IFRS 13, fair value is a market-based measurement, not an entity-specific measurement. It focuses on
assets and liabilities and on exit (selling) prices. It also takes into account market conditions at the
measurement date.
IFRS 13 states that valuation techniques must be those which are appropriate and for which sufficient
data are available. Entities should maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and minimise the
use of unobservable inputs.
PV of defined
benefit obligation FV of plan assets
£ £
B/f at start of year (advised by actuary) (X) X
Retirement benefits paid out X (X)
Contributions paid into plan X
Interest on plan assets X
Interest cost on obligation (X)
Current service cost (X)
– –
(X) X
Gains/losses on remeasurement (balancing figure) X/(X) X/(X)
C/f at end of year (advised by actuary) (X) X
Note that while the interest on plan assets and interest on obligation are calculated separately, they
are presented net and the same rate is used for both.
Note that there is no cash entry, as the pension plan itself rather than the sponsoring employer pays
the money out.
Definition
Return on plan assets: Defined as interest, dividends and other revenue derived from plan assets
together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets, less any costs of
administering the plan and less any tax payable by the plan itself.
Accounting for the return on plan assets is explained in more detail below.
Component Recognised in
(2) Net interest on the net defined benefit liability Profit or loss
(3) Remeasurements of the net defined benefit liability Other comprehensive income (not
reclassified to profit or loss)
Solution
Interest cost to be debited to profit or loss
£
Year 1:
Discounted cost b/f 296,000
Interest cost (profit or loss) (8% × £296,000) 23,680
Obligation c/f (statement of financial position) 319,680
Year 2:
Interest cost (profit or loss) (8% × £319,680) 25,574
Obligation c/f (statement of financial position) 345,254
Solution
It is always useful to set up a working reconciling the assets and obligation:
Assets Obligation
£ £
Fair value/present value at 1.1.X2 1,100,000 1,250,000
Interest (1,100,000 × 6%)/(1,250,000 × 6%) 66,000 75,000
Current service cost 360,000
Contributions received 490,000
Benefits paid (190,000) (190,000)
Return on plan assets excluding amounts in net interest
(balancing figure) (OCI) 34,000 –
Loss on remeasurement (balancing figure) (OCI) – 58,600
1,500,000 1,553,600
£
In profit or loss:
Current service cost 360,000
Net interest on net defined benefit liability (75,000 – 66,000) 9,000
(2) In the statement of financial position, the net defined benefit liability of £53,600 (1,553,600 –
1,500,000) will be recognised.
We have now covered the basics of accounting for defined benefit plans. This section looks at the
special circumstances of:
• past service costs
• curtailments
• settlements
• asset ceiling test
6.1.3 Accounting for past service cost and gains and losses on settlement
An entity should remeasure the obligation (and the related plan assets, if any) using current actuarial
assumptions, before determining past service cost or a gain or loss on settlement.
Solution
A benefit of £100 is attributed to each year.
The current service cost = the present value of £100.
The present value of the defined benefit obligation = the present value of £100 × number of years of
service to reporting date.
Solution
Current service cost to be debited to profit or loss
Year 1 2 3 4 5
£ £ £ £ £
Current year benefit 500 500 500 500 500
Current service cost 500 ÷ (1.1) 4
500 ÷ (1.1) 3
500 ÷ (1.1) 2
500 ÷ (1.1)
= 342 = 376 = 413 = 455 500
PV of defined benefit
obligation 342 376 × 2 413 × 3 455 × 4 500 × 5
= 752 = 1,239 = 1,820 = 2,500
Note: Previously we have said that the present value of the obligation moves from year to year due
to: payments out to retirees, the unwinding of one year’s discount, and the current service cost.
This can be applied to Year 2 as follows:
£
PV of defined benefit obligation b/f 342
Unwinding of discount (342 × 10%) 34
Loss
DEBIT – Service cost (P/L)
CREDIT – PV defined benefit obligation
(SOFP)
The good news is that exam pension questions usually give rise to the structured approach
suggested in the above table. However, the question is unlikely to have all the elements in the table,
for example, a settlement.
£m
Present value of obligation 208
Fair value of plan assets 200
Current service cost for the year 176
Contributions paid 160
The directors are aware that IAS 19 has been revised but are unsure how to treat any gain or loss on
remeasurement of the plan asset or liability.
Requirement
Show how the defined benefit pension plan should be dealt with in the financial statements for the
year ended 31 December 20X3.
As you will have seen in the above interactive questions, all the information given in the pensions
element of a question is used in the answer. Assimilating it and using it is therefore the
straightforward bit, at least in the exam. In practice, this may be much harder.
The disclosure requirements for defined benefit plans are extensive and detailed in order to enable
users to understand the plan and the nature and extent of the entity’s commitment.
Detailed disclosure requirements are set out in IAS 19 in relation to defined benefit plans, to provide
users of the financial statements with information that enables an evaluation of the nature of the plan
and the financial effect of any changes in the plan during the period.
Requirements for disclosures include a description of the plan, a reconciliation of the fair value of
plan assets from the opening to closing position, the actual return on plan assets, a reconciliation of
movements in the present value of the defined benefit obligation during the period, an analysis of
the total expense recognised in profit or loss, and the principal actuarial assumptions made.
Additional disclosures set out in the amendment to IAS 19 include:
• an analysis of the defined benefit obligation between amounts relating to unfunded and funded
plans;
• a reconciliation of the present value of the defined benefit obligation between the opening and
closing statement of financial position, separately identifying each component in the
reconciliation;
• a reconciliation of the present value of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of the
plan assets to the pension asset or liability recognised in the statement of financial position;
• a breakdown of plan assets for the entity’s own financial instruments, for example an equity
interest in the employing entity held by the pension plan and any property occupied by the entity
or other assets used by the entity;
• for each major category of plan assets the percentage or amount that it represents of the total fair
value of plan assets;
• the effect of a one percentage point increase or decrease in the assumed medical cost trend rate
on amounts recognised during the period, such as service cost and the pension obligation
relating to medical costs;
• amounts for the current annual period and the previous four annual periods of the present value
of the defined benefit obligation, fair value of plan assets and the resulting pension surplus or
deficit, and experience adjustments on the plan liabilities and assets in percentage or value terms;
and
• an estimate of the level of future contributions to be made in the following reporting period.
The accounting treatment for other long-term employee benefits is a simplified version of that
adopted for defined benefit plans
Definition
Other long-term employee benefits: Employee benefits (other than post-retirement benefit plans
and termination benefits) which do not fall due wholly within 12 months after the end of the period in
which the employees render the service.
9 Termination benefits
Section overview
• Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the entity is committed to either:
– terminating the employment before normal retirement date; or
– providing termination benefits in order to encourage voluntary redundancy.
Definition
Termination benefits: Employee benefits payable on the termination of employment, through
voluntary redundancy or as a result of a decision made by the employer to terminate employment
before the normal retirement date.
Where voluntary redundancy has been offered, the entity should measure the benefits based on an
expected level of take-up. If, however, there is uncertainty about the number of employees who will
accept the offer, then there may be a contingent liability, requiring disclosure under IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
An entity should recognise a termination benefit when it has made a firm commitment to end the
employment. Such a commitment will exist where, for example, the entity has a detailed formal plan
for the termination and it cannot realistically withdraw from that commitment.
Where termination benefits fall due more than 12 months after the reporting date they should be
discounted.
Solution
The entity should only recognise the liability for the termination benefits when it is demonstrably
committed to terminating the employment of those affected. This occurred on 7 October 20X3 when
the formal plan was announced and it is at this date that there is no realistic chance of withdrawal.
IAS 26 applies to the preparation of financial reports by retirement benefit plans which are either set
up as separate entities and run by trustees or held within the employing entity.
Definition
Retirement benefit plans: Arrangements whereby an entity provides benefits for its employees on or
after termination of service (either in the form of an annual income or as a lump sum), when such
benefits, or the employer’s contributions towards them, can be determined or estimated in advance
of retirement from the provisions of a document or from the entity’s practices.
There are two main types of retirement benefit plan, both discussed in section 3 of this chapter.
(a) Defined contribution plans (sometimes called ‘money purchase schemes’). These are retirement
plans under which payments into the plan are fixed. Subsequent payments out of the plan to
retired members will therefore be determined by the value of the investments made from the
contributions that have been made into the plan and the investment returns reinvested.
(b) Defined benefit plans (sometimes called ‘final salary schemes’). These are retirement plans
under which the amount that a retired member will receive from the plan during retirement is
fixed. Contributions are paid into the scheme based on an estimate of what will have to be paid
out under the plan.
10.4 Disclosure
The report of all retirement benefit plans should include the following information.
• A statement of changes in the net assets that are available in the fund to provide future benefits
• A summary of the plan’s significant accounting policies
The statement of changes in the net assets available to provide future benefits should disclose a full
reconciliation showing movements during the period, for example contributions made to the plan
split between employee and employer, investment income, expenses and benefits paid out.
Information should be provided on the plan’s funding policy, the basis of valuation for the assets in
the fund and details of significant investments that exceed a 5% threshold of net assets in the fund
available for benefits. Any liabilities that the plan has other than those of the actuarially calculated
figure for future benefits payable and details of any investment in the employing entity should also
be disclosed.
General information should be included about the plan, such as the names of the employing entities,
the groups of employees that are members of the plan, the number of participants receiving benefits
under the plan and the nature of the plan ie, defined contribution or defined benefit. If employees
contribute to the plan, this should be disclosed along with an explanation of how the promised
benefits are calculated and details of any termination terms of the plan. If there have been changes
in any of the information disclosed then this fact should be explained.
Users of IAS 26 reports include plan members, who do not usually have specialist knowledge. The
general information referred to above should therefore be clearly written, avoiding specialist jargon.
• The estimation of pension costs, particularly those for defined benefit pension schemes, involves
a high level of uncertainty.
• The auditor must evaluate the appropriateness of the fair value measurements.
Fair value accounting applies to pension costs, so auditors must be aware of the issues around
auditing fair value when auditing this area. Please refer back to Chapter 17 for further details on the
IAASB’s guidance on auditing fair value.
Auditors need to ensure they have reviewed the various assumptions used by management when
accounting for pension schemes and have assessed their sensitivity to change in the current
economic climate using suitable levels of professional scepticism. The issues discussed in Chapter 6
on ISA (UK) 540 (Revised) are extremely relevant here: complexity, subjectivity and estimation
uncertainty.
Issue Evidence
Scheme assets (including • Ask directors to reconcile the scheme assets valuation at the
quoted and unquoted scheme year-end date with the assets valuation at the
securities, debt instruments, reporting entity’s date being used for IAS 19 purposes.
properties) • Obtain direct confirmation of the scheme assets from the
investment custodian.
• Consider requiring scheme auditors to perform procedures.
Scheme liabilities • Auditors must follow the principles relating to work done by a
management’s expert as defined in ISA (UK) 500, Audit
Evidence (and covered in Chapter 6) to assess whether it is
appropriate to rely on the actuary’s work.
Actuarial assumptions (for Auditors will not have the same expertise as actuaries and are
example, mortality rates, unlikely to be able to challenge the appropriateness and
termination rates, retirement reasonableness of the assumptions. They should nevertheless
age and changes in salary and ascertain the qualifications and experience of the actuaries.
benefit levels) Auditors can, also, through discussion with directors and
actuaries:
• obtain a general understanding of the assumptions and
review the process used to develop them;
• consider whether assumptions comply with IAS 19
requirements ie, are unbiased and based on market
expectations at the year end, over the period during which
obligations will be settled;
• compare the assumptions with those which directors have
used in prior years;
• consider whether, based on their knowledge of the reporting
entity and the scheme, and on the results of other audit
procedures, the assumptions appear to be reasonable and
compatible with those used elsewhere in the preparation of
the entity’s financial statements; and
• obtain written representations from directors confirming that
the assumptions are consistent with their knowledge of the
business.
Items charged to profit or loss • Discuss with directors and actuaries the factors affecting
(current service cost, past current service cost (for example, a scheme closed to new
service cost, gains and losses entrants may see an increase year on year as a percentage of
on settlements and pay with the average age of the workforce increasing).
curtailments) • Confirm that net interest cost has been based on the discount
rate determined by reference to market yields on high-quality
fixed-rate corporate bonds.
Contributions paid into plan Agree cash payments to cash book/bank statements.
(Retirement benefits paid out
are paid by the pension plan
itself so there is no cash entry
in the entity’s books)
2. Can you distinguish a defined contribution pension plan from a defined benefit plan?
(Topic 3)
4. Can you account for the movement in a defined benefit plan? (Topic 4)
5. What is the IAS 19 treatment of gains and losses on remeasurement of the net defined
benefit asset or liability? (Topic 5)
6. Can you account for past service costs, curtailments and settlements? (Topic 6)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Lampard A short question, this will test whether you have understood the concept
of past service costs.
Interest This question focuses on the discount factor to be used in accounting for
employee benefits in accordance with IAS 19.
Straw Holdings The focus of this question is on giving advice to directors unsure how to
apply IAS 19. You are also asked for the benefits of moving to a defined
contribution plan, which is happening in practice.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Flynt (Dipper This part of the question requires comprehensive pension plan
pension scheme calculations and explanations of how gains and losses on remeasurement
only) might arise.
Aytace (notes 2 and 3 Note 2 requires the calculation (with explanation) of the defined benefit
only) expense, including an improvement to the scheme. Note 3 requires
calculation of a holiday pay accrual.
Maykem This part of the question is based around correcting an incorrect treatment
of the pension contribution and requires calculation of the loss on
remeasurement and the required IAS 19 presentation in the financial
statements.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
4 Post-employment benefits
• Classified as either:
– Defined contribution plans
– Where entity’s legal or constructive obligation is limited to the amount it agrees to contribute to
the fund and consequently bears no actuarial or investment risk
– Defined benefit plans
– Where entity provides agreed benefits and bears both actuarial and investment risk – IAS
19.25, 19.26, 19.27
9 Actuarial assumptions
• Shall be unbiased and mutually compatible
– Demographic assumptions
– Financial assumptions – IAS 19.72
16 Termination benefits
• Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the entity is committed to
– Terminate the employment before normal retirement date, or
– Provide termination benefits as a result of an offer for voluntary redundancy – IAS 19.133
• Where termination benefits fall due more than 12 months after the reporting date they shall be
discounted – IAS 19.139
1 Employee benefits
Under which category of employee benefits should the following items be accounted for according
to IAS 19, Employee Benefits?
Item Category
Actuarial gains
2 Lampard
The Lampard company operates two major benefit plans on behalf of its employees under which the
amounts of benefit payable depend on a number of factors, the most important of which is length of
service. The plans are:
(1) Plan Deben, a post-retirement defined benefit plan
(2) Plan Limen, a long-term disability benefits plan
Changes to the terms of these plans coming into effect from 31 December 20X7 will result in past
service cost attributable to unvested benefits, to the extent of £500,000 on Plan Deben and
£220,000 on Plan Limen. Within each plan the average period until benefits become vested is five
years. There are no past service costs brought forward on either plan.
Requirement
Under IAS 19, Employee Benefits, what is the total amount of past service costs which must be
recognised by Lampard in the year ended 31 December 20X7?
3 Tiger
The Tiger company operates a post-retirement defined benefit plan under which post-retirement
benefits are payable to ex-employees and their partners.
For all the years this plan has been in operation, Tiger has used the market yield on its own corporate
bonds as the rate at which it has discounted its defined obligation, because the yield on its own
bonds has been the same as that on high-quality corporate bonds. In the current year Tiger has
experienced a sharp downgrading in its credit rating, such that the yield on its own bonds at the year
end is 8% while that on high-quality corporate bonds is 6%. Tiger is proposing to use the yield on its
own bonds as the discount rate, to reflect the greater risk
Requirement
Indicate whether Tiger’s approach is correct according to IAS 19, Employee Benefits.
4 Interest
An entity’s defined benefit net liability at 31 December 20X4 and 20X5 is measured as follows
20X4 20X5
£ £
Defined benefit obligation 950,000 1,150,000
£m
Opening scheme net assets 19.40
Add interest on assets @ 10% 1.94
Net contributions received 0.40
Less actuarial deficit (balancing figure) (1.54)
Closing scheme net assets 20.20
The deficit of £1.54 million has come as a surprise to Mr Cork. He is unsure how to treat this deficit in
the financial statements and is concerned about the impact it will have on the company’s profits.
Requirements
5.1 Explain the impact of the actuarial valuation of the scheme’s assets and the resultant deficit on
the financial statements of Straw Holdings plc for the year ended 31 December 20X1
5.2 Identify two benefits to Straw Holdings plc of moving from a defined benefit to a defined
contribution scheme.
6 IAS 26
6.1 How should a defined contribution retirement benefit plan carry property, plant and
equipment used in the operation of the fund?
6.2 Is a defined contribution retirement benefit plan permitted to use a constant rate redemption
yield to measure any securities with a fixed redemption value which are acquired to match the
obligations of the plan?
6.3 Does IAS 26 specify a minimum frequency of actuarial valuations?
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
* (1,650 – 50)
Market value of plan assets
* (1,450 – 48)
In the statement of financial position, the liability that is recognised is calculated as follows.
The following remeasurements will be recognised in other comprehensive income for the year:
£’000
Fair value of plan assets at 1.1.20X5 5,200
Interest on plan assets (8% × £5,200) 416
Contributions 1,460
Benefits paid (480)
Remeasurement gain to OCI (balancing figure) 204
Fair value of plan assets at 31.12.20X5 6,800
£’000
Present value of obligation at 1.1.20X5 5,800
Current service cost 900
Past service cost 180
Interest cost (8% × £5,800) 464
Benefits paid (480)
Remeasurement loss to OCI (balancing figure) 136
Present value of obligation at 31.12.20X5 7,000
£m
Current service cost 176
Net interest on net defined benefit liability (32 – 16) 16
192
The company is required by the revised IAS 19 to recognise the £24,000,000 remeasurement gain
(see working) immediately in other comprehensive income.
WORKING
PV of FV of plan
obligation assets
£m £m
b/f Nil Nil
Contributions paid 160
Interest on plan assets 16
Current service cost 176
Interest cost on obligation 32
Actuarial difference (bal fig) – 24
c/f 208 200
1 Employee benefits
Item Category
2 Lampard
£720,000 (£500,000 + £220,000)
Under IAS 19, Employee Benefits (revised 2011), past service cost attributable to all benefits, whether
vested or not within a post-retirement defined benefit plan, must be recognised immediately in profit
or loss. Similarly, past service cost attributable to all benefits, whether vested or not, within a long-
term disability benefits plan must be recognised immediately in profit or loss, so the full £720,000
must be recognised.
3 Tiger
Tiger should not be using 8% as its discount rate.
Under IAS 19.78 the yield on high-quality corporate bonds must be used as the discount rate for the
defined benefit obligation. (Using a higher rate would result in a lower obligation, which would not
reflect greater risk.)
4 Interest
4.1 The interest cost for 20X5 is calculated by multiplying the defined benefit obligation at the
start of the period by the discount rate at the start of the period, so:
£950,000 × 6.5% = £61,750.
4.2 The discount factor should be determined by reference to high-quality corporate bonds with
similar currency and maturity as the benefit obligations.
Where no market in corporate bonds exists the discount rate should be determined by
reference to government debt.
Where there is no deep market in corporate bonds with sufficiently long maturities the
standard requires the use of current market rates of appropriate term to discount short‑term
payments and the estimation of the rate for longer maturities by extrapolating current market
rates on the yield curves.
4.3 The discount rate should not reflect:
• investment risk
• actuarial risk
• specific risk relating to the entity’s business
£ £
DEBIT – Staff costs X
CREDIT – Cash X
6 IAS 26
6.1 Under IAS 26.33 all types of retirement benefit plan should account for assets used in the
operation of the plan under the applicable standards. IAS 16 is applicable in this case and
either the cost model or the revaluation model may be used.
6.2 All types of retirement plan are permitted by IAS 26.33 to use this method of measuring such
securities.
6.3 No minimum frequency of actuarial valuation is specified in IAS 26.27 or elsewhere.
Tutorial Note
This question contains a revision of the audit of investment properties, covered in Chapter
12.
7.2 As follows:
• Audit procedures: investment properties
– Obtain the report produced by the professional surveyors to confirm their valuation at
eight times aggregate rental income, and to support the assumption that rentals provide
an indication of an appropriate exit value in accordance with IFRS 13.
– Consider the extent to which their expertise can be relied on eg, reputable firm,
experience etc.
– Obtain a copy of the rental agreement for the warehouse in York both before and after
the rent review. Confirm that the year-end value has been based on the revised rent and
calculate the adjustment which would be required if based on the initial agreement.
– Discuss the nature of the special terms on which the warehouse in Huddersfield has been
let and the nature of the relationship between the director and the entity.
– Compare fair values as calculated by the directors with current prices for similar
properties in similar locations.
– Where cash flows have been discounted, review whether any assumptions built in to the
calculation are reasonable eg, discount rates used.
– Compare any proposed adjustments with materiality levels set for the audit.
7.3 As follows:
• Audit procedures: pension scheme
– Obtain the client’s permission to liaise with the actuary, and review the actuary’s
professional qualification.
– Agree the validity and accuracy of the actuarial valuation.
◦ Agree that the actuarial valuation method satisfies the accounting objectives of IAS 19.
◦ Confirm that net interest cost has been based on the discount rate determined by
reference to market yields on high-quality fixed-rate bonds.
Share-based payment
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Background
2 Objective and scope of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment
3 Share-based transaction terminology
4 Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
5 Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
6 Share-based payment with a choice of settlement
7 Group and treasury share transactions
8 Disclosure
9 Distributable profits and purchase of own shares
10 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
19
Learning outcomes
• Appraise corporate reporting regulations, and related legal requirements, with respect to
presentation, disclosure, recognition and measurement
• Explain how different methods of providing remuneration for employees may impact upon
reported performance and position
• Explain and appraise accounting standards that relate to employee remuneration which include
different forms of short-term and long-term employee compensation; retirement benefits; and
share-based payment
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 1(b), 5(a), 5(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
19
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
Companies sometimes pay for goods and services provided to them in the form of shares or share
options. This raises the issue of how such payments should be accounted for, and in particular
whether they should be expensed in profit or loss.
1.1 Introduction
Share-based payment occurs when an entity purchases goods or services from another party such as
a supplier or employee and rather than paying directly in cash, settles the amount owing in shares,
share options or future cash amounts linked to the value of shares. This is common:
• in e-businesses which do not tend to be profitable in early years and are cash poor;
• within all sectors where a large part of the remuneration of directors is provided in the form of
shares or options. Employees may also be granted share options.
A share-based payment transaction is one in which the entity transfers equity instruments, such as
shares and share options, in exchange for goods and services supplied by employees or third
parties.
Share-based transactions are agreed between an entity and counterparty at the grant date; the
counterparty becomes entitled to the payment at the vesting date.
Definitions
Grant date: The date at which the entity and other party agree to the share-based payment
arrangement. At this date the entity agrees to pay cash, other assets or equity instruments to the
other party, provided that specified vesting conditions, if any, are met. If the agreement is subject to
shareholder approval, then the approval date becomes the grant date.
Vesting conditions: The conditions that must be satisfied for the other party to become entitled to
receive the share-based payment.
Vesting period: The period during which the vesting conditions are to be satisfied.
Vesting date: The date on which all vesting conditions have been met and the employee/third party
becomes entitled to the share-based payment.
In some cases the grant date and vesting date are the same. This is the case where vesting conditions
are met immediately and therefore there is no vesting period.
Where payment for goods or services is in the form of shares or share options, the fair value of the
transaction is recognised in profit or loss, spread over the vesting period.
4.1 Introduction
If goods or services are received in exchange for shares or share options, the transaction is
accounted for by:
£ £
DEBIT Expense/Asset X
CREDIT Equity X
IFRS 2 does not stipulate which equity account the credit entry is made to. It is normal practice to
credit a separate component of equity, although an increasing number of UK companies are
crediting retained earnings.
We must next consider:
(a) Measurement of the total expense taken to profit or loss
(b) When this expense should be recorded
The above decision tree is one way to structure a problem if you are diagrammatically minded. This is
particularly useful because IFRS 2 does not follow the usual fair value rules in IFRS 13.
Solution
The services received and the shares issued by Entity A are measured at the fair value of the services
received. For the first year, the hourly rate will be measured at that originally proposed by Entity B,
105% of £600. Entity B plans to increase that rate by another 5% for the second year.
The expense in profit or loss and the increase in equity associated with these arrangements will be:
£
July – December 20X5 300 × £630 189,000
January – December 20X6 (300 × £630) + (300 × £630 × 1.05) 387,450
January – June 20X7 300 × £630 × 1.05 198,450
Solution
The changes in the value of equity instruments after grant date do not affect the charge to profit or
loss for equity-settled transactions.
Based on the fair value at grant date, the remuneration expense is calculated as follows.
Number of employees × Number of equity instruments × Fair value of equity instruments at grant
date
= 10 × 1,000 × £9 = £90,000
The remuneration expense should be recognised over the vesting period of three years. An amount
of £30,000 should be recognised for each of the three years 20X7, 20X8 and 20X9 in profit or loss
with a corresponding credit to equity.
Most problems involving share-based payments will be like the above example, with relatively small
amounts of information. However, some will be longer, including complications like deferred tax.
Solution
The total fair value for the share options issued at grant date is:
£10 × 1,500 employees × 10 options = £150,000
The entity should therefore charge £150,000 to profit or loss as employee remuneration on 1 July
20X5 and the same amount will be recognised as part of equity on that date.
Solution
IFRS 2 requires the entity to recognise the remuneration expense, based on the fair value of the
share options granted, as the services are received during the three-year vesting period.
In 20X1 and 20X2 the entity estimates the number of options expected to vest (by estimating the
number of employees likely to leave) and bases the amount that it recognises for the year on this
estimate.
In 20X3 it recognises an amount based on the number of options that actually vest. A total of 55
employees left during the three-year period and therefore 34,500 options (400 – 55) × 100 vested.
The amount recognised as an expense for each of the three years is calculated as follows.
Cumulative
expense at Expense for
year end year
£ £
20X1 100 options × 400 employees × 80% × £20 × 1/3 213,333 213,333
20X2 100 options × 400 employees × 75% × £20 × 2/3 400,000 186,667
20X3 34,500 × £20 × 3/3 690,000 290,000
Solution
The cost reduction target is a non market performance condition which is taken into account in
estimating whether the options will vest. The expense recognised in profit or loss in each of the three
years is:
Solution
Jeremy satisfied the service requirement but the share price growth condition was not met. The share
price growth is a market condition and is taken into account in estimating the fair value of the options
Requirement
Show how the proposed scheme would be reflected in the financial statements on 31 December
20X6 and 31 December 20X7. Ignore taxation.
Solution
The three-year service condition specified by the options contract is a non-market vesting condition
which should be taken into account when estimating the number of options which will vest at the end
£ £
DEBIT Remuneration expense 416,667
CREDIT Equity 416,667
In 20X7 the remuneration charge is for the whole year. Assuming there is no change in the estimated
retention rate for employees, the accounting entry is:
£ £
DEBIT Remuneration expense 2,500,000
CREDIT Equity 2,500,000
Solution
The total cost to the entity of the original option scheme was:
1,000 shares × 20 managers × £20 = £400,000
This was being recognised at the rate of £100,000 each year.
The cost of the modification is:
1,000 × 20 managers × (£11 – £2) = £180,000
This additional cost should be recognised over 30 months, being the remaining period up to vesting,
so £6,000 a month.
The total cost to the entity in the year ended 31 December 20X5 is:
£100,000 + (£6,000 × 6) = £136,000.
Solution
The original cost to the entity for the share option scheme was:
2,000 shares × 23 managers × £33 = £1,518,000
This was being recognised at the rate of £506,000 in each of the three years.
At 30 June 20X5 the entity should recognise a cost based on the amount of options it had vested on
that date. The total cost is:
2,000 × 24 managers × £33 = £1,584,000
5.1 Introduction
Cash-settled share-based payment transactions are transactions where the amount of cash paid for
goods and services is based on the value of an entity’s equity instruments.
Examples of this type of transaction include:
(a) share appreciation rights (SARs): the employees become entitled to a future cash payment
(rather than an equity instrument), based on the increase in the entity’s share price from a
specified level over a specified period of time; or
(b) an entity might grant to its employees a right to receive a future cash payment by granting to
them a right to shares that are redeemable.
£ £
DEBIT Expense/Asset X
CREDIT Liability X
Requirement
Calculate the amount to be recognised in profit or loss for each of the five years ended 31 December
20X5 and the liability to be recognised in the statement of financial position at 31 December for each
of the five years.
Solution
For the three years to the vesting date of 31 December 20X3 the expense is based on the entity’s
estimate of the number of SARs that will actually vest (as for an equity-settled transaction). However,
the fair value of the liability is remeasured at each year end.
The intrinsic value of the SARs at the date of exercise is the amount of cash actually paid.
Accounting for share-based transactions with a choice of settlement depends on which party has the
choice.
• Where the counterparty has a choice of settlement, a liability component and an equity
component are identified.
• Where the entity has a choice of settlement, the whole transaction is treated either as cash-settled
or as equity-settled, depending on whether the entity has an obligation to settle in cash.
IFRS 2 requires that the value of the debt component is established first. The equity component is
then measured as the residual between that amount and the value of the instrument as a whole. In
this respect IFRS 2 applies similar principles to IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation where the
value of the debt components is established first. However, the method used to value the constituent
parts of the compound instrument in IFRS 2 differs from that of IAS 32.
Figure 19.4: Compound instrument and IFRS 2
For transactions in which the fair value of goods or services is measured directly (that is, normally
where the recipient is not an employee of the company), the fair value of the equity component is
measured as the difference between the fair value of the goods or services required and the fair
value of the debt component.
For other transactions including those with employees where the fair value of the goods or services is
measured indirectly by reference to the fair value of the equity instruments granted, the fair value of
the compound instrument is estimated as a whole.
The debt and equity components must then be valued separately. Normally transactions are
structured in such a way that the fair value of each alternative settlement is the same.
Solution
This arrangement results in a compound financial instrument.
The fair value of the cash route is:
7,000 × £21 = £147,000
The fair value of the share route is:
8,000 × £19 = £152,000
The fair value of the equity component is therefore:
£5,000 (£152,000 less £147,000)
The share-based payment is recognised as follows:
As the employee elects to receive shares rather than cash, £294,000 is transferred from liabilities to
equity at the end of 20X6. The balance on equity is £299,000.
IFRS 2 was amended in 2009 to incorporate the requirements of IFRIC 11 (now withdrawn) on group
and treasury share transactions.
7.1 Background
IFRS 2 gives guidance on group and treasury shares in three circumstances:
• Where an entity grants rights to its own equity instruments to employees, and then either chooses
or is required to buy those equity instruments from another party, in order to satisfy its obligations
to its employees under the share-based payment arrangement
• Where a parent company grants rights to its equity instruments to employees of its subsidiary
• Where a subsidiary grants rights to equity instruments of its parent to its employees
7.2.3 Subsidiary grants rights to equity instruments of its parent to its employees
The subsidiary accounts for the transaction as a cash-settled share-based payment transaction.
Therefore, in the subsidiary’s individual financial statements, the accounting treatment of transactions
in which a subsidiary’s employees are granted rights to equity instruments of its parent would differ,
depending on whether the parent or the subsidiary granted those rights to the subsidiary’s
employees. This is because in the former situation, the subsidiary has not incurred a liability to
transfer cash or other assets of the entity to its employees, whereas it has incurred such a liability in
the latter situation (being a liability to transfer equity instruments of its parent).
8 Disclosure
Section overview
The disclosures of IFRS 2 are extensive and require the analysis of share-based payments made
during the year, their impact on earnings and the financial position of the company and the basis on
which fair values were calculated.
Various rules have been created to ensure that dividends are only paid out of distributable profits.
Definition
Dividend: An amount payable to shareholders from profits or other distributable reserves.
No dividend may exceed the amount recommended by the directors who have an implied power
in their discretion to set aside profits as reserves.
The directors may declare such interim dividends as they consider justified.
Dividends are normally declared payable on the paid-up amount of share capital. For example, a
£1 share which is fully paid will carry entitlement to twice as much dividend as a £1 share 50p paid.
Dividends may be paid by cheque or warrant sent through the post to the shareholder at his
registered address or in any electronic mode. If shares are held jointly, payment of dividend is
made to the first-named joint holder on the register.
Listed companies generally pay two dividends a year; an interim dividend based on interim profit
figures, and a final dividend based on the annual accounts and approved at the AGM.
Definition
Profits available for distribution: Accumulated realised profits (which have not been distributed or
capitalised) less accumulated realised losses (which have not been previously written off in a
reduction or reorganisation of capital).
The word ‘accumulated‘ requires that any losses of previous years must be included in reckoning the
current distributable surplus.
A profit or loss is deemed to be realised if it is treated as realised in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles (GAAP). Hence, financial reporting and accounting standards in
issue, plus GAAP, should be taken into account when determining realised profits and losses.
Depreciation must be treated as a realised loss, and debited against profit, in determining the
amount of distributable profit remaining.
However, a revalued asset will have depreciation charged on its historical cost and the increase in
the value in the asset. The Companies Act allows the depreciation provision on the valuation increase
to be treated also as a realised profit.
Effectively there is a cancelling out, and at the end only depreciation that relates to historical cost
will affect dividends.
If, on a general revaluation of all fixed assets, it appears that there is a diminution in value of any one
or more assets, then any related provision(s) need not be treated as a realised loss.
The Act states that if a company shows development expenditure as an asset in its accounts it must
usually be treated as a realised loss in the year it occurs. However, it can be carried forward in special
circumstances (generally taken to mean in accordance with accounting standards).
The dividend rules apply to every form of distribution of assets except the following:
• The issue of bonus shares whether fully or partly paid
• The redemption or purchase of the company’s shares out of capital or profits
• A reduction of share capital
• A distribution of assets to members in a winding up
You must appreciate how the rules relating to public companies in this area are more stringent than
the rules for private companies.
Whether a company has profits from which to pay a dividend is determined by reference to its
‘relevant accounts’, which are generally the last annual accounts to be prepared.
If the auditor has qualified their report on the accounts they must also state in writing whether, in
their opinion, the subject matter of their qualification is material in determining whether the dividend
may be paid. This statement must have been circulated to the members (for a private company) or
considered at a general meeting (for a public company).
A company may produce interim accounts if the latest annual accounts do not disclose a sufficient
distributable profit to cover the proposed dividend. It may also produce initial accounts if it
proposes to pay a dividend during its first accounting reference period or before its first accounts are
laid before the company in general meeting. These accounts may be unaudited, but they must
suffice to permit a proper judgement to be made of amounts of any of the relevant items.
The above case, in which the auditor was found wanting, shows that communication can fail by being
too vague or incomplete, as well as by stating something misleading.
Any limited company is permitted without restriction to cancel unissued shares and in that way to
reduce its authorised share capital. That change does not alter its financial position.
Three factors need to be in place to give effect to a reduction of a company’s issued share capital.
ARTICLES OF
SPECIAL RESOLUTION COURT ORDER
ASSOCIATION
+ A special resolution must + Must be confirmed by the
These must contain the
be passed. court.
necessary authority.
Articles usually contain the necessary power. If not, the company in general meeting would first pass
a special resolution to alter the articles appropriately and then proceed, as the second item on the
agenda of the meeting, to pass a special resolution to reduce the capital.
There are three basic methods of reducing share capital specified.
(a) Extinguish or reduce liability on partly paid shares. A company may have issued £1 (nominal)
shares 75p paid up. The outstanding liability of 25p per share may be eliminated altogether by
reducing each share to 75p (nominal) fully paid or some intermediate figure eg, 80p (nominal)
75p paid. Nothing is returned to the shareholders but the company gives up a claim against
them for money which it could call up whenever needed.
(b) Cancel paid-up share capital which has been lost or which is no longer represented by
available assets. Suppose that the issued shares are £1 (nominal) fully paid but the net assets
now represent a value of only 50p per share. The difference is probably matched by a debit
balance on retained earnings (or provision for fall in value of assets). The company could reduce
the nominal value of its £1 shares to 50p (or some intermediate figure) and apply the amount to
write off the debit balance or provision wholly or in part. It would then be able to resume
payment of dividends out of future profits without being obliged to make good past losses. The
resources of the company are not reduced by this procedure of part cancellation of nominal
value of shares but it avoids having to rebuild lost capital by retaining profits.
(c) Pay off part of the paid-up share capital out of surplus assets. The company might repay to
shareholders, say, 30p in cash per £1 share by reducing the nominal value of the share to 70p.
This reduces the assets of the company by 30p per share.
£
Assets
Cash 100,000
Other assets 300,000
400,000
Equity and liabilities
Ordinary shares 130,000
Retained earnings 150,000
Trade payables 120,000
400,000
Now if Muffin Ltd were able to repurchase the shares without making any transfer from the retained
earnings to a capital redemption reserve, the effect of the share redemption on the statement of
financial position would be as follows.
£
Net assets
Non-cash assets 300,000
Less trade payables 120,000
180,000
Equity
Ordinary shares 30,000
Retained earnings 150,000
180,000
In this example, the company would still be able to pay dividends out of profits of up to £150,000. If
it did, the creditors of the company would be highly vulnerable, financing £120,000 out of a total of
£150,000 assets of the company.
The regulations in the Act are intended to prevent such extreme situations arising. On repurchase of
the shares, Muffin Ltd would have been required to transfer £100,000 from its retained earnings to a
non-distributable reserve, called a capital redemption reserve. The effect of the redemption of shares
on the statement of financial position would have been:
£ £
Net assets
Non-cash assets 300,000
Less trade payables 120,000
180,000
Equity
Ordinary shares 30,000
Reserves
Distributable (retained earnings) 50,000
The maximum distributable profits are now £50,000. If Muffin Ltd paid all these as a dividend, there
would still be £250,000 of assets left in the company, just over half of which would be financed by
non-distributable equity capital.
When a company redeems some shares, or purchases some of its own shares, they should be
redeemed:
(a) out of distributable profits; or
(b) out of the proceeds of a new issue of shares.
If there is any premium on redemption, the premium must be paid out of distributable profits,
except that if the shares were issued at a premium, then any premium payable on their redemption
may be paid out of the proceeds of a new share issue made for the purpose, up to an amount equal
to the lesser of the following:
(a) The aggregate premiums received on issue of the shares
(b) The balance on the share premium account (including premium on issue of the new shares)
£ £
DEBIT Share capital account 10,000
Retained earnings (premium on redemption) 500
CREDIT Cash 10,500
DEBIT Retained earnings 10,000
CREDIT Capital redemption reserve 10,000
(2) Where a company redeems shares or purchases its shares wholly or partly out of the proceeds of
a new share issue, it must transfer to the capital redemption reserve an amount by which the nominal
value of the shares redeemed exceeds the aggregate proceeds from the new issue (ie, nominal
value of new shares issued plus share premium).
£ £
DEBIT Share capital account (redeemed shares) 10,000
Retained earnings (premium) 500
CREDIT Cash (redemption of shares) 10,500
DEBIT Cash (from new issue) 10,000
CREDIT Share capital account 10,000
No credit to the capital redemption reserve is necessary because there is no decrease in the
creditors’ buffer.
(4) If the redemption in the same example were made by issuing 5,000 new £1 shares at par, and
paying £5,500 out of distributable profits:
£ £
DEBIT Share capital account (redeemed shares) 10,000
Retained earnings (premium) 500
CREDIT Cash (redemption of shares) 10,500
DEBIT Cash (from new issue) 5,000
CREDIT Share capital account 5,000
DEBIT Retained earnings 5,000
CREDIT Capital redemption reserve 5,000
(5) In the example (4) above (assuming a new issue of 10,000 £1 shares at a premium of 8p per
share) the accounting entries would be:
£ £
DEBIT Cash (from new issue) 10,800
CREDIT Share capital account 10,000
Share premium account 800
DEBIT Share capital account (redeemed shares) 10,000
Share premium account 300
Retained earnings 200
CREDIT Cash (redemption of shares) 10,500
No capital redemption reserve is required, as in (1) above. The redemption is financed entirely by a
new issue of shares.
£’000
Net assets 520
Equity
Called up share capital £1 ordinary shares 300
Share premium account 60
Retained earnings 160
520
On 1 July 20X5 Krumpet plc purchased and cancelled 50,000 of its ordinary shares at £1.50 each.
The shares were originally issued at a premium of 20p. The redemption was partly financed by the
issue at par of 5,000 new shares of £1 each.
Requirement
Prepare the summarised statement of financial position of Krumpet plc at 1 July 20X5 immediately
after the above transactions have been effected.
10 Audit focus
Section overview
The auditor will need to evaluate whether the fair value of the share-based payment is appropriate.
The auditor will require evidence in respect of all the components of the estimated amounts, as well
as reperforming the calculation of the expense for the current year.
Issue Evidence
Fair value is an area where management exercises judgement and makes assumptions. The auditor
needs to confirm that the assumptions are reasonable and the evidence sufficient.
The options are dependent on continued employment. All four directors are expected to remain. No
entry has been made in the financial statements of Russell plc in respect of the options on the basis
that they do not vest until 31 December 20X7.
Requirement
Identify the audit issues you would need to consider in respect of the share options.
3. Can you distinguish between market and non-market vesting conditions? (Topic 3)
4. Can you account for equity-settled and cash-settled share-based payment transactions?
(Topic 4)
5. Can you account for share-based payment transactions with a choice of settlement? (Topic
6)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Mayflower This is an integrated question, set in the context of audit, covering other
issues as well as share-based payment, as is likely to happen in an exam. If
you’re short of time, just skim-read the introductory paragraph for context
and go straight to the section on share options.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Mervyn (SAR para. This part of the question is a fairly straightforward test of cash-settled
only) share-based payment.
Upstart (share You have already attempted other parts of this question. This part requires
options only) calculation and explanation of the correct treatment of equity-settled
share-based payment.
Flynt (share options This is a more complex test of share-based payment with both market and
only) non-market-based vesting conditions. This is as difficult as you will get in
an exam – most questions on share-based payment are more
straightforward.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
3 Recognition
• Goods or services received in share-based transaction to be recognised as expenses or assets –
IFRS 2.8
• Entity shall recognise corresponding increase in equity for equity-settled transaction or a liability
for cash-settled transactions – IFRS 2.7
1 Share-based transactions
Which are the three types of share-based transactions covered by IFRS 2?
2 Definition
Which of the following transactions are NOT within the definition of a share-based payment under
IFRS 2?
(1) Employee share ownership plans (ESOPs)
(2) Transfers of equity instruments of the parent of the reporting entity to third parties that have
supplied goods or services to the reporting entity
(3) The acquisition of property, plant and equipment as part of a business combination
(4) Share appreciation rights (SARs)
(5) The raising of funds through a rights issue to all shareholders including those who are
employees
(6) Cash bonus to employees dependent on share price performance
(7) Employee share purchase plans
(8) Remuneration in non-equity shares
3 BCN
BCN Co grants 1,000 share options to each of its 300 staff to be exercised in two years’ time at a
price of £6.10. The current fair value of the option is £1.40 and the expected fair value in two years’
time is £2.40 (adjusted for the possibility of forfeiture in both cases). Under IFRS 2, Share-based
Payment, how much expense would be recognised in profit or loss at the date of issue of the
options?
4 Condition 1
On 1 January 20X3 an entity grants 250 share options to each of its 200 employees. The only
condition attached to the grant is that the employees should continue to work for the entity until 31
December 20X6. Five employees leave during the year.
The market price of each option was £12 at 1 January 20X3 and £15 at 31 December 20X3.
Requirement
Show how this transaction will be reflected in the financial statements for the year ended 31
December 20X3.
5 Annerly
On 1 July 20X4 Annerly Co granted 20 executives options to buy up to 10,000 shares each. The
options only vest if the executives are still in the service of the company on 1 July 20X6. It is
estimated that 90% of the executives will remain with the company for the duration of the vesting
period and exercise their options in full.
The following information is relevant.
• The exercise price of the option is £20 per share.
• The market value of each share was £15 on 1 July 20X4 and £18 on 30 June 20X5. It is £19 on 20
July 20X5, when the draft financial statements for the year to 30 June 20X5 are being reviewed.
6 Condition 2
An entity grants 100 share options on its £1 shares to each of its 500 employees on 1 January 20X5.
Each grant is conditional upon the employee working for the entity over the next three years. The fair
value of each share option as at 1 January 20X5 is £15.
On the basis of a weighted average probability, the entity estimates on 1 January 20X5 that 20% of
employees will leave during the three-year period and therefore forfeit their rights to share options.
Requirements
Show the accounting entries which will be required over the three-year period in the event of the
following:
(a) 20 employees leave during 20X5 and the estimate of total employee departures over the three-
year period is revised to 15% (75 employees).
(b) 22 employees leave during 20X6 and the estimate of total employee departures over the three-
year period is revised to 12% (60 employees).
(c) 15 employees leave during 20X7, so a total of 57 employees left and forfeited their rights to
share options. A total of 44,300 share options (443 employees × 100 options) vested at the end
of 20X7.
No of
employees Estimated Intrinsic
exercising Outstanding further Fair value of value* (ie,
Year ended Leavers rights SARs leavers SARs cash paid)
£ £
31 Dec 20X4 50 – 450 60 8.00
31 Dec 20X5 50 100 300 – 8.50 8.10
31 Dec 20X6 – 300 – – – 9.00
* Intrinsic value is the fair value of the shares less the exercise price
Requirement
Show the expense and liability which will appear in the financial statements in each of the three
years.
8 ZZX plc
ZZX plc has provided a share incentive scheme to a number of its employees on 1 January 20X4. This
allows for a cash payment to be made to the individuals concerned equal to the share price at the
end of a three-year period subject to the following conditions.
(1) Vesting will be after three years.
(2) The share price must exceed £2.
(3) The employee must be with the company on 31 December 20X6.
9 Kapping
The directors of Kapping are adopting IFRS for the first time and are reviewing the impact of IFRS 2,
Share-based Payment on the financial statements for the year ended 31 May 20X7. They require you
to do the following:
Requirements
9.1 Explain why share options, although having no cost to the company, should be reflected as an
expense in profit or loss.
9.2 Discuss whether the expense arising from share options under IFRS 2 actually meets the
definition of an expense under the IASB’s Conceptual Framework.
9.3 Explain the impact of IFRS 2 on earnings per share, given that an expense is shown in profit or
loss and the impact of share options is recognised in the diluted earnings per share
calculation.
9.4 Briefly discuss whether the requirements of IFRS 2 should lead them to reconsider their
remuneration policies.
10 Mayflower plc
Your firm has been working on a new audit assignment, Mayflower plc (Mayflower), a listed,
diversified group of companies. Its main business interests include construction, publishing, food
processing and a restaurant chain.
Mayflower’s draft profit before tax for the year ended 31 March 20X8 is £17.5 million (20X7 £16.3
million) and its revenue is £234.5 million (20X7 £197.5 million).
The senior in charge of the audit for the year ended 31 March 20X8 has fallen ill towards the end of
the audit and you are now helping to complete it. There are several matters outstanding and you will
need to consider their impact on the financial statements and the audit. Your line manager has asked
to meet you to discuss the significant outstanding matters. He has asked you to prepare briefing
notes for the meeting, including your views on the impact on the financial statements and any
additional audit work that might be required, so that a way forward can be agreed.
On reviewing the previous senior’s notes you find the following outstanding areas:
Forward contract
On 1 April 20X6 Mayflower entered into a forward contract to purchase a large quantity of sugar on 1
April 20Y0. As far as we can tell, this was purely speculative based on the expectation that the price
of sugar would rise. Mayflower did not pay to enter this contract. The company has not accounted for
this contract in the years ended 31 March 20X7 or 20X8.
The finance manager of Mayflower has told us that at 31 March 20X7 the value of the contract had
risen to £800,000 and by 31 March 20X8 its fair value had risen further to £850,000.
1 April £
20X5 12
20X6 15
20X7 17
20X8 16
We have established that no accounting entries have been made for the above.
Debenture issue
Mayflower issued a £5 million convertible debenture at par on 1 April 20X7. The debenture has an
annual nominal rate of interest of 4.5% and is redeemable on 1 April 20Y7 at par. Alternatively, the
holder has the option to convert the debenture to four million £1 shares in Mayflower.
The debenture is presented as a non-current liability at the net proceeds and this amount has not
changed since issue.
The directors have agreed to identify a suitable comparable debenture with an observable market
rate of interest, but they have not yet done so.
Properties
The audit has verified the following facts about properties held by Mayflower:
PROPERTY DESCRIPTION
33–39 Reeves Road A warehouse held as a right-of-use asset that, up to six months ago, was
used by Mayflower but has since been rented out to a third party on a
short-term lease.
41–51 Reeves Road A warehouse facility adjacent to the existing warehouse. This was
purchased in November 20X7 at a cost of £3.8 million. Professional fees of
£60,000 were also incurred. It is currently empty and has been since
purchase, but a tenant is actively being sought.
Falcon House An office block owned by Mayflower for seven years. It is currently all
rented to a non-group company apart from a couple of small rooms in the
basement that are used by Mayflower as an external store for some of its
records.
Mayflower has classified all these properties as investment properties and has adopted the fair value
model in accordance with IAS 40.
Since 31 March 20X8 property values have dropped by 2% on average.
We need to finalise their treatment as investment properties and verify their valuation.
Requirement
Prepare the required briefing notes on the financial reporting and auditing implications of each of
the outstanding areas for discussion with your line manager.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
WORKINGS
(1) Year 1
Equity: (440 employees × 100 options × £30)/2 years = £660,000
(using original estimate of two-year period)
£
Equity c/d [(500 – 30 – 28 – 25) employees × 100 × £30 × 2/3] 834,000
(using revised estimate of three-year period)
Previously recognised (660,000)
expense 174,000
(3) Year 3
£
Equity c/d [(500 – 30 – 28 – 23) × 100 × £30] 1,257,000
Previously recognised (834,000)
expense 423,000
Year £
1 Equity c/d [(500 – 110) × 100 × £15 × 1/3] 195,000
2 Equity c/d [(500 – 105) × 100 × ((£15 × 2/3) + (£3 × 1/2))] 454,250
Less previously recognised (195,000)
259,250
£ £
31.12.X1
DEBIT Staff costs expense 188,000
CREDIT Equity reserve ((800 – 95) × 200 × £4 × 1/3) 188,000
31.12.X2
DEBIT Staff costs expense (W1) 201,333
CREDIT Equity reserve 201,333
31.12.X3
DEBIT Staff costs expense (W2) 202,667
CREDIT Equity reserve 202,667
Issue of shares:
DEBIT Cash ((800 – 40 – 20) × 200 × £1.50) 222,000
DEBIT Equity reserve 592,000
CREDIT Share capital (740 × 200 × £1) 148,000
CREDIT Share premium (balancing figure) 666,000
WORKINGS
(1) Equity reserve at 31.12.X2
£
Equity c/d ((800 – 70) × 200 × £4 × 2/3) 389,333
Less previously recognised (188,000)
charge 201,333
£
Equity c/d ((800 – 40 – 20) × 200 × £4 × 3/3) 592,000
Less previously recognised (389,333)
charge 202,667
No of employees Cumulative
estimated at the year proportion
Number of Fair value of each
end to be entitled to × × × of vesting
rights each right at year end
rights at the vesting period
date elapsed
The movement in the accrual would be charged to profit or loss representing further
entitlements received during the year and adjustments to expectations accrued in previous
years.
20X9
Double entries
£ £
20X7
DEBIT Employment costs 296,250
CREDIT Equity 296,250
20X8
DEBIT Employment costs 82,750
CREDIT Equity 82,750
20X9
DEBIT Employment costs 206,000
CREDIT Equity 206,000
£ £
Cost of redemption (50,000 × £1.50) 75,000
140,000
Remainder of redemption costs 50,000
Proceeds of new issue 5,000 × £1 (5,000)
Remainder out of distributable profits (45,000)
Balance on retained earnings 95,000
£’000
Net assets (520 – 75 + 5) 450
Capital and reserves
Ordinary shares (300 – 50 + 5) 255
Share premium: 60,000 less 5,000
(10,000 allowable, being premium on original issue of 50,000 × 20p, restricted to
proceeds of new issue of 5,000) 55
Capital redemption reserve 45
355
Retained earnings (W) 95
450
1 Share-based transactions
Share-based transactions covered by IFRS 2:
(1) Equity-settled share-based payment transactions
(2) Cash-settled share-based payment transactions
(3) Transactions with a choice of settlement
2 Definition
The following transactions are not within the definition of a share-based payment under IFRS 2:
(3) The acquisition of property, plant and equipment as part of a business combination.
This is within the scope of IFRS 3, Business Combinations.
(5) The raising of funds through a rights issue to all shareholders including those who are employees.
IFRS 2 does not apply to transactions with employees in their capacity as shareholders.
(8) Remuneration in non-equity shares.
Payment in non-equity shares does not fall within the scope of IFRS 2 since it is a transaction in which
the entity receives goods and services in return for a financial liability.
3 BCN
No expense is recognised at the issue date of the options, but the expected benefit is accrued as a
cost over the life of the option:
300 employees × 1,000 options × £1.40 = £420,000
This is spread equally over the two-year period to vesting, resulting in an annual charge to profit or
loss of £210,000.
This would not be adjusted for any changes in expected benefit due to changes in expected share
price as the value is measured at grant date, but is adjusted for the numbers of employees entitled to
options at each reporting date.
4 Condition 1
The remuneration expense for the year is based on the fair value of the options granted at the grant
date (1 January 20X3). As five of the 200 employees left during the year it is reasonable to assume
that 20 employees will leave during the four-year vesting period and that therefore 45,000 options
(250 × 180) will actually vest.
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
5 Annerly
IFRS 2 requires that share-based transactions made in return for goods or services are recognised in
the financial statements. The granting of options to the senior executives is a share-based payment
under IFRS 2 and will need to be recognised as a remuneration expense. The amount to be charged
as an expense is measured at the fair value of the goods or services provided as consideration for
£ £
DEBIT Share-based payment remuneration expense 270,000
CREDIT Equity share-based payment reserve 270,000
When the shares are issued a transfer will be made from that reserve together with any further
proceeds (if any) of the shares and will be credited to the share capital and share premium accounts.
6 Condition 2
(a) Accounting entries
£
20X5 Equity c/d (500 × 85% × 100 × £15 × 1/3) = 212,500
£
20X6 Equity c/d (500 × 88% × 100 × £15 × 2/3) = 440,000
Less previously recognised (212,500)
227,500
£
20X7 Equity c/d (443 × 100 × £15) = 664,500
Less previously recognised (440,000)
224,500
£
Year ended 31 December 20X4
Expense and liability ((450 – 60) × 100 × £8.00 × 1/2) 156,000
Year ended 31 December 20X5
Liability c/d (300 × 100 × £8.50) 255,000
Less b/d liability (156,000)
99,000
Plus cash paid on exercise of SARs by employees
(100 × 100 × £8.10) 81,000
Expense 180,000
Year ended 31 December 20X6
Liability c/d –
Less b/d liability (255,000)
(255,000)
Plus cash paid on exercise of SARs by employees
(300 × 100 × £9.00) 270,000
Expense 15,000
8 ZZX plc
8.1 Journal entries for transactions: finance director
The transactions are settled in cash and hence liabilities are created.
31 December 20X4 £ £
DEBIT Expense 147
CREDIT Liability 147
It is assumed that the current share price is the best estimate of the final share price.
(Calculation note: 20 × 10 × £2.20 × 1/3)
31 December 20X5 £ £
DEBIT Liability 147
CREDIT Expense 147
31 December 20X6 £ £
DEBIT Expense 480
CREDIT Liability 480
DEBIT Liability 480
CREDIT Cash 480
31 December 20X4 £ £
DEBIT Expense 1,467
CREDIT Liability 1,467
£ £
31 December 20X5
DEBIT Liability 1,467
CREDIT Expense 1,467
31 December 20X6
DEBIT Expense 3,840
CREDIT Liability 3,840
DEBIT Liability 3,840
CREDIT Cash 3,840
9 Kapping
9.1 When shares are issued for cash or in a business combination, an accounting entry is needed
to recognise the receipt of cash (or other resources) as consideration for the issue. Share
options (the right to receive shares in future) are also issued in consideration for resources:
services rendered by directors or employees. These resources are consumed by the company
and it would be inconsistent not to recognise an expense.
9.2 The Framework defines an expense as a decrease in economic benefits in the form of outflows
of assets or incurrences of liabilities. It is not immediately obvious that employee services meet
the definition of an asset and therefore it can be argued that consumption of those services
does not meet the definition of an expense. However, share options are issued for
consideration in the form of employee services so that arguably there is an asset, although it is
consumed at the same time that it is received. Therefore the recognition of an expense relating
to share-based payment is consistent with the Framework.
9.3 It can be argued that to recognise an expense in profit or loss would have the effect of
distorting diluted earnings per share as diluted earnings per share would then take the
expense into account twice. This is not a valid argument. There are two events involved: issuing
the options and consuming the resources (the directors’ service) received as consideration.
The diluted earnings per share calculation only reflects the issue of the options; there is no
adjustment to basic earnings. Recognising an expense reflects the consumption of services.
There is no ‘double counting’.
9.4 It is true that accounting for share-based payment reduces earnings. However, it improves the
information provided in the financial statements, as these now make users aware of the true
economic consequences of issuing share options as remuneration. The economic
consequences are the reason why share option schemes may be discontinued. IFRS 2 simply
enables management and shareholders to reach an informed decision on the best method of
remuneration, weighing the advantages of granting these and their potential beneficial effect
on motivation and corporate performance against the disadvantages of the impact on
earnings.
10 Mayflower plc
Note: This question includes a revision of the audit of financial instruments and investment
properties
Exeter House This property does not fall within the definition of investment
property in accordance with IAS 40, as it is owner occupied. It should
be accounted for as property, plant and equipment under IAS 16.
33–39 Reeves Road Although this property is not legally owned, it is held as a right-of-use
asset in accordance with IFRS 16, Leases, and can be treated as an
investment property from the date of renting out to a third party.
Falcon House This property is owned by Mayflower and the vast majority of it is let
out to third parties. It appears unlikely that the two parts of the
property (that rented to a third party and that used by Mayflower)
could be sold or leased separately, particularly the part used by
Mayflower, as it is a couple of small rooms in the basement. It is
therefore inappropriate to treat the two parts separately as
investment property and property, plant and equipment respectively.
As the part used by Mayflower appears to be an insignificant portion
of the whole, the whole property can be treated as an investment
property.
Valuation
Exeter House This should be valued according to IAS 16 (at cost or revalued
amount less depreciation).
33–39 Reeves Road This should have been recognised at the inception of the lease at the
present value of the future lease payments. On being rented out it
would be valued at fair value in accordance with company policy in
respect of investment properties. The revaluation to fair value on
transfer to investment properties is accounted for under IAS 16.
Thereafter changes in fair value are recognised in profit or loss.
41–51 Reeves Road This should be initially recognised at cost, including transaction costs.
As the fair value model is being adopted the asset should be
Falcon House Recognised at fair value, changes in fair value are recognised in profit
or loss, as above.
IAS 40 requires that the fair value of the investment properties should be measured in accordance
with IFRS 13.
Audit procedures
• Confirm that all investment properties are classified in accordance with IAS 40 definitions (see
above).
• Ensure that Exeter House is reclassified as property, plant and equipment.
• Assess useful life of Exeter House and residual value in order to recalculate and agree
depreciation charged.
• Determine the valuation policy to be used for Exeter House ie, cost or valuation and ensure that
the policy is correctly applied.
• Evaluate the process by which Mayflower establishes fair values of investment properties and the
control environment around such procedures.
• Determine basis for calculation of fair values (per IAS 40 (40) fair value must reflect rental income
from current leases and other assumptions that market participants would use when pricing
investment property under current market conditions). Look for best evidence of fair value (for
example, year-end prices in an active market for similar properties in the same location and
condition).
• If external valuers have been used agree valuation to valuer’s certificate and assess the extent that
they can be relied on in accordance with ISA 620.
• If fair values have been based on discounted cash flows, ie, future rentals, determine whether this
is the most appropriate estimate of a market-based exit value. Compare predicted cash flows with
rental agreements. Review the basis of the interest rate applied.
• Review documentation to support method used.
• Recalculate the gain or loss on change in fair value and agree to amount recognised in profit or
loss.
• If fair value cannot be measured reliably confirm use of cost model.
• Agree disclosure is in accordance with IAS 40 and IFRS 13.
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Summary and categorisation of investments
2 IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements
3 IFRS 3, Business Combinations
4 IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (business combination aspects)
5 IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
6 IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
7 Question technique and practice
8 IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
9 Step acquisitions
10 Disposals
11 Consolidated statements of cash flows
12 Audit focus: group audits
13 Auditing global enterprises
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
20
Learning outcomes
• Appraise and evaluate cash flow measures and disclosures in single entities and groups
• Identify and show the criteria used to determine whether and how different types of investment
are recognised and measured as business combinations
• Calculate and disclose, from financial and other data, the amounts to be included in an entity’s
consolidated financial statements in respect of its new, continuing and discontinued interests
(which include situations when acquisitions occur in stages and in partial disposals) in
subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 4(b), 6(a), 6(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
20
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1047
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance Questions
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1049
Topic Practical Study approach Exam approach Interactive
significance Questions
12 Audit focus: group Approach You may well get a IQ11: Component
audits Focus on Sections scenario where an auditors
This is a long 12.6 and 12.7 on overseas subsidiary This is a
chapter, but do not group audit company has been comprehensive
neglect section 12, procedures. acquired during the question on a key
which deals with year, audited by issue in the audit of
Stop and think another firm
group audits, group financial
including foreign What are overseas which statements.
subsidiaries (see component raises technical
Chapter 21). You auditors? audit issues
may wish to come regarding the audit
back to that part approach and the
once you have application of ISA
studied Chapter 21 600 (UK) (Revised
on foreign currency June 2016).
transactions.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1051
1 Summary and categorisation of investments
Section overview
• This chapter revises IFRS 3, Business Combinations, which was covered at Professional Level. It
also covers the following standards:
– IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (business combination aspects)
– IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements
– IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures
– IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
– IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
• Some of the above standards, or the topics to which they relate, were covered at Professional
Level, but a deeper knowledge is needed at Advanced Level.
A summary of the different types of investment and the required accounting for them is as follows.
Joint venture Contractual arrangement Equity accounting (IAS 28), distinguish from
joint operation (IFRS 11)
Investment which is Asset held for accretion of As for single company accounts (per IFRS
none of the above wealth 9)
IFRS 10 covers the basic definitions and consolidation requirements and the rules on exemptions
from preparing group accounts. The standard requires a parent to present consolidated financial
statements, consolidating all subsidiaries, both foreign and domestic. The most important aspect is
control.
2.1 Introduction
When a parent issues consolidated financial statements, it should consolidate all subsidiaries, both
foreign and domestic. The first step in any consolidation is to identify the subsidiaries present in the
group.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1053
Definition
Consolidated financial statements: The financial statements of a group presented as those of a
single economic entity. (IFRS 10)
You should make sure that you understand the various ways in which control can arise, as this is
something that you may be asked to discuss in the context of a scenario in the exam.
2.1.1 Power
Power is defined as existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities of the
investee. There is no requirement for that power to have been exercised.
Relevant activities may include:
• selling and purchasing goods or services
• managing financial assets
• selecting, acquiring and disposing of assets
• researching and developing new products and processes
• determining a funding structure or obtaining funding
In some cases assessing power is straightforward; for example, where power is obtained directly and
solely from having the majority of voting rights or potential voting rights, and as a result the ability to
direct relevant activities.
In other cases, assessment is more complex and more than one factor must be considered. IFRS 10
gives the following examples of rights, other than voting or potential voting rights, which individually,
or alone, can give an investor power.
• Rights to appoint, reassign or remove key management personnel who can direct the relevant
activities
• Rights to appoint or remove another entity that directs the relevant activities
• Rights to direct the investee to enter into, or veto changes to, transactions for the benefit of the
investor
• Other rights, such as those specified in a management contract
Voting rights in combination with other rights may give an investor the current ability to direct the
relevant activities. For example, this is likely to be the case when an investor holds 40% of the voting
rights of an investee and holds substantive rights arising from options to acquire a further 20% of the
voting rights.
IFRS 10 suggests that the ability rather than contractual right to achieve the above may also indicate
that an investor has power over an investee.
An investor can have power over an investee even where other entities have significant influence or
other ability to participate in the direction of relevant activities.
2.1.2 Returns
An investor must have exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee
in order to establish control.
This is the case where the investor’s returns from its involvement have the potential to vary as a result
of the investee’s performance.
Returns may include the following:
• Dividends
• Remuneration for servicing an investee’s assets or liabilities
• Fees and exposure to loss from providing credit support
• Returns as a result of achieving synergies or economies of scale through an investor combining
use of their assets with use of the investee’s assets
When determining whether an entity has control, it often helps to draw a group structure diagram,
which helps clarify what is going on. Such a diagram is also useful, together with a timeline, in
questions involving mid-year acquisitions or disposals.
Solution
1 Group structure 1
The absolute size of Twist’s holding and the relative size of the other shareholdings alone are not
conclusive in determining whether the investor has rights sufficient to give it power. However, the
fact that Twist has a contractual right to appoint, remove and set the remuneration of
management is sufficient to conclude that it has power over Oliver. The fact that Twist has not
exercised this right is not a determining factor when assessing whether Twist has power. In
conclusion, Twist does control Oliver, and should consolidate it.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1055
2 Group structure 2
In this case, the size of Copperfield’s voting interest and its size relative to the other shareholdings
are sufficient to conclude that Copperfield does not have power. Only two other investors,
Murdstone and Steerforth, would need to co-operate to be able to prevent Copperfield from
directing the relevant activities of Spenlow.
3 Group structure 3
Scrooge holds a majority of the current voting rights of Cratchett, so is likely to meet the power
criterion because it appears to have the current ability to direct the relevant activities. Although
Marley has currently exercisable options to purchase additional voting rights (that, if exercised,
would give it a majority of the voting rights in Cratchett), the terms and conditions associated with
those options are such that the options are not considered substantive.
Thus voting rights, even combined with potential voting rights, may not be the deciding factor.
Scrooge should consolidate Cratchett.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1057
• in accordance with IFRS 9; or
• using the equity method specified in IAS 28.
Where subsidiaries are classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 they should be
accounted for in accordance with IFRS 5.
Non-controlling interest (NCI)
Within the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, profit for the year and total
comprehensive income must be split between the shareholders of the parent and the non-
controlling interest.
IFRS 10 requires an entity to attribute their share of total comprehensive income to the non-
controlling interest, even if this results in a negative (debit) NCI balance.
Acquisitions and disposals which do not result in a change of control
Acquisitions of further shares in an existing subsidiary or disposals of shares by a parent which do
not result in a loss of control are accounted for within shareholders’ equity.
No gain or loss is recognised and goodwill is not remeasured.
This is explained further within sections 9 and 10 of this chapter.
Loss of control
Where a parent loses control of a subsidiary:
• assets, liabilities and the non-controlling interest must be derecognised;
• any interest retained is recognised at fair value at the date of loss of control; and
• a gain or loss on loss of control is recognised in profit or loss.
This is explained further within section 10 of this chapter.
£
Consideration transferred: Fair value of assets given, liabilities assumed and equity
instruments issued, including contingent amounts X
Non-controlling interest at the acquisition date X
X
Less total fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill/(gain from a bargain purchase) X/(X)
This calculation includes the non-controlling interest and is therefore calculated based on the whole
net assets of the acquiree.
Sections 3.3 and 3.4 consider the first two elements of the revised calculation – consideration
transferred and the non-controlling interest – in more detail.
Solution
Goodwill is calculated as:
£
Consideration transferred 670,000
Non-controlling interest at the acquisition date 140,000
810,000
Less total fair value of net assets of acquiree (700,000)
Goodwill 110,000
In this example the non-controlling interest has been measured as the relevant percentage of
Tweed’s acquisition date net assets ie, 20% × £700,000.
Note that the non-controlling interest is not necessarily calculated as a proportion of acquisition date
net assets.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1059
Contingent consideration – subsequent measurement
IFRS 3 requires contingent consideration to be classified as follows:
• A liability where contingent consideration is cash or shares to a specific value
• Equity where contingent consideration is a specified number of ordinary shares regardless of
their value
Subsequent changes are then dealt with as follows:
(a) If the change is due to additional information obtained that affects the position at the acquisition
date, goodwill should be remeasured.
(b) If the change is due to events which took place after the acquisition date, for example, meeting
earnings targets:
(1) where consideration is recorded as a liability (including a provision), any remeasurement is
recorded in profit or loss (so an increase in the liability due to strong performance of the
subsidiary will result in an expense and a decrease in the liability due to underperformance
will result in a gain); and
(2) where consideration is recorded in equity, remeasurement is not required.
The treatment means that group profits are now reduced where good performance of the subsidiary
results in additional payments to the seller.
Acquisition-related costs
These costs do not form part of consideration within the above calculation. Instead, all finders’ fees,
legal, accounting, valuation and other professional fees must be expensed through profit or loss.
Costs incurred to issue securities will be dealt with in accordance with IFRS 9.
The treatment will therefore reduce goodwill values and profits.
(1) (2)
NCI at share of net
assets NCI at fair value
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred 25,000 25,000
Non-controlling interest – 20% × £21m/fair value 4,200 5,000
29,200 30,000
Total net assets of acquiree (21,000) (21,000)
Goodwill acquired in business combination 8,200 9,000
As the non-controlling interest is £0.8 million higher when measured at fair value, it follows that
goodwill is also £0.8 million higher.
This amount is the goodwill relating to the non-controlling interest. The calculation of goodwill when
the NCI is valued at fair value could be laid out as:
Group NCI
£’000 £’000
Consideration/fair value 25,000 5,000
Share of net assets 80%/20% × £21m (16,800) (4,200)
Goodwill 8,200 800
Total (or full) goodwill is £9 million; of this, the parent’s share is £8.2 million and the non-controlling
interest’s share is £0.8 million.
Note that the goodwill is not split in the same proportion as ownership of the shares:
• National owns 80% of the shares but 91% of goodwill.
• The non-controlling interest owns 20% of shares but just 9% of goodwill.
This discrepancy is due to the ‘control premium’ paid by National.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1061
3.4.1 Non-controlling interest – subsequent valuation
Where the non-controlling interest is measured using the proportion of net assets method, the NCI at
the reporting date is calculated as the non-controlling interest’s share of the subsidiary’s net assets.
Where the non-controlling interest is measured using the fair value method, a consolidation
adjustment is required to recognise the additional goodwill in the consolidated statement of
financial position. This is best achieved using the following calculation:
Non-controlling interest
£ £
Share of net assets (NCI% × net assets at reporting date (W2)) X
Share of goodwillNet assets of Ives
NCI at acquisition date at fair value (W3) X
NCI at acquisition date at share of net assets (NCI% × net
assets at acquisition (W2)) (X)
Difference, being goodwill attributable to NCI X
X
Note: The references are to standard consolidation workings:
W2 Net assets of the subsidiary
W3 Goodwill working
£
Assets 440,000
Share capital 100,000
Retained earnings 245,000
Liabilities 95,000
440,000
• At acquisition, the fair value of land owned by Ives was £50,000 greater than its carrying amount;
Ives has subsequently sold the land to a third party.
• During the year ended 31 December 20X9, Ives sold goods to Robson, making a profit of
£12,000. Half of these goods are included in Robson’s inventory count at the year end.
Requirement
What is the value of the non-controlling interest in the consolidated statement of financial position at
31 December 20X9?
3.6.1 Recognition
Assets and liabilities existing at the acquisition date, and meeting the Conceptual Framework
definition of an asset or liability, should be recognised within the goodwill calculation.
(a) Only those liabilities which exist at the date of acquisition are recognised (so not future
operating losses or reorganisation plans which will be put into effect after control is gained).
(b) Some assets not recognised by the acquiree in its individual company financial statements may
be recognised by the acquirer in the consolidated financial statements. These include
identifiable intangible assets, such as brand names. Identifiable means that these assets are
separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights.
3.6.2 Measurement
The basic requirement of IFRS 3 is that the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired are measured at
their acquisition date fair value.
To understand the importance of fair values in the acquisition of a subsidiary, consider again the
definition of goodwill.
Definition
Goodwill: Any excess of the cost of the acquisition over the acquirer’s interest in the fair value of the
identifiable assets and liabilities acquired as at the date of the exchange transaction.
The statement of financial position of a subsidiary company at the date it is acquired may not be a
guide to the fair value of its net assets. For example, the market value of a freehold building may
have risen greatly since it was acquired, but it may appear in the statement of financial position at
historical cost less accumulated depreciation.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1063
P Co statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6
£ £
Assets
Non-current assets
Tangible assets 63,000
Investment in S Co at cost 51,000
114,000
Current assets 82,000
Total assets 196,000
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary shares of £1 each 80,000
Retained earnings 96,000
176,000
Current liabilities 20,000
Total equity and liabilities 196,000
£ £
Assets
Tangible non-current assets 28,000
Current assets 43,000
Total assets 71,000
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary shares of £1 each 20,000
Retained earnings 41,000
61,000
Current liabilities 10,000
Total equity and liabilities 71,000
If S Co had revalued its non-current assets at 1 September 20X5, an addition of £3,000 would have
been made to the depreciation expense charged for 20X5/X6.
Requirement
Prepare P Co’s consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6.
Solution
P Co consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 August 20X6
£ £
Assets
Non-current assets
WORKINGS
(1) Group structure
Reporting Post-
date Acquisition acquisition
£ £ £
Share capital 20,000 20,000 –
Retained earnings
– per question 41,000 21,000 20,000
– additional depreciation (3,000) (3,000)
Fair value adjustment to PPE 23,000 23,000 –
81,000 64,000 17,000
(3) Goodwill
£
Consideration transferred 51,000
Non-controlling interest 17,000
68,000
Less net assets of acquiree (W2) (64,000)
4,000
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1065
(4) Non-controlling interest
£ £
S Co (25% × £81,000 (W2)) 20,250
NCI share of goodwill at acquisition
FV of NCI at acquisition 17,000
NCI share of net assets at acquisition (25% × £64,000) (16,000)
1,000
Non-controlling interest 21,250
£
P Co 96,000
S Co (£17,000 (W2) × 75%) 12,750
108,750
Remember also that when preparing consolidated financial statements all intra-group balances,
transactions, profits and losses need to be eliminated. Where there are provisions for unrealised
profit and the parent is the seller the adjustment is made against the parent’s retained earnings (in
the retained earnings working). Where the subsidiary is the seller its retained earnings are adjusted
(in the net assets working) thus ensuring that the non-controlling interest (ie, the minority interest)
bear their share of the provision.
For the purposes of an impairment review, the goodwill calculated using the proportion of net assets
method is notionally adjusted as follows:
£
Parent goodwill 16,000
Notional NCI goodwill (20%/80% × £16,000) 4,000
20,000
In other words, the notional goodwill attributable to the non-controlling interest calculated here
includes an element of control premium which is not evident when calculating goodwill attributable
to the non-controlling interest using the fair value method.
Parent NCI
£ £
Goodwill 16,000 4,000
Impairment (80%/20% × £10,000) (8,000) (2,000)
8,000 2,000
Impairment of goodwill 50% 50%
Thus half the total goodwill has been impaired, being half of the parent’s goodwill and half of the
NCI’s notional goodwill.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1067
(b) Where the fair value method is used, and there is a control premium, such that the parent and
NCI goodwill are not in proportion, then any impairment is not in proportion to the starting goodwill.
This time assuming an impairment of £9,000:
Parent NCI
£ £
Goodwill 16,000 2,000
Impairment (80%/20% × £9,000) (7,200) (1,800)
8,800 200
Impairment of goodwill 45% 90%
As the DEF shareholder group controls the combined entities, DEF is treated as the acquirer and
ABC as the acquiree.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1069
If DEF had issued enough of its own shares to give ABC shareholders a 25% interest in DEF, it would
have had to issue 8,000 shares (ie, 25/75 of 24,000 shares). DEF’s share capital would then have
been 32,000 (24,000 + 8,000) and the ABC shareholders’ interest would have been 8,000 so 25%.
The consideration for the acquisition is £496,000, being 8,000 DEF shares at their agreed fair value
of £62.
• The accounting requirements and disclosures of the fair value exercise are covered by IFRS 3.
IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement gives extensive guidance on how the fair value of assets and
liabilities should be established.
• Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method.
Level 1 Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets that the entity can access at the
measurement date
Level 2 Inputs other than quoted prices that are directly or indirectly observable for the
asset
Solution
The highest and best use of the land would be determined by comparing both of the following:
(1) The value of the land as currently developed for industrial use (ie, the land would be used in
combination with other assets, such as the factory, or with other assets and liabilities)
(2) The value of the land as a vacant site for residential use, taking into account the costs of
demolishing the factory and other costs (including the uncertainty about whether the entity
would be able to convert the asset to the alternative use) necessary to convert the land to a
vacant site (ie, the land is to be used by market participants on a standalone basis)
The highest and best use of the land would be determined on the basis of the higher of those
values.
The fair value of the project would be measured on the basis of the price that would be received
in a current transaction to sell the project, assuming that the R&D would be used with its
complementary assets and the associated liabilities and that those assets and liabilities would be
available to Developer Co.
Because this is a business combination, Deacon must measure the liability at fair value in
accordance with IFRS 13, rather than using the best estimate measurement required by IAS 37,
Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.
Deacon will use the expected present value technique to measure the fair value of the
decommissioning liability. If Deacon were contractually committed to transfer its
decommissioning liability to a market participant, it would conclude that a market participant
would use all of the following inputs, probability weighted as appropriate, when estimating the
price it would expect to receive.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1071
(1) Labour costs
(2) Allocated overhead costs
(3) The compensation that a market participant would generally receive for undertaking the
activity, including profit on labour and overhead costs and the risk that the actual cash
outflows might differ from those expected
(4) The effect of inflation
(5) The time value of money (risk-free rate)
(6) Non-performance risk, including Deacon’s own credit risk
As an example of how the probability adjustment might work, Deacon values labour costs on the
basis of current marketplace wages adjusted for expected future wage increases. It determines
that there is a 20% probability that the wage bill will be £15 million, a 30% probability that it will
be £25 million and a 50% probability that it will be £20 million. Expected cash flows will then be
(20% × £15m) + (30% × £25m) + (50% × £20m) = £20.5m. The probability assessments will be
developed on the basis of Deacon’s knowledge of the market and experience of fulfilling
obligations of this type.
£m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (Note 1) 16.0
Current assets
Inventories (Note 2) 4.0
Receivables 2.9
Cash and cash equivalents 1.2
8.1
Total assets 24.1
Current liabilities
Trade payables 3.2
Provision for taxation 0.6
Bank overdraft 3.9
Notes
1 Please see the table below for information related to the property, plant and equipment of Kono
Ltd at 1 September 20X7.
2 The inventories of Kono Ltd in hand at 1 September 20X7 consisted of raw materials at cost. They
would have cost £4.2 million to replace at 1 September 20X7.
3 The long-term loan of Kono Ltd carries a rate of interest of 10% per annum, payable on 31
August annually in arrears. The loan is redeemable at par on 31 August 20Y1. The interest cost is
representative of current market rates. The accrued interest payable by Kono Ltd at 31 December
20X7 is included in the trade payables of Kono Ltd at that date.
4 On 1 September 20X7 Tyzo plc took a decision to rationalise the group so as to integrate Kono
Ltd. The costs of the rationalisation were estimated to total £3 million and the process was due to
start on 1 March 20X8. No provision for these costs has been made in any of the financial
statements given above.
5 Kono Ltd has disclosed a contingent liability of £200,000 in its interim financial statements
relating to litigation.
6 Tyzo Group values the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets method.
Property, plant and equipment
£m
Gross replacement cost 28.4
Net replacement cost 16.8
Economic value 18.0
Net realisable value 8.0
Requirement
Compute the goodwill on consolidation of Kono Ltd that will be included in the consolidated
financial statements of Tyzo plc for the year ended 31 December 20X7, explaining your treatment of
the items mentioned above. You should refer to the provisions of relevant accounting standards.
There is a considerable amount of information to assimilate before you can proceed to the goodwill
calculation. Consider doing the explanations first, then when you come to the calculation you will
know what to do.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1073
5 IAS 28, Investments in Associates and Joint
Ventures
Section overview
• IAS 28 deals with accounting for associates and joint ventures using the equity method.
• An associate exists where there is ‘significant influence‘.
• The criteria for identifying a joint venture are contained in IFRS 11.
• The accounting for associates and joint ventures is identical.
IAS 28 does not apply to investments in associates or joint ventures held by venture capital
organisations, mutual funds, unit trusts and similar entities that are measured at fair value in
accordance with IFRS 9.
IAS 28 requires investments in associates to be accounted for using the equity method, unless the
investment is classified as ‘held for sale’ in accordance with IFRS 5, in which case it should be
accounted for under IFRS 5.
An investor is exempt from applying the equity method if (IAS 28.17):
(a) it is a parent exempt from preparing consolidated financial statements under IAS 27 (revised); or
(b) all of the following apply:
(1) The investor is a wholly owned subsidiary or it is a partially owned subsidiary of another
entity and its other owners, including those not otherwise entitled to vote, have been
informed about, and do not object to, the investor not applying the equity method.
(2) Its securities are not publicly traded.
(3) It is not in the process of issuing securities in public securities markets.
(4) The ultimate or intermediate parent publishes consolidated financial statements that
comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.
IAS 28 does not allow an investment in an associate to be excluded from equity accounting when an
investee operates under severe long-term restrictions that significantly impair its ability to transfer
funds to the investor. Significant influence must be lost before the equity method ceases to be
applicable.
The use of the equity method should be discontinued from the date that the investor ceases to have
significant influence.
From that date, the investor shall account for the investment in accordance with IFRS 9. The fair value
of the retained interest must be regarded as its fair value on initial recognition as a financial asset
under IFRS 9.
Solution
In the individual accounts of P Co, the investment will be recorded on 1 January 20X8 at cost. Unless
there is an impairment in the value of the investment (see below), most companies will choose the
policy that this amount (the cost) will remain in the individual statement of financial position of P Co
permanently. The only entry in P Co’s individual statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income will be to record dividends received. For the year ended 31 December 20X8, P Co will:
In the consolidated accounts of P Co equity accounting will be used. Consolidated profit after tax will
include the group’s share of A Co’s profit after tax (25% × £24,000 = £6,000).
In the consolidated statement of financial position the non-current asset ‘Investment in associates’
will be stated at £64,500, being cost of £60,000 plus the group’s share of post-acquisition retained
profits of £4,500 ((24,000 – 6,000) × 25%).
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1075
losses. The investment is reported at nil value. After the investor’s interest is reduced to nil, additional
losses should only be recognised where the investor has incurred obligations or made payments on
behalf of the associate (for example, if it has guaranteed amounts owed to third parties by the
associate).
6.1 Definitions
The IFRS begins by listing some important definitions.
Definitions
Joint arrangement: An arrangement of which two or more parties have joint control.
Joint control: The contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when
decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control.
Joint operation: A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement.
Joint venture: A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. (IFRS 11, Appendix A)
The terms of the The parties to the joint arrangement The parties to the joint arrangement
contractual have rights to the assets, and have rights to the net assets of the
arrangement obligations for the liabilities, relating arrangement (ie, it is the separate
to the arrangement. vehicle, not the parties, that has rights
to the assets, and obligations for the
liabilities).
Rights to assets The parties to the joint arrangement The assets brought into the
share all interests (eg, rights, title or arrangement or subsequently
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1077
Joint operation Joint venture
Obligations for The parties share all liabilities, The joint arrangement is liable for the
liabilities obligations, costs and expenses in a debts and obligations of the
specified proportion (eg, in arrangement.
proportion to their ownership interest The parties are liable to the
in the arrangement or in proportion to arrangement only to the extent of
the activity carried out through the their respective:
arrangement that is directly attributed
to them). • investments in the arrangement; or
• obligations to contribute any
unpaid or additional capital to the
arrangement; or
• both.
The nature of a joint arrangement may not be immediately apparent. If asked to determine whether a
joint arrangement is a joint operation or a joint venture, you should explain your reasons clearly.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1079
6.3.3 Section summary
• Joint operations are accounted for by including the investor’s share of assets, liabilities, income
and expenses as per the contractual arrangement.
• Joint ventures are accounted for using the equity method as under IAS 28.
Although you have studied consolidation at Professional Level, it is vitally important that you have
retained this knowledge and can put it into practice. This section summarises the basic question
techniques and provides question practice before you move on to the more advanced topics of
changes in group structure and foreign currency transactions. A number of standard workings should
be used when answering consolidation questions.
£
Consideration transferred X
Plus Non-controlling interest at acquisition X
X
Less net assets at acquisition (see W2) (X)
X
Impairment to date (X)
Balance c/f X
£
At acquisition (NCI% × net assets (W2) or fair value) X
£
P Ltd (100%) X
S Ltd (share of post-acquisition retained earnings (see W2)) X
Goodwill impairment to date (see W3) (X)
Group retained earnings X
Note: You should use the proportionate basis for measuring the NCI at the acquisition date unless a
question specifies the fair value basis.
P S Adj Consol
£ £ £ £
Revenue X X (X) X
Cost of sales – Per Q (X) (X) X (X)
– PURP (seller’s books) (X) or (X)
Expenses – Per Q (X) (X) (X)
– Goodwill impairment (if any)* (X)(X) (X)
Tax – Per Q (X) (X) (X)
–
Profit X
£
S PAT × NCI% NCI% × X = X
* If the non-controlling interest is measured at fair value, then the NCI% of the impairment loss will be
debited to the NCI. This is based on the NCI shareholding. For instance, if the parent has acquired
75% of the subsidiary and the NCI is measured at fair value, then 25% of any goodwill impairment
will be debited to NCI.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1081
Interactive question 5: Consolidation technique 1
At 1 July 20X8 Anima plc had investments in two companies: Orient Ltd and Oxendale Ltd. On 1
April 20X9 Anima plc purchased 85% of the ordinary share capital of Carnforth Ltd for £3 million.
Extracts from the draft individual financial statements of the four companies for the year ended 30
June 20X9 are shown below:
Statements of profit or loss
Additional information:
(1) A number of years ago Anima plc acquired 2.1 million of Orient Ltd’s ordinary shares and
900,000 of Oxendale Ltd’s ordinary shares. Balances on retained earnings at the date of
acquisition were £195,000 for Orient Ltd and £130,000 for Oxendale Ltd. The non-controlling
interest and goodwill arising on the acquisition of Orient Ltd were both calculated using the fair
value method; the fair value of the non-controlling interest at acquisition was £1,520,000.
(2) At the date of acquisition the fair values of Carnforth Ltd’s assets and liabilities were the same as
their carrying amounts except for its head office (land and buildings) which had a fair value of
£320,000 in excess of its carrying amount. The split of the value of land to buildings is 50:50 and
the buildings had a remaining life of 40 years at 1 April 20X9. Carnforth Ltd’s profits accrued
evenly over the current year. The non-controlling interest and goodwill arising on the acquisition
of Carnforth Ltd were both calculated using the proportionate method.
(3) During the year Anima plc sold goods to Orient Ltd and Oxendale Ltd at a mark-up of 15%.
Anima plc recorded sales of £149,500 and £207,000 to Orient Ltd and Oxendale Ltd
respectively during the year. At the year-end inventory count Orient Ltd was found still to be
holding half these goods and Oxendale Ltd still held one-third.
(4) Anima plc has undertaken annual impairment reviews in respect of all its investments and at 30
June 20X9 an impairment loss of £10,000 had been identified in respect of Oxendale Ltd.
Requirement
Prepare the consolidated statement of profit or loss of Anima plc for the year ended 30 June 20X9
and an extract from the consolidated statement of financial position as at the same date showing all
figures that would appear as part of equity.
Additional information:
(1) Preston plc acquired 75% of Longridge Ltd’s ordinary shares on 1 April 20X2 for total cash
consideration of £691,000. £250,000 was payable on the acquisition date and the remaining
£441,000 two years later, on 1 April 20X4. The directors of Preston plc were unsure how to treat
the deferred consideration and have ignored it when preparing the draft financial statements
above.
On the date of acquisition Longridge Ltd’s retained earnings were £206,700. The non-controlling
interest and goodwill arising on the acquisition of Longridge Ltd were both calculated using the
proportionate method.
(2) The intangible asset in Longridge Ltd’s statement of financial position relates to goodwill which
arose on the acquisition of an unincorporated business, immediately before Preston plc
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1083
purchasing its shares in Longridge Ltd. Cumulative impairments of £18,000 in relation to this
goodwill had been recognised by Longridge Ltd as at 31 March 20X4.
The fair values of the remaining assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of Longridge Ltd at
the date of its acquisition by Preston plc were equal to their carrying amounts, with the exception
of a building purchased on 1 April 20X0, which had a fair value on the date of acquisition of
£120,000. This building is being depreciated by Longridge Ltd on a straight-line basis over 50
years and is included in the above statement of financial position at a carrying amount of
£92,000.
(3) Immediately after its acquisition by Preston plc, Longridge Ltd sold a machine to Preston plc. The
machine had been purchased by Longridge Ltd on 1 April 20X0 for £10,000 and was sold to
Preston plc for £15,000. The machine was originally assessed as having a total useful life of five
years and that estimate has never changed.
(4) Chipping Ltd is a joint venture, set up by Preston plc and a fellow venturer on 30 June 20X2.
Preston plc paid cash of £100,000 for its 40% share of Chipping Ltd.
(5) During the current year Preston plc sold goods to Longridge Ltd for £12,000 and to Chipping
Ltd for £15,000, earning a 20% gross margin on both sales. All these goods were still in the
purchasing companies’ inventories at the year end.
(6) At 31 March 20X4 Preston plc’s trade receivables included £50,000 due from Longridge Ltd.
However, Longridge Ltd’s trade payables included only £40,000 due to Preston plc. The
difference was due to cash in transit.
(7) At 31 March 20X4 impairment losses of £25,000 and £10,000 respectively in respect of goodwill
arising on the acquisition of Longridge Ltd and the carrying amount of Chipping Ltd need to be
recognised in the consolidated financial statements.
In the next financial year, Preston plc decided to invest in a third company, Sawley Ltd. On 1
December 20X4 Preston plc acquired 80% of Sawley Ltd’s ordinary shares for £385,000. On the
date of acquisition Sawley Ltd’s equity comprised share capital of £320,000 and retained
earnings of £112,300. Preston plc chose to measure the non-controlling interest at the
acquisition date at the non-controlling interest’s share of Sawley Ltd’s net assets. Goodwill arising
on the acquisition of Sawley Ltd has been correctly calculated at £39,160 and will be recognised
in the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X5.
Requirements
6.1 Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Preston plc as at 31 March 20X4.
6.2 Set out the journal entries that will be required on consolidation to recognise the goodwill
arising on the acquisition of Sawley Ltd in the consolidated statement of financial position of
Preston plc as at 31 March 20X5.
Note: An appropriate discount rate is 5% p.a.
IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities requires disclosure of a reporting entity’s interests in
other entities in order to help identify the profit or loss and cash flows available to the reporting
entity and determine the value of a current or future investment in the reporting entity.
8.2 Scope
IFRS 12 covers disclosures for entities which have interests in the following:
• Subsidiaries
• Joint arrangements (ie, joint operations and joint ventures, see above)
• Associates
• Unconsolidated structured entities
Definition
Structured entity: An entity that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the
dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, such as when any voting rights relate to
administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual
arrangements.
(IFRS 12, Appendix A)
8.4 Disclosure
IFRS 12, Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities was issued in 2011. It removes all disclosure
requirements from other standards relating to group accounting and provides guidance applicable
to consolidated financial statements.
The standard requires disclosure of:
(a) the significant judgements and assumptions made in determining the nature of an interest in
another entity or arrangement, and in determining the type of joint arrangement in which an
interest is held; and
(b) information about interests in subsidiaries, associates, joint arrangements and structured entities
that are not controlled by an investor.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1085
8.4.2 Disclosure of associates and joint arrangements
The following disclosures are required in respect of associates and joint arrangements:
(a) Nature, extent and financial effects of an entity’s interests in associates or joint arrangements,
including name of the investee, principal place of business, the investor’s interest in the investee,
method of accounting for the investee and restrictions on the investee’s ability to transfer funds
to the investor
(b) Risks associated with an interest in an associate or joint venture
(c) Summarised financial information, with more detail required for joint ventures than for associates
9 Step acquisitions
Section overview
• Subsidiaries and associates are consolidated/equity accounted for from the date
control/significant influence is gained.
• In some cases acquisitions may be achieved in stages. These are known as step acquisitions.
A step acquisition occurs when the parent entity acquires control over the subsidiary in stages,
achieved by buying blocks of shares at different times.
Acquisition accounting is only applied when control is achieved.
The date on which control is achieved is the date on which the acquirer should recognise the
acquiree’s identifiable net assets and any goodwill acquired (or bargain purchase) in the business
combination.
Until control is achieved, any pre-existing interest is accounted for in accordance with:
• IFRS 9 in the case of investments in equity instruments
• IAS 28 in the case of associates and joint ventures
As you will see from the diagram, the third situation in section 9.1, where an interest in a subsidiary is
increased from, say, 60% to 80%, does not involve crossing that all-important 50% threshold.
Likewise, purchases of stakes up to 50% do not involve crossing the boundary, and therefore do not
trigger a calculation of goodwill.
£
Fair value of consideration paid to acquire control X
Non-controlling interest (valued using either fair value or the proportion of net assets
method) X
Fair value of previously held equity interest at acquisition date X
X
Fair value of net assets of acquiree (X)
Goodwill X
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1087
IFRS 3, which requires that, in the case of a step acquisition going from a financial asset at FVTOCI to
a subsidiary, the financial asset at FVTOCI is revalued in accordance with IFRS 3 para. 42:
“In a business combination achieved in stages, the acquirer shall remeasure its previously held
equity interest in the acquiree at its acquisition-date fair value and recognise the resulting gain
or loss, if any, in profit or loss or other comprehensive income, as appropriate.”
It is therefore clear that the gain on revaluation of a financial asset in a step acquisition from financial
asset to subsidiary would go through OCI in the case of financial assets at FVTOCI and to profit or
loss in the case of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL).
Solution
Journal entry
£’000 £’000
DEBIT Investment in Bath Ltd (250,000 – 230,000) 20
CREDIT Other comprehensive income and equity reserve 20
To recognise the gain on the deemed disposal of the shareholding in Bath Ltd existing immediately
before control being obtained.
Calculation of goodwill in respect of 70% (5% + 65%) holding in Bath Ltd:
£’000
Consideration transferred 3,900
Non-controlling interest (30% × £4m) 1,200
Acquisition-date fair value of previously held equity 250
5,350
Net assets acquired (4,000)
Goodwill 1,350
Solution
1 The goodwill included in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X8 is that goodwill
calculated on the initial acquisition in June 20X6:
£’000
Consideration (£760,000 + (100,000 × £2.50)) 1,010
Non-controlling interest (30% × £850,000) 255
1,265
Net assets of acquiree (850)
Goodwill 415
2 The adjustment required is based on the change in the non-controlling interest at the acquisition
date:
£
NCI on 31 December 20X8 based on old interest (30% × £970,000) 291,000
NCI on 31 December 20X8 based on new interest (20% × £970,000) 194,000
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1089
£
Adjustment required 97,000
Therefore:
10 Disposals
Section overview
• Subsidiaries and associates are consolidated/equity accounted for until the date
control/significant influence is lost therefore profits need to be time apportioned.
• A gain on disposal must also be calculated, by reference to the fair value of any interest retained
in the subsidiary or associate.
An entity may sell all or some of its shareholding in another entity. Full disposals of subsidiaries and
associates were covered in FR and are revised here. Other situations which may arise are as follows:
• The sale of shares in a subsidiary such that control is retained
• The sale of shares in a subsidiary such that the subsidiary becomes an associate
• The sale of shares in a subsidiary such that the subsidiary becomes an investment
• The sale of shares in an associate such that the associate becomes an investment
The situation where a shareholding in a subsidiary is reduced from, say, 80% to 60% – that is, where
control is retained – does not involve crossing that all-important 50% threshold.
£
Sales proceeds X
Less carrying amount (cost in P’s own statement of financial position) (X)
Profit (loss) on disposal X/(X)
£ £
Proceeds X
Less: amounts recognised before disposal:
net assets of subsidiary X
goodwill X
non-controlling interest (X)
(X)
Profit/loss X/(X)
Remember:
(a) If the disposal is mid year:
(1) a working will be required to calculate both net assets and the non-controlling interest at the
disposal date; and
(2) any dividends declared or paid in the year of disposal and before the disposal date must be
deducted from the net assets of the subsidiary if they have not already been accounted for.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1091
(b) Goodwill recognised before disposal is original goodwill arising less any impairments to date.
£’000
Retained earnings b/f 215
Profit for the year 24
A final dividend for 20X7 of £10,000 was paid on 14 March 20X8. This has not yet been accounted
for.
Requirement
What profit or loss on disposal of Westville is reported in the Kingdom group accounts for the year
ended 31 December 20X8?
Solution
Profit on disposal
£ £
Proceeds 350,000
Less amounts recognised before disposal
Net assets of Westville (£100,000 + £215,000 + (1/2 × £24,000) –
£10,000) 317,000
Goodwill (£280,000 + £67,000) – (£100,000 + £188,000) 59,000
NCI at disposal
Share of net assets (20% × £317,000) (63,400)
Goodwill on acquisition (£67,000 – (20% × £288,000)) (9,400)
(303,200)
Profit on disposal 46,800
£ £
Proceeds X
Less: cost of investment X
share of post-acquisition profits retained by associate at disposal X
impairment of investment to date (X)
(X)
Profit/(loss) X/(X)
The other effects of disposal are also similar to those of the disposal of a subsidiary:
• There is no holding in the associate at the end of the reporting period, so there is no investment
to recognise in the consolidated statement of financial position.
• The associate’s after-tax earnings should be included in consolidated profit or loss up to the date
of disposal.
Express Billings
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets 2,300 430
Investments 360 –
Current assets 1,750 220
4,410 650
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1093
Express Billings
£’000 £’000
Share capital 1,000 100
Retained earnings b/f 1,190 304
Profit for the year 120 36
Liabilities 2,100 210
4,410 650
Express disposed of a 10% holding in Billings on 31 August 20X8 for £70,000; this has not yet been
recorded in Express’s individual accounts.
Requirement
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X8.
Solution
Express Group statement of financial position at 31 December 20X8
£’000
Non-current assets (£2,300,000 + £430,000) 2,730
Goodwill (£45,000 – £5,000) 40
Current assets (£1,750,000 + £220,000 + proceeds £70,000) 2,040
4,810
Share capital 1,000
Retained earnings (W1) 1,412
Non-controlling interest 20% × (£650,000 – £210,000) 88
Liabilities (£2,100,000 + £210,000) 2,310
4,810
WORKINGS
(1) Retained earnings
£’000
Retained earnings of Express (£1,190,000 + £120,000) 1,310.0
Retained earnings of Billings
Acquisition – 31 Aug 20X8 90% × (£304,000 + (8/12 × £36,000) – £250,000) 70.2
31 Aug 20X8 – 31 Dec 20X8 (80% × 4/12 × £36,000) 9.6
Impairment of goodwill (5.0)
NCI adjustment on disposal (W2) 27.2
1,412.0
£’000
NCI in Billings at disposal:
NCI at acquisition (10% × (100 + 250)) 35.0
At disposal date:
NCI based on old shareholding (10% × £428,000) 42.8
NCI based on new shareholding (20% × £428,000) 85.6
Adjustment required 42.8
£’000
Retained earnings b/f (£304,000 – £250,000) 54.0
Profit to disposal (£36,000 × 8/12) 24.0
78.0
NCI share 10% 7.8
£ £
Proceeds X
Fair value of interest retained X
X
Less net assets of subsidiary recognised before disposal:
Net assets X
Goodwill X
Non-controlling interest (X)
(X)
Profit/loss X/(X)
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1095
Worked example: Part disposal (subsidiary to associate)
Allister Group acquired a 75% holding in Brown in 20X0, which it held until 31 December 20X8 when
two-thirds of the investment were sold for £490,000.
At this date the net assets of Brown were £800,000, goodwill arising on acquisition had been fully
impaired and the fair value of a 25% interest in Brown was £220,000.
The non-controlling interest is valued using the proportion of net assets method.
Requirement
What gain or loss arises on the disposal in the Allister Group accounts in the year ended 31
December 20X8?
Solution
Disposal
£ £
Proceeds 490,000
Fair value of 25% interest retained 220,000
710,000
Less amounts recognised before disposal:
Net assets of Brown 800,000
Goodwill (fully impaired) –
NCI at disposal (25% × £800,000) (200,000)
(600,000)
Gain on disposal 110,000
Note: The disposal triggers remeasurement of the residual interest to fair value. The gain on disposal
could be analysed as:
Realised gain £ £
Proceeds on disposal 490,000
Interest disposed of (50% × £800,000) (400,000)
90,000
Holding gain
Retained interest at fair value 220,000
Retained interest at carrying value (25% × £800,000) (200,000)
20,000
Total gain 110,000
The retained 25% interest in Brown is included in the consolidated statement of financial position at
31 December 20X8 at the fair value of £220,000.
£ £
Proceeds X
Fair value of interest retained X
X
Less: Cost of investment X
Share of post-acquisition profits retained by associate at disposal X
Impairment of investment to date (X)
(X)
Profit/(loss) X/(X)
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1097
• Include gain or loss on disposal as calculated above
Streatham Co Balham Co
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets 360 270
Investment in Balham Co 324 –
Current assets 370 370
1,054 640
Equity
Ordinary shares 540 180
Reserves 414 360
Current liabilities 100 100
1,054 640
Profit before tax 153 126
Tax (45) (36)
Profit for the year 108 90
No entries have been made in the accounts for any of the following transactions.
Assume that profits accrue evenly throughout the year.
It is the group’s policy to value the non-controlling interests at its proportionate share of the fair value
of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets.
Ignore tax on the disposal.
Requirements
8.1 Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss at 30
September 20X8 in each of the following circumstances. (Assume no impairment of goodwill.)
(a) Streatham Co sells its entire holding in Balham Co for £650,000 on 30 September 20X8.
(b) Streatham Co sells one-quarter of its holding in Balham Co for £160,000 on 30 September
20X8.
8.2 In the following circumstances you are required to calculate the gain on disposal, group
retained earnings and carrying value of the retained investment at 30 September 20X8.
(a) Streatham Co sells one-half of its holding in Balham Co for £340,000 on 30 June 20X8, and
the remaining holding (fair value £250,000) is to be dealt with as an associate.
(b) Streatham Co sells one-half of its holding in Balham Co for £340,000 on 30 June 20X8, and
the remaining holding (fair value £250,000) is to be dealt with as a financial asset at fair
value through other comprehensive income.
• The consolidated statement of cash flows shows the impact of the acquisition and disposal of
subsidiaries and associates.
• Exchange differences arising on the translation of the foreign currency accounts of group
companies will also impact the consolidated statement of cash flows. This is covered in more
detail in Chapter 21.
• Both single company and consolidated statements of cash flow were covered at Professional
Level. Single company statements were revised in Chapter 14 of this Workbook. In this chapter we
summarise the main points and provide two interactive questions and two comprehensive self-
test questions. Please look back to your earlier study material if you have any major problems with
these.
£ £
b/f NCI (CSFP) X
NCI (CIS) X
NCI dividend paid (balancing figure) X
c/f NCI (CSFP) X –
X X
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1099
(b) Dividends received from the associate must be disclosed as a separate cash flow classified as
‘Cash flows from investing activities’. The cash receipt can be calculated as follows:
INVESTMENTS IN ASSOCIATES
£ £
b/f Investment in Associate (CSFP) X
Share of profit of Associate (CIS) X Dividend received (balancing figure) X
– c/f Investment in Associate (CSFP) X
X X
Subsidiary acquired in the period Subtract PPE, inventories, payables, receivables etc, at
the date of acquisition from the movement on these
items.
Subsidiary disposed of in the period Add PPE, inventories, payables, receivables etc, at the
date of disposal to the movements on these items.
This would also affect the calculation of the dividend paid to the non-controlling interest. The T-
account working is modified as follows:
NON-CONTROLLING INTEREST
£ £
NCI in Subsidiary at disposal X b/f NCI (CSFP) X
NCI dividend paid (balancing figure) X NCI in Subsidiary at acquisition X
c/f NCI (CSFP) X NCI (CIS) X
X X
£’000
Property, plant and equipment 190
Inventories 70
Trade receivables 30
Cash and cash equivalents 10
Trade payables (40)
260
The consolidated statements of financial position of Pippa plc as at 31 December were as follows:
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 2,500 2,300
Goodwill 66 –
2,566 2,300
Current assets
Inventories 1,450 1,200
Trade receivables 1,370 1,100
Cash and cash equivalents 76 50
2,896 2,350
5,462 4,650
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
Ordinary share capital (£1 shares) 1,150 1,000
Share premium account 650 500
Retained earnings 1,791 1,530
3,591 3,030
Non-controlling interest 31 –
Total equity 3,622 3,030
Current liabilities
Trade payables 1,690 1,520
Income tax payable 150 100
1,840 1,620
5,462 4,650
The consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X8 was as follows:
£’000
Revenue 10,000
Cost of sales (7,500)
Gross profit 2,500
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1101
£’000
Administrative expenses (2,080)
Profit before tax 420
Income tax expense (150)
Profit for the year 270
Profit attributable to:
Owners of Pippa plc 261
Non-controlling interest 9
270
The statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 20X8 (extract) was as follows:
Retained
earnings
£’000
Balance at 31 December 20X7 1,530
Total comprehensive income for the year 261
Balance at 31 December 20X8 1,791
20X8 20X7
£’000 £’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 4,067 3,950
Current assets
Inventories 736 535
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 June 20X8 (summarised)
£’000
Continuing operations
Profit before tax 862
Income tax expense (290)
Profit for the year from continuing operations 572
Discontinued operations
Profit for the year from discontinued operations 50
Profit for the year 622
Profit attributable to:
Owners of Caitlin plc 519
Non-controlling interest 103
622
£’000
Property, plant and equipment 390
Inventories 50
Receivables 39
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1103
£’000
Cash and cash equivalents 20
Trade payables (42)
457
(2) The profit for the period from discontinued operations figure is made up as follows:
£’000
Profit before tax 20
Income tax expense (4)
Profit on disposal 34
50
• The group auditor has sole responsibility for the audit opinion on the group financial statements.
• The component auditors should co-operate with the group auditors. In some cases this will be a
legal duty.
• The group auditor will need to assess the extent to which the work of the component auditors can
be relied on.
• Specific audit procedures will be performed on the consolidation process.
• Where a group includes a foreign subsidiary, compliance with relevant accounting standards will
need to be considered.
12.1 Introduction
Many of the basic principles applied in the audit of a group are much the same as the audit of a
single company. However, there are a number of significant additional considerations.
The first area to consider is the use of another auditor. Often, one or more subsidiaries in the group
will be audited by a different audit firm. Evaluating whether the component auditor’s work can be
relied on, and communicating effectively with the component auditor, therefore become important.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1105
will have to express an opinion on financial information, some of which has been audited by another
party. ISA 600 addresses this issue in particular and is summarised below.
Definitions
Group audit: The audit of the group financial statements.
Group engagement partner: The partner or other person in the firm who is responsible for the group
audit engagement and its performance and for the auditor’s report on the group financial statements
that is issued on behalf of the firm.
Group engagement team: Partners and staff who establish the overall group audit strategy,
communicate with component auditors, perform work on the consolidation process, and evaluate
the conclusions drawn from the audit evidence as the basis for forming an opinion on the group
financial statements.
Component auditor: An auditor who, at the request of the group engagement team, performs work
on financial information related to a component for the group audit.
Component: An entity or business activity for which the group or component management prepares
financial information that should be included in the group financial statements.
Component materiality: The materiality level for a component determined by the group
engagement team.
Significant component: A component identified by the group engagement team: (a) that is of
individual significance to the group, or (b) that, due to its specific nature or circumstances, is likely to
include significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial statements.
(ISA 600.9)
The duty of the group auditors is to report on the group accounts, which includes balances and
transactions of all the components of the group.
In the UK (and in most jurisdictions), the group auditors have sole responsibility for this opinion even
where the group financial statements include amounts derived from accounts which have not been
audited by them. ISA 600 explains that even where an auditor is required by law or regulation to refer
to the component auditors in the auditor’s report on the group financial statements, the report must
indicate that the reference does not diminish the group engagement partner’s or the firm’s
responsibility for the group audit opinion. As a result, they cannot discharge their responsibility to
report on the group financial statements by an unquestioning acceptance of component companies’
financial statements, whether audited or not.
(ISA 600.11)
Note: In the UK for audits of group financial statements of PIEs the group engagement partner is also
responsible for the additional report to the audit committee as required by ISA 260. – (ISA 600.49D1)
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1107
performed at group level, then some components that are not significant components will be
selected and one or more of the following will be performed (either by the group auditor or the
component auditor):
• An audit using component materiality
• An audit of one or more account balances, classes of transactions or disclosures
• A review using component materiality
• Specified procedures
(ISA 600.29)
Involvement in the work of a component auditor
The extent of involvement by the group auditor at the planning stage will depend on the:
• significance of the component;
• identified significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial statements; and
• group auditor’s understanding of the component auditor.
Based on these factors the group auditors may perform the following procedures:
(a) Meeting with the component management or the component auditors to obtain an
understanding of the component and its environment
(b) Reviewing the component auditor’s overall audit strategy and audit plan
(c) Performing risk assessment procedures to identify and assess risks of material misstatement at
the component level. These may be performed with the component auditor or by the group
auditor
Where the component is a significant component the nature, timing and extent of the group
auditor’s involvement is affected by their understanding of the component auditor but at a minimum
should include the following procedures:
(a) Discussion with the component auditor or component management regarding the component’s
business activities that are significant to the group
(b) Discussing with the component auditor the susceptibility of the component to material
misstatement of the financial information due to fraud or error
(c) Reviewing the component auditor’s documentation of identified significant risks of material
misstatements. This may be in the form of a memorandum including the conclusions drawn by
the component auditors
(ISA 600.30)
12.4.2 Communication
The group engagement team shall communicate its requirements to the component auditor on a
timely basis (ISA 600.40).
ISA 600 prescribes the types of information that must be sent by the group auditor to the component
auditor and vice versa.
12.4.3 Communicating with group management and those charged with governance
ISA 600 states that the group engagement team will determine which of the identified deficiencies in
internal control should be communicated to those charged with governance and group
management. In making this assessment the following matters should be considered.
• Significant deficiencies in the design or operating effectiveness of group-wide controls
• Deficiencies that the group engagement team has identified in internal controls at components
that are judged to be significant to the group
• Deficiencies that component auditors have identified in internal controls at components that are
judged to be significant to the group
• Fraud identified by the group engagement team or component auditors or information indicating
that a fraud may exist
(ISA 600.46-.47)
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1109
Where a component auditor is required to express an audit opinion on the financial statements of a
component, the group engagement team will request group management to inform component
management of any matters that they, the group engagement team, have become aware of that may
be significant to the financial statements of the component. If group management refuses to pass on
the communication, the group engagement team will discuss the matter with those charged with
governance of the group. If the matter is still unresolved the group engagement team shall consider
whether to advise the component auditor not to issue the audit report on the component financial
statements until the matter is resolved.
(ISA 600.48)
12.4.5 Documentation
• The group engagement team must include in the audit documentation the following matters:
• An analysis of components, indicating those that are significant
• The nature, timing and extent of the group engagement team’s involvement in the work
performed by the component auditors on significant components including, where applicable,
the group engagement team’s review of the component auditor’s audit documentation
• Written communications between the group engagement team and the component auditors
about the group engagement team’s requirements
In the UK, the Companies Act 2006 requires group auditors to review the audit work conducted by
other persons and to record that review. This requirement is now also specifically addressed in the
revised ISA.
(ISA 600.50D1)
12.5.2 Acquisition
Acquisitions can take many forms. The type of acquisition (eg, hostile, friendly) and future
management of the subsidiary (fully integrated, autonomous) will also impact on risk.
Valuation of assets and liabilities These should be valued at fair value at the date
of acquisition in accordance with IFRS 13.
Valuation of consideration This should be at fair value and will include any
contingent consideration. Any deferred
consideration should be discounted.
Level of control or influence This will determine the nature of the investment
and its subsequent treatment in the group
financial statements eg, subsidiary, associate and
should be determined in accordance with IFRS
10/IAS 28 (IFRS 10 retains control as the key
concept underlying the parent/subsidiary
relationship but has broadened the definition
and clarified the application).
Consolidation adjustments The group must have systems which enable the
identification of intra-group balances and
accounts.
Adequacy of provisions in the target While the acquirer is likely to know its plans,
company other provisions may be necessary within the
acquired entity.
If such provisions are currently unrecognised and
have never been recorded (eg, in board minutes),
there is a clear risk that the acquiring entity will
overpay.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1111
Risk areas Key issues
Solution
Costs
The set-up costs of the two ventures will need financing. Will this be done from the existing funds
within the companies, or will external finance be needed?
As RBE is a financial institution, is it providing the bulk of the finance with loan amount outstanding to
the other parties?
How will the infrastructure be established? Who will pay for the website to be constructed and
maintained? What is the split of these costs?
What is the profit forecast for the first periods? Initial expenses are likely to exceed revenues,
therefore losses may be expected in the initial periods.
Accounting
RBE is already established in this market and is therefore likely to be providing the asset base to
support its activities. How are the assets valued in the joint venture accounts?
Is there any payment to be made to RBE for the knowledge and experience that it brings to the joint
arrangements?
What type of joint arrangement is it?
What is the agreement on profit sharing? The underlying elements will need to be audited and the
profit share recalculated. The tax liability arising from RBE’s share of the profits also needs to be
audited.
How long is the joint arrangement agreement for? This will help ascertain the correct write-off period
of assets.
If either of the joint arrangements is loss making, has consortium relief been assumed in RBE’s
accounts? Has this been correctly calculated?
Markets
The products are likely to be launched through the internet; this may expand the customer base of
the companies. E-business has its own specific set of risks; these are covered in the Business Strategy
section of Business Environment.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1113
People
It is likely that there will be a combination of staff involved from each of the parties, plus some
additional staff new to both organisations. The cultural and operational impacts (as explained in the
main text) need to be considered.
Systems
If the arrangements described are joint ventures, a completely new set of systems will need to be
established. Risk will be increased due to the unfamiliarity of the staff with these systems.
Responsibility for control
If the entity is a limited company then the directors will be responsible for ensuring proper controls.
12.6.1 Acquisition
If the group audit includes a newly acquired subsidiary or a subsidiary which is disposed of,
compliance with IFRS 3 and IFRS 10 will be relevant. The auditor will need to consider the following
issues in particular:
Level of control The auditor will need to consider whether the appropriate accounting
treatment has been adopted depending on the level of control (per IFRS
10 an investor controls an investee if it has power over the investee,
exposure or rights to variable returns and the ability to use power to affect
returns). Procedures will be as follows:
• Identify total number of shares held to calculate % holding.
• Review contract or agreements between companies to identify key
terms which may indicate control and any restriction on control eg, right
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1115
Issue Audit consequence
Valuation of assets A review will need to be carried out of the fair value of assets and liabilities
and liabilities at fair at the date of acquisition, adjusted to the year end (in accordance with IFRS
value 13). Review of trade journals or specialist valuations may be required.
Where specialist valuers have been used (eg, to value brands) an
assessment will need to be made on the reliability of these valuations.
Where intangibles have been recognised on consolidation which were not
previously recognised in the individual financial statements of the company
acquired the auditor will need to give careful consideration as to the
justification of this and whether the treatment is in accordance with IFRS
3/IFRS 13.
Estimates for provisions existing at the date of acquisition will need to be
assessed for reliability.
Goodwill The auditor will need to consider whether the initial calculation is correct in
accordance with IFRS 3. Performance of the subsidiary company will need
to be reviewed to identify whether any impairment is necessary.
Tax liabilities and The amount of corporation tax liabilities provided for will need to be
assets reviewed.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities must also be reviewed. The impairment of
assets or goodwill should be taken into account.
Prior year audit of As first year of inclusion of subsidiary, review last year’s audit report for any
subsidiary modification and consider implications for this year’s audit if necessary.
Planning issues Adjust audit plan to ensure visit to subsidiary is included. If audited by
another auditor contact secondary auditor to discuss the following:
• Audit deadline
• Type and quality of audit papers
• Review of audit
• Identification of consolidation adjustments
12.6.2 Disposal
Where the group includes a subsidiary which has been disposed of during the year, the following
issues will be relevant:
• Identification of the date of the change in stake
• Assessment of the remaining stake to determine the appropriate accounting treatment post-
disposal
• Assessment of the fair value of the remaining stake
• Whether the profit or loss on disposal has been calculated in accordance with IFRSs
• Whether amounts have been appropriately time apportioned eg, income and expense items
12.6.4 Materiality
Where a subsidiary is immaterial, limited work will be performed. However, care should be taken with
respect to the following:
• Apparently immaterial subsidiaries may be materially understated.
• Several small subsidiaries may cumulatively be material.
• Subsidiaries with a small asset base may engage in transactions of significant value and which
may be relevant to understanding the group.
The ICAEW Audit and Assurance faculty document Auditing Groups: A Practical Guide (2014)
identifies the following as factors which may influence component materiality levels:
• The fact that component materiality must always be lower than group materiality
• The size of the component
• Whether the component has a statutory audit
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1117
• The characteristics or circumstances that make the component significant
• The strength of the component’s control environment
• The likely incidence of misstatements, taking account past experience
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1119
• There may be threats to going concern due to economic and/or political instability
• Non-compliance with local taxes or misstatement of local tax liabilities
Audit procedures should include the following:
• Confirm that the balances of the subsidiary have been appropriately translated to the group
reporting currency:
– Assets and liabilities at the closing rate at the end of the reporting period
– Income and expenditure at the rate ruling at the transaction date. An average would be a
suitable alternative provided there have been no significant fluctuations
• Confirm consistency of treatment of the translation of equity (closing rate or historical rate)
• Confirm that the consolidation process has been performed correctly eg, elimination of intra-
group balances
• Recalculate the non-controlling interest
• Confirm that goodwill has been translated at the closing rate
• Confirm the disclosure of exchange differences as a separate component of equity
• Assess whether disclosure requirements of IAS 21 have been satisfied
• If the foreign operation is operating in a hyperinflationary economy confirm that the financial
statements have been adjusted under IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies
before they are translated and consolidated
• Involve a specialist tax audit team to review the calculation of tax balances against submitted and
draft tax returns
Understand group Understand the group structure and the nature of the components of
management’s process the group
and timetable to Consider whether to accept an engagement where the group auditor
produce consolidated is only directly responsible for a minority of the total group
accounts
Understand the accounting framework applicable to each component
and any local statutory reporting requirements
Understand the component auditors – consider their qualifications,
independence and competence
For unrelated auditors or related auditors where the group auditor is
unable to rely on common policies and procedures, consider the
following:
• Visiting the component auditor
• Requesting that the component auditor completes a questionnaire
or representation
• Obtaining confirmation from a relevant regulatory body
• Discussing the component auditor with colleagues from their own
firm
For component auditors based overseas consider whether they have
enough knowledge and experience of ISAs
Design group audit Get involved early. Talk to group management while they are planning
process to match the consolidation
management’s process Draft instructions to component auditors allocating work and be clear
and timetable as to deadlines required
Focus the group audit on high risk areas
Consider risks arising from the consolidation process itself:
• Consolidation adjustments
• Incomplete information to support adjustments between
accounting frameworks eg, where a subsidiary prepares its local
accounts under US GAAP and the parent is preparing IFRS financial
statements
Discuss fraud with component auditors and consider the following:
• Business risks
• How and where the group financial statements may be susceptible
to material misstatement due to fraud or error
• How group management and component management could
perpetrate and conceal fraudulent financial reporting and how
assets of the components could be misappropriated
• Known factors affecting the group that may provide the incentive or
pressure for group or component management or others to commit
fraud or indicate a culture or environment that enables those
people to rationalise committing fraud
• The risk that group or component management may override
controls
Understand internal control across the group:
• Request details of material weaknesses in internal controls
identified by component auditors
• Communicate material weaknesses in group-wide controls and
significant weaknesses in internal controls of components to group
management
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1121
Clearly communicate Explain the extent of the group auditors’ involvement in the work of the
expectations and component auditors:
information required • Make it clear what the component auditors are being asked to
including timetable perform eg, a full audit, a review or work on specific balances or
transactions
• Clarify the timetable and format of reporting back
Review completed questionnaires and other deliverables from
component auditors carefully
Decide whether and when to visit component auditors and when to
request access to their working papers
Get group management to obtain the consent of subsidiary
management to communicate with the group auditor to deal with
concerns about client confidentiality and sensitivity
Consider whether holding discussions with or visiting component
auditors could deal with secrecy and data-protection issues
Obtain information There is often only a short time for group auditors to resolve any issues
early where practicable arising from the report they receive from component auditors
Request some information early, such as copies of management letter
points from component auditors carrying out planning and control
testing before the year end
Keep track of whether Where component auditors indicate up front that they will not be able
reports have been to provide the information requested, consider alternatives rather than
received and respond to waiting until the sign-off deadline
any issues in a timely Put in place a system to monitor responses to instructions and follow
fashion up on non-submission
Conclude on the audit The group auditors should be in a position to form their opinion on the
and consider possible group financial statements
improvements for the The group auditors will consider the need for a group management
next year’s process letter and reporting to those charged with governance of the group
including management
letter issues Debrief the team and consider whether the process worked as well as
it could have done, along with any changes to future accounting and
auditing requirements, and whether there are any issues that should be
communicated to management and those charged with governance,
or any changes to next year’s audit strategy
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1123
The assurance adviser will therefore be addressing the issue of changing exchange and interest
rates, where material, in the relevant accounting period. He would discuss with management any
difficulties that had arisen over the legal requirements and whether remittance from overseas had
proved straightforward.
The advisor would also have gained assurance that the company had identified the UK reporting
requirements.
Having addressed business risk, the following steps may need to be taken:
• Examination of the loan capital terms and contractual liabilities of the company
• Checking the remittance of proceeds between the country of origin and the company by
reference to bank and cash records
• Reviewing the movement of exchange and interest rates, and discussing their possible impact
with the directors
• Obtaining details of any hedging transaction and ensuring that exchange rate movements on the
finance had been offset
• Examining the financial statements to determine accurate disclosure of accounting policy and
accounting treatment conforming to UK requirements
• Evaluating whether the directors had satisfied themselves as to the company’s conforming status
as a going concern
As we have often seen, the higher the risk of an audit assignment, the more important it is for the
auditor to exercise judgement. For example, just because a firm has a code of governance does not
mean that it will be complied with.
Audit impact
The variation in local regulation may have an impact on the audit itself. For example, some
subsidiaries may be in countries which do not have accounting and auditing standards developed to
the same extent as those in the UK. As a result, the financial statements and the audit work carried
out on them by local practitioners may not conform to UK standards.
Control environment This sets the tone from the top of the organisation and will need to
be applicable at both a local and global level. Factors to consider
include the following:
• Organisational structure of the group
• Level of involvement of the parent company in components
• Degree of autonomy of management of components
• Supervision of components’ management by parent company
• Information systems, and information received centrally on a
regular basis
Risk assessment The nature of a global organisation increases risk. Management need
to ensure that a process is in place to identify the risks at the global
level and assess their impact
Information systems Information systems will need to be designed so that accurate and
timely information is available both at the local level and on an entity
basis. Compatibility of systems and processes will be important
Control procedures While there may be local variations, minimum entity-wide standards
must be established to ensure that there are adequate controls
throughout the organisation
Monitoring In organisations of this size audit committees and the internal audit
function will have a crucial role to play
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1125
Where the product or service has a readily available outside market, internal transfers are unlikely to
occur unless the transfer price is similar to the market price. The transfer price may be slightly below
the market price to recognise the reduction in risk (eg, no cash changes hands so risk of bad debts
may be reduced) and likely savings in packing and delivery.
Another method used to set transfer prices is ‘cost plus’. The transferring division should be able to
recover its variable costs and any contribution lost because it diverted resources in order to fulfil the
internal transfer. The costs involved should be standard rather than actual, otherwise inefficiencies in
the selling division will be passed on to the buying division.
The choice of the most appropriate transfer pricing method depends on the nature of the business
and the level of risks borne by the selling division.
Transfer pricing can be used to manipulate profits for tax purposes, rather than to measure
performance. Consequently, transfer pricing issues have come to the top of the agenda for tax
authorities worldwide, and become the focus of an increasing number of HM Revenue & Customs tax
inquiries (particularly where they involve transactions between divisions which are resident in
different countries).
If challenged by the tax authorities, transfer pricing adjustments can have a material impact on the
selling and buying divisions’ corporation tax expense and tax liabilities. It may also change the
recognition of intercompany revenue in the individual companies’ financial statements.
Auditing the transfer pricing status of large multinational groups often requires the involvement of
tax specialists. Issues that the auditor should consider when reviewing the company’s transfer pricing
policies include the following:
(a) Are there any unresolved tax enquiries/tax audits relating to transfer pricing?
(b) Has an Advanced Transfer Pricing Agreement been signed between the group and the tax
authorities? If so, does the transfer pricing policy applied in the period conform to the
Agreement?
(c) Is the transfer pricing method adopted appropriate for the type of transaction, and the nature of
the selling division’s business?
(d) Do the transfer prices appear reasonable, compared to existing benchmarks (for example, is the
percentage of mark-up in a cost-plus policy in line with the mark-ups applied by comparable
companies in the industry)?
(e) Have there been any changes in the divisions’ business, which may require the transfer pricing
policy to be revised?
Definition
Transnational audit: An audit of financial statements which are or may be relied upon outside the
audited entity’s home jurisdiction for purposes of significant lending, investment or regulatory
decisions; this will include audits of all financial statements of companies with listed equity or debt
and other public interest entities which attract particular public attention because of their size,
products or services provided.
Audits of entities with listed equity or debt are always transnational audits, as their financial
statements are or may be relied upon outside their home jurisdiction. Other audits that are
transnational audits include audits of those entities in either the public or the private sectors where
there is a reasonable expectation that the financial statements of the entity may be relied upon by a
user outside the entity’s home jurisdiction for purposes of significant lending, investment or
regulatory decisions, whether or not the entity has listed equity or debt or where entities attract
particular attention because of their size, products or services provided. (These would include, for
example, large charitable organisations or trusts, major monopolies or duopolies, providers of
financial or other borrowing facilities to commercial or private customers, deposit-taking
organisations and those holding funds belonging to third parties in connection with investment or
savings activities.)
In principle, the definition of transnational audit should be applied to the whole group audit,
including the individual components comprising the consolidated entity.
Examples to illustrate the definition:
Example Explanation
Audit of a private savings and loans Although it could be considered a public interest entity,
business operating entirely in the US this would not qualify as a transnational audit assuming it
(ie, only US depositors and US can be demonstrated that there are no transnational
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1127
Example Explanation
investments) users.
In applying the definition of transnational audit, there
should be a rebuttable presumption that all banks and
financial institutions are included, unless it can be clearly
demonstrated that there is no transnational element
from the perspective of a financial statement user and
that there are no operations across national borders.
Potential transnational users would include investors,
lenders, governments, customers and regulators.
Audit of an international charity taking This entity can clearly be considered a public interest
donations through various national entity and operating across borders. Further, the
branches and making grants around international structure would create a reasonable
the world expectation that the financial statements could be used
across national borders by donors in other countries if
not by others for purposes of significant lending,
investment or regulatory decisions. The audit is likely to
qualify as transnational.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1129
1130 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2021
Further question practice
1 Knowledge diagnostic
Before you move on to question practice, complete the following knowledge diagnostic and check
you are able to confirm you possess the following essential learning from this chapter. If not, you are
advised to revisit the relevant learning from the topic indicated.
4. Can you apply IFRS 3, Fair Value Measurement to business combinations? (Topic 4)
5. Where an entity prepares separate financial statements how should it account for
associates and joint ventures in its separate financial statements? (Topic 5)
6. Can you account for disposals (Topic 10) and business combinations achieved in stages
(Topic 9)?
7. Do you understand the potential risks faced by the auditor when auditing group financial
statements? (Topic 13)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Upstart Records This requires a detailed explanation with calculations of the treatment of
requirement (1) goodwill and non-controlling interest on consolidation.
Poe, Whitman & Co This focuses on audit and ethical issues relating to the partial disposal of a
(disposal of Scherzo subsidiary.
only)
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1131
Question Learning benefit from attempting this question
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly, or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1133
Procedures
• Non-controlling interest shown as a separate figure:
– In the statement of financial position, within total equity but separately from the parent
shareholders’ equity – IFRS 10.22
– In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the share of the profit after
tax and share of the total comprehensive income
• Accounting dates of group companies to be no more than three months apart – IFRS 10.B93
• Uniform accounting policies across group or adjustments to underlying values – IFRS 10.19
• Bring in share of new subsidiary’s income and expenses: – IFRS 10.20
– From date of acquisition, on acquisition
– To date of disposal, on disposal
• Changes that do not result in a loss of control accounted for as equity transactions – IFRS 10.B96
Loss of control – IFRS 10.B97–99
• Calculation of gain
• Account for amounts in other comprehensive income as if underlying assets disposed of
• Retained interest accounted for in accordance with relevant standard based on fair value
Parent’s separate financial statements
• Account for subsidiary on basis of cost and distributions declared – IAS 27.12
7 Audit of groups
• Definitions:
– Group audit partner and group engagement team – ISA 600.9
– Component auditor – ISA 600.9
• Responsibility – ISA 600.11
• Acceptance considerations – ISA 600.12–.13
• Procedures to assess the extent to which the component auditor can be relied upon – ISA 600.19–
.20
• Significant components – ISA 600.26–.27
• Communication with component auditors – ISA 600.40–.41
• Communication with group management and those charged with governance – ISA 600.46–.49
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1135
Self-test questions
1 Burdett
The Burdett Company acquired an 80% interest in The Swain Company for £1,340,000 when the fair
value of Swain’s identifiable assets and liabilities was £1,200,000.
Burdett acquired a 60% interest in The Thamin Company for £340,000 when the fair value of
Thamin’s identifiable assets and liabilities was £680,000.
Neither Swain nor Thamin had any contingent liabilities at the acquisition date and the above fair
values were the same as the carrying amounts in their financial statements. Annual impairment
reviews have not resulted in any impairment losses being recognised. The Burdett Company values
the non-controlling interest as the proportionate interest in the identifiable net assets at acquisition.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations, what figures in respect of goodwill and of the excess of assets
and liabilities acquired over the cost of combination should be included in Burdett’s consolidated
statement of financial position?
2 Sheliak
The Sheliak Company acquired equipment on 1 January 20X3 at a cost of £1,000,000, depreciating it
over eight years with a nil residual value.
On 1 January 20X6 The Parotia Company acquired 100% of Sheliak and estimated the fair value of
the equipment at £575,000, with a remaining life of five years. This fair value was not incorporated
into Sheliak’s books and subsequent depreciation charges continued to be made by reference to
original cost.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations and IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements, what
adjustments should be made to the depreciation charge for the year and the SFP carrying amount in
preparing the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
3 Finch
On 1 January 20X6 The Finch Company acquired 85% of the ordinary share capital and 40% of the
irredeemable preference share capital of The Sequoia Company for consideration totalling £5.1
million. At the acquisition date Sequoia had the following statement of financial position.
£’000
Non-current assets 5,500
Current assets 2,600
8,100
Ordinary shares of £1 1,000
Preference shares of £1 2,500
Retained earnings 3,300
Current liabilities 1,300
8,100
Included in non-current assets of Sequoia at the acquisition date was a property with a carrying
amount of £600,000 that had a fair value of £900,000.
4 Maackia
On 31 December 20X7 The Maackia Company acquires 65% of the ordinary share capital of The
Sorbus Company for £4.8 million. Sorbus is incorporated in Flatland, which has not adopted IFRS for
its financial statements. At the acquisition date the fair value of a 35% interest in Sorbus is £1.8
million and net assets of Sorbus have a carrying amount of £4.6 million before taking into account
the following.
Included in the net assets of Sorbus is a business that Maackia has put on the market for immediate
sale. This business has a carrying amount of £500,000, a fair value of £760,000 and a value in use of
£810,000. Costs to sell are estimated at £40,000.
Sorbus also has a defined benefit pension plan which has a plan asset of £1.6 million, and an
obligation with present value of £1,280,000. Sorbus has recognised the net plan asset of £320,000 in
its statement of financial position. Maackia does not anticipate any reduction in contributions as a
result of acquiring Sorbus.
Requirement
Under IFRS 3, Business Combinations, what (to the nearest £1,000) is the goodwill arising on the
acquisition of Sorbus, assuming that Maackia measures the non-controlling interest using the fair
value method?
5 Gibbston
On 1 May 20X7 The Gibbston Company acquired 70% of the ordinary share capital of The Crum
Company for consideration of £15 million cash payable immediately and £5.5 million payable on 1
May 20X8. Further consideration of £13.3 million cash is payable on 1 May 20Y0 dependent on a
range of contingent future events. The management of Gibbston believe there is a 45% probability
of paying the amount in full.
The equity of Crum had a carrying amount of £20 million at 1 January 20X7. Crum incurred losses of
£3 million evenly over the year ended 31 December 20X7. The carrying amount and fair values of the
assets of Crum are the same except that at the acquisition date the fair value relating to plant is £9
million higher than carrying amount. The weighted average remaining useful life of the plant is three
years from the acquisition date.
Requirements
Calculate the following amounts (to the nearest £0.1m) in accordance with IFRS 3, Business
Combinations and IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements that would be included in the
consolidated financial statements of Gibbston for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
(a) Goodwill
(b) Non-controlling interest in profit/loss
(c) Non-controlling interest included in equity
Note: A rate of 10% is to be used in any discount calculations. The non-controlling interest is
measured using the proportion of net assets method.
6 Supermall
This question is based on Illustrative example 2 from IFRS 11.
Two real estate companies (the parties) set up a separate vehicle (Supermall) for the purpose of
acquiring and operating a shopping centre. The contractual arrangement between the parties
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1137
establishes joint control of the activities that are conducted in Supermall. The main feature of
Supermall’s legal form is that the entity, not the parties, has rights to the assets, and obligations for
the liabilities, relating to the arrangement. These activities include the rental of the retail units,
managing the car park, maintaining the centre and its equipment, such as lifts, and building the
reputation and customer base for the centre as a whole.
The terms of the contractual arrangement are such that:
(1) Supermall owns the shopping centre. The contractual arrangement does not specify that the
parties have rights to the shopping centre.
(2) The parties are not liable in respect of the debts, liabilities or obligations of Supermall. If
Supermall is unable to pay any of its debts or other liabilities or to discharge its obligations to
third parties, the liability of each party to any third party will be limited to the unpaid amount of
that party’s capital contribution.
(3) The parties have the right to sell or pledge their interests in Supermall.
(4) Each party receives a share of the income from operating the shopping centre (which is the
rental income net of the operating costs) in accordance with its interest in Supermall.
Requirement
Explain how Supermall should be classified in accordance with IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements
8 Stuhr
On 1 January 20X6 The Stuhr Company acquired 30% of the ordinary share capital of the Bismuth
Company by the issue of one million shares with a fair value of £4.00 each. From that date Stuhr did
not exercise significant influence over Bismuth, and accounted for the investment at fair value with
changes in value included in profit or loss. At 1 January 20X6 the net assets of Bismuth had a
carrying amount of £6.4 million and a fair value of £7.2 million.
On 1 March 20X7, Stuhr bought a further 50% of the ordinary share capital of Bismuth by issuing a
further 2 million shares with a fair value of £5.00 each. At that date the net assets of Bismuth had a
9 Fleurie
Fleurie bought 85% of Merlot on 30 June 20X3, providing consideration in the form of £2 million
cash immediately and a further £1.5 million cash conditional upon earnings targets being met.
At acquisition, the net assets of Merlot were £2.2 million and the fair value of the 15% not purchased
was £350,000. Fleurie measures the non-controlling interest using the full goodwill method.
On 31 December 20X7, as part of a long-term strategy, Fleurie sold a 15% stake from its 85% holding
in Merlot, realising proceeds of £560,000. At this date the net assets of Merlot were £3.5 million.
Requirement
What impact does the disposal have on the financial statements of the Fleurie Group?
10 Chianti
Chianti purchased 95% of the 100,000 £1 ordinary share capital of Barolo on 1 January 20X2, giving
rise to goodwill of £70,000. At this date Barolo’s retained earnings were £130,000. There were no
other reserves.
On 30 September 20X2, when the net assets of Barolo were £320,000, Chianti disposed of the
majority of its holding in Barolo, retaining just 5% of share capital, with a fair value of £20,000. Chianti
received £340,000 consideration for the sale.
The following information is relevant:
• Goodwill in Barolo has been impaired by £20,000.
• In April 20X2, Barolo revalued a plot of land from £50,000 to £75,000. This land was held with the
intention of building a new head office on it.
• The non-controlling interest is valued using the proportion of net assets method.
Requirement
What is the impact of the disposal on the Chianti Group statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income?
11 Porter
The following consolidated financial statements relate to Porter, a public limited company:
Porter group: statement of financial position as at 31 May 20X6
20X6 20X5
£m £m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 958 812
Goodwill 15 10
Investment in associate 48 39
1,021 861
Current assets
Inventories 154 168
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1139
20X6 20X5
£m £m
Trade receivables 132 112
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 16 0
Cash and cash equivalents 158 48
460 328
1,481 1,189
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
Share capital (£1 ordinary shares) 332 300
Share premium account 212 172
Retained earnings 188 165
Revaluation surplus 101 54
833 691
Non-controlling interests 84 28
917 719
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings 380 320
Deferred tax liability 38 26
418 346
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 110 98
Interest payable 8 4
Current tax payable 28 22
146 124
1,481 1,189
Porter group: statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
May 20X6
£m
Revenue 956
Cost of sales (634)
Gross profit 322
Other income 6
Distribution costs (97)
Administrative expenses (115)
Finance costs (16)
Share of profit of associate 12
Profit before tax 112
Income tax expense (34)
£m
Profit attributable to:
Owners of the parent 68
Non-controlling interests 10
78
Total comprehensive income attributable to:
Owners of the parent 115
Non-controlling interests 12
127
£m
Property, plant and equipment 92
Inventories 20
Trade receivables 16
Cash and cash equivalents 8
136
An impairment test conducted at the year end resulted in a write down of goodwill relating to
another wholly owned subsidiary. This was charged to cost of sales.
Group policy is to value non-controlling interests at the date of acquisition at the proportionate share
of the fair value of the acquiree’s identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1141
(2) Depreciation charged to the consolidated profit or loss amounted to £44 million. There were no
disposals of property, plant and equipment during the year.
(3) Other income represents gains on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss. The financial
assets are investments in quoted shares. They were purchased shortly before the year end with
surplus cash, and were designated at fair value through profit or loss as they are expected to be sold
shortly after the year end. No dividends have yet been received.
(4) Included in ‘trade and other payables’ is the £ equivalent of an invoice for 102 million shillings for
some equipment purchased from a foreign supplier. The asset was invoiced on 5 March 20X6, but
had not been paid for at the year end, 31 May 20X6.
Exchange gains or losses on the transaction have been included in administrative expenses. Relevant
exchange rates were as follows:
Shillings to £1
5 March 20X6 = 6.8
31 May 20X6 = 6.0
(5) Movement on retained earnings was as follows:
£m
At 31 May 20X5 165
Total comprehensive income 68
Dividends paid (45)
At 31 May 20X6 188
Requirement
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for Porter for the year ended 31 May 20X6 in
accordance with IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows, using the indirect method.
Notes to the statement of cash flows are not required.
12 Tastydesserts
The following are extracts from the financial statements of Tastydesserts and one of its wholly owned
subsidiaries, Custardpowders, the shares in which were acquired on 31 October 20X2.
Statements of financial position
Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
December 20X2
£’000
Profit before interest and tax 546
Finance costs –
Share of profit of associates 120
Profit before tax 666
Income tax expense 126
Profit/total comprehensive income for the year 540
Attributable to:
Owners of the parent 540
Non-controlling interests –
540
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1143
(4) No write-down of goodwill was required during the period.
(5) Total dividends paid by Tastydesserts (parent) during the period amounted to £63,000.
Requirement
Prepare a consolidated statement of cash flows for Tastydesserts and subsidiaries for the year ended
31 December 20X2 using the indirect method.
Notes to the statement of cash flows are not required.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
£’000
Consideration 3m shares issued at £7 21,000
1m additional shares at £7 7,000
Non-controlling interest 10% × £18m 1,800
29,800
Non-controlling interest
£ £
Share of net assets (25% × 339,000) 84,750
Share of goodwill:
NCI at acquisition date at fair value 90,000
NCI share of net assets at acquisition date (25% × £300,000) (75,000)
15,000
99,750
£m £m
Consideration (£2.00 × 6m) 12.0
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1145
£m £m
Non-controlling interest
Share capital 8.0
Pre-acquisition retained earnings 4.4
Fair value adjustments
Property, plant and equipment (16.8 – 16.0) 0.8
Inventories (4.2 – 4.0) 0.2
Contingent liability (0.2)
13.2
Non-controlling interest (25%) 3.3
15.3
Net assets acquired (13.2)
Goodwill 2.1
Notes
1 It is assumed that the market value (ie, fair value) of the loan stock issued to fund the purchase of
the shares in Kono Ltd is equal to the price of £12 million. IFRS 3 requires goodwill to be
calculated by comparing the consideration transferred plus the non-controlling interest, valued
either at fair value or, in this case, as a percentage of net assets, with the fair value of the
identifiable net assets of the acquired business or company.
2 Share capital and pre-acquisition profits represent the book value of the net assets of Kono Ltd at
the date of acquisition. Adjustments are then required to this book value in order to give the fair
value of the net assets at the date of acquisition. For short-term monetary items, fair value is their
carrying value on acquisition.
3 The fair value of property, plant and equipment should be determined by market value or, if
information on a market price is not available (as is the case here), then by reference to
depreciated replacement cost, reflecting normal business practice. The net replacement cost (ie,
£16.8m) represents the gross replacement cost less depreciation based on that amount, and so
further adjustment for extra depreciation is unnecessary.
4 Raw materials are valued at their replacement cost of £4.2 million.
5 The rationalisation costs cannot be reported in pre-acquisition results under IFRS 3, as they are
not a liability of Kono Ltd at the acquisition date.
6 The fair value of the loan is the present value of the total amount payable (principal and interest).
The present value of the loan is the same as its par value.
7 The contingent liability should be included as part of the acquisition net assets of Kono even
though it is not deemed probable and therefore has not been recognised in Kono’s individual
accounts. However, the disclosed amount is not necessarily the fair value at which a third party
would assume the liability. If the probability is low, then the fair value is likely to be lower than
£200,000.
£
Revenue (W2) 2,291,300
Cost of sales (W2) (1,238,125)
Gross profit 1,053,175
Operating expenses (W2) (263,980)
Profit from operations 789,195
Share of profits of associate (W6) 51,383
Profit before tax 840,578
Income tax expense (W2) (240,685)
Profit for the year 599,893
Profit attributable to:
Owners of Anima plc (Bal) 517,579
Non-controlling interest (W5) 82,314
599,893
WORKINGS
(1) Group structure
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1147
(2) Consolidation schedule
Oxendale Orient %
207,000 149,500 115
(180,000) (130,000) (100)
27,000 19,500 15
£
Profit for the year 204,610
Anima share × 30% 61,383
Less impairment for year (10,000)
51,383
£
Anima plc – c/fwd 1,560,000
Less PURP with Orient (W4) (9,750)
£ £
Orient Ltd
FV of NCI at acquisition date 1,520,000
Share of post-acquisition reserves ((580 – 195) × 40%) 154,000
1,674,000
Carnforth Ltd
Net assets per question 2,605,000
Fair value adjustment (increase) 320,000
Less extra depreciation on FV adj (1,000)
2,924,000
NCI – 2,924,000 × 15% 438,600
2,112,600
Assets £ £
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
(660,700 + 635,300 + 24,000 – 1,000 (W1) – 3,000 (W7)) 1,316,000
Intangibles (101,300 + 144,475 (W2)) 245,775
Investment in joint venture (W6) 93,600
1,655,375
Current assets
Inventories (235,400 + 195,900 – 2,400 (W5)) 428,900
Trade and other receivables (174,900 + 78,800 – 50,000) 203,700
Cash and cash equivalents (23,700 + 11,900 + 10,000) 45,600
678,200
Total assets 2,333,575
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1149
Assets £ £
Equity and liabilities
Equity attributable to owners of Preston plc
Ordinary share capital 100,000
Revaluation surplus 125,000
Retained earnings (W4) 1,099,550
1,324,550
Non-controlling interest (W3) 190,025
Total equity 1,514,575
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables (151,200 + 101,800 – 40,000) 213,000
Taxation (85,000 + 80,000) 165,000
Deferred consideration 441,000
819,000
Total equity and liabilities 2,333,575
WORKINGS
(1) Net assets – Longridge Ltd
£
Consideration transferred (250,000 + (441,000 – 41,000 (W4))) 650,000
Non-controlling interest at acquisition (640,700 (W1) × 25%) 160,175
810,175
Net assets at acquisition (W1) (640,700)
169,475
Impairment to date (25,000)
144,475
£
Non-controlling interest at acquisition (W2) 160,175
Share of post-acquisition reserves (119,400 (W1) × 25%) 29,850
190,025
£
Preston plc 1,084,800
Unwinding of discount on deferred consideration:
Two years (441,000 – (441,000 / 1.052)) (41,000)
Less PURP (Longridge Ltd) (W5) (2,400)
Longridge Ltd (119,400 (W1) × 75%) 89,550
Chipping Ltd (W6) 3,600
Less impairments to date (25,000 + 10,000) (35,000)
1,099,550
Chipping Longridge
Ltd Ltd
% £ £
SP 100 15,000 12,000
Cost (80) (12,000) (9,600)
GP 20 3,000 2,400
£ £
Cost 100,000
Add post-acquisition profits 12,000
Less PURP (W5) (3,000)
9,000
× 40% 3,600
103,600
Less impairment to date (10,000)
93,600
£
Asset now in Preston plc’s books at 15,000 × 1/3 5,000
Asset would have been in Longridge Ltd’s books at 10,000 × 1/5 (2,000)
3,000
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1151
6.2 Goodwill journal entries
£ £
DEBIT Intangibles – goodwill 39,160
DEBIT Share capital 320,000
DEBIT Retained earnings 112,300
CREDIT Investments 385,000
CREDIT Non-controlling interest (320,000 + 112,300) × 20% 86,460
$m $m
Consideration transferred 480
NCI (20% × 750) 150
Fair value of previously held equity interest ($480m × 20/60) 160
Fair value of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed
Share capital 300
Retained earnings 450
(750)
40
$m
Fair value at date control obtained (see part (a)) 160
Cost (120)
40
1,380
Share
capital 540 180 (180) 540
1,380
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 September 20X8
WORKINGS
(1) Goodwill
£’000
Consideration transferred 324
NCI: 20% × (180 + 180) 72
396
Net assets (180 + 180) (360)
36
£
Post-acquisition profits (360 – 180) 180,000
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1153
£
NCI share (20%) 36,000
In addition, 20% of the profits of Balham Co arising in the year are allocated to the NCI:
£’000 £’000
Fair value of consideration received 650
Less: net assets at disposal 540
goodwill 36
NCI (540 × 20%) (108)
(468)
182
1,566
Share
capital 540 180 (180) 540
Reserves 414 360 (180) (36) 52 610
NCI 72 36 108 216
Current
liabilities 100 100 200
1,566
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30 September 20X8
Consolidate
Streatham Balham Adj 1 Adj 2 Disposal d
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Profit
before tax 153 126 279
Profit on
disposal –
Tax (45) (36) (81)
108 90 198
Owners of
parent 108 90 (18) 180
NCI 18 18
198
WORKING
Disposal
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1155
(a) Partial disposal: subsidiary to associate (80% to 40%)
Profit on disposal
£’000 £’000
Fair value of consideration received 340
Fair value of 40% investment retained 250
Less: Net assets when control lost
(540 – (90 × 3/12)) 517.5
Goodwill (part (a)) 36
NCI (517.5 × 20%) (103.5)
(450)
140
Group reserves
689
At date of disposal
(360 – (90 × 3/12))/per question 414 337.5 360.0
Retained earnings at acquisition/on
disposal 414 (180.0) (337.5)
157.5 22.5
Investment in associate
£’000
Fair value at date control lost (new ‘cost’) 250
Share of post-acquisition reserves (90 × 3/12 × 40%) 9
259
£’000
Streatham Co’s reserves 414
Group profit on disposal (W1) 140
Balham: share of post-acquisition reserves (157.5 (see below) × 80%) 126
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations (Note 1) 340
Income taxes paid (W4) (100)
Net cash from operating activities 240
£’000
Profit before taxation 420
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 210
630
Increase in trade receivables (1,370 – 1,100 – 30) (240)
Increase in inventories (1,450 – 1,200 – 70) (180)
Increase in trade payables (1,690 – 1,520 – 40) 130
Cash generated from operations 340
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1157
(2) Acquisition of subsidiary
During the period the group acquired subsidiary S Ltd. The fair values of assets acquired and
liabilities assumed were as follows:
£’000
Cash and cash equivalents 10
Inventories 70
Receivables 30
Property, plant and equipment 190
Trade payables (40)
Non-controlling interest (26)
234
Goodwill 66
Total purchase price 300
Less cash of S Ltd (10)
Less non-cash consideration (200)
Cash flow on acquisition net of cash acquired 90
WORKINGS
(1) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
£’000 £’000
b/f 2,300 Depreciation 210
On acquisition 190 c/f 2,500
Additions (balancing figure) 220 –
2,710 2,710
(2) GOODWILL
£’000 £’000
b/f –
Impairment losses (balancing
Additions (300 – (90% × 260)) 66 figure) 0
– c/f 66
66 66
£’000 £’000
Dividend (balancing figure) 4 b/f –
c/f 31 On acquisition 26
– CSPL 9
35 35
£’000 £’000
b/f 100
Cash paid (balancing figure) 100 CSPL 150
c/f 150 –
250 250
£’000
Disposal of subsidiary Desdemona Ltd, net of cash disposed of (400 – 20) 380
£’000
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1) (1,307)
£’000
Dividends paid to non-controlling interest (W2) (42)
£’000
Cash and cash equivalents 20
Inventories 50
Receivables 39
Property, plant and equipment 390
Payables (42)
Non-controlling interest (W2) (91)
366
Profit on disposal 34
Total sale proceeds 400
Less cash of Desdemona Ltd disposed of (20)
Cash flow on disposal net of cash disposed of 380
£’000
Profit before tax (862 + 20) 882
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 800
1,682
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1159
£’000
Increase in receivables (605 – 417 + 39) (227)
Increase in inventories (736 – 535 + 50) (251)
Increase in payables (380 – 408 + 42) 14
Cash generated from operations 1,218
WORKINGS
(1) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT – CARRYING AMOUNT
£’000 £’000
b/f 3,950 c/f 4,067
Additions (balancing figure) 1,307 Disposal of sub 390
– Depreciation charge 800
5,257 5,257
£’000 £’000
c/f 482 b/f 512
Disposal of sub (457 × 20%) 91 CSPL 103
Dividends to NCI
(balancing figure) 42 –
615 615
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1161
balances. Particular attention should be paid to the treatment of ‘in transit’ items to ensure
that there is a proper cut-off.
(2) Obtain a schedule of intra-group balances from all group companies and check the details
therein to the summary prepared by the parent company. The details on these schedules
should also be independently confirmed in writing by the other auditors involved.
(3) Nil balances should also be confirmed by both the group companies concerned and their
respective auditors.
(4) The details on the schedules in (2) above should also be agreed to the details in the
financial statements of the individual group companies which are submitted to the parent
company for consolidation purposes.
12.2 Where one company in a group supplies goods to another company at cost plus a percentage,
and such goods remain in inventory at the year end, then the group inventory will contain an
element of unrealised profit. In the preparation of the group accounts, best accounting practice
requires that an allowance should be made for this unrealised profit.
In order to verify that intra-group profit in inventory has been correctly accounted for in the
group accounts, the audit procedures required would be as follows.
(1) Confirm the group’s procedures for identification of such inventory and their notification to
the parent company who will be responsible for making the required provision.
(2) Obtain and review schedules of intra-group inventory from group companies and confirm
that the same categories of inventory have been included as in previous years.
(3) Select a sample of invoices for goods purchased from group companies and check to see
that these have been included in year-end intra-group inventory as necessary and obtain
confirmation from component auditors that they have satisfactorily completed a similar
exercise.
(4) Check the calculation of the allowance for unrealised profit and confirm that this has been
arrived at on a consistent basis with that used in earlier years, after making due allowance
for any known changes in the profit margins operated by various group companies.
(5) Check the schedules of intra-group inventory against the various inventory sheets and
consider whether the level of intra-group inventory appears to be reasonable in
comparison with previous years, ensuring that satisfactory explanations are obtained for
any material differences.
1 Burdett
Goodwill: £380,000
Excess of assets/liabilities over cost of combination: Nil
Swain Thamin
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred 1,340 340
NCI (20% × £1.2m) / (40% × £680,000) 240 272
1,580 612
Net assets of acquiree (1,200) (680)
Goodwill / Gain on bargain purchase 380 (68)
See IFRS 3.32 and 34. The second acquisition resulted in an excess over the cost of combination
which should be recognised immediately in profit.
2 Sheliak
Depreciation charge: decrease by £10,000
Carrying amount: decrease by £30,000
Fair value adjustments not reflected in the books must be adjusted for on consolidation. In this
example the depreciation is decreased by the difference between Sheliak’s depreciation charge and
Parotia’s fair value depreciation calculation. The carrying amount is decreased by the difference
between Sheliak’s carrying value at 31 December 20X7 and Parotia’s carrying value at 31 December
20X7.
3 Finch
£207,000
£’000
Net assets per SFP (£8.1m – £1.3m) 6,800
Fair value adjustment to property 300
Contingent liability (20)
Adjusted net assets 7,080
Net assets is increased by the fair value adjustment of £300,000 and decreased by the contingent
liability, which is recognised in accordance with IFRS 3.23.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1163
Goodwill is therefore calculated as:
£’000
Consideration transferred 5,100
Non-controlling interest
Ordinary shares 15% × (£7.08m – £2.5m) 687
Preference shares 60% × £2.5m 1,500
7,287
Net assets of acquiree (7,080)
Goodwill 207
4 Maackia
£1,780,000
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred 4,800
Non-controlling interest (fair value) 1,800
6,600
Net assets of acquiree
Draft 4,600
Business held for sale ((£760,000 – £40,000) – £500,000) 220
(4,820)
Goodwill 1,780
In allocating the cost of the business combination to the assets and liabilities acquired, the business
that is on the market for immediate sale should be valued in accordance with IFRS 5 at fair value less
costs to sell (IFRS 3.31).
The defined benefit plan net asset should be recognised in accordance with IAS 19 (IFRS 3.26).
5 Gibbston
(a) £4.9m
£’000 £’000
Consideration transferred: Cash 15,000
Deferred cash (£5.5m/1.1) 5,000
Contingent cash (£13.3m/1.13) × 45% 4,500
24,500
Non-controlling interest: Net assets at 1 Jan 20X7 20,000
Loss to acquisition (£3m × 4/12) (1,000)
Fair value adjustment 9,000
30% × 28,000 8,400
32,900
Net assets of acquiree (28,000)
Goodwill 4,900
£m
Non-controlling interest share of loss:
Loss: Acquisition to 31 December (8/12 × £3m) 2
Extra depreciation (£9m/3 years × 8/12) 2
4 × 30% = £1.2m
(c) £7.2m
£m
Non-controlling interest in SFP
Share of the net assets at the date of acquisition (£28m × 30%) 8.4
Share of loss since acquisition (part (b)) (1.2)
7.2
6 Supermall
Supermall has been set up as a separate vehicle. As such, it could be either a joint operation or joint
venture, so other facts must be considered.
There are no facts that suggest that the two real estate companies have rights to substantially all the
benefits of the assets of Supermall or an obligation for its liabilities.
Each party’s liability is limited to any unpaid capital contribution.
As a result, each party has an interest in the net assets of Supermall and should account for it as a
joint venture using the equity method in accordance with IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements.
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1165
IFRS 11, Joint Arrangements requires that a joint operator recognises line by line the following in
relation to its interest in a joint operation:
(1) Its assets, including its share of any jointly held assets
(2) Its liabilities, including its share of any jointly incurred liabilities
(3) Its revenue from the sale of its share of the output arising from the joint operation
(4) Its share of the revenue from the sale of the output by the joint operation, and
(5) Its expenses, including its share of any expenses incurred jointly
This treatment is applicable in both the separate and consolidated financial statements of the joint
operator.
8 Stuhr
£6,600,000
£’000
Consideration transferred 10,000
Non-controlling interest (fair value) 2,000
Fair value of retained interest 3,000
15,000
Fair value of net assets of Bismuth (8,400)
Goodwill 6,600
9 Fleurie
There is no loss of control and therefore:
• no gain or loss arises on disposal of the 15% holding in Merlot; and
• there is no change to the carrying value of goodwill.
Instead, the transaction is accounted for in shareholders’ equity, with any difference between
proceeds and the change in the non-controlling interest being recognised in retained earnings.
The non-controlling interest before disposal is the fair value at acquisition plus the fair value of post-
acquisition reserves to the date of disposal, as represented by change in net assets:
£
Fair value at acquisition 350,000
Share of post-acquisition reserves [(£3.5m – £2.2m) × 15%)] 195,000
545,000
Increase in NCI: 15%/15% 545,000
NCI after change: 30% 1,090,000
10 Chianti
On disposal of Barolo, the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
will include a gain on disposal of £6,000 (as calculated below).
£ £
Proceeds 340,000
Fair value of interest retained 20,000
360,000
Net assets 320,000
Goodwill (£70,000 – £20,000) 50,000
NCI (5% × 320,000) (16,000)
(354,000)
Gain on disposal 6,000
11 Porter
Porter Group statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 May 20X6
£m £m
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation 112
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 44
Impairment losses on goodwill (W2) 3
Foreign exchange loss (W8) 2
Investment income – share of profit of associate (12)
Investment income – gains on financial assets at fair value through
profit or loss (6)
Interest expense 16
159
Increase in trade receivables (132 – 112 – 16) (4)
Decrease in inventories (154 – 168 – 20) 34
Decrease in trade payables (110 – 98 – 12 – (W8) 17 PPE payable) (17)
Cash generated from operations 172
Interest paid (W7) (12)
Income taxes paid (W6) (37)
Net cash from operating activities 123
Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiary, net of cash acquired (26 – 8) (18)
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1) (25)
Purchase of financial assets (W4) (10)
Dividend received from associate (W3) 11
Net cash used in investing activities (42)
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1167
£m £m
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of share capital (332 + 212 – 300 – 172 – (80 ×
60%/2 × £2.25)) 18
Proceeds from long-term borrowings (380 – 320) 60
Dividend paid (45)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests (W5) (4)
Net cash from financing activities 29
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 110
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 48
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 158
WORKINGS
(1) Additions to property, plant and equipment
PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
£m £m
b/d
Revaluation 58 Depreciation 44
Acquisition of subsidiary 92
Additions on credit (W8) 15
Additions for cash 25 c/d 958
1,002 1,002
£m £m
b/d 10
Acq’n of subsidiary
[(80 × 60%/2 × 2.25) + 26 + (120
× 40%) – 120 net assets] 8 Impairment losses 3
c/d 15
18 18
£m £m
b/d 39
P/L 12 Dividends received 11
OCI 8
– c/d 48
59 59
£m £m
d/d 0
P/L 6
Additions 10
– c/d 16
16 16
£m £m
b/d 28
Dividends paid 4 TCI 12
Acquisition of subsidiary (120 ×
c/d 84 40%) 48
88 88
£m £m
b/d (deferred tax) 26
b/d (current tax) 22
P/L 34
Income taxes paid 37 OCI 17
c/d (deferred tax) 38 Acquisition of subsidiary 4
c/d (current tax) 28 –
103 103
£m £m
b/d 4
P/L 16
Interest paid 12
c/d 8 –
20 20
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1169
(8) Foreign currency transaction
Transactions recorded on:
£m £m
(1) 5 March
DEBIT Property, plant and equipment (102m/6.8) 15
CREDIT Payables 15
(2) 31 May Payable = 102m/6.0 = £17m
DEBIT P/L (Admin expenses) 2
CREDIT Payables (17 – 15) 2
12 Tastydesserts
Consolidated statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 20X2
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation 666
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 78
Share of profit of associates (120)
Interest expense –
624
Increase in receivables (2,658 – 2,436 – 185) (37)
Increase in inventories (1,735 – 1,388 – 306) (41)
Increase in payables (1,915 – 1,546 – 148) 221
Cash generated from operations 767
Interest paid –
Income taxes paid (W5) (160)
Net cash from operating activities 607
Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiary Custardpowders net of cash acquired (55 – 7) (48)
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1) (463)
Dividends received from associates (W3) 100
Net cash used in investing activities (411)
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid (63)
Net cash used in financing activities (63)
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 133
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year (266)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year (133)
£’000 £’000
b/d 3,685
Acquisition of Custardpowders 694 Depreciation 78
Cash additions 463 c/d 4,764
4,842 4,842
(2) Goodwill
GOODWILL
£,000 £’000
b/d –
Acquisition of Custardpowders 42 Impairment losses 0
(1,086 – (1,044 × 100%)) – c/d 42
42 42
£,000
b/d 2,175
Share of profit 120 Dividends received 100
– c/d 2,195
2,295 2,295
£’000
Share capital plus premium b/d 4,776
Issued to acquire sub (120,000 × £2.80) 336
Share capital plus premium c/d (4,896 + 216) 5,112
£,000 £,000
b/d– current tax 200
– deferred tax 180
Cash paid 160 P/L 126
c/d– current tax 235
– deferred tax 111
506 506
ICAEW 2021 20: Groups: types of investment and business combination 1171
1172 Corporate Reporting ICAEW 2021
Chapter 21
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Objective and scope of IAS 21
2 The functional currency
3 Reporting foreign currency transactions
4 Foreign currency translation of financial statements
5 Foreign currency and consolidation
6 Disclosure
7 Other matters
8 Reporting foreign currency cash flows
9 Reporting in hyperinflationary economies
10 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
21
Learning outcomes
• Determine and calculate how exchange rate variations are recognised and measured and how
they can impact on reported performance, position and cash flows of single entities and groups
• Demonstrate, explain and appraise how foreign exchange transactions are measured and how the
financial statements of foreign operations are translated
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
• Critically appraise corporate reporting policies, estimates and measurements for single entities
and groups in the context of an audit
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 7(a), 7(b), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f), 18(c)
21
and determine the functional currency. hedging. It has also by covering up the
accounting Then carefully go come up in an audit solution to worked
treatment of through worked context and in example 2.
exchange example 1. conjunction with
differences on Stop and think deferred tax.
monetary and non-
monetary items. The functional
currency of an entity
may not be obvious.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
This section provides an overview of the objective, scope and main definitions of IAS 21, The Effects
of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates.
IAS 21 deals with two situations where foreign currency impacts financial statements:
(a) An entity which buys or sells goods overseas, priced in a foreign currency
A UK company might buy materials from Canada, pay for them in Canadian dollars, then sell its
finished goods in Germany, receiving payment in euros or some other currency. If the company
owes money in a foreign currency at the end of the accounting year or holds assets bought in a
foreign currency, the assets and related liabilities must be translated into the local currency (in
this case pounds sterling), in order to be shown in the books of account.
(b) The translation of foreign currency subsidiary financial statements before consolidation
A UK company might have a subsidiary abroad (ie, a foreign entity that it owns), and the
subsidiary will trade in its own local currency. The subsidiary will keep books of account and
prepare its annual financial statements in its own currency. However, at the year end, the parent
company must ‘consolidate’ the results of the overseas subsidiary into its group accounts.
Therefore the assets and liabilities and the annual profits of the subsidiary must be translated
from the foreign currency into pounds sterling.
If foreign currency exchange rates remained constant, there would be no accounting problem in
either of these situations. However, foreign exchange rates are continually changing, sometimes
significantly, between the start and the end of the accounting year. For example, in 2010 the British
pound was strong against the euro, as a result of the problems in the Eurozone. It weakened in 2011,
strengthened again by late 2012, then weakened in early 2013. By 2015 it had strengthened again.
Definitions
Foreign currency: A currency other than the functional currency of the entity.
Functional currency: The currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates.
Presentation currency: The currency in which the financial statements are presented.
Exchange rate: The ratio of exchange for two currencies.
Closing rate: The spot exchange rate at the reporting date.
Spot exchange rate: The exchange rate for immediate delivery.
Exchange difference: The difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
This section defines the functional currency of an entity and discusses the criteria that need to be met
for a currency to be adopted by an entity as its functional currency.
Denominated in
€ Settled in €
€m % %
Revenue
Export sales 750 100 100
Domestic sales 250 0 0
Total revenues 1,000 75 75
Materials 450 15
Energy and gas 80
Staff costs 80
Other production expenses 30
Depreciation 40
The main monetary assets and liabilities at 31 December 20X6 were as follows:
Held in € Expressed in €
€m % %
Cash 120 90
Total accounts receivable 140 80
Trade payables 170 – 0
Borrowings 400 10
Requirement
How might the management of the company determine the functional currency?
Solution
The management of the company has decided using the guidance provided by the IFRS to adopt
the Danish krone as its functional currency, based on the fact that while the currency that influences
sales prices is the euro, the domestic currency influences costs and financing.
Solution
The currency that mainly influences sales prices is the dollar. The currency that mainly influences
costs is not clear, as 55% of the operational costs are in Naira and 45% are in US dollars. Depreciation
should not be taken into account, because it is a non-cash cost, and the economic environment is
where an entity generates and expenses cash.
Since the revenue side is influenced primarily by the US dollar and the cost side is influenced by both
the dollar and the Naira, management will be justified on the basis of IAS 21 guidance to determine
the US dollar as its functional currency.
Solution
The entity’s equity and net assets were £50,314,465 when the pound sterling became its functional
currency.
Where an entity’s functional currency has changed as a result of changes in its trading operations
during a period, the entity is required to disclose that the change has arisen, along with the reason
for the change.
This section deals with the IAS 21 rules governing the initial and subsequent recognition of items
denominated in foreign currency.
Foreign currency transactions are transactions which are denominated in foreign currencies, rather
than in the entity’s functional currency. Such transactions arise when the entity:
• buys or sells goods or services whose price is denominated in a foreign currency;
• borrows or lends funds where the amounts payable or receivable are denominated in a foreign
currency; and
• otherwise acquires or disposes of assets or incurs or settles liabilities denominated in a foreign
currency.
Solution
Management should use the daily weighted average exchange rate published by the Central Bank of
Ruritania. Interest income accrues evenly through the period and the weighted average rate will
produce the same result as a daily actual rate calculation.
The use of an unweighted average rate would not be appropriate because exchange rates fluctuate
significantly.
Recognition of interest receivable:
Solution
Expressed in dollars, the inventory value has gone up, its net realisable amount exceeding its
carrying amount. In sterling, the carrying amount using the acquisition date rate is £200,000
($300,000/1.5) and the net realisable amount using the closing rate is £189,000 ($340,000/1.8).
Inventory is stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value in the functional currency and the
carrying amount at 31 December 20X5 is £189,000.
Solution
Expressed in foreign currency, the asset has a carrying value of $450,000 and a recoverable amount
of $400,000 and is therefore impaired.
However, when it is expressed in sterling, the asset is not impaired, because its recoverable amount
exceeds its carrying amount. In sterling, the carrying amount, using the acquisition date rate, is
£300,000 ($450,000/1.5) and the recoverable amount, using the closing rate, is £320,000
($400,000/1.25). The depreciation of the foreign currency relative to pounds sterling has offset the
fall in the value of the asset due to impairment, therefore no impairment charge is required.
Requirement
What is the fair value of the asset at 1 January 20X5, 31 December 20X5 and 31 December 20X6 in
pounds sterling, and how will the changes in fair value be accounted for?
Solution
The asset is an investment in equity instruments, therefore a non-monetary financial asset. All
exchange differences are reported in OCI.
€/£1
30 September 1.60
30 November 1.80
Requirement
State the accounting entries in the books of White Cliffs Co.
Solution
The purchase will be recorded in the books of White Cliffs Co using the rate of exchange ruling on
30 September.
€/£1
30 September 1.60
30 November 1.80
31 December 1.90
31 January 1.85
Requirement
State the accounting entries in the books of White Cliffs Co.
Solution
The purchase will be recorded in the books of White Cliffs Co using the rate of exchange ruling on
30 September.
Being the £ sterling cost of goods purchased for €40,000 (€40,000 ÷ €1.60/£1)
On 30 November, White Cliffs must pay €20,000 to settle half the payable (£12,500). This will cost
€20,000 ÷ €1.80/£1 = £11,111 and the company has therefore made an exchange gain of £12,500 –
£11,111 = £1,389.
On 31 December, the reporting date, the outstanding liability of £12,500 will be recalculated using
the rate applicable at that date: €20,000 ÷ €1.90/£1 = £10,526. A further exchange gain of £1,974
(£12,500 – £10,526) has been made and will be recorded as follows.
The total exchange gain of £3,363 will be included in the operating profit for the year ending 31
December.
On 31 January, White Cliffs must pay the second instalment of €20,000 to settle the remaining
liability of £10,526. This will cost the company £10,811 (€20,000 ÷ €1.85/£1).
Solution
Management should recognise the investment property at £6,060,606 and £7,361,963 at 31
December 20X2 and 31 December 20X3 respectively.
The change in value is calculated as:
The increase in fair value of £1,301,357 should be recognised in profit or loss as a gain on
investment property.
The investment property is a non-monetary asset. The movement in value attributable to movement
in exchange rates £74,363 ($10,000,000/1.65) – ($10,000,000/1.63) should not be recognised
separately because the asset is non-monetary.
€ €/£ £
Value at reporting date 8,000,000 1.6 5,000,000
Value at acquisition 6,000,000 1.5 4,000,000
Revaluation surplus recognised in equity 1,000,000
€ €/£ £ £
Change in fair value 2,000,000 1.6 1,250,000
When presented with a problem like this it is important to break it down into its component parts. It is
clear that the revaluation surplus is made up of two components – the change in fair value and the
exchange movement.
Requirement
How should management translate the land held at fair value in accordance with IAS 16?
Solution
Impairment loss
€ €/£ £ £
Carrying amount at reporting date 5,000,000 1.6 3,125,000
€ €/£ £ £
Change in value due to impairment 1,000,000 1.6 (625,000)
Exchange component of change
6,000,000 1.6 3,750,000
6,000,000 1.5 4,000,000
(250,000)
Impairment loss recognised in profit or loss (875,000)
Solution
Management should recognise the financial instruments on 31 December 20X4 as follows.
(1) Listed equity instruments of £12 million. The listed shares are measured at fair value on 31
December 20X4, of $14.4 million and translated using the spot rate at the date of valuation,
which is $1.20: £1. The gain of £2 million ($14.4m/1.2 – $10m/1.0) should be recorded as other
comprehensive income.
(2) Non-listed equity instruments of £10 million. As the shares are recorded at their cost of $10
million, the foreign currency value should be translated to pounds sterling using the spot rate at
the date of the transaction, which was $1: £1.
Details of the branch balances at 31 December 20X5 requiring translation and the basis for
calculating their sterling equivalents are as follows. The branch made all its sales on 30 September
20X5, and half of these were outstanding as trade receivables at the year end. All purchases were
made on 30 June 20X5, and half of these are unpaid at 31 December 20X5.
Note that both the accumulated depreciation and the charge for the year are translated at the rate
ruling when the relevant plant was acquired. Revenue and purchases are translated at the rate ruling
when the transaction occurred, but the receivables and payables relating to them (which will have
been initially recognised at those rates) are monetary items which are retranslated at closing rate at
the end of the year.
This section presents the rules for the translation of financial statements from the functional currency
to the presentation currency.
We have discussed in the previous section the requirements of IAS 21 for the translation of foreign
currency transactions. In this section we shall discuss the IAS 21 translation requirements when
foreign activities are undertaken through foreign operations whose financial statements are based on
a different functional currency than that of the parent company. More specifically in this section we
shall discuss the appropriate exchange rate that should be used for the translation of the financial
statements of the foreign operation into the reporting entity’s presentation currency.
Although an entity is required to translate foreign currency items and transactions into its functional
currency, it does not have to present its financial statements in this currency. Instead, IAS 21 permits
an entity a completely free choice over the currency in which it presents its financial statements.
Where the chosen currency, the entity’s presentation currency, is not the entity’s functional currency,
this fact should be disclosed in the financial statements, along with an explanation of why a different
presentation currency has been applied.
The financial statements of a foreign operation operating in a hyperinflationary economy must be
adjusted under IAS 29 before they are translated into the parent’s reporting currency and then
consolidated. When the economy ceases to be hyperinflationary, and the foreign operation ceases
to apply IAS 29, the amounts restated to the price level at the date the entity ceased to restate its
financial statements should be used as the historical costs for translation purposes.
4.1 Translation to the presentation currency when the functional currency is a non-
hyperinflationary currency
The approach adopted for the translation into a presentation currency is also used for the
preparation of consolidated financial statements where a parent has a foreign subsidiary. The
process is set out below.
The following procedures should be followed to translate an entity’s financial statements from its
functional currency into a presentation currency.
(a) Translate all assets and liabilities (both monetary and non-monetary) in the current statement of
financial position using the closing rate at the reporting date.
(b) Translate income and expenditure in the current statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income using the exchange rates ruling at the transaction dates. An
approximation to actual rate is normally used, being the average rate.
(c) Report the exchange differences which arise on translation as other comprehensive income; and
where a foreign subsidiary is not wholly owned, allocate the relevant portion of the exchange
differences to the non-controlling interest.
Note that the comparative figures are the presentation currency amounts as presented the previous
year.
US$
Statement of profit or loss
Revenue 500,000
Costs (200,000)
Profit 300,000
There was no other comprehensive income.
Statement of financial position
Initial share capital 55,000
Retained earnings (as above) 300,000
Equity = net assets 355,000
The entity owns no non-current assets (so there are no assets or depreciation charges to be
translated at the rate ruling when the asset was acquired) and all transactions took place on 30 June
(so that a single rate can be used for the statement of profit or loss transactions, rather than the
various rates ruling when the transactions took place).
Assume that the following exchange rates are relevant.
1 January 20X5: £1 = US$2.75
30 June 20X5: £1 = US$2.50
31 December 20X5: £1 = US$2
The entity translates share capital at the rate ruling when the capital was raised.
Requirement
Translate the financial statements of the subsidiary into the pound sterling presentation currency.
Solution
The statement of profit or loss is translated using the actual rate on the transaction date.
US$ Rate £
Revenue 500,000 Actual 200,000
Costs (200,000) Actual (80,000)
Profit 300,000 120,000
Other comprehensive income:
Exchange gain on retranslation 37,500
Total comprehensive income 157,500
The net assets of the subsidiary are translated using the closing rate and the initial share capital using
the opening rate. The statement of financial position is shown below.
Statement of financial position
US$ Rate £
Initial share capital 55,000 Opening 20,000
Retained earnings (as above) 300,000 Actual 120,000
Exchange differences 37,500
Equity = net assets 355,000 Closing 177,500
Rate £
Opening net assets = initial share capital (US$55,000) Closing 27,500
Opening 20,000
7,500
(2) A further exchange gain arising from retranslating profits from the actual to the closing rate.
Rate £
Retained earnings (US$300,000) Closing rate 150,000
Actual rate (120,000)
30,000
Total exchange differences 37,500
The inclusion of the exchange gain or loss makes the accounting equation balance since:
The calculation of the exchange difference is discussed in more detail in section 5.3.
This section deals with the issues arising from consolidating financial statements and, in particular,
the treatment of exchange differences and goodwill.
5.2 Consolidation
The incorporation of the results and financial position of a foreign operation with those of the
reporting entity follows normal consolidation procedures, such as the elimination of intra-group
balances and intra-group transactions of a subsidiary. However, an intra-group monetary asset (or
liability) whether short term or long term cannot be eliminated against the corresponding intra-
group liability (or asset) without showing the results of currency fluctuations in the consolidated
financial statements. This is because a monetary item represents a commitment to convert one
currency into another and exposes the reporting entity to a gain or loss through currency
fluctuations. Accordingly, in the consolidated financial statements of the reporting entity, such an
exchange difference:
• continues to be recognised in profit or loss; or
Solution
1 Statement of profit or loss of Xerxes for the year ended 31 December 20X9 translated using the
average rate (€1.60 = £1)
£
Profit before tax 100
Tax (50)
Profit after tax, retained 50
Consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X9
£
Profit before tax £(200 + 100) 300
Tax £(100 + 50) (150)
Profit after tax, retained £(100 + 50) 150
The statement of financial position of Xerxes Inc at 31 December 20X9, other than share capital
and reserves, should be translated at the closing rate of €1 = £1.
Summarised statement of financial position of Xerxes in £ at 31 December 20X9
£ £
Non-current assets (carrying amount) 300
Current assets
Inventories 200
Receivables 100
300
600
Non-current liabilities 110
Current liabilities 110
£ £
Assets
Non-current assets (NBV) £(350 + 300) 650
Current assets
Inventories £(225 + 200) 425
Receivables £(150 + 100) 250
675
1,325
Note: It is quite unnecessary to know the amount of the exchange differences when preparing
the consolidated statement of financial position.
2 Calculation of exchange differences
£
Xerxes’s equity interest at 31 December 20X9 380
Equity interest at 1 January 20X9 (€300/2) (150)
230
Less retained profit (50)
Exchange gain 180
Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
December 20X9
£
Profit after tax 150
Exchange difference on translation of foreign operations 180
Total comprehensive income for the year 330
Note: The post-acquisition reserves of Xerxes Inc at the beginning of the year must have been
£150 – £25 = £125 and the post-acquisition reserves of Darius Co must have been £300 – £100 =
£200. The consolidated post-acquisition reserves must therefore have been £325.
While the information regarding exchange rates must be assimilated and used, it is important not to
lose sight of the fact that foreign currency consolidation questions have standard group aspects that
should not be rushed or overlooked.
Exchange
€2 = £1 €1 = £1 difference
£ £ £
Non-current assets at carrying amount 170 340 170
Inventories 60 120 60
Net current monetary liabilities (25) (50) (25)
205 410 205
Equity 150 300 150
Loans 55 110 55
205 410 205
Translating the statement of profit or loss using average rate €1.60 = £1 and the closing rate €1 =
£1 gives the following results.
Exchange
€1.60 = £1 €1 = £1 difference
£ £ £
Profit before tax, depreciation and increase in inventory
values 75 120 45
Increase in inventory values 50 80 30
125 200 75
Depreciation (25) (40) (15)
100 160 60
Tax (50) (80) (30)
Profit after tax, retained 50 80 30
£
Gain on non-current assets (£170 – depreciation £15) 155
Loss on net monetary current assets/liabilities (all other differences) (£45 – £30 – £25) (10)
£ £
Opening net assets of €300: at opening rate (€2: £1) 150
at closing rate (€1: £1) 300
150 gain
Retained profits of €80: at average rate (€1.60: £1) 50
at closing rate (€1: £1) 80
30 gain
180 gain
The goodwill arising on acquisition is therefore €16.8m/2.4 = £7m. The fair value adjustment in
sterling amounted to €1m/2.4 = £416,667.
At 31 December 20X5, the goodwill is restated to £6.72 million (€16.8m/2.5) and the fair value
adjustment in sterling terms was £400,000 (€1m/2.5).
The requirement in an entity’s own financial statements to recognise in profit or loss all exchange
differences in respect of monetary items which are part of an entity’s net investment in a foreign
operation was dealt with earlier.
On consolidation, however, the differences should be recognised as other comprehensive income
and recorded in a separate component of equity. This treatment is required because exchange
differences arising from the translation of the operations’ net assets will move in the opposite way. If
there is an exchange loss on the net investment, there will be an exchange gain on the net assets,
and vice versa. The two movements should be netted off, rather than one being recognised in profit
or loss and the other as other comprehensive income.
$/£
Purchase plant costing £500,000 on 30 April 20X5 1.48
Paid for plant on 30 September 20X5 1.54
Purchased raw materials costing £300,000 on 31 October 20X5 1.56
Balance of £300,000 outstanding at 31 December 20X5 1.52
Average rate for the year 1.55
The following exchange gains/losses will be recorded in the US subsidiary’s profit or loss for the year
ended 31 December 20X5.
$ $
Plant costing £500,000 @ 1.48 740,000
Paid £500,000 @ 1.54 770,000
Exchange loss – settled transaction (30,000)
6 Disclosure
Section overview
The disclosure requirements of IAS 21 are not particularly onerous and, assuming that an entity’s
functional currency has not changed during the period, and its financial statements are presented in
its functional currency, it is only required to disclose the following:
• The amount of exchange differences reported in profit or loss for the period. This amount should
exclude amounts arising on financial instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss
under IFRS 9.
• The net exchange differences reported in other comprehensive income. This disclosure should
include a reconciliation between the opening and closing amounts.
In addition, when the presentation currency is different from the functional currency, that fact should
be stated and the functional currency should be disclosed. The reason for using a different
presentation currency should also be disclosed.
7 Other matters
Section overview
This section discusses a number of other matters, such as non-controlling interests and taxation.
€
Non-current assets 10,000
Net monetary assets 5,000
15,000
Equity
Ordinary share capital and reserves 15,000
€
Profit for the year 3,080
€
Profit for the year 3,080
Dividend payable 1,680
Retained profit for the year 1,400
60% of the issued capital of Camrumite Inc is owned by Bates Co, a company based in the UK.
There have been no movements in long-term assets during the year.
The exchange rate has moved as follows.
1 January 20X3 €5 = £1
Average for the year ended 31.12.X3 €7 = £1
31 December 20X3 €8 = £1
Requirement
You are required to calculate the figures for the non-controlling interest to be included in the
consolidated accounts of Bates Co.
The non-controlling interest is measured using the proportion of net assets method.
Solution
Translating the shareholders’ funds using the closing rate as at 31 December 20X3 gives €5,000 ÷ 8
= £1,875. The non-controlling interest in the statement of financial position will be 40% × £1,875 =
£750.
The dividend payable translated at the closing rate is €1,680 ÷ 8 = £210. The amount payable to the
non-controlling shareholders is 40% × £210 = £84.
The profit after tax translated at the average rate is €3,080 ÷ 7 = £440. The non-controlling interest in
profit is therefore 40% × £440 = £176.
The non-controlling share of the exchange difference is calculated as:
£ £
Opening net assets
€15,000 – €1,400 = €13,600 At opening rate of €5: £1 2,720
At closing rate of €8: £1 1,700 1,020
Therefore the non-controlling interest in total comprehensive income is profit of £176 less exchange
losses of £430 = £254 loss
The non-controlling interest can be summarised as follows.
This section addresses the treatment of foreign currency cash flows in the statement of cash flows.
$/£
15 November 20X5 2.0:1
31 December 20X5 1.9:1
31 January 20X6 1.8:1
Requirement
How should these transactions be reported within the statement of cash flows?
Solution
The purchase will initially be recorded at the rate ruling at the transaction date:
$400,000 / 2.0 = £200,000, with a trade payable of the same amount also being recognised.
At 31 December 20X5, the cash outflow will be recorded at the rate ruling at the transaction date:
$250,000 / 1.9 = £131,579
and the remaining trade payable, being a monetary liability, is translated at the same rate:
$150,000 / 1.9 = £78,947
The plant and equipment, a non-monetary asset, is carried at the historical rate of £200,000.
Only cash flows appear in the statement of cash flows, so £131,579 will be shown within investing
activities.
In a hyperinflationary economy, money loses its purchasing power very quickly. Comparisons of
transactions at different points in time, even within the same accounting period, are misleading. It is
therefore considered inappropriate for entities to prepare financial statements without making
adjustments for the fall in the purchasing power of money over time.
IAS 29, Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies applies to the primary financial
statements of entities (including consolidated accounts and statements of cash flows) whose
functional currency is the currency of a hyperinflationary economy. In this section, we will identify the
hyperinflationary currency as $H.
The standard does not define a hyperinflationary economy in exact terms, although it indicates the
characteristics of such an economy; for example, where the cumulative inflation rate over three years
approaches or exceeds 100%.
The reported value of non-monetary assets, in terms of current measuring units, increases over time.
For example, if a non-current asset is purchased for $H1,000 when the price index is 100, and the
price index subsequently rises to 200, the value of the asset in terms of current measuring units
(ignoring accumulated depreciation) will rise to $H2,000.
In contrast, the value of monetary assets and liabilities, such as a debt for $H300, is unaffected by
changes in the prices index, because it is an actual money amount payable or receivable. If a
customer owes $H300 when the price index is 100, and the debt is still unpaid when the price index
has risen to 150, the customer still owes just $H300. However, the purchasing power of monetary
assets will decline over time as the general level of prices goes up.
Definition
Measuring units current at the reporting date: This is a unit of local currency with a purchasing
power as at the reporting date, in terms of a general prices index.
Financial statements that are not restated (ie, that are prepared on a historical cost basis or current
cost basis without adjustments) may be presented as additional statements by the entity, but this is
discouraged. The primary financial statements are those that have been restated.
After the assets, liabilities, equity and statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of
the entity have been restated, there will be a net gain or loss on monetary assets and liabilities (the
‘net monetary position‘) and this should be recognised separately in profit or loss for the period.
9.4 Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income: historical cost
In the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, all amounts of income and
expense should be restated in terms of measuring units current at the reporting date. All amounts
therefore need to be restated by a factor that allows for the change in the prices index since the item
of income or expense was first recorded.
10 Audit focus
Section overview
This section provides an overview of the particular issues associated with auditing foreign
subsidiaries. The audit of group accounts in general is covered in Chapter 20.
The inclusion of one or more foreign subsidiaries within a group introduces additional risks,
including the following:
• Non-compliance with the accounting requirements of IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates
• Potential misstatement due to the effects of high inflation
• Possible difficulty in the parent being able to exercise control, for example due to political
instability
• Currency restrictions limiting payment of profits to the parent
• There may be threats to going concern due to economic and/or political instability
• Non-compliance with local taxes or misstatement of local tax liabilities
Audit procedures
These would include the following:
• Confirm that the balances of the subsidiary have been appropriately translated to the group
reporting currency:
– Assets and liabilities at the closing rate at the end of the reporting period.
– Income and expenditure at the rate ruling at the transaction date. An average would be a
suitable alternative provided there have been no significant fluctuations.
• Confirm consistency of treatment of the translation of equity (closing rate or historical rate).
• Verify that the consolidation process has been performed correctly eg, elimination of intra-group
balances.
Judgement will need to be applied in this kind of question, as in real life. This is true despite the local
audit firm being ‘reputable’, because there may be differences in local practices.
1. Can you determine an entity’s functional currency in accordance with IAS 21? (Topic 2)
2. How should foreign currency transactions be recognised initially and subsequently? (Topic
3)
3. How are exchange differences on retranslation of monetary items reported under IAS 21?
(Topic 3)
4. Do you understand the rules for the translation of financial statements from the functional
currency to the presentation currency? (Topic 4)
7. What are the issues for the auditor specific to auditing a foreign subsidiary? (Topic 10)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Zephyria This is a very short question on which exchange rate to use when
calculating goodwill on consolidation of a foreign subsidiary.
Soapstone This tests the main calculations that will be needed for consolidation of a
foreign subsidiary.
Jupiter You are now ready to try this question, which is a full consolidated
statement of financial position with a foreign subsidiary.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Earthstor (loan to With regard to the loan, a sound understanding of both IAS 21 and IFRS
Trayner only) 9 is required. You are also required to consider audit issues, particularly
relating to risk.
Wadi This question covers various financial reporting and auditing issues
relating to an investment in a foreign subsidiary. As the question is highly
integrated you should answer all parts of the question, paying particular
attention to audit risk and the role of the component auditor.
Elac (trade receivables This question requires you to translate the foreign trade receivables at the
only) correct rate and calculate and present the exchange loss correctly.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the next
chapter.
2 Monetary items
Define ‘monetary’ items according to IAS 21.
3 Initial recognition
How should foreign currency transactions be recognised initially in an individual entity’s accounts?
4 Functional currency
What factors must management take into account when determining the functional currency of a
foreign operation?
7 Zephyria
The Zephyria Company acquired a foreign subsidiary on 15 August 20X6. Goodwill arising on the
acquisition was N$175,000.
Consolidated financial statements are prepared at the year end of 30 September 20X6 requiring the
translation of all foreign operations’ results into the presentation currency of pounds sterling.
The following rates of exchange have been identified:
Requirement
In complying with IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates, at what amount should
the goodwill be included in the consolidated financial statements?
8 Cacomistle
The Cacomistle Company operates in the mining industry. It acquired an overseas mining subsidiary,
The Vanbuyten Company, on 10 September 20X7. The functional currency of Vanbuyten is the N$.
An initial review of the assets of Vanbuyten immediately after the acquisition found that it was
necessary to make a downward fair value adjustment to the carrying amount of one of its mines
amounting to N$225,000, due to adverse geological conditions. The mine had been acquired by
Vanbuyten on 4 October 20X3.
9 Longspur
The Longspur Company is an aircraft manufacturer and its functional currency is pounds sterling.
Longspur ordered an item of plant from an overseas supplier at an agreed invoiced cost of
N$250,000 on 31 March 20X7.
The equipment was delivered and was available for use on 30 April 20X7. It has a 10-year life span
and no residual value.
Exchange rates were as follows:
31 March 20X7 – £1: N$2.10
30 April 20X7 – £1: N$2.07
31 December 20X7 – £1: N$1.90
Average rate for 20X7 – £1: N$2.05
Requirement
At what amount should depreciation on the equipment be recognised in Longspur’s financial
statements for the year ending 31 December 20X7 under IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates?
10 Orton
The Orton Company is a retailer of artworks and sculptures. Orton has a year end of 31 December
20X7 and uses pounds sterling as its functional currency. On 28 October 20X7, Orton purchased 10
paintings from a supplier for N$920,000 each, a total of N$9,200,000.
Exchange rates were as follows:
28 October 20X7 – £1: N$1.80
19 December 20X7 – £1: N$1.90
31 December 20X7 – £1: N$2.00
8 February 20X8 – £1: N$2.40
Orton sold seven of the paintings for cash on 19 December 20X7 with the remaining three paintings
being sold on 8 February 20X8. All 10 of the paintings were paid for by Orton on 8 February 20X8.
Requirement
What exchange gain arises from the transaction relating to the paintings in Orton’s financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7 according to IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in
Foreign Exchange Rates?
11 Alder
On 1 January 20X7 The Alder Company made a loan of £9 million to one of its foreign subsidiaries,
The Culpeo Company. The loan in substance is a part of Alder’s net investment in that foreign
operation. The functional currency of Culpeo is the R$.
12 Porcupine
The Porcupine Company has a wholly owned foreign subsidiary, The Jacktree Company, with net
assets at 1 January 20X7 of N$300 million. Jacktree made a profit for the year ending 31 December
20X7 of N$150 million. The functional currency of Jacktree is the N$.
Porcupine’s consolidated financial statements were prepared to 31 December 20X7 and the
presentation currency is pounds sterling.
Exchange rates were as follows:
1 January 20X7 – N$2.00: £1
31 December 20X7 – N$3.00: £1
Average rate for 20X7 – N$2.50: £1
Requirement
How would the exchange gain or loss on the investment in Jacktree be recognised in the
consolidated financial statements of Porcupine for the year ending 31 December 20X7 according to
IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates?
13 Soapstone
On 31 December 20X6 The Soapstone Company acquired 60% of the ordinary shares in The Frew
Company for £700. Soapstone’s functional currency is pounds sterling, while Frew’s is the R$.
The summarised financial statements of Frew and the £:R$ exchange rates are as follows.
The carrying amount of Frew’s assets and liabilities are the same as their fair values and there has
been no impairment of goodwill.
The average exchange rate during 20X7 was £2.50: R$1. There was no change in Frew’s share capital
during the year and it paid no dividends.
Requirements
Determine the following amounts that will appear in Soapstone’s consolidated financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 20X7 in accordance with IAS 21, The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates.
(a) The carrying amount at 31 December 20X7 of the goodwill acquired in the business
combination, assuming that the non-controlling interest is valued as a proportion of the net
assets of the entity
(b) Soapstone’s share of Frew’s profit for the period
(c) The total foreign exchange gain reported as other comprehensive income in 20X7
Gal’000
5 May 20X5 100,400
1 February 20X7 97,000
Gal = £1
5 May 20X5 6.0
31 December 20X6 5.4
1 February 20X7 4.7
31 March 20X7 4.2
Average for the three months to 31 March 20X7 4.8
(6) The company has determined that goodwill at the year end has been impaired by 10% of its
value in Gals. The impairment event arose on 31 March 20X7.
(7) Jupiter measures the non-controlling interest using the proportion of net assets method.
15 Cardamom
The Cardamom Company operates in the heavy engineering sector and has the pound sterling as its
functional currency.
On 30 September 20X7 Cardamom imported a crane from an overseas supplier, The Venilia
Company. The total cost of the crane was R$3,000,000. Under the terms of the contract Cardamom
was to pay Venilia R$2,000,000 on 31 October 20X7 and R$1,000,000 on 31 March 20X8. Cardamom
does not hedge its foreign currency cash flows.
The R$/£ spot exchange rates were as follows.
R$/£
30 September 20X7 3.0: 1
31 October 20X7 2.5: 1
31 December 20X7 2.2: 1
31 March 20X8 2.0: 1
Requirement
What should be the cash outflow in the statement of cash flows of Cardamom for the year ending 31
December 20X7 under Investing Activities in respect of the purchases of the crane, in accordance
with IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows?
16 Rostock
The Rostock Company operates in Sidonia and its functional currency is the N$. The Sidonian
economy has deteriorated to such an extent that it became necessary for Rostock to apply IAS 29,
Financial Reporting in Hyperinflationary Economies, with effect from 1 January 20X7. At that date
Rostock’s statement of financial position was summarised as follows.
N$ N$
Property, plant and equipment 27,600 Share capital 8,000
Trade receivables 10,800 Revaluation reserve 7,000
Cash 1,300 Retained earnings 11,300
Trade payables (13,400) –
26,300 26,300
The share capital was issued on the date the company was formed, 1 January 20X5. The property,
plant and equipment was acquired on the same date and revalued on 30 September 20X5. The
trade payables were acquired on 30 September 20X6 and the trade receivables on 31 December
20X6.
The general price index of Sidonia has been as follows.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Exchange
€’000 rate £’000
Non-monetary asset 96 3 32
The share capital and retained earnings is the balancing item and is reconciled as follows:
2 Monetary items
Money held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in fixed or determinable amounts of
money.
3 Initial recognition
Use the exchange rate at the date of the transaction. An average rate for a period can be used if the
exchange rates did not fluctuate significantly.
4 Functional currency
Primary factors used in the determination of the functional currency include the currency of the
country that influences sales price for goods and services, labour, material and other costs and
whose competitive forces and regulations determine these prices and costs.
Secondary indicators include the currency in which funding and receipts from operating activities
arise.
7 Zephyria
£134,823
Goodwill is translated at the closing rate. Therefore N$175,000/1.298 = £134,823.
See IAS 21 IN15 and 57.
8 Cacomistle
£173,344
Because IAS 21.47 treats fair value adjustments to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities arising
on the acquisition of a foreign operation as assets and liabilities of the foreign operation, it requires
them to be translated at the closing rate.
The correct answer is thus N$225,000/1.298 = £173,344.
9 Longspur
£8,052
IAS 21.21 and 22 require that an asset should be recorded initially at the date of the transaction,
which is the date it first qualifies for recognition. For property, plant and equipment, this is when the
asset is delivered, which in this case is 30 April 20X7.
10 Orton
£511,111
Exchange gain = (N$9,200,000/1.8) – (N$9,200,000/2.0) = £511,111
The exchange gain is determined with respect of the value of the trade payable at the year end (as
per IAS 21.23(a) monetary items such as trade payables are translated at the year-end exchange
rate). The N$ has weakened between the date of the transaction and the year end, so the cost of
settling the trade payable in terms of £ has reduced, thereby producing an exchange gain.
There is no gain or loss in respect of the revenue for the paintings sold, which is recorded at the
transaction date rate (IAS 21.21). There is no gain or loss on the paintings held in inventory which in
the year-end statement of financial position are translated at the transaction date rate (IAS 21.23(b)).
11 Alder
The loan would initially be recorded in the financial statements of Culpeo at the rate ruling on the
transaction date (IAS 21.21), so £9m × 2.0 = R$18m. Under IAS 21.23 the amount payable at the year
end is £9m × 1.8 = R$16.2m. The difference is a gain (ie, reduction in a liability) of R$1.8 million in the
financial statements of Culpeo.
This gain will be translated at the closing rate and is equal to £1.0 million (R$1.8m/1.8). Since the
loan is part of the net investment, it is recognised as a separate component of equity as required by
IAS 21.15 and IAS 21.32–33.
12 Porcupine
£60 million loss, recognised in equity
IAS 21.39 and 41 require that exchange differences in translation to the presentation currency are
recognised directly in equity.
£m £m
Net assets at 1 January 20X7 at last year’s rate N$300 @ 2.0 150
Net assets at 1 January 20X7 at this year’s rate N$300 @ 3.0 100 50 loss
Profit at average rate N$150 @ 2.5 60
Profit at 31 December 20X7 N$150 @ 3.0 50 10 loss
60 loss
13 Soapstone
(a) The goodwill acquired is calculated as:
R$
Consideration transferred (£700/2) 350
Non-controlling interest (R$500 × 40%) 200
550
Net assets of acquiree (500)
Goodwill 50
Translated at acquisition (R$50 × 2) = £100
(b) As there has been no change in Frew’s share capital during 20X7, the (R$730 – R$500) = R$230
increase in equity represents Frew’s profit for 20X7. This is translated at the £2.50: R$1 average
rate as an approximation to the rates ruling at the date of each transaction, to give £575, of
which Soapstone’s 60% share is £345 (IAS 21.39(b)–40).
(c) The amount reported as other comprehensive income is made up of the exchange difference on
the retranslation of Frew’s accounts plus the exchange difference on the retranslation of
goodwill:
Retranslation of Frew’s accounts
£ £
Net assets at 1 January 20X6 at opening rate R$500 @ 2.0 1,000
Net assets at 1 January 20X6 at closing rate R$500 @ 3.0 1,500 500 gain
Profit at average rate R$230 @ 2.5 575
Profit at closing rate R$230 @ 3.0 690 115 gain
615 gain
Retranslation of goodwill
£150 – £100 = £50 gain (part (1))
The overall exchange gain recognised as other comprehensive income is therefore £615 + £50
= £665.
Of this:
• £615 × 40% = £246 is attributable to the non-controlling interest
• (£615 × 60%) + £50 = £419 is attributable to the shareholders of the parent
14 Jupiter
Consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X7
£’000
Tangible non-current assets (148,500 + 47,000) 195,500
Goodwill (W4) 54,641
Net current assets (212,800 + 22,738) 235,538
485,679
Share capital 300,000
Retained earnings (W5) 50,484
Foreign exchange reserve (W6) 24,451
374,935
Non-controlling interest (W7) 5,545
Long-term loans (90,913 (W3) + 14,286) 105,199
485,679
Gal’000
Balance at 31 March 20X7 132,900
Less earnings post-acquisition (24,900 × 3/12) (6,225)
Reserves at 31 December 20X6 126,675
Less write-down of receivables (50,000)
Pre-acquisition reserves 76,675
£’000 £’000
Long-term liability per SFP 93,000
Revaluation of Swiss franc loan
SF50.4m / 2.1 24,000
SF50.4m / 2.3 (21,913)
Gain on remeasurement 2,087
Remeasured long-term liabilities 90,913
(4) Goodwill
Gal’000 £’000
Consideration transferred (£85m × 5.4) 459,000
Non-controlling interest
(Gal 150m + Gal 76.675m) × 10% 22,668
481,668
Net assets of acquiree (150m + 76.675m) (226,675)
Goodwill 254,993 @ HR 5.4 47,221
£’000
Jupiter plc 53,300
Share of post-acquisition profits in Mars
(90% × Gal 24.9m × 3/12m) @ AR 4.8 1,168
Gain on Swiss franc loan (W3) 2,087
Impairment of goodwill (W4) (25,499/4.2) (6,071)
50,484
£’000
Exchange gain on goodwill (W4) 13,491
Group share of exchange gain on retranslation of subsidiary (W8) 10,960
24,451
£’000
10% × (69,738 – 14,286) 5,545
£’000 £’000
Opening net assets (acquisition) Gal 226,675,000 @ HR 5.4 41,977
@ CR 4.2 53,970 Gain 11,993
Retained profits since acquisition
Gal 24.9m × 3/12 = Gal 6.225m @ AR 4.8 1,297
@ CR 4.2 1,482 Gain 185
Gain 12,178
Group share £12,178,000 × 90% 10,960
15 Cardamom
£800,000
16 Rostock
N$25,700
The only asset requiring adjustment is the PPE, from date of revaluation to 1 January 20X7, so it is
restated to N$41,400 (N$27,600 × 900/600) (IAS 29.18). The other assets and the trade payables are
monetary items which require no adjustment (IAS 29.12). So the restated equity is N$40,100
(N$41,400 – N$27,600 + N$26,300).
At the beginning of the first period of application of IAS 29, share capital is restated from the date of
contribution, the revaluation surplus is eliminated and retained earnings are the balancing figure (IAS
29.24). Retained earnings are N$25,700 (N$40,100 – N$8,000 × 900/500).
Use of inappropriate exchange rates Verify exchange rates by confirming dates of the
initial loan agreement and funds transfer
Review terms of loan for evidence of Review correspondence between WIR and
permanency or ability of WIR directors to Rextex and board minutes for evidence that the
change the terms of the loan in the near future loan may be repayable in the near future
Review the terms of the loan
Post year end changes in exchange rates Verify exchange rates after the end of the
affecting loan value reporting period. If material consider disclosure
as a non-adjusting event per IAS 10
Purchase of warehouse
(1) Financial reporting
According to IAS 21 an entity is required to translate foreign currency items and transactions into
its functional currency.
WIR initially records both the non-current asset and the liability at £6 million (LCr15m/2.5).
£m £m
DEBIT Warehouse – non-current asset 6
CREDIT Liability 6
There are concerns over the role of the FD Interview other board members and finance staff to
due to the following: assess competence, integrity and degree of control
• The resignation in the year exercised by the FD
• The personal relationship with the last Review samples of transactions authorised by the
audit senior FD
• Personal control over the acquisition of a
major asset
• The ‘commissions’ paid (discussed
further below)
Review the measures taken to compensate for the
• There is no replacement FD yet in post absence of an FD
Internal controls over the transaction – given Review board minutes for authorisation
major involvement of FD Speak to members of the board and finance staff to
assess role of the ex-FD in the contract (was there
any meaningful segregation of duties?)
Re-examine audit working papers of previous audit
senior given personal involvement. Consider
reperforming audit procedures
Business risk – impairment Given the doubts over the FD, ascertain the
business case for warehouse (ie, why it was needed
in this location) and assess its fair value on the basis
of (i) any independent valuations carried out during
purchase process (ii) utilisation of the warehouse
since purchase (eg, amount of inventories held
there).
Landra may be incorrectly treated Examine economic forecasts by bodies such as the Bank of
as a hyperinflationary economy England for information about future economic trends in
Landra, particularly the rate of inflation
Obtain information about the Landra Government’s current
economic policies, in particular any plans they have to reduce
inflation
Review reports and press coverage of the situation in Landra
and attempt to ascertain whether the problems LNR is facing
are widespread
Adjustments may be calculated Assess whether the price index used to make IAS 29
wrongly adjustments is a reliable indicator of inflation, and ascertain
the reasons for the choice made if index used is not Landran
consumer prices index
Assess whether the classification of statement of financial
position items into monetary and non-monetary for the
purposes of making adjustments is appropriate
Ascertain whether non-monetary items in the statement of
financial position, the statement of profit or loss and relevant
items in the statement of cash flows have been adjusted into
measuring units current at the end of the reporting period
Reperform the adjustment calculations and verify the
adjustments used to the price index
Ensure that monetary items, and other assets stated at market
value or net realisable value, have not been adjusted (already
expressed in terms of the monetary unit current at the end of
the reporting period)
Reperform the calculation of monetary gain or loss
Confirm that the comparative figures have been restated in
line with current measuring units
Confirm that the consolidated accounts fulfil the disclosure
requirements of IAS 29
LNR may be wrongly treated as a Obtain budget and forecast information and review for signs
going concern of cash shortages
Consider whether the assumptions take appropriate account
of current economic difficulties in Landra
Ascertain whether LNR directors’ assessment of going
concern extends to 12 months from the date of the financial
statements and request assessment be extended to this
length if not
Also consider the UK-specific requirement that the directors
should disclose if their going concern assessment covered a
period less than one year from the date of the approval of the
financial statements, in which case this should be disclosed in
the auditor’s report
Assess the availability of local finance if LNR is likely to require
it
Obtain written representations from WIR’s directors of plans
by WIR to provide financial support for LNR
Assess the likely effectiveness of any other plans that LNR’s
directors have to deal with going concern difficulties
Payments to agents
(1) Audit risk and audit procedures
Even if the commission payments are legal, the accounting records that relate to these payments
are inadequate, and we only have the unsupported word of the ex-FD. This does not represent
sufficient evidence by itself; we should expect to see stronger evidence in the form of proper
payment records. Now that the FD has left, no one else may have any knowledge about what the
payments are for.
In addition, what the FD described as commissions for obtaining work may in fact be bribes. The
lack of documentation means that we cannot be certain that the payments are in fact
commissions. They may represent a diversion of funds to the FD or possibly money laundering.
The fact that the FD was able to make these payments without anyone checking also casts doubt
on how effective the rest of the board has been in monitoring the effectiveness of the internal
control systems. Although as auditors we do not have to give an opinion on the effectiveness of
internal controls, we do have to assess the review carried out by the directors. We also need to
consider the strength of the evidence of representations by the board, since the failure to
control the FD may indicate a lack of knowledge of key accounting areas.
The main audit risks and procedures include the following:
Money paid to payees who have Ascertain details about the nominee payees, through internet
no entitlement to them searches or through international contacts
Having gained the client’s permission, attempt to contact the
payees and ask for an explanation of these payments
Discuss the legal position with the current directors, pointing
out that the audit report may need to be qualified on the
grounds of failure to provide explanations
If possible, obtain written representations from other
directors; however, directors may not be able to provide those
representations and even if they can, the representations by
themselves will not be sufficient audit evidence
Ask the directors to encourage other staff to disclose any
knowledge they have of these payments, pointing out that
auditors have an obligation to keep legitimate business
matters confidential
Consider issuing a qualified opinion or disclaimer on grounds
of uncertainty because of an inability to obtain sufficient
appropriate evidence. Also consider reporting by exception
on failure to keep proper accounting records
Consider issuing a qualified audit opinion on the grounds of
material misstatement or an adverse opinion if the accounts
do not fairly reflect what the payments appear to be
Corporate governance Review board’s statement about the review of internal control
insufficiently/incorrectly effectiveness (assuming one has been carried out) and
described in accounts consider whether it fairly reflects what has taken place
Review disclosures of processes dealing with internal control
problems such as the payments authorised by the finance
director and consider whether disclosures fairly describe
these processes
Consider whether the directors have sufficient knowledge to
be able to make representations required for audit
Income taxes
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Current tax revised
2 Deferred tax – an overview
3 Identification of temporary differences
4 Measurement of deferred tax assets and liabilities
5 Recognition of deferred tax in the financial statements
6 Common scenarios
7 Group scenarios
8 Presentation and disclosure
9 Deferred tax summary and practice
10 Audit focus
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
22
Learning outcomes
• Explain, determine and calculate how current and deferred tax is recognised and appraise
accounting standards that relate to current tax and deferred tax
• Determine for a particular scenario what comprises sufficient, appropriate audit evidence
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Demonstrate and explain, in the application of audit procedures, how relevant ISAs affect audit
risk and the evaluation of audit evidence
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 8(a), 14(c), 14(d), 14(f)
22
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
Current tax is the amount payable to the tax authorities in relation to the trading activities of the
current period.
1.1 Background
Accounting for current tax is ordinarily straightforward. Complexities arise, however, when we
consider the future tax consequences of what is going on in the financial statements now. This is an
aspect of tax called deferred tax, which has not been covered in earlier studies and which we will
look at in the next section. IAS 12, Income Taxes covers both current and deferred tax. The parts of
this Workbook relating to current tax are fairly brief, as this has been covered at Professional Level.
1.3 Measurement
Measurement of current tax liabilities (assets) for the current and prior periods is very simple. They
are measured at the amount expected to be paid to (recovered from) the tax authorities. The tax
rates (and tax laws) used should be those enacted (or substantively enacted) by the reporting date.
1.5 Presentation
In the statement of financial position, tax assets and liabilities should be shown separately.
Current tax assets and liabilities may only be offset under the following conditions.
• The entity has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts.
• The entity intends to settle the amounts on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the
liability at the same time.
The tax expense (income) related to the profit or loss from ordinary activities should be shown on
the face of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income as part of profit or loss
for the period. The disclosure requirements of IAS 12 are extensive and we will look at these later in
the chapter.
• Deferred tax is an accounting measure used to match the tax effects of transactions with their
accounting impact and thereby produce less distorted results. It is not a tax levied by the
Government that needs to be paid.
• You have studied current tax at Professional Level, but deferred tax is new to Advanced Level, so
you should focus on deferred tax.
• Note that UK tax is not specifically examinable, but examples from UK tax are sometimes used in
this chapter for illustrative purposes.
• The rules to determine the tax base in the jurisdiction in the question, will be given to you in the
exam.
Therefore in 20X0, accounting profits are reduced by £10,000 but taxable profits are reduced by
£20,000, so providing one reason why the tax charge is not equal to the tax rate multiplied by the
accounting profit.
At this point it could be said that the temporary difference is equal to the £10,000 difference
between depreciation and capital allowances.
In the long run, the total taxable profits and total accounting profits will be the same (except for
permanent differences). In other words, temporary differences which originate in one period will
reverse in one or more subsequent periods.
Deferred tax is an accounting adjustment to smooth out the discrepancies between accounting profit
and the tax charge caused by temporary differences.
£
Carrying amount (£100,000 – £10,000) 90,000
Tax written-down value (£100,000 – £20,000) 80,000
Temporary difference 10,000
Temporary differences are calculated as the difference between the carrying amount of an asset or
liability and its tax base. Temporary differences may be classified as:
• taxable
• deductible
Definition
Tax base: The amount attributed to an asset or liability for tax purposes.
Assets
The tax base of an asset is the value of the asset in the current period for tax purposes. This is either:
• the amount that will be tax deductible in the future against taxable economic benefits when the
carrying amount of the asset is recovered; or
• if those economic benefits are not taxable, the tax base is equal to the carrying amount of the
asset.
Liabilities
• The tax base of a liability is its carrying amount less any amount that will be tax deductible in the
future.
• For revenue received in advance, the tax base of the resulting liability is its carrying amount less
any amount of the revenue that will not be taxable in future periods.
IAS 12 guidance
IAS 12 states that in the following circumstances, the tax base of an asset or liability will be equal to
its carrying amount:
• Accrued expenses that have already been deducted in determining an entity’s tax liability for the
current or earlier periods
• A loan payable that is measured at the amount originally received and this amount is the same as
the amount repayable on final maturity of the loan
• Accrued income that will never be taxable
The table below gives some examples of tax rules and the resulting tax base.
Item of property, Carrying amount = Attracts tax relief in the Tax written down value
plant and cost – accumulated form of tax depreciation = cost – accumulated
equipment depreciation tax depreciation
Definitions
Taxable temporary differences: Temporary differences that will result in taxable amounts in
determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the asset or
liability is recovered or settled.
Deferred tax liabilities: The amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of taxable
temporary differences.
Definitions
Deductible temporary differences: Temporary differences that will result in amounts that are
deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the
asset or liability is recovered or settled.
Deferred tax assets: The amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
• deductible temporary differences; and
• the carry forward of unused tax losses/unused tax credits.
Assumption 1 If the carrying amount of the factory in the statement of financial position is £3.5
million, then there is a taxable temporary difference of £500,000. (Note: Where
capital allowances claimed are cumulatively greater than accounting
depreciation, this is sometimes referred to as ‘accelerated’ as the tax allowances
have been awarded sooner than accounting depreciation has been recognised.)
Assumption 2 If, instead, the carrying amount of the factory in the statement of financial
position is £2 million, then there is a deductible temporary difference of £1
million.
Solution
20X7
To recover the carrying amount of the asset, Petros will earn taxable income of £10,000 and pay tax
of £4,000. The resulting deferred tax liability of £4,000 would not be recognised because it results
from the initial recognition of the asset.
20X8
The carrying value of the asset is now £8,000. In earning taxable income of £8,000, Petros will pay tax
of £3,200. Again, the resulting deferred tax liability of £3,200 is not recognised, because it results
from the initial recognition of the asset.
Solution
1 The tax base of the accrued expenses is nil. This is because the expenses have been recognised
in accounting profit, but the tax impact is yet to take effect. There is therefore a deductible
temporary difference of £2,000.
2 The tax base of the accrued expenses is £3,000, ie, the carrying value (£3,000) less the amount
which will be deducted for tax purposes in future periods (nil, as relief has already been
obtained). There is no temporary difference, and no deferred tax arises.
3 The tax base of the loan is £5,000, as there are no future tax consequences. Thus, as the tax base
equals the carrying value, there is no temporary difference and no deferred tax.
4 The tax base of the interest received in advance is nil (ie, the carrying value (£7,000) less the
amount which will not be taxable in future periods (£7,000, as it has all been charged already). As
a result there is a deductible temporary difference of £7,000.
The tax rate is applied to temporary differences in order to calculate the deferred tax asset or liability.
The tax rate should be applied to temporary differences in order to calculate deferred tax:
• Taxable temporary differences × tax rate = deferred tax liability
• Deductible temporary differences × tax rate = deferred tax asset
Solution
The tax base of the asset is £1,500 – £900 = £600.
Solution
A rate of 29% should be used. The rate is that expected to apply when the asset is realised, thus the
rate of 30% in 20X3, when the temporary difference originated, is not relevant. The 28% would be
used if it had been enacted or substantively enacted, but it is only under discussion. Thus, our best
estimate of the rate applying in 20X5, based on laws already enacted or substantively enacted, is the
rate for 20X4 (ie, the previous year) of 29%.
Solution
(a) A deferred tax liability is recognised of £(10,000 – 6,000) × 20% = £800.
(b) A deferred tax liability is recognised of £(10,000 – 6,000) × 30% = £1,200.
The manner of recovery may also affect the tax base of an asset or liability. Tax base should be
measured according to the expected manner of recovery or settlement.
Judgement must be applied in the assumptions made about the manner of recovery or settlement.
With deferred tax assets, judgement must be exercised in determining whether an entity will earn
sufficient taxable profits in future periods to benefit from a reduction in tax payments.
The deferred tax amount calculated is recorded as a deferred tax balance in the statement of
financial position with a corresponding entry to the tax charge, other comprehensive income or
goodwill.
or
Note that the recognition of a deferred tax asset may be restricted (see section 5.2).
Solution
Deferred tax
Solution
The carrying amount of the liability is (£10,000).
The tax base of the liability is nil (carrying amount of £10,000 less the amount that will be deductible
for tax purposes in respect of the liability in future periods).
When the liability is settled for its carrying amount, the entity’s future taxable profit will be reduced
by £10,000 and so its future tax payments by £10,000 × 25% = £2,500.
6 Common scenarios
Section overview
There are a number of common examples which result in a taxable or deductible temporary
difference. However, this list is not exhaustive.
Solution
Implications:
• The carrying amount of the building before the revaluation was £500,000 – (5 × 2% × £500,000) =
£450,000.
• The tax base of the building before the revaluation was £500,000 – (5 × 4% £500,000) =
£400,000.
• The temporary difference of £50,000 would have resulted in a deferred tax liability of 30% ×
£50,000 = £15,000.
• As a result of the revaluation, the carrying amount of the building is increased to £650,000.
• The tax base does not change.
• The temporary difference therefore increases to £250,000 (£650,000 – £400,000), resulting in a
total deferred tax liability of 30% × £250,000 = £75,000.
• As a result of the revaluation, additional deferred tax of £60,000 must therefore be recognised.
• This could also be calculated by applying the tax rate to the difference between carrying amount
of £450,000 and valuation of £650,000.
£
Pension scheme assets 2,160,000
Pension scheme liabilities (2,530,000)
(370,000)
Deferred tax asset 121,000
(249,000)
After the year end, a report was obtained from an independent actuary. This gave valuations as at 30
September 20X6 of:
£
Pension scheme assets 2,090,200
Pension scheme liabilities (2,625,000)
All receipts and payments into and out of the scheme can be assumed to have occurred on 30
September 20X6.
Celia recognises any gains and losses on remeasurement of defined benefit pension plans directly in
other comprehensive income in accordance with IAS 19.
In the tax regime in which Celia operates, a tax deduction is allowed on payment of pension
contributions. No tax deduction is allowed for benefits paid. Assume that the rate of tax applicable to
20X5, 20X6 and announced for 20X7 is 30%.
Requirements
1 Explain how each of the above transactions should be treated in the financial statements for the
year ended 30 September 20X6.
2 Prepare an extract from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income showing
other comprehensive income for the year ended 30 September 20X6.
Solution
1 Pensions
The contributions paid have been charged to profit or loss in contravention of IAS 19, Employee
Benefits.
Under IAS 19, the following must be done:
• Actuarial valuations of assets and liabilities revised at the year end
• All gains and losses recognised
Deferred tax must also be recognised. Tax deductions are allowed on pension contributions. IAS
12, Income Taxes requires deferred tax relating to items charged or credited to other
comprehensive income (OCI) to be recognised in other comprehensive income hence the
amount of the deferred tax movement relating to the losses on remeasurement charged directly
to OCI must be split out and credited directly to OCI.
2 Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income (extract)
£
Actuarial loss on defined benefit obligation (W1) (38,000)
Return on plan assets (excluding amounts in net interest) (W1) (70,800)
(108,800)
Deferred tax credit relating to actuarial losses on defined benefit plan (W2) 32,640
Other comprehensive income for the year (76,160)
WORKINGS
(1) Pension scheme
6.2.2 Provisions
• A provision is recognised for accounting purposes when there is a present obligation, but it is not
deductible for tax purposes until the expenditure is incurred.
• In this case, the temporary difference is equal to the amount of the provision, since the tax base is
nil.
• Deferred tax is recognised in profit or loss.
£
Carrying amount of share-based payment expense 0
Less tax base of share-based payment expense (X)
(estimated amount tax authorities will permit as a deduction in future periods, based
on year-end information)
Temporary difference (X)
Deferred tax asset at X% X
If the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) exceeds the amount of the
related cumulative remuneration expense, this indicates that the tax deduction also relates to an
equity item.
The excess is therefore recognised directly in equity. The diagrams below show the accounting for
equity-settled and cash-settled transactions.
Solution
Deferred tax
WORKING
£ £
Accounting expense recognised (5,000 × £3 ÷ 2)/(5,000 × £3) 7,500 15,000
Tax deduction (3,000) (17,000)
Excess temporary difference 0 (2,000)
Excess deferred tax asset to equity @ 30% 0 600
Fair value of
Director’s Options options at
name Grant date granted grant date Exercise price Vesting date
£
Edmund
Houston 1 June 20X5 40,000 3.00 4.00 6/20X7
Kieran Bullen 1 June 20X6 120,000 2.50 5.00 6/20X9
The price of the company’s shares at 31 May 20X7 is £8 per share and at 31 May 20X6 was £8.50 per
share.
The directors must be working for Frost on the vesting date in order for the options to vest.
No directors have left the company since the issue of the share options and none are expected to
leave before June 20X9. The shares can be exercised on the first day of the month in which they vest.
In accordance with IFRS 2 an expense of £60,000 has been charged to profits in the year ended 31
May 20X6 in respect of the share option scheme. The cumulative expense for the two years ended 31
May 20X7 is £220,000.
Solution
The first stage is to use the reversal of the taxable temporary difference to arrive at the amount to be
tested for recognition.
Under IAS 12 Humbert will consider whether it has a tax liability from a taxable temporary difference
that will support the recognition of the tax asset:
£’000
Deductible temporary difference 200
£’000
Expected tax loss (per bottom line of tax return) (40)
Less reversing taxable temporary difference (60)
Add reversing deductible temporary difference 200
Taxable profit for recognition test 100
Finally, the results of the above two steps should be added, and the tax calculated:
Humbert would recognise a deferred tax asset of (£60,000 + £100,000) × 20% = £32,000. This
deferred tax asset would be recognised even though the company has an expected loss on its tax
return.
7 Group scenarios
Section overview
$
Carrying amount of asset/liability
(consolidated statement of financial Carrying amount in consolidated statement
position) X/(X) of financial position
Tax base depends on tax rules. Usually tax is
charged on individual entity profits, not
Tax base (usually subsidiary’s tax base) (X)/X group profits.
Temporary difference X/(X)
Deferred tax (liability)/asset (X)/X
Solution
Implications:
• The carrying amount of the inventory in the group accounts is £10,000 more than its tax base
(being carrying amount in Harrison’s own accounts).
• Deferred tax on this temporary difference is 30% × £10,000 = £3,000.
• A deferred tax liability of £3,000 is recognised in the group statement of financial position.
• Goodwill is increased by (£3,000 × 80%) = £2,400.
Solution
Temporary difference:
• The tax base of the investment in Embsay is the cost of £110,000. The carrying value is the share
of net assets (80% × £120,000) + goodwill of £30,000 = £126,000.
(1) Skipton has made a provision amounting to £1.8 million in its accounts in respect of litigation.
This is tax allowable only when the cost is actually incurred. The case is expected to be settled
within 12 months.
(2) Skipton has a number of investments classified as at fair value through profit or loss in
accordance with IFRS 9, Financial Instruments. The remeasurement gains and losses recognised
in profit or loss for accounting purposes are not taxable/tax allowable until such date as the
investments are sold. To date the cumulative unrealised gain is £2.5 million.
(3) Skipton has sold goods to Morpeth in the year making a profit of £1 million. A quarter of these
goods remain in Morpeth’s inventory at the year end.
Bingley
(1) At its acquisition date, Bingley had unrelieved brought-forward tax losses of £0.4 million. It was
initially believed that Bingley would have sufficient taxable profits to use these losses and a
deferred tax asset was recognised in Bingley’s financial statements at acquisition. Subsequent
events have proven that the future taxable profits will not be sufficient to use the full brought-
forward loss.
(2) At acquisition Bingley’s retained earnings amounted to £3.5 million. The directors of Morpeth
Group have decided that in each of the next four years to the intended listing date of the group,
they will realise earnings through dividend payments from the subsidiary amounting to
£600,000 per annum. Bingley has not declared a dividend for the current year. Tax is payable on
remittance of dividends.
(3) £300,000 of the purchase price of Bingley has been allocated to intangible assets. The
recognition and measurement criteria of IFRS 3 and IAS 38 do not appear to have been met;
however, the directors believe that the amount is allowable for tax and have calculated the tax
charge accordingly. It is believed that this may be challenged by the tax authorities.
Requirement
What are the deferred tax implications of the above issues for the Morpeth Group?
Solution
Acquisitions
Any fair value adjustments made for consolidation purposes will affect the group deferred tax charge
for the year.
A taxable temporary difference will arise where the fair value of an asset exceeds its carrying value,
and the resulting deferred tax liability should be recorded against goodwill.
A deductible temporary difference will arise where the fair value of a liability exceeds its carrying
value, or an asset is revalued downwards. Again the resulting deferred tax amount (an asset) should
be recognised in goodwill.
In addition, it may be possible to recognised deferred tax assets in a group which could not be
recognised by an individual company. This is the case where tax losses brought forward, but not
considered to be an asset, due to lack of available taxable profits to set them against, can now be
used by another group company.
The detailed presentation and disclosure requirements for current and deferred tax are given below.
8.2.1 Offsetting
Where appropriate deferred tax assets and liabilities should be offset in the statement of financial
position.
An entity should offset deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities if, and only if:
• the entity has a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities;
and
• the deferred tax assets and the deferred tax liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same
taxation authority.
There is no requirement in IAS 12 to provide an explanation of assets and liabilities that have been
offset.
• The calculation and recording of deferred tax can be set out in an eight-step process.
• Deferred tax at Advanced Level will be much more demanding than at Professional Level.
9.1 Summary
The following is a summary of the steps required to calculate and record deferred tax in the financial
statements.
Procedure Comment
Step 1 Determine the carrying amount of each This is merely the carrying value
asset and liability in the statement of determined by other standards.
financial position.
Step 2 Determine the tax base of each asset and This is the amount attributed to each asset
liability. or liability for tax purposes.
Step 4 Determine the deferred tax balance by The tax rate to be used is that expected to
multiplying the tax rate by any temporary apply when the asset is realised or the
differences. liability settled, based on laws already
enacted or substantively enacted by the
statement of financial position date.
Step 5 Recognise deferred tax assets/liabilities in Apply recognition criteria in IAS 12.
the statement of financial position.
Step 6 Recognise deferred tax, normally in profit This will be the difference between the
or loss (but possibly as other opening and closing deferred tax
comprehensive income or in equity or balances in the statement of financial
goodwill). position.
Step 7 Offset deferred tax assets and liabilities in Offset criteria in IAS 12 must be satisfied.
the statement of financial position where
appropriate.
Step 8 Comply with relevant presentation and See relevant presentation and disclosure
disclosure requirements for deferred tax requirements sections above.
in IAS 12.
The method described is referred to as the liability method, or full provision method.
(a) The advantage of this method is that it recognises that each temporary difference at the
reporting date has an effect on future tax payments, and these are provided for in full.
(b) The disadvantage of this method is that, under certain types of tax system, it gives rise to large
liabilities that may fall due only far in the future.
The step-by-step approach in the above table can be used to structure most problems relating to
deferred tax.
The exam-standard question below requires assimilation of a great deal of information, not all of
which relates to tax. Before launching into the question, it might be helpful to highlight the
information that has deferred tax implications while the content of this chapter is fresh in your mind.
Kr’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant & equipment 61,600
Intangible assets 8,500
Financial investments 7,700
77,800
Current assets 23,700
101,500
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Share capital Kr1 shares 10,000
Retained earnings 42,600
Revaluation surplus 16,800
69,400
Non-current liabilities
Loans 10,000
Provisions 15,000
Current liabilities 7,100
101,500
Exhibit 2: Notes prepared by Sian Parsons: Key transactions in the year ended 30 September 20X3
(1) Purchase of machinery
On 1 January 20X3 Marusa bought some specialist machinery from the USA for $30 million. Payment
for the machinery was made on 31 March 20X3.
In accordance with local Ruritanian GAAP, I recognised the cost of the machinery on 1 January 20X3
at Kr10 million, using the opening rate of exchange at 1 October 20X2.
I have charged a full year’s depreciation of Kr1.0 million in cost of sales, as Marusa depreciates the
machinery over a 10-year life and it has no residual value. I have therefore included the machinery in
the statement of financial position at Kr9 million.
An amount of Kr2.5 million has been debited to retained earnings. This is in respect of the difference
between the sum paid to the supplier of Kr12.5 million on 31 March 20X3 and the cost recorded in
non-current assets of Kr10 million.
The Kr/US$ exchange rates on relevant dates were:
1 Kr =
1 October 20X2 $3.00
1 January 20X3 $2.50
31 March 20X3 $2.40
30 September 20X3 $2.00
Exhibit 3: Note prepared by Ying Cha: Key transactions in the year ended 30 September 20X3
Gemex, a limited liability company, is a wholly owned UK subsidiary of Chippy, and is a cash
generating unit in its own right. The value of the property, plant and equipment of Gemex at 30
September 20X3 was £6 million and purchased goodwill was £1 million before any impairment loss.
The company had no other assets or liabilities. An impairment loss of £1.8 million had occurred at 30
September 20X3. The tax base of the property, plant and equipment of Gemex was £4 million as at
30 September 20X3.
I would like to know how the impairment loss will affect the deferred tax liability for the year in the
financial statements of Chippy. Impairment losses are not an allowable expense for taxation
purposes under UK tax. The UK corporation tax rate is 20%.
• The provision for and related statement of profit or loss entries for deferred taxation are based on
assumptions that rely on management judgements.
• Procedures should be adopted to ensure any assumptions are reasonable and the requirements
of IAS 12 have been met.
The language of financial reporting differs from that of tax. It is important that the tax team
communicates its findings clearly to the audit team, since it is in essence providing a service to the
audit team which the audit team will rely on.
2. Can you identify the tax base resulting from various tax rules? (Topic 3)
6. How is deferred tax recognised in the context of retirement benefits and share-based
payment? (Topic 6)
7. What factors increase the audit risk in respect of current and deferred tax? (Topic 10)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Situations A straightforward warm-up question, this tests that you have grasped the
basic concept behind deferred tax.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Billinge This is a full deferred tax question, covering fair value adjustment, share
options, intragroup trading, profit from foreign subsidiary, capital
allowances and a lease.
Longwood Another full deferred tax question, this one covers research and
development, PPE, tax losses, deferred tax and pensions and deferred tax
treatment of goodwill. A thorough understanding of the non-tax issues is
required as well as deferred tax.
Telo (note 4 only) This part of the question relates to gains on investment property being
taxed at a different time from gains on PPE. Skim through the answer to
note 3, which gives you the information you need about the property to
answer the deferred tax part.
3 Current tax
• Unpaid current tax recognised as a liability – IAS 12.12
• Benefit relating to tax losses that can be carried back to recover previous period current tax
recognised as asset – IAS 12.13
7 Deferred tax assets and liabilities arising from investments in subsidiaries, branches and
associates and investments in joint ventures – IAS 12.39, IAS 12.44
9 Discounting
• Deferred tax assets and liabilities shall not be discounted – IAS 12.53
10 Annual review
• Carrying amount of deferred tax asset to be reviewed at each reporting date – IAS 12.56
1 Torcularis
The Torcularis Company has interest receivable which has a carrying amount of £75,000 in its
statement of financial position at 31 December 20X6. The related interest revenue will be taxed on a
cash basis in 20X7.
Torcularis has trade receivables that have a carrying amount of £80,000 in its statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X6. The related revenue has been included in its statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income for the year to 31 December 20X6.
Requirement
According to IAS 12, Income Taxes, what is the total tax base of interest receivable and trade
receivables for Torcularis at 31 December 20X6?
2 Situations
Requirements
What will the following situations give rise to as regards deferred tax, according to IAS 12, Income
Taxes?
(a) Development costs have been capitalised and will be amortised through profit or loss, but were
deducted in determining taxable profit in the period in which they were incurred.
(b) Accumulated depreciation for a machine in the financial statements is greater than the
cumulative capital allowances up to the reporting date for tax purposes.
(c) A penalty payable is in the statement of financial position. Penalties are not allowable for tax
purposes.
3 Budapest
On 31 December 20X6, The Budapest Company acquired a 60% stake in The Lisbon Company.
Among Lisbon’s identifiable assets at that date was inventory with a carrying amount of £8,000 and a
fair value of £12,000. The tax base of the inventory was the same as the carrying amount.
The consideration given by Budapest resulted in the recognition of goodwill acquired in the
business combination.
Income tax is payable by Budapest at 25% and by Lisbon at 20%.
Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false, in respect of Budapest’s consolidated
statement of financial position at 31 December 20X6, in accordance with IAS 12, Income Taxes.
(1) No deferred tax liability is recognised in respect of the goodwill.
(2) A deferred tax liability of £800 is recognised in respect of the inventory.
4 Dipyrone
The Dipyrone Company owns 100% of the Reidfurd Company. During the year ended 31 December
20X7:
(1) Dipyrone sold goods to Reidfurd for £600,000, earning a profit margin of 25%. Reidfurd held
30% of these goods in inventory at the year end.
(2) Reidfurd sold goods to Dipyrone for £800,000, earning a profit margin of 20%. Dipyrone held
25% of these goods in inventory at the year end.
5 Rhenium
The Rhenium Company issued £6 million of 8% loan stock at par on 1 April 20X7. Interest is payable
in two instalments on 30 September and 31 March each year.
The company pays income tax at 20% in the year ended 31 December 20X7, but expects to pay at
25% for 20X8 as it will be earning sufficient profits to pay tax at the higher rate.
For tax purposes interest paid and received is dealt with on a cash basis.
Requirement
What is the deferred tax balance at 31 December 20X7, according to IAS 12, Income Taxes?
6 Cacholate
The Cacholate Company acquired a property on 1 January 20X6 for £1.5 million. The useful life of
the property is 20 years, which is also the period over which tax depreciation is charged.
On 31 December 20X7, the property was revalued to £2.16 million. The tax base remained
unaltered.
Income tax is payable at 20%.
Requirement
What is the deferred tax charge for the year ended 31 December 20X7, and where is it charged,
under IAS 12, Income Taxes?
7 Spruce
Spruce Company made a taxable loss of £4.7 million in the year ended 31 December 20X7. This was
due to a one-off reorganisation charge in 20X7; before that, Spruce made substantial taxable profits
each year.
Assume that tax legislation allows companies to carry back tax losses for one financial year, and then
carry them forward indefinitely.
Spruce’s taxable profits are as follows.
8 Bananaquit
At 31 December 20X6, The Bananaquit Company has a taxable temporary difference of £1.5 million
in relation to certain non-current assets.
9 Antpitta
The Antpitta Company owns 70% of The Chiffchaff Company. During 20X7 Chiffchaff sold goods to
Antpitta at a mark-up above cost. Half of these goods are held in Antpitta’s inventories at the year
end. The rate of income tax is 30%.
Requirement
Indicate whether the following statements are true or false according to IAS 12, Income Taxes and
IFRS 10, Consolidated Financial Statements, when preparing Antpitta’s consolidated and Chiffchaff’s
individual financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X7.
(1) A deferred tax asset arises in the individual statement of financial position of Chiffchaff in relation
to intra-group transactions.
(2) A deferred tax asset arises in Antpitta’s consolidated statement of financial position due to the
intra-group transactions.
10 Parea
In order to maximise its net assets per share, The Parea Company wishes to recognise the minimum
deferred tax liability allowed by IFRS. Parea only pays tax to the Government of Gredonia, at the rate
of 22%.
On 1 January 20X6 Parea acquired some plant and equipment for £30,000. In the financial
statements it is being written off over its useful life of four years on a straight-line basis, even though
tax depreciation is calculated at 27% on a reducing-balance basis.
On 1 January 20X3 Parea acquired a property for £40,000. Both in the financial statements and under
tax legislation it is being written off over 25 years on a straight-line basis. On 31 December 20X7 the
property was revalued to £50,000 with no change to its useful life, but this revaluation had no effect
on the tax base or on tax depreciation.
Requirement
Determine the following amounts for the deferred tax liability of Parea in its consolidated financial
statements according to IAS 12, Income Taxes.
(1) The deferred tax liability at 31 December 20X6
(2) The deferred tax liability at 31 December 20X7
(3) The charge or credit for deferred tax in profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X7
11 XYZ
XYZ, a public limited company, has decided to adopt the provisions of IFRSs for the first time in its
financial statements for the year ending 30 November 20X1. The amounts of deferred tax provided
as set out in the notes of the group financial statements for the year ending 30 November 20X0 were
as follows:
£m
Tax depreciation in excess of accounting depreciation 38
Other temporary differences 11
Liabilities for healthcare benefits (12)
The following notes are relevant to the calculation of the deferred tax liability as at 30 November
20X1:
(1) XYZ acquired a 100% holding in a foreign company on 30 November 20X1. The subsidiary does
not plan to pay any dividends for the financial year to 30 November 20X1 or in the foreseeable
future. The carrying amount in XYZ’s consolidated financial statements of its investment in the
subsidiary at 30 November 20X1 is made up as follows:
£m
Carrying amount of net assets acquired excluding deferred tax 76
Goodwill (before deferred tax and impairment losses) 14
Carrying amount/cost of investment 90
The tax base of the net assets of the subsidiary at acquisition was £60 million. No deduction is
available in the subsidiary’s tax jurisdiction for the cost of the goodwill.
Immediately after acquisition on 30 November 20X1, XYZ had supplied the subsidiary with
inventories amounting to £30 million at a profit of 20% on selling price. The inventories had not been
sold by the year end and the tax rate applied to the subsidiary’s profit is 25%. There was no
significant difference between the fair values and carrying amounts on the acquisition of the
subsidiary.
(2) The carrying amount of the property, plant and equipment (excluding that of the subsidiary) is
£2,600 million and their tax base is £1,920 million. Tax arising on the revaluation of properties of
£140 million, if disposed of at their revalued amounts, is the same at 30 November 20X1 as at the
beginning of the year. The revaluation of the properties is included in the carrying amount above.
Other taxable temporary differences (excluding the subsidiary) amount to £90 million as at 30
November 20X1.
(3) The liability for healthcare benefits in the statement of financial position had risen to £100 million
as at 30 November 20X1 and the tax base is zero. Healthcare benefits are deductible for tax
purposes when payments are made to retirees. No payments were made during the year to 30
November 20X1.
(4) XYZ Group incurred £300 million of tax losses in 20X0. Under the tax law of the country, tax
losses can be carried forward for three years only. The taxable profits for the years ending 30
November were anticipated to be as follows:
The auditors are unsure about the availability of taxable profits in 20X3, as the amount is based on
the projected acquisition of a profitable company. It is anticipated that there will be no future
reversals of existing taxable temporary differences until after 30 November 20X3.
(5) Income tax of £165 million on a property disposed of in 20X0 becomes payable on 30 November
20X4 under the deferral relief provisions of the tax laws of the country. There had been no sales or
revaluations of property during the year to 30 November 20X1.
(6) Income tax is assumed to be 30% for the foreseeable future in XYZ’s jurisdiction and the company
wishes to discount any deferred tax liabilities at a rate of 4% if allowed by IAS 12.
(7) There are no other temporary differences other than those set out above. The directors of XYZ
have calculated the opening balance of deferred tax using IAS 12 to be £280 million.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
The entity recognises the deferred tax liability in years 20X1 to 20X4 because the reversal of the
taxable temporary difference will create taxable income in subsequent years. The entity’s income
statement is as follows.
£
Fair value (40,000 × £8.50 × 1/2) 170,000
Exercise price of option (40,000 × £4.00 × 1/2) (80,000)
Intrinsic value (estimated tax deduction) 90,000
Tax at 30% 27,000
The cumulative remuneration expense is £60,000, which is less than the estimated tax deduction of
£90,000. Therefore:
• a deferred tax asset of £27,000 is recognised in the statement of financial position;
• there is deferred tax income of £18,000 (60,000 × 30%); and
• the excess of £9,000 (30,000 × 30%) goes to equity.
Year to 31 May 20X7
Deferred tax asset:
£
Fair value
(40,000 × £8) 320,000
(120,000 × £8 × 1/3) 320,000
640,000
Exercise price of options
(40,000 × £4) (160,000)
(120,000 × £5 × 1/3) (200,000)
Intrinsic value (estimated tax deduction) 280,000
Tax at 30% 84,000
Less previously recognised (27,000)
7,000
The cumulative remuneration expense is £220,000, which is less than the estimated tax deduction of
£280,000. Therefore:
• a deferred tax asset of £84,000 is recognised in the statement of financial position at 31 May
20X7;
• there is potential deferred tax income of £57,000 for the year ended 31 May 20X7;
• of this, £9,000 (60,000 × 30%) – (9,000) goes directly to equity; and
• the remainder (£48,000) is recognised in profit or loss for the year.
The fair value uplift is subsequently depreciated such that by the reporting date its carrying
value is £15 million (10/20 yrs × £30m). The journal to record the consolidation adjustment for
extra depreciation is:
7.2 At acquisition, property held within Dorian’s accounts is uplifted by £30 million as a
consolidation adjustment.
This results in a taxable temporary difference of £30 million, and so a deferred tax liability of
£4.8 million (16% × £30m) at acquisition.
This is recognised by:
By the reporting date, £15 million of this temporary difference has reversed and therefore a
further journal is required to reduce the deferred tax liability by £2.4 million (16% × £15m):
(2)
(3)
Tax base:
Cost 6,000
Tax depreciation (750)
Carrying amount 5,250 6 875
Temporary difference 225
The deferred tax charge in profit or loss will therefore increase by £45,000.
If the tax base had been translated at the historical rate, the tax base would have been £(5.25m ÷ 5)
= £1.05 million. This gives a temporary difference of £1.1m – £1.05m = £50,000, and therefore a
deferred tax liability of £50,000 × 20% = £10,000. This is considerably lower than when the closing
rate is used.
£
Current tax expense X
Under/overprovisions relating to prior periods X/(X)
Increases/decreases in the deferred tax balance X/(X)
X
While the correction of an over or under provision relates to a prior period, this is not a prior period
adjustment as defined in IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors and
as assumed by Tacks. Rather, it is a change in accounting estimate.
Changes in accounting estimates result from new information or new developments and,
accordingly, are not corrections of errors. A prior period error, which would require a prior period
adjustment is an omission or misstatement arising from failure to use reliable information that was
available or could have been obtained at the time of the authorisation of the financial statements.
This is not the case here. Tacks had accounted for all known issues at the previous year end (30
November 20X1), and could not have foreseen that the tax adjustment would be required. No
penalties were applied by the taxation authorities, indicating that there were no fundamental errors
in the information provided to them. Correction of an over- or under-provision for taxation is routine,
since taxation liabilities are difficult to estimate.
The effect of a change in accounting estimate must be applied by the company prospectively by
including it in profit or loss in the period of change, with separate disclosure of the adjustment in the
financial statements.
Dr Cr
Kr million Kr million
DEBIT PPE
Cost Kr12m – Kr10m 2
CREDIT Creditor 2
Being correct recording of cost of the machinery
There are no deferred tax implications as the tax base and the carrying amount are the same.
Impairment
Per IAS 36 the impairment of Kr18 million should initially be offset against the revaluation surplus of
Kr16.8 million, and the excess of Kr1.2 million charged in the income statement.
The journal is:
Again there should be no deferred tax implications as the tax base and the carrying amount are the
same.
Investment
The investment is classified as held for trading per IFRS because there is an intention to sell the
shares at the end of the year. Therefore they should be measured at fair value and the gain/loss taken
to the income statement.
At 30 September the increase in fair value is Kr4.8 million, and this is credited to the income
statement.
A deferred tax liability of Kr 960,000 (20% × Kr 4.8m) should be created because the recognition of
the increase in fair value represents a taxable temporary difference.
Dr Cr
Kr million Kr million
DEBIT Intangible asset 2.145
DEBIT Provision 12.855
CREDIT Profit or loss 15
Because the clean-up costs are tax deductible, a deferred tax asset should be created for the
provision at 30 September 20X3.
The provision is Kr2.317 million (Kr2.145m + 0.172m) and so the deferred tax asset is Kr0.463
million.
Dr Cr
Kr million Kr million
DEBIT Deferred tax asset 0.463
CREDIT Profit or loss 0.463
Note: The deferred tax asset can be offset against the deferred tax liability if both are due to the
same tax authority.
Impairment loss: Gemex
The impairment loss in the financial statements of Gemex reduces the carrying value of property,
plant and equipment, but is not allowable for tax. Therefore the tax base of the property, plant and
equipment is different from its carrying value and there is a temporary difference.
Under IAS 36, Impairment of Assets the impairment loss is allocated first to goodwill and then to
other assets:
Property, plant
Goodwill and equipment Total
£m £m £m
Carrying value at 30 September 20X3 1 6.0 7.0
Impairment loss (1) (0.8) (1.8)
– 5.2 5.2
IAS 12 states that no deferred tax should be recognised on goodwill and therefore only the
impairment loss relating to the property, plant and equipment affects the deferred tax position.
The effect of the impairment loss is as follows:
Before After
impairment impairment Difference
£m £m £m
Carrying value 6 5.2
Tax base (4) (4.0)
Temporary difference 2 1.2 0.8
Tax liability (20%) 0.4 0.24 0.16
Therefore the impairment loss reduces the deferred tax liability by £160,000.
1 Torcularis
£nil and £80,000
IAS 12.7 Examples 2 and 3 show that:
• For interest receivables the tax base is nil.
• The tax base for trade receivables is equal to their carrying amount.
2 Situations
(a) Deferred tax liability
‘Development costs’ lead to a deferred tax liability.
(b) Deferred tax asset
(c) No deferred tax implications
‘A penalty payable’ has no deferred tax implications.
3 Budapest
Statements:
(1) True
(2) True
Under IAS 12.19 the excess of an asset’s fair value over its tax base at the time of a business
combination results in a deferred tax liability. As it arises in Lisbon, the tax rate used is 20% and the
liability is £800 ((£12,000 – £8,000) × 20%).
The recognition of a deferred tax liability in relation to the initial recognition of goodwill is specifically
prohibited by IAS 12.15(a).
4 Dipyrone
£25,250
Under IFRS 10, intra-group profits recognised in inventory are eliminated in full and IAS 12 applied to
any temporary differences that result. This profit elimination results in the tax base being higher than
the carrying amount, so deductible temporary differences arise. Deferred tax assets are measured by
reference to the tax rate applying to the entity who currently owns the inventory.
So the deferred tax asset in respect of Dipyrone’s eliminated profit is £14,850 (£600,000 × 25% ×
30% × 33% tax rate) and in respect of Reidfurd’s eliminated profit is £10,400 (£800,000 × 20% × 25%
× 26% tax rate), giving a total of £25,250.
5 Rhenium
£30,000 asset
The year-end accrual is £120,000 (£6m × 8% × 3/12). Because the £120,000 year-end carrying
amount of the accrued interest exceeds its nil tax base, under IAS 12.5 there is a deductible
temporary difference, of £120,000. Under IAS 12.24 a deferred tax asset must be recognised.
The deferred tax asset is the deductible temporary difference multiplied by the tax rate expected to
exist when the tax asset is realised (IAS 12.47). This gives a deferred tax asset of (£120,000 × 25%) =
£30,000.
7 Spruce
£550,000
A deferred tax asset shall be recognised for the carry forward of unused tax losses to the extent that
future taxable profits will be available for offset (IAS 12.34). The loss incurred in the current year is a
one-off, and the company has a history of making profits and expects to do so over the next two
years. So it is likely that there will be future profits to offset.
£500,000 of the loss will be relieved by carry back, leaving £4,200,000 for carry forward. But the carry
forward is limited to the likely future profits, so £2.2 million.
At the 25% tax rate, the deferred tax asset is £550,000.
8 Bananaquit
Statements:
(1) False
(2) False
The deferred tax figure in profit or loss is the difference between the opening and closing deferred
tax liabilities. At the start of the year the liability was £450,000 (£1.5m × 30%). The amount of the
change is £30,000, but it is a deferred tax credit, not charge to profit or loss.
At the end of the year the £2.4 million carrying amount of the assets exceeds their £1.0 million tax
base, so under IAS 12.5 there is a taxable temporary difference, of £1.4 million. Under IAS 12.15 a
deferred tax liability (not asset) of £420,000 (£1.4m × 30%) must be recognised.
9 Antpitta
Statements:
(1) False
(2) True
There is an unrealised profit relating to inventories still held within the group, which must be
eliminated on consolidation (IFRS 10). But the tax base of the inventories is unchanged, so it is higher
than the carrying amount in the consolidated statement of financial position and there is a
deductible temporary difference (IAS 12.5).
10 Parea
Deferred tax liability:
(1) £132
(2) £3,743
(3) £349 credit
At 31 December 20X6 the carrying amount of the plant is £30,000 × (1 – 25%) = £22,500, while the
tax base is £30,000 × (1 – 27%) = £21,900. The taxable temporary difference is £600 and the deferred
tax liability is 22% thereof, £132.
11 XYZ
Liability for deferred tax required by the XYZ Group at 30 November 20X1
1,130 *338.5
Deferred tax liability b/d (given) 280
Deferred tax attributable to subsidiary to goodwill (from above) 4
Deferred tax expense for the year charged to P/L (balance) 54.5
Deferred tax liability c/d (from above) *338.5
Notes
1 As no deduction is available for the cost of goodwill in the subsidiary’s tax jurisdiction, then the
tax base of goodwill is zero. Paragraph 15(a) of IAS 12 states that XYZ Group should not
recognise a deferred tax liability of the temporary difference associated with the goodwill.
Goodwill will be increased by the amount of the deferred tax liability of the subsidiary ie, £4
million.
2 Unrealised group profit eliminated on consolidation is provided for at the receiving company’s
rate of tax (ie, at 25%).
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Users and user focus
2 Accounting ratios and relationships
3 Statements of cash flows and their interpretation
4 Economic events
5 Business issues
6 Accounting choices
7 Ethical issues
8 Industry analysis
9 Non-financial performance measures
10 Limitations of ratios and financial statement analysis
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
23
Learning outcomes
• Analyse and evaluate the performance, position, liquidity, efficiency and solvency of an entity
through the use of ratios and similar forms of analysis including using quantitative and qualitative
data
• Compare the performance and position of different entities allowing for inconsistencies in the
recognition and measurement criteria in the financial statement information provided
• Make adjustments to reported earnings in order to determine underlying earnings and compare
the performance of an entity over time
• Compare and appraise the significance of accruals basis and cash flow reporting
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 9(d), 9(g), 9(h), 9(k)
23
presenting several
ethical dilemmas.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• Different groups of users of financial statements will have different information needs.
• The focus of an investigation of a business will be different for each user group.
Present and potential Make investment decisions, therefore need information on the
investors following:
• Risk and return on investment
• Ability of entity to pay dividends
Lenders Assess whether loans will be repaid, and related interest will be paid,
when due
Suppliers and other Assess the likelihood of being paid when due
trade creditors
Governments and their • Assess allocation of resources and, therefore, activities of entities
agencies • Help with regulating activities
• Assess taxation
• Provide a basis for national statistics
The public Assess trends and recent developments in the entity’s prosperity and its
activities – important where the entity makes a substantial contribution
to a local economy, for example by providing employment and using
local suppliers
An entity’s management also needs to understand and interpret financial information, both as a basis
for making management decisions and also to help in understanding how external users might react
to the information in the financial statements.
1.3.1 Investor
An investor uses financial analysis to determine whether an entity is stable, solvent, liquid, or
profitable enough to be invested in. When looking at a specific company, the financial analyst will
often focus on the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income, the statement of
financial position and the statement of cash flows.
In addition, certain accounting ratios are more relevant to investors than to other users. These are
discussed in section 2.7.
One key area of financial analysis involves extrapolating the company’s past performance into an
estimate of the company’s future performance.
Information needs to be tailored to the user. If information is provided that is not relevant to the
user’s needs, it can obscure the information that is relevant.
• Ratios are commonly classified into different groups according to the focus of the investigation.
• Ratios can help in assessing performance, short-term liquidity, long-term solvency, efficiency and
investor returns.
In approaching financial analysis questions, and interpretation of financial statements in real life, you
will be faced with a great deal of information. It is particularly important to sift out the key information
– for example, a company that is expanding may benefit from analysis of ratios relating to cash flow.
2.2 Performance
2.2.1 Significance
Performance ratios measure the rate of return earned on capital employed, and analyse this into
profit margins and use of assets. These ratios are frequently used as the basis for assessing
management effectiveness in utilising the resources under their control.
Company 1 Company 2
£m £m
Statement of financial position
Equity (A) 80 20
Loans at 10% 20 80
Capital employed (B) 100 100
Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
PBIT (C) 20 20
Loan interest at 10% (2) (8)
Profit before tax 18 12
Tax at 30% (5) (4)
Profit after tax (for owners) (D) 13 8
Solution
ROCE/ROSF
Company 1 Company 2
% %
ROCE (C) as % of (B) 20 20
ROSF (D) as % of (A) 16 40
ROCE is the same, so the companies are equally good in generating profits. But with different capital
structures, ROSF is very different.
If it wished, Company 1 could achieve the same capital structure (and therefore the same ROSF) by
borrowing £60 million and using it to repay shareholders.
It is often easier to change capital structures than to change a company’s ability to generate profits.
Hence the focus on ROCE.
Note that Company 2 has much higher gearing and lower interest cover (these ratios are covered
later in this chapter).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
2.2.3 Commentary
ROCE measures the return achieved by management from assets that they control, before payments
to providers of financing for those assets (lenders and shareholders).
For companies without associates, ROCE can be further subdivided into net profit margin and asset
turnover (use of assets).
(Net profit margin × Net asset turnover) = ROCE
(PBIT ÷ Revenue) × (Revenue ÷ Capital employed) = (PBIT ÷ Capital employed)
(Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SPLOCI), (Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SFP), (Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SFP)
This subdivision is useful when comparing a company’s performance from one period to another.
While ROCE might be identical for the two periods, there might be compensating changes in the two
components; that is, an improvement in margin might be offset by a deterioration in asset utilisation.
The subdivision might be equally useful when comparing the performance of two companies in the
same period.
Although associates’ earnings are omitted, it will probably be worth making this subdivision even for
groups with earnings from associates, unless those earnings are very substantial indeed.
Net profit margin is often seen as a measure of quality of profits. A high profit margin indicates a high
profit on each unit sold. This ratio can be used as a measure of the risk in the business, since a high
margin business may remain profitable after a fall in margin while a low margin business may not.
2.3.3 Commentary
The current ratio is of limited use as some current assets, for example inventories, may not be readily
convertible into cash, other than at a large discount. Hence, this ratio may not indicate whether or not
the company can pay its debts as they fall due.
As the quick ratio omits inventories, this is a better indicator of liquidity but is subject to distortions.
For example, retailers have few trade receivables and use cash from sales quickly, but finance their
inventories from trade payables. Hence, their quick ratios are usually low, but this is in itself no cause
for concern.
Company 1 Company 2
£m £m
Non-current assets 7 18
Inventory 3 3
Trade receivables 4 3
Cash 1 2
15 26
Equity 10 10
Trade payables 3 4
Borrowings 2 12
15 26
Gearing = Net debt ÷ Equity 10% ((2 – 1) ÷ 10) 100% ((12 – 1) ÷ 10)
Both companies have the same equity amount. Company 1 is lower risk, as its borrowings are lower
relative to equity. This is because interest on borrowings and capital repayments of debt must be
paid, with potentially serious repercussions if they are not. Dividend payments on equity instruments
are an optional cash outflow for a business.
(1)
(2)
Interest cover
Profit before interest payable (ie, PBIT + investment income) ÷ Interest payable
(Source: SPLOCI ÷ Source: SPLOCI)
In calculating this ratio, it is standard practice to add back into interest any interest capitalised during
the period.
2.4.3 Commentary
Many different measures of gearing are used in practice, so it is especially important that the ratios
used are defined.
Note that under IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation redeemable preference shares should be
included in liabilities (non-current or current, depending on when they fall due for redemption), while
the dividends on these shares should be included in the finance cost/interest payable.
It is also the case that IAS 32 requires compound financial instruments, such as convertible loans, to
be split into their components for accounting purposes. This process allocates some of such loans to
equity.
Notes
1 Interest on debt capital generally must be paid irrespective of whether profits are earned – this
may cause a liquidity crisis if a company is unable to meet its debt capital obligations.
2 Loan capital is usually secured on assets, most commonly non-current assets – these should be
suitable for the purpose (not fast-depreciating or subject to rapid changes in demand and price).
High gearing usually indicates increased risk for shareholders as, if profits fall, debts will still need to
be financed, leaving much smaller profits available to shareholders. Highly geared businesses are
therefore more exposed to insolvency in an economic downturn. However, returns to shareholders
will grow proportionately more in highly geared businesses where profits are growing.
The gearing ratio is significantly affected by accounting policies adopted, particularly the revaluation
of PPE. An upward revaluation will increase equity and capital employed. Consequently it will reduce
gearing.
Low gearing provides scope to increase borrowings when potentially profitable projects are
available. Low-geared companies will usually be able to borrow more easily and cheaply than
already highly geared companies.
However, gearing can be too low. Equity finance is often more expensive in the long run than debt
finance, because equity is usually seen as being more risky. Therefore an ungeared company may
benefit from adjusting its financing to include some (usually cheaper) debt, thus reducing its overall
cost of capital.
Gearing is also significant to lenders, as they are likely to charge higher interest, and be less willing to
lend, to companies which are already highly geared, due to the increased default risk.
Interest payments are allowable for tax purposes, whereas dividends are not. This is another
attraction of debt.
Interest cover indicates the ability of a company to pay interest out of profits generated. Relatively
low interest cover indicates that a company may have difficulty financing the running costs of its
debts if its profits fall, and also indicates to shareholders that their dividends are at risk, as interest
must be paid first, even if profits fall.
2.5 Efficiency
2.5.1 Significance
Asset turnover and the working capital ratios are important indicators of management’s effectiveness
in running the business efficiently, as for a given level of activity it is most profitable to minimise the
level of overall capital employed and the working capital employed in the business.
(1)
(2)
Judgement is needed in deciding which ratios to calculate and also to understand their implications.
As well as the industry in which the business operates, there are other factors such as the state of the
economy which may make comparisons difficult.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1)
(2)
2.5.3 Commentary
Net asset turnover enables useful comparisons to be made between businesses in terms of the
extent to which they work their assets hard in the generation of revenue.
Inventory turnover, trade receivables collection period and trade payables payment period give an
indication of whether a business is able to generate cash as fast as it uses it. They also provide useful
comparisons between businesses, for example on effectiveness in collecting debts and controlling
inventory levels.
Efficiency ratios are often an indicator of looming liquidity problems or loss of management control.
For example, an increase in the trade receivables collection period may indicate loss of credit
control. Declining inventory turnover may suggest poor buying decisions or misjudgement of the
market. An increasing trade payables payment period suggests that the company may be having
difficulty paying its suppliers; if they withdraw credit, a collapse may be precipitated by the lack of
new supplies.
If an expanding business has a positive working capital cycle, it will need to fund this extra capital
requirement, from retained earnings, an equity issue or increased borrowings. If a business has a
negative working capital cycle, its suppliers are effectively providing funding on an interest-free
basis.
As with all ratios, care is needed in interpreting efficiency ratios. For example, an increasing trade
payables payment period may indicate that the company is making better use of its available credit
facilities by taking trade credit where available. Therefore, efficiency ratios should be considered
together with solvency and cash flow information.
Requirement
Provide an analysis of the plant and equipment of Raport Ltd.
£ £
Non-current assets 2,600
Summarised consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended 31 December 20X1
£ £
Revenue 6,000
Cost of sales (4,000)
Gross profit 2,000
Operating expenses (1,660)
Profit from operations 340
Interest on borrowings (74)
Preference share dividend (10)
(84)
Income from investments 5
Profit before tax 261
Tax (106)
Profit after tax 155
Requirement
Calculate the ratios applicable to Ltd.
Calculations
= ×
(14) Gearing
The ratios examined so far relate to information presented in the statement of financial position and
statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. The statement of cash flows provides
valuable additional information, which facilitates more in-depth analysis of the financial statements.
The importance of the statement of cash flows lies in the fact that businesses fail through lack of cash,
not lack of profits:
(a) A profitable but expanding business is likely to find that its inventories and trade receivables rise
more quickly than its trade payables (which provide interest-free finance). Without adequate
financing for its working capital, such a business may find itself unable to pay its debts as they
fall due.
(b) An unprofitable but contracting business may still generate cash. If, for example, a statement of
profit or loss and other comprehensive income is weighed down with depreciation charges on
non-current assets but the business is not investing in any new non-current assets, capital
expenditure will be less than book depreciation.
IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows therefore requires the provision of information about changes in the
cash and cash equivalents of an entity, as a basis for the assessment of the entity’s ability to generate
cash inflows in the future and its needs to use such cash flows. Cash flow information, when taken
with the rest of the financial statements, helps the assessment of:
• changes in net assets
• financial structure
• ability to affect timing and amount of cash flows
Cash flow information also facilitates comparisons between entities, because it is unaffected by
different accounting policies – to this extent it is often regarded as more objective than accrual-based
information.
Note
Reconciliation of profit before tax to cash generated from operations
£’000
Profit before tax 8,410
Finance cost 340
Amortisation 560
Depreciation 2,640
The profit from operations for 20X6 is £8,750,000 and the capital employed at 31 March 20X6 was
£28,900,000. There were 15 million ordinary shares in issue throughout the year.
Requirement
Calculate the cash flow ratios listed below for 20X6.
Calculation of cash flow ratios
Economic factors can have a pervasive effect on company performance and should be considered
when analysing financial statements.
The economic environment that an entity operates in will have a direct effect on its financial
performance and financial position. The economic environment can influence management’s
strategy but in any event will influence the business performance.
Examples of economic factors that should be considered when analysing financial statements could
include:
(a) State of the economy
If the economy that a company operates in is depressed then it will have an adverse effect on the
ratios of a business. When considering economic events it is important to consider the different
geographical markets that a company operates in. These may provide different rates of growth,
operating margins, future prospects and risks. An obvious current example is the contrast in the
economies of Greece and Germany. Other examples could include emerging markets versus
those in recession. Some businesses are more closely linked to economic activity than others,
especially if they involve discretionary spending, such as holidays, eating out in restaurants and
so on.
(b) Interest rates and foreign exchange rates
Increases in interest rates may have adverse effects on consumer demand particularly if the
company is involved in supplying products that are discretionary purchases or in industries, such
as home improvements, that are sensitive to such movements. Highly geared companies are
most at risk if interest rates increase or if there is an economic downturn; their debt still needs to
be serviced, whereas ungeared companies are less exposed. Changes in foreign exchange rates
will have a direct effect on import and export prices with direct effects on competitiveness.
(c) Government policies
Fiscal policy can have a direct effect on performance. For example, the use of trade quotas and
import taxes can affect the markets in which a company operates. The availability of government
export assistance or a change in levels of public spending can affect the outlook for a company.
(d) Rates of inflation
Inflation can have an effect on the comparability of financial statements year on year. It can be
difficult to isolate changes due to inflationary aspects from genuine changes in performance.
In analysing the effect of these matters on financial statements, the disclosures required by IFRS 8,
Operating Segments are widely regarded as necessary to meet the needs of users.
5 Business issues
Section overview
The nature of the industry in which the company operates and management’s actions have a direct
relationship with business performance, position and cash flow.
The information in financial statements is shaped to a large extent by the nature of the business and
management’s actions in running it. These factors influence trends in the business and cause ratios to
change over time or differ between companies.
Notes
1 The acquisition renders the period-end trade receivables collection period non-comparable with
that for the previous period.
2 The consolidated statement of cash flows will present the trade receivables component in the
working capital adjustments as the amount after the acquired receivables have been added on
to the group’s opening balance.
3 IFRS 3 requires disclosure in respect of each acquisition of the amounts recognised at the
acquisition date for each class of assets and liabilities and the acquiree’s revenue and profit or
loss recognised in consolidated profit or loss for the year. In addition, there should be disclosure
of the consolidated revenue and profit or loss as if the acquisition date for all acquisitions had
been the first day of the accounting period. This allows users to understand the impact of the
acquired entity on the financial performance and financial position as evidenced in the
consolidated financial statements.
In approaching a question like this, it is best to adjust the financial statements of the entity that has
undertaken the acquisition (or disposal) to make the two accounting periods comparable, so that a
meaningful analysis can be carried out.
Heavy Advertising
manufacturing and media
Net asset turnover Revenue ÷ Capital employed 1.05 times 11.8 times
This illustration shows that very different types of business can have markedly different ratios. A heavy
manufacturing company has substantial property, plant and equipment and work in progress and
earns a relatively high margin. An advertising and media company generates a very high ROCE,
mainly because its asset base, as reflected in the financial statements, is small. Most of the ‘assets’ of
such a business are represented by its staff, the value of whom is not recognised in the statement of
financial position.
In analysing the effect of business matters on financial statements, the segment disclosures required
by IFRS 8, Operating Segments provide important information that allows the user to make informed
judgements about the entity’s products and services.
One of the complications in analysing financial statements arises from the way IFRSs are structured:
• IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements sets down the requirements for the format of financial
statements, containing provisions as to their presentation, structure and content; but
• the recognition, measurement and disclosure of specific transactions and events are all dealt with
in other IFRSs.
So preparers of financial statements must consider the possible application of several different IFRSs
when deciding how to present certain business transactions and business events and users must be
aware that details about particular transactions or events may appear in several different parts of the
financial statements.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
6 Accounting choices
Section overview
£’000
Non-current asset at cost 120
Accumulated depreciation (3 × (120,000 ÷ 20)) (18)
102
Situation A
The asset continues to be depreciated as previously at £6,000 per annum, down to a carrying
amount at 31 December 20X6 of £84,000.
On 1 January 20X7, the asset is sold for £127,000, resulting in a profit of £43,000.
Situation B
On 1 January 20X4, the asset is revalued to £136,000, resulting in a gain of £34,000. The total useful
life remains unchanged. Depreciation will therefore be £8,000 per annum; that is, £136,000 divided
by the remaining life of 17 years.
On 1 January 20X7, the asset is sold for £127,000, resulting in a reported profit on disposal of
£15,000.
Requirement
Ignoring the provisions of IFRS 5, Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations,
summarise the impact on reported results and net assets of each of the above situations for the years
20X4 to 20X7 inclusive.
The increasing use of cash flow analysis by users of financial statements is often attributed to the
issues surrounding the inappropriate exercise of judgement in the application of accounting policies.
In certain areas business analysts adjust financial statements to aid comparability to facilitate better
comparison. These adjustments are often termed ‘coping mechanisms’.
7 Ethical issues
Section overview
Ethical issues can arise in the preparation of financial statements. Management may be motivated to
improve the presentation of financial information.
The preparation of financial statements requires a great deal of judgement, honesty and integrity.
Therefore, Chartered Accountants should employ a degree of professional scepticism when
reviewing financial statements and any analysis provided by management.
The financial statements and the associated ratio analysis could be affected by pressure on the
preparers of those financial statements to improve the financial performance, financial position or
both. Managers of organisations may try to improve the appearance of the financial information to:
• increase their level of bonus pay or other reward benefits;
• deliver specific targets such as EPS growth to meet investors’ expectations;
• reduce the risk of corporate insolvency, such as by avoiding a breach of loan covenants;
• avoid regulatory interference, for example where high profit margins are obtained;
• improve the appearance of all or part of the business before an initial public offering or disposal,
so that an enhanced valuation is obtained; and
• understate revenues and overstate expenses to reduce tax liabilities.
Users of financial statements must be wary of the use of devices which improve short-term financial
position and financial performance. Such inappropriate practices can be broadly summarised into
three areas:
(a) Window dressing of the year-end financial position
Examples may include the following:
(1) Agreeing with customers that receivables are paid on shorter terms around year end, so that
the trade receivables collection period is reduced and operating cash flows are enhanced
(2) Modifying the supplier payment cycle by delaying payments normally made in the last
month of the current year until the first month of the following year; this will improve the
cash position
(3) Offering incentives to distributors to buy just before year end rather than just after
£’000
Supplier payments in each of December 20X5 and January 20X6 300
Current assets at 31 December 20X5
Trade receivables 700
Cash 400
1,100
Inventories 500
1,600
Current liabilities at 31 December 20X5 1,000
Requirement
Calculate the current and quick ratios under the following options:
Option 1: Per the budget
Option 2: Per the budget, except that the supplier payments budgeted for December 20X5 are
made in January 20X6
Option 3: Per the budget, except that the supplier payments budgeted for January 20X6 are made in
December 20X5
Changing payment dates
Current Quick
ratio ratio
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Finance managers who are part of the team preparing the financial statements for publication must
be careful to withstand any pressures from their non-finance colleagues to indulge in reporting
practices which dress up short-term performance and position. Financial managers must be
conscious of their obligations under the ethical guidelines of the professional bodies of which they
are members and in extreme cases may find it useful to seek confidential guidance from district
society ethical counsellors and the ICAEW ethics helpline which is maintained for members. For
members of ICAEW, guidance can be found in the Code of Ethics.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Actions to consider
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
8.1 Introduction
Some industries are assessed using specific performance measures that take into consideration their
specific natures. This is often the case with industries that are relatively young and growing rapidly,
for which the traditional finance-based performance criteria do not show the full operational
performance.
Many professional analysts use non-financial performance measures when valuing companies for
merger and acquisition (M&A) purposes. The M&A industry uses sophisticated tools that combine a
variety of figures, both financial and non-financial in nature, when advising clients on the appropriate
price to pay for a company.
Hospital Speed at attending to patients, success rates for certain types of operation,
length of waiting lists
School Exam pass rates, attendance records of pupils, average class sizes
Financial statement analysis is based on the information in financial statements so ratio analysis is
subject to the same limitations as the financial statements themselves.
(a) Ratios are not definitive measures. They provide clues to the financial statement analysis but
qualitative information is invariably required to prepare an informed analysis.
(b) Ratios calculated on the basis of published, and therefore incomplete, data are of limited use.
This limitation is particularly acute for those ratios which link statement of financial position and
income statement figures. A period-end statement of financial position may well not be at all
representative of the average financial position of the business throughout the period covered
by the income statement.
(c) Ratios use historical data, which may not be predictive, as it ignores future actions by
management and changes in the business environment.
(d) Ratios may be distorted by differences in accounting policies between entities and over time.
(e) Ratios are based on figures from the financial statements. If there is financial information that is
not captured within the financial statements (such as changes to the company reputation), then
this will be ignored.
(f) Comparisons between different types of business are difficult because of differing resource
structures and market characteristics. However, it may be possible to make indirect comparisons
between businesses in different sectors, by comparing each to its own sector averages.
(g) Window dressing and creative practices can have an adverse effect on the conclusions drawn
from the interpretation of financial information.
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Wild Swan Individual ratio calculation practice was provided within the chapter, so
the first self-test question has a full set of financial statements for you to
interpret. Comments are as important as calculations.
Brass Another comprehensive question, this time with notes to the financial
statements and prior year ratios calculated
Trendsetters This question requires calculations of cash flow ratios and interpretation of
a statement of cash flows.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted the self-test questions, you can continue your studies by moving onto the
next chapter. In later chapters, we will recommend questions from the Question Bank for you to
attempt.
1 Wild Swan
The following extracts have been taken from the financial statements of Wild Swan Ltd, a
manufacturing company.
Statements of financial position as at 31 December
20X3 20X2
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 4,465 2,819
Current assets
Inventories 1,172 1,002
Trade and other receivables 2,261 1,657
Cash and cash equivalents 386 3
3,819 2,662
Total assets 8,284 5,481
Equity and liabilities
Ordinary share capital 522 354
Preference share capital (irredeemable –
8%) 150 150
Revaluation surplus 1,857 –
Retained earnings 2,084 2,094
Equity 4,613 2,598
Non-current liabilities
Borrowings 105 –
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 1,941 1,638
Taxation 183 62
Bank overdraft 1,442 1,183
3,566 2,883
Total equity and liabilities 8,284 5,481
20X3 20X2
£’000 £’000
Revenue 24,267 21,958
Cost of sales (20,935) (19,262)
Gross profit 3,332 2,696
Net operating expenses (2,604) (2,027)
Profit from operations 728 669
Net finance cost payable (67) (56)
Profit before tax 661 613
Taxation (203) (163)
Profit for the year 458 450
Other comprehensive income for the year
Revaluation of property, plant and equipment 1,857 –
Total comprehensive income for the year 2,315 450
Statements of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December (total columns)
20X3 20X2
£’000 £’000
Balance brought forward 2,598 2,400
Total comprehensive income for the year 2,315 450
Issue of ordinary shares 168 –
Final dividends on ordinary shares (300) (180)
Interim dividends on ordinary shares (156) (60)
Dividends on irredeemable preference shares (12) (12)
Balance carried forward 4,613 2,598
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations 1,208
Interest paid (67)
Tax paid (82)
Net cash from operating activities 1,059
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchases of non-current assets (1,410)
Proceeds on sale of property, plant and equipment 670
Net cash used in investing activities (740)
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid (468)
£’000
Profit before tax 661
Depreciation charge 965
Profit on disposal of property, plant and equipment (14)
Finance cost 67
Increase in inventories (170)
Increase in trade and other receivables (604)
Increase in trade and other payables 303
Cash generated from operations 1,208
Key ratios
20X3 20X2
Gross profit percentage 13.7% 12.3%
Net margin 3.0% 3.0%
Net asset turnover 4.2 times 5.8 times
Trade receivables collection period 34 days 28 days
Interest cover 10.9 11.9
Current ratio 1.1 0.9
Quick ratio 0.7 0.6
Requirements
1.1 Calculate return on capital employed and gearing (net debt/equity) for both years.
1.2 Comment on the financial performance and position and on the statement of cash flows of
Wild Swan Ltd in the light of the above information.
Revaluation Retained
surplus earnings
Attributable to the owners of Reapson plc £m £m
Balance brought forward – 800.00
Total comprehensive income for the year 350.00 222.90
Transfer between reserves (17.50) 17.50
Dividends on ordinary shares – (81.75)
Balance carried forward 332.50 958.65
As well as revaluing property, plant and equipment during the year (incurring significant additional
depreciation charges) Reapson plc incurred £40 million of costs relating to the closure of a division.
Reapson plc has £272.5 million of 50p ordinary shares in issue. The market price per share is 586p.
Requirement
(2) Earnings per share = Profit before ordinary dividends ÷ No. of = 222.9 ÷ = 40.9p
ordinary shares in issue 545
(4) Dividend yield = Dividend per share ÷ Current market price = 15 ÷ 586 = 2.6%
per share
(5) Price/earnings ratio = Current market price per share ÷ EPS = 586 ÷ 40.9 = 14.3
Explain the above statistics from a financial journal referring to Reapson plc and relate them to the
above information.
3 Verona
Verona plc is a parent company. The Verona plc group includes two manufacturers of kitchen
appliances. One of these companies, Nice Ltd, serves the North of England and Scotland. The other
company, Sienna Ltd, serves the Midlands, Wales and Southern England. Each of the two companies
manufactures an identical range of products.
Verona plc has a quarterly reporting system. Each group member is required to submit an
abbreviated set of financial statements to head office. This must be accompanied by a set of ratios
specified by the board of Verona plc. All manufacturing companies, including Nice Ltd and Sienna
Ltd, are required to calculate the following ratios for each quarter:
• Return on capital employed
• Trade receivables collection period
• Trade payables payment period
• Inventory turnover (based on average inventories)
The financial statements for the three months (that is, 89 days) ended 30 April 20X3, submitted to the
parent company, were as shown below.
Statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the quarter ended
The managing director of Nice Ltd feels that it is unfair to compare the two companies on the basis
of the figures shown above, even though they have been calculated in accordance with the group’s
standardised accounting policies. The reasons he puts forward are as follows.
• Verona plc is in the process of revaluing all land and buildings belonging to group members.
Nice Ltd’s properties were revalued up by £700,000 on 1 February 20X3 and this revaluation was
incorporated into the company’s financial statements. The valuers have not yet visited Sienna Ltd
and that company’s property is carried at cost less depreciation.
The Verona group depreciates property on a quarterly basis, calculated at a rate of 4% per
annum.
• Nice Ltd’s new production line costing £600,000 became available for use during the final week
of the period under review. The cost of purchase was borrowed from a bank and is included in the
figures for non-current borrowings.
The managing director of Nice Ltd believes the effect of the purchase of this machine should be
removed, as it happened so close to the period end.
The Verona group depreciates machinery at a rate of 25% of cost per annum.
• Nice Ltd supplied the Verona group’s hotel division with goods to the value of £300,000 in
October 20X2. This amount is still outstanding and has been included in Nice Ltd’s trade
receivables figure. Nice Ltd has been told that this balance will not be paid until the hotel division
has sufficient liquid funds.
• Nice Ltd purchased £400,000 of its materials, at normal trade prices, from a fellow member of the
Verona group. This supplier had liquidity problems and the group’s corporate treasurer ordered
Nice Ltd to pay for the goods as soon as they were delivered.
Requirements
3.1 Calculate the ratios required by the Verona group for both Nice Ltd and Sienna Ltd for the
quarter, using the figures in the financial statements submitted to the holding company.
3.2 Explain briefly which company’s ratio appears the stronger in each case.
3.3 Explain how the information in the notes above has affected Nice Ltd’s return on capital
employed, trade receivables collection period and trade payables payment period.
3.4 Explain how the calculation of the ratios should be adjusted to provide a fairer basis for
comparing Nice Ltd with Sienna Ltd.
4 Brass Ltd
You are the financial accountant of Brass Ltd, a company which operates a brewery and also owns
and operates a chain of hotels and public houses. Your managing director has obtained a copy of the
latest financial statements of Alliance Breweries Ltd, a competitor, and has gained the impression
that, although the two companies are of a similar overall size, Alliance’s performance is rather better
than that of Brass Ltd.
Notes
1 Intangible assets – Alliance Breweries Ltd. Intangible assets include brand names and trademarks
purchased from Odlingtons Breweries Ltd in 20X0, which are being amortised over their useful
lives.
2
3 The company’s freehold land and buildings were revalued during 20X0 by the directors (see
tables below).
4
Alliance Breweries
Brass Ltd Ltd
£’000 £’000
Trade payables 23,919 7,875
Taxation 5,561 10,235
Bank overdraft – 150
29,480 18,260
Freehold
land and Motor Plant and
buildings vehicles machinery Total
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Cost or valuation 1 January 20X2 113,712 655 3,397 117,764
Additions 3,150 125 523 3,798
Cost or valuation 31 December 20X2 116,862 780 3,920 121,562
Provision for depreciation 1 January 20X2 (43,239) (272) (2,548) (46,059)
Charge for year (3,506) (156) (588) (4,250)
Provision for depreciation 31 December
20X2 (46,745) (428) (3,136) (50,309)
Freehold
hotels and
Freehold public Motor Plant and
brewery houses vehicles machinery Total
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Cost 1 January 20X2 5,278 80,251 874 5,612 92,015
Additions – 8,920 79 489 9,488
Cost 31 December 20X2 5,278 89,171 953 6,101 101,503
Provision for depreciation
1 January 20X2 (2,771) (23,291) (477) (3,838) (30,377)
Charge for year (96) (490) (238) (732) (1,556)
Provision for depreciation
31 December 20X2 (2,867) (23,781) (715) (4,570) (31,933)
Carrying amount
31 December 20X2 2,411 65,390 238 1,531 69,570
Accounting policies
Brass Ltd – Depreciation
Depreciation is provided by the company to recognise in profit or loss the cost of property, plant and
equipment on a straight-line basis over the anticipated life of the assets as follows.
%
Freehold buildings 4
Motor vehicles 20
Plant and equipment 10-33
%
Motor vehicles 25
Plant and equipment 10-25
Freehold land Nil
Freehold buildings 1
The following ratios have been calculated for Brass Ltd for the year ended 31 December 20X2.
(1) ROCE = Profit before interest and tax ÷ Capital employed = 19,245 ÷ (62,028 + 20,000 – 5,102)
= 25%
(2) Asset turnover = Revenue ÷ Capital employed = 157,930 ÷ (62,028 + 20,000 – 5,102) = 2.05
(3) Net profit margin = Profit before interest and tax ÷ Revenue = 19,245 ÷ 157,930 = 12.2%
(4) Gross profit percentage = Gross profit ÷ Revenue = 100,530 ÷ 157,930 = 63.7%
(5) Current ratio = Current assets ÷ Current liabilities = 40,255 ÷ 29,480 = 1.37
(6) Quick ratio = (Current assets – Inventories) ÷ Current liabilities = 33,135 ÷ 29,480 = 1.12
5 Caithness plc
Caithness plc, a parent company, requires sets of management information, including key ratios,
from all its subsidiaries. The most recent sets of information for two of its subsidiaries, Sutherland Ltd
and Argyll Ltd, two manufacturing companies, show the following.
Sutherland
Ltd Argyll Ltd
Return on capital employed (ROCE) 5% 13%
Gross profit percentage 30% 35%
Net margin 13% 10%
Current ratio 2.5:1 3:1
Quick ratio 1.8:1 2.7:1
Trade receivables collection period 60 days 45 days
Trade payables payment period 40 days 50 days
Inventory turnover 60 days 20 days
Gearing (debt/equity) 55% 100%
Interest cover 4 times 2 times
Cash return on capital employed (cash ROCE) 7% 8%
Additional information:
(1) Each company is treated as a mainly autonomous unit, although they share an accounting
function and Caithness plc does determine the dividend policy of the two subsidiaries.
Companies in the group must use the same accounting policies.
(2) It is group policy to record all assets at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment
losses. However, Sutherland Ltd has revalued its freehold property and included the results in
the recent management information above.
(3) Argyll Ltd has recently leased a specialised item of plant and machinery. In the management
information above the lease rentals have been recognised as an expense in profit or loss, but the
managing director has been told by the financial controller that this is not permitted under IFRS
16, Leases, and the group directors are aware that the year-end published financial statements
will need to reflect the correct treatment.
(4) Sutherland Ltd and Argyll Ltd trade with other companies in the group. At the instigation of
Argyll Ltd, Sutherland Ltd has supplied one of the other companies in the group with goods with
a selling price of £200,000. These are no longer in group inventories but Sutherland Ltd has
been told that the goods will not be paid for until the liquidity problems of the other company
are resolved.
Requirements
5.1 Comment on the relative financial performance and position of Sutherland Ltd and Argyll Ltd
from the above information.
6 Trendsetters Ltd
Trendsetters Ltd is a long-established chain of provincial fashion boutiques, offering mid‑price
clothing to a target customer base of late teens/early twenties. However, over the past eighteen
months, the company appears to have lost its knack of spotting which trends from the catwalk shows
will succeed on the high street. As a result, the company has had to close a number of its stores just
before its year end of 31 December 20X2.
You have been provided with the following information for the years ended 31 December 20X1 and
20X2.
Statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December
20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash generated from operations 869 882
Interest paid (165) (102)
Tax paid (13) (49)
Net cash from operating activities 691 731
Cash flows from investing activities
Dividends received – 55
Proceeds from sales of investments 32 –
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment 1,609 12
Net cash from investing activities 1,641 67
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid – (110)
Borrowings taken out 500 100
Net cash from/(used in) financing activities 500 (10)
Net change in cash and cash equivalents 2,832 788
Cash and cash equivalents brought forward 910 122
Cash and cash equivalents carried forward 3,742 910
20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Profit before tax 2,293 162
Investment income – (55)
Extracts from the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of
financial position for the same period were as follows.
20X2 20X1
£’000 £’000
Revenue 2,201 3,102
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary share capital 100 100
Retained earnings 7,052 4,772
7,152 4,872
Long-term liabilities
Borrowings 1,500 1,000
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 1,056 329
9,708 6,201
Requirements
6.1 Comment on the above information, calculating three cash flow ratios to help you in your
analysis.
6.2 You have now learnt that the financial controller of Trendsetters Ltd has been put under severe
pressure by his operational directors to improve the figures for the current year.
Discuss how this pressure might have influenced both the above information and other areas
of the financial statements, and suggest what actions the financial controller should consider in
responding to these pressures.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
(5) Upward revaluations of non-current assets, which increase capital employed, increase
depreciation charges and reduce ROCE/ROSF
(1) Change in the amount of sales – investigate whether due to price or volume changes
(1) Upward revaluations of non-current assets increase shareholders’ funds and decrease
gearing.
(1) High inventory turnover rate – may be efficient but the risk of running out of inventory is
increased
(2) Low inventory turnover rate – inefficient use of resources and potential obsolescence
problems
Remember: the inventory turnover rate can be affected by seasonality. The year-end inventory
position may not reflect the average level of inventory.
(2) Change in nature of customer base (new customer is big but is a slow payer)
Remember: the year-end receivables may not be representative of the average over the year.
Remember: the year-end payables may not be representative of the average over the year.
(Profit before interest and tax ÷ Capital employed) × = (340 ÷ (1,800 + 1,600 + 50 – 60)) × 100 =
100 10%
Profit attributable to owners of a parent company ÷ = (140 ÷ (1,800 – 150)) × 100 = 8.5%
(Equity – non-controlling interest)
(Profit before interest and tax ÷ Revenue) × 100 = (340 ÷ 6,000) × 100 = 5.7%
Current assets less inventories ÷ Current liabilities = ((1,600 – 600) ÷ 800) = 1.25 times
(14) Gearing
12,990
(Cash return (from above) ÷ Capital employed) × = (12,990 ÷ 28,900) × 100 = 44.9%
100
(Cash generated from operations ÷ Profit from = (12,970 ÷ 8,750) × 100 = 148%
operations) × 100
Cash flow for ordinary shareholders ÷ Number of = (12,990 – 360 – 4,510) ÷ 15,000 = 54p
ordinary shares per share
Cash flow for ordinary shareholders ÷ Equity = (12,990 – 360 – 4,510) ÷ 4,500 = 1.8
dividends paid times
(1) IAS 7’s requirements as to disclosure within investing activities of the cash flows resulting
from disposals
(2) IAS 10’s requirements as to events occurring after the end of the reporting period,
whether they are adjusting events (that is, confirmation of the carrying amounts of
assets/liabilities) or non-adjusting events (for example, the disclosure of a decision to
restructure)
(3) IFRS 8’s requirements as to segment reporting – a disposal could well affect the segments
which are reportable
(4) IFRS 5’s requirements – a decision to restructure a major part of the business is likely to
lead to disclosures of both discontinued operations in the statement of profit or loss and
other comprehensive income and non-current assets held for sale in the statement of
financial position
(5) IAS 36’s requirements as to impairment of assets – impairment will almost certainly result
from a restructuring decision
(6) IAS 37’s requirements as to provisions – liabilities which previously were only contingent
may well now require recognition and provisions for restructuring costs may need to be
recognised
Summary
Situation A Situation B
No revaluation Revaluation
£’000 £’000
Aggregate impact on earnings (20X4 to 20X7) 25 (9)
Current Quick
ratio ratio
Option 1 (1,600 ÷ 1,000) and (1,100 ÷ 1,000) 1.60:1 1.10:1
((1,600 + 300) ÷ (1,000 + 300)) and ((1,100 + 300) ÷ (1,000 +
Option 2 300)) 1.46:1 1.08:1
Option 3 ((1,600 – 300) ÷ (1,000 – 300)) and ((1,100 – 300) ÷ (1,000 – 300)) 1.86:1 1.14:1
(1) The new Managing Director (MD) is motivated to try to maximise the post-acquisition
earnings from the target company. This will help to increase EPS and the acquisition may
be perceived as more successful
(2) If asset carrying amounts are reduced at the date of acquisition, then goodwill will be
increased by the same amount. Goodwill is not amortised and, assuming no impairment
occurs in the immediate post-acquisition period, the effect on earnings from increasing
goodwill will be nil
(3) By reducing the asset carrying amounts, the depreciation and amortisation expense
related to non-current assets will be reduced in the post-acquisition period, as will
inventory amounts charged to cost of sales. If asset carrying amounts were increased, the
opposite would occur and post-acquisition earnings would be adversely affected
(4) Accounting standards such as IFRS 3 and IFRS 13 are clear in the determination and
treatment of the fair values of the acquired assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities.
However, judgement is still required in determining fair values. It is essential that an
unbiased approach be used in applying the judgement necessary. IFRS 13 has eliminated
some of the subjectivity (see Chapters 2 and 20)
Actions to consider
(1) The MD should be made aware of the issues involved, including the potential professional
and legal issues. The requirements of the relevant accounting standards should be
explained to her.
(2) It may be appropriate to discuss and explain the situation to other members of the board
of directors and to seek their opinions. They may be able to add support.
(3) If the MD continues to try to dominate and exert influence on the contents of the report,
then it would be appropriate to consult the ICAEW ethical handbook, the local district
society support member and/or the confidential ethics helpline
(4) The approach of the MD may raise concerns about her ethical approach to business in
areas other than financial reporting. It is important to remain alert to other potential areas
of inappropriate practice. Ultimately the domineering approach of the MD may lead to the
conclusion that alternative employment should be sought.
1 Wild Swan
1.1 Capital employed and gearing
ROCE = Profit before 728 ÷ (4,613 + 105 + 1,442 – 669 ÷ (2,598 + 1,183 – 3) =
interest and tax ÷ Capital 386) = 12.6% 17.7%
employed
Gearing = Net debt ÷ (105 + 1,442 – 386) ÷ 4,613 = (1,183 – 3) ÷ 2,598 = 45.4%
Equity 25.2%
2 Reapson
Explanation:
(1) Dividend – 15p per share
This should be the cash amount of total dividends paid per share (in pence) in the most recent
financial year. It ties in with the information provided, as it is the total dividend per the statement
of changes in equity divided by the number of shares in issue, that is:
£81.75m ÷ (2 × 272.5m) = 15p per share
This is the absolute amount of the per share dividend paid out by the company. To be of any real
meaning, it should be related to some other amount – see below.
(2) Earnings per share
This is the measure of the amount earned by the company on behalf of each ordinary share. Its
amount is not influenced by the dividend distribution policy of the company, being a measure of
earning capacity.
(3) Dividend cover
This gives an indication of the security of the dividend flow from the company, measured by
reference to its current year profits. (In practice a company can cover dividends out of retained
earnings.) If dividend cover is high, then the company is likely to be able to maintain the level of
dividend payments even if earnings fall.
Dividend cover is calculated as earnings per share divided by net dividends per share. The
impact of the exceptional closure costs (£40 million) and the increase in depreciation resulting
3 Verona
3.1 Ratios using figures from the financial statements
(Profit before interest and tax ((149 + 10) ÷ (4,494 + 800 – ((609 + 5) ÷ (3,788 + 130)) ×
÷ Capital employed) × 100 71)) × 100 = 3% 100 = 16%
Inventory turnover
4 Brass Ltd
4.1 Report as follows:
4.2 Adjustments required to the financial statements of the two companies for a more relevant
comparison of their relative performance
(1) Depreciation of freehold buildings
The freehold buildings of Alliance Breweries Ltd are being depreciated over 100 years as
opposed to our 25 years. This has a significant impact on the depreciation charge and
therefore on profit. We should review our depreciation policy for buildings.
(2) Revaluation of land and buildings
Either eliminate the revaluation and associated depreciation from the Brass Ltd accounts,
or revalue the land and buildings of Alliance Breweries on a similar basis. Either
adjustment would have the effect of improving the ROCE of Brass Ltd relative to that of
Alliance.
(3) Intangibles
Write off the intangibles and associated amortisation from the accounts of Alliance. This
would have the effect of reducing the ROCE of Alliance.
The net effect of the three adjustments would be to improve the ROCE of Brass Ltd
relative to that of Alliance Breweries Ltd.
Appendix – Ratio analysis for Alliance Breweries Ltd
(1) ROCE = Profit before interest and tax ÷ Capital employed = 35,123 ÷ (82,080 + 150) =
42.7%
(2) Asset turnover = Revenue ÷ Capital employed = 143,100 ÷ (82,080 + 150) = 1.74
(3) Net profit margin = Profit before interest and tax ÷ Revenue = 35,123 ÷ 143,100 = 24.5%
(4) Gross profit percentage = Gross profit ÷ Revenue = 86,600 ÷ 143,100 = 60.5%
(5) Current ratio = Current assets ÷ Current liabilities = 26,840 ÷ 18,260 = 1.47
(6) Quick ratio = Current assets ÷ Current liabilities = 22,738 ÷ 18,260 = 1.25
(7) Trade receivables collection period = Trade receivables ÷ Revenue = (22,738 ÷ 143,100)
× 365 = 58 days
(8) Inventory turnover = Cost of sales ÷ Inventory = 56,500 ÷ 4,102 = 13.8
5 Caithness plc
5.1 Commentary on relative financial performance and position
Manufacturing companies tend to have a lower return on their capital employed (ROCE) than
non-manufacturing, due to their higher capital base.
However, Sutherland Ltd’s ROCE is significantly lower than that of Argyll Ltd. The revaluation of
Sutherland Ltd’s freehold property will be a factor if it resulted in an uplift of asset values. This
would:
• increase the depreciation charge and reduce the return; and
• increase capital employed.
6 Trendsetters Ltd
6.1 Cash flow ratios
20X2 20X1
Cash ROCE
(Cash return ÷ Capital employed) × 869 ÷ (7,152 + 1,500 – (882 + 55) ÷ (4,872 +
100 3,742) 1,000 – 910)
(Cash from operations ÷ Profit from 869 ÷ (2,293 + 165) 882 ÷ (162 + 102 – 55)
operations) × 100
= 35.4% = 422%
Cash return ÷ Interest paid 869 ÷ 165 = 5.3 times (882 + 55) ÷ 102 = 9.2
times
Commentary
• The slight fall in the cash ROCE from 18.9% to 17.7% shows that the company’s efficiency is
falling. This is confirmed by a more dramatic fall in the net asset turnover from 0.63
(3,102/(4,872 + 1,000 – 910)) to 0.45 (2,201/(7,152 + 1,500 – 3,742)).
• Although on the face of it the company has made a much higher profit before tax in 20X2
(£2,293,000) compared with 20X1 (£162,000), this 20X2 profit before tax includes a one-off
£1,502,000 profit on disposal of PPE.
• This is further illustrated by the decline in the ratio of cash from operations to profit from
operations, which has fallen from 422% to 35.4%. The quality of Trendsetters Ltd’s profits is
clearly falling.
• Cash interest cover has fallen from 9.2 to 5.3. This is partly because the cash return has
fallen slightly (from £937,000 to £869,000) but mainly because of the increase in interest
paid from £102,000 in 20X1 to £165,000 in 20X2.
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Objectives and scope of financial analysis
2 Business strategy analysis
3 Accounting analysis
4 Accounting distortions
5 Improving the quality of financial information
6 Financial ratios interpretation
7 Forecasting performance
8 Data and analysis
9 Management commentary
10 Summary
11 Audit focus on fraud
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
24
Learning outcomes
• Comment on and critically appraise the nature and validity of items included in published
financial statements including how these correlate with an understanding of the entity
• Comment on and critically appraise the nature and validity of information disclosed in annual
reports, including integrated reporting and other voluntary disclosures including those relating to
natural capital
• Appraise the limitations of financial analysis
• Analyse and evaluate the performance, position, liquidity, efficiency and solvency of an entity
through the use of ratios and similar forms of analysis including using quantitative and qualitative
data
• Interpret the potentially complex economic environment in which an entity operates and its
strategy based upon financial and operational information contained within the annual report (for
example: financial and business reviews; reports on operations by management, corporate
governance disclosures, financial summaries and highlights and an understanding of the entity)
• Appraise the significance of inconsistencies and omissions in reported information in evaluating
performance
• Compare the performance and position of different entities allowing for inconsistencies in the
recognition and measurement criteria in the financial statement information provided
• Make adjustments to reported earnings in order to determine underlying earnings and compare
the performance of an entity over time
• Analyse and evaluate business risks and assess their implications for corporate reporting
• Analyse and evaluate financial risks (for example financing, currency and interest rate risks) and
assess their implications for corporate reporting
• Compare and appraise the significance of accruals basis and cash flow reporting
• Determine analytical procedures, where appropriate, at the planning stage using technical
knowledge of corporate reporting, data analytics and skills of financial statement analysis
• Design and determine audit procedures in a range of circumstances and scenarios, for example
identifying an appropriate mix of tests of controls, analytical procedures and tests of details
• Review and evaluate, quantitatively and qualitatively, for example using analytical procedures and
data analytics and artificial intelligence, the results and conclusions obtained from audit
procedures
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 9(a)–9(k), 11(f), 14(d), 15(c)
24
information as a
basis for financial
analysis,
performance
evaluation and
decision making.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
Financial analysis is the process through which the stakeholders of a company, such as shareholders,
debt holders, government and employees, are able to assess the historical performance of the
company and form a view about its future prospects and value.
This section analyses the business strategy of a firm by looking at the industry in which the firm
operates, the competitive positioning of the company and the organisational structure and wealth
creation potential.
3 Accounting analysis
Section overview
This section analyses the sources of financial information that are needed for the financial analysis of
a company and the steps that need to be taken in order to identify potential problems and resolve
them.
This section discusses the most common distortions in the accounting information contained in the
financial statements.
In the previous section we discussed the potential for distortion of accounting information. In this
section we discuss the most common distortions and how these may arise.
4.1.7 Allowances
Management may sometimes find it to its advantage to underestimate the expected default loss from
receivables and thus to underestimate allowances and overstate earnings and assets.
4.2.1 Provisions
A firm that expects a future outflow of cash due to a contractual obligation but whose exact amount
is not known will need to make a provision for such a liability. Firms, however, have the discretion to
estimate these future liabilities and the possibility to understate them on their statement of financial
position.
This section suggests ways of undoing the accounting distortions in the financial statements, and
produces a measure of sustainable earnings. The possibility of using cash flow data instead of
earnings is also discussed.
(Source: British Airways (2008) Group consolidated income statement. [Online]. Available from:
https://www.britishairways.com/cms/global/microsites/ba_reports/fin_statements/fs_income.html
[Accessed 1 October 2019])
Provisions
Assess probability of provision crystallising, and consider including expected values based on
probabilities.
Contingent liabilities
Consider recognition on the basis of expected values based on possibility of occurrence of certain
events.
5.5 Adjustments in the statement of profit or loss (and other comprehensive income)
In the same way that reported statement of financial position items need to be restated into a
standardised format that reflects their fair value, income and expense items need to be adjusted on a
similar basis to improve the quality of earnings. The main adjustments needed are as follows:
(a) The removal of ‘non-operating items’ from reported income, in order to provide a better
measure of operating earnings that are driven by sales to make more valid like for like inter-
period comparisons, and to highlight sales margins on a consistent basis.
(b) The removal of non-recurring elements of operating earnings, in order to gain a measure of
sustainable earnings. This provides better profit forecasts and improved valuations. The most
common non-recurring elements are:
– exceptional items
– discontinued operations
– acquisitions
– elements recognised as other operating income
(c) The adjustment of costs and revenues to a fair value basis, so that they better reflect the fair
value of resources consumed and earned in the period. Frequently, this is the other side of the
coin to the statement of financial position adjustments highlighted above, but this can also
involve correcting for aggressive earnings management.
The above distinctions are not always clear, and different judgements may be formed as to what
‘normal’ earnings are, and what might be termed ‘noise’. Moreover, even where there is agreement
as to a transaction having a non-recurring element, there is not always sufficient disclosed
information in order to make adjustments with any precision. In such cases, estimates would need to
be made on the basis of Keynes’s dictum that it is better to be roughly right, than precisely wrong!
It might be worth noting, however, that in normal operating contexts, historical cost measures have
been shown by empirical evidence to be both good predictors of current performance and
significant valuation tools.
Exceptional items
As exceptional items would not normally recur, they would not form part of future earnings, and thus
should be removed. However, while any one type is unusual, exceptional items are generally very
common, and are likely to recur in some form in years to come. Indeed, it might be said that the only
exceptional thing about such costs is that it is extraordinary for companies not to have them. Care,
therefore, needs to be exercised in judging whether an item disclosed separately is, in fact, unlikely
to recur.
It is also important not always to accept the judgement of management as to what is exceptional and
what is part of normal recurring activities. One view is that exceptional costs are more likely to be
separately disclosed by management than exceptional income.
Solution
1 The issue here was not one of revenue recognition. The gain was appropriately recognised in the
year. The issues were disclosure and classification. With adequate disclosure, the one-off gain of
$17.2 million could have been identified by analysts as a non-recurring item and thus excluded
from sustainable profit.
2 Forecasts of future profit based on current earnings would have been much lower as sustainable
earnings forecasts would have been lower. As a result, any valuation of the company derived from
the initially disclosed basis was overstated, resulting temporarily in an excessive share price.
The Trump case therefore highlights how important it is for forecasting and valuation to separate
permanent from transitory earnings and the need for adequate disclosures to be made.
The Trump Case is extreme, but more recent examples show such distortions are still taking place. In
2013, Standard & Poor produced a report titled How Exceptional Accounting Items Can Create
Misleading Earnings Metrics, in which the author Sam C Holland argues:
“The separation of exceptional or special items that companies consider are one-off or non‑recurring
in nature can lead financial statement users to focus on companies’ subjective, adjusted profit
measures, rather than on the unadjusted figures that the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) mandates companies to disclose.
[…]
The reported amount of revenues and other income items of profit-making companies exceeds the
reported amount of debits or costs. Therefore there is no prima facie reason why one would expect
exceptional costs to have a higher reported value than exceptional credit items. However, in order to
show the adjusted operating performance in the most flattering light, companies may identify the
exceptional items that hindered business performance rather than those that helped.”
The report argues that these companies’ adjusted operating profits often exclude costs related to
restructuring, for example impairment of goodwill, that are in fact recurring.
Discontinued operations
A discontinued operation is a component of a company which, according to IFRS 5:
• Has been disposed of in the current period; or
• Is classified as held-for-sale, where there would normally be a co-ordinated plan for disposal in
the following period
The component might, for example, be a major line of business, operations in a particular
geographical area, or a subsidiary.
The profit or loss after tax from discontinued operations is disclosed as a single figure on the face of
the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income or statement of profit or loss. An
analysis should be disclosed (normally in the notes to the financial statements) to show the revenue,
expenses, pre-tax profit or loss, related income tax expense, and the profit or loss on asset disposals.
These items will not form part of sustainable future earnings, and should be removed when
forecasting future performance.
Note: The above items are stated after standardisation adjustments to individual costs and revenues.
5.7 Statement of profit or loss (and other comprehensive income) adjustments for
comparison
The items adjusted above are primarily concerned with determining a comparable trend in
operating earnings over time for one company. A key part of financial analysis is also comparing the
performance of companies in the same industry.
This section discusses issues of interpretation of ratios, including those based on cash flow data.
Ratio analysis is the most potent tool of financial analysis. Ratios reduce the dimensionality of the
information provided in the financial statements by summarising important information in relative
terms. Ratios are based primarily on financial information from the financial statements which, as we
have already discussed, can be manipulated by the management of a company. Attention should
therefore be paid to the accounting quantities that determine the financial ratios.
6.2.1 EBITDA
Earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation (EBITDA) is perhaps the most
commonly quoted figure that attempts to bridge the profit–cash gap. It is a proxy for operating cash
flows, although it is not the same. It takes operating profit and strips out depreciation, amortisation
and (normally) any separately disclosed items such as exceptional items.
EBITDA is not a cash flow ratio as such, but it is a widely used, and sometimes misused,
approximation. Particular reservations include the following:
(a) EBITDA is not a cash flow measure and, while it excludes certain subjective accounting practices,
it is still subject to accounting manipulation in a way that cash flows would not be. Examples
would be revenue recognition practice and items that have some unusual aspects but are not
disclosed separately and, therefore, not added back.
(b) EBITDA is not a sustainable figure, as there is no charge for capital replacement such as
depreciation in traditional profit measures or capital expenditure (CAPEX) as in free cash flow.
This section presents a number of methodologies for forecasting the future performance of a
company and discusses the various issues involved, such as aggregate versus disaggregated
forecasts and the forecasting of the effects of discrete events such as mergers and acquisitions.
Once the data from the financial statements of the company have been adjusted and through the
analysis of the firm’s business strategy the drivers of sustainable earnings have been identified, then
the future performance may be predicted taking into account the future macroeconomic and
industry conditions.
Requirement
If industry sales are expected to grow by 20% in 20X7, what is a reasonable forecast for the GeroCare
sales in 20X7?
Investment which Asset held for accretion of As for single company accounts (per IFRS
is none of the wealth 9)
above
IAS 28 requires that associates and joint ventures should normally be accounted for using the ‘equity
method’. Equity accounting is sometimes called ‘one-line consolidation’, as there is only one amount
shown for an associate in profit or loss (being the parent company’s share of the associate’s profit),
and one amount shown in the statement of financial position (being the cost of investment plus share
of post-acquisition reserves).
As the statement of cash flows begins with profit before tax, it already includes the parent’s share of
the associate’s profit. It is, therefore, necessary to adjust the associate’s profit so that only the
dividends from associates are recognised.
In terms of modelling the associate’s contribution to the group, it is normal to consider the associate
separately, as it is likely to be affected by different factors from other group revenue and group
margins.
Professional accountants have to use their common sense and judgement when they analyse data.
They are often required to draw conclusions or make recommendations on the basis of information
in business reports and financial statements. The analysis of such data is normally both quantitative
and qualitative. It is important that accountants should be aware of the limitations of any data they
are using when they make such conclusions or recommendations.
$’000
Revenue 14,730
Cost of sales 8,388
Other costs 5,202
Profit before tax 1,140
Profit after tax 798
Dividend paid 390
Non-current assets 5,364
Inventories 1,392
Receivables 876
Cash 192
Payables 1,464
Equity share capital 600
Retained earnings 5,760
The finance director of Draco has provided the following summary of Draco’s recent performance:
Requirement
Analyse the financial position and performance of Wizard as at the end of 20X5.
Solution
Wizard performance
Analysis
Pre-tax ROCE and pre-tax profit rate – These are 38% and 51% higher than industry average, which
supports the view that Wizard is able to charge high prices. This would appear to be a result of the
specialism of the services that Wizard provides. Additionally, there may be strict cost control within
Wizard, further allowing it to generate higher margins. Should Wizard be acquired by Draco, then the
products will be available at ‘cost’, thereby saving Draco money, while allowing it to potentially
benefit from the premium prices it can charge to Wizard’s other main customer.
Receivables days – At 22, these are exceptionally low compared to the industry average. This is
probably due to the fact that Wizard only has two main customers, making it possible to form close
working relationships. Given the specialism that Wizard provides, it is likely that its customers do not
want to sour this relationship by delaying payment. There is no reason to believe that this will change
if Draco acquires the company.
Payables days – At 64, this is almost twice the industry average and reflects either a strict cash
management policy within Wizard, or potentially a cash flow problem. Given the high profitability
within Wizard, and its healthy balance sheet, it would appear that Wizard has squeezed its suppliers
quite hard. Once acquired by Draco, this strategy may need to change to bring it in line with
company policy.
Inventory days – At 61, this indicates the time that inventory is held by Wizard. This demonstrates that
the production process within Wizard is about two months and may be a reflection of the complexity
of the manufacturing process that it undertakes. It may be a result of the safety checks, which are a
key feature of supply in the aerospace industry, and the time taken to do this may contribute to the
61-day figure.
Revenue and profit per employee – These are, respectively, 77% and 168% higher than industry
average, which is a further reflection of the profitability and revenue generation abilities of Wizard.
This is further evidence of its ability to charge high prices and possibly control costs. Interestingly, we
are told nothing about the salaries within Wizard and it may be that as a smaller firm, their salaries
may be different to those within Draco. Should Wizard’s salaries be higher than Draco’s, this could
lead to demands for higher wages among Draco’s workforce. In terms of costs, it may well be that
once Wizard is acquired, the greater purchasing power which a larger company would have may
lead to further economies of scale and even cheaper supplies.
Dividend cover – As Wizard is not a listed company, its dividend ratio is not strictly comparable with
Draco’s. What is relevant is that it evidences Wizard’s ability to pay dividends and hence generate
cash. This is potentially good news for Draco as it has recently cut its own dividends, which will have
disappointed shareholders.
Liquidity ratios – Without industry statistics, these are in themselves fairly meaningless. However, the
current ratio is greater than one, indicating good liquidity, and the quick ratio is close to one. Allied
with its low receivables and high payables days, this indicates that Wizard does not appear to have
cash flow problems.
The type of analysis performed above may also be performed by the auditor as part of the analytical
procedures at the risk assessment stage of the audit. The use of data analytics tools allows this
analysis to be carried out at a more granular level than has historically been the case.
In approaching a question like this, where there is a great deal of information, it is important to read
the background detail carefully before looking at the ratios. This will tell you if you are comparing like
with like.
The above approach can be used to structure your solutions to financial analysis questions. Turn data
into information and information into analysis and conclusions.
9 Management commentary
Section overview
9.3 Scope
The IASB has published a Practice Statement rather than an IFRS on management commentary. This
‘provides a broad, non-binding framework for the presentation of management commentary that
relates to financial statements that have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs’.
This guidance is designed for publicly traded entities, but it would be left to regulators to decide
who would be required to publish management commentary.
This approach avoids the adoption hurdle ie, that the perceived cost of applying IFRSs might
increase, which could otherwise dissuade jurisdictions/countries not having adopted IFRSs from
requiring their adoption, especially where requirements differ significantly from existing national
requirements.
Definition
Management commentary: A narrative report that provides a context within which to interpret the
financial position, financial performance and cash flows of an entity. It also provides management
with an opportunity to explain its objectives and its strategies for achieving those objectives. (IFRS
Practice Statement)
Nature of the The knowledge of the business in which an entity is engaged and the
business external environment in which it operates.
Objectives and To assess the strategies adopted by the entity and the likelihood that those
strategies strategies will be successful in meeting management’s stated objectives.
Resources, risks and A basis for determining the resources available to the entity as well as
relationships obligations to transfer resources to others; the ability of the entity to
generate long-term sustainable net inflows of resources; and the risks to
which those resource-generating activities are exposed, both in the near
term and in the long term.
Results and The ability to understand whether an entity has delivered results in line
prospects with expectations and, implicitly, how well management has understood
the entity’s market, executed its strategy and managed the entity’s
resources, risks and relationships.
Performance The ability to focus on the critical performance measures and indicators
measures and that management uses to assess and manage the entity’s performance
indicators against stated objectives and strategies.
Advantages Disadvantages
Entity Entity
• Promotes the entity, and attracts investors, • Costs may outweigh benefits
lenders, customers and suppliers • Risk that investors may ignore the financial
• Communicates management plans and statements
outlook
Users Users
• Financial statements not enough to make • Subjective
decisions (financial information only) • Not normally audited
• Financial statements backward looking • Could encourage companies to de-list (to
(need forward-looking information) avoid requirement to produce MC)
• Highlights risks • Different countries have different needs
• Useful for comparability to other entities
10 Summary
Section overview
This section provides a summary of the areas covered so far in this chapter.
• It is important for auditors to understand their responsibilities for detecting fraud and plan their
audit to maximise the chance of detection and ultimately control audit risk.
• In this section we will look at the following:
– An introduction as to why fraud is a difficult area for both business and auditor
– What fraud means
– The types of fraud that a business can suffer
– The types of risk factor that the auditor should look out for when planning an audit
– How the auditor should then address the risk of fraud occurring
– How fraud should be reported, if at all
– The ongoing debate of the expectation gap and the role of the auditor in the detection of fraud
11.1 Introduction
In section 3 above, we looked at the manipulation of information in the financial statements by
creative accounting, and some of the ‘red flags’ that may indicate creative accounting practice.
Creative accounting can be one form of fraudulent financial reporting. While some creative
accounting practices are clearly fraudulent, others are, strictly, allowable, but nevertheless show a
less than ethical attitude on the part of the company directors.
In this section, we will look at the auditor’s responsibilities in respect of not just creative accounting,
but fraud in general. This is the scope which has been adopted by the ISAs.
While one would hope that businesses were trying to address and minimise fraud, it is clear that the
opposite is happening. Businesses are, in fact, in many cases complacent when it comes to fraud. The
Global Economic Crime Survey by PwC revealed that of the companies surveyed only 17% of them
believed that they would be a victim of fraud and yet 48% of the companies had been affected. With
this in mind, it remains clear that fraud is still a risk to business and to the auditor.
Definitions
Fraud: An intentional act by one or more individuals among management, those charged with
governance, employees or third parties, involving the use of deception to obtain an unjust or illegal
advantage.
Fraud risk factors: Events or conditions that indicate an incentive or pressure to commit fraud or
provide an opportunity to commit fraud. (ISA 240.11)
Fraud may be perpetrated by an individual, or colluded in with people internal or external to the
business. It is a contributing factor to business risk.
It is the fact that fraud is a form of deceit that makes its prevention and detection difficult for both
business and the auditor. The perpetrator of the fraud does not want to be detected and will go out
of their way to be successful. Fraud should be distinguished from error where the latter arises from a
genuine mistake with no intention to deceive.
While management may be concerned with different levels of fraud, it is only fraud that results in a
material misstatement in the financial statements that is of concern to the auditor.
Specifically, there are two types of fraud causing material misstatement in financial statements:
(a) Fraudulent financial reporting
(b) Misappropriation of assets
In addition, remember that some specific ‘red flags’ indicating creative accounting are set out in
section 3.
When identifying and assessing the risks of material misstatement at the financial statement level,
and at the assertion level for classes of transactions, account balances and disclosures, the auditor
must identify and assess the risks of material misstatement due to fraud. Those assessed risks that
could result in a material misstatement due to fraud are significant risks and accordingly, to the
extent not already done so, the auditor must obtain an understanding of the entity’s related controls,
including control activities relevant to such risks (ISA 240.27).
The auditor:
• identifies fraud risks;
• relates this to what could go wrong at a financial statement level; and
(6) Several shop properties owned by the company were sold under sale and leaseback
arrangements.
Requirements
6.1 Identify and explain any fraud risk factors that the audit team should consider when planning
the audit of Sellfones plc.
6.2 Link the fraud risk to what could go wrong in the financial statements of Sellfones.
11.11 Documentation
The auditor must document the following:
• The significant decisions as a result of the team’s discussion of fraud
• The identified and assessed risks of material misstatement due to fraud
• The overall responses to assessed risks
• Results of specific audit tests
• Any communications with management
(ISA 240.44–.46)
11.12 Reporting
There are various reporting requirements in ISA 240.
If the auditor has identified a fraud or has obtained information that indicates a fraud may exist, the
auditor must communicate these matters as soon as practicable to the appropriate level of
management.
If the auditor has identified fraud involving:
(a) management;
(b) employees who have significant roles in internal control; or
(c) others, where the fraud results in a material misstatement in the financial statements,
then the auditor must communicate these matters to those charged with governance as soon as
practicable. (ISA 240.40-.41)
The auditor should also make relevant parties within the entity aware of significant deficiencies in the
design or implementation of controls to prevent and detect fraud which have come to the auditor’s
A situation where fraud is suspected will test the auditor’s communication skills considerably. All
communication on the subject must be clear and neutral in tone.
11.12.1 PIEs
For audits of the financial statements of PIEs, when the auditor suspects fraud the auditor must
inform the entity (unless prohibited by law or regulation) and invite it to investigate. If the entity does
not investigate the matter the auditor must inform the relevant authorities.
(ISA 240.41R-1 & .43R-1)
Remember that in the UK the auditor has the right to resign from office at any time. This is a way of
preserving independence and integrity as well as a way of addressing threats to independence.
3. What form do accounting distortions take? How did the recent standard IFRS 16 eliminate
a potential accounting distortion? (Topic 4)
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Digicom In keeping with the broader types of financial analysis covered in this
chapter, this question goes into more depth about the industry in which the
company operates.
CD Sales This question deals with ethical issues in relation to the financial reporting
treatment of certain transactions, and the issue of fraud.
Mackie The focus on fraud continues with this question which requires a discussion
of responsibility for preventing and detecting fraud and the auditors’
responsibility in relation to fraud.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios to help you improve knowledge application and professional skills development before
you start the next chapter.
Kenyon The analysis in this question is from the point of view of the potential
investor. As well as ratio analysis, there is a separate issue of the impact of a
contingent liability.
Precision Garage Financial analysis often arises in an audit context. In this question some
Access inadequate analytical procedures have been performed and you are
required to produce revised, improved analytical procedures.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
Drakoulakos, P. (2019) Sale and Leaseback Transactions and IFRS 16 Implications. [Online]. Available
from http://www.moore-global.com/insights/articles/sale-and-leaseback-transactions-and-ifrs-16-
implic [Accessed 3 October 2019].
1 ISA 240
• Auditor’s objectives relating to fraud – ISA 240.10
• Assess risk of material misstatement – ISA 240.16–.27
• Responding to assessed risks – ISA 240.28–.33
• Reporting fraud – ISA 240.40–.43R-1
2 ISA 315
• Risk assessment procedures – ISA 315.5–.10
£’000
At 31 August 20X0 262
Provision for year 160
Provision used (94)
At 31 August 20X1 328
20X1 20X0
£’000 £’000
Revenue 16,000 5,200
Cost of sales (12,400) (4,264)
Gross profit 3,600 936
Distribution costs (837) (425)
Administrative expenses (2,253) (609)
Operating profit/(loss) 510 (98)
Finance costs (320) (35)
Profit/(loss) before tax 190 (133)
Tax on profit or loss (15) (10)
Profit/(loss) for the period 175 (143)
Other comprehensive income
Revaluation surplus 400 –
Total comprehensive income 575 (143)
20X1 20X0
£’000 £’000 £’000 £’000
Non-current assets
Intangible assets 1,669 829
Property, plant and equipment 6,623 2,564
8,292 3,393
Current assets
Inventories 778 520
Receivables 814 215
Cash and cash equivalents 250 400
1,842 1,135
Current liabilities
Bank overdrafts 975 150
Trade payables 2,734 678
3,709 828
Net current assets/(liabilities) (1,867) 307
Total assets less current
liabilities 6,425 3,700
Non-current liabilities
Bank loan (2,084) –
Requirement
Assess the profitability, liquidity and solvency of the company.
2 CD Sales plc
CD Sales plc, a listed company, was a growth-orientated company that was dominated by its
managing director, Mr A Long. The company sold quality music systems direct to the public. A large
number of salespersons were employed on a commission-only basis. The music systems were sent to
the sales agents who then sold them direct to the public using telephone sales techniques. The
music systems were supplied to the sales agents on a sale or return basis and CD Sales recognised
the sale of the equipment when it was received by the sales agents. Any returns of the music systems
were treated as repurchases in the period concerned.
The company enjoyed a tremendous growth record. The main reasons for this apparent expansion
were as follows.
(1) Mr A Long falsified the sales records. He created several fictitious sales agents who were
responsible for 25% of the company’s revenue.
(2) At the year end, Mr Long despatched nearly all of his inventories of music systems to the sales
agents and repurchased those that they wished to return after the year end.
(3) 20% of the cost of sales was capitalised. This was achieved by falsification of the purchase
invoices with the co-operation of the supplier company. Suppliers furnished the company with
invoices for non-current assets but supplied music systems.
(4) The directors of the company enjoyed a bonus plan linked to reported profits. Executives could
earn bonuses ranging from 50% to 75% of their basic salaries. The directors did not query the
unusually rapid growth of the company, and were unaware of the fraud perpetrated by Mr A
Long.
Mr A Long spent large sums of money in creating false records and bribing accomplices in order to
conceal the fraud from the auditor. He insisted that the auditor should sign a ‘confidentiality’
agreement which effectively precluded the auditor from corroborating sales with independent third
parties, and from examining the service contracts of the directors. This agreement had the effect of
preventing the auditor from discussing the affairs of the company with the sales agents.
The fraud was discovered when a disgruntled director wrote an anonymous letter to the stock
exchange concerning the reasons for the CD Sales growth. The auditor was subsequently sued by a
major bank that had granted a loan to CD Sales on the basis of interim financial statements. These
financial statements had been reviewed by the auditor and a review report issued.
Requirements
2.1 Explain the key audit procedures which would normally ensure that such a fraud as that
perpetrated by Mr A Long would be detected.
2.2 Discuss the implications of the signing of the ‘confidentiality’ agreement by the auditor.
2.3 Explain how the ‘review report’ issued by the auditor on the interim financial statements differs
in terms of its level of assurance from the auditor’s report on the year-end financial statements.
3 Makie Ltd
You are the audit manager for the audit of Makie Ltd, a UK company operating in the manufacturing
sector.
During the audit this year, the audit junior identified that the stores manager had been creating false
purchases, creating suppliers on the purchase ledger with his own bank account details.
He had attempted to conceal the fraud by creating false orders, goods received notes and purchase
invoices. The fraud was identified when this supplier was selected for creditor circularisation. It is
apparent that this fraud took place over a period of at least three years.
The finance director estimates that the fraud has cost the company £500,000 which is material to the
financial statements.
The MD is blaming the auditors for not detecting this fraud and is threatening to sue the firm for
negligence.
Requirements
3.1 Draft a letter to the MD explaining the following:
• The responsibilities of directors and auditors relating to fraud
• The procedures required by professional standards in relation to fraud
3.2 Draft an email to the audit partner giving your opinion as to whether the firm is negligent.
4 Redbrick plc
Redbrick plc is a listed company operating in the civil engineering business generating an annual
revenue of £350 million. Your firm has been the auditors of this company for many years.
The assignment partner received the following letter from the chair of the audit committee of
Redbrick plc.
It has come to light that the MD and FD of one of our smaller subsidiaries, Tharn Ltd, have been
engaging in fraudulent activities for some years. This has included use of Redbrick plc’s assets on
contracts for their own benefit. (They set up their own company particularly for this purpose.)
Also it looks as if there has been accounting manipulation that has caused profits and revenue to be
recognised inappropriately thus enhancing the performance of Tharn Ltd, although there is no
suggestion of misappropriation of assets in this case.
Quite frankly I am not sure why we have been paying you as auditors all these years when you cannot
discover such obvious fraud as this appears to be. I do not expect a detailed evaluation of the matter
at this stage but I would like some explanation of why this problem has not been discovered and
reported by you.
The revenue of Tharn Ltd was £12 million in the last financial year. Tharn Ltd specialises in drainage
construction, enhancement and clearance.
Requirement
As an audit senior, draft a response for the assignment partner to the letter from the chair of the audit
committee of Redbrick plc.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
20X1 20X0
Profitability
= Operating profit ÷ (Total assets – 510 ÷ 6,425 = 7.9% (98) ÷ 3,700 = (2.6)%
Current liabilities)
20X1 20X0
Efficiency
Asset turnover
= Revenue ÷ (Total assets – 16,000 ÷ 6,425 = 2.5 times 5,200 ÷ 3,700 = 1.4 times
Current liabilities)
Inventory turnover
= Cost of sales ÷ Inventories 12,400 ÷ 778 = 15.9 times 4,264 ÷ 520 = 8.2 times
= (Receivables ÷ Credit sales) × (814 ÷ (16,000 × 30%)) × 365 (215 ÷ (5,200 × 30%)) × 365
365 = 62 days = 50 days
= (Payables ÷ Cost of sales) × 365 (2,734 ÷ 12,400) × 365 = 80 (678 ÷ 4,264) × 365 = 50
days days
Liquidity
Current ratio
Quick ratio
= (Current assets – Inventory) ÷ (1,842 – 778) ÷ 3,709 = 0.29 (1,135 – 520) ÷ 828 = 0.74
Current liabilities
Solvency
Debt/equity ratio
Interest cover
2 CD Sales plc
2.1 There are various key audit procedures which would have uncovered the fraud perpetrated by
Mr A Long. Note that the first two tests would bring to the attention of the auditor the
substantial inherent and control risk surrounding the accounts of CD Sales, thus increasing the
perceived audit risk, and putting them on their guard.
Analytical procedures
The auditor should perform analytical procedures in order to compare the company’s results
with those of other companies in the same business sector. In particular, the audit should look
at sales growth rates and gross profit margins, but also inventory holding levels, non-current
assets and return on capital. This should indicate that the company’s results are unusual for the
sector, to a great extent.
3 Makie Ltd
3.1 To whom it may concern,
Fraud at Makie Ltd
I refer to the recently discovered fraud during the audit for this year. I appreciate your feelings
on this subject and thought it might be helpful if I could summarise the auditors’ and directors’
responsibilities in this area.
In addition, as I am sure you are aware, auditors must follow professional standards and I
thought you might find a summary of these rules useful.
Responsibility for fraud
The responsibility for preventing and detecting fraud lies with those charged with governance
of Makie Ltd (the management). Fraud is normally prevented by implementing internal
controls which should be regularly reviewed for robustness and errors by those charged with
governance. The auditor considers the risk of material misstatement in the financial statements
whether due to fraud or error, and adapts the audit procedures as necessary to reduce risk to
an acceptably low level.
The auditor cannot be held responsible for the prevention of fraud under any circumstances. If
a fraud is uncovered, the auditor will assess its materiality and may carry out additional tests.
The detection of fraud is not the objective of the audit as stated in the engagement letter, so
the auditor cannot be held responsible.
4 Redbrick plc
Email as follows:
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Assurance
2 Engagements to review financial statements
3 Due diligence
4 Reporting on prospective financial information (PFI)
5 Agreed-upon procedures
6 Compilation engagements
7 Forensic audit
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
25
Learning outcomes
• Explain the nature of a range of different assurance engagements
• Evaluate the evidence necessary to report at the appropriate level of assurance
• Evaluate risk in relation to the nature of the assurance engagement and the entity or process for a
given scenario
• Design and determine procedures necessary to attain the relevant assurance objectives in a
potentially complex scenario
• Appraise and explain the nature and purpose of forensic audit and prepare and plan procedures
required to achieve a range of differing objectives
• Explain the roles and responsibilities that auditors may have with respect to a variety of different
types of information and design procedures sufficient to achieve agreed objectives
• Explain the nature and purposes of due diligence procedures (for example: financial, commercial,
operational, legal, tax, human resources) and plan procedures required to achieve a range of
differing financial objectives
Specific syllabus references for this chapter are: 16(a)–(d), 17(b)–(d)
25
client?
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
• You have covered the concept of assurance and the principles in ISAE 3000 (Revised) in your
earlier studies. This section provides a brief summary.
• ISAE 3402 and ISAE 3410 apply ISAE 3000 (Revised) to an engagement to report on controls at a
service organisation and engagements to report on greenhouse gas statements.
• ISAE 3420 concerns reporting on the pro forma information contained in a prospectus.
1.1 Introduction
You have been introduced to the concept of Assurance and International Standard on Assurance
Engagements via ISAE 3000 (Revised), Assurance Engagements Other than Audits or Reviews of
Historical Financial Information in the Assurance and Audit & Assurance papers at the Professional
Level. The remainder of section 1 provides revision of the key points.
Note: ISAEs have not been adopted in the UK.
Definition
Assurance engagement: An assurance engagement is one in which a practitioner aims to obtain
sufficient appropriate evidence in order to express a conclusion designed to enhance the degree of
confidence of the intended users other than the responsible party about the outcome of the
evaluation or measurement of a subject matter against criteria.
The most common type of assurance engagement is the audit. This has been covered earlier in this
Workbook.
Notes
1 The statutory audit is an example of a reasonable assurance engagement.
2 Remember the negative expression of opinion provides assurance of something in the absence
of any evidence arising to the contrary. In effect the auditor is saying, ‘I believe that this is
reasonable because I have no reason to believe otherwise’.
Assurance engagements performed by professional accountants are normally intended to enhance
the credibility of information about a subject matter by evaluating whether the subject matter
conforms in all material respects with suitable criteria, thereby improving the likelihood that the
information will meet the needs of an intended user. In this regard, the level of assurance provided
by the professional accountant’s conclusion conveys the degree of confidence that the intended user
may place on the credibility of the subject matter.
There is a broad range of assurance engagements, which may include any of the following areas:
(a) Engagements to report on a wide range of subject matters covering financial and non-financial
information
(b) Attestation engagements (where the underlying subject matter has not been measured or
evaluated by the practitioner, and the practitioner concludes whether or not the subject matter
information is free from material misstatement) and direct engagements (where the underlying
subject matter has been measured and evaluated by the practitioner, and the practitioner then
presents conclusions on the reported outcome in the assurance report)
(c) Engagements to report internally and externally
(d) Engagements in the private and public sector
Specific examples of assurance assignments include the following:
• Assurance attaching to special purpose financial statements
• Adequacy of internal controls
• Reliability and adequacy of IT systems
• Environmental and social matters
• Risk assessment
• Regulatory compliance
• Verification of contractual compliance
Elements of an assurance engagement
An assurance engagement will normally exhibit the following elements.
(a) A three-party relationship involving:
(1) a practitioner (the auditor or member of the engagement team)
(2) a responsible party (the client company)
1.5.2 Objectives
ISAE 3402 states that the objectives of the service auditor are as follows:
(a) To obtain reasonable assurance about whether, in all material respects, based on suitable
criteria:
(1) The service organisation’s description of its system fairly presents the system as designed
and implemented throughout the specified period or as at a specified date
(2) The controls related to the control objectives stated in the service organisation’s description
of its system were suitably designed throughout the specified period
(3) Where included in the scope of the engagement, the controls operated effectively to
provide reasonable assurance that the control objectives stated in the service organisation’s
description of its system were achieved throughout the period
(b) To report on the matters in (a) above
1.5.3 Requirements
ISAE 3402 requires the service auditor to carry out the following procedures:
• Consider acceptance and continuance issues
• Assess the suitability of the criteria used by the service organisation
• Consider materiality with respect to the fair presentation of the description, the suitability of the
design of controls and, in the case of a type 2 report, the operating effectiveness of controls
• Obtain an understanding of the service organisation’s system
• Obtain evidence regarding:
– The service organisation’s description of its system
Notes
1 A ‘type 1’ report is a report on the description and design of controls at a service organisation.
2 A ‘type 2’ report is a report on the description, design and operating effectiveness of controls at a
service organisation.
It will be far from straightforward determining the operation of an outsourced service organisation’s
internal controls. You need to display strong judgement to evaluate what obstacles exist in your
mission to issue an appropriate opinion.
Definitions
Greenhouse gas statement: A statement setting out constituent elements and quantifying an entity’s
greenhouse gas emissions for a period (sometimes known as an emissions inventory) and, where
applicable, comparative information and explanatory notes including a summary of significant
quantification and reporting policies.
Greenhouse gases (GHGs): Carbon dioxide (CO2) and any other gases required by the applicable
criteria to be included in the GHG statement, such as: methane; nitrous oxide; sulphur hexafluoride;
hydrofluorocarbons; perfluorocarbons; and chlorofluorocarbons.
All businesses emit GHGs either directly or indirectly. Recently the demand for companies to publish
information about their emissions has increased. As a result the public require confidence that GHG
statements are reliable. ISAE 3410 aims to enhance this confidence. Reasons for preparing a GHG
statement include the following:
• It may be required under a regulatory disclosure regime.
• It may be required as part of an emissions trading scheme.
• A company may wish to make voluntary disclosures.
1.6.2 Assurance
An engagement performed in accordance with ISAE 3410 must also comply with the requirements of
ISAE 3000 (Revised). Depending on the circumstances the engagement may provide limited or
reasonable assurance about whether the GHG statement is free from material misstatement, whether
due to fraud or error. ISAE 3410 does not specify the circumstances under which a reasonable or
limited assurance engagement will be performed. This will normally be determined by law or
regulation or based on the reason behind the performance of the engagement.
1.6.3 Process
The key stages for this type of engagement are similar to those for any assurance assignment. These
are as follows:
• Plan the engagement
1.6.4 Reporting
ISAE 3410 requires the assurance report to include the following basic elements:
(a) A title which clearly indicates that the report is an independent assurance report
(b) The addressee
(c) Identification and description of the level of assurance, either reasonable, or limited
(d) Identification of the GHG statement
(e) A description of the entity’s responsibilities
(f) A statement that the GHG quantification is subject to inherent uncertainty
(g) If the GHG statement includes emissions deductions that are covered by the practitioner’s
conclusion, identification of those emissions deductions, and a statement of the practitioner’s
responsibility with respect to them
(h) Identification of the applicable criteria
(i) A statement that the firm applies ISQC 1
(j) A statement that the practitioner complies with the IESBA Code or other professional
requirements
(k) A description of the practitioner’s responsibility including:
(1) a statement that the engagement was performed in accordance with ISAE 3410; and
(2) a summary of the work performed as the basis of the practitioner’s conclusion. In the case of
a limited assurance engagement, this must include a statement that the procedures
performed in a limited assurance engagement vary in nature and timing from, and are less
in extent than for a reasonable assurance engagement. Consequently the level of assurance
obtained in a limited assurance engagement is substantially lower than the assurance that
would have been obtained had a reasonable assurance engagement been performed.
Definition
Investment circular: Any document issued by an entity pursuant to statutory or regulatory
requirements relating to securities on which it is intended that a third party should make an
investment decision, including a prospectus, listing particulars, a circular to shareholders or similar
document.
• A review is a type of assurance service which provides a reduced degree of assurance concerning
the proper preparation of financial statements.
• One specific example is the review of interim financial information that may be performed by the
independent auditor.
• Where no material matters come to the attention of the auditor an expression of negative
assurance should be given.
Notes
1 Conforming amendments have been made to ISRE 2400 (Revised), resulting from the changes
made to ISA 250, Consideration of Laws and Regulations in an Audit of Financial Statements by
the IAASB following the conclusion of its NOCLAR (non-compliance with laws and regulations)
project.
2 This ISRE has not been adopted in the UK.
2.4 Materiality
The accountant should apply similar materiality considerations as would be applied if an audit
opinion on the financial statements were being given. ISRE 2400 (Revised) requires the practitioner
to determine materiality for the financial statements as a whole and apply this in designing
procedures and evaluating results. Although there is a greater risk that misstatements will not be
detected in a review than in an audit, the judgement as to what is material is made by reference to
the information on which the practitioner is reporting and the needs of those relying on that
information, not to the level of assurance provided.
2.5 Procedures
In overview the work performed by the practitioner is as follows:
(a) Inquiry and analytical procedures are performed to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence
to come to a conclusion about the financial statements as a whole. These must address all
material items in the financial statements including disclosures and must address areas where
material misstatements are likely.
(b) If sufficient appropriate evidence has not been obtained by these procedures, further
procedures are performed.
(c) Additional procedures are performed where the practitioner becomes aware of matters that
indicate that the financial statements may be materially misstated.
2.5.2 Inquiry
Inquiry is one of the key techniques used by the practitioner in a review. Evaluating the responses is
an integral part of the process. Specific inquiries include the following matters:
• How management makes significant accounting estimates
• Identification of related parties and related party transactions
• Whether there are significant, unusual or complex transactions, events or matters that have
affected or may affect the financial statements (eg, significant changes in the entity’s business,
changes to terms of finance or debt covenants, significant transactions near the end of the
reporting period)
• Actual, suspected or alleged fraud, illegal acts or non-compliance with laws and regulations
• Whether management has identified and addressed events after the reporting period
• Basis for management’s assessment of the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern
• Events or conditions that cast doubt on the entity’s ability to continue as a going concern
• Material commitments, contractual obligations or contingencies
• Material non-monetary transactions or transactions for no consideration in the reporting period
For financial statements prepared using a compliance framework (as opposed to a fair presentation
framework) the following alternative opinion is allowed:
“Based on our review, nothing has come to our attention that causes us to believe that the financial
statements are not prepared, in all material respects, in accordance with the applicable financial
reporting framework.”
If it is necessary to modify the opinion the practitioner must use an appropriate heading ie, Qualified
Conclusion, Adverse Conclusion or Disclaimer of Conclusion. A description of the matter must also
be given in a basis for conclusion paragraph immediately before the conclusion paragraph.
The practitioner may conclude that the financial statements are materially misstated. The matters may
have the following effects.
Pervasive Express an adverse opinion that the financial statements do not give a true
and fair view
The practitioner may feel that there was an inability to obtain sufficient appropriate evidence (there
has been a limitation in the scope of the work they intended to carry out for the review). If so, they
should describe the limitation. The limitation may have the following effects.
Material to one area Express a qualified opinion of negative assurance due to amendments
which might be required if the limitation did not exist
2.7.1 Procedures
The procedures outlined below follow the same pattern as an audit but, because this is a review not
an audit, which gives a lower level of assurance, they are not as detailed as audit procedures.
The auditor should possess sufficient understanding of the entity and its environment to understand
the types of misstatement that might arise in interim financial information and to plan the relevant
procedures (mainly inquiry and analytical review) to enable them to ensure that the financial
information is prepared in accordance with the applicable financial reporting framework. This will
usually include the following:
• Reading last year’s audit and previous review files
• Considering any significant risks that were identified in the prior year audit
• Reading the most recent and comparable interim financial information
• Considering materiality
• Considering the nature of any corrected or uncorrected misstatements in last year’s financial
statements
• Considering significant financial accounting and reporting matters of ongoing importance
• Considering the results of any interim audit work for this year’s audit
• Considering the work of internal audit
• In the UK and Ireland, reading management accounts and commentaries for the period
• In the UK and Ireland, considering any findings from prior periods relating to the quality and
reliability of management accounts
• Asking management what their assessment is of the risk that the interim financial statements
might be affected by fraud
• Asking management whether there have been any significant changes in business activity and, if
so, what effect they have had
• Asking management about any significant changes in internal controls and the potential effect on
preparing the interim financial information
• Asking how the interim financial information has been prepared and the reliability of the
underlying accounting records
A recently appointed auditor should obtain an understanding of the entity and its environment, as it
relates to both the interim review and final audit.
The key elements of the review will be as follows:
• Inquiries of accounting and finance staff
• Analytical procedures
Ordinarily, procedures would include the following:
• Reading the minutes of meetings of shareholders, those charged with governance and other
appropriate committees
• Considering the effect of matters giving rise to a modification of the audit or review report,
accounting adjustments or unadjusted misstatements from previous audits
• If relevant, communicating with other auditors auditing different components of the business
• Performing analytical procedures designed to identify relationships and unusual items that may
reflect a material misstatement
• Reading the interim financial information and considering whether anything has come to the
auditors’ attention indicating that it is not prepared in accordance with the applicable financial
reporting framework
• Agreeing the interim financial information to the underlying accounting records
• In the UK and Ireland, for group interim financial information, reviewing consolidation
adjustments for consistency
2.7.2 Reporting
In the UK and Ireland, the auditor should not date the review report earlier than the date on which
the financial information is approved by management and those charged with governance.
The following example of a review report is taken from ISRE 2410 (Appendix 8) to illustrate the
wording that would be used under a specific legal framework. The review report relates to a
The following examples of modified reports are taken from ISRE 2410 as issued by the IAASB. No
specific UK and Ireland versions exist, although in practice the UK-specific unmodified version of the
review report would be tailored to include a modified opinion.
3.1 Introduction
Businesses need adequate, relevant and reliable information in order to take decisions. However,
problems may arise where one party to the transaction has more or better information than the other
party (this is sometimes called information asymmetry).
This problem is made worse by the fact that frequently there is an incentive to use this superior
position to gain an unfair advantage in a deal. The situation can be highlighted by the following
illustration.
The situation for many types of corporate transformation arrangement is similar to the used car
example. However, statutory audited financial statements may not be sufficient to narrow the
information gap, often because they are prepared for a different purpose.
A greater, and more specific, level of assurance may therefore be needed for acquisitions, mergers,
joint ventures and management buy-outs (MBOs). The most common type of assurance in this
context is a ‘report of due diligence‘.
Working your way methodically through the various types of due diligence required (such as
financial, operational and even legal) will ensure that the work you do is thorough and does not
overlook any hidden issues for your client.
3.5 Warranties
Due diligence may not be able to answer all the questions of the buyer. Warranties are therefore
usually given by the sellers of the company as a type of insurance. If the warranties are breached the
buyer may be able to claw back some of the sale proceeds. The specific nature of the warranties will
depend on the individual circumstances; however, they may include the following:
• All details regarding contracts of employment have been disclosed.
• Sales contracts exist and are current.
• All contingent liabilities have been disclosed.
• Tax has been paid or accrued for.
4.3 Procedures
When determining the nature, timing and extent of procedures, the auditor should consider the
following:
• The likelihood of material misstatement
• The knowledge obtained during any previous engagements
• Management’s competence regarding the preparation of PFI
• The extent to which PFI is affected by the management’s judgement
• The adequacy and reliability of the underlying data
The auditor should obtain sufficient appropriate evidence as to whether:
(a) management’s best-estimate assumptions on which the PFI is based are not unreasonable and,
in the case of hypothetical assumptions, such assumptions are consistent with the purpose of
the information;
(b) the PFI is properly prepared on the basis of the assumptions;
(c) the PFI is properly presented and all material assumptions are adequately disclosed, including a
clear indication as to whether they are best-estimate assumptions or hypothetical assumptions;
and
When the auditor believes that the presentation and disclosure of the PFI is not adequate, the
auditor should express a qualified or adverse opinion (or withdraw from the engagement).
When the auditor believes that one or more significant assumptions do not provide a reasonable
basis for the PFI, the auditor should express an adverse opinion (or withdraw from the engagement).
When there is a scope limitation the auditor should either withdraw from the engagement or
disclaim the opinion.
Reports on PFI require strong communication skills to explain the difference between the limited
assurance given on the assumptions used in the forecast and the reasonable assurance given on the
preparation of the forecast based on those assumptions.
5 Agreed-upon procedures
Section overview
5.1 Objective
Agreed-upon procedures assignments use International Standard on Related Services – in this case
ISRS 4400, Engagements to Perform Agreed-Upon Procedures Regarding Financial Information.
In an engagement to perform agreed-upon procedures, an auditor is engaged to carry out those
procedures of an audit nature to which the auditor and the entity and any appropriate third parties
have agreed and to report on factual findings. The recipients of the report must form their own
conclusions from the report by the auditor. The report is restricted to those parties that have agreed
to the procedures to be performed since others, unaware of the reasons for the procedures, may
misinterpret the results.
Note: ISRSs have not been adopted in the UK.
You will need to make sure you read the scenario carefully if agreed-upon procedures are being
considered. Have you taken everything into consideration when determining what this work will
require?
5.3 Procedures
The procedures performed will depend upon the terms of the engagement. The ISRS states that the
auditors should plan the assignment. They should carry out the agreed-upon procedures,
documenting their process and findings.
5.4 Reporting
The report of factual findings should contain the following:
• Title
• Addressee (ordinarily the client who engaged the auditor to perform the agreed-upon
procedures)
• Identification of specific financial or non-financial information to which the agreed-upon
procedures have been applied
• A statement that the procedures performed were those agreed upon with the recipient
• A statement that the engagement was performed in accordance with the International Standard
on Related Services applicable to agreed-upon procedure engagements, or with relevant national
standards or practices
• When relevant, a statement that the auditor is not independent of the entity
• Identification of the purpose for which the agreed-upon procedures were performed
• A listing of the specific procedures performed
• A description of the auditor’s factual findings including sufficient details of errors and exceptions
found
• Statement that the procedures performed do not constitute either an audit or a review and, as
such, no assurance is expressed
• A statement that had the auditor performed additional procedures, an audit or a review, other
matters might have come to light that would have been reported
• A statement that the report is restricted to those parties that have agreed to the procedures to be
performed
• A statement (when applicable) that the report relates only to the elements, accounts, items or
financial and non-financial information specified and that it does not extend to the entity’s
financial statements taken as a whole
• Date of the report
• Auditor’s address
• Auditor’s signature
Note: No assurance is expressed. The auditor reports the factual findings.
Appendix 2 of ISRS 4400 includes the following example of a report of factual findings:
6 Compilation engagements
Section overview
6.1 Compilations
In a compilation engagement, the accountant is engaged to use accounting expertise, as opposed
to auditing expertise, to collect, classify and compile financial information.
6.2 Procedures
6.2.1 Engagement acceptance
In accordance with the revised ISRS, the work must be carried out in accordance with ethical and
quality control requirements. The practitioner must agree the terms of the engagement, in an
engagement letter or other suitable form of written agreement, with the management or the
engaging party if different including the following:
(a) The intended use and distribution of the financial information, and any restrictions on its use or
distribution
(b) Identification of the applicable financial reporting framework
(c) The objective and scope of the engagement
(d) The responsibilities of the practitioner, including the requirement to comply with relevant ethical
requirements
(e) The responsibilities of management for the financial information, the accuracy and completeness
of the records and documents provided by management for the compilation engagement and
the judgements needed in the preparation and presentation of the financial information
(f) The expected form and content of the practitioner’s report
6.3 Reporting
The practitioner’s report must clearly communicate the nature of the compilation engagement. ISRS
4410 (Revised) stresses that the report is not a vehicle to express an opinion or conclusion on the
financial information in any form. The report on a compilation engagement must be in writing and
must contain the following:
• Title
• Addressee
• A statement that the practitioner has compiled the financial information based on information
provided by management
• A description of the responsibilities of management, or those charged with governance in relation
to the compilation engagement
• Identification of the applicable financial reporting framework and, if a special purpose financial
reporting framework is used, a description or reference to the description of that special purpose
financial reporting framework in the financial information
• Identification of the financial information, including the title of each element of the financial
information (if it comprises more than one element) and the date of the financial information
• A description of the practitioner’s responsibilities in compiling the financial information, including
that the engagement was performed in accordance with ISRS 4410 (Revised) and that the
practitioner has complied with relevant ethical requirements
• A description of what a compilation engagement entails
• Explanation that as the compilation engagement is not an assurance engagement, the
practitioner is not required to verify the accuracy or completeness of the information provided by
management for the compilation
• Explanation that the practitioner does not express an audit opinion or a review conclusion on
whether the financial information is prepared in accordance with the applicable financial
reporting framework
• If the financial information is prepared using a special purpose framework an explanatory
paragraph that describes the purpose of the financial information and the intended users and
draws the readers’ attention to the fact that the information may not be suitable for other
purposes
• Date of the report
• Practitioner’s address
• Practitioner’s signature
Appendix 2 of ISRS 4410 (Revised) contains a number of examples of a compilation report. The
following extract is based on Illustration 1.
7 Forensic audit
Section overview
Forensic auditing can be applied to a wide variety of situations, including fraud and negligence
investigations.
7.1 Introduction
Definitions
Forensic auditing: The process of gathering, analysing and reporting on data, in a predefined
context, for the purpose of finding facts and/or evidence in the context of financial or legal disputes
and/or irregularities and giving preventative advice in this area.
Forensic investigation: Undertaking a financial investigation in response to a particular event, where
the findings of the investigation may be used as evidence in court or to otherwise help resolve
disputes.
Forensic investigations are carried out for civil or criminal cases. These can involve fraud or money
laundering.
Forensic audit and accounting is a rapidly growing area. The major accountancy firms all offer
forensic services, as do a number of specialist companies. The demand for these services arises
partly from the increased corporate governance focus on company directors’ responsibilities for the
prevention and detection of fraud, and partly from government concerns about the criminal funding
of terrorist groups.
7.2.2 Negligence
When an auditor or accountant is being sued for negligence, either or both parties to the case may
employ forensic accountants to investigate the work done to provide evidence as to whether it did in
fact meet the standards required. They may also be involved in establishing the amount of loss
suffered by the plaintiff.
Computer- Data mining is key to many investigation processes, allowing the accountant to
assisted access and analyse large numbers of transactions.
techniques Specific characteristics can be checked ie, date, time, amount, approval, payee.
If possible, data should be gathered before the initial field visit to reduce the
risk of the data being compromised.
1. Can you explain what assurance is and when you might be required to report using
different extents of assurance?
2. Could you advise a client of the differences between an audit and a review of a set of
financial statements?
3. Do you understand the various types of due diligence and can you explain why each
would be required?
4. Are you comfortable working your way through a forecast and interrogating each line to
make sure you understand all the relevant assumptions?
5. Do you know what agreed-upon procedures are and when you might use them?
6. Can you explain what a firm would do if asked to perform a compilation engagement?
7. Do you know what forensic auditing means and can you name some examples of the type
of work it might include?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Travis plc This is a great opportunity to interrogate a limited scenario and consider
how due diligence would apply in a practical setting.
Upstarts Ltd This is much more challenging and illustrates how you might be asked to
consider assurance work in the context of other responsibilities for the
same client and what you should do in response.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Precision Garage You can see from this question that certain key financial reporting issues
Access requirement may be present for companies that create interim financial statements, so
(2) use this as experience of how this might be examined.
KK requirement (3) To illustrate the integrated nature of this exam, this is a good way of
showing how content from this chapter could be tested in a larger
scenario.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
7 Agreed-upon procedures
• Defining the terms – ISRS 4400.9
• Procedures – ISRS 4400.15
• Reporting – ISRS 4400.17-18 & Appendix
8 Compilation engagements
• Defining terms – ISRS 4410.17
• Procedures – ISRS 4410.28-37
• Reporting – ISRS 4410.39-41 & Appendix
1 Travis plc
Travis plc is an international hotel company which is looking to expand and diversify via acquisition.
Two potential target companies have been identified.
(1) Bandic AB operates over 100 hotels throughout Scandinavia, an area where Travis plc currently
has no hotel. This acquisition would give it a fast entry into this new geographical market.
Approximately half of Bandic AB’s hotels target the luxury/business end of the market, where
Travis plc currently focuses; the remainder are more downmarket.
(2) Macis plc has several hotels throughout the British Isles with a high proportion in Scotland,
where Travis plc currently has only limited coverage. So far Travis plc has acquired 4% of the
share capital of Macis plc in several relatively small purchases.
Requirements
1.1 If the acquisition of Bandic AB is to go ahead, explain four key business risks the directors
should consider.
1.2 Explain the purpose of a due diligence exercise if one of these purchases were to go ahead.
2 Upstarts Ltd
You are a senior in the corporate services department of your firm which has been approached by
GP Sidney Wittenburg Global Fund Managers (GPSWGFM), the venture capital arm of a leading
investment bank. GPSWGFM is investigating a management buy‑out (MBO) of Upstarts Ltd
(Upstarts).
Upstarts was formed as a start-up three years ago, as a wholly owned subsidiary of an IT hardware
supplier, DatLinks plc (DatLinks). DatLinks and Upstarts both operate entirely within the UK. The
group’s accounting year end is 30 September. Upstarts provides a ‘one stop service’ for client
extranets to the financial services industry (ie, intranets which can be securely accessed by customers
to obtain information, pay bills etc). Upstarts provides hardware, which is sourced exclusively from its
parent company DatLinks, plus software, support, web design and security services.
It was initially successful, but some highly publicised problems surrounding security breaches in
similar products, together with cash flow problems, have resulted in a severe breakdown in the
relationship between Upstarts’s management team and the directors of DatLinks. DatLinks is
therefore keen to divest itself of its interest in Upstarts.
The proposed deal would involve GPSWGFM providing the funding for the MBO. Its exit route will be
via a planned flotation of Upstarts in two to four years’ time. GPSWGFM has worked with Upstarts’s
management to produce a detailed business plan and financial projections up to the date of the
flotation under a variety of scenarios.
Your firm has been asked to quote for the full range of advisory services, including the following:
• Due diligence on the MBO
• Review of the business plan and the financial projections
• Tax structuring advice on the acquisition
• Upstarts’s audit and advisory work on an ongoing basis
• Advisory work on the planned flotation of Upstarts
Performance management
The gross assets of Upstarts are £9.5 million. The acquisition price is estimated at this stage to be in
the region of £45 million, although this will depend on the outcome of the due diligence work and
the review of the financial projections.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
Tutorial Note
Depending on the precise nature of the engagement and the terms set out in the
engagement letter the auditor may also be required to review or verify the financial
information which has provided the source for the calculations in the statement.
Tutorial Note
In this particular case, the approach taken is likely to involve elimination of legitimate reasons why
the discrepancies may have arisen.
1 Travis plc
1.1 Key business risks (only four required)
Risk with diversification
Scandinavia would be a new geographical area to the directors of Travis.
The culture and expectations of a Scandinavian workforce and Scandinavian business/holiday
travellers may be very different to that in other areas where Travis operates.
Regulatory environment
The directors of Travis will need to ensure that the company quickly gains knowledge of
regulations in the Scandinavian countries to ensure that local laws are not breached by future
decisions eg, local health and safety rules, local employment legislation.
Change measurement
The takeover of Bandic will be potentially unsettling for the Bandic workforce.
• Head office staff may think their jobs are at risk, as control may be subsumed within the
head office function of Travis.
• Hotel staff may be concerned about the future of the hotel in which they work.
This uncertainty is demotivating and can have serious performance consequences if decisions
are not made quickly and communicated effectively.
Financing
Travis must ensure that it does not overstretch itself when making an acquisition. A balance
must be struck between using existing resources and raising new finance via debt and/or
equity that the new entity is comfortably able to service.
Systems
Computer systems in Bandic will need to be integrated so that:
• reporting to the Travis board can be carried out, especially when integrating results for
overall control; and
• if the group wants standard booking/check-in procedures etc, Bandic’s systems will need
more thorough integration.
1.2 Due diligence
When bidding for the shares in its chosen company, Travis and its advisers will have only
limited access to financial information on that company.
A due diligence exercise is carried out by Travis once it has identified the target company. This
would usually be performed by the purchasing company together with its external advisers,
and would give a much more detailed review of the assets, liabilities, contracts in progress,
risks, etc, of the acquired company, to confirm that the original information relied on by Travis
was accurate.
An acquisition deal will not become unconditional until after satisfactory completion of a due
diligence exercise.
2 Upstarts Ltd
Email as follows:
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Introduction
2 Social responsibility reporting
3 Implications for the statutory audit
4 Social and environmental audits
5 Implications for assurance services
6 Integrated reporting
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical Reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
26
Learning outcomes
• Identify and explain corporate reporting and assurance issues in respect of social responsibility,
sustainability and environmental matters for a range of stakeholders
26
misstatement.
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
Many corporations are now compiling and issuing annual reports that provide details about their
environmental and social behaviour.
The environment The environment is directly impacted by many corporate activities today. For
example a company can cause harm to natural resources in various ways,
including:
exhausting natural resources such as coal and gas; and
emitting harmful toxins which damage the atmosphere.
This impact is regulated by environmental legislation and consumer opinion.
Society Society, from the point of view of the company, is made up of consumers or
potential consumers. As recognised above, consumers increasingly have
opinions about ‘green’, environmentally friendly products and will direct their
purchasing accordingly. They are concerned with harm to natural resources as
they and their children have to live on the planet and may suffer direct or
indirect effects of pollution or waste.
Society will also, through lobby groups, often speak out on behalf of the
environment as it cannot speak out itself.
Employees Employees have a relationship with the company in their own right, in terms of
their livelihood and also their personal safety when they are at work.
However, from the company’s perspective, they are also a small portion of
society at large, as they may purchase the products of the company or
influence others to do so.
Corporate responsibility is a field which is still developing. As a result, what constitutes corporate
responsibility is part of an ongoing debate. ICAEW (in An Overview of Corporate Responsibility)
defines it as the ‘actions, activities and obligations of business in achieving sustainability’. If a
business is to be sustainable in the long run then the resources it uses must be sustainable. This
includes raw materials and energy and so on but also includes less tangible resources including:
• human and intellectual capital; and
• relationships with communities, governments, consumers and other stakeholders.
The business argument is that companies that are responsible will in the long term be more
successful. This gives rise to both:
• risk eg, reputational risk as a result of poor behaviour; and
• opportunity eg, companies that use energy efficiently will reduce cost.
As shown in the diagram above, sustainability can be seen to have three key aspects:
Environment This may provide information about the impact of products on the
environment eg, emissions, waste
As well as adopting social and environmental policies it is important that companies communicate
these policies to stakeholders. Increasingly companies are providing information on sustainability.
This type of report typically includes information about these three aspects of performance and is
often referred to as triple bottom line reporting.
Having a framework such as that used by the GRI is very helpful in delivering a thorough and
comprehensive view of an organisation’s sustainability credentials. Note how this could be applied to
almost any organisation in its own context.
• The auditor will need to consider the implications of social and environmental matters on the
audit of the financial statements particularly at the following stages of the audit:
– Planning
– Substantive procedures
– Audit review
3.1 Introduction
As we have seen above, social and environmental matters are becoming significant to an increasing
number of entities and may, in certain circumstances, have a material impact on their financial
statements.
When these matters are significant to an entity, there may be a risk of material misstatement
(including inadequate disclosure) in the financial statements. In these circumstances the auditor
needs to give consideration to these issues in the audit of the financial statements. Guidance on the
audit work required was provided in 2015 by ICAEW and the Environment Agency in a publication
called Environmental issues and UK annual reporting.
Systematically working through all the various elements of a set of financial statements will help you
identify the implications of both social and environmental factors for the auditor.
• Social audits determine whether the company is acting in a socially responsible manner and in
accordance with objectives set by management.
• Environmental audits assess the extent to which a company protects the environment from the
effects of its activities in accordance with the objectives set by management.
Environmental and social issues provide an opportunity for the auditor to provide other assurance
services
Inclusivity For an organisation that accepts its accountability to those on whom it has
an impact and who have an impact on it, inclusivity is the participation of
stakeholders in developing and achieving an accountable and strategic
response to sustainability.
Much of the guidance in the AA1000AS standard is very similar to ISAE 3000 (Revised), but there are
areas where it gives more specific guidance:
• The objective of the engagement is to evaluate and provide conclusions on:
– the nature and extent of adherence to the AA1000 principles; and, if within the scope agreed
with the reporting company
– the quality of publicly disclosed information on sustainability performance.
• Any limitation in the scope of the disclosures on sustainability, the assurance engagement or the
evidence gathering shall be addressed in the assurance statement and reflected in the report to
management if one is prepared.
• There is no set wording for the assurance statement but the following is listed as the minimum
information required:
– Intended users of the assurance statement
– The responsibility of the reporting organisation and of the assurance provider
– Assurance standard(s) used, including reference to AA1000AS (2008)
– Description of the scope, including the type of assurance provided
– Description of disclosures covered
– Description of methodology
– Any limitations
– Reference to criteria used
– Statement of level of assurance
– Findings and conclusions concerning adherence to the AA1000 Accountability Principles of
Inclusivity, Materiality, Responsiveness and Impact (in all instances)
– Findings and conclusions concerning the reliability of specified performance information (for
Type 2 assurance only)
– Observations and/or recommendations
– Notes on competencies and independence of the assurance provider
– Name of the assurance provider
– Date and place
Although there are obvious differences in the type of engagement undertaken here and the way the
statement is laid out, you should note the similarities to the auditor’s report (such as the use of
conclusions, methodology and responsibilities) which underlines the importance of being able to
explain your findings whatever the circumstances.
6 Integrated reporting
Section overview
Integrated reporting is borne out of an increasing demand for companies to disclose a more holistic
view of how a company creates value. The Integrated Reporting Framework seeks to determine value
creation through the communication of qualitative and quantitative performance measures.
Capital Comment
Manufactured capital Manufactured physical objects (as distinct from natural physical objects)
that are available to an organisation for use in the production of goods
or the provision of services. Manufactured capital is often created by
other organisations, but includes assets manufactured by the reporting
organisation for sale or when they are retained for its own use
Natural capital All environment resources and processes that support the prosperity of
an organisation
Social and relationship The institutions and the relationships within and between communities,
capital groups of stakeholders and other networks, and the ability to share
information to enhance individual and collective wellbeing
The NCC advises the UK Government on the sustainable use of its natural capital and also attempts
to quantify the benefits derived by the nation from its natural assets, such as food, recreation, clean
water, hazard protection and clean air. These benefits are reported by the Office for National
Statistics in its annual UK natural capital accounts. Extracts from the 2019 release include the
following:
• natural capital asset values were estimated as almost £1 trillion
• the cooling shade of trees and water saved the UK almost a quarter of a billion pounds by
improving workplace productivity and lowering air conditioning costs
• renewable energy production in the UK has grown over the last ten years from 5% to 35% of all
electricity generation
The authors of the accounts conclude their findings by explaining their methodology and observing
that their approach is based on a number of estimates and guidelines used by the United Nations.
There is no assurance provided for this data, which perhaps says more about the challenges
associated with generating this kind of information in a reliable and meaningful way than anything
else.
(Source: Office for National Statistics (2020) UK Natural capital accounts: 2019. [Online] Available at:
https://www.ons.gov.uk/economy/environmentalaccounts/bulletins/uknaturalcapitalaccounts/2019
[Accessed 6 July 2020])
6.6 Materiality
When preparing an integrated report, management should disclose matters which are likely to
impact on an organisation’s ability to create value. Both internal and external threats regarded as
being materially important are evaluated and quantified. This provides users with an indication of
how management intend to combat risks should they materialise.
Implications Comment
IT costs The introduction of integrated reporting will most likely require significant
upgrades to be made to the organisation’s IT and information system
infrastructure. Such developments will be needed to capture KPI data. Due
to the broad range of business activities reported on using integrated
reporting (customer, supplier relations, finance and human resources) it is
highly likely the costs of improving the infrastructure will be significant.
Time/staff costs The process of gathering and collating the data for inclusion in the report is
likely to require a significant amount of staff time. This may serve to
decrease staff morale if they are expected to undertake this work in
addition to existing duties.
This may require additional staff to be employed.
Consultancy costs Organisations producing their first integrated report may seek external
guidance from an organisation which provides specialist consultancy on
integrated reporting. Consultancy fees are likely to be significant.
Disclosure There is a danger that organisations may volunteer more information about
their operational performance than intended. Disclosure of planned
strategies and key performance measures are likely to be picked up by
competitors.
Of the deaths experienced in North Hospital, 12 were patients who died during planned procedures
(the rest were emergency procedures). At South Hospital 7 patients died during planned procedures.
Requirement
Analyse the performance of the two hospitals and identify the better performing hospital.
Reviewing performance information should have demonstrated the importance of considering both
quantitative and qualitative information when trying to assess something as complicated as a set of
KPIs.
1. Can you explain the term ‘corporate responsibility’ and why it is becoming increasingly
important to companies and their stakeholders?
2. Do you know what ‘social responsibility’ means and can you give some examples of how
an organisation might demonstrate this?
3. What is the impact that social and environmental factors might have on a set of financial
statements and what does this mean for the auditor?
4. Social and environmental audits may be undertaken by professional firms - do you know
what such audits are and how they work?
5. Can you discuss how a firm might undertake assurance work for a client in relation to its
sustainability information?
6. Do you know what integrated reporting means and how a firm might review a set of KPIs
for an organisation and its operations?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Chemico plc This is a very typical illustration of how social and environmental matters
can affect the audit and how separate reporting of such matters can be of
benefit to a client. Attempting this question will help you understand how
this topic could be examined.
Gooding and Brown This question will also help you understand the various types of question
plc that could be set for this topic. You will learn how to make best use of the
scenario in an applied manner.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Larousse (board A good illustration of how social responsibility is reported and how
proposal) assurance can be provided in a complex scenario.
Kenyon requirement This is good practice for understanding the environmental impact of a set
(2) of circumstances on the financial statements - in this case, it is a contingent
liability related to a chemical leak.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
Once you have attempted these questions, you can continue your studies by moving on to the next
chapter.
Maroun, W. and Atkins, J. (2015) The Challenges of Assuring Integrated Reports: Views from the South
African Auditing Community. ACCA. [Online]. Available from:
www.accaglobal.com/content/dam/ACCA_Global/Technical/integrate/ea-south-africa-IR-
assurance.pdf [Accessed 2 October 2019].
1 Chemico plc
You are the auditor of Chemico plc, a company which produces chemicals for use in household
products. You are responsible for the planning of the audit for the year ended 31 December 20X8
and have attended a meeting with the finance director during which you have obtained the following
information.
• Production had to be suspended during October 20X8 due to a strike by plant workers. Their
main complaints were over working hours and the adequacy of health and safety procedures. The
finance director has assured you that these issues have been dealt with.
• The company has received a letter from the environmental health department dated 10 January
20X9 indicating that samples taken from a nearby river have shown traces of a chemical which is
harmful to wildlife. The environmental health department believes that Chemico plc is the source.
The initial complaint was made by a landowner with fishing rights on the river. Chemico plc has
denied responsibility.
• One of the products made by Chemico plc is to be withdrawn from use in household products
under EU law. Chemico plc will therefore cease production of this chemical by 31 December
20X8 and the company has made plans to decommission this part of the plant. The directors
anticipate that there may be a number of redundancies as a result and have included a provision
for the estimated redundancy costs in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December
20X8.
Requirements
1.1 Identify and explain how social and environmental matters would affect the planning of the
audit of Chemico plc.
1.2 The finance director is aware that other companies in his sector are including social
responsibility reports as part of their corporate reports. He has asked you to clarify the
requirement to include this type of information and to explain the benefits of doing so.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
1 Chemico plc
1.1 Key issues
The key issues which would need to be addressed in planning the audit of Chemico plc
include the following:
Understanding the entity
The chemical production industry is highly regulated and as such the business is likely to be
subject to a wide range of regulation including both environmental and health and safety. The
auditor would need to have an awareness of these if they are to have a good understanding of
the business.
Risk assessment
The nature of the industry in which Chemico plc operates is particularly risky in terms of its
compliance with regulation. This risk assessment will be affected by the following factors:
• Whether there is a history of penalties and legal proceedings against the company. A
review of previous years’ files should provide information together with discussions with
members of staff involved in previous audits.
• The entity’s attitude towards these matters. Chemico plc has experienced problems in both
environmental matters and health and safety during 20X8 which may indicate poor
governance.
• The likelihood of the existence of other related problems. While a number of issues have
been identified there is a risk that other breaches exist which have not yet been identified,
particularly if poor practice is widespread.
The impact of the strike.
Issues include the following:
• Whether the working hours complained of constituted a breach in employment law and
health and safety
• Whether the lack of adequate safety procedures has resulted in any accidents leading to
litigation
• Whether the issues have genuinely been resolved so that any breaches of regulations are
not ongoing
• Whether the company is liable to be fined and/or sued as a result
• Whether any fines or penalties have been properly accounted for or provided for
The contamination of the river
Issues include the following:
• Whether the leak constitutes an adjusting event after the reporting period. Although the
letter has been received after the year end it is likely that, if responsible, any leak from
Chemico plc occurred before the year end. The financial statements would need to be
adjusted for the consequences.
• The likelihood of Chemico plc being responsible for the leak. The audit plan would include
procedures to review the evidence held by Chemico plc and any legal correspondence
which might indicate the likely outcome.
• The potential size of any penalty including any compensation claim from the landowner, as
this may have an impact on the viability of the business.
Withdrawn product
• There is a risk that items of plant may be impaired as a result of the withdrawn product.
Audit procedures will be required to identify the assets affected and to ensure that they
have been written down to their recoverable amount.
Internal auditing
Introduction
Learning outcomes
Chapter study guidance
Learning topics
1 Role of internal audit
2 Regulation
3 Scope of internal audit
4 Internal audit assignments
5 Multi-site operations
6 Internal audit reporting
Summary
Self-test questions
Further question practice
Technical reference
Answers to Interactive questions
Answers to Self-test questions
Introduction
27
Learning outcomes
• Evaluate the role of internal audit and design appropriate procedures to achieve the planned
objectives
27
Once you have worked through this guidance you are ready to attempt the further question practice
included at the end of this chapter.
1.1 Introduction
You have already been introduced to the concept of internal audit and the use of the internal audit
function by the external auditor in your earlier studies. ISA (UK) 610 (Revised June 2013), Using the
Work of Internal Auditors was covered in Chapter 6.
At the Advanced Level you are expected to have a broader understanding of the topic and to be
able to apply your knowledge to more complex situations.
You are also expected to be able to consider the role of internal audit in its own right within the
business. This will be the main focus of this chapter.
Definition
Internal audit function: A function of an entity that performs assurance and consulting activities
designed to evaluate and improve the effectiveness of the entity’s governance, risk management and
internal control processes (ISA (UK) 610.14).
Internal audit departments are normally a feature of larger organisations. They help management to
achieve the corporate objectives and are an essential feature of a good corporate governance
structure (corporate governance including audit committees is covered in Chapter 4). This is
highlighted by the fact that the UK Corporate Governance Code states that companies with a
premium listing without an internal audit function should annually review the need to have one. The
need for internal audit will depend on the following factors:
• The scale, diversity and complexity of the company’s activities
• The number of employees
• Cost-benefit considerations
• Changes in the organisational structures, reporting processes or underlying information systems
• Changes in key risks
• Problems with internal control systems
• An increased number of unexplained or unacceptable events
Internal audit can play a key role in assessing and monitoring internal control policies and
procedures.
The internal audit function can help the board in other ways as well:
• by, in effect, acting as auditors for board reports not audited by the external auditors;
• by being the experts in fields such as auditing and accounting standards in the company and
helping with the implementation of new standards; and
• by liaising with external auditors, particularly where external auditors can use internal audit work
and reduce the time and therefore cost of the external audit (although using internal auditors for ‘
direct assistance‘ on the external audit is prohibited in the UK under ISA (UK) 610.5-1). In addition,
internal audit can check that external auditors are reporting back to the board everything they are
required to under auditing standards.
Companies with a premium listing with an internal audit function should annually review its scope,
authority and resources.
2 Regulation
Section overview
• The Institute of Internal Auditors issue a Code of Ethics and International Standards for the
Professional Practice of Internal Auditing.
• The Code of Ethics includes principles and rules of conduct.
• There are two categories of standard:
– Attribute standards
– Performance standards
• An adapted version of these standards is issued in the UK by HM Treasury to give guidance to
internal auditors in central government departments.
2.2.1 Principles
These are defined by the IIA as follows:
Integrity The integrity of internal auditors establishes trust and thus provides the
basis for reliance on their judgement.
Confidentiality Internal auditors respect the value and ownership of information they
receive and do not disclose information without appropriate authority
unless there is a legal or professional obligation to do so.
Competency Internal auditors apply the knowledge, skills and experience needed in
the performance of internal audit services.
Purpose, authority and The purpose, authority and responsibility of the internal audit
responsibility activity must be formally defined in an internal audit charter,
consistent with the Mission of Internal Audit, and the mandatory
elements of the International Professional Practices Framework
(the Core Principles for the Professional Practice of Internal
Auditing, the Code of Ethics, the Standards, and the definition
of Internal Auditing).
Independence and objectivity The internal audit activity must be independent, and internal
auditors must be objective in performing their work. In
particular:
• the chief audit executive must report to a suitably senior
level within the organisation;
• conflicts of interest must be avoided; and
• internal auditors must refrain from assessing specific
operations for which they were previously responsible.
Proficiency and due Engagements must be performed with proficiency and due
professional care professional care.
• The chief audit executive must obtain competent advice and
assistance if the internal auditors lack the necessary skills to
perform all or part of an engagement.
• Internal auditors must have sufficient knowledge to evaluate
the risk of fraud and the manner in which it is managed by
the organisation but are not expected to be experts in
detecting and investigating fraud.
Internal auditors must exercise due professional care by
considering the:
• extent of the work needed to achieve the engagement’s
objectives;
• relative complexity, materiality, or significance of matters to
which assurance procedures are applied;
• adequacy and effectiveness of governance, risk
management and control processes;
• probability of significant errors, fraud, or non-compliance;
and
• cost of assurance in relation to potential benefits.
Quality assurance and The chief audit executive must develop and maintain a quality
improvement programme assurance and improvement programme that covers all aspects
of the internal audit activity. A quality assurance and
improvement programme is designed to enable an evaluation
Managing the internal audit The chief audit executive must effectively manage the internal
activity audit activity to ensure it adds value to the organisation. In
particular:
• the internal audit plan of engagement must be based on a
risk assessment performed at least annually; and
• these plans must be communicated to senior management
and to the board for review and approval.
Nature of work The internal audit activity must evaluate and contribute to the
improvement of governance, risk management and control
processes using a systematic, disciplined and risk-based
approach. It must:
• evaluate risk exposures relating to the organisation’s
governance, operations and information systems;
• help and evaluate the effectiveness and efficiency of
controls, promoting continuous improvement; and
• assess and make recommendations regarding governance
processes.
Engagement planning Internal auditors must develop and document a plan for each
engagement, including the scope, objectives, timing and
resource allocations. Planning considerations must include the
following:
• The strategies and objectives of the activity being reviewed
and the means by which the activity controls its performance
• The significant risks to the activity’s objectives, resources and
operations and the means by which the potential impact of
risk is kept to an acceptable level
• The adequacy and effectiveness of the activity’s governance,
risk management and control processes compared to a
relevant control framework or model
• The opportunities for making significant improvements to
the activity’s risk management and control processes
Performing the engagement Internal auditors must identify, analyse, evaluate and document
sufficient information to achieve the engagement’s objectives.
Engagements must be properly supervised to ensure that
objectives are achieved, quality is assured and staff are
developed.
Monitoring progress The chief audit executive must establish and maintain a system
to monitor the disposition of results communicated to
management. There must be a follow-up process to ensure that
management actions have been effectively implemented or that
senior management has accepted the risk of not taking action.
Communicating the acceptance When the chief audit executive concludes that senior
of risks management has accepted a level of residual risk that may be
unacceptable to the organisation, the chief audit executive
must discuss the matter with senior management. If the
decision regarding residual risk is not resolved, the chief audit
executive must communicate the matter to the board.
The various code principles and other standards show you how such a framework can be applied to
help evaluate an internal audit function if required.
• Internal audit has two key roles to play in relation to risk management:
– Ensuring the company’s risk management system operates effectively
– Ensuring that strategies implemented in respect of business risks operate effectively
• Internal auditors may have a role in preventing and detecting fraud.
Designing and operating internal control systems is a key part of a company’s risk management. This
will often be done by employees in their various departments, although sometimes (particularly in
the case of specialised computer systems) the company will hire external expertise to design
systems.
As a major risk management policy in companies is to implement strong internal controls in order to
reduce risks, internal audit has a key role in assessing systems and testing controls.
Internal audit may help with the development of systems. However, its key role will be in monitoring
the overall process and in providing assurance that the systems which the departments have
designed meet objectives and operate effectively.
It is important that the internal audit function retains its objectivity towards these aspects of its role,
which is another reason why internal audit would generally not be involved in the assessment of risks
and the design of the system.
Being able to assess risks (including business risks) is always a good way of demonstrating that you
possess sound judgement skills.
Definitions
Economy: Attaining the appropriate quantity and quality of physical, human and financial resources
(inputs) at lowest cost. An activity would not be economic if, for example, there was overstaffing or
failure to purchase materials of requisite quality at the lowest available price.
Efficiency: This is the relationship between goods or services produced and the resources used to
produce them (process). An efficient operation or process produces the maximum output for any
given set of resource inputs, or it has minimum inputs for any given quantity and quality of product
or service provided.
Effectiveness: This is concerned with how well an activity is doing in achieving its policy objectives or
other intended effects (outputs).
The internal auditors will evaluate these three factors for any given business system or operation in
the company. Value for money can often only be judged by comparison. In searching for value for
money, present methods of operation and uses of resources must be compared with alternatives.
4.3 Financial
The financial audit is internal audit’s traditional role. It involves reviewing all the available evidence
(usually the company’s records) to substantiate information in management and financial reporting.
This role in many ways echoes the role of the external auditor, and is not a role in which the internal
auditors can add any particular value to the business. Increasingly, it is a minor part of the function of
internal audit.
Definition
Operational audits: Audits of the operational processes of the organisation. They are also known as
management and efficiency audits. Their prime objective is the monitoring of management’s
performance, ensuring company policy is adhered to.
Marketing Marketing is the process of assessing and enhancing demand for the
company’s products. Marketing and associated sales are very important
for the business and also therefore for the internal auditor but, as the
associated systems do not directly impact on the financial statements,
they do not usually concern the external auditor.
It is important for the internal auditor to review the marketing processes
to ensure the following:
• The process is managed efficiently.
• Information is freely available to manage demand.
• Risks are being managed correctly.
An audit may be especially critical for a marketing department which
may be complex with several different teams, for example:
• research
• advertising
• promotions
• after-sales
It is vital to ensure that information is passed on properly within the
department and that activities are streamlined.
Human resources The human resources department on one hand procures a human
resource (employee) for the operation of the business and on the other
supports those employees in developing the organisation.
It is important to ensure that the processes in place ensure that people
are available to work as the business requires them and that the overall
development of the business is planned and controlled.
Again, ensuring company policies are maintained and information is
freely available are key factors for internal audit to assess.
Business process objective For the process being reviewed, consider what its purpose and
objective is, as this will facilitate understanding the potential risk
to the organisation.
Audit terms of reference Prepare a Terms of Reference for the audit review. This will
describe the area to be considered and the approach adopted.
This is agreed with the business and approved by the Audit
Manager.
Review current processes and Before commencing testing, meet with functional management
controls to understand actual processes, systems and controls in place.
Contrast this with expected systems and controls expected to
be in place.
Risks Prepare a list of risks associated with the processes. This can be
graded (possibly in terms of impact and frequency) to enable
judgement in respect to testing to be performed.
The risks can be mapped to the controls, to understand the
purpose of the control and process.
Testing and results Consider appropriate testing that can be conducted to provide
evidence that the risk is being managed.
Perform tests, agreeing conclusions with auditees. Observations
to both effectiveness and efficiency of controls and processes
should be considered.
Management actions and Functional management should provide agreed actions to each
monitoring recommendation, a target date and responsible person to
undertake the action. Internal audit monitor and follow up the
actions to ensure control deficiencies are rectified.
If you are required to consider how an internal auditor might undertake a particular assignment,
considering the various stages that each one includes is a great starting point. Logically, gaining
visibility of particular aspects of an organisation helps you to understand and assess it.
• The internal auditor needs to take into account a number of practical considerations when
auditing multi-site operations.
• A number of approaches may be adopted including:
– compliance-based audit approach; and
– process-based audit approach.
Some organisations have several outlets which all operate the same systems. A good example of this
would be a retail chain, which would have a number of shops where systems relating to inventory
and cash, for example, would be the same.
The objective of audits of multi-site operations is the same as the objective of single site operations.
However, as results might vary across the different locations, the internal auditor has to take a
different approach. Some possible approaches to multi-site operations audits are set out below.
(a) Compliance-based audit approach
With a compliance-based audit approach, a master audit programme is drawn up which is used
to check the compliance of the branches with the set procedures, after which the results from the
branches are compared. There are two possible ways of undertaking the compliance-based
approach:
(1) Cyclical. This approach is based on visiting all the sites within a given time frame.
(2) Risk-based. This alternative determines which branches are to be visited based on the risk
attached to them.
(b) Process-based audit approach
With a process-based audit approach, the audit is planned so that specific key processes are
audited. In a retail operation, for example, this could involve the important process of cash
handling being audited. This approach can also be undertaken in two ways:
(1) Cyclical. Aims to audit all processes in a business within a set time frame.
(2) Risk-based. The processes to be audited are determined with reference to the risk attached
to them.
You have already practised explaining how the external auditor concludes and recommends as part
of addressing deficiencies in internal control. Now you need to be able to express similar
conclusions from the perspective of the internal auditor. The key theme here is how you can get the
message across, regardless of the circumstances.
1. Can you remember what the internal audit function does and how it differs from external
audit?
2. Can you explain the various codes and standards in place to regulate internal auditors?
3. Internal auditors can assist in sound governance practices by supporting risk management
and combatting fraud and error. True or false?
4. Can you list the various assignments that an internal audit function might get involved in
and explain how each one would be undertaken?
5. Are you able to explain the impact on an internal audit function if the organisation
operates across several sites?
6. Would you know how to communicate your findings if you were employed as an internal
auditor?
2 Question practice
Aim to complete all self-test questions at the end of this chapter. The following self-test questions are
particularly helpful to further topic understanding and guide skills application before you proceed to
the next chapter.
Blackfoot Emissions This question puts you in the position of Internal Audit manager and
Ltd requires a series of practical solutions regarding how the internal audit
function might address issues such as setting up an audit charter and
planning a payroll audit.
Once you have completed these self-test questions, it is beneficial to attempt the following questions
from the Question Bank for this module. These questions have been selected to introduce exam style
scenarios that will help you improve your knowledge application and professional skills development
before you start the next chapter.
Jupiter This question demonstrates how the external auditor might be required to
evaluate the impact of internal audit on their work and how much (if any)
reliance can be placed upon it.
Refer back to the learning in this chapter for any questions which you did not answer correctly or
where the suggested solution has not provided sufficient explanation to answer all your queries.
You have now come to the end of this stage of your studies.
1 Internal auditing
Blackfoot Emissions Ltd has grown exponentially in recent years providing emissions monitoring and
environmental management services to clients within the UK. All the management systems are
centralised at the head office, although there exist five regional offices across the country in order to
provide local response to clients’ requirements. These local offices all use the corporate systems on a
networked basis.
The board of directors have agreed that it is appropriate to establish an Internal Audit Function and
you have been appointed as the Internal Audit Manager.
Requirements
1.1 You have been requested to recommend to the board how the function will operate. Prepare
an Audit Charter.
1.2 The Finance Director has called you into his office and expressed concerns over the
management of the payroll system, particularly now that the company has grown and is
employing many consultants.
The Payroll department is incorporated within the Human Resources department and uses a
software package called Upay. A single person has full responsibility for its operation and
administers the whole process. Prepare a draft of the business process objective, and identify
the key risks and appropriate controls that you would expect to find that require testing
1.3 Draft the Terms of Reference for the Payroll Audit in preparation for circulation to senior
management.
Now go back to the Introduction and ensure that you have achieved the Learning outcomes listed for
this chapter.
1 Internal auditing
1.1 Internal audit charter
Purpose
Internal Audit is an independent review function set up within the organisation to provide
assurance to the board on the adequacy and effectiveness of business systems and controls.
Independence
Internal Audit maintains an independent stance from the activities which it audits to ensure the
unbiased judgements essential to its proper conduct and impartial advice to management.
Role and scope
The main role of Internal Audit is to help management with providing assurance as to the
adequacy and efficiency of its business systems and controls. It does this by understanding the
key risks of the organisation and by examining and evaluating the adequacy and effectiveness
of the system of risk management and internal control as operated by the organisation.
Internal Audit, therefore, has unrestricted access to all activities and information undertaken in
the organisation, in order to review, appraise and report on the following:
• The adequacy and effectiveness of the systems of internal control. These shall include both
financial and operational systems.
• The suitability, accuracy, reliability and integrity of financial and other management
information and the systems used to generate such information.
• The extent of compliance with rules and standards established by management, and with
externally set laws and regulations.
• The efficient acquisition and use of assets, ensuring that they are accounted for and
safeguarded from losses of all kinds arising from waste, extravagance, inefficient
administration, poor value for money, fraud or other cause and that adequate business
continuity plans exist.
• The integrity of processes and systems, including those under development, to ensure that
controls offer adequate protection against error, fraud and loss of all kinds; and that the
process aligns with the organisation’s strategic goals.
• The effectiveness of the function being audited, and to ensure that services are provided in
a way which is economical and efficient.
• The follow-up action taken to remedy deficiencies identified by Internal Audit review,
ensuring that good practice is identified and communicated widely.
• The operation of the organisation’s corporate governance arrangements.
The board shall monitor the performance of the Internal Audit Function and the Head of
Internal Audit shall report annually on the function’s performance.
Reporting
Internal Audit reports regularly on the results of its work to the Audit Committee, which is a
Board subcommittee. The Head of Internal Audit is accountable to the Audit Committee for the
following:
• Providing regular assessments of the adequacy and effectiveness of the organisation’s
systems of risk management and internal control based on the work of Internal Audit.
• Reporting significant control issues and potential for improving risk management and
control processes.
• Periodically providing information on the status and results of the annual audit plan and the
sufficiency of Internal Audit resources.
Reliability and integrity of Creation of ghost Segregation of data input and activation
financial and operational employees of payroll accounts within the system.
management
Limited and controlled access to the
system (eg, user logins and passwords).
Payroll system
Upay access is
restricted by user
login and secure
password
restrictions.
Adequate back-
up and recovery
processes are
established and
tested on a
regular basis.
Amendments to IT
systems and
processes are
conducted in a
controlled and
authorised
manner.
Accounting estimate: A monetary amount for which the measurement, in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable financial reporting framework, is subject to estimation uncertainty.
Accrual accounting: The effects of transactions and other events and circumstances on a reporting
entity’s economic resources and claims are recognised in the periods in which they occur, even if the
resulting cash receipts and payments occur in a different period. (Conceptual Framework: para 1.17)
Actuarial risk: This is the risk that the actuarial assumptions such as those on employee turnover, life
expectancy or future salaries vary significantly from what actually happens.
Amortised cost: The amount at which the financial asset or liability is measured at initial recognition
minus principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the effective interest
method of any difference between that initial amount and the maturity amount and, for financial
assets, adjusted for any loss allowance.
Antidilution: An increase in earnings per share or a reduction in loss per share resulting from the
assumption that convertible instruments are converted, that options or warrants are exercised, or that
ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions.
Artificial intelligence (AI): Technology to help improve decisions made by machines, based on
machine learning, in an attempt to make better decisions than humans can. AI requires pattern
recognition and learning, rather than relying on a series of complex rules, so is not the same as
expert systems, which failed to grasp the complexities of the real world and were unable to adapt to
dynamic situations. AI systems use complex programming to know how to behave in certain
situations, while machine learning promotes automatic learning without being prompted.
Assertions: The representations by management, explicit or otherwise, that are embodied in the
financial statements, as used by the auditor to consider the different types of potential misstatement
that may occur.
Asset: A present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events. An economic
resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits. (Conceptual Framework, para.
4.2)
Audit risk: The risk that auditors may give an inappropriate audit opinion when the financial
statements are materially misstated. Audit risk has two key components risk of material misstatement
in financial statements (financial statement risk) and the risk of the auditor not detecting the material
Auditor’s expert: An individual or organisation possessing expertise in a field other than accounting
and auditing, whose work in that field is used by the auditor in obtaining sufficient, appropriate audit
evidence. An auditor’s expert may be either an auditor’s internal expert (a partner or staff of the
auditor’s firm, or a network firm) or an auditor’s external expert.
Big data: A term that describes those “datasets whose size is beyond the ability of typical database
software to capture, store, manage and analyse.”(McKinsey Global Institute, Big data: The next
frontier for innovation, competition and productivity, 2011).
Borrowing costs: Interest and other costs incurred by an entity in connection with the borrowing of
funds.
Compliance risks: Risks arising from non-compliance with laws, regulations, policies, procedures and
contracts.
Examples: breach of company law, non-compliance with accounting standards; listing rules; taxation;
health and safety; environmental regulations; litigation risk against client.
The UK’s adoption of the General Data Protection Regulation as part of EU law could also be
included here, although compliance is just as important for auditors as it is for their clients.
Component: An entity or business activity for which the group or component management prepares
financial information that should be included in the group financial statements.
Component auditor: An auditor who, at the request of the group engagement team, performs work
on financial information related to a component for the group audit.
Component materiality: The materiality level for a component determined by the group
engagement team.
Control risk: The risk that a misstatement could occur in an assertion about a class of transaction,
account balance or disclosure and that could be material, either individually or when aggregated
Covered person: A person in a position to influence the conduct or outcome of the engagement.
Creative accounting: The active manipulation of accounting results for the purpose of creating an
altered impression of the underlying financial position or performance of an enterprise by using
accounting rules and guidance in a spirit other than that which was intended when the rules were
written.
Credit loss: The difference between all contractual cash flows that are due to an entity in accordance
with the contract and all the cash flows that the entity expects to receive discounted at the original
effective interest rate.
Credit transaction: A transaction where payment is deferred (eg, goods bought from company on
credit terms).
Current cost: Current cost, like historical cost, is an entry value: it reflects prices in the market in
which the entity would acquire assets or incur the liability.
Current value: The price paid for an asset or the liability value will be updated to reflect any changes
since it was acquired or incurred. There are three main bases recognised by the Conceptual
Framework that make up current value:
Data analytics: The process of collecting, organising and analysing large sets of data to discover
patterns and other information which an organisation can use for its future business decisions.
Closely linked to the term data analytics is data mining.
Data mining: The process of sorting through data to identify patterns and relationships between
different items. Data mining software, using statistical algorithms to discover correlations and
patterns, is frequently used on large databases. In essence, it is the process of turning raw data into
useful information.
Deductible temporary differences: Temporary differences that will result in amounts that are
deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the
asset or liability is recovered or settled.
Deferred tax assets: The amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
• deductible temporary differences; and
• the carry forward of unused tax losses/unused tax credits.
Deferred tax liabilities: The amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of taxable
temporary differences.
Defined benefit obligation: The defined benefit obligation is the present value of all expected future
payments required to settle the obligation resulting from employee service in the current and prior
periods.
Derecognition: The removal of all or part of a recognised asset or liability from an entity’s statement
of financial position. Derecognition normally occurs when that item no longer meets the definition of
an asset or liability. (Conceptual Framework: para. 5.26)
Detection risk: The risk that the procedures performed by the auditor to reduce audit risk to an
acceptably low level will not detect a misstatement that exists and that could be material, either
individually or when aggregated with other misstatements.
Discontinued operation: A component of an entity that has either been disposed of, or is classified
as held for sale, and:
• represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations;
• is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or
geographical area of operations; or
• is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale.
Operations and cash flows that can be clearly distinguished, operationally and for financial reporting
purposes, from the rest of the entity.
Disposal group: A group of assets to be disposed of, by sale or otherwise, together as a group in a
single transaction, and liabilities directly associated with those assets that will be transferred in the
transaction. (In practice a disposal group could be a subsidiary, a cash-generating unit or a single
operation within an entity.)
(IFRS 5)
Economy: Attaining the appropriate quantity and quality of physical, human and financial resources
(inputs) at lowest cost. An activity would not be economic if, for example, there was overstaffing or
failure to purchase materials of requisite quality at the lowest available price.
Effective interest method: A method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial instrument and
of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the relevant period.
Effective interest rate: The rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash payments or receipts
through the expected life of the instrument or, when appropriate, a shorter period to the net carrying
amount of the financial asset or financial liability.
Effectiveness: This is concerned with how well an activity is doing in achieving its policy objectives or
other intended effects (outputs).
Efficiency: This is the relationship between goods or services produced and the resources used to
produce them (process). An efficient operation or process produces the maximum output for any
given set of resource inputs, or it has minimum inputs for any given quantity and quality of product
or service provided.
Electronic data interchange (EDI): A form of computer to computer data transfer. Information can be
transferred in electronic form, avoiding the need for the information to be re-inputted somewhere
else.
Electronic mail (email): A system of communicating with other connected computers or via the
internet in written form.
Embedded derivative: A component of a hybrid (combined) instrument that also includes a non-
derivative host contract – with the effect that some of the cash flows of the combined instrument vary
in a way similar to a stand-alone derivative.
Emphasis of matter paragraph: A paragraph included in the auditor’s report that refers to a matter
appropriately presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgement, is of
such importance that it is fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 706.7a)
Entity relevant to the engagement: An entity with respect to which the firm and covered persons are
required to be independent. In the case of an audit engagement, the entity relevant to the
engagement is the audited entity.
Equity instrument: Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after
deducting all of its liabilities.
Exchange difference: The difference resulting from translating a given number of units of one
currency into another currency at different exchange rates.
Expected credit losses (ECL): The weighted average of credit losses with the respective risks of the
default occurring as the weights.
External confirmation: Audit evidence obtained as a direct written response to the auditor from a
third party.
Fair: The financial statements reflect the commercial substance of the company’s underlying
transactions and the information is free from bias.
Fair value: Price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly
transaction between market participants at the measurement date. (IFRS 13, Appendix A)
Finance lease: A lease that transfers substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of
an underlying asset.
Financial capital maintenance: Under a financial concept of capital maintenance, such as invested
money and invested purchasing power, capital is synonymous with the net assets or equity of the
entity.
Financial instrument: Any contract that gives rise to a financial asset of one entity and a financial
liability or equity instrument of another entity.
Financial risks: Risks arising from the company’s financial activities (eg, investment risks) or the
financial consequences of operations (eg, receivables risks).
Examples: going concern, market risk, overtrading, credit risk, interest rate risk, currency risk, cost of
capital, treasury risks.
Firm commitment: A binding agreement for the exchange of a specified quantity of resources at a
specified price on a specified future date or dates.
Foreign currency: A currency other than the functional currency of the entity.
Foreign operations: Defined as any subsidiary, associate, joint venture or branch of a reporting entity,
the activities of which are based or conducted in a country or currency other than those of the
reporting entity.
Forensic auditing: The process of gathering, analysing and reporting on data, in a predefined
context, for the purpose of finding facts and/or evidence in the context of financial or legal disputes
and/or irregularities and giving preventative advice in this area.
Forward contract: A commitment to undertake a future transaction at a set time and at a set price.
Fraud: An intentional act by one or more individuals among management, those charged with
governance, employees or third parties, involving the use of deception to obtain an unjust or illegal
advantage.
Fraud risk factors: Events or conditions that indicate an incentive or pressure to commit fraud or
provide an opportunity to commit fraud. (ISA 240.11)
Functional currency: The currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates.
Future: This represents a commitment to an additional transaction in the future that limits the risk of
existing commitments.
Gains: Increases in economic benefits. As such, they are no different in nature from revenue.
Going concern: Financial statements are normally prepared on the assumption that the reporting
entity is a going concern, and will continue in operation for the foreseeable future. Hence, it is
assumed that the entity has neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation not the need to
cease trading.
(Conceptual Framework: para. 3.9)
Goodwill: Any excess of the cost of the acquisition over the acquirer’s interest in the fair value of the
identifiable assets and liabilities acquired as at the date of the exchange transaction.
Governance: The term used to describe the role of persons with responsibility for overseeing the
strategic direction of the entity and obligations related to the accountability of the entity. This
includes overseeing the financial reporting process. Those charged with governance may include
management only when it performs such functions. (In the UK, those charged with governance
include the directors (executive and non-executive) and members of the audit committee. In the UK,
management will not normally include non-executive directors.)
Grant date: The date at which the entity and other party agree to the share-based payment
arrangement. At this date the entity agrees to pay cash, other assets or equity instruments to the
other party, provided that specified vesting conditions, if any, are met. If the agreement is subject to
shareholder approval, then the approval date becomes the grant date.
Grants related to assets: Government grants whose primary condition is that an entity qualifying for
them should purchase, construct or otherwise acquire long-term assets. Subsidiary conditions may
also be attached restricting the type or location of the assets or the periods during which they are to
be acquired or held.
Grants related to income: Government grants other than those related to assets.
Greenhouse gases (GHGs): Carbon dioxide (CO2) and any other gases required by the applicable
criteria to be included in the GHG statement, such as: methane; nitrous oxide; sulphur hexafluoride;
hydrofluorocarbons; perfluorocarbons; and chlorofluorocarbons.
Group engagement partner: The partner or other person in the firm who is responsible for the group
audit engagement and its performance and for the auditor’s report on the group financial statements
that is issued on behalf of the firm.
Group engagement team: Partners and staff who establish the overall group audit strategy,
communicate with component auditors, perform work on the consolidation process, and evaluate
the conclusions drawn from the audit evidence as the basis for forming an opinion on the group
financial statements.
Hedge ratio: The relationship between the quantity of the hedging instrument and the quantity of
the hedged item in terms of their relative weighting.
Hedged item: An asset, liability, firm commitment, highly probable forecast transaction or net
investment in a foreign operation that:
• exposes the entity to risk of changes in fair value or future cash flows; and
• is designated as being hedged.
Historical cost: The price paid for an asset or for the event which gave rise to the liability. The price
will not change.
Independence: Freedom from conditions and relationships which, in the context of an engagement,
would compromise the integrity or objectivity of the firm or covered persons.
Inherent risk: The susceptibility of an assertion about a class of transaction, account balance or
disclosure to a misstatement that could be material, either individually or when aggregated with
other misstatements, before consideration of any related controls.
Inquiry: Consists of seeking information of knowledgeable persons both financial and non-financial
within the entity or outside the entity.
Insurance contract: A contract between two parties, where one party, the insurer, agrees to
compensate the other party, the policyholder, if it is adversely affected by an uncertain future event.
Insurance risk: A risk that is not a financial risk. The risk in an insurance contract is whether an event
will occur (rather than arising from a change in something), for example a theft, damage against
property, or product or professional liability.
Interim financial report: A financial report containing either a complete set of financial statements (as
described in IAS 1) or a set of condensed financial statements (as described in this standard) for an
interim period.
Interim period: A financial reporting period shorter than a full financial year.
Internal audit function: A function of an entity that performs assurance and consulting activities
designed to evaluate and improve the effectiveness of the entity’s governance, risk management and
internal control processes (ISA (UK) 610.14).
Internal control: A process designed, implemented and maintained by those charged with
governance, management, and other personnel to provide reasonable assurance about the
achievement of the entity’s objectives with regard to reliability of financial reporting, effectiveness
and efficiency of operations and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. It follows that
internal control is designed and implemented to address identified business risks that threaten the
achievement of any of these objectives.
Investment property: Property (land or a building – or part of a building – or both) held (by the owner
or by the entity as a right-of-use asset) to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both, rather than
for:
• use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative purposes; or
• sale in the ordinary course of business.
Investment risk: This is the risk that, due to poor investment performance, there will be insufficient
funds in the plan to meet the expected benefits.
Joint arrangement: An arrangement of which two or more parties have joint control.
Joint control: The contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when
decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control.
Joint operation: A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the assets and obligations for the liabilities relating to the arrangement.
Joint venture: A joint arrangement whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement
have rights to the net assets of the arrangement. (IFRS 11, Appendix A)
Key audit matters (KAMs): Those matters, that in the auditor’s professional judgment, were of most
significance in the audit of the financial statements of the current period. KAMs are selected from
matters communicated with those charged with governance. In the UK, these include the most
significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the
auditor, including those that had the greatest effect on:
• the overall audit strategy;
• the allocation of resources in the audit; and
• directing the efforts of the engagement team.
Lease: A contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the underlying asset)
for a period of time, in exchange for consideration.
Lease payments: Payments made by a lessee to a lessor in order to use an underlying asset during
the lease term, less any lease incentives.
IFRS 16 requires lease payments to also include the exercise price of a purchase option if the lessee
is reasonably certain to exercise that option, and any penalty payments for terminating the lease.
Lifetime expected credit losses: Those that result from all possible default events over the expected
life of a financial instrument.
Loan: A sum of money lent for a time to be returned in money or money’s worth.
Losses: Decreases in economic benefits. As such, they are no different in nature from other expenses.
Management commentary: A narrative report that provides a context within which to interpret the
financial position, financial performance and cash flows of an entity. It also provides management
with an opportunity to explain its objectives and its strategies for achieving those objectives. (IFRS
Practice Statement)
Measurement: Elements recognised in the financial statements are quantified in monetary terms.
This requires the selection of a measurement basis. (Conceptual Framework: para. 6.1)
This involves the selection of a particular basis of measurement. A number of these are used to
different degrees and in varying combinations in financial statements. They include the following.
Measuring units current at the reporting date: This is a unit of local currency with a purchasing
power as at the reporting date, in terms of a general prices index.
Misstatement of the other information: This exists when the other information is incorrectly stated or
otherwise misleading (including because it omits or obscures information necessary for a proper
understanding of a matter disclosed in the other information).
Monetary items: Units of currency held and assets and liabilities to be received or paid in a fixed or
determinable number of units of currency.
Natural capital: This is defined by the NCC in terms of forests, rivers, mountains, minerals, fish
populations and even oceans.
Net investment in a foreign operation: The amount of the reporting entity’s interest in the net assets
of that operation.
Net investment in the lease: The gross investment in the lease discounted at the interest rate implicit
in the lease.
Objectivity: Acting and making decisions and judgments impartially, fairly and on merit (having
regard to all considerations relevant to the task in hand but no other), without discrimination, bias, or
compromise because of commercial or personal self-interest, conflicts of interest or the undue
influence of others, and having given due consideration to the best available evidence.
Obligation: A duty or responsibility that the entity has no practical ability to avoid (para.4.29)
A present obligation exists as a result of past events if the entity has already obtained economic
benefits or taken an action, and as a consequence, the entity will or may have to transfer an
economic resource that it would not otherwise have had to transfer (para.4.43)
Operating lease: A lease that does not transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to
ownership of an underlying asset.
Operational audits: Audits of the operational processes of the organisation. They are also known as
management and efficiency audits. Their prime objective is the monitoring of management’s
performance, ensuring company policy is adhered to.
Options and warrants: Financial instruments that give the holder the right to purchase ordinary
shares.
Other entity of public interest (OEPI): An entity which does not meet the definition of a Public
Interest Entity, but nevertheless is of significant public interest to stakeholders (these are not
straightforward to define but include insurance syndicates, pension schemes and smaller AIM listed
entities)
Other information: Financial and non-financial information (other than financial statements and the
auditor’s report) included in an entity’s annual report (such as summaries of key financial results,
explanations of critical accounting estimates and financial measures or ratios).
Other long-term employee benefits: Employee benefits (other than post-retirement benefit plans
and termination benefits) which do not fall due wholly within 12 months after the end of the period in
which the employees render the service.
Other matter paragraph: A paragraph included in the auditor’s report that refers to a matter other
than those presented or disclosed in the financial statements that, in the auditor’s judgement, is
relevant to users’ understanding of the audit, the auditor’s responsibilities or the auditor’s report.
(ISA (UK) 706.7b)
Pervasive effects: Pervasive effects on the financial statements are those that, in the auditor’s
judgement:
• are not confined to specific elements, accounts or items of the financial statements;
• if so confined, represent or could represent a substantial proportion of the financial statements; or
• in relation to disclosures, are fundamental to users’ understanding of the financial statements.
(ISA (UK) 705.5)
Plan assets: Those assets held by a long-term benefit fund and those insurance policies which are
held by an entity, where the fund/entity is legally separate from the employer and assets/policies can
only be used to fund employee benefits.
Post-employment benefits: Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) which are payable
after the completion of employment. The benefit plans may have been set up under formal or
informal arrangements.
Potential to produce economic benefit: An economic resource is a right that has the potential to
produce economic benefits. (Conceptual Framework, para.4.14)
Presentation currency: The currency in which the financial statements are presented.
Professional scepticism: An attitude that includes a questioning mind, being alert to conditions
which may indicate possible misstatement due to error or fraud, and a critical assessment of audit
evidence.
Profits available for distribution: Accumulated realised profits (which have not been distributed or
capitalised) less accumulated realised losses (which have not been previously written off in a
reduction or reorganisation of capital).
Provision: A liability where there is uncertainty over its timing or the amount at which it will be
settled.
Qualifying asset: An asset that necessarily takes a substantial period of time to get ready for its
intended use or sale.
Quasi-loan: The company agrees to pay a third party on behalf of the director, who later reimburses
the company (eg, personal goods bought with company credit card).
Rate regulation: A framework for establishing the prices that can be charged to customers for goods
and services and that framework is subject to oversight and/or approval by a rate regulator.
Rate regulator: An authorised body that is empowered by statute or regulation to establish the rate
or range of rates that bind an entity.
Reasonable and informed third party: Consideration of whether the ethical outcomes required by
the overarching principles and supporting ethical provisions have been met should be evaluated by
reference to the perspective of an objective, reasonable and informed third party (sometimes
referred to as the ‘Third Party Test’) (FRC Ethical Standard, Introduction section I14).
Recalculation: Consists of checking the arithmetical accuracy of source documents and accounting
records.
Regulatory deferral account balance: The balance of any expense (or income) account that would
not be recognised as an asset or a liability in accordance with other Standards, but that qualifies for
deferral because it is included, or is expected to be included, by the rate regulator in establishing the
rate(s) that can be charged to customers.
Related party transaction: A transfer of resources, services or obligations between related parties,
regardless of whether a price is charged.
Reperformance: Means the auditor’s independent execution of procedures or controls that were
originally performed as part of the entity’s internal control.
Reporting entity: An entity that is required, or chooses, to prepare financial statements. A reporting
entity can be a single entity or a portion of an entity or can comprise more than one entity. A
reporting entity is not necessarily a legal entity (para. 3.10).
Retirement benefit plans: Arrangements whereby an entity provides benefits for its employees on or
after termination of service (either in the form of an annual income or as a lump sum), when such
benefits, or the employer’s contributions towards them, can be determined or estimated in advance
of retirement from the provisions of a document or from the entity’s practices.
Return on plan assets: Defined as interest, dividends and other revenue derived from plan assets
together with realised and unrealised gains or losses on the plan assets, less any costs of
administering the plan and less any tax payable by the plan itself.
Right-of-use asset: An asset that represents a lessee’s right to use an underlying asset for the lease
term.
Short-term compensated absences: Compensated absences are periods of absence from work for
which the employee receives some form of payment and which are expected to occur within 12
months of the end of the period in which the employee renders the services.
Short-term employee benefits: Employee benefits (other than termination benefits) that fall due
within 12 months from the end of the period in which the employees provide their services.
Significant component: A component identified by the group engagement team: (a) that is of
individual significance to the group, or (b) that, due to its specific nature or circumstances, is likely to
include significant risks of material misstatement of the group financial statements.
(ISA 600.9)
Significant deficiency in internal control: Those which in the auditor’s professional judgement are of
sufficient importance to merit the attention of those charged with governance.
Statutory other information: In the UK this includes the directors’ report, the strategic report and the
separate corporate governance statement, all of which is relevant here.
Structured entity: An entity that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the
dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, such as when any voting rights relate to
administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual
arrangements.
(IFRS 12, Appendix A)
Tax base: The amount attributed to an asset or liability for tax purposes.
Taxable temporary differences: Temporary differences that will result in taxable amounts in
determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount of the asset or
liability is recovered or settled.
Those charged with governance: The person(s) or organisation(s) (for example, a corporate trustee)
with responsibility for overseeing the strategic direction of the entity and obligations related to the
accountability of the entity. This includes overseeing the financial reporting process. For some
entities in some jurisdictions, those charged with governance may include management personnel,
for example, executive members of a governance board of a private or public sector entity, or an
owner-manager.
In the UK, those charged with governance include executive and non-executive directors and the
members of the audit committee.
Transnational audit: An audit of financial statements which are or may be relied upon outside the
audited entity’s home jurisdiction for purposes of significant lending, investment or regulatory
decisions; this will include audits of all financial statements of companies with listed equity or debt
and other public interest entities which attract particular public attention because of their size,
products or services provided.
True: The information in the financial statements is not false and conforms to reality.
Underlying asset: An asset that is the subject of a lease, for which the right to use that asset has been
provided by a lessor to a lessee.
Unguaranteed residual value: That portion of the residual value of the underlying asset, the
realisation of which by the lessor is not assured or is guaranteed solely by a party related to the
lessor.
User auditor: An auditor who audits and reports on the financial statements of a user entity.
Value in use: The present value of the cash flows, or other economic benefits, that an entity expects
to derive from the use of an asset and its ultimate disposal (Conceptual Framework, para.6.17).
Vesting conditions: The conditions that must be satisfied for the other party to become entitled to
receive the share-based payment.
Vesting date: The date on which all vesting conditions have been met and the employee/third party
becomes entitled to the share-based payment.
Vesting period: The period during which the vesting conditions are to be satisfied.
Corporate scandals, 155 Diluted earnings per share, 572, 586, 588, 591
Process-based audit approach, 1564 Recover or settle the carrying amount, 1249
Professional scepticism, 13, 160, 206, 298, 309 Regular way purchase or sale, 808
Profit sharing and bonus plans, 933 Related party transaction, 476
Provisions available for small entities, 133 Reporting deficiencies in internal control, 187
U
UK Corporate Governance Code, 160, 180, 213,
402, 406, 430, 1552
UK regulatory framework, 51, 68
UN Sustainable Development Goals, 1521
Uncorrected misstatements, 397
Underlying asset, 702
Understanding the entity, 208
Undistributable reserves, 1010
Unearned finance income, 722
Unguaranteed residual value, 722
Unqualified opinion. Material uncertainty that
may cast significant doubt about the company’s
ability to continue as a going concern, 437
Unvested options, 592
User auditor, 361
Users of financial statements, 9
V
Value for money (VFM), 1560
Value in use, 60, 287
Variable consideration, 527
Vested options, 592
Vesting conditions, 987
Vesting date, 987
Vesting period, 987
Volkswagen, 157
VW, 157